0% found this document useful (0 votes)

49 views1,680 pages

Acmac Acr

Uploaded by

Jon Semedo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

49 views1,680 pages

Acmac Acr

Uploaded by

Jon Semedo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1680

AutoCAD 2011 for Mac

Command Reference

September 2010

2010 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, Lustre, MatchMover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow Plastics Insight, MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, Navisworks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual LISP, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Published by: Autodesk, Inc. 111 McInnis Parkway San Rafael, CA 94903, USA

Contents

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 3D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3DALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3DARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3DCONFIG (-3DCONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3DDISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3DEDITBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3D Edit Bar Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3DFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3DFORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3DMESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3DMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 3D Move Gizmo Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3DORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3D Orbit Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3DORBITCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3DOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 -3DOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3DPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

iii

3DROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Rotate Gizmo Shortcut Menu . 3DSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Scale Gizmo Shortcut Menu . . 3DSWIVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3DZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 46 . 48 . 49 . 51 . 52 . 53

Chapter 2

A Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 ACISIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 ACISOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 ADDSELECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 AMECONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 ANALYSISCURVATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 ANALYSISDRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 ANALYSISOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Analysis Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 ANALYSISZEBRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ANNORESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 ANNOUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 APPLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Startup Suite Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 - A R R AY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1 ARX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 ATTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 -ATTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 ATTDISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Edit Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 -ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ATTEXT (-ATTEXT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 ATTIPEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ATTREDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ATTSYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 AUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 AUTOCONSTRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

iv | Contents

Chapter 3

B Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 BATTMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Block Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Attribute Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 BATTORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Attribute Order Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 BCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 BEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Edit Block Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Block Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 -BEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 BHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 BLIPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Define Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 -BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 BMPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Boundary Creation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 -BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 BREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 B S AV E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 7 BSAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Save Block As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Chapter 4

C Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understand Syntax of Expressions . . . . . Format Feet and Inches . . . . . . . . . . . Format Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Points and Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . Use AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . . . . Use System Variables in Calculations . . . . Convert Units of Measurement . . . . . . . Use Standard Numeric Functions . . . . . . Calculate a Vector from Two Points . . . . . Calculate the Length of a Vector . . . . . . Obtain a Point by Cursor . . . . . . . . . . Obtain the Last-Specified Point . . . . . . . Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions . Convert Points Between UCS and WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 . 152 . 153 . 154 . 155 . 156 . 157 . 158 . 158 . 160 . 161 . 161 . 162 . 162 . 164

Contents | v

Calculate a Point on a Line . . . . . . Rotate a Point About an Axis . . . . . Obtain an Intersection Point . . . . . Calculate a Distance . . . . . . . . . . Obtain a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtain an Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculate a Normal Vector . . . . . . . Use Shortcut Functions . . . . . . . . CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAMFEREDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEANSCREENON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEANSCREENOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSEALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Palette Dialog Box . . . . . . . . -COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMANDLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMANDLINEHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONSTRAINTBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONSTRAINTSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Settings Dialog Box . . . . +CONSTRAINTSETTINGS . . . . . . . CONTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Content Libraries Dialog Box . CONTENTCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTOMESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTONURBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTOSOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTOSURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . Specify Tool Set Image Dialog Box . . . CUTCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CVADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 165 . 165 . 166 . 167 . 168 . 169 . 170 . 172 . 173 . 177 . 178 . 181 . 182 . 185 . 186 . 187 . 187 . 188 . 188 . 195 . 196 . 197 . 197 . 198 . 201 . 202 . 203 . 205 . 206 . 207 . 209 . 210 . 211 . 212 . 213 . 214 . 216 . 220 . 221 . 222 . 222 . 223 . 223 . 231 . 231 . 232

vi | Contents

CVHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CVREBUILD . . . . . . . . . . . . Rebuild Surface Dialog Box . Rebuild Curve Dialog Box . . CVREMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . CVSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 233 . 234 . 235 . 237 . 238 . 239 . 240

Chapter 5

D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
DBLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCCONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCHORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCVERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box . DDPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DELCONSTRAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIM and DIM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMBASELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMCONSTRAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMCONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMDISASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMHORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMINSPECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Dimension Dialog Box . . . -DIMINSPECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMJOGGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMJOGLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 . 243 . 245 . 247 . 248 . 249 . 250 . 251 . 252 . 253 . 254 . 256 . 257 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260 . 261 . 263 . 266 . 269 . 271 . 273 . 275 . 276 . 278 . 280 . 281 . 282 . 284 . 286 . 287 . 289 . 289 . 291 . 292 . 296

Contents | vii

DIMOVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 DIMRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 DIMREASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 DIMREGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 DIMROTATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 DIMSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Dimension Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes . . . . 311 Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 -DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 DIMVERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 DISTANTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 DONUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 DRAWORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 DSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Drafting Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Dimension Input Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 DVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 DXBIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Chapter 6

E Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
EATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Attribute Editor . EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDGESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . ELEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPORTTOAUTOCAD . . . . . . EXTEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNALREFERENCES . . . . . Reference Manager Palette . EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE . EXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 . 390 . 394 . 396 . 397 . 399 . 402 . 403 . 405 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 412 . 419 . 420

viii | Contents

Chapter 7

F Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FILLETEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND . FLATSHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flatshot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . FREESPOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FREEWEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 . 426 . 428 . 429 . 433 . 434 . 435 . 438 . 439 . 442 . 445

Chapter 8

G Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
GCCOINCIDENT . . . GCCOLLINEAR . . . . GCCONCENTRIC . . GCEQUAL . . . . . . GCFIX . . . . . . . . GCHORIZONTAL . . GCPARALLEL . . . . . GCPERPENDICULAR . GCSMOOTH . . . . . GCSYMMETRIC . . . GCTANGENT . . . . . GCVERTICAL . . . . GEOMCONSTRAINT . GRADIENT . . . . . . GRID . . . . . . . . . GROUP (-GROUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 . 451 . 452 . 453 . 454 . 455 . 457 . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 463 . 464 . 466 . 466 . 468

Chapter 9

H Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box . . Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box . -HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . -HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY . . . . . HATCHSETBOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . HATCHSETORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHTOBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . HELIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 . 472 . 485 . 486 . 493 . 493 . 494 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 498 . 499

Contents | ix

HELP . . . . . . HIDE . . . . . . HIDEOBJECTS . HIDEPALETTES .

. . . .

. 501 . 502 . 503 . 504

Chapter 10

I Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMAGEADJUST (-IMAGEADJUST) . . . . IMAGEATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach Image Dialog Box . . . . . IMAGECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMAGEQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMPRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . -INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERFERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference Settings Dialog Box . . Interference Checking Dialog Box . -INTERFERE . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISOLATEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . ISOPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 . 506 . 506 . 509 . 510 . 510 . 513 . 514 . 515 . 515 . 517 . 517 . 520 . 523 . 525 . 526 . 528 . 529 . 530 . 531

Chapter 11

J Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
JOIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 JPGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Chapter 12

L Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Layers Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 Select Linetype Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 -LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 LAYERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 LAYERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 LAYERPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 LAYFRZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 LAYISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 LAYLCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 LAYMCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Change to Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

x | Contents

LAYMCUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 LAYOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 LAYULK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 LAYUNISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 LEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 LENGTHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Linetype Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 -LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 LIVESECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 LOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 Loft Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 LOGFILEOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 LOGFILEON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 Lineweight Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 -LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

Chapter 13

M Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
MASSPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATBROWSERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . MATBROWSEROPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Browser . . . . . . . . . . . MATCHCELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATCHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Match Properties Settings Dialog Box . MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATERIALSCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEASUREGEOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESHCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESHCOLLAPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESHCREASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESHEXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESHMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESHREFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESHSMOOTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 . 595 . 596 . 596 . 600 . 600 . 601 . 604 . 605 . 605 . 608 . 612 . 627 . 628 . 629 . 631 . 634 . 635 . 636

Contents | xi

MESHSMOOTHLESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 MESHSMOOTHMORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 MESHSPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 MESHSPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 MESHUNCREASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 MINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 MIRROR3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 MLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 MLEADERALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 MLEADERCOLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 MLEADEREDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 MLEADERSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Multileader Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Create New Multileader Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 MREDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 MSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 MTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 In-Place Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Text Editor Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 Paragraph Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 Columns Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 Column Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684 Background Mask Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686 Stack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 AutoStack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 -MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 Symbols and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 MVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 MVSETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 MVSETUP on the Model Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 MVSETUP on a Named Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704

Chapter 14

N Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
NAVVCUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ViewCube Settings Dialog Box . NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEW Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 . 710 . 712 . 712

xii | Contents

Chapter 15

O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Object Scale List Dialog Box . Add Scales to Object Dialog Box . . . . . . -OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes . . . OPEN Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Preferences Dialog Box . . . . Select Alternate Font Dialog Box . . . . . Default Scale List Dialog Box . . . . . . . ORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 . 716 . 717 . 718 . 719 . 722 . 722 . 723 . 726 . 727 . 727 . 742 . 743 . 744 . 745

Chapter 16

P Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
PAGESETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747 Page Setup Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748 New Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Import Page Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 Page Setup - Advanced Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 PALETTEICONON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 PALETTEICONOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 Panning in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764 -PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Pan Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 PARAMETERS (-PARAMETERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 PASTECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 PEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 Multiple Selection (PEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 3D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 3D Polygon Mesh Selection (PEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 PFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 PLANESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786 PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 Print Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 -PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

Contents | xiii

Plot Stamp Settings Dialog Box . . . Add User Defined Fields Dialog Box . -PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . PNGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POINTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POLYSOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESSPULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROJECTGEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties Inspector Palette . . . . . General Properties of Objects . . . . Cell Border Properties Dialog Box . . Lighting Properties . . . . . . . . . . Sun & Sky Properties . . . . . . . . . PROPERTIESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PYRAMID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 803 . 808 . 809 . 811 . 812 . 812 . 813 . 815 . 819 . 822 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 829 . 830 . 832 . 833 . 836 . 840 . 842 . 843 . 843 . 844 . 845 . 845 . 846

Chapter 17

Q Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
QDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leader Settings Dialog Box . QNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICKVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . QuickView Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 . 850 . 852 . 856 . 856 . 857 . 858 . 858 . 859

Chapter 18

R Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
RAY . . . . RECOVER . RECTANG REDEFINE REDO . . . REDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 . 864 . 865 . 867 . 867 . 868

xiv | Contents

REDRAWALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REGENALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REGENAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REGION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Dialog Box . . . . . . . . -RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Render Window . . . . . . . . . . Render Output File Dialog Box . . -RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RENDERENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . Render Environment Dialog Box . RENDEROUTPUTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . Output Size Dialog Box . . . . . . -RENDEROUTPUTSIZE . . . . . . . RENDERWIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESETBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESETPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REVCLOUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REVSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROTATE3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RULESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 868 . 869 . 870 . 870 . 871 . 873 . 873 . 874 . 875 . 876 . 877 . 883 . 886 . 886 . 888 . 888 . 889 . 890 . 890 . 891 . 891 . 892 . 894 . 894 . 898 . 901 . 902 . 905 . 906

Chapter 19

S Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Template Options . . . . . . . . SAVEAS Command Prompts . . . SAVEIMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCALELISTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Drawing Scales Dialog Box . -SCALELISTEDIT . . . . . . . . . SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTIONPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTIONPLANEJOG . . . . . . . . . . SECTIONPLANESETTINGS . . . . . . . Section Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909 . 910 . 910 . 911 . 911 . 912 . 913 . 914 . 916 . 916 . 917 . 920 . 923 . 924 . 925

Contents | xv

New Layer Name Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929 SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931 Generate Section /Elevation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932 SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 SELECTSIMILAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938 Select Similar Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 -SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942 SHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942 SHOWPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943 SKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944 SLICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951 SOLDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953 SOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955 SOLIDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 SOLPROF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973 SOLVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 SPELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Check Spelling Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 SPHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986 SPLINEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 SPOTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 STLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 Create STL File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005 Text Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 -STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009 SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 SURFBLEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013 SURFEXTEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 SURFFILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015 SURFNETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 SURFOFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019 SURFPATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 SURFSCULPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 SURFTRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 SURFUNTRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028

Chapter 20

T Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031

xvi | Contents

TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031 -TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 TABLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 TABLEEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 TABSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035 TARGETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036 TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040 Text Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044 Special Unicode Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 Control Codes and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047 TEXTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047 TEXTTOFRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048 THICKEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 TIFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050 TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050 TINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052 Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052 TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055 Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058 Material Condition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060 TOOLSETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060 TOOLSETSCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 TORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063 TRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 TREESTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

Chapter 21

U Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071 UCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079 UCS Icon Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 UCSMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082 UCS Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083 Orthographic UCS Depth Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 UCS Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089 UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090 UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093 UNISOLATEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095 UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096 Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096 -UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Contents | xvii

UPDATEFIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPDATETHUMBSNOW . . . . . . . . . . . UPLOADTOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upload to AutoCAD WS Dialog Box .

. . . .

. 1101 . 1101 . 1102 . 1103

Chapter 22

V Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
VEDITFROMWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105 VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106 -VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106 VIEWPLOTDETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108 Print Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108 VIEWRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 VISUALSTYLES (-VISUALSTYLES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111 VPCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111 VPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 VPMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115 VPMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115 VPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116 VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118 Viewports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118 -VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121 VSCURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126 VSSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127

Chapter 23

W Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
WBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . Write Block Dialog Box . -WBLOCK . . . . . . . . WEBLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . WEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . WHOHAS . . . . . . . . . . . WIPEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129 . 1130 . 1132 . 1133 . 1136 . 1139 . 1139

Chapter 24

X Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
XATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141 Attach External Reference Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142 XBIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144 Bind External Definitions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 -XBIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147 XCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148 XEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149 XLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151 XOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153 XPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153

xviii | Contents

XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155 -XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155

Chapter 25

Z Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159
ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159 Zoom Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

Chapter 26

Command Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165

Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) . . . Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) . FROM (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . MTP (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . . TRACKING (Command Modifier) . . . . . . Object Snaps (Command Modifier) . . . . . Selection Modes (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165 . 1166 . 1166 . 1167 . 1167 . 1168 . 1169

System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171

Chapter 27 3D System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
3DOSMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173 3DSELECTIONMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174

Chapter 28

A System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175

ACADLSPASDOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175 ACADPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175 ACADVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176 ACISOUTVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176 AFLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177 ANGBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177 ANGDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178 ANNOALLVISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178 ANNOAUTOSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179 ANNOTATIVEDWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 APBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181 AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181 ATTDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182 ATTIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182 ATTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183 ATTMULTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183 ATTREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184 AUDITCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184 AUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

Contents | xix

AUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186 AUTOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186

Chapter 29

B System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189

BACKZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 BINDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 BLIPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 BLOCKEDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 BTMARKDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191

Chapter 30

C System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193

CAMERADISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193 CANNOSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194 CANNOSCALEVALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194 CCONSTRAINTFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194 CDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195 CECOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195 CELTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196 CELTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197 CELWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197 CENTERMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198 CETRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198 CHAMFERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199 CHAMFERB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199 CHAMFERC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200 CHAMFERD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200 CHAMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200 CIRCLERAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201 CLASSICKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201 CLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 CLEANSCREENSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 CLISTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 CMATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 CMDACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204 CMDDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205 CMDECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205 CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206 CMDNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206 CMLEADERSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 CMLJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 CMLSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208 CMLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208 COLORSCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208 COMPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209 CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209

xx | Contents

CONSTRAINTBARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210 CONSTRAINTINFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211 CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212 CONSTRAINTRELAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212 CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213 CONTENTSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213 COPYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214 CPLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214 CPROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215 CROSSINGAREACOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215 CSHADOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 CTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 CTABLESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217 CULLINGOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217 CULLINGOBJSELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 CURSORSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 CVPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219

Chapter 31

D System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221

DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221 DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222 DBMOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222 DEFAULTGIZMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223 DEFAULTLIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226 DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227 DEFLPLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227 DEFPLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228 DELOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228 DEMANDLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 DIASTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 DIMADEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231 DIMALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232 DIMALTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232 DIMALTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233 DIMALTRND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233 DIMALTTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233 DIMALTTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234 DIMALTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235 DIMALTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235 DIMANNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236 DIMAPOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 DIMARCSYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 DIMASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 DIMASZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239 DIMATFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239 DIMAUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240

Contents | xxi

DIMAZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240 DIMBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241 DIMBLK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243 DIMBLK2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243 DIMCEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244 DIMCLRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244 DIMCLRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245 DIMCLRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245 DIMCONSTRAINTICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246 DIMDEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246 DIMDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247 DIMDLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247 DIMDSEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248 DIMEXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248 DIMEXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249 DIMFRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249 DIMFXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250 DIMFXLON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250 DIMGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250 DIMJOGANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251 DIMJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252 DIMLDRBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252 DIMLFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253 DIMLIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253 DIMLTEX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254 DIMLTEX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254 DIMLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255 DIMLUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255 DIMLWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256 DIMLWE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256 DIMPOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257 DIMRND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257 DIMSAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258 DIMSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258 DIMSD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259 DIMSD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260 DIMSE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260 DIMSE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261 DIMSOXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261 DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262 DIMTAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262 DIMTDEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263 DIMTFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263 DIMTFILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264 DIMTFILLCLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264 DIMTIH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265

xxii | Contents

DIMTIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 DIMTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266 DIMTMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266 DIMTOFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267 DIMTOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267 DIMTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268 DIMTOLJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268 DIMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269 DIMTSZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269 DIMTVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270 DIMTXSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270 DIMTXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271 DIMTXTDIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271 DIMTZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272 DIMUPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272 DIMZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273 DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274 DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274 DISPSILH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275 DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275 DIVMESHBOXHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276 DIVMESHBOXLENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277 DIVMESHBOXWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277 DIVMESHCONEAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278 DIVMESHCONEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279 DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280 DIVMESHCYLAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281 DIVMESHCYLBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283 DIVMESHPYRBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284 DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285 DIVMESHPYRLENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287 DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 DIVMESHTORUSPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289 DIVMESHTORUSSECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290 DIVMESHWEDGEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290 DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291 DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292 DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293 DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294 DONUTID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295 DONUTOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295 DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296 DRAGP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 DRAGP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297

Contents | xxiii

DRAGVS . . . . . . . . . . . DRAWORDERCTL . . . . . DTEXTED . . . . . . . . . . DWGCHECK . . . . . . . . DWGCODEPAGE . . . . . . DWGNAME . . . . . . . . . DWGPREFIX . . . . . . . . DWGTITLED . . . . . . . . DYNCONSTRAINTMODE . DYNDIGRIP . . . . . . . . . DYNDIVIS . . . . . . . . . . DYNMODE . . . . . . . . . DYNPICOORDS . . . . . . . DYNPIFORMAT . . . . . . . DYNPIVIS . . . . . . . . . . DYNPROMPT . . . . . . . . DYNTOOLTIPS . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1297 . 1298 . 1299 . 1299 . 1300 . 1301 . 1301 . 1302 . 1302 . 1303 . 1304 . 1304 . 1305 . 1306 . 1306 . 1307 . 1307

Chapter 32

E System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309

EDGEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 ELEVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 ERHIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 ERRNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 ERSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 EXPERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312 EXPLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 EXTMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 EXTMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314 EXTNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

Chapter 33

F System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317

FACETERDEVNORMAL . . . . . FACETERDEVSURFACE . . . . . FACETERGRIDRATIO . . . . . . FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH . FACETERMAXGRID . . . . . . . FACETERMESHTYPE . . . . . . FACETERMINUGRID . . . . . . FACETERMINVGRID . . . . . . FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE . . . FACETERSMOOTHLEV . . . . . FACETRATIO . . . . . . . . . . FACETRES . . . . . . . . . . . . FIELDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . FIELDEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317 . 1318 . 1318 . 1319 . 1320 . 1320 . 1321 . 1321 . 1322 . 1323 . 1324 . 1324 . 1325 . 1325

xxiv | Contents

FILEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326 FILLETRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327 FILLETRAD3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327 FILLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328 FONTALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328 FONTMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329 FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329 FRONTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330 FULLOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331 FULLPLOTPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331

Chapter 34

G System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333

GFANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 GFCLR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 GFCLR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334 GFCLRLUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 GFCLRSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 GFNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 GFSHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 GRIDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337 GRIDMAJOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338 GRIDMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338 GRIDSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 GRIDUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 GRIPBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340 GRIPCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340 GRIPCONTOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 GRIPHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 GRIPHOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341 GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342 GRIPOBJLIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 GRIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343 GRIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344 GRIPSUBOBJMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344 GRIPTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345 GTAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346 GTDEFAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346 GTLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

Chapter 35

H System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349

HALOGAP . . . . . HANDLES . . . . . HELPPREFIX . . . HIDEPRECISION . HIDETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1349 . 1349 . 1350 . 1350 . 1351

Contents | xxv

HIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . HPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPANNOTATIVE . . . . . . . . HPASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR . . . HPBOUND . . . . . . . . . . . HPBOUNDRETAIN . . . . . . . HPCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . HPDLGMODE . . . . . . . . . . HPDOUBLE . . . . . . . . . . . HPDRAWORDER . . . . . . . . HPGAPTOL . . . . . . . . . . . HPINHERIT . . . . . . . . . . . HPISLANDDETECTION . . . . . HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE . HPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . HPMAXLINES . . . . . . . . . . HPNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . HPOBJWARNING . . . . . . . . HPORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . HPORIGINMODE . . . . . . . . HPQUICKPREVIEW . . . . . . . HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT . . . HPSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . HPSEPARATE . . . . . . . . . . HPSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . HPTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 1351 . 1352 . 1352 . 1353 . 1353 . 1354 . 1354 . 1355 . 1356 . 1356 . 1357 . 1358 . 1358 . 1359 . 1359 . 1360 . 1360 . 1360 . 1361 . 1361 . 1362 . 1362 . 1363 . 1363 . 1364 . 1364 . 1365

Chapter 36

I System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367

IMAGEFRAME . . . . . . IMAGEHLT . . . . . . . . IMPLIEDFACE . . . . . . . INETLOCATION . . . . . INPUTHISTORYMODE . . INSBASE . . . . . . . . . . INSNAME . . . . . . . . . INSUNITS . . . . . . . . . INSUNITSDEFSOURCE . . INSUNITSDEFTARGET . . INTELLIGENTUPDATE . . INTERFERECOLOR . . . . INTERFEREOBJVS . . . . . INTERFEREVPVS . . . . . INTERSECTIONCOLOR . . INTERSECTIONDISPLAY . ISAVEBAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367 . 1368 . 1368 . 1369 . 1369 . 1370 . 1370 . 1371 . 1372 . 1374 . 1375 . 1376 . 1376 . 1377 . 1377 . 1378 . 1378

xxvi | Contents

ISAVEPERCENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379 ISOLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379

Chapter 37

L System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381

LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381 LASTANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381 LASTPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382 LASTPROMPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382 LATITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383 LAYEREVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383 LAYEREVALCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384 LAYERMANAGERSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385 LAYERNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385 LAYLOCKFADECTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386 LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387 LAYOUTREGENCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388 LEGACYCTRLPICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389 LENSLENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390 LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390 LIGHTINGUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391 LIGHTSINBLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391 LIMCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392 LIMMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392 LIMMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393 LINEARBRIGHTNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393 LINEARCONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394 LOCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394 LOCALROOTPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395 LOFTANG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395 LOFTANG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396 LOFTMAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396 LOFTMAG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 LOFTNORMALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 LOFTPARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398 LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 LOGEXPCONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 LOGEXPDAYLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400 LOGEXPMIDTONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400 LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 LOGFILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 LOGFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 LOGFILEPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 LOGINNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 LONGITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404 LUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404

Contents | xxvii

LUPREC . . . LWDEFAULT LWDISPLAY . LWUNITS . .

. . . .

. 1405 . 1405 . 1406 . 1406

Chapter 38

M System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407

MATBROWSERSTATE . . . MAXACTVP . . . . . . . . MAXSORT . . . . . . . . . MBUTTONPAN . . . . . . MEASUREINIT . . . . . . MEASUREMENT . . . . . MENUECHO . . . . . . . MENUNAME . . . . . . . MESHTYPE . . . . . . . . MIRRHATCH . . . . . . . MIRRTEXT . . . . . . . . MLEADERSCALE . . . . . MSLTSCALE . . . . . . . . MTEXTCOLUMN . . . . . MTEXTFIXED . . . . . . . MTJIGSTRING . . . . . . MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407 . 1407 . 1408 . 1408 . 1409 . 1409 . 1410 . 1411 . 1411 . 1412 . 1412 . 1413 . 1413 . 1414 . 1415 . 1415 . 1416

Chapter 39

N System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417

NAVVCUBEDISPLAY . . NAVVCUBELOCATION . NAVVCUBEOPACITY . . NAVVCUBEORIENT . . NAVVCUBESIZE . . . . NOMUTT . . . . . . . . NORTHDIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417 . 1418 . 1418 . 1419 . 1419 . 1420 . 1420

Chapter 40

O System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423

OBJECTISOLATIONMODE . OBSCUREDCOLOR . . . . . OBSCUREDLTYPE . . . . . . OFFSETDIST . . . . . . . . . OFFSETGAPTYPE . . . . . . OPMSTATE . . . . . . . . . ORTHOMODE . . . . . . . OSMODE . . . . . . . . . . OSNAPCOORD . . . . . . . OSNAPNODELEGACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423 . 1424 . 1424 . 1426 . 1426 . 1427 . 1427 . 1428 . 1429 . 1430

xxviii | Contents

OSNAPZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430 OSOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431

Chapter 41

P System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433

PALETTEICONSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433 PAPERUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434 PARAMETERCOPYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434 PDMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436 PDSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436 PEDITACCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437 PELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437 PERIMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438 PERSPECTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438 PERSPECTIVECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439 PFACEVMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439 PICKADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440 PICKAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440 PICKBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 PICKDRAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 PICKFIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 PICKSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443 PLINECONVERTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443 PLINEGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 PLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 PLINEWID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445 PLOTOFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446 PLOTROTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446 PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447 PLQUIET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447 POLARADDANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448 POLARANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449 POLARDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449 POLARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449 POLYSIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450 POPUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451 PREVIEWEFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451 PREVIEWFACEEFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452 PREVIEWFILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452 PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 PROJMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 PROXYGRAPHICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 PROXYNOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 PROXYSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 PROXYWEBSEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456

Contents | xxix

PSLTSCALE . . . PSOLHEIGHT . . PSOLWIDTH . . PSTYLEMODE . . PSTYLEPOLICY . PSVPSCALE . . . PUCSBASE . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 1456 . 1457 . 1458 . 1458 . 1459 . 1459 . 1460

Chapter 42

Q System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461

QTEXTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461

Chapter 43

R System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463

RASTERDPI . . . . . . . . RASTERPERCENT . . . . . RASTERPREVIEW . . . . . RASTERTHRESHOLD . . . REBUILD2DCV . . . . . . REBUILD2DDEGREE . . . REBUILD2DOPTION . . . REBUILDDEGREEU . . . . REBUILDDEGREEV . . . . REBUILDOPTIONS . . . . REBUILDU . . . . . . . . REBUILDV . . . . . . . . RECOVERAUTO . . . . . REGENMODE . . . . . . . REMEMBERFOLDERS . . . RENDERUSERLIGHTS . . . REPORTERROR . . . . . . ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX . RTDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 . 1463 . 1464 . 1464 . 1465 . 1465 . 1466 . 1467 . 1467 . 1468 . 1468 . 1469 . 1469 . 1470 . 1471 . 1471 . 1472 . 1473 . 1473

Chapter 44

S System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475

SAVEFIDELITY . . . . . . . SAVEFILE . . . . . . . . . . SAVEFILEPATH . . . . . . . SAVENAME . . . . . . . . . SAVETIME . . . . . . . . . . SCREENSIZE . . . . . . . . . SELECTIONANNODISPLAY . SELECTIONAREA . . . . . . SELECTIONAREAOPACITY . SELECTIONCYCLING . . . SELECTIONPREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475 . 1476 . 1476 . 1476 . 1477 . 1477 . 1478 . 1478 . 1479 . 1479 . 1480

xxx | Contents

SELECTSIMILARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481 SHADEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482 SHADEDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482 SHADOWPLANELOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483 SHORTCUTMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483 SHORTCUTMENUDURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484 SHOWHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484 SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485 SHOWPALETTESTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486 SHPNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486 SKETCHINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487 SKPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487 SKTOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488 SKYSTATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488 SMOOTHMESHCONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489 SMOOTHMESHGRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489 SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490 SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491 SNAPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491 SNAPBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492 SNAPISOPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492 SNAPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493 SNAPSTYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493 SNAPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494 SNAPUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494 SOLIDCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495 SOLIDHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495 SORTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496 SPACEPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496 SPACEPANTIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497 SPLDEGREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497 SPLFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498 SPLINESEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499 SPLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499 SPLKNOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 SPLMETHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 SPLPERIODIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501 STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1501 STATUSBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502 SUNSTATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506 SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507 SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507 SURFACEAUTOTRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508 SURFACEMODELINGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509 SURFTAB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509

Contents | xxxi

SURFTAB2 . . . SURFTYPE . . . SURFU . . . . . SURFV . . . . . SYSCODEPAGE

. . . . .

. 1510 . 1510 . 1511 . 1511 . 1512

Chapter 45

T System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513

TABLEINDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513 TARGET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513 TBEXTENDAFTERSECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514 TBSHOWSHORTCUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514 TDCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514 TDINDWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515 TDUCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515 TDUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516 TDUSRTIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516 TDUUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516 TEMPOVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517 TEMPPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517 TEXTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 TEXTEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 TEXTFILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519 TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519 TEXTQLTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520 TEXTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 TEXTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 TILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 TOOLSETSSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526 TOOLTIPMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527 TOOLTIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527 TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528 TRACEWID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528 TRACKPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528 TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529 TREEDEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1530 TREEMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1530 TRIMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531 TSPACEFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532 TSPACETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532 TSTACKALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533 TSTACKSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1533

Chapter 46

U System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535

xxxii | Contents

UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535 UCS3DPARADISPLAYSETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535 UCS3DPERPDISPLAYSETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536 UCSAXISANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537 UCSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537 UCSDETECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538 UCSFOLLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538 UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539 UCSNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540 UCSORG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540 UCSORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541 UCSVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541 UCSVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542 UCSXDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542 UCSYDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543 UNDOCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543 UNDOMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544 UNITMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544 UPDATETHUMBNAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545 USERI1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546 USERR1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546 USERS1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546

Chapter 47

V System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549

VIEWCTR . . . . . . . . . . . VIEWDIR . . . . . . . . . . . VIEWMODE . . . . . . . . . . VIEWSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . VIEWTWIST . . . . . . . . . . VISRETAIN . . . . . . . . . . VPCONTROL . . . . . . . . . VPCOORDDISPLAY . . . . . . VPLAYEROVERRIDES . . . . . VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE . VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE . . . . VPROTATEASSOC . . . . . . . VSACURVATUREHIGH . . . . VSACURVATURELOW . . . . VSACURVATURETYPE . . . . VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH . . . VSADRAFTANGLELOW . . . . VSAZEBRACOLOR1 . . . . . . VSAZEBRACOLOR2 . . . . . . VSAZEBRADIRECTION . . . . VSAZEBRASIZE . . . . . . . . VSAZEBRATYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549 . 1549 . 1550 . 1551 . 1551 . 1551 . 1552 . 1553 . 1553 . 1554 . 1554 . 1555 . 1555 . 1556 . 1556 . 1557 . 1557 . 1558 . 1559 . 1559 . 1560 . 1560

Contents | xxxiii

VSEDGECOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561 VSEDGEJITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561 VSEDGELEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563 VSEDGEOVERHANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563 VSEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1564 VSEDGESMOOTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566 VSFACECOLORMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566 VSFACEHIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567 VSFACEOPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1568 VSFACESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 VSHALOGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 VSHIDEPRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570 VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570 VSINTERSECTIONEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1571 VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572 VSISOONTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573 VSLIGHTINGQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573 VSMATERIALMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574 VSMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575 VSMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1575 VSMONOCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 VSOBSCUREDCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576 VSOBSCUREDEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577 VSOBSCUREDLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577 VSOCCLUDEDCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1579 VSOCCLUDEDEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580 VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580 VSSHADOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582 VSSILHEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583 VSSILHWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585

Chapter 48

W System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587

WINDOWAREACOLOR . WORLDUCS . . . . . . WORLDVIEW . . . . . . WRITESTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587 . 1587 . 1588 . 1588

Chapter 49

X System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591

XCLIPFRAME . . . XDWGFADECTL . XLOADCTL . . . . XLOADPATH . . . XREFCTL . . . . . XREFTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591 . 1592 . 1592 . 1593 . 1594 . 1594

xxxiv | Contents

Chapter 50

Z System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595

ZOOMFACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595 ZOOMWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625

Contents | xxxv

xxxvi

Commands

You can start a command by using one of the following methods:

Click the command name on a menu, status bar, or shortcut menu. Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press Enter or Spacebar.

The acad.pgp file lists the command aliases. In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description is a command access section that lists the specific ways you can start that command.

3D Commands

3D
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Custom Mesh (Legacy)

Creates 3D polyface mesh objects in common geometric shapes that can be hidden, shaded, or rendered.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Box on page 3/Cone on page 6/DIsh on page 8/DOme on page 8/Mesh on page 9/Pyramid on page 10/Sphere on page 11/Torus on page 12/Wedge on page 14]:

Box
Creates a 3D box polyface mesh. Corner of Box Sets the first corner of the box. Length of Box Sets the first corner of the box.

Width
Specifies the width of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box.

Height of Box Specifies the height of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box.

Rotation Angle Rotates the box about the first corner specified. If you enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes. Copy Creates a rotated copy of the box.

4 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box.

Reference Angle:Defines a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle. If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle determines the rotation of the box. New Angle: Specify a point relative to the base point. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates by the angle between the reference angle and the new angle. If you want to align the box with another object, specify two points on the target object to define the new angle of rotation for the box. If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the angular distance entered relative to the first corner of the box.

Cube
Creates a cube using the length for the width and height of the box.

Center Point for Base Radius for Base Radius for Top Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r Rotation Angle Rotates the cube about the first corner of the box. If you enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes. Copy Creates a rotated copy of the cube. Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box.

3D | 5

Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an angle, or press Enter You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle. If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone determines the rotation of the box. Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point relative to the base point. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates the angular distance between the reference angle and the new angle. If you want to align the box with another object, specify two points on the target object to define the new angle of rotation for the box. If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the angular distance entered relative to the first corner point of the box.

Cone
Creates a cone-shaped polygon mesh.

Specify center point for base of cone: Specify a point (1) Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius for Base

Defines the base of the cone by its radius. Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or press Enter

6 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance or press Enter Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter

Diameter for Base

Defines the base of the cone by its diameter. Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or press Enter

Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify height of cone: Specify a distance

3D | 7

Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter

Dish
Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh. Specify center point of dish: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of dish or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the dish by its radius. Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter Defines the dish by its diameter. Specify diameter of dish: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter

Dome
Creates the upper half of a spherical polygon mesh. Specify center point of dome: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of dome or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the dome by its radius.

8 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter Defines the dome by its diameter. Specify diameter of dome: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter

Mesh
Creates a planar mesh whose M and N sizes determine the number of lines drawn in each direction along the mesh. The M and N directions are similar to the X and Y axes of an XY plane. Specify first corner point of mesh: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point of mesh: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point of mesh: Specify a point (3) Specify fourth corner point of mesh: Specify a point (4) Enter mesh size in the M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256 Enter mesh size in the N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256

3D | 9

Pyramid
Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron. Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3) Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a point (4) or enter t

Fourth Corner Point

Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid. Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify a point (5) or enter an option The Z value of the point specified determines the height for the pyramid's apex, top, or ridge line. Apex Point Defines the top of the pyramid as a point (apex). Ridge Defines the top of the pyramid as a ridge line. The two endpoints must lie in the same direction as the base points to prevent a self-intersecting wireframe. Specify first ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (1) Specify second ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (2)

10 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. If the top points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh. Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point

Tetrahedron
Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh. Specify apex point of tetrahedron or [Top]: Specify a point or enter t Apex Point Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a point (apex). Top Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a triangle. If the top points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh. Specify first corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (3)

Sphere
Creates a spherical polygon mesh. Specify center point of sphere: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

3D | 11

Radius Defines the sphere by its radius. Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter

Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter. Specify diameter of sphere: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter

Torus
Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. Specify center point of torus: Specify a point (1)

12 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d The radius of the torus is measured from its center point to its outside edge, not to the center of the tube.

Radius of Torus
Radius Defines the torus by its radius.

Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Diameter of Torus
Defines the torus by its diameter.

Specify diameter of torus: Specify a distance Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius of Tube
Defines the tube by its radius. Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to the outside edge of the tube.

3D | 13

Diameter of Tube
Defines the tube by its diameter. Specify diameter of tube: Specify a distance Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter

Wedge
Creates a right-angle, wedge-shaped polygon mesh with a sloped face tapering along the X axis. Specify corner point of wedge: Specify a point (1) Specify length of wedge: Specify a distance Specify width of wedge: Specify a distance Specify height of wedge: Specify a distance Specify rotation angle of wedge about the Z axis: Specify an angle The base point for the rotation is the corner point of the wedge. If you enter 0, the wedge remains orthogonal to the current UCS plane. Enter c to create a rotated copy of the wedge.

3DALIGN
Quick Reference
See also:

Align Objects

14 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Copy tool group 3D Align Menu: Modify 3D Operations 3D Align

Summary
You can specify one, two, or three points for the source object. Then, you can specify one, two, or three points for the destination.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Select the objects to align and press Enter Specify source plane and orientation . . . The selected object is moved and rotated so that the base points, and the X and Y axes of the source and destination align in 3D space. 3DALIGN works

3DALIGN | 15

with dynamic UCS (DUCS), so you can dynamically drag the selected objects and align them with the face of a solid object. Specify base point or [Copy]: Specify a point or enter c to create a copy The base point of the source object will be moved to the base point of the destination. Specify second point or [Continue] <C>: Specify a point on the objects X axis, or press Enter to skip forward to specifying destination points The second point specifies a new X axis direction within a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. If you press Enter instead of specifying a second point, the X and Y axes are assumed to be parallel with the X and Y axes of the current UCS. Specify third point or [Continue] <C>: Specify a point on the objects positive XY plane, or press Enter to skip forward to specifying destination points The third point fully specifies the orientation of the X and Y axes of the source object that will be aligned with the destination plane. Specify destination plane and orientation . . . Specify first destination point: Specify a point This point defines the destination of the base point of the source object. Specify second source point or [eXit] <X>: Specify a point for the X axis of the destination or press Enter The second point specifies a new X axis direction for the destination within a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. If you press Enter instead of specifying a second point, the X and Y axes of the destination are assumed to be parallel with the X and Y axes of the current UCS. Specify third destination point or [eXit] <X>: Specify a point for the destinations positive XY plane, or press Enter The third point fully specifies the orientation of the X and Y axes of the destination plane. NOTE If the destination is a plane on an existing solid object, you can define the destination plane with a single point by turning on dynamic UCS.

16 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

3DARRAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Create an Array of Objects

Creates a 3D matrix of objects in a rectangular or polar arrangement.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Copy tool group 3D Array Menu: Modify 3D Operations 3D Array

Summary
For 3D rectangular arrays, in addition to columns and rows, you also specify the number of levels in the Z direction. For 3D polar arrays, you specify the axis of rotation with any two points in space.

3DARRAY | 17

The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter type of array [Rectangular/Polar] <R>: Enter an option or press Enter

Rectangular Array
Copies objects in a matrix of rows (X axis), columns (Y axis), and levels (Z axis). An array must have at least two rows or two columns or two levels. Specifying one row requires that more than one column be specified, and vice versa. Specifying one level creates a two-dimensional array.

18 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Positive values generate the array along the positive X, Y, and Z axes. Negative values generate the array along the negative X, Y, and Z axes.

Polar Array
Copies objects about an axis of rotation. The specified angle determines how far the objects are arrayed about the axis of rotation. A positive number produces a counterclockwise array rotation. A negative number produces a clockwise array rotation. Entering y or pressing Enter rotates each array element.

3DCONFIG (-3DCONFIG)
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Performance

Sets options that affect 3D display performance.

Summary
Enter -3dconfig at the Command prompt to use this command.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter option [Dynamic tessellation/General options/acceLeration/Plot emulation/eXit] <Adaptive degradation>:

Dynamic Tessellation
Sets the options that determine the smoothness of the objects in a drawing. Objects are drawn using many short lines (or triangles when drawing spheres).

3DCONFIG (-3DCONFIG) | 19

These lines are called tessellation lines. Objects in your drawing appear smoother when you use more tessellation lines. Surface Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for surfaces in your drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines and more memory. Curve Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for curves in your drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines and more memory. Number of Tessellations to Cache Configures your system according to memory and performance requirements. The 3D cache always stores at least one tessellation. When this option is set to 1, the tessellation for all viewports is the same; some objects in the drawing may be regenerated as you zoom in and out. Setting this option to 2 or more is useful when you have more than one viewport with different views. Increasing the number requires more memory.

General Options
Sets performance-related options that are not hardware dependent. Discard Back Faces Discards back faces when drawing objects. You cannot see the effect of discarding back faces on some objects, such as spheres, because you cannot see the back face even when it is present. The effect of discarding back faces is visible on objects such as those that don't have a top. Discarding back faces enhances performance. Transparency Quality Adjusts the transparency quality. At the Low setting, a screen-door effect achieves transparency without sacrificing speed. At the Medium setting, the default in software mode, blending improves image quality. The High setting, the default in hardware mode, produces an image free of visual artifacts at the cost of drawing speed. Materials must also be turned on for transparency to be visible. The General Options prompt is redisplayed.

Acceleration
Specifies whether to use software or hardware acceleration in 3D. If you select Hardware, you can also specify whether geometry acceleration are turned on or off. Hardware Specifies hardware acceleration. The hardware graphics card performs most of the drawing tasks in 3D to increase performance.

20 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

When you select Hardware, the default driver is set to AcadDM10.bundle which is included with the program.

Driver Name. You can select a driver from a list of available hardware-accelerated drivers found in the Drv directory. If you want to use a hardware driver from another vendor, it must be supported by the Heidi Graphics System.

Enhanced 3D Performance. Enables a more efficient use of the graphic card when working with 3D objects. NOTE If you experience problems with precision, turn this option off.

Smooth display. Controls the status of the full screen anti-aliasing effect. This option removes the jagged effect on the display of diagonal line and curved edges. Advanced material effects. Controls the status of the advanced materials effect on screen. Gooch hardware shader. Enables the use of Gooch shading. With this option on the details of a 3D object are shown by softening the contrast between lighted areas and shadowed areas by using warm and cool colors as a substitute to light and dark colors. Per-pixel lighting. Enables the computation of colors for individual pixels. With this option on the 3D objects and lighting effects appear smoother in the viewport. Full shadow display. Enables shadows to be displayed in the viewport. NOTE Enhanced 3D performance effect must be turned on.

Texture compression. Enables the use of texture compression to reduce the amount of video memory required to open and display a drawing that contains materials with images or has attached images. NOTE With this option turned on, the time it takes to load the images might increase the first time that they are accessed, and there is a reduction in the quality of the images when they are displayed in the viewport or plotted.

Software Feature is not supported and is provided for scripting compatibility only.

Plot Emulation
Feature is not supported and is provided for scripting compatibility only.

3DCONFIG (-3DCONFIG) | 21

3DDISTANCE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use 3D Navigation Tools

Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away.

Access Methods
Menu: View Camera Adjust Distance Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes Adjust Distance (4).

Summary
3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and one pointing down. Click and drag the cursor vertically toward the top of the screen to move the camera closer to the objects, making them appear larger. Click and drag the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the screen to move the camera away from the objects, making them appear smaller.

3DEDITBAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Edit NURBS Surfaces

Reshapes, scales, and edits the tangency of NURBS surfaces.

Summary
The 3D Edit Bar allows you to reshape NURBS surfaces and to change the tangency at specific points in the U and V directions. The ability to specify precise coordinates allows you to edit a surface with surgical precision.

22 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Understand the 3D Edit Bar Grips

The 3D Edit Bar has three grips:

The expander grip (triangular grip)

3DEDITBAR | 23

The magnitude handle (circular grip)

24 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

The move gizmo (square grip)

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve Selects the 3D objects you want to edit. When you have selected the objects, press Enter. Base point Specifies the next edit point. Displacement Specifies a relative distance and direction for the placement of the CV using coordinate values that you enter at the command prompt. Undo Cancels the action without exiting the CV Edit Bar. Exit Cancels the prompt and returns you to the CV edit bar to continue adding and editing CVs.

3DEDITBAR | 25

3D Edit Bar Shortcut Menu

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the CV Edit Bar

Displays options to set the tangency and location of a control vertex and move or align the edit bar.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Expander grip.

Summary
When you right-click the triangular tangency grip a shortcut menu appears.

The shorcut menu has options that allow you to:

Reshape the curve (Move Point Location)

26 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Edit the tangent scale (Move Tangent Direction) Move the base point to edit a different part of the surface (Relocate Base Point) Realign the gizmo (the edit bar). Whether to reshape the curve (Move Point Location) or the tangency (Move Tangent Direction).

Different options appear depending on what option you select.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Move Point Location When selected, moving the base point reshapes the NURBS surface (and not the tangency). Move Tangent Direction When selected, moving the base point changes the tangency (and not the shape of the NURBS surface). This image shows the edit bar moving in the U direction on the left, and the V direction on the right. U Tangent Direction Moves the edit bar to the U axis to constrain the tangency edit to that direction. In the image above, the image on the left shows the edit bar moving in the U direction. V Tangent Direction Moves the edit bar to the V axis to constrain the tangency edit to that direction. In the image above, the image on the right shows the edit bar moving in the V direction. Normal Tangent Direction Moves the edit bar to edit the tangency of the curve normal to the current UCS. Set Constraint Sets whether the change in tangency or point location is constrained to a specific axis.

X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. XY, YX, or ZX. Restricts the change to a plane that is defined by the selected axes.

Relocate Base Point Moves to a new location and add a new control vertex. Align Gizmo With Sets the alignment for the change. Options include:

World UCS Current UCS

3D Edit Bar Shortcut Menu | 27

Face

3DFACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Custom Mesh (Legacy)

Creates a three-sided or four-sided surface in 3D space.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Meshes 3D Face

Summary List of Prompts

The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (1) or enter i First Point Defines the start point for the 3D surface. After entering the first point, enter the remaining points in a natural clockwise or counterclockwise order to create a normal 3D face. If you locate all four points on the same plane, a planar face is created that is similar to a region object. When you shade or render the object, planar faces are filled. Invisible Controls which edges of a 3D face are visible, allowing for accurate modeling of objects with holes. Entering i or invisible before the first point of an edge makes the edge invisible. The invisible specification must precede any object snap modes, XYZ filters, or coordinate input for that edge. You can create a 3D face in which all edges are invisible. Such a face is a phantom; it does not appear in wireframe presentations but can hide material in line drawings. 3D faces do appear in shaded renderings. You can combine 3D faces to model complex 3D surfaces.

28 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Specify second point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (2) or enter i Specify third point or [Invisible] <exit>: Specify a point (3), enter i, or press Enter Specify fourth point or [Invisible] <create three-sided face>: Specify a point (4), enter i, or press Enter The Third Point and Fourth Point prompts are repeated until you press Enter. Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. When you finish entering points, press Enter.

3DFORBIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use 3D Navigation Tools

Rotates the view in 3D space without constraining roll.

Access Methods
Menu: View Orbit Free Orbit

3DFORBIT | 29

Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigations Modes Free Orbit (2).

Summary
Selecting one of more objects before starting this command limits the display to those objects only. While the command is active, right-click to display additional options from a shortcut menu. 3DFORBIT activates a 3D Free Orbit view in the current viewport. If the user coordinate system (UCS) icon is on, a shaded 3D UCS icon representing the current UCS appears in the 3D Orbit view. You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before starting the command. The 3D Free Orbit view displays an arcball, which is a circle divided into four quadrants by smaller circles. When the Enable Orbit Auto Target option is deselected in the shortcut menu, the target of the view stays stationary. The camera location, or point of view, moves around the target. The center of the arcball, not the center of the objects youre viewing, is the target point. Unlike 3DORBIT, 3DFORBIT does not constrain the change in view to prevent roll, the rotation of the view about an axis orthogonal to the plane of your screen. NOTE You cannot edit objects while the 3DFORBIT command is active. Moving your cursor over different parts of the arcball changes the cursor icon, indicating the direction in which the view rotates. See 3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons on page 31. While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area, or choosing buttons on the 3D Navigation toolbar. See 3D Orbit Shortcut Menu on page 39. TIP While in 3D Orbit mode, you can temporarily enter 3D Free Orbit mode by pressing and holding the Shift key.

30 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons

Quick Reference
See also:

Use 3D Navigation Tools

While using 3D Free Orbit, the cursor changes as it is moved to indicate how the model will be orbited when clicking and dragging. View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor as follows: Sphere Encircled by Two Lines When you move the cursor inside the arcball, it changes to a small sphere encircled by two lines. If you click and drag in the drawing area you can move freely around the objects. It works as if your cursor is grabbing a sphere surrounding the objects and dragging it around the target point. You can drag horizontally, vertically, and diagonally using this method.

Circular Arrow When you move the cursor outside the arcball, it becomes a circular arrow. Clicking outside the arcball and dragging the cursor around the arcball causes the view to move around an axis that extends through the center of the arcball, perpendicular to the screen. This is called a roll.

Horizontal Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles on the left or right side of the arcball, it becomes a horizontal ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of these points rotates the view around the vertical or Y axis through the middle of the arcball.

3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons | 31

Vertical Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles on the top or bottom of the arcball, it becomes a vertical ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of these points rotates the view around the horizontal or X axis through the middle of the arcball.

3DMESH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Custom Mesh (Legacy)

Creates a free-form polygon mesh.

Summary
The mesh density controls the number of facets, and is defined in terms of a matrix of M and N vertices, similar to a grid consisting of columns and rows. 3DMESH is a legacy method for creating mesh, designed primarily for operation under program control rather than by manual entry. To take advantage of smoothing, creasing, and refinement capabilities, use the MESH command.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Size of mesh in M direction Sets the M direction value. Enter a value between 2 and 256.

32 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Size of mesh in N direction Sets the N direction value. Enter a value between 2 and 256. M times N equals the number of vertices that you must specify.

Location for vertex (0, 0) Sets the coordinate location of the vertex. Enter a 2D or 3D coordinate. The location of each vertex in the mesh is defined by m and n, the row and column indices of the vertex. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0,0). You must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before specifying vertices in row m + 1. Vertices may be any distance from each other. The M and N orientation of a mesh depends on the position of its vertices.

3DMESH polygon meshes are always open in both M and N directions. You can close a mesh with PEDIT.

3DMESH | 33

3DMOVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Move 3D Objects

In a 3D view, displays the 3D Move gizmo to aid in moving 3D objects a specified distance in a specified direction.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify 3D Operations 3D Move

Summary
With the 3D Move gizmo, you can move selected objects and subobjects freely or constrain the movement to an axis or plane.

If the default gizmo (DEFAULTGIZMO) is 3D Move, the 3D Move gizmo is displayed whenever you select an object in a view with a 3D visual style. If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style, 3DMOVE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the duration of the command.

34 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

The 3D Move gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected 3D object or objects by default. You can use the shortcut menu to change its location. You can also align the 3D Move gizmo with the plane of a face or object by using the Align Gizmo With Face option on the shortcut menu. The direction of the move operation is then constrained relative to this workplane.

When the 3D Move gizmo is displayed, the 3D Move Gizmo shortcut menu offers options for aligning, moving, or changing to another gizmo.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Selects the 3D objects you want to move. When you have selected the objects, press Enter. When you have selected an object, the gizmo is displayed. You can constrain the movement by clicking one of the following locations on the gizmo:

Move along an axis. Click an axis to constrain the movement to that axis.

Move along a plane. Click the area between the axes to constrain the movement to that plane.

3DMOVE | 35

Stretch point When you are specifying the move using the gizmo, sets the new location of the selected objects. Drag and click to move the objects dynamically. Copy When you are specifying the move using the gizmo, creates a copy of the selected objects instead of moving them. You can make multiple copies by continuing to specify locations. Base point Specifies the base point of the 3D objects you want to move.

Second point. Specifies where the 3D object or objects will be dragged. You can also move the cursor to indicate a direction and then enter a distance.

Displacement Specifies a relative distance and direction for the placement of the selected 3D objects using coordinate values that you enter at the command prompt.

3D Move Gizmo Shortcut Menu

Quick Reference
See also:

Move 3D Objects

Displays options to set the constraint of a 3D object, switch gizmos, and move or align the gizmo.

36 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Move gizmo

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo. Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis.

X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. XY, YX, or ZX. Restricts the change to a plane that is defined by the selected axes.

Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify. Align Gizmo With Sets the alignment for the change. Options include:

World UCS Current UCS Face

Custom Gizmo Allows you to define the current gizmo by specifying one, two, or three points, or an object. Respect Dynamic UCS When relocating the gizmo, as you move the cursor, temporarily aligns the XY plane of the UCS with the faces or edges.

3D Move Gizmo Shortcut Menu | 37

3DORBIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use 3D Navigation Tools

Rotates the view in 3D space, but constrained to horizontal and vertical orbit only.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: View Orbit Constrained Orbit Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigations Modes Constrained Orbit (1). Toolbar: Status bar (expanded) 3D Orbit

38 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

NOTE You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active. While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options and modes from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area, or choosing buttons on the 3D Navigation toolbar. See 3D Orbit Shortcut Menu on page 39.

3D Orbit Shortcut Menu

Quick Reference
See also:

Use 3D Navigation Tools

When the 3DORBIT command (or any 3D navigation command or mode) is active, you can access the options on the 3D Orbit shortcut menu. To access the 3D Orbit shortcut menu, right-click in the 3D Orbit view.

Current Mode: Current

Displays the current mode.

Other Navigation Modes

Choose one of the following 3D navigation modes:

Constrained Orbit (1). Constrains orbiting to the XY plane or the Z direction. Free Orbit (2). Allows orbiting in any direction, without being constrained to the XY plane or the Z direction. See 3DFORBIT. Adjust Distance (4). Simulates moving the camera closer to the object or farther away. See 3DDISTANCE. Swivel (5). Changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates the effect of swiveling the camera. See 3DSWIVEL. Zoom (8). Changes the cursor to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (-) sign and simulates moving the camera closer to an object or farther away. Works like the Adjust Distance option. See 3DZOOM.

3D Orbit Shortcut Menu | 39

Pan (9). Changes the cursor to a hand cursor and moves the view in the direction that you drag. See 3DPAN. TIP You can switch to any mode by using the shortcut menu or by entering the number displayed after its name.

Enable Orbit Auto Target

Keeps the target point on the objects you are viewing rather than on the center of the viewport. This feature is turned on by default.

Zoom Window
Changes the cursor to a window icon so that you can select a specific area to zoom in on. When the cursor changes, click a starting point and end point to define the zoom window. The drawing is zoomed in and focused on the area you selected.

Zoom Extents
Centers the view and sizes it to display all objects.

Zoom Previous
Displays the previous view.

Parallel
Displays objects so that two parallel lines in a drawing never converge. The shapes in your drawing always remain the same and do not appear distorted when they are closer.

Perspective
Displays objects in perspective so that all parallel lines converge at one point. Objects appear to recede into the distance, and parts of the objects appear larger and closer to you. The shapes are somewhat distorted when the object is very close. This view correlates more closely to what your eyes see. See PERSPECTIVE.

Reset View
Resets the view back to the view that was current when you first started 3DORBIT.

40 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Preset Views
Displays a list of predefined views such as Top, Bottom, and SW Isometric. Choose a view from the list to change the current view of your model.

Named Views
Displays a list of named views in the drawing. Choose a named view from the list to change the current view of your model.

Visual Styles
Provides methods for shading objects. For more information about visual styles, see Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model. The options are the same as the options in VSCURRENT on page 1126.

Visual Aids
Provides aids to visualizing the objects.

Compass. Draws a 3D sphere composed of three lines representing the X, Y, and Z axes. Grid. Displays a two-dimensional array of lines similar to graph paper. This grid is oriented along the X and Y axes. NOTE Before starting 3DORBIT, you can use the GRID command to set system variables that control the grid display. The number of major grid lines corresponds to the value you set using the Grid Spacing option of the GRID command, which is stored in the GRIDUNIT system variable. Ten horizontal lines and ten vertical lines are drawn between the major lines.

UCS Icon. Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon. Each axis is labeled X, Y, or Z. The X axis is red, the Y axis is green, and the Z axis is blue.

3DORBITCTR
Quick Reference
See also:

Use 3D Navigation Tools

3DORBITCTR | 41

Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view.

Summary
Starts 3D Orbit view and uses a center of rotation that you specify with your pointing device. If you specify a point outside the current view, 3DORBITCTR ignores the specified point and uses the default center of rotation. 3DORBITCTR overrides the AutoTarget option in the 3DORBIT command.

3DOSNAP
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves Create Solids Create Surfaces Modify Surfaces Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces Snap to Locations on Objects (Object Snaps)

Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Press Option while right-clicking in the drawing area and click 3D Osnap Osnap Settings.

Toolbar: Status bar (expanded) 3D Object Snap

Summary
Displays the 3D Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box on page 358. You can also set the 3D object snap settings with the 3DOSMODE on page 1173 system variable.

42 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

NOTE Because 3D object snaps can slow performance, select only the object snaps you need.

-3DOSNAP
Quick Reference
Uses command prompts to set running object snap modes for 3D objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter List of Object Snap Modes Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first four characters of the name. If you enter more than one, separate the names with commas.

ZVERtex. Snaps to a vertex or a control vertex. ZMIDpoint. Snaps to the midpoint on a face edge. ZCENter. Snaps to the center of a face. ZKNOt. Snaps to a spline knot. ZPERpendicular. Snaps to a perpendicular face (planar faces only). ZNEAr. Snaps to an object nearest to face. ZNONe. Turns off all 3D object snaps.

See the 3D Object Snaps tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box for more information.

3DPAN
Quick Reference
See also:

Use 3D Navigation Tools

-3DOSNAP | 43

When a drawing is in a Perspective view, starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally and vertically.

Access Methods
Menu: View Pan Realtime Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes Pan (9).

Toolbar: Status bar Pan

Summary
Moves in the direction that you drag. You can drag the view vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. 3DPAN changes the cursor to a hand cursor. You can view your entire drawing or select objects before entering 3DPAN.

3DPOLY
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Polylines

Creates a 3D polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Open Shapes tool group (expanded) 3D Polyline Menu: Draw 3D Polyline

44 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Summary
A 3D polyline is a connected sequence of straight line segments created as a single object. 3D polylines can be non-coplanar; however, they cannot include arc segments.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point of polyline: Specify a point (1) Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the specified new point. The prompt is repeated until you press Enter to end the command.

Undo Deletes the last line created. You can continue drawing from the previous point.

Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first point, and then ends the command. To be closed, a 3D polyline must contain at least two lines.

3DPOLY | 45

3DROTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Rotate 3D Objects

In a 3D view, displays the 3D Rotate gizmo to aid in revolving 3D objects around a base point.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify 3D Operations 3D Rotate

Summary
With the 3D Rotate gizmo, you can rotate selected objects and subobjects freely or constrain the rotation to an axis.

46 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style, 3DROTATE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the duration of the command. The 3D Rotate gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects by default. You can adjust the axis of rotation by using the shortcut menu to change the location of the gizmo.

When the 3D Rotate gizmo is displayed, the 3D Rotate Gizmo shortcut menu offers options for aligning, moving, or changing to another gizmo.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Specifies the objects that you want to rotate. Base point Sets the center point of the rotation. Pick a rotation axis On the 3D Scale gizmo, specifies the axis of rotation. Move the mouse until the axis path you want to select turns yellow, then click to select it.

Specify angle start point or type an angle Sets the relative start point of the rotation. You can also enter an angle value.

3DROTATE | 47

Specify angle end point Rotates the object about the specified axis. Click to end the rotation.

3D Rotate Gizmo Shortcut Menu

Quick Reference
See also:

Rotate 3D Objects

Displays options to set the constraint of a 3D object, switch gizmos, and move or align the gizmo.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Rotate gizmo

X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis.

Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify. Align Gizmo With Sets the alignment for the change. Options include:

World UCS

48 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

Current UCS Face

3DSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Scale 3D Objects

In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects.

Access Methods Summary

With the 3D Scale gizmo, you can resize selected objects and subobjects along an axis or plane, or resize the objects uniformly. When the 3D Scale gizmo is displayed, the 3D Scale Gizmo shortcut menu offers options for aligning, moving, or changing to another gizmo.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Specifies the objects to be scaled. Specify base point Specifies the base point for the scaling. Pick a scale axis or plane Specifies whether the object is scaled uniformly or only along a specific axis or plane. You have the following choices:

Scale uniformly. Click the area closest to the vertex of the 3D Scale gizmo. The interior region of all axes of the gizmo is highlighted.

3DSCALE | 49

Constrain the scale to a plane. Click between the parallel lines between the axes that define the plane. This option is only available for meshes, not solids or surfaces.

Constrain the scale to an axis. Click the axis. This option is only available for meshes, not solids or surfaces.

Specify scale factor Specifies the amount of change. Drag to dynamically modify the size of the selected objects or enter a scale value. For example, enter 2 to double the size of the selection. Copy Creates and scales a copy of the selected objects. Reference Sets a scale based on a ratio.

Reference length. Sets the relative amount that represents the current size in the scale ratio.

50 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

New Length. Sets the relative value used to calculate the new size. For example, if the reference length is 1 and the new length is 3, the size of the selected objects is tripled. Points. Specifies the relative value used to calculate the new size based on two points that you specify.

3D Scale Gizmo Shortcut Menu

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Gizmos to Modify Objects

Displays options to set the constraint of a 3D object, switch gizmos, and move or align the gizmo.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Scale gizmo

List of Options
The following menu options are displayed when you right-click the 3D Scale gizmo. Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo. Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis.

X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis.

3D Scale Gizmo Shortcut Menu | 51

XY, YX, or ZX. Restricts the change to a plane that is defined by the selected axes. XYZ. Applies the scaling uniformly to all axes.

NOTE Unlike most other objects, mesh objects support non-uniform scale. Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify. Align Gizmo With Sets the alignment for the change. Options include:

World UCS Current UCS Face

3DSWIVEL
Quick Reference
See also:

Use 3D Navigation Tools

Changes the target of the view in the direction that you drag.

Access Methods
Menu: View Camera Swivel Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigations Modes Swivel (5).

Summary
Simulates panning with a camera in the direction that you drag. The target of the view changes. You can swivel the view along the XY plane or along the Z axis.

52 | Chapter 1 3D Commands

3DZOOM
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify 3D Views

Zooms in and out in a perspective view.

Access Methods
Menu: View Zoom Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes Zoom (8).

Toolbar: Status bar Zoom

Summary
Zooming in a perspective view simulates moving the camera closer to the target or farther away. Objects appear closer or farther away, but the position of the camera does not change.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed in a perspective view. Press Esc or Enter to exit, or right-click to display shortcut-menu. Enter option [All/Extents/Window/Previous/Object] <real time>: All Zooms to display the entire drawing. Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents and results in the largest possible display of all the objects Window Zooms to display an area specified by two points of a rectangular window. Previous Zooms to display the previous view. Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the view. Real Time Using the pointing device, zooms interactively.

3DZOOM | 53

A Commands

ABOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Start a Drawing

Displays information about AutoCAD for Mac.

Access Methods
Menu: AutoCAD for Mac About AutoCAD for Mac Command entry: 'about for transparent use

Summary
Copyright information and product information is displayed. Product information includes the version number and service pack, serial number, license type and expiration date, and the text of the license agreement. You can save the product information as a text file.

ACISIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Import ACIS SAT Files

Imports an ACIS (SAT) file and creates 3D solid, body, or region objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Insert ACIS File

Summary
The Select ACIS File box is displayed. Select the file to import in the File Name list. The SAT (ASCII) ACIS file is imported into the drawing. NOTE ACISIN imports SAT files up to ACIS version 7.0.

ACISOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Export ACIS SAT Files

Exports a body object, solid, or region to an ACIS file.

Summary
Selected objects that are not solids or regions are ignored, and the Create ACIS File dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the file you want to create. The selected objects are exported to an ASCII file. NOTE When exchanging SAT files to earlier versions of AutoCAD, you need to set the ACISOUTVER on page 1176 system variable to the ACIS version used for that release. For example, to export SAT files to AutoCAD Release 14, set ACISOUTVER to 16.

56 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ADDSELECTED
Quick Reference
See also:

Copy, Offset, or Mirror Objects

Creates a new object based on the object type and general properties of a selected object.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a single object, right-click, and click Add Selected.

Summary
Differs from COPY by duplicating only the general properties on page 832 of an object. For example, creating an object based on a selected circle adopts the general properties of the circle, such as its color and layer, but prompts you for the new circles center point and radius. With the ADDSELECTED command, you can create a new object with the same object type as a selected object. Certain objects have special properties that are supported in addition to its general properties, as shown in the following table. Object type
Gradient

Special properties supported by ADDSELECTED

Gradient name, Color 1, Color 2, Gradient Angle, Centered Text Style, Height

Text, MText, Attribute Definition Dimensions (Linear, Aligned, Radial, Diametric, Angular, Arc Length, and Ordinate) Tolerance Leader

Dim Style, Dim Scale

Dim Style Dim Style, Dim Scale

ADDSELECTED | 57

Object type
Multileader Table Hatch Block Reference, External Reference Underlays (DWF, DGN, Image, and PDF)

Special properties supported by ADDSELECTED

Multileader Style, Overall Scale Table Style Pattern, Scale, Rotation Name

Name

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed. Select object: Use an object selection method The prompts vary by object type.

ALIGN
Quick Reference
See also:

Align Objects

Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Move/Rotate/Scale tool group (expanded) Align

58 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Menu: Modify 3D Operations Align

Summary
Either one, two, or three pairs of source points and definition points can be specified to move, rotate, or tilt the selected objects, aligning them with points on another object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Select the objects to align and press ENTER ALIGN Using One Pair of Points When you select only one source point and destination point pair, the selected objects move in 2D or 3D from the source point (1) to the destination point (2).

ALIGN Using Two Pairs of Points When you select two point pairs, you can move, rotate, and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with other objects.

The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for the alignment (1, 2). The second set of points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4).

ALIGN | 59

After you enter the second set of points, you are prompted to scale the object. The distance between the first and second destination points (2, 4) is used as the reference length to which the object is scaled. Scaling is available only when you are aligning objects using two point pairs. NOTE If you use two source and destination points to perform a 3D alignment on nonperpendicular working planes, you get unpredictable results. ALIGN Using Three Pairs of Points When you select three point pairs, you can move and rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other objects.

The selected objects move from the source point (1) to the destination point (2). The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns with the destination object (2 and 4). The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so that it aligns with the destination object (4 and 6).

AMECONVERT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Models with Other Applications

Converts AME solid models to AutoCAD solid objects.

Summary
The objects you select must be Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) Release 2 or 2.1 regions or solids. All other objects are ignored.

60 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Because of increased accuracy in the new solid modeler, AME models may look slightly different after conversion. This difference is noticeable where the previous version of the solid modeler identified the surfaces of two different shapes as so close as to be considered in the same plane. The new solid modeler's finer tolerance may interpret these surfaces as being slightly offset. This phenomenon is most apparent with aligned features such as fillets, chamfers, and through-holes. Holes might become blind holes when the new modeler, with its much finer approximation capability, interprets what was once a through-hole as being slightly less wide than the solid. Typically, the length of the remaining solid material is the difference between the tolerance of the previous modeler and that of the new modeler. Likewise, updated fillets or chamfers can occasionally be placed slightly below the surface, creating a hole through the solid, leaving the original shape unaltered. Also, drawing fillets or chamfers slightly above the original surface creates an uneven transition between the solid and the fillet or chamfer.

ANALYSISCURVATURE
Quick Reference
See also:

Analyze the Curvature of a NURBS Surface

Displays a color gradient onto a surface to evaluate different aspects of its curvature.

ANALYSISCURVATURE | 61

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Analysis tool group Surface Analysis flyout Curvature Analysis

Summary
Allows you to visualize Gaussian, minimum, maximum, and mean U and V surface curvature. Maximum curvature and a positive Gaussian value display as green; minimum curvature and a negative Gaussian value display as blue.

Positive Gaussian curvature means that the surface is shaped like a bowl. Negative Gaussian curvature means the surface is shaped like a saddle (as shown below). Mean curvature and a zero Gaussian value means that the surface is flat in at least one direction (planes, cylinders, and cones have zero Gaussian curvature). To change the curvature analysis display settings, use the Curvature tab on page 67 of the Analysis Options dialog box on page 65.

62 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ANALYSISDRAFT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Draft Analysis Tool

Displays a color gradient onto a 3D model to evaluate whether there is adequate space between a part and its mold.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Analysis tool group Surface Analysis flyout Draft Analysis

Summary
The color spectrum shows draft angle changes within a specified range. The maximum draft angle displays as red, and the minimum draft angle displays as blue.

ANALYSISDRAFT | 63

If the surface is parallel to the construction plane with surface normals facing in the same direction as the current UCS, the draft angle is 90.0. When perpendicular, it is 0. If the surface is parallel to the current UCS with surface normals facing in the opposite direction than the current UCS, the draft angle is -90.0. To change the draft analysis display settings, use the Draft Angle tab on page 68 of the Analysis Options dialog box on page 65.

ANALYSISOPTIONS
Quick Reference
See also:

Analyze Surfaces

Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.

64 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Analysis tool group Surface Analysis flyout Analysis Options

Summary
The Analysis Options dialog box on page 65is displayed.

Analysis Options Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Analyze Surfaces

Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.

List of Tabs
The Analysis Options dialog box contains the following tabs:

Zebra on page 66 Curvature on page 67 Draft Angle on page 68

Analysis Options Dialog Box | 65

Zebra Tab (Analysis Options Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Analyze Surfaces

Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISZEBRA command.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Select Objects to Analyze

Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box.

Stripe Display
Stripe Direction Specifies the display angle. (VSAZEBRADIRECTION on page 1559) This option is only available when Type is set to Cylinder. If you are using the Chrome Ball type, change the stripe directions with the VSAZEBRADIRECTION on page 1559 system variable. Type Sets analysis display type. (VSAZEBRATYPE on page 1560) Size Sets the width of the zebra stripes. (VSAZEBRASIZE on page 1560) Color 1 Sets the first color for zebra stripes. (VSAZEBRACOLOR1 on page 1558) Color 2 Sets the second color for zebra stripes. (VSAZEBRACOLOR2 on page 1559)

Clear Zebra Analysis

Removes the zebra display from all objects in the current drawing.

66 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Curvature Tab (Analysis Options Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Analyze Surfaces

Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISCURVATURE command.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Select objects to analyze

Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box.

Color Mapping
Display Style Specifies the display for color mapping (VSACURVATURETYPE on page 1556 system variable). Enter the maximum curvature value (VSACURVATUREHIGH on page 1555 system variable). When the surface curvature reaches this value, it displays as green. Enter the minimum curvature value (VSACURVATURELOW on page 1556 system variable). When the surface curvature reaches this value, it displays as blue. Auto Range Calculates the curvature range so that 80% of the values are within the high and low range (VSACURVATUREHIGH on page 1555 and VSACURVATURELOW on page 1556 system variables). Max Range Calculates the maximum and minimum ranges of all objects selected for curvature analysis (VSACURVATUREHIGH on page 1555 and VSACURVATURELOW on page 1556 system variables).

Clear Curvature Analysis

Removes the curvature analysis display from all objects in the current drawing.

Analysis Options Dialog Box | 67

Draft Angle Tab (Analysis Options Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Analyze Surfaces

Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISDRAFT command.

List of Options
The following options are available.

Select objects to analyze

Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box.

Color Mapping
Maps green to the highest draft angle, red to the medium draft angle, and blue to the lowest draft angle. Angle Sets the value for the high and low draft angles. The draft angle is the angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane. Enter a value for the highest angle allowed (VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH on page 1557). When the objects angle reaches this value, it displays in green. Displays the average value of the high and low angles. When the objects angle reaches this value, it displays in red. Enter a value for the lowest angle allowed (VSADRAFTANGLELOW on page 1557). When the objects angle reaches this value, it displays in blue. Clear Draft Angle Analysis Removes the curvature analysis display from all objects in the current drawing.

68 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ANALYSISZEBRA
Quick Reference
See also:

Analyze Surface Continuity with Zebra Analysis

Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Analysis tool group Surface Analysis flyout Zebra Analysis

Summary
The way the stripes line up where two surfaces meet, helps analyze the tangency and curvature of the intersection.

ANALYSISZEBRA | 69

In this example, the surface continuity is G0 because the surface edges are coincident, but they are not tangent and they have different curvatures. The fact that the stripes are not aligned shows that the surfaces are not tangent. To change the zebra analysis display settings, use the Zebra Analysis tab on page 66 of the Analysis Options dialog box on page 65.

ANNORESET
Quick Reference
See also:

Add and Modify Scale Representations

Resets the locations of all alternate scale representations of the selected annotative objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Annotation Scaling tool group Sync Scale Positions Menu: Modify Annotative Object Scale Synchronize Multiple-Scale Positions Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object. Right-click and choose Annotative Object Scale Synchronize Multiple-Scale Positions.

Summary
The location of each scale representation of an annotative object can be adjusted using grips. For each selected annotative object, all alternate scale representations are returned to the location of the objects current scale representation.

70 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ANNOUPDATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Annotative Styles

Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their styles.

Summary
When a non-annotative text object is updated to an annotative text style, the object becomes annotative and supports the current annotation scale on page 1598. If the text style has a fixed Paper Height, the object is set to that height. If the text styles Paper Height is set to 0, the size of the text does not change. The Paper Height value is inferred by dividing the model height by the current annotation scale. If an annotative object is updated to a non-annotative style, the object becomes non-annotative and any alternate scale representations on page 1617 are removed.

APERTURE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Object Snaps

Controls the size of the object snap target box.

Access Methods
Command entry: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use)

Summary
Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target box. The APBOX on page 1180 system variable controls whether the object snap target box is displayed. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE

ANNOUPDATE | 71

controls the size of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger the target box. You can also change this setting in the Application Preferences dialog box, Cursor & Selection tab.

APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the PICKBOX on page 1441 system variable.

APPLOAD
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading

Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Load Application

Summary
The Startup Suite option loads the specified applications each time the product first starts. Application files can be dragged from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities. The Load/Unload Applications dialog box is displayed.

72 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading

Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup.

Summary
Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at startup.

Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box | 73

List of Options
The following options are displayed. The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file selection dialog box. Following are descriptions of the additional options provided by the Load/Unload Applications dialog box: Load Loads or reloads the applications that are currently selected either in the files list or on the History List tab. Load is unavailable until you select a file that you can load. ObjectARX and DBX applications are loaded immediately, but LSP and FAS applications are queued and then loaded when you close the Load/Unload Applications dialog box. If you select a file that is already loaded, Load reloads the application when applicable. You cannot reload ObjectARX applications. In this case, you must first unload the ObjectARX application and then load it again. The Load option is also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking a file on the History List tab. Loaded Applications Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of currently loaded applications. LISP routines are displayed in this list only if you loaded them in the Load/Unload Applications dialog box. You can drag files into this list from the files list or from any application with dragging capabilities, such as Finder. You can also unload certain applications from this list. See the Unload option for details. Files that you cannot unload are not available for selection. History List Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of applications that you previously loaded with Add To History selected. If Add To History is not selected when you drag files into this list, the dragged files are loaded but not added to the history list. You can drag files into this list from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities, such as Finder. You can load and remove applications from this list, but to unload applications, you must use the Loaded Applications tab. See the Load, Unload, and Remove options. Add to History Adds any applications that you load to the history list. Unload/Remove

74 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Unloads the selected applications or removes them from the History List. Unload is available only when a file is selected on the Loaded Applications tab. Remove is available only when you select a file on the History List tab. LISP applications cannot be unloaded, nor can ObjectARX applications that are not registered for unloading. NOTE Remove does not unload the selected application. The Remove option is also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking an application on the History List tab. Startup Suite Contains a list of applications that are loaded each time you start AutoCAD for Mac. You can drag application files from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities such as Finder, into the Startup Suite area to add them to the Startup Suite. You cannot add applications that you load with the AutoCAD for Mac web browser to the Startup Suite. Contents Displays the Startup Suite dialog box. You can also add files to the Startup Suite by clicking the Startup Suite icon or by right-clicking an application on the History List tab and clicking Add to Startup Suite on the shortcut menu. Status Line Displays messages that indicate the status of loading and unloading operations.

Startup Suite Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading

Adds and removes application files from the Startup Suite. These are the applications that are loaded each time you start AutoCAD.

Startup Suite Dialog Box | 75

List of Options
The following options are displayed. List of Applications Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of the application files to load at startup. Add Displays the Add File to Startup Suite dialog box. You can use this dialog box to select files to add to the startup suite. Remove Removes selected files from the Startup Suite.

ARC
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Arcs

Creates an arc.

76 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group Arc flyout Menu: Draw Arc

Summary
To create an arc, you can specify combinations of center, endpoint, start point, radius, angle, chord length, and direction values.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify start pointof arc or [Center]: Specify a point, enter c, or press ENTER to start tangent to last line, arc, or polyline

Start Point
Specifies the starting point of the arc. NOTE If you press ENTER without specifying a point, the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc is used and you are immediately prompted to specify the endpoint of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc, or polyline. Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]:

Second Point
Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc's circumference. The first point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3). The second point (2) is a point on the circumference of the arc. Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)

You can specify a three-point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise.

Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.

ARC | 77

Specify center point of arc: Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: End Point Using the center point (2), draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through the third point (3).

The arc does not necessarily pass through this third point, as shown in the illustration. Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) using a center point (2) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn. Specify included angle: Specify an angle

Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise. Specify length of chord: Specify a length

End
Specifies the endpoint of the arc. Specify end point of arc: Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]:

78 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Center Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (3) through the second point specified (2).

Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint (2), with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn. Specify included angle: Enter an angle in degrees or specify an angle by moving the pointing device counterclockwise

Direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates any arc, major or minor, clockwise or counterclockwise, beginning with the start point (1), and ending at an endpoint (2). The direction is determined from the start point. Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc:

Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to the endpoint (2). If the radius is negative, the major arc is drawn. Specify radius of arc:

Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part. Specify center point of arc: Specify start point of arc: Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:

ARC | 79

End Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (1) through a specified point (3).

Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) using a center point (1) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn. Specify included angle:

Tangent to Last Line, Arc, or Polyline

Draws an arc tangent to the last line, arc, or polyline drawn when you press ENTER at the first prompt.

Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (1)

80 | Chapter 2 A Commands

AREA
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas.

Summary
Several commands are available to provide area information including AREA, MEASUREGEOM on page 608, and MASSPROP on page 591. Alternatively, use BOUNDARY on page 137 to create a closed polyline or region. Then use LIST on page 574 or the Properties Inspector on page 830 to find the area.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner point on page 81 or [Object on page 82/Add Area on page 82/Subtract Area on page 83] <Object>: Select an option The area and perimeter of the specified object displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip.

Specify Corner Points

Calculates the area and perimeter defined by specified points. All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). A rubberband line from the first specified point to the cursor is displayed. Once the second point is specified, a line segment and a polygon with green fill are displayed. Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to complete the definition of the perimeter. The area to be calculated is highlighted in green. If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that line length is added.

AREA | 81

Object
Calculates the area and perimeter of a selected object. You can calculate the area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and 3D solids. NOTE 2D solids (created with the SOLID on page 955 command) do not have an area reported. Select object: If you select an open polyline, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated that line length is ignored. The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter calculations.

The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter (or length) calculations.

Add Area
Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue to define areas. You can use the Add Area option to calculate

82 | Chapter 2 A Commands

individual areas and perimeters of defined areas and objects and the total area of all defined areas and objects. You can also select to specify the points. A rubberband line from the first specified point to the cursor is displayed

Specify points to define a polygon (3). The area to be added is highlighted in green. Press ENTER. AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that line length is added.

Subtract Area
Similar to the Add Area option, but subtracts areas and perimeters. You can use the Subtract Area option to subtract a specified area from a total area. You can also specify the area to be subtracted with points. A rubberband line from the first specified point to the cursor is displayed.

The specified area to be subracted is highlighted in red. The total area and perimeter displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip.

AREA | 83

ARRAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Create an Array of Objects

Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Copy tool group Array Menu: Modify Array

Summary
You can create copies of objects in a regularly spaced rectangular, polar, or path array.

You can create rectangular, polar, or path arrays by choosing the appropriate option. Each object in an array can be manipulated independently. If you select multiple objects, the objects are treated as one item to be copied and arrayed. If you enter -array at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

84 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Array Dialog Box

Quick Reference
Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Rectangular Array
Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object.

Array Dialog Box | 85

Rows Specifies the number of rows in the array. If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, it might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt. Columns Specifies the number of columns in the array. If you specify one column, you must specify more than one row. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, it might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.

Offset Distance and Direction

Provides a space for you to specify the distance and direction of the array's offset. Row Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. To add rows downward, specify a negative value. To specify row spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Row Offset button. Column Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between columns. To add columns to the left, specify a negative value. To specify column spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Column Offset button. Angle of Array Specifies the angle of rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes of the current UCS. You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS

86 | Chapter 2 A Commands

on page 1096. The ANGBASE on page 1177 and ANGDIR on page 1178 system variables affect the angle of arrays. Pick Both Offsets Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to set the row and column spacing by specifying two diagonal corners of a rectangle. Pick Row Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between rows. ARRAY prompts you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Row Offset. Pick Column Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between columns. ARRAY prompts you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Column Offset. Pick Angle of Array Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can specify the angle of rotation by entering a value or using the pointing device to specify two points. You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS on page 1096. The ANGBASE on page 1177 and ANGDIR on page 1178 system variables affect the angle of arrays.

Polar Array
Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center point.

Array Dialog Box | 87

Center Point Specifies the center point of the polar array. Enter coordinate values for X and Y, or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the location. Pick Center Point Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the center point in the drawing area.

Methods
Specifies the method and values used to position objects in the polar array. Method Sets the method used to position objects. This setting controls which of the Method and Value fields are available for specifying values. For example, if the method is Total Number of Items & Angle to Fill, the related fields are available for specifying values; the Angle Between Items field is not available. Total Number of Items Sets the number of objects that appear in the resultant array. The default value is 4. Angle to Fill Sets the size of the array by defining the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array. A positive value specifies counterclockwise rotation. A negative value specifies clockwise rotation. The default value is 360. A value of 0 is not permitted.

88 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Pick Angle to Fill Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array. ARRAY prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the drawing area. Angle Between Items Sets the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array. Enter a positive value. The default direction value is 90. NOTE You can choose the Pick buttons and use the pointing device to specify the values for Angle to Fill and Angle Between Items. Pick Angle Between Items Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array. ARRAY prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the drawing area.

Rotate Items as Copied

Rotates the items in the array, as shown in the preview area.

More/Less
Turns the display of additional options in the Array dialog box on and off. When you choose More, additional options are displayed, and the name of this button changes to Less.

Object Base Point

Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects are arrayed. To construct a polar array, ARRAY determines the distance from the array's center point to a reference (base) point on the last object selected. The point used depends on the type of object, as shown in the following table. Base point settings by object Object type
Arc, circle, ellipse Polygon, rectangle Donut, line, polyline, 3D polyline, ray, spline Block, paragraph text, single-line text

Default base point

Center point First corner Starting point Insertion point

Array Dialog Box | 89

Base point settings by object Object type

Construction lines Region

Default base point

Midpoint Grip point

Set to Object's Default Uses the default base point of the object to position the arrayed object. To manually set the base point, clear this option. Base Point NOTE To avoid unexpected results, set the base point manually if you are constructing a polar array and do not want to rotate the objects.

Select Objects
Specifies the objects used to construct the array. You can select objects before or after the Array dialog box is displayed. To select objects when the Array dialog box is displayed, choose Select Objects. The dialog box temporarily closes. When you finish selecting objects, press ENTER. The Array dialog box is redisplayed, and the number of objects selected is shown below the Select Objects button. NOTE If you select multiple objects, the base point of the last selected object is used to construct the array.

Preview Area
Shows a preview image of the array based on the current settings in the dialog box. The preview image is dynamically updated when you move to another field after changing a setting. Preview Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing.

90 | Chapter 2 A Commands

-ARRAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Create an Array of Objects

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter the type of array [Rectangular/Polar] <current>: Enter an option or press Enter

Rectangular
Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected objects.

Enter the number of rows (---) <1>:Enter a nonzero integer or press Enter Enter the number of columns (|||) <1>:Enter a nonzero integer or press Enter If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column and vice versa. The selected object, or cornerstone element, is assumed to be in the lower-left corner, and generates the array up and to the right. The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the corresponding lengths of the object to be arrayed. Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between rows. ARRAY skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the opposite corners of a rectangle. Specify the distance between columns (|||): To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between columns. Rectangular arrays are constructed along a baseline defined by the

-ARRAY | 91

current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. The Rotate option of the SNAP on page 951 command changes the angle and creates a rotated array. The SNAPANG on page 1491 system variable stores the snap rotation angle. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, it might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.

Polar
Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center point.

Specify center point of array or [Base]: Specify a point or enter b to specify a new base point Center Point Creates an array defined by a center point. Base Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects are arrayed. Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive integer or press Enter If you enter a value for the number of items, you must specify either the angle to fill or the angle between items. If you press Enter (and do not provide the number of items), you must specify both. Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation You can enter 0 for the angle to fill only if you specify the number of items.

92 | Chapter 2 A Commands

If you specify an angle to fill without providing the number of items, or if you specify the number of items and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press Enter, the following prompt is displayed: Angle between items: Specify an angle If you specified the number of items and entered 0 as the angle to fill or pressed Enter, ARRAY prompts for a positive or negative value to indicate the direction of the array: Angle between items (+=ccw, -=cw): Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation ARRAY determines the distance from the array's center point to a reference point on the last object selected. The reference point used is the center point of a circle or arc, the insertion base point of a block or shape, the start point of text, and one endpoint of a line or trace. Rotate arrayed objects? <Y>: Enter y or n, or press Enter In a polar array, the reference point of the last object in the selection set is used for all objects. If you defined the selection set by using window or crossing selection, the last object in the selection set is arbitrary. Removing an object from the selection set and adding it back forces that object to be the last object selected. You can also make the selection set into a block and replicate it.

ARX
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of ObjectARX

Loads, unloads, and provides information about ObjectARX applications.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Files/Groups/Commands/CLasses/Services/Load/Unload]:

Files
Lists the currently loaded ObjectARX applications, which can be third-party programs or internal applications such as Render.

ARX | 93

Groups
Causes the specified group of commands to be the first group searched when resolving the names of AutoCAD commands.

Commands
Lists the AcEd-registered commands (AcEd-registered commands are described in the ObjectARX Developer's Guide).

Classes
Displays a class hierarchy of C++ classes derived from objects registered in the system.

Services
Lists the names of all registered services.

Load
Displays the ObjectARX/DBX File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). This option loads the specified ObjectARX application.

Unload
Unloads the specified ObjectARX application. Enter ARX/DBX file name to unload:

ATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Attach Raster Image Files

Inserts an external reference or raster image in the current drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: File Attach

Summary
The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. To select multiple DWG files for attach, set the Files of Type to Drawing. You can select one file only for all other file formats.

94 | Chapter 2 A Commands

ATTDEF
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Block Attributes

Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group Define Attributes Menu: Draw Block Define Attributes

Summary
The Attribute Definition dialog box is displayed. If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, options are displayed. An attribute is an object that is created and included with a block definition. Attributes can store data such as part numbers, product names, and so on.

Attribute Definition Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Define Block Attributes

Defines the mode; attribute tag, prompt, and value; insertion point; and text settings for an attribute.

ATTDEF | 95

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Attribute
Sets attribute data. Tag Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. Enter the attribute tag using any combination of characters except spaces. Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase. Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. If you do not enter a prompt, the attribute tag is used as a prompt. If you select Constant in the Attribute Options area under Advanced Options, the Prompt option is not available. Default Specifies the default attribute value. Insert Field Button Displays the Field dialog box. You can insert a field as all or part of the value for an attribute.

96 | Chapter 2 A Commands

This button is available when you are not creating a multiline attribute. If you are creating a multiline attribute, right-click in the multiline in-place text editor and choose Field. Multiline Editor Button When Multiple Line mode is selected, displays an in-place text editor with a text formatting toolbar and ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE on page 1182 system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the abbreviated version, or the full version. For more information, see the In-Place Text Editor. NOTE Several options in the full In-Place Text Editor are grayed out to preserve compatibility with single-line attributes.

Text Settings
Sets the justification, style, height, and rotation of the attribute text. Text Style Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. Currently loaded text styles are displayed. To load or create a text style, see STYLE on page 1005. Justification Specifies the justification of the attribute text. See TEXT on page 1040 for a description of the justification options. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . If the block is annotative, the attribute will match the orientation of the block. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Text Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose Height to specify a height with your pointing device. The height is measured from the origin to the location you specify. If you select a text style that has fixed height (anything other than 0.0), or if you select Align in the Justification list, the Height option is not available. Text Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose Rotation to specify a rotation angle with your pointing device. The rotation angle is measured from the origin to the location you specify. If you select Align or Fit in the Justification list, the Rotation option is not available.

Attribute Definition Dialog Box | 97

Multiline Text Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text. Not available for single-line attributes.

Advanced Options
Contains options to set the behavior and insertion position for the attribute.

Attribute Options
Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the block in a drawing. The default values are stored in the AFLAGS on page 1177 system variable. Changing the AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute definitions and does not affect existing attribute definitions. Invisible Specifies that attribute values are not displayed or printed when you insert the block. ATTDISP on page 102 overrides Invisible mode. Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions. Verify Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute. Lock Position Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized. Multiple Lines Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines of text. When this option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for the attribute. NOTE In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be included in an action's selection set.

98 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Insertion Point
Specifies the location for the attribute. Enter coordinate values or select Specify On-screen and use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with.

Specify On-Screen
Displays a Start Point prompt when the dialog box closes. Use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with.

Input Coordinates
Specifies the coordinates to use for the attributes insertion point. X Specifies the X coordinate of the attribute's insertion point. Y Specifies the Y coordinate of the attribute's insertion point. Z Specifies the Z coordinate of the attribute's insertion point.

-ATTDEF
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Block Attributes

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current attribute modes: Invisible=current Constant=current Verify=current Preset=current Lock position=current Annotative =current Multiple line =current Enter an option to change [Invisible/Constant/Verify/Preset/Lock position/Annotative/Multiple lines] <done>: Enter attribute tag name: Enter any characters except spaces or exclamation points Enter attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Constant mode)

-ATTDEF | 99

Enter attribute prompt: Enter the text for the prompt line or press ENTER (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode) Enter default attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode) Specify location of multiline attribute: Specify a point (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Multiple line mode) Specify opposite corner: Specify a point or enter an option (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Multiple line mode)

Attribute Modes
The current value line indicates the current settings for each attribute mode (either Y for on or N for off). Entering i, c, v, p, l, a, or m toggles the modes on or off. Press ENTER when you have finished adjusting the mode settings. The AFLAGS on page 1177 system variable stores the current mode settings and can be used to set the default modes. Invisible Specifies that attribute values are displayed when you insert the block. ATTDISP on page 102 overrides Invisible mode. Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions. Verify Prompts for verification that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute. Lock Position Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized. NOTE In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be included in an action's selection set. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . Multiple Lines Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines of text. When this option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for the attribute.

Attribute Tag Name

Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclamation marks (!). Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase.

Attribute Prompt
Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. If you press ENTER, the attribute tag is used as the prompt. If you turn on Constant mode, this prompt is not displayed.

100 | Chapter 2 A Commands

NOTE For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters. If you need leading blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash (\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two backslashes.

Default Attribute Value

Specifies the default attribute value. The default attribute value appears when a block is inserted into your drawing. A default value is not required. If you turn on Constant mode, the Attribute Value prompt is displayed instead. When Multiple Line mode is off, -ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string. Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0.2000 Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER Specify paper text height <current>: Specify a height, or press ENTER The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is . For a description of each option, see TEXT on page 1040. NOTE For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters. If you need leading blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash (\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two backslashes. When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT on page 673.

Attribute Value (Constant Mode)

Specifies the value for a constant attribute. This prompt is displayed only if you turn on Constant mode. ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string. For a description of each option, see TEXT on page 1040. When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT on page 673.

Location of Multiline Attribute (Multiple Line Mode)

Specifies the first corner of the bounding box for the multiple-line text. This location is used as the starting point for the attribute.

-ATTDEF | 101

Opposite Corner (Multiple Line Mode)

As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is displayed to show the location and width of the multiple-line text. The arrow within the rectangle indicates the direction of the text flow.

ATTDISP
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Block Attributes

Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: View Display Attribute Display Command entry: 'attdisp for transparent use

Summary

The drawing is regenerated after you change the visibility settings unless REGENAUTO on page 870, which controls automatic regeneration, is off. The

102 | Chapter 2 A Commands

current visibility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE on page 1183 system variable.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal/ON/OFF] <current>: Normal Restores the visibility settings of each attribute. Visible attributes are displayed. Invisible attributes are not displayed. On Makes all attributes visible, overriding the original visibility settings. Off Makes all attributes invisible, overriding the original visibility settings.

ATTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Changes attribute information in a block.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group Edit Attributes flyout Single Menu: Modify Object Attribute Single

Summary
The Edit Attributes dialog box is displayed to edit attribute values for a specific block. If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, options are displayed to edit attribute values and properties independent of a block.

ATTEDIT | 103

Edit Attributes Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Changes attribute information in a block.

Summary
To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Block Name Indicates the name of the selected block. The value of each attribute contained in the block is displayed in this dialog box. List of Attributes Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block. Edit the attribute values. If the block contains additional attributes, click Prev or Next to navigate through the list. You cannot edit attribute values on locked layers.

104 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Multiple-line attributes display the In-Place Text Editor on page 674 with the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE on page 1182 system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the abbreviated version, or the full version. To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog box. Prev Displays the previous eight attribute values. Previous is available only if the selected block contains more than eight attributes and you used Next to display the additional attributes. Next Displays the next eight attribute values. If the block contains no additional attributes, Next is unavailable.

-ATTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Blocks

List of Prompts
If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. Edit attributes one at a time? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or press Enter to edit attributes one at a time, or enter n to edit attributes globally The following prompts filter the attributes to be changed based on attribute tag, current value, or object selection.

Yes
Edits attributes one at a time. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be visible and parallel to the current UCS. Attribute values are case sensitive.

-ATTEDIT | 105

The first attribute in the selection set is marked with an X. You can change any properties of the attribute you select. Enter an option [Value/Position/Height/Angle/Style/Layer/Color/Next] <N>: Enter the property to change, or press Enter for the next attribute If the original attribute was defined with aligned or fit text, the prompt does not include Angle. The Height option is omitted for aligned text. For each of the options except Next, ATTEDIT prompts for a new value. The X remains on the current attribute until you move to the next attribute.

Value
Changes or replaces an attribute value. Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press Enter Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value. Either string can be null. The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters. Replace Substitutes a new attribute value for the entire attribute value. If you press Enter, the attribute value is empty (null).

Position
Changes the text insertion point.

106 | Chapter 2 A Commands

If the attribute is aligned, ATTEDIT prompts for both ends of a new text baseline.

Height
Changes the text height.

When you specify a point, the height becomes the distance between the specified point and the start point of the text.

Angle
Changes the rotation angle.

If you specify a point, the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the specified point and the start point of the text.

Style
Changes the style setting.

-ATTEDIT | 107

Layer
Changes the layer.

Color
Changes the color. You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book. You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer or byblock. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in the color book, such as PANTONE 573.

Next
Moves to the next attribute in the selection set. If there are no more attributes, ATTEDIT ends.

No
Edits more than one attribute at a time. Global editing applies to both visible and invisible attributes. Editing attributes globally limits you to replacing a single text string with another text string. If you edit attributes one at a time, you can edit any or all of the attributes. Yes Edits only visible attributes. Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which normally are not visible and cannot be selected, enter a backslash (\). Select the attribute you want to change. Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters. No Edits attributes whether they are visible or not. Changes to attributes are not reflected immediately. The drawing is regenerated at the end of the command unless REGENAUTO on page 870, which controls automatic regeneration, is off. Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which normally are not visible, enter a backslash (\). The attributes that match the specified block name, attribute tag, and attribute value are selected.

108 | Chapter 2 A Commands

Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters.

ATTEXT (-ATTEXT)
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file.

List of Prompts
Enter extraction type or enable object selection [Cdf/Sdf/Dxf/Objects] <C>: Enter an option or press Enter CDF: Comma-Delimited File Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing. Commas separate the fields of each record. Single quotation marks enclose the character fields. In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name of an existing attribute extraction template file. In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The extract file's file name extension is .txt for CDF or SDF format. SDF: Space-Delimited File Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing. The fields of each record have a fixed width; therefore, field separators or character string delimiters are not used. In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name of an existing attribute extraction template file. In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The extract file's file name extension is .txt for CDF or SDF format. DXF: Drawing Interchange File Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. DXF-format extraction requires no template. The file name extension .dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files. In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The extract file's file name extension is .dxx for DXF format. Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract.

ATTEXT (-ATTEXT) | 109

ATTIPEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block. Use the abbreviated version for compatibility with previous AutoCAD for Mac releases and editing operations. Use the full version for additional text formatting options. NOTE Not all MTEXT formatting options are available for multiline attributes even with the full In-Place Editor.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select attribute to edit: Select an attribute within a block

ATTREDEF
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Redefines a block and updates associated attributes.

Summary
New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values. Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. Any old attributes that are not included in the new block definition are deleted.

110 | Chapter 2 A Commands

WARNING ATTREDEF removes any format or property changes made with the ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands. It also deletes any extended data associated with the block, and might affect dynamic blocks and blocks created by third-party applications.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter the name of the block you wish to redefine: Select objects for new block: Select objects: Insertion base point of new block: Specify a point

ATTSYNC
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified block definition.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group (expanded) Synchronize Attributes

Summary
You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the current attributes defined for the blocks.

ATTSYNC | 111

Use this command to update all instances of a block containing attributes that was redefined using the BLOCK or BEDIT commands. ATTSYNC does not change any values assigned to attributes in existing blocks. NOTE Use the ATTREDEF command to redefine and update blocks in one command. Entering ? displays a list of all block definitions in the drawing. Enter the name of the block you want to update. Pressing ENTER allows you to use your pointing device to select the block whose attributes you want to update. If a block you specify does not contain attributes or does not exist, an error message is displayed, and you are prompted to specify another block. WARNING ATTSYNC removes any format or property changes made with the ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands. It also deletes any extended data associated with the block, and might affect dynamic blocks and blocks created by third-party applications.

AUDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Repair a Damaged Drawing File

Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors.

Summary
For easy access, AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the Previous selection set. However, editing commands affect only the objects that belong to the current paper space or model space. If you set the AUDITCTL on page 1184 system variable to 1, AUDIT creates a text file describing problems and the action taken and places this report in the same folder as the current drawing, with the file extension .adt. If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix, use RECOVER on page 864 to retrieve the drawing and correct its errors.

112 | Chapter 2 A Commands

AUTOCONSTRAIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation of the objects relative to one another.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Auto Menu: Parametric AutoConstrain

Summary
You can apply geometric constraints to a selection set of geometry within the specified tolerance set using the AutoConstrain tab in the Constraint Settings dialog box on page 203. Specify the Settings option to change the types of constraints applied, the order in which they are applied, and the applicable tolerances. The Settings option displays the Constraint Settings dialog box with the Autoconstrain tab on page 204 selected.

AUTOCONSTRAIN | 113

114

B Commands

BASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group (expanded) Set Base Point Menu: Draw Block Base Command entry: base (or 'base for transparent use)

Summary
The base point is expressed as coordinates in the current UCS. When you insert or externally reference the current drawing into other drawings, this base point is used as the insertion base point.

115

BATTMAN
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Manages the attributes for a selected block definition.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group (expanded) Manage Attributes Menu: Modify Object Attribute Block Attribute Manager

Summary
The Block Attribute Manager is displayed. If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message is displayed. This command controls all attribute properties and settings of a selected block definition. Any changes to the attributes in a block definition are reflected in the block references.

Block Attribute Manager

Quick Reference
See also:

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Manages the attribute definitions for blocks in the current drawing.

116 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Summary
You can edit the attribute definitions in blocks, remove attributes from blocks, and change the order in which you are prompted for attribute values when inserting a block. Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default, Tag, Prompt, Default, Mode, and Annotative attribute properties are displayed in the attribute list. For each selected block, a description below the attribute list identifies the number of its instances in the current drawing and in the current layout. You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed in the list by right-clicking over the attribute headers and choosing the ones to display. Double-click an attribute to display the Attribute Editor dialog box, where you can modify attribute properties.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Select Block You can use your pointing device to select a block from the drawing area. When you choose Select Block, the dialog box closes until you select a block from the drawing or you cancel by pressing ESC.

Block Attribute Manager | 117

If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new block before you save the attribute changes you made, you are prompted to save the changes before selecting another block. Block Lists all block definitions in the current drawing that have attributes. Select the block whose attributes you want to modify. List of Attributes Displays the properties of each attribute in the selected block. Remove Removes the selected attribute from the block definition. If Synchronize Blocks is clicked and then Synchronize is clicked in the Synchronize Blocks dialog box, the attribute is removed from all instances of the block in the current drawing. Found in Drawing Reports the total number of instances of the selected block in the current drawing. Found in Current Layout Reports the number of instances of the selected block in the current model space or layout. Synchronize Blocks Updates all instances of the selected block with the attribute properties currently defined. This does not affect any values assigned to attributes in each block. Update Blocks Applies the changes made and closes the dialog box open.

Attribute Editor Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Allows you to edit attributes for a block definition.

118 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Summary
The Edit Attribute dialog box contains the following tabs:

Attribute Text Options on page 119 Properties on page 122

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Block Name Displays the name of the block whose attributes are to be edited.

Attribute Tab (Attribute Editor Dialog Box)

Defines how a value is assigned to an attribute and whether or not the assigned value is visible in the drawing area, and sets the string that prompts users to enter a value. The Attribute tab also displays the tag name that identifies the attribute.

Tag
Sets the identifier assigned to the attribute.

Prompt
Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you insert the block.

Attribute Editor Dialog Box | 119

Default
Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when you insert the block.

Options
Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears. Invisible Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If selected, hides the attribute value in the drawing area. If cleared, displays the attribute value. Constant Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default value. You cannot change this property. If a check mark is shown in the check box, the attribute is set to its default value and cannot be changed. If the check box is empty, you can assign a value to the attribute. Verify Turns value verification on and off. If selected, prompts you to verify the values you assign to the attribute when inserting a new instance of the block. If this option is cleared, verification is not performed. Preset Turns default value assignment on and off. If selected, sets the attribute to its default value when the block is inserted. If cleared, ignores the attribute's default value and prompts you to enter a value when inserting the block. Lock Location Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized. Multiple Lines Indicates whether the attribute was defined as a Multiple Lines attribute and can contain multiple lines of text.

Text Options Tab (Attribute Editor Dialog Box)

Sets the properties that define the way an attribute's text is displayed in the drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab.

120 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Multiline Text Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text. Not available for single-line attributes. Text Style Specifies the text style for attribute text. Default values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box. Backwards Specifies whether or not the text is displayed backwards.

Attribute Editor Dialog Box | 121

Upside Down Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside down. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Justification Specifies how attribute text is justified.

Properties Tab (Attribute Editor Dialog Box)

Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color, lineweight, and linetype for the attribute's line. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab.

Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on. Linetype Specifies the linetype of attribute text. Color Specifies the attribute's text color. Lineweight

122 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Specifies the lineweight of attribute text. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY on page 1406 system variable is off. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available.

BATTORDER
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Specifies the order of attributes for a block.

Summary
Displays the Attribute Order dialog box, which controls the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference. You can only use the BATTORDER command in the Block Editor on page 127.

Attribute Order Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Specifies the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference.

BATTORDER | 123

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Attribute Definitions Lists the attribute definitions in the current block. Drag an attribute definition up or down in the list to reorder it.

BCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Blocks Modify Blocks

Closes the Block Editor.

124 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Access Methods
Toolbar: Block Editor visor Close

Summary
Closes the Block Editor. If you have modified the block definition since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes.

BEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Blocks Modify Blocks

Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group (expanded) Edit Menu: Tools Block Editor Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area. Click Block Editor.

Summary
The Edit Block Definition dialog box on page 126 is displayed. Select a block definition to edit or enter a name for a new block definition to create, then click Edit Block to open the Block Editor. When the BLOCKEDITLOCK system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot be opened.

BEDIT | 125

The Block Editor is a separate environment for creating and changing block definitions for the current drawing. You can also use it to add dynamic behavior to blocks.

Edit Block Definition Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Define Blocks Modify Blocks

Select from a list of block definitions that are saved in the drawing to edit in the Block Editor. You can also enter a name for a new block definition to create in the Block Editor.

Summary
When you click OK, the Edit Block Definition dialog box closes, and the Block Editor is displayed.

If you selected a block definition from the list, that block definition is displayed and is available for editing in the Block Editor.

126 | Chapter 3 B Commands

If you entered a name for a new block definition, the Block Editor is displayed, and you can start adding objects to the block definition.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Block to create or edit Specifies the name of the block to edit or create in the Block Editor. If you select <Current Drawing>, the current drawing is opened in the Block Editor. Name List Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. When you select a block definition from the list, the name is displayed in the Name box. When you click Edit Block, this block definition is opened in the Block Editor. When you select <Current Drawing>, the current drawing is opened in the Block Editor. Preview Displays a preview of the selected block definition. A lightning bolt icon indicates that the block is a dynamic block. Description Displays the description of the selected block definition.

Block Editor
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Blocks Modify Blocks

The Block Editor contains a special authoring area in which you can draw and edit geometry as you would in the drawing area.

Block Editor | 127

Summary
You use the Block Editor to define the objects and behavior for a block definition. The following commands are used for editing blocks and are available only in the Block Editor:

BATTORDER BCLOSE BSAVE BSAVEAS

When the BLOCKEDITLOCK system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot be opened.

Block Editor Visor

Provides tools for adding attributes to the block open for edit, save changes to a block, and close the Block Editor. Define Attribute (ATTDEF on page 95) Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. Close (BCLOSE on page 124) Closes the Block Editor. Save (BSAVE on page 147) Saves the current block definition. Save New (BSAVEAS on page 148) Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.

-BEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Blocks Modify Blocks

128 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Summary
If you select a block in a drawing and enter -bedit at the Command prompt, the selected block is opened in the Block Editor on page 127. If nothing is selected, the following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed Enter block name on page 129 or [? on page 129]: Enter a name or ?

Block Name
Specifies the name of a block saved in the current drawing to open in the Block Editor or specifies the name of a new block to create.

?List Previously Defined Blocks

Lists the block names in the text window. Enter block(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press Enter

BHATCH
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill.

Summary
The BHATCH command has been renamed to HATCH. If you enter bhatch, the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 472is displayed. If you enter -bhatch or -hatch, Command prompts are displayed.

BHATCH | 129

BLIPMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Controls the display of marker blips.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'blipmode for transparent use

Summary
When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+) appears where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default.

To remove marker blips, use REDRAW, REGEN, ZOOM, PAN, or other commands that redraw or regenerate the drawing.

BLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Blocks

130 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Creates a block definition from selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group Create Menu: Draw Block Make

Summary
The Define Block dialog box is displayed. If you enter -block at the Command prompt, options are displayed. You create a block definition by selecting objects, specifying an insertion point, and giving it a name.

Define Block Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Define Blocks

Defines and names a block.

Define Block Dialog Box | 131

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system or the program for other purposes. The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing.

Preview
If an existing block is selected under Name, displays a preview of the block.

Base Point
Specifies an insertion base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0. Specify On-Screen Prompts you to specify the base point when the dialog box is closed.

132 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Pick Insertion Base Point Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing. X Specifies the X coordinate value. Y Specifies the Y coordinate value. Z Specifies the Z coordinate value.

Objects
Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block. Specify On-Screen Prompts you to specify the objects when the dialog box is closed. Select Objects Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects for the block. When you finish selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box. Retain Objects Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create the block. Convert to Block Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you create the block. Delete Objects Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block. Objects Selected Displays the number of selected objects.

Define Block Dialog Box | 133

Behavior
Specifies the behavior of the block. Annotative Specifies that the block is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Match Block Orientation to Layout Specifies that the orientation of the block references in paper space viewports matches the orientation of the layout. This option is unavailable if the Annotative option is cleared. Scale Uniformly Specifies whether or not the block reference is prevented from being non-uniformly scaled. Allow Exploding Specifies whether or not the block reference can be exploded.

Units
Specifies units for the block. Block Unit Specifies the insertion units for the block reference.

Description
Specifies the text description of the block.

Open in Block Editor

Opens the current block definition in the Block Editor on page 127 when you click OK.

-BLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Blocks

134 | Chapter 3 B Commands

If you enter -block at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name or ?

Block Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system and the program for other purposes if the system variable EXTNAMES is set to 1. If you enter the name of an existing block, you are prompted as follows: Redefine Block Reference By redefining a block, you automatically update all references to that block. Attributes attached to existing block references remain unchanged in the drawing. However, new insertions of the block do not prompt for attributes unless the attribute definitions are included in the new block definition. Use the ATTREDEF on page 110 command to update the attributes of an existing block insert. Specify Insertion Base Point The point specified as the base point is used for subsequent insertions of the block. Typically, a base point is the center of the block or its lower-left corner. The base point is also the point about which you can rotate the block during insertion. A block with 0 rotation is oriented according to the UCS in effect when it was created. Entering a 3D point inserts the block at a specific elevation. Omitting the Z coordinate uses the current elevation.

Annotative: Enter a to create an block. If you enter yes, the block becomes annotative.

Match Orientation to Layout in Paper Space Viewports If you enter yes, the blocks orientation in paper space viewports will match the orientation of the layout.

-BLOCK | 135

Select Objects If you specify the insertion base point, you are prompted to select the objects. The program defines a block using the objects selected, the insertion base point, and the name provided, and then erases the selected objects from the drawing. You can restore the deleted objects by entering the OOPS command immediately after BLOCK.

The insertion base point becomes the origin of the block's coordinate system, which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, its coordinate system is aligned parallel to the current UCS. Thus, you can insert a block at any orientation in space by setting the UCS first.

?List Previously Defined Blocks

Lists the block names in the text window. Enter Blocks to List In the list, external references (xrefs) are indicated with the notation Xref: resolved. In addition, externally dependent blocks (blocks in an xref) are indicated with the notation xdep: XREFNAME, where xrefname is the name of an externally referenced drawing. The following terms are used in the list:

User Blocks: Number of user-defined blocks in the list. External References: Number of xrefs in the list. Dependent Blocks: Number of externally dependent blocks in the list. Unnamed Blocks: Number of unnamed (anonymous) blocks in the drawing.

136 | Chapter 3 B Commands

BMPOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Export Raster Files

Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format.

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. A bitmap file that contains the objects you select is created. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), Command prompts are displayed.

BOUNDARY
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area.

Access Methods

Button

BMPOUT | 137

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) Boundary Menu: Draw Boundary

Summary
The Boundary Creation dialog box is displayed. If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, options are displayed. Each point that you specify identifies the surrounding objects and creates a separate region or polyline.

Boundary Creation Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for creating a region or polyline using a specified point within an area enclosed by objects.

138 | Chapter 3 B Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Pick Points
Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point.

Island Detection
Controls whether boundary detects internal closed boundaries, called islands.

Object Type
Controls the type of the new boundary object. boundary creates the boundary as a region or a polyline object.

Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects boundary analyzes when defining a boundary from a specified point. Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything in the current viewport extents. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set. New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set. boundary includes only the objects that can be used to create a region or closed polyline when it constructs the new boundary set. For more information about the options in this dialog box, see HATCH.

Boundary Creation Dialog Box | 139

-BOUNDARY
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. Specify internal point or [Advanced options]: Specify a point or enter a

Internal Point
Creates a region or polyline from existing objects that form an enclosed area. Specify a point inside the area.

Advanced Options
Sets the method BOUNDARY uses to create the boundary. Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]: Enter an option or press Enter to return to the previous prompt Boundary Set Defines the set of objects boundary analyzes when it creates a boundary from a specified point. For information about defining a boundary set at the Command prompt, see the HATCH Command prompt option. Island Detection Specifies whether boundary uses objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. For information about specifying island detection at the Command prompt, see the HATCH Command prompt option. Object Type Specifies the type of object that boundary creates.

Region Polyline

140 | Chapter 3 B Commands

BOX
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid Box

Creates a 3D solid box.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Solid Primitives flyout Box Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Box

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner or [Center]: Specify a point or enterc for center Specify other corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify the other corner of the box or enteran option If the other corner of the box is specified with a Z value that differs from the first corner, then no height prompt is displayed. Specify height or [2Point] <default>: Specify the height or enter 2P for the 2 Point option Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis. The base of the box is always drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS (workplane). The height of the box is specified in the Z-axis direction. You can enter both positive and negative values for the height.

BOX | 141

Center
Creates the box by using a specified center point.

Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length.

Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.

Cube
Creates a box with sides of equal length.

142 | Chapter 3 B Commands

Length
Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. If you enter values, the length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. If you pick a point to specify the length, you also specify the rotation in the XY plane.

2Point
Specifies that the height of the box is the distance between the two specified points.

BREAK
Quick Reference
See also:

Break and Join Objects

Breaks the selected object between two points.

BREAK | 143

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Modify tool group (expanded) Break Toolbar: Drafting tool set Modify tool group (expanded) Break at Point Menu: Modify Break

Summary
You can create a gap between two specified points on an object, breaking it into two objects. If the points are off of an object, they are automatically projected on to the object. break is often used to create space for a block or text.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point (1) on an object The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If you select the object by using your pointing device, the program both selects the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next prompt, you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the first point. Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second break point (2) or enter f Second Break Point Specifies the second point to use to break the object.

144 | Chapter 3 B Commands

First Point Overrides the original first point with the new point that you specify. Specify first break point: Specify second break point:

The portion of the object is erased between the two points that you specify. If the second point is not on the object, the nearest point on the object is selected; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline, specify the second point beyond the end to be removed. To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the second point. Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other object types can be split into two objects or have one end removed. The program converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting counterclockwise from the first to the second point.

You can also break selected objects at a single point with the Break at Point tool. Valid objects include lines, open polylines, and arcs. Closed objects such as circles cannot be broken at a single point.

BREAK | 145

BREP
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Original Forms of Composite Solids

Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces.

Summary
When a solid loses the history of the original parts from which it was created, the original parts can no longer be selected and modified. BREP also removes surface associativity. When a surface loses associativity it loses any mathematical expressions or information about how the surface was created.

146 | Chapter 3 B Commands

BROWSER
Quick Reference
See also:

Get Started with Internet Access

Launches the default web browser defined in your system's registry.

Summary
Pressing Enter displays your web browser, which automatically connects to the location you specify. Because browser does not append http:// to web locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser.

BSAVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Blocks Within a Drawing

Saves the current block definition.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Block Editor visor Save

Summary
Saves changes to the current block definition. You can only use the BSAVE command in the Block Editor on page 127.

BROWSER | 147

BSAVEAS
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Blocks Within a Drawing

Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Block Editor visor Save As

Summary
Displays the Save Block As dialog box on page 148. You can only use the BSAVEAS command in the Block Editor on page 127.

Save Block As Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Create Blocks Within a Drawing

Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.

148 | Chapter 3 B Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Block Name Specifies a new name under which to save a copy of the current block definition. Save Block as Drawing Saves the geometry in the Block Editor as a drawing file. Selecting an existing drawing file on disk overwrites the file. By default, the block name specified is used as the drawing file name. Block List Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. Preview Displays a preview of the selected block definition. Description Displays the description saved with the block definition.

Save Block As Dialog Box | 149

150

C Commands

CAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'cal for transparent use

Summary
CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS. You can insert AutoLISP variables into the arithmetic expression and assign the value of the expression back to an AutoLISP variable. You can use these arithmetic and vector expressions in any command that expects points, vectors, or numbers.

151

Understand Syntax of Expressions

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of precedence:

Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division second, and addition and subtraction last Operators of equal precedence from left to right

Numeric Expressions
Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with the operators in the following table. Numeric operators Operator
() ^ *,/ +, -

Operation
Groups expressions Indicates exponentiation Multiplies, divides Adds, subtracts

The following are examples of numeric expressions: 3 3 + 0.6 (5.8^2) + PI

152 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Vector Expressions
A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions combined with the operators in the following table. Vector operators Operator
() &

Operation
Groups expressions Determines the vector product of vectors (as a vector) [a,b,c]&[x,y,z] = [ (b*z) - (c*y) , (c*x) - (a*z) , (a*y) - (b*x) ] Determines the scalar product of vectors (as a real number) [a,b,c]*[x,y,z] = ax + by + cz Multiplies, divides a vector by a real number a*[x,y,z] = [a*x,a*y,a*z] Adds, subtracts vectors (points) [a,b,c] + [x,y,z] = [a+x,b+y,c+z]

*, /

+,-

The following are examples of vector expressions: A+[1,2,3] provides the point located [1,2,3] units relative to point A. The expression [2<45<45] + [2<45<0] - [1.02, 3.5, 2] adds two points and subtracts a third point. The first two points are expressed in spherical coordinates.

Format Feet and Inches

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Enter feet and inches using the following format: feet'-inches" or feet' inches" or feet'inches"

Format Feet and Inches | 153

You can separate feet, inches, and fractional inches with a dash, a space, or nothing. You can use any of the following syntax cases to enter valid feet-inch formatted values:

5' or 60 5'-9 or 5' 9 or 5'9 5'-1/2 or 5' 1/2 or 5'1/2 5'-9-1/2 or 5' 9-1/2 or 5'9-1/2 5'-9 1/2 or 5' 9 1/2 or 5'9 1/2

To designate inches for linear calculations, entering double quotes () is optional. For example, instead of entering 5'9-1/2, you could enter 5'9-1/2. WARNING With imperial units, CAL interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a unit separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include at least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9 from 5', enter 5' -9 rather than 5'-9.

Format Angles
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The default units for angles are decimal degrees. Enter angles using the following format: <degrees>d<minutes>'<seconds> You must enter 0d when entering an angle that is less than 1 degree (minutes and seconds only). You can omit the minutes or seconds if they are zero. Enter a number followed by r to enter angles in radians. Enter a number followed by g to enter angles in grads. The following examples show ways of entering angles: 5d10'20" 0d10'20"

154 | Chapter 4 C Commands

124.6r 14g Angles entered in any format are converted to decimal degrees. Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees.

Use Points and Vectors

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers. A point defines a location in space, but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space. Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions, such as nor and vec, return a vector.

Formatting Points and Vectors

A point or vector is a set of three real expressions enclosed in brackets ([ ]): [r1,r2,r3] The notation p1, p2, and so forth designates points. The notation v1, v2, and so forth designates vectors. In drawings, points are displayed as dots, and vectors are displayed as lines with arrows. CAL supports points expressed in all formats. Point formats Coordinate system
Polar Cylindrical Spherical Relative

Point format
[dist<angle] [dist<angle,z] [dist<angle1<angle2] Uses the @ prefix [@x,y,z]

Use Points and Vectors | 155

Point formats Coordinate system

WCS (instead of UCS)

Point format
Uses the * prefix [*x,y,z]

You can omit the following components of a point or vector: coordinate values of zero and a comma immediately preceding the right bracket (]). The following are valid points: [1,2] is the same as [1,2,0] [,,3] is the same as [0,0,3] [ ] is the same as [0,0,0] In the following example, the point is entered in the relative spherical coordinate system with respect to the (WCS). The distance is 1+2=3; the angles are 10+20=30 degrees and 45 degrees, 20 minutes. [ *1+2<10+20<45d20"] The following is a valid point that contains arithmetic expressions as its components: [2*(1.0+3.3),0.4-1.1,2*1.4] The following example uses the Endpoint object snap and the vector [2,0,3] to calculate a point that is offset from a selected endpoint: end + [2,,3] The calculated point is offset 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Z direction relative to the selected endpoint.

Use AutoLISP Variables

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

You can use AutoLISP variables within arithmetic expressions. The variables must be one of the following types: real, integer, or 2D or 3D point (vector).

156 | Chapter 4 C Commands

This example defines a point located 5 units in the X direction and 1 unit in the Y direction from the point stored in AutoLISP variable A. A+[5,1] If you enter an AutoLISP variable with a name containing a character with special meaning in CAL, such as +, -, *, or /, enclose the variable name in apostrophes ('), for example: 'number-of-holes'

Assigning Values to AutoLISP Variables

To assign a value to an AutoLISP variable, precede the arithmetic expression with the variable name and the equal sign (=). Later, you can use the value of this variable for other calculations. This example saves the values of two expressions in AutoLISP variables P1 and R1. Command: cal >> Expression: P1=cen+[1,0] >> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc Command: cal >> Expression: R1=dist(end,end)/3 >> Select entity for END snap: Select an object with an endpoint This example uses the values of variables P1 and R1: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: 'cal >> Expression: P1+[0,1] Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <last>: 'cal >> Expression: R1+0.5

Use System Variables in Calculations

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

You can use the getvar function to read the value of a system variable.

Use System Variables in Calculations | 157

The syntax is
getvar(variable_name)

The following example uses getvar to obtain the point that is the center of the view in the current viewport. getvar(viewctr) With this method, you can also access the user system variables, USERI1-5 and USERR1-5. For example, to retrieve the value stored in USERR2, enter the following: getvar(userr2)

Convert Units of Measurement

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The cvunit function converts either a number or a point from one unit of measurement to another. See the acad.unt file for a list of units that you can convert. The syntax is
cvunit(value, from_unit, to_unit)

The following example converts the value 1 from inches to centimeters: cvunit(1,inch,cm)

Use Standard Numeric Functions

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

158 | Chapter 4 C Commands

CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table. Numeric functions Function
sin(angle) cos(angle) tang(angle) asin(real) acos(real) atan(real) ln(real) log(real) exp(real) exp10(real) sqr(real) sqrt(real) abs(real) round(real) trunc(real) r2d(angle)

Description
Sine of the angle Cosine of the angle Tangent of the angle Arcsine of the number; the number must be between -1 and 1 Arccosine of the number; the number must be between -1 and 1 Arctangent of the number Natural log of the number Base-10 log of the number Natural exponent of the number Base-10 exponent of the number Square of the number Square root of the number; the number must be nonnegative Absolute value of the number Number rounded to the nearest integer Integer portion of the number Angles in radians converted to degrees; for example, r2d(pi) converts the pi radians to 180 degrees Angles in degrees converted to radians; for example, d2r(180) converts 180 degrees to radians and returns the value of pi The constant pi

d2r(angle)

Use Standard Numeric Functions | 159

Calculate a Vector from Two Points

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The functions vec and vec1 calculate a vector from two points. vec(p1,p2) Provides the vector from point p1 to point p2. vec1(p1,p2) Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2. The following example uses CAL to move selected objects 3 units in the direction from the center of one selected circle to the center of another selected circle: Command: move Select objects Specify base point or displacement: 'cal >> Expression: 3*vec1(cen,cen) Select entity for CEN snap: Specify a circle or an arc Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>: Specify a point or press Enter The following examples illustrate the meaning of vector and point calculations. Examples of vector and point calculations Expression
vec(a,b) vec1(a,b) L*vec1(a,b)

Meaning
Determines vector translation from point a to point b. Determines unit vector direction from point a to point b. Determines vector of length L in the direction from point a to point b. Determines point b, which is a translation of the point a through vector v. Determines point b located 5 units away from point a at an angle of 20 degrees. Note that [5<20] is a vector in polar coordinates.

a+v

a+[5<20]

160 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Calculate the Length of a Vector

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The abs function calculates the length of a vector. abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v, a nonnegative real number. In spherical coordinates (dist<ang<ang), the dist is the length of the vector. The following example calculates the length of the vector [1,2,3]: abs([1,2,3])

Obtain a Point by Cursor

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

To enter a point using the pointing device, use the cur function. The program prompts you to specify a point and uses the coordinate values of the point in the expression. The point coordinate values are expressed in terms of the current UCS. The cur function sets the value of theLASTPOINT system variable. The following example adds the vector [3.6,2.4,0]the result of 1.2*[3,2]to the point you select. This expression produces a point that is offset from the selected point. cur+1.2*[3,2]

Calculate the Length of a Vector | 161

Obtain the Last-Specified Point

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Use the character in the expression to obtain the coordinate of the last point, as shown in the following example: Command: line Specify first point: 'cal >> Expression: cen+[0,1] >> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 'cal >> Expression: +3*vec1(cen,cen) The first point of the line is 1 unit in the Y direction from the center of the first selected circle. The second point of the line is 3 units away from the first point. The direction of the line is from the center of the first selected circle to the center of the second selected circle.

Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

You can use Snap modes as parts of arithmetic expressions. The program prompts you to select an object and returns the coordinate of the appropriate snap point. Using arithmetic expressions with Snap modes greatly simplifies entering coordinates relative to other objects.

162 | Chapter 4 C Commands

When you use these Snap modes, enter only the three-character name. For example, when you use the Center Snap mode, enter cen. CAL Snap modes set the value of the LASTPOINT system variable. CAL Snap modes Abbreviation
END INS INT MID CEN NEA NOD QUA PER TAN

Snap mode
ENDPOINT INSERT INTERSECTION MIDPOINT CENTER NEAREST NODE QUADRANT PERPENDICULAR TANGENT

The following example uses the Center and Endpoint Snap modes in a CAL expression: (cen+end)/2 CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. It then determines the midpoint between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected object. Using the Midpoint Snap mode, in the following example CAL prompts for an object and returns a point 1 unit in the Y direction from the midpoint of the selected object: mid+[,1] The following example uses the Endpoint Snap mode to calculate the centroid of a triangle defined by three endpoints: (end+end+end)/3

Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions | 163

Convert Points Between UCS and WCS

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Normally, the program assumes all coordinates to be relative to the current UCS. The following functions convert points between UCS and WCS. w2u(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the WCS to the current UCS. u2w(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the current UCS to the WCS. You can use w2u to find the WCS origin in terms of the current UCS: w2u([0,0,0])

Filtering the X, Y, and Z Components of a Point or Vector

The following functions filter the X, Y, and Z components of a point or vector. Point-filter functions Function
xyof(p1) xzof(p1) yzof(p1) xof(p1) yof(p1) zof(p1) rxof(p1) ryof(p1) rzof(p1)

Description
X and Y components of a point; Z component is set to 0.0 X and Z components of a point; Y component is set to 0.0 Y and Z components of a point; X component is set to 0.0 X component of a point; Y and Z components are set to 0.0 Y component of a point; X and Z components are set to 0.0 Z component of a point; X and Y components are set to 0.0 X component of a point Y component of a point Z component of a point

164 | Chapter 4 C Commands

The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in spherical coordinates: zof([2<45<45]) The following example provides a point whose X and Y coordinate values are taken from point a and the Z coordinate value from point b: xyof(a)+zof(b)

Calculate a Point on a Line

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line. You can specify the location of the point on the line either by its distance from the first point or parametrically by a t parameter. pld(p1,p2,dist) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2. The parameter dist defines the distance of the point from the point p1. plt(p1,p2,t) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2. The parameter t defines the parametric location of the point on the line. The following are examples of the parameter t: If t=0 the point is p1 If t=0.5 the point is the midpoint between p1 and p2 If t=1 the point is p2

Rotate a Point About an Axis

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

Calculate a Point on a Line | 165

The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point. rot(p,origin,ang) Rotates point p through angle ang about the Z axis passing through the point origin, as shown in the following example:

rot(p,AxP1,AxP2,ang) Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis passing through points AxP1 and AxP2, as shown in the following example. The axis is oriented from the first point to the second point.

Obtain an Intersection Point

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The ill and ilp functions determine intersection points. ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) Determines the intersection point between two lines (p1,p2) and (p3,p4). All points are considered three-dimensional.

166 | Chapter 4 C Commands

ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4,p5) Determines the intersection point between a line (p1,p2) and a plane passing through three points (p3,p4,p5).

Calculate a Distance
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2). dpl(p,p1,p2) Determines the shortest distance between point p and the line passing through points p1 and p2.

dpp(p,p1,p2,p3) Determines the distance from a point p to a plane defined by three points (p1,p2,p3). dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2).

Calculate a Distance | 167

The following example returns half the distance between the centers of two selected objects: dist(cen,cen)/2 The following example finds the distance between the point 3,2,4 and a plane you define by selecting three endpoints: dpp([3,2,4],end, end, end)

Obtain a Radius
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The rad function determines the radius of a selected object. rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object can be a circle, an arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment. The following example uses rad with the CIRCLE command. The radius of the new circle is two-thirds of the radius of the selected polyline arc segment: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: cen of Select the circle Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <last>: 'cal

168 | Chapter 4 C Commands

>> Expression: 2/3*rad >> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD function: Select the circle

Obtain an Angle
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The ang function determines the angle between two lines. Angles are measured counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis, in the two-dimensional case, or to a user-specified axis, in the three-dimensional case. ang(v) Determines the angle between the X axis and vector v. The vector v is considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. ang(p1,p2) Determines the angle between the X axis and the line (p1,p2), oriented from p1 to p2. The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. ang(apex,p1,p2) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2). The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. ang(apex,p1,p2,p) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2). The lines are considered 3D. The last parameter, point p, is used to define the orientation of the angle. The angle is measured counterclockwise with respect to the axis going from apex to p. The following examples show how angles are measured.

Obtain an Angle | 169

You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the ang function, as shown in the following example: Command: cal >> Expression: ang(end,end,end) Select the apex of the angle, and then select the two opposite vertices.

Calculate a Normal Vector

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

170 | Chapter 4 C Commands

The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to a line or plane), not a point. The vector defines the direction of the normal, not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain another point. nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc segment. This normal vector is the Z coordinate of the object coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object. nor(v) Determines the two-dimensional unit normal vector to vector v. Both vectors are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. The orientation of the resulting normal vector points to the left of the original vector v. nor(p1,p2) Determines the 2D unit normal vector to line p1,p2. The line is oriented from p1 to p2. The orientation of the resulting normal vector points to the left from the original line (p1,p2). nor(p1,p2,p3) Determines the 3D unit normal vector to a plane defined by the three points p1, p2, and p3. The orientation of the normal vector is such that the given points go counterclockwise with respect to the normal. The following illustrations show how normal vectors are calculated:

Calculate a Normal Vector | 171

The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected object. The program displays the object in plan view and does not distort the object by the parallel projection. Command: vpoint Current view direction: VIEWDIR=current Specify a view point or [Rotate] <display compass and tripod>: 'cal >> Expression: nor >> Select circle, arc or polyline for NOR function:

Use Shortcut Functions

Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Command Prompt Calculator

The functions in the table are shortcuts for commonly used expressions that combine a function with the Endpoint Snap mode. Shortcut functions Function
dee ille

Shortcut for
dist(end,end) ill(end,end,end,end)

Description
Distance between two endpoints Intersection of two lines defined by four endpoints Midpoint between two endpoints Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to two endpoints Point at a distance along a line determined by two endpoints (see pld) Point at a parametric location on a line determined by two endpoints (see plt) Vector from two endpoints

mee nee

(end+end)/2 nor(end,end)

pldee (d)

pld(d,end,end)

pltee (t)

plt(t,end,end)

vee

vec(end,end)

172 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Shortcut functions Function

vee1

Shortcut for
vec1(end,end)

Description
Unit vector from two endpoints

CHAMFER
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Chamfers

Bevels the edges of objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Modify tool group Chamfer Menu: Modify Chamfer

Summary
The distances and angles that you specify are applied in the order that you select the objects.

You can chamfer lines, polylines, rays, and xlines. You can also chamfer 3D solids and surfaces. If you select a mesh to chamfer, you can choose to convert it to a solid or surface before completing the operation.

CHAMFER | 173

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. (TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current, Dist2 = current Select first line on page 174 or [Undo on page 175/Polyline on page 175/Distance on page 175/Angle on page 176/Trim on page 176/mEthod on page 176/Multiple on page 176]: Use an object selection method or enter an option

First Line
Specifies the first of two edges required to define a 2D chamfer, or the edge of a 3D solid to chamfer. If you select lines or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the chamfer line. You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override the current chamfer distances with a value of 0. If the selected objects are line segments of a 2D polyline, they must be adjacent or separated by no more than one segment. If they're separated by another polyline segment, CHAMFER deletes the segment that separates them and replaces it with the chamfer. If you select an edge on a 3D solid, you must indicate which one of the two surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface. Enter Surface Selection Option Entering o or pressing Enter sets the selected surface as the base surface. Entering n selects either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge. After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances, select the edges of the base surface to chamfer. You can select edges individually or all the edges at once.

Edge Selects an individual edge to chamfer.

174 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Loop Switches to Edge Loop mode. Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface.

Undo
Reverses the previous action in the command.

Polyline
Chamfers an entire 2D polyline. The intersecting polyline segments are chamfered at each vertex of the polyline. Chamfers become new segments of the polyline. If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered.

Distance
Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.

CHAMFER | 175

If you set both distances to zero, CHAMFER extends or trims the two lines so they end at the same point.

Angle
Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle for the second line.

Trim
Controls whether CHAMFER trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints. NOTE Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to 0. If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect, CHAMFER extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0, the chamfer is created without trimming the selected lines.

Method
Controls whether CHAMFER uses two distances or a distance and an angle to create the chamfer.

Multiple
Chamfers the edges of more than one set of objects.

Expression
Controls the chamfer distance with a mathematical expression. See Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager for a list of operators and functions allowed.

176 | Chapter 4 C Commands

CHAMFEREDGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Chamfers

Bevels the edges of 3D solids and surfaces.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Edit tool group Chamfer Edge Menu: Modify Solid Editing Chamfer Edges

Summary
You can select more than one edge at a time, as long as they belong to the same face. Enter a value for the chamfer distance or click and drag the chamfer grips.

CHAMFEREDGE | 177

List of Prompts
Select an Edge Selects a single solid or surface edge to chamfer. Distance 1 Sets the distance of the first chamfer edge from the selected edge. The default value is 1. Distance 2 Sets the distance of the second chamfer edge from the selected edge. The default value is 1. Loop Chamfers all edges on a single face. Expression Controls the chamfer distance with a mathematical expression. See Control Geometry with the Parameters Manager for a list of operators and functions allowed.

CHANGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Changes the properties of existing objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed Select objects: Specify change point or [Properties]: Specify a new point, or press Enter to enter new values

Specify Objects
If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you get varying results depending on the object selection sequence. The easiest way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only objects other than lines in a selection set. Except for zero-thickness lines, the objects selected must be parallel to the current user coordinate system (UCS).

Change Point or Values

Changes the selected objects. The result depends on the type of objects you select.

178 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Lines Moves the endpoints of the selected lines that are closest to the change point to the new point, unless Ortho mode is on. If Ortho mode is on, the selected lines are modified so that they become parallel to either the X or the Y axis; their endpoints are not moved to the specified coordinate.

Circles Changes the circle radius. If you selected more than one circle, the prompt is repeated for the next circle.

Text Changes text location and other properties. Specify New Text Insertion Point Relocates the text. Attribute Definitions Changes the text and text properties of an attribute that is not part of a block. Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block. Specifying a new location relocates the block. Pressing Enter leaves the block in its original location.

Properties
Modifies properties of existing objects. NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. You can change several properties at a time. The Enter Property to Change prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed.

CHANGE | 179

True Color. Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. The integer values range from 0 to 255 seperated by commas. Color Book. Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.

Elev Changes the Z-axis elevation of 2D objects. You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same Z value.

Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects. Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects. If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the linetype.

Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects. Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects. Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects. Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object has no effect.

Transparency Changes the transparency level of selected objects.

180 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Set the transparency to ByLayer or ByBlock, or enter a value from 0 to 90. Material Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached. Annotative Changes the property of the selected objects.

CHPROP
Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Changes the properties of an object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Enter property to change [Color on page 181/LAyer on page 181/LType on page 182/ltScale on page 182/LWeight on page 182/Thickness on page 182/TRansparency on page 182/Material on page 182/Annotative on page 182]: NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. If you select several objects with different values for the property you want to change, varies is displayed as the current value.

Color
Changes the color of the selected objects. For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.

Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.

CHPROP | 181

Ltype
Changes the linetype of the selected objects. If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the linetype.

Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.

Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.

Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects. Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object has no effect.

Transparency
Changes the transparency level of selected objects. Set the transparency to ByLayer or ByBlock, or enter a value from 0 to 90.

Material
Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached.

Annotative
Changes the property of the selected objects.

CIRCLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Circles

182 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Creates a circle.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group Circle flyout Menu: Draw Circle

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point on page 183 for circle or [3P on page 184/2P on page 184/Ttr (tan tan radius) on page 185]: Specify a point or enter an option

Center Point
Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius. Radius Defines the radius of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a point. For example:

Diameter Defines the diameter of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a second point. For example:

CIRCLE | 183

3P (Three Points)
Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference. For example:

Tan, Tan, Tan

Creates a circle tangent to three objects. For example:

2P (Two Points)
Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter. For example:

184 | Chapter 4 C Commands

TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)

Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. The program draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points. For example:

CLEANSCREENON
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Clears the screen of the menu bar and all palettes.

CLEANSCREENON | 185

Access Methods

Button

Menu: View Clean Screen Command entry: Cmd-0 Toolbar: Status bar Clean Screen

Summary
The screen displays only the menu bar, the Model and layout tabs at the bottom of the drawing, the status bars, and the command line. Use CLEANSCREENOFF to restore the display of interface items that were hidden by CLEANSCREENON.

CLEANSCREENOFF
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: View Clean Screen Command entry: Cmd-0 Toolbar: Status bar Clean Screen

186 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Summary
Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used. Use CLEANSCREENON to clear the screen of most AutoCAD user interface elements.

CLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Open a Drawing

Closes the current drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: File Close

Summary
The current drawing is closed. If you modified the drawing since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes. You can close a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes. To save changes to a read-only file, you must use the SAVEAS command.

CLOSEALL
Quick Reference
See also:

Open a Drawing

Closes all currently open drawings.

CLOSE | 187

Summary
All open drawings are closed. A message box is displayed for each unsaved drawing, in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it.

COLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Current Color

Sets the color for new objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Color Command entry: 'color for transparent use

Summary
The Color Palette dialog box is displayed. If you enter -color at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Color Palette Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Current Color

Defines the color of objects.

Summary
You can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.

188 | Chapter 4 C Commands

List of Tabs
The following tabs are displayed.

Index Color True Color Color Books

Index Color Tab (Color Palette Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Current Color

Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors.

Color Palette Dialog Box | 189

List of Options
The following options are displayed. AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Palettes Specifies a color from the AutoCAD Color Index. If you hover over a color, the number of the color and its red, green, blue value are displayed below the palette. Click a color to select it, or enter the color number or name in the Color box. The large palette displays colors 10 through 249. The second palette displays colors 1 through 9; these colors have names as well as numbers. The third palette displays colors 250 through 255; these colors are shades of gray. Index Color Indicates the ACI color number when you hover over a color. Red, Green, Blue Indicates the RGB color value when you hover over a color. Bylayer Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. When BYLAYER is selected, the color of the current layer is displayed in the Old and New color swatches. Byblock Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black, depending on your background color) until you group the objects into a block and insert the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current Color setting. NOTE The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK options do not apply to the LIGHT command. Color Specifies a color name, BYLAYER or BYBLOCK color, or an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) number of 1 through 255. The New color swatch shows the most recently selected color. Old Color Swatch Displays the previously selected color. New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color.

190 | Chapter 4 C Commands

True Color Tab (Color Palette Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Current Color

Specifies color settings using true colors.

Summary
Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue (RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true color functionality. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Color Palette Dialog Box | 191

HSL Color Model

Specifies the HSL color model for selecting colors. Hue, saturation, and luminance are properties of colors. By manipulating the values of these properties, you can specify a wide range of colors. Hue (H) Specifies the hue of a color. Hues represent a specific wavelength of light within the visible spectrum. To specify a hue, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Hue box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid hue values are from 0 to 360 degrees. Saturation (S) Specifies the purity of a color. High saturation causes a color to look more pure while low saturation causes a color to look washed-out. To specify color saturation, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid saturation values are from 0 to 100%. Luminance (L) Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance, use the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box. Valid luminance values are from 0 to 100%. A value of 0% represents the color black, 100% represents white, and 50% represents the optimal brightness for the color. Adjusting this value also affects the RGB value. Color Spectrum Specifies the hue and purity of a color. To specify a hue, move the crosshairs from side to side over the color spectrum. To specify color saturation, move the crosshairs from top to bottom over the color spectrum. Color Slider Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance, adjust the bar on the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box.

RGB Color Model

Specifies the RGB color model for selecting colors. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified. Colors can be broken down into components of red, green, and blue. The values specified for each component represent the intensity of the red, green, and blue components. The combination of these values can be manipulated to create a wide range of colors. Red (R)

192 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Specifies the red component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Red box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. Green (G) Specifies the green component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Green box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. Blue (B) Specifies the blue component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Blue box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values.

Color
Specifies the RGB color value. This option is updated when changes are made to HSL or RGB options. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the following format: 000,000,000.

True Color Stored as RGB

Indicates the value for each RGB color component.

Old Color Swatch

Displays the previously selected color.

New Color Swatch

Displays the currently selected color.

Color Books Tab (Color Palette Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Current Color

Specifies colors using third-party color books (such as PANTONE) or user-defined color books.

Color Palette Dialog Box | 193

Summary
Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab displays the name of the selected color book.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Color Book Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors. The list consists of all the color books that are found in the Color Book Locations specified in the Application References dialog box, Application tab. Displays the pages of the selected color book and the colors and color names on each page. Color books containing up to ten colors per page are supported. If a color book is not paginated, the colors are organized into pages containing seven colors per page. To view color book pages, select an area on the color slider or use the up and down arrows to browse. RGB Equivalent Indicates the value for each RGB color component. Color

194 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Indicates the currently selected color book color. You can search for a specific color in a color book by entering the number of the color swatch and pressing Tab. This action updates the New color swatch with the requested color number. If the specified color is not found in the color book, the closest number match is displayed. Old Color Swatch Displays the previously selected color. New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color.

-COLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Current Color

If you enter -color at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. Enter default object color [Truecolor/COlorbook] <BYLAYER>: Enter a color, enter t, enter co, or press Enter You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book. You can enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the color red by entering the ACI number 1 or the ACI name red. You can also enter bylayer or byblock. If you enter byblock, all new objects are drawn in the default color (white or black, depending on your background color) until they are grouped into a block. When you insert the block in a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current setting of COLOR. WARNING If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that make up a block, inserting that block or changing its color produces complex results.

-COLOR | 195

If you enter bylayer, new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. See the LAYER command for information about assigning a color to a layer.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as Pantone. If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in the color book.

COMMANDLINE
Quick Reference
See also:

The Command Line

Displays the Command Line window.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Palettes Command Line Menu: Window Command Line

Summary
Displays the command line when it has been hidden. You can display commands, system variables, options, messages, and prompts in a dockable and resizable window called the Command Line.

196 | Chapter 4 C Commands

COMMANDLINEHIDE
Quick Reference
See also:

The Command Line

Hides the Command Line window.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Palettes Command Line Menu: Window Command Line

Summary
Hides the Command Line. When the Command Line is hidden, you can still enter commands with dynamic prompts turned on.

COMPILE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Shape Files

Compiles shape files and PostScript font files into SHX files.

Summary
The Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box. The compiled file is assigned this name with the file extension .shx.

COMMANDLINEHIDE | 197

CONE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid Cone

Creates a 3D solid cone.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Solid Primitives Cone Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Cone

Summary
Creates a 3D solid with a circular or elliptical base that tapers symmetrically to a point or to a circular or elliptical planar face. You can control the smoothness of 3D curved solids, such as a cone, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable.

Use the Top Radius option to create a cone frustum. Initially, the default base radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value for any solid primitive.

198 | Chapter 4 C Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point of base or [3P on page 200/2P on page 200/Ttr on page 200/Elliptical on page 200]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option Specify base radius or [Diameter on page 199] <default>: Specify a base radius, enter d to specify a diameter, or press Enter to specify the default base radius value Specify height or [2Point on page 199/Axis endpoint on page 199/Top radius on page 199] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press Enter to specify the default height value

Center Point of Base

2Point Specifies that the height of the cone is the distance between the two specified points. Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cone axis. The axis endpoint is the top point of the cone or the center point of the top face of the cone frustum (Top Radius option). The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cone. Top Radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum. Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius value for any solid primitive. Diameter Specifies the diameter for the base of the cone. Initially, the default diameter is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the diameter is always the previously entered diameter value for any solid primitive.

CONE | 199

3P (Three Points)
Defines the base circumference and base plane of the cone by specifying three points.

2Point on page 199 Axis Endpoint on page 199 Top Radius on page 199

2P (Two Points)
Defines the base diameter of the cone by specifying two points.

2Point on page 199 Axis Endpoint on page 199 Top Radius on page 199

TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)

Defines the base of the cone with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes, more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points.

2Point on page 199 Axis Endpoint on page 199 Top Radius on page 199

Elliptical
Specifies an elliptical base for the cone.

200 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Center Creates the base of the cone by using a specified center point.

2Point on page 199 Axis Endpoint on page 199 Top Radius on page 199

CONSTRAINTBAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Verify Geometric Constraints

Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Parametric tool group Constraint Display flyout Show Geometric Constraints Menu: Parametric Constraints Bars Select Objects

Summary
The selection preview behavior for constraint bars is as follows:

Placing the cursor over an icon on a constraint bar highlights related geometry. Placing the cursor over a constrained object (while constraint bars are displayed) highlights the constraint icons associated with the selected object.

CONSTRAINTBAR | 201

The CONSTRAINTBARMODE system variable or the CONSTRAINTSETTINGS command controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars, when constraint bar are displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Select objects with constraint bars Enter an option [Show on page 202/Hide on page 202/Reset on page 202] <Show>:Enter the appropriate value to show or hide constraint bars in the drawing.

Show
Displays constraint bars for the selected objects with geometric constraints applied to them.

Hide
Hides constraint bars for the selected objects with geometric constraints applied to them.

Reset
Displays constraint bars for all objects with geometric constraints applied to them and resets them to their default locations relative to their associated parameters.

CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Constraints

Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.

Access Methods
Menu: Parametric Constraint Settings

Summary
The Constraint Settings dialog box is displayed.

202 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Constraint Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Constraints

Allows you to control the geometric constraints, dimensional constraints, and autoconstrain settings.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. The Constraint Settings dialog box includes the following:

Geometric Tab Dimensional Tab Autoconstrain Tab

Constraint Settings Dialog Box | 203

Geometric Tab
Controls the display of constraint types on constraint bars. Displayed Constraints Controls the display of constraint bars or constraint point markers for objects in the drawing editor. For example, you can hide the display of constraint bars for Horizontal and Vertical constraints. Select All Selects the geometric constraint types. Clear All Clears the selected geometric constraint types. Display Constraints in the Current Plane Displays constraint bars for geometrically constrained objects only on the current plane. Constraint Bar TransparencyIcon Transparency Sets the transparency level of constraint bars in a drawing.

Dimensional Tab
Sets preferences in behavior when displaying dimensional constraints. Dimensional Constraint Format Sets the display of the dimensional name format and lock icon. Dimension Name Format Specifies the format for the text displayed when dimensional constraints are applied. Set the name format to display: Name, Value, or Name and Expression. For example: Width=Length/2 Show Lock Icon for Annotational Constraints Displays a lock icon against an object that has an annotational constraint applied (DIMCONSTRAINTICON on page 1246 system variable). Show Hidden Dynamic Constraints for Selected Objects Displays dynamic constraints that have been set to hide when selected.

Autoconstrain Tab
Controls the constraints that are applied to a selection set, and the order in which they are applied when using the AUTOCONSTRAIN command. The following conditions are checked before multiple geometric constraints are applied:

Are the objects perpendicular or tangential to each other within the tolerances specified in the AutoConstrain tab? Do they also intersect within the specified tolerances?

204 | Chapter 4 C Commands

If the first condition is met, then tangent and perpendicular constraints are always applied if the check boxes are cleared. If you select the additional check boxes, then the distance tolerance is considered for intersecting objects. If the objects do not intersect but the nearest distance between them is within the distance tolerance specified, then the constraint will be applied even if the check boxed are selected. Autoconstrain Headings

Applied Controls the constraints that are applied when applying constraints to multiple objects. Constraint Type Controls the type of constraint applied to objects.

Tangent Objects Must Share an Intersection Point Specifies that two curves must share a common point (as specified within the distance tolerance) for the tangent constraint to be applied. Perpendicular Objects Must Share an Intersection Point Specifies that lines must intersect or the endpoint of one line must be coincident with the other line or endpoint of the line as specified within the distance tolerance. Tolerances Sets the acceptable tolerance values to determine whether a constraint can be applied.

Distance Distance tolerance are applied to coincident, concentric, tangent, and collinear constraints. Angle Angular tolerance are applied to horizontal, vertical, parallel, perpendicular, tangent, and collinear constraints.

+CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Constraints

+CONSTRAINTSETTINGS | 205

Controls the tab that is displayed by default when the Constraint Settings dialog box is invoked. Tab Index
0 1 2

Tab Displayed
Geometric tab Dimensional tab AutoConstrain tab

CONTENT
Quick Reference
See also:

The Content Palette

Opens the Content palette.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block Tool group (expanded) Content Palette Menu: Tools Palettes Content Menu: Window Content Command entry: Cmd-2

Summary
The Content palette on page 207 allows you to insert blocks from the current drawing or a custom library of blocks. You create libraries to access and organize your blocks. Blocks that you use frequently can be added to the Favorites library.

206 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Content Palette
Quick Reference
See also:

The Content Palette

Allows you to access and insert your blocks stored in libraries.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Libraries List
Displays the available libraries. Select a library to insert blocks from or select Manage Libraries to display the Manage Content Libraries dialog box on page 209. The following libraries are available by default:

Favorites - Blocks that you have selected as favorites from the Blocks list. Blocks in Current Drawing - Lists the blocks in the current drawing that you can create new inserts from.

Manage Content Libraries

Displays the Manage Content Libraries dialog box on page 209 in which you create and manage content of libraries.

Blocks List
Displays the blocks in the library selected from the Libraries list.

Content Palette | 207

Click a block from the list to insert it in the current drawing. If you right-click in the Blocks list, one of two shortcut menus is displayed. TheBlocks List shortcut menu on page 208 is displayed when you right-click an empty area of the Blocks list, while the Block shortcut menu on page 208 is displayed when you right-click over a block thumbnail.

Filter Blocks List

Filters the blocks displayed in the Blocks list. Click the X in the text box to clear the current filter. Enter a text string to control which blocks are displayed in the Blocks list. Only the names of the blocks that contain the text string are displayed in the Blocks list.

Blocks List Shortcut Menu

The following options are available when you right-click in an empty area of the Blocks list:

Small Thumbnails
Small thumbnails for the blocks in the current library are displayed in the Blocks list.

Medium Thumbnails
Medium thumbnails for the blocks in the current library are displayed in the Blocks list.

Large Thumbnails
Large thumbnails for the blocks in the current library are displayed in the Blocks list.

Manage Libraries
Displays the Manage Content Libraries dialog box on page 209.

Block Shortcut Menu

The following options are available when you right-click a block thumbnail in the Blocks list:

Insert in Drawing
Starts the insertion of the block in the current drawing.

Add to Favorties
Adds the block to the Favorites content library.

Thumbnail Size
Controls the size of the thumbnails displayed in the Blocks list: small, medium, or large.

208 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Remove
Removes the selected block from the current content library.

Manage Libraries
Displays the Manage Content Libraries dialog box.

Manage Content Libraries Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

The Content Palette

Allows you to create and manage the blocks in a library.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Libraries List
Lists the available libraries. The Favorites library is available by default. Select a library to manage the blocks contained in the library in the Blocks list. Double-click the name of a library to rename it. Create Library (+) Creates a new library and prompts you to enter a name in an in-place editor.

Manage Content Libraries Dialog Box | 209

Delete Library (-) Removes the selected library from the Libraries list.

Blocks List
Lists the blocks contained in the selected library. Add Block (+) Displays the AutoCAD for Mac Open File Dialog (a standard navigation dialog box) in which you select a drawing (DWG) or drawing template (DWT) file to add to the selected library. NOTE Hold down the Command key to select more than one file. Delete Library (-) Removes the selected block from the library. Filter Blocks List Filters the blocks displayed in the Blocks list. Click the X in the text box to clear the current filter. Enter a text string to control which blocks are displayed in the Blocks list. Only the names of the blocks that contain the text string are displayed in the Blocks list.

CONTENTCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:

The Content Palette

Closes the Content palette.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block Tool group (expanded) Content Palette Menu: Tools Palettes Content Menu: Window Content Command entry: Cmd-2

210 | Chapter 4 C Commands

CONVERT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications

Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier.

Sumary
Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous release is opened in Release 14 or later. Information about the rotation of a hatch pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS since creating the hatch. When updating hatches with CONVERT, it is recommended that you use the Select option so that you can check your results. In most cases, you do not need to update polylines with CONVERT. By default, the PLINETYPE system variable specifies that polylines are updated automatically when you open an older drawing. Polylines may be created in the old format by third-party applications, and they may be contained in an older drawing that was inserted as a block and then exploded. NOTE Polylines containing curve-fit or splined segments always retain the old format, as do polylines that store extended object data on their vertices. Editing commands make no distinction between the two formats.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch/Polyline/All] <All>: Enter h for hatches, p for polylines, or a for both Hatch Converts all hatches in the drawing. Polyline Converts all polylines in the drawing. All Converts all polylines and hatches in the drawing.

CONVERT | 211

CONVTOMESH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Surface Editing Convert to Mesh

Summary
Take advantage of the detailed modeling capabilities of 3D mesh by converting objects such as 3D solids and surfaces to mesh.

Use this method to convert 3D faces (3DFACE) and legacy polygonal and polyface meshes (from AutoCAD 2009 and earlier). You can also convert 2D objects such as regions and closed polylines. The level of smoothness upon conversion depends on the mesh type setting (FACETERMESHTYPE on page 1320 system variable). If the mesh type is not set to be optimized, the converted object is not smoothed. To convert mesh objects to 3D surfaces or solids, use CONVTOSOLID or CONVTOSURFACE commands. Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh Object type
3D solids 3D surfaces 3D faces Polyface and polygon meshes (legacy) Regions

212 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Object type
Closed polylines

CONVTONURBS
Quick Reference
See also:

Create NURBS Surfaces

Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Surface Editing Convert to NURBS

Summary
Converts solids and procedural surfaces to NURBS surfaces.

To convert meshes to NURBS surfaces, convert them to a solid or surface first with CONVTOSOLID on page 214 or CONVTOSURFACE on page 216 and then convert them to NURBS surfaces.

CONVTONURBS | 213

CONVTOSOLID
Quick Reference
See also:

Create 3D Solids from Objects

Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify 3D Operations Convert to Solid

Summary
Take advantage of the solid modeling capabilities available for 3D solids. When you convert mesh, you can specify whether the converted objects are smoothed or faceted, and whether the faces are merged.

The smoothness and number of faces of the resulting 3D solid are controlled by the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT system variable. Whereas the previous example shows a conversion to a smooth, optimized 3D solid, the following example shows a conversion to a faceted 3D solid in which the faces are not merged, or optimized.

214 | Chapter 4 C Commands

The following tables list the objects that can be converted to solid objects and some limitations on their conversion. Objects that Can Be Converted to 3D Solids Object
Mesh Polyline Polyline Surface

Required properties
Encloses a volume with no gaps between edges (watertight) Closed, uniform-width, with thickness Closed, zero-width, with thickness Encloses a volume with no gaps between edges (such as a revolved surface that is capped at both ends or closed mesh objects that were converted to surfaces). If the surfaces enclose a watertight area, you can also convert to a solid with the SURFSCULPT on page 1023 command.

Limitations on Conversion to Solid Objects Object

Polyline Polyline

Description
Cannot contain zero-width vertices. Cannot contain segments of variable width.

CONVTOSOLID | 215

Object
Separate objects that simulate a closed surface Planar surfaces with contiguous edges Exploded 3D solid

Description
Cannot be a planar surface with contiguous edges or an exploded 3D solid box into six regions. However, you cannot convert those separate objects back to a solid with CONVTOSOLID. Cannot convert separate objects unless they enclose a volume without gaps. If the surfaces enclose a watertight area, you can convert to a solid with the SURFSCULPT on page 1023 command. Cannot convert separate objects (in this case, regions) with the CONVTOSOLID command. You can, however, convert them to a solid with the SURFSCULPT on page 1023 command.

You can select the objects to convert before you start the command. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the geometry used to create 3D objects is automatically deleted when the new object is created or whether you are prompted to delete the objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Specifies one or more objects to convert to 3D solid objects. You can select objects with thickness or mesh objects. If one or more objects in the selection set are invalid for the command, you will be prompted again to select objects.

CONVTOSURFACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Convert Objects to Procedural Surfaces

Converts objects to 3D surfaces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify 3D Operations Convert to Surface

216 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Summary
As you convert objects to surfaces, you can specify whether the resulting object is smooth or faceted.

When you convert a mesh, the smoothness and number of faces of the resulting surface are controlled by the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT system variable. Whereas the previous example shows a conversion to a smooth, optimized surface, the following example shows a conversion to a faceted surface in which the faces are not merged, or optimized.

CONVTOSURFACE | 217

With the CONVTOSURFACE command, you can convert the following objects into surfaces: Objects That Can Be Converted to 3D Surfaces Objects
2D solids 3D solids Regions Open, zero-width polylines with thickness Lines with thickness Arcs with thickness Mesh objects Planar 3D faces

218 | Chapter 4 C Commands

objects converted to surfaces

You can select the objects to convert before you start the command. NOTE You can create surfaces from 3D solids with curved faces, such as a cylinder, with the EXPLODE command. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the geometry used to create 3D objects is automatically deleted when the new object is created or whether you are prompted to delete the objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Specifies one or more objects to convert to surfaces. If one or more objects in the selection set are invalid for the command, you will be prompted again to select objects.

CONVTOSURFACE | 219

COPY
Quick Reference
See also:

Copy Objects

Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Copy tool group Copy Menu: Modify Copy Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Copy Selection.

Summary
With the COPYMODE on page 1214 system variable, you can control whether multiple copies are created automatically.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish Specify base point or [Displacement/mOde/Multiple] <Displacement>: Specify a base point or enter an option

Displacement
Specifies a relative distance and direction using coordinates. The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the copied objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3

220 | Chapter 4 C Commands

for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects are copied 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current location.

Mode
Controls whether the command repeats automatically (COPYMODE system variable).

Multiple
Overrides the Single mode setting. The COPY command is set to repeat automatically for the duration of the command.

COPYBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Copies selected objects to the Clipboard along with a specified base point.

Access Methods
Menu: Edit Copy with Base Point Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Clipboard Copy with Base Point.

Summary
The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard.

Use PASTECLIP to move the copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to another document. When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE, it is placed relative to the specified base point.

COPYBASE | 221

COPYCLIP
Quick Reference
See also:

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Copies selected objects to the Clipboard.

Access Methods
Menu: Edit Copy Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Clipboard Copy. Command entry: Cmd-C

Summary
COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing. NOTE If the cursor is in the drawing area, the selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window, the selected text is copied to the Clipboard. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format that retains the most information is used. You can also use Copy and Paste to transfer objects between drawings.

COPYHIST
Quick Reference
See also:

View and Edit Within the Command History

Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard.

222 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Summary
The text is copied to the Clipboard.

CUI
Quick Reference
See also:

Understand User Interface Customization

Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Customize Interface (CUI)

Summary
The Customize dialog box is displayed. You use the Customize dialog box to customize the menu bar and Tool Sets palette. For information about customizing the different user interface elements found in the Customize dialog box, see User Interface Customization in the Customization Guide.

Customize Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Understand User Interface Customization

Manages customized user interface elements for the menu bar and Tool Sets palette.

List of Tabs

Commands

CUI | 223

Menus Tool Sets

For more information, see User Interface Customization in the Customization Guide.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Reset to Default
Resets the commands and user interface elements back to their initial installed default settings.

Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Commands

Creates and manages the available commands that can be added to menus and tool sets.

224 | Chapter 4 C Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Commands List
Displays all the standard and custom commands available.

Image - Thumbnail of the current image assigned to the command. Command - Name of the command. Displayed on the menu bar when the command is assigned to a menu or in a tooltip when the command is assigned to a tool group on the Tool Sets palette. Source - Name of the customization group that the command is stored in.

Create New Command (+) Adds a new command to the Commands list that can be added to the user interface. A custom command can be used to start a core AutoCAD for Mac command or one defined by a third party. Commands can also contain AutoLISP code.

Customize Dialog Box | 225

Options Displays a menu which allows you to manage existing commands in the Commands list.

Duplicate - Creates a copy of the command currently selected in the Commands list. Duplicating a command allows you to modify an existing command without changing the original one. Delete - Removes the selected command from the Commands list. Commands that are currently assigned to a menu or Workflow cannot be deleted. NOTE There is no way to undo the removal of a command, be sure to selected the correct command before you click Delete.

Filter Commands List Filters the commands displayed in the Commands list. Click the X in the text box to clear the current filter. Enter a text string to control which commands are displayed in the Commands list. Only the names of the commands that contain the text string are displayed in the Commands list.

Properties
Displays the properties and values that define the selected command in the Command list. Name Displays the name of the command. The name you enter is the label or tooltip name displayed in the program. Description Displays the description for the command. The description you enter is displayed in a tooltip. Macro Displays the macro assigned to the command. Enter a new or change the existing macro for the command. Image Specifies the raster image to use for the command when it is added to a tool set. Preview Displays a thumbnail of the image currently assigned to the command.

Information
Displays some basic information about the field that currently has cursor focus under Properties.

226 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Menus

Creates and manages the menus and menu items on the Mac OS menu bar.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Customize Dialog Box | 227

you hover over a menu or sub-menu while dragging a command, the menu or sub-menu will expand after a short interval. Filter Commands List Filters the commands displayed in the Commands list. Click the X in the text box to clear the current filter. Enter a text string to control which commands are displayed in the Commands list. Only the names of the commands that contain the text string are displayed in the Commands list.

Menus List
Lists the menus available on the Mac OS menu bar. Expand a menu to see the commands and sub-menus that are assigned to the menu. Create New Element(+) Displays a menu which allows you to create a new menu or sub-menu.

Add Menu - Creates a new parent menu that is displayed directly on the Mac OS menu bar. Add Sub-menu - Creates a new sub-menu that is used to organize related commands on a menu.

Options Displays a menu which allows you to manage the commands and sub-menus in a menu.

Insert Separator - Adds a new separator after the selected command or sub-menu in the Menus list. When inserted, a solid horizontal line is displayed in the menu when displayed from the Mac OS menu bar. Duplicate - Creates a copy of the command, sub-menu, or separator currently selected in the Menus list. Delete - Removes the selected command, sub-menu, or separator from the Menus list.

Tool Sets Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Tool Sets

Creates and manages the tools in the Workflow palette.

228 | Chapter 4 C Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Commands List
Displays a list of the standard and custom commands that can be added to menus and tool sets. You must be on the Commands tab on page 224 if you want to create or edit a command. Drag the command to the location in the menu you want it positioned and drop it. The location of the command is indicated by the horizontal bar. If you hover over a menu or sub-menu while dragging a command, the menu or sub-menu will expand after a short interval. Filter Commands List Filters the commands displayed in the Commands list. Click the X in the text box to clear the current filter. Enter a text string to control which commands are displayed in the Commands list. Only the names of the commands that contain the text string are displayed in the Commands list.

Customize Dialog Box | 229

Tool Sets List

Lists the tool sets available on the Tool Sets palette. Expand a tool set to see the commands, tool groups, and drop-downs (also known as flyouts) that are assigned to the tool set. Right-click over a tool set in the list and choose Specify Tool Set Image to display the Specify Tool Set Image dialog box on page 231. The image assigned appears next to the tool set name in the Tool Sets list on the Tool Sets palette. Create New Element(+) Displays a menu which allows you to create a new tool set, tool group, or drop-down.

Add Tool Set - Creates a new tool set that can be accessed from the Tool Sets palette. Only one tool set can be displayed at a time on the Tool Sets palette. You do not add commands directly to a tool set, but to a tool group under a tool set. Add Tool Group - Creates a new tool group that is used to organize related commands in a tool set. Tool groups are collapsed by default, and display the commands and drop-downs above the separator in the tool group. Commands and drop-downs below the separator are hidden until the discolsure triangle for the tool group is clicked on the Tool Sets palette. Click the Lock icon on a tool groups title bar to keep it expanded. Add Drop-down - Creates a new drop-down (of flyout) that is used to group related commands into a single button on a tool group.

Options Displays a menu which allows you to manage the tool groups, commands, and drop-downs in a tool set.

Insert Separator - Adds a new separator after the selected command or drop-down in the Tool Sets list. When inserted, a solid horizontal line is displayed in the tool group or drop-down. A separator on a tool group controls which commands and drop-downs are displayed by default or are only available when the tool group is expanded. Duplicate - Creates a copy of the selected tool group, command, drop-down, or separator currently selected in the Tool Sets list. Delete - Removes the selected tool group, command, drop-down, or separator from the Tool Sets list.

230 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Specify Tool Set Image Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Tool Sets

Assigns an external image or internal resource to a tool set.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Image Displays the name of the resource or external image file that is assigned to the tool set. Click [] to display the Select an Image File dialog box and specify the external image to assign to the tool set. Preview Displays a thumbnail of the selected image.

CUTCLIP
Quick Reference
See also:

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing.

Specify Tool Set Image Dialog Box | 231

Access Methods
Menu: Edit Cut Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Clipboard Cut. Command entry: Cmd-X

Summary
CUTCLIP copies selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document (see PASTECLIP). When you want to use objects from a drawing file in another application, you can cut these objects to the Clipboard and then paste them into another application. You can also use Cut and Paste to transfer objects between drawings.

CVADD
Quick Reference
See also:

Edit NURBS Surfaces

Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Surface Editing NURBS Surface Editing Add CV

Summary
Adds control vertices in the U or V direction, or adds points directly on a surface or spline. This illustration shows a row of control vertices added in the V direction.

232 | Chapter 4 C Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select a NURBS surface or curve to add control vertices. Select a valid

NURBS surface or curve and press Enter.

Point Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Insert Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to place

a point directly on a surface. This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.
Insert Edit Point Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you

to place a point directly on a spline. This option only displays if you select a spline; it does not display for surfaces.
Direction Specifies whether to add control vertices in the U or V direction.

This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.

CVHIDE
Quick Reference
See also:

Edit NURBS Surfaces

Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves.

CVHIDE | 233

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Surface Editing NURBS Surface Editing Hide CV

Summary
Turns off the CV display for all NURBS objects.

CVREBUILD
Quick Reference
See also:

Edit NURBS Surfaces

Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Surface Editing NURBS Surface Editing Rebuild

Summary
If you have difficulties editing the control vertices or there are too many control vertices, you can rebuild a surface or curve with less control vertices in the U or V direction. CVREBUILD also allows you to change the degree of the surface or curve.

234 | Chapter 4 C Commands

If you select a surface, the Rebuild Surface dialog box on page 235 is displayed. If you select a spline, the Rebuild Curve dialog box on page 237 is displayed.

Rebuild Surface Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Rebuilds the CV hull of a NURBS surface.

Summary
Reshapes a NURBS surface by rebuilding the CV hull.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Control Vertices Count

Specifies the number of control vertices in the U and V directions. In U Direction

Rebuild Surface Dialog Box | 235

Specifies the number of control vertices in the U direction. (REBUILDU on page 1468 system variable) In V Direction Specifies the number of control vertices in the V direction. (REBUILDV on page 1469 system variable)

Degree
Specifies the number of control vertices available per span. The higher the number, the more complex the surface. In U Direction Specifies the degree of the NURBS surface in the U direction. (REBUILDDEGREEU on page 1467 system variable) In V Direction Specifies the degree of the NURBS surface in the V direction. (REBUILDDEGREEV on page 1467 system variable)

Options
Specifies the build options. (REBUILDOPTIONS on page 1468 system variable) Delete Input Geometry Specifies whether the original surface is retained along with the rebuilt surface. (REBUILDOPTIONS on page 1468 system variable) Retrim Previously Trimmed Surface Specifies whether trimmed areas from the original surface are applied to the rebuilt surface. (REBUILDOPTIONS on page 1468 system variable) Preview Displays a preview of the surface before changes are applied.

Maximum Deviation
Displays the maximum deviation between the original surface and the new one.

236 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Rebuild Curve Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Rebuilds the shape of a NURBS curve.

Summary
Changes the number of control vertices and the degree of a NURBS curve. Rebuilding the curve changes its shape.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Curve Geometry Details

Control Vertices Count Specifies the number of control vertices. (REBUILD2DCV on page 1465system variable) Degree Specifies the degree of the NURBS curve. (REBUILD2DDEGREE on page 1465 system variable)

Options
Specifies the build options. (REBUILDOPTIONS on page 1468 system variable) Delete input geometry Specifies whether the original curve is retained along with the rebuilt curve. (REBUILD2DOPTION on page 1466 system variable) Preview Displays a preview of the curve before changes are applied.

Maximum Deviation
Displays the maximum deviation between the original curve and the new one.

Rebuild Curve Dialog Box | 237

CVREMOVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Edit NURBS Surfaces

Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Surface Editing NURBS Surface Editing Remove CV

Summary
Removes control vertices in the U or V direction. This illustration shows a row of control vertices deleted in the V direction. NOTE The minimum number of control vertices that you can have on a surface or curve is two in any direction. If you try to remove more, an error displays.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select a NURBS surface or curve to remove control vertices Select a

valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter.

Point Specifies a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter.

238 | Chapter 4 C Commands

Remove Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to

remove a point directly from the surface. This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.
Remove Edit Point Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you

to remove a point directly from the spline. This option only displays if you select a spline, it does not display for surfaces.
Direction Specifies whether to remove control vertices in the U direction.

This option only displays if you have selected a surface; it does not display for splines.

CVSHOW
Quick Reference
See also:

Edit NURBS Surfaces

Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Surface Editing NURBS Surface Editing Show CV

Summary
Prompts you to select the NURBS surfaces and curves whose control vertices you want to display. Non-NURBS surfaces do not have control vertices. You can convert objects to NURBS surfaces with the CONVTONURBS command.

CVSHOW | 239

CYLINDER
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid Cylinder

Creates a 3D solid cylinder.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Cylinder Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Cylinder

Summary
In the illustration, the cylinder was created using a center point (1), a point on the radius (2), and a point for the height (3). The base of the cylinder is always on a plane parallel with the workplane. You can control the smoothness of curved 3D solids, such as a cylinder, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable.

240 | Chapter 4 C Commands

During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point of base or [3P/2P/Ttr/Elliptical]: Specify a center point or enter an option Specify base radius or [Diameter] <default>: Specify a base radius, or enter d to specify a diameter, or press Enter to specify the default base radius value Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press Enter to specify the default height value

3P (Three Points)
Defines the base circumference and base plane of the cylinder by specifying three points. 2Point Specifies that the height of the cylinder is the distance between the two specified points. Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cylinder axis. This endpoint is the center point of the top face of the cylinder. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the cylinder.

2P (Two Points)
Defines the base diameter of the cylinder by specifying two points.

2Point on page 241 Axis Endpoint on page 241

TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)

Defines the base of the cylinder with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points.

2Point on page 241 Axis Endpoint on page 241

CYLINDER | 241

Elliptical
Specifies an elliptical base for the cylinder.

Center Creates the base of the cylinder by using a specified center point.

2Point on page 241 Axis Endpoint on page 241

Diameter
Specifies the diameter for the base of the cylinder.

2Point on page 241 Axis Endpoint on page 241

242 | Chapter 4 C Commands

D Commands

DBLIST
Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Lists database information for each object in the drawing.

Summary
The text window displays information about each object in the current drawing. The program pauses when the window fills with information. Press Enter to resume output, or press Esc to cancel.

DCALIGNED
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Constrains the distance between two points on different objects.

243

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Dimensional Contraints flyout Aligned Menu: Parametric Dimensional Constraints Aligned

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Aligned option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 276. The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points
Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects Line and constraint point Two lines

Characteristics
When a line or an arc is selected, the distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained. When a line and a constraint point are selected, the distance between the point and the closest point on the line is constrained. When two lines are selected, the lines are made parallel and the distance between them is constrained.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first contraint point on page 244 or [Object on page 245/Point & line on page 245/2Lines on page 245] <Object>: Pick a constraint point or select an object, a point and a line, or two lines to be constrained

Constraint Point
Specifies a constraint point for the object. First Constraint Point Specifies the first point of the object to be constrained.

244 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Second Constraint Point Specifies the second point of the object to be constrained. Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object.

Object
Selects an object instead of a constraint point. Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location on page 245

Point & Line

Selects a point and a line object. The aligned constraint controls the distance between a point and the closest point on a line. Constraint Point Constraint Point on page 244 Line Selects a line object. Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location on page 245

2Lines
Selects two line objects. The lines are made parallel and the aligned constraint controls the distance between the two lines. First Line Select the first line to be constrained. Second Line to Make Parallel Select the second line to constrain the distance between the two selected lines. Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location on page 245

DCANGULAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Constrains the angle between line or polyline segments, the angle swept out by an arc or a polyline arc segment, or the angle between three points on objects.

DCANGULAR | 245

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Dimensional Contraints flyout Angular Menu: Parametric Dimensional Constraints Angular

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Angular option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 276. When you enter or edit an angle value that is either negative or is greater than 360 degrees, the number entered is stored for the expression (for example, 390), but the value displayed is based on the formatting of the units (for example, 30 if decimal degrees). When an expression with variables evaluates to greater than 360 or less than -360, the constraint value is displayed in the Parameters Manager based on the units of the drawing. The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points
Pair of lines Pair of polyline segment Three constraint points Arc

Characteristics
When two lines are selected, the angle between the lines is constrained. The initial value always defaults to a value less than 180 degrees. When three constraint points are specified, the following applies: First point angle vertex Second and third points endpoints of the angle

When an arc is selected, a three-point angular constraint is created. The angle vertex is at the center of the arc and the angle endpoints of the arc are at the endpoints of the arc.

246 | Chapter 5 D Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select first line on page 247 or arc on page 247 or [3Point on page 247] <3Point>: Pick a line, or an arc, or three points to be constrained

Line
Selects a line object. First Line Specifies the first line to be constrained. Second Line Specifies the second line to be constrained. Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object.

Arc
Selects an arc and constrains the angle. Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location on page 247

3Point
Selects three valid constraint points on the object. Angle Vertex Specifies the angle vertex, which is at the centerpoint of the constraint. First Angle Constraint Point Specifies the first angle endpoint of the arc. Second Angle Constraint Point Specifies the second angle endpoint of the arc. Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location on page 247

DCCONVERT
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.

DCCONVERT | 247

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Convert option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 276. Objects other than associative dimensions are ignored and filtered from the selection set.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select associative dimensions to convert: Select the associative dimensions to be converted to dimensional constraints

DCDIAMETER
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Constrains the diameter of a circle or an arc.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Dimensional Contraints flyout Diameter Menu: Parametric Dimensional Constraints Diameter

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Diameter option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 276.

248 | Chapter 5 D Commands

The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points
Circle Arc

Characteristics
Constrains the diameter of the circle or arc.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Select an arc or a circle to be constrained

Dimension Line Location

Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object.

DCDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints

Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Contraint Display flyout Show Dynamic Constraints Menu: Parametric Dynamic Dimensions Select Objects

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

DCDISPLAY | 249

Select objects: Select objects to display or hide the dimensional constraints Enter an option [Show on page 250/Hide on page 250] <Show>: Enter the appropriate value to show or hide dynamic constraints for the selection set of objects

Show
Displays the dynamic dimensional constraints for any selection set of objects.

Hide
Hides the dynamic dimensional constraints for any selection set of objects.

DCFORM
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Specifies whether the dimensional constraint being created is dynamic or annotational.

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Form option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 276. Setting the value for this command defines the Constraint Form property of the object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter constraint form [Annotational on page 250/Dynamic on page 250] <Dynamic>: Select a constraint form

Annotational
Applies annotational dimensional constraints to objects.

Dynamic
Applies dynamic dimensional constraints to objects.

250 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DCHORIZONTAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Constrains the X distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Dimensional Contraints flyout Horizontal Menu: Parametric Dimensional Constraints Horizontal

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Horizontal option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 276. The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points
Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects

Characteristics
When a line or an arc is selected, the horizontal distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first constraint point on page 252 or [Object on page 252] <Object>: Pick a constraint point or select an object

DCHORIZONTAL | 251

Constraint Point
Specifies a constraint point for the object. First Constraint Point Specifies the first point of the object to be constrained. Second Constraint Point Specifies the second point of the object to be constrained. Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object.

Object
Selects an object instead of a constraint point.

DCLINEAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Creates a horizontal, vertical, or rotated constraint based on the locations of the extension line origins and the dimension line.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Dimensional Contraints flyout Linear

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Linear option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 276.

252 | Chapter 5 D Commands

The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points
Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects

Characteristics
When a line or an arc is selected, the horizontal or vertical distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first constraint point on page 253 or [Object on page 253] <Object>: Pick a constraint point or select an object

Object
Selects an object instead of a constraint point.

DCRADIUS
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Constrains the radius of a circle or an arc.

DCRADIUS | 253

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Dimensional Contraints flyout Radius Menu: Parametric Dimensional Constraints Radius

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Radius option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 276. The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points
Circle Arc

Characteristics
Constrains the radius of the circle or arc.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Select an arc or a circle to be constrained

Dimension Line Location

Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object.

DCVERTICAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Constrains the Y distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects.

254 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Dimensional Contraints flyout Vertical Menu: Parametric Dimensional Constraints Vertical

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Vertical option in DIMCONSTRAINT on page 276. The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points
Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects

Characteristics
When a line or an arc is selected, the vertical distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first constraint point on page 255 or [Object on page 255] <Object>: Pick a constraint point or select an object

Object
Selects an object instead of a constraint point.

DCVERTICAL | 255

DDEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Text

Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Object Text Edit Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and click Edit. Pointing device: Double-click a text object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select an annotation object or [Undo]: Object Selection Displays the appropriate editing method for the type of text you select:

Text created using TEXT on page 1040 displays the In-Place Text Editor without the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Text created using MTEXT on page 673 displays the In-Place Text Editor. Attribute definitions (not part of a block definition) display the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box. Feature control frames display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.

DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press Enter to end the command. Undo Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous value. You can use this option immediately after editing.

256 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Change Text

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Tag Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain exclamation marks (!). The case change is not immediately displayed in the tag field. Prompt Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. Default Specifies the default attribute value. To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog box.

Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box | 257

DDPTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Reference Points

Specifies the display style and size of point objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group (expanded) Point Style Menu: Format Point Style Command entry: 'ddptype for transparent use

Summary
The Point Style dialog box is displayed.

Point Style Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Reference Points

Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting an icon.

258 | Chapter 5 D Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Point Display Images

Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in the PDMODE on page 1436 system variable.

Point Size
Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units. The point display size is stored in the PDSIZE system variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value. Set Size Relative to Screen Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen size. The point display does not change when you zoom in or out. Set Size in Absolute Units Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify under Point Size. Points are displayed larger or smaller when you zoom in or out.

Point Style Dialog Box | 259

DELAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Run Slide Shows from Scripts

Provides a timed pause within a script.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'delay for transparent use

Summary
Specifies the duration of a pause. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays the start of execution of the next command for about one second. The longest delay available is 32767, which is slightly less than 33 seconds.

DELCONSTRAINT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied

Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group (expanded) Delete Menu: Parametric Delete Constraints

260 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Summary
The number of constraints removed are displayed on the command line. Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from the selected objects.

DIM and DIM1

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Dimensioning

Accesses Dimensioning mode commands.

Summary
The Dim prompt indicates that you're in Dimensioning mode, in which you can use a special set of dimensioning commands on page 261. (DIM and DIM1 are provided only for compatibility with previous releases.) Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning command. Use DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately return to the Command prompt. To exit Dimensioning mode, enter e or exit, or press Esc.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Dim: Enter a Dimensioning mode command

Dimensioning Mode Commands

The following commands are available at the DIM prompt. Dimensioning mode commands Command
EXIT

Description
Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command prompt. You can also press Esc to exit Dimensioning mode. Redraws the current viewport. Changes the current text style.

REDRAW STYLE

DIM and DIM1 | 261

Dimensioning mode commands Command

UNDO or U

Description
Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session.

The following table shows which AutoCAD for Mac commands are equivalent to the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD for Mac command. Dimensioning mode command equivalents Dimensioning mode command
ALIGNED ANGULAR BASELINE CENTER CONTINUE DIAMETER HOMETEXT HORIZONTAL LEADER JOG NEWTEXT OBLIQUE ORDINATE OVERRIDE

Equivalent command
DIMALIGNED DIMANGULAR DIMBASELINE DIMCENTER DIMCONTINUE DIMDIAMETER DIMEDIT Home DIMLINEAR Horizontal LEADER DIMJOGGED DIMEDIT New DIMEDIT Oblique DIMORDINATE DIMOVERRIDE

262 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Dimensioning mode command equivalents Dimensioning mode command

RADIUS RESTORE ROTATED SAVE STATUS TEDIT TROTATE UPDATE VARIABLES VERTICAL

Equivalent command
DIMRADIUS -DIMSTYLE Restore DIMLINEAR Rotated -DIMSTYLE Save -DIMSTYLE Status DIMTEDIT DIMEDIT Rotate -DIMSTYLE Apply -DIMSTYLE Variables DIMLINEAR Vertical

DIMALIGNED
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Aligned Dimensions

Creates an aligned linear dimension.

Access Methods

Button

DIMALIGNED | 263

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Aligned Menu: Dimension Aligned

Summary
Creates a linear dimension that is aligned with the origin points of the extension lines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point for manual extension lines, or press Enter for automatic extension lines After you specify either manual or automatic extension lines, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension line location on page 265or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Extension Line Origin Specifies the first extension line origin (1). You are prompted to specify the second one. Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, its endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance specified in Offset from Origin on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE). This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable.

264 | Chapter 5 D Commands

If you select a circle, the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of the extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the first extension line. Dimension Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the DIMALIGNED command ends. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then click OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information, see Change Existing Objects. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. Enter the dimension text, or press Enter to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.

DIMALIGNED | 265

DIMANGULAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Angular Dimensions

Creates an angular dimension.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Dimensions flyout Angular Menu: Dimension Angular

266 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Summary
Measures the angle between selected objects or 3 points. Objects that can be selected include arcs, circles, and lines, among others.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select arc, circle, line, or <specify vertex>: Select an arc, circle, or line, or press Enter to create the angular dimension by specifying three points After you define the angle to dimension, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Quadrant]: Arc Selection Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three-point angular dimension. The center of the arc is the angle vertex. The arc endpoints become the origin points of the extension lines.

The dimension line is drawn as an arc between the extension lines. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line. Circle Selection Uses the selection point (1) as the origin of the first extension line. The center of the circle is the angle vertex. The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and does not have to lie on the circle.

DIMANGULAR | 267

Line Selection Defines the angle using two lines. The program determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned, extension lines are added as needed to extend one or both lines. The arc is always less than 180 degrees.

Three-Point Specification Creates a dimension based on three points you specify. The angle vertex can be the same as one of the angle endpoints. If you need extension lines, the endpoints are used as origin points.

The dimension line is drawn as an arc between the extension lines. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line. Dimension Arc Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix, enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. For more information, see Change Existing Objects. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement.

268 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.

Quadrant Specifies the quadrant that the dimension should be locked to. When quadrant behavior is on, the dimension line is extended past the extension line when the dimension text is positioned outside of the angular dimension.

DIMARC
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Arc Length Dimensions

Creates an arc length dimension.

DIMARC | 269

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Dimensions flyout Arc Length Menu: Dimension Arc Length

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or polyline arc segment: Use an object selection method Specify arc length dimension location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Partial/Leader]: Specify a point or enter an option Arc length dimensions measure the distance along an arc or polyline arc segment. The extension lines of an arc length dimension can be orthogonal or radial. An arc symbol is displayed either above or preceding the dimension text.

Arc Length Dimension Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction of the extension lines.

270 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([]). For more information, see Change Existing Objects. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Partial Reduces the length of the arc length dimension. Leader Adds a leader object. This option is displayed only if the arc (or arc segment) is greater than 90 degrees. The leader is drawn radially, pointing towards the center of the arc being dimensioned. No Leader Cancels the Leader option before the leader is created. To remove a leader, delete the arc length dimension and recreate it without the leader option.

DIMBASELINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions

Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension.

DIMBASELINE | 271

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Continue flyout Baseline Menu: Dimension Baseline

Summary
The default spacing between baseline dimensions can be set from the Dimension Style Manager, Lines tab, Baseline Spacing (DIMDLI on page 1247 system variable).

If no dimension was created in the current session, you are prompted to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Otherwise, the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or angular, the following prompt is displayed: Specify a second extension line origin on page 273 or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a point, enter an option, or press Enter to select a base dimension If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed: Specify feature location on page 273 or [Undo/Select] <Select>: To end the command, press Enter twice, or press Esc. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.

272 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Second Extension Line Origin By default, the first extension line of the base dimension is used as the extension line origin for the baseline dimension. To override this default behavior, explicitly select the base dimension; the extension line origin becomes the extension line of the base dimension closest to the pick point of the selection. When you select a second point, the baseline dimension is drawn and the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press Esc. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press Enter.

Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the baseline dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select a feature location, the baseline dimension is drawn and the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press Enter. Undo Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session. Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension.

DIMBREAK
Quick Reference
See also:

Dimension Breaks

DIMBREAK | 273

Breaks or restores dimension and extension lines where they cross other objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Break Dimension Menu: Dimension Dimension Break

Summary
Dimension breaks can be added to linear, angular, and ordinate dimensions, among others.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select a dimension to add/remove break or [Multiple on page 274]: Select a dimension, or enter m and press Enter After you select a dimension, the following prompt is displayed: Select object to break dimension or [Auto/Manual/Remove] <Auto>: Select an object that intersects the dimension or extension lines of the selected dimension, enter an option, or press Enter After you select an object to break the dimension with, the following prompt is displayed: Select object to break dimension: Select an object that passes through the dimension or press Enter to end the command NOTE Dimension breaks can be added to dimensions for objects that do not intersect the dimension or extension lines using the by Manual option. Multiple Specifies multiple dimensions to add breaks to or remove breaks from. Auto Places dimension breaks automatically at all the intersection points of the objects that intersect the selected dimension. Any dimension break created

274 | Chapter 5 D Commands

using this option is updated automatically when the dimension or an intersecting object is modified. When a new object is drawn over the top of a dimension that has any dimension breaks, no new dimension breaks are automatically applied at the intersecting points along the dimension object. To add the new dimension breaks, must be run the command again. Remove Removes all dimension breaks from the selected dimensions. Manual Places a dimension break manually. You specify two points on the dimension or extension lines for the location of the break. Any dimension break that is created using this option is not updated if the dimension or intersecting objects are modified. You can only place a single manual dimension break at a time with this option.

DIMCENTER
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Radial Dimensions

Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Center Mark Menu: Dimension Center Mark

Summary
The default sizes of the center mark components can be set from the Dimension Style Manager, Symbols and Arrows tab, Center Marks (DIMCEN system variable).

DIMCENTER | 275

You can choose between center marks and centerlines and specify their size when you set up the dimension style. See DIMSTYLE. You can also change center mark settings using the DIMCEN system variable.

DIMCONSTRAINT
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Menu: Parametric Dimensional Constraints

Summary
Applies a dimensional constraint to a selected object or converts an associative dimension to a dimensional constraint. NOTE The L option (last object drawn) is not allowed in the DIMCONSTRAINT command as the constraint behavior is dependent on where you pick the object. The following table outlines the valid constraint points for an object. Objects
Line Arc Spline

Valid Constraint Points

Endpoints, Midpoint Center, Endpoints, Midpoint Endpoints

276 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Objects
Ellipse, Circle Polyline

Valid Constraint Points

Center Endpoints, midpoints of line and arc subobjects, center of arc subobjects Insertion point

Block, Xref, Text, Mtext, Attribute, Table

After you specify the dimensional constraint type, you can either enter an expression value or accept the default (constraintname=value). The DIMCONSTRAINT command gives the same options as the following commands: Linear (DCLINEAR on page 252) Creates a horizontal, vertical, or rotated constraint based on the locations of the extension line origins and the dimension line. Horizontal (DCHORIZONTAL on page 251) Constrains the X distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects. Vertical (DCVERTICAL on page 254) Constrains the Y distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects. Aligned (DCALIGNED on page 243) Constrains the distance between two points on different objects. Angular (DCANGULAR on page 245) Constrains the angle between line or polyline segments, the angle swept out by an arc or a polyline arc segment, or the angle between three points on objects. Radius (DCRADIUS on page 253) Constrains the radius of a circle or an arc. Diameter (DCDIAMETER on page 248) Constrains the diameter of a circle or an arc. Form (DCFORM on page 250) Specifies whether the dimensional constraint being created is dynamic or annotational. Convert (DCCONVERT on page 247) Converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.

DIMCONSTRAINT | 277

DIMCONTINUE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions

Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Continue flyout Continue Menu: Dimension Continue

Summary
Automatically continues creating additional dimensions from the last linear, angular, or ordinate dimension created, or from a selected extension line. The dimension lines are lined up automatically.

If no dimension was created in the current session, you are prompted to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the continued dimension.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Otherwise, the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or angular, the following prompt is displayed:

278 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a point, enter an option, or press Enter to select a base dimension If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed: Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>: To end the command, press Enter twice, or press Esc. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.

Second Extension Line Origin Uses the second extension line origin of the continued dimension for the first extension line origin of the next dimension. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text. After you select a continued dimension, the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press Esc. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension, press Enter. Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Select a base dimension, or press Esc to end the command.

Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the continued dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select a feature location, the continued dimension is drawn and the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press Esc. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension, press Enter. Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Select a base dimension, or press Esc to end the command. Undo Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session.

DIMCONTINUE | 279

Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension. After you select a continued dimension, the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press Esc.

DIMDIAMETER
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Radial Dimensions

Creates a diameter dimension for a circle or an arc.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Dimension flyout Diameter Menu: Dimension Diameter

Summary
Measures the diameter of a selected circle or arc, and displays the dimension text with a diameter symbol in front of it. You can use grips to easily reposition the resulting diameter dimension.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle:

280 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Specify dimension line location on page 281 or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD for Mac automatically draws an arc extension line. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([]). For more information, see Change Existing Objects. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the dimension text. Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.

DIMDISASSOCIATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Dimension Associativity

Removes associativity from selected dimensions.

Summary
DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimensions that are not on locked layers, and that are not in a different space than the current space (for example, if model space is active, associative

DIMDISASSOCIATE | 281

dimensions in paper space are excluded). DIMDISASSOCIATE then disassociates these dimensions and reports the number of dimensions that are filtered out and the number that are disassociated.

DIMEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Dimension Text

Edits dimension text and extension lines.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group (expanded) Oblique Menu: Dimension Oblique

Summary
Rotates, modifies, or restores dimension text. Changes the oblique angle of extension lines. The companion command that moves text and the dimension line is DIMTEDIT on page 344.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter type of dimension editing [Home/New/Rotate/Oblique] <Home>: Enter an option or press Enter Home Moves rotated dimension text back to its default position.

282 | Chapter 5 D Commands

The selected dimension text is returned to its default position and rotation as specified in its dimension style. New Changes dimension text using the In-Place Text Editor.

The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets (< >). Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information, see Change Existing Objects. Rotate Rotates dimension text. This option is similar to the Angle option of DIMTEDIT. Entering 0 places the text in its default orientation, which is determined by the vertical and horizontal text settings on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE. The DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables control this orientation.

Oblique The Oblique option is useful when extension lines conflict with other features of the drawing. The oblique angle is measured from the X axis of the UCS.

DIMEDIT | 283

DIMHORIZONTAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Linear Dimensions

Creates a horizontal linear dimension.

Summary
Creates a linear dimension with a horizontal dimension line.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point or press Enter to select an object to dimension After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option

First Extension Line Origin

Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify the origin point of the first.

Dimension Line Location

Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the dimension is drawn.

284 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Text
Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.

Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.

Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE. This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable. If you select a circle, the east or west quadrant points are used for the origins of the extension lines.

DIMHORIZONTAL | 285

DIMINSPECT
Quick Reference
See also:

Inspection Dimension

Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Inspect Dimension Menu: Dimension Inspection

Summary
Inspection dimensions specify how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range.

The Inspection Dimension Dialog Box is displayed and allows you to add or remove inspection dimensions from an existing dimension. Inspection dimensions allow you to effectively communicate how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range. If you enter -diminspect at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

286 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Inspection Dimension Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Inspection Dimension

Allows you to add or remove an inspection dimension from selected dimensions.

Summary
Use the Shape and Inspection Label/Rate settings to the appearance of the frame of the inspection dimension and the inspection rate value.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Select Dimensions
Specifies the dimensions that an inspection dimension should be added to or removed from.

Remove Inspection
Removes the inspection dimension from the selected dimension.

Inspection Dimension Dialog Box | 287

Shape
Controls the shape of the frame that is drawn around the label, dimension value, and inspection rate of the inspection dimension. Round Creates a frame with semi-circles on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. Angular Creates a frame with lines that form a 90-degree angle on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. None Specifies that no frame is drawn around the values; the fields are not separated by vertical lines.

Label/Inspection Rate
Specifies the label text and inspection rate for an inspection dimension. Label Turns the display of the label field on and off. Label Value Specifies the label text. The label is displayed in the leftmost section of the inspection dimension when the Label check box is selected. Inspection Rate Turns the display of the rate field on and off. Inspection Rate Value Specifies how frequently a part should be inspected. The value is expressed as a percentage, and the valid range is 0 to 100. The inspection rate is displayed in the rightmost section of the inspection dimension when the Inspection Rate check box is selected.

288 | Chapter 5 D Commands

-DIMINSPECT
Quick Reference
See also:

Inspection Dimension

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Add inspection data on page 289 or [Remove on page 289] <Add>: Enter an option or press Enter

Add
Adds an inspection dimension to the selected dimensions. Round Creates a frame with semi-circles on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. Angular Creates a frame with lines that form a 90-degree angle on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. None Specifies that no frame is drawn around the values; the fields are not separated by vertical lines. None No label is displayed with the inspection dimension.

Remove
Removes the inspection dimension from the selected dimensions.

DIMJOGGED
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Radial Dimensions

Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs.

-DIMINSPECT | 289

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Dimension flyout Jogged Menu: Dimension Jogged

Summary
DIMJOGGED measures the radius of the selected object and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. The origin point of the dimension line can be specified at any convenient location. NOTE Jogged radius dimensions are also called foreshortened radius dimensions. Creates jogged radius dimensions when the center of an arc or circle is located off the layout and cannot be displayed in its true location. The origin point of the dimension can be specified at a more convenient location called the center location override.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Select an arc, circle, or polyline arc segment Specify center location override: Specify a point Accepts a new center point for a jogged radius dimension that takes the place of the true center point of the arc or circle. Specify dimension line location on page 290 or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD for Mac automatically draws an arc extension line. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter

290 | Chapter 5 D Commands

special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information, see Change Existing Objects. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Also determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. Specify Jog Location Locates the middle point of the jog. The transverse angle of the jog is determined by the Dimension Style Manager.

DIMJOGLINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Dimension Jog

Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension.

Access Methods

Button

DIMJOGLINE | 291

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Jog Line Menu: Dimension Jogged Linear

Summary
Jog lines in a dimension indicate a break in the objects being dimensioned. The dimension value represents the actual distance, rather than the measured distance in the drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select dimension to add jog on page 292 or [Remove on page 292]: Select a linear or aligned dimension Add Jog Specifies the linear or aligned dimension to which to add a jog. You are prompted for the location of the jog. Press Enter to place the jog at the midpoint between the dimension text and the first extension line or the midpoint of the dimension line based on the location of the dimension text Remove Specifies the linear or aligned dimension from which to remove the jog.

DIMLINEAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Linear Dimensions

Creates a linear dimension.

Access Methods

Button

292 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Dimension flyout Linear Dimension Menu: Dimension Linear

Summary
Creates a linear dimension with a horizontal, vertical, or rotated dimension line.

First Extension Line Origin

Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify the origin point of the first.

Dimension Line Location

Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the dimension is drawn.

DIMLINEAR | 293

Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.

294 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Horizontal
Creates horizontal linear dimensions.

Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line.

Mtext on page 294 Text on page 294 Angle on page 294

Vertical
Creates vertical linear dimensions.

Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location on page 293

Mtext on page 294 Text on page 294 Angle on page 294

Rotated
Creates rotated linear dimensions.

DIMLINEAR | 295

If you select a circle, the diameter endpoints are used as the origins of the extension line. When the point used to select the circle is close to the north or south quadrant point, a horizontal dimension is drawn. When the point used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant point, a vertical dimension is drawn.

DIMORDINATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Ordinate Dimensions

Creates ordinate dimensions.

296 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Dimension flyout Ordinate Menu: Dimension Ordinate

Summary
Ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal or vertical distance from an origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify feature location: Specify a point or snap to an object Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Leader Endpoint Specification Uses the difference between the feature location and the leader endpoint to determine whether it is an X or a Y ordinate dimension. If the difference in the Y ordinate is greater, the dimension measures the X ordinate. Otherwise, it measures the Y ordinate. Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompt is displayed, where you can specify the endpoint.

Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompts are displayed, where you can specify the endpoint.

DIMORDINATE | 297

Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see Change Existing Objects. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.

DIMOVERRIDE
Quick Reference
See also:

Override a Dimension Style

Controls overrides of system variables used in selected dimensions.

Access Methods

Button

298 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group (expanded) Override Menu: Dimension Override

Summary
Overrides a specified dimensioning system variable for selected dimensions, or clears the overrides of selected dimension objects, returning them to the settings defined by their dimension style.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter dimension variable name to override or [Clear overrides]: Enter the name of a dimension variable, or enter c Dimension Variable Name to Override Overrides the value of the dimensioning system variable you specify. Clear Overrides Clears any overrides on selected dimensions. The dimension objects return to the settings defined by their dimension style.

DIMRADIUS
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Radial Dimensions

Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Dimension flyout Radius Menu: Dimension Radius

DIMRADIUS | 299

Summary
Measures the radius of a selected circle or arc and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. You can use grips to reposition the resulting radius dimension easily.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD for Mac automatically draws an arc extension line. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see Change Existing Objects. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.

300 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DIMREASSOCIATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Dimension Associativity

Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Reassociate Dimension Menu: Dimension Reassociate Dimensions

Summary
Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed. A marker is displayed for each association point prompt.

If the definition point of the current dimension is not associated to a geometric object, the marker appears as an X if the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X inside a box.

NOTE The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select dimensions to reassociate: Select dimension objects

DIMREASSOCIATE | 301

Press Esc to terminate the command without losing the changes that were already specified. Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed dimensions. The prompts for the different types of dimensions are: Linear Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] <next>: Specify an object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press Enter to skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin <next>: Specify an object snap location, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Aligned Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] <next>: Specify an object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press Enter to skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin <next>: Specify an object snap location, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Angular (Three Point) Specify angle vertex or [Select arc or circle] <next>: Specify an object snap location, enter s and select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to skip to the next prompt Specify first angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object snap location or press Enter to skip to the next prompt Specify second angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object snap location or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Angular (Two Line) Select first line <next>: Select a line, or press Enter to skip to the next prompt Select second line <next>: Select another line, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Diameter Select arc or circle <next>: Select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Leader Specify leader association point <next>: Specify an object snap location, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Ordinate Specify feature location <next>: Specify an object snap location, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Radius Select arc or circle <next>: Select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any NOTE DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC in a dimension. Use DIMOVERRIDE to clear dimension linear factors in legacy drawings.

302 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DIMREGEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Associative Dimensions

Updates the locations of all associative dimensions.

Summary
The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are updated. Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in the following cases:

After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model space active; update associative dimensions created in paper space. After opening a drawing containing external references that are dimensioned in the current drawing; update associative dimensions if the associated external reference geometry has been modified.

NOTE After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version, the association between dimensions and objects or points may need to be updated. You can use the DIMREASSOCIATE on page 301 command to reassociate modified dimensions with the objects or points that they dimension.

DIMROTATED
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Linear Dimensions

Creates a rotated linear dimension.

DIMREGEN | 303

Summary
Creates a linear dimension with a rotated dimension line.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify angle of dimension line <0>: Specify an angle or press Enter to accept the default value Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point or press Enter to select an object to dimension After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option

First Extension Line Origin

Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify the origin point of the first.

Dimension Line Location

Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the dimension is drawn.

304 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.

Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.

Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE. This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable. If you select a circle, the location of the origins for the extension lines is calculated based on the center of the circle and the angle of the rotated dimension line.

DIMSPACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Dimension Spacing

Adjusts the spacing between linear dimensions or angular dimensions.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Adjust Dimension Space

DIMSPACE | 305

Menu: Dimension Dimension Space

Summary
The spacing between parallel dimension lines is made equal. You can also make the dimension lines of a series of linear or angular dimensions line up by using a spacing value of 0.

Spacing is applied only to parallel linear dimensions or to angular dimensions that share a common vertex.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select base dimension: Select a parallel linear or angular dimension Select dimensions to space: Select a parallel linear or angular dimension to equally space from the base dimension and press Enter Enter value on page 306 or [Auto on page 306] <Auto>: Specify a spacing distance or press Enter Enter Spacing Value Applies a spacing value to the selected dimensions from the base dimension. For example, if you enter a value of 0.5000, all selected dimensions will be separated by a distance of 0.5000. You can use a spacing value of 0 (zero) to align the dimension lines of selected linear and angular dimensions end to end. Auto Calculates the spacing distance automatically based on the text height specified in the dimension style of the selected base dimension. The resulting spacing value is twice the height of the dimension text.

DIMSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Creates and modifies dimension styles.

306 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Access Methods
Menu: Format Dimension Style

Summary
The Dimension Style Manager is displayed. A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that control the appearance of dimensions. You create dimension styles to specify the format of dimensions quickly, and to ensure that dimensions conform to standards. If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Dimension Style Manager

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Creates new styles, sets the current style, modifies styles, sets overrides on the current style, and compares styles.

Dimension Style Manager | 307

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Current Dimension Style

Displays the name of the dimension style that is current. The default dimension style is STANDARD. The current style is applied to dimensions you create.

Styles
Lists dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted. Right-click in the list to display a shortcut menu with options to set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles. You cannot delete a style that is current

or in use in the current drawing. A that the style is .

icon before the style name indicates

Unless you select Don't List Styles in Xrefs, dimension styles are displayed in externally referenced drawings using the syntax for externally referenced named objects. (See Overview of Referenced Drawings (Xrefs).) Although you cannot change, rename, or make current externally referenced dimension styles, you can create new styles based on them. The item selected in List controls the dimension styles displayed.

308 | Chapter 5 D Commands

New
Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box on page 310, in which you can define a new dimension style.

Delete
Deletes the dimension style selected in the Styles list. A style that is being used in the drawing cannot be deleted.

Options
Manages the dimension styles in the list. Set Current Sets the style selected under Styles to current. The current style is applied to dimensions you create. Modify Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box on page 311, in which you can modify dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box. Override Displays the Override Current Style dialog box on page 311, in which you can set temporary overrides to dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box. Overrides are displayed as unsaved changes under the dimension style in the Styles list. Compare Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog box, in which you can compare two dimension styles or list all the properties of one dimension style. Rename Edits the name of the style selected in the list.

List
Controls the display of styles in the Styles list. Select All Styles if you want to see all dimension styles in a drawing. Select Styles in Use if you want to see only the dimension styles currently used by dimensions in the drawing.

Dont List Styles in Xrefs

When selected, suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced drawings in the Styles list.

Preview
Shows a graphic representation of the style selected in the Styles list.

Description
Describes the style selected in the Styles list relative to the current style. If the description is longer than the space provided, you can click in the pane and use arrow keys to scroll down.

Dimension Style Manager | 309

Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Names the new dimension style, sets the style on which to start the new one, and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. New Style Name Specifies the new dimension style name. Start With Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new style, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with. Annotative Specifies that the dimension style is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Use For Creates a dimension substyle that applies only to specific dimension types. For example, you could create a version of the STANDARD dimension style to be used only for diameter dimensions. Continue

310 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Displays the New Dimension Style dialog box, in which you define the new dimension style properties.

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Set properties for dimension styles.

Summary
When you choose Continue in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the dimension style that you selected to start the new style in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box. Choosing either Modify or Override in the Dimension Style Manager displays the Modify Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog box. The content of these dialog boxes is identical to the New Dimension Style dialog box, although you are modifying or overriding an existing dimension style rather than creating a new one. The sample image on each tab displays the effects of each option.

List of Tabs

Lines on page 312 Symbols and Arrows on page 316 Text on page 320 Fit on page 325 Primary Units on page 329 Alternate Units on page 333 Tolerances on page 336

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 311

Lines Tab
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Sets the format and properties for dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks.

Summary
Sets the dimension line properties.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Dimension Lines
Color

312 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Displays and sets the color for the dimension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Color Palette dialog box is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRD system variable) You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. Linetype Sets the linetype of the dimension line. (DIMLTYPE system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line. (DIMLWD system variable) Extend Beyond Ticks Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past the extension line when you use oblique, architectural, tick, integral, and no marks for arrowheads. (DIMDLE system variable)

Baseline Spacing Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a baseline dimension. Enter a distance. For information about baseline dimensions, see DIMBASELINE. (DIMDLI system variable)

Suppress Suppresses display of dimension lines. Dimension Line 1 suppresses the first dimension line; Dimension Line 2 suppresses the second dimension line. (DIMSD1 and DIMSD2 system variables)

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 313

Extension Lines
Controls the appearance of the extension lines. Color Sets the color for the extension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRE system variable.) You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. Linetype Ext Line 1 Sets the linetype of the first extension line. (DIMLTEX1 system variable) Linetype Ext Line 2 Sets the linetype of the second extension line. (DIMLTEX2 system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the extension line. (DIMLWE system variable) Suppress Suppresses the display of extension lines. Extension Line 1 suppresses the first extension line; Extension Line 2 suppresses the second extension line. (DIMSE1 and DIMSE2 system variables)

Extend Beyond Dim Lines

314 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Specifies a distance to extend the extension lines above the dimension line. (DIMEXE system variable)

Offset From Origin Sets the distance to offset the extension lines from the points on the drawing that define the dimension. (DIMEXO system variable)

Fixed Length Extension Lines Enables fixed length extension lines. (DIMFXLON system variable) Length Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin. (DIMFXL system variable)

Preview
Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 315

Symbols and Arrows Tab

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Sets the format and placement for arrowheads, center marks, arc length symbols, and jogged radius dimensions.

Summary
Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Arrowheads
First

316 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When you change the first arrowhead type, the second arrowhead automatically changes to match it. (DIMBLK1 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Second Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line. (DIMBLK2 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Leader Sets the arrowhead for the leader line. (DIMLDRBLK system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Arrow Size Displays and sets the size of arrowheads. (DIMASZ system variable) NOTE blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.

Dimension Break
Controls the gap width of dimension breaks. Break Size Displays and sets the size of the gap used for dimension breaks.

Center Marks
Controls the appearance of center marks and centerlines for diameter and radial dimensions. The DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands use center marks and centerlines. For DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS, the center mark is drawn only if you place the dimension line outside the circle or arc.

Type
Sets the type of center mark or line to use. None

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 317

Creates no center mark or centerline. The value is stored as 0 in the DIMCEN system variable. Mark Creates a center mark. The size of the center mark is stored as a positive value in the DIMCEN system variable. Line Creates a centerline. The size of the centerline is stored as a negative value in the DIMCEN system variable.

Size
Displays and sets the size of the center mark or centerline. (DIMCEN system variable)

Radius Jog Dimension

Controls the display of jogged (zigzag) radius dimensions. Jogged radius dimensions are often created when the center point of a circle or arc is located off the page.

Jog Angle Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a jogged radius dimension. (DIMJOGANG system variable)

Arc Length Symbol

Controls the display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension. (DIMARCSYM system variable) Preceding Dimension Text Places arc length symbols before the dimension text. (DIMARCSYM system variable)

318 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Above Dimension Text Places arc length symbols above the dimension text. (DIMARCSYM system variable) None Suppresses the display of arc length symbols. (DIMARCSYM system variable)

Linear Jog Dimension

Controls the display of the jog for linear dimensions. Jog lines are often added to linear dimensions when the actual measurement is not accurately represent by the dimension. Typically the actual measurement is smaller than the desired value.

Jog Height Factor Determines the height of the of the jog, which is determined by the distance between the two vertices of the angles that make up the jog.

Preview
Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.

Text Tab
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 319

Sets the format, placement, and alignment of dimension text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Text Appearance
Controls the dimension text format and size. Text Style Lists the available text styles. Text Style Button Displays the Text Style Dialog Box on page 1006 where you can create or modify text styles. (DIMTXSTY system variable) Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Color Palette dialog box is displayed. You can also enter color name or number. (DIMCLRT system variable) You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.

320 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Fill Color Sets the color for the text background in dimensions. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Color Palette dialog box is displayed. You can also enter color name or number. (DIMTFILL and DIMTFILLCLR system variables) You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. Text Height Sets the height of the current dimension text style. Enter a value in the text box. If a fixed text height is set in the Text Style (that is, the text style height is greater than 0), that height overrides the text height set here. If you want to use the height set on the Text tab, make sure the text height in the Text Style is set to 0. (DIMTXT system variable) Fraction Height Scale Sets the scale of fractions relative to dimension text. This option is available only when Fractional is selected as the Unit Format on the Primary Units tab. The value entered here is multiplied by the text height to determine the height of dimension fractions relative to dimension text. (DIMTFAC system variable) Show Text Frame When selected, draws a frame around dimension text. Selecting this option changes the value stored in the DIMGAP system variable to a negative value.

Placement
Controls the placement of dimension text. Vertical Controls the vertical placement of dimension text in relation to the dimension line. (DIMTAD system variable) Vertical position options include the following:

Centered: Centers the dimension text between the two parts of the dimension line. Above: Places the dimension text above the dimension line. The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current text gap. See the Offset from Dim Line option. Outside: Places the dimension text on the side of the dimension line farthest away from the first defining point.

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 321

JIS: Places the dimension text to conform to a Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) representation. Below: Places the dimension text under the dimension line. The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current text gap. See the Offset from Dim Line option.

Horizontal Controls the horizontal placement of dimension text along the dimension line, in relation to the extension lines. (DIMJUST system variable) Horizontal position options include the following:

Centered: Centers the dimension text along the dimension line between the extension lines. At Ext Line 1: Left-justifies the text with the first extension line along the dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. See Arrowheads and Offset from Dim Line. At Ext Line 2: Right-justifies the text with the second extension line along the dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. See Arrowheads and Offset from Dim Line.

Over Ext Line 1: Positions the text over or along the first extension line. Over Ext Line 2: Positions the text over or along the second extension line.

322 | Chapter 5 D Commands

View Direction Controls the dimension text viewing direction. (DIMTXTDIRECTION system variable) View Direction includes the following options:

Left-to-Right: Places the text to enable reading from left to right. Right-to-Left: Places the text to enable reading from right to left.

Offset from Dim Line Sets the current text gap, which is the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line is broken to accommodate the dimension text. This value is also used as the minimum length required for dimension line segments. Text is positioned inside the extension lines only if the resulting segments are at least as long as the text gap. Text above or below the dimension line is placed inside only if the arrowheads, dimension text, and a margin leave enough room for the text gap. (DIMGAP system variable)

Alignment
Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether it is inside or outside the extension lines. (DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables) Horizontal Places text in a horizontal position.

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 323

Aligned with Dimension Line Aligns text with the dimension line. ISO Standard Aligns text with the dimension line when text is inside the extension lines, but aligns it horizontally when text is outside the extension lines.

Preview
Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.

Fit Tab
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the dimension line.

324 | Chapter 5 D Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Fit Options
Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available between the extension lines.

When space is available, text and arrowheads are placed between the extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the Fit options. (DIMATFIT, DIMTIX, and DIMSOXD system variables) Either Text or Arrows (Best Fit) Moves either the text or the arrowheads outside the extension lines based on the best fit (DIMATFIT system variable).

When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines. Otherwise, either the text or the arrowheads are moved based on the best fit.

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 325

When enough space is available for text only, places text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside the extension lines. When enough space is available for arrowheads only, places them between the extension lines and places text outside the extension lines. When space is available for neither text nor arrowheads, places them both outside the extension lines.

Arrows Moves arrowheads outside the extension lines first, then text (DIMATFIT system variable).

When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines. When space is available for arrowheads only, places them between the extension lines and places text outside them. When not enough space is available for arrowheads, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines.

Text Moves text outside the extension lines first, then arrowheads (DIMATFIT system variable).

When space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines. When space is available for text only, places the text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside them. When not enough space is available for text, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines.

Both Text and Arrows When not enough space is available for text and arrowheads, moves both outside the extension lines (DIMATFIT system variable).

Always Keep Text Between Ext Lines

326 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Always places text between extension lines. (DIMTIX system variable)

Suppress Arrows If They Don't Fit Inside Extension Lines Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines. (DIMSOXD system variable)

Text Placement
Sets the placement of dimension text when it is moved from the default position, that is, the position defined by the dimension style. (DIMTMOVE system variable)

Beside the Dimension Line If selected, moves the dimension line whenever dimension text is moved. (DIMTMOVE system variable)

Over the Dimension Line, with Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved. If text is moved away from the dimension line, a leader line is created connecting the text to the dimension line. The leader line is omitted when text is too close to the dimension line. (DIMTMOVE system variable)

Over the Dimension Line, Without Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved. Text that is moved away from the dimension line is not connected to the dimension line with a leader. (DIMTMOVE system variable)

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 327

Scale for Dimension Features

Sets the overall dimension scale value or the paper space scaling. Annotative Specifies that the dimension is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Scale Dimensions To Layout Determines a scale factor based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space. (DIMSCALE system variable) When you work in paper space, but not in a model space viewport, or when TILEMODE is set to 1, the default scale factor of 1.0 is used or the DIMSCALE system variable. Use Overall Scale Of Sets a scale for all dimension style settings that specify size, distance, or spacing, including text and arrowhead sizes. This scale does not change dimension measurement values. (DIMSCALE system variable)

Fine Tuning
Provides additional options for placing dimension text. Place Text Manually Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places the text at the position you specify at the Dimension Line Location prompt. (DIMUPT system variable) Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when the arrowheads are placed outside the measured points. (DIMTOFL system variable)

Preview
Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.

328 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Primary Units Tab

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets prefixes and suffixes for dimension text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Linear Dimensions
Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions. Unit Format Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular. (DIMLUNIT system variable)

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 329

The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC system variable (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text. (DIMDEC system variable) Fraction Format Sets the format for fractions. (DIMFRAC system variable) Decimal Separator Sets the separator for decimal formats. (DIMDSEP system variable) Round Off Sets rounding rules for dimension measurements for all dimension types except Angular. If you enter a value of 0.25, all distances are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. If you enter a value of 1.0, all dimension distances are rounded to the nearest integer. The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting. (DIMRND system variable) Prefix Includes a prefix in the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol. When you enter a prefix, it overrides any default prefixes such as those used in diameter and radius dimensioning. (DIMPOST system variable)

If you specify tolerances, the prefix is added to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. Suffix Includes a suffix in the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text mm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMPOST system variable)

330 | Chapter 5 D Commands

If you specify tolerances, the suffix is added to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045. Scale Factor Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. It is recommended that you do not change this value from the default value of 1.00. For example, if you enter 2, the dimension for a 1-inch line is displayed as two inches. The value does not apply to angular dimensions and is not applied to rounding values or to plus or minus tolerance values. (DIMLFAC system variable) Apply to Layout Dimension Only Applies the measurement scale factor only to dimensions created in layout viewports. Except when using nonassociative dimensions, this setting should remain unchecked. (DIMLFAC system variable)

Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMZIN system variable) Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions. Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Select leading to enable display of dimension distances less than one unit in sub units. Sub-units factor Sets the number of sub units to a unit. It is used to calculate the dimension distance in a sub unit when the distance is less than one unit. For example, enter 100 if the suffix is m and the sub-unit suffix is to display in cm. Sub-unit suffix Includes a suffix to the dimension value sub unit. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, enter cm for .96m to display as 96cm. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 331

0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.

Angular Dimensions
Displays and sets the current angle format for angular dimensions. Units Format Sets the angular units format. (DIMAUNIT system variable) Precision Sets the number of decimal places for angular dimensions. DIMADEC system variable)

Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros. (DIMAZIN system variable) Leading Suppresses leading zeros in angular decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. You can also display dimension distances less than one unit in sub units. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in angular decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.

Preview
Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.

Alternate Units Tab

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

332 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their format and precision.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Display Alternate Units

Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. Sets the DIMALT system variable to 1.

Alternate Units
Displays and sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except Angular. Unit Format Sets the unit format for alternate units. (DIMALTU system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 333

Sets the number of decimal places for alternate units. (DIMALTD system variable) Multiplier for Alt Units Specifies the multiplier used as the conversion factor between primary and alternate units. For example, to convert inches to millimeters, enter 25.4. The value has no effect on angular dimensions, and it is not applied to the rounding value or the plus or minus tolerance values. (DIMALTF system variable) Round Distances To Sets rounding rules for alternate units for all dimension types except Angular. If you enter a value of 0.25, all alternate measurements are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. If you enter a value of 1.0, all dimension measurements are rounded to the nearest integer. The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting. (DIMALTRND system variable) Prefix Includes a prefix in the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol. (DIMAPOST system variable) For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045.

Suffix Includes a suffix in the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text cm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMAPOST system variable) For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters on page 1045.

Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMALTZ system variable) Leading

334 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Sub-units factor Sets the number of sub units to a unit. It is used to calculate the dimension distance in a sub unit when the distance is less than one unit. For example, enter 100 if the suffix is m and the sub-unit suffix is to display in cm. Sub-unit suffix Includes a suffix to the dimension value sub unit. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, enter cm for .96m to display as 96cm. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.

Placement
Controls the placement of alternate units in dimension text. After Primary Value Places alternate units after the primary units in dimension text. Below Primary Value Places alternate units below the primary units in dimension text.

Preview
Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 335

Tolerances Tab
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Specifies the display and format of dimension text tolerances.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Tolerance Format
Controls the tolerance format. Method Sets the method for calculating the tolerance. (DIMTOL system variable)

None: Does not add a tolerance. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0.

336 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of tolerance in which a single value of variation is applied to the dimension measurement. A plus-or-minus sign appears after the dimension. Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.

Deviation: Adds a plus/minus tolerance expression. Different plus and minus values of variation are applied to the dimension measurement. A plus sign (+) precedes the tolerance value entered in Upper Value, and a minus sign (-) precedes the tolerance value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.

Limits: Creates a limit dimension. A maximum and a minimum value are displayed, one over the other. The maximum value is the dimension value plus the value entered in Upper Value. The minimum value is the dimension value minus the value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0. TheDIMLIM system variable is set to 1.

Basic: Creates a basic dimension, which displays a box around the full extents of the dimension. The distance between the text and the box is stored as a negative value in the DIMGAP system variable.

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 337

Precision Sets the number of decimal places. (DIMTDEC system variable) Upper Value Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you select Symmetrical in Method, this value is used for the tolerance. (DIMTP system variable) Lower Value Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. (DIMTM system variable) Scaling for Height Sets the current height for the tolerance text. The ratio of the tolerance height to the main dimension text height is calculated and stored in the DIMTFAC system variable. Vertical Position Controls text justification for symmetrical and deviation tolerances.

Top: Aligns the tolerance text with the top of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 2.

Middle: Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 1.

Bottom: Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 0.

338 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Align
Controls the alignment of upper and lower tolerance values when stacked Decimal Separators Values are stacked by their decimal separators. Operational Symbols Values are stacked by their operational symbols.

Suppress
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMTZIN system variable) Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions. Leading Zeros Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Zeros Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.

Alternate Unit Tolerance

Formats alternate tolerance units. Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places. (DIMALTTD system variable)

New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 339

Suppress
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMALTTZ system variable) Leading Zeros Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Zeros Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.

Preview
Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.

Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Compares the properties of two dimension styles or displays all properties of one style.

340 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Summary
You can output the results of the comparison to the Clipboard, and then paste to other applications.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Compare Specifies the first dimension style for the comparison. With Specifies the second dimension style for the comparison. If you set the second style to <none> or to the same style as the first, all the properties of the dimension style are displayed. Comparison results are displayed automatically under the following headings:

Description of the dimension style property System variable that controls the property System variable values of style properties that differ for each dimension style

Results

Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box | 341

Displays the results of the dimension style comparison. If you compare two different styles, the properties that differ are displayed. If you set the second style to <none> or to the same style as the first, all the properties of the dimension style are displayed. Copy to Clipboard button Copies the results of the comparison to the Clipboard. You can then paste the results to other applications, such as word processors and spreadsheets.

-DIMSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dimension Styles

Creates and modifies dimension styles.

Summary
You can save or restore dimensioning system variables to a selected dimension style.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current dimension style: <current> Annotative: <current> Enter a dimension style option [ANnotative on page 342/Save on page 342/Restore on page 343/STatus on page 343/Variables on page 343/Apply on page 344/?] <Restore>: Enter an option or press Enter

Annotative
Creates an dimension style.

Save
Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a dimension style. Name Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a new dimension style using the name you enter. The new dimension style becomes the current one.

342 | Chapter 5 D Commands

If you enter the name of an existing dimension style, the following prompts are displayed: That name is already in use, redefine it? <N>: Enter y or press Enter If you enter y, associative dimensions that use the redefined dimension style are regenerated. To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to save and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Name for New Dimension Style prompt. Only settings that differ are displayed, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in the second column. ?List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing.

Restore
Restores dimensioning system variable settings to those of a selected dimension style. Name Makes the dimension style you enter the current dimension style. To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to restore and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. Only settings that differ are displayed, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in the second column. After the differences are displayed, the previous prompt returns. ?List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Select Dimension Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style.

Status
Displays the current values of all dimension system variables.

Variables
Lists the dimension system variable settings of a dimension style or selected dimensions without modifying the current settings. Name Lists the settings of dimension system variables for the dimension style name you enter. To display the differences between a particular dimension style and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. Only settings that differ are displayed, with the current setting

-DIMSTYLE | 343

in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in the second column. ?List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Select Dimension Lists the dimension style and any dimension overrides for the dimension object you select.

Apply
Applies the current dimensioning system variable settings to selected dimension objects, permanently overriding any existing dimension styles applied to these objects. The dimension line spacing between existing baseline dimensions is not updated (see the DIMDLI system variable); dimension text variable settings do not update existing leader text.

DIMTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Dimension Text

Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group (expanded) Text Angle Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group (expanded) Left Justify, Center Justify, Right Justify Menu: Dimension Align Text Angle

344 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Summary
The companion command that edits the dimension text and changes the extension line angle is DIMEDIT.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select dimension: Select a dimension object You are prompted for the new location of the dimension text. Specify new location for dimension text or [Left/Right/Center/Home/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Location for Dimension Text Updates the location of the dimension text dynamically as you drag it. To determine whether text appears above, below, or in the middle of the dimension line, use the Text tab in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog box. Left Left-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions.

Right Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions.

Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line.

DIMTEDIT | 345

This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions.

Home Moves the dimension text back to its default position. For example:

Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. The center point of the text does not change. If the text moves or the dimension is regenerated, the orientation set by the text angle is retained. Entering an angle of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation. The text angle is measured from the X axis of the UCS.

346 | Chapter 5 D Commands

DIMVERTICAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Linear Dimensions

Creates a vertical linear dimension.

Summary
Creates a linear dimension with a vertical dimension line.

First Extension Line Origin

Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify the origin point of the first.

Dimension Line Location

Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the dimension is drawn.

DIMVERTICAL | 347

Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.

Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE. This value is stored in the DIMEXO system variable. If you select a circle, the north or south quadrant points are used for the origins of the extension lines.

DIST
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations

Measures the distance and angle between two points.

Access Method
Command entry: 'dist for transparent use

348 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Summary
In general, the DIST command reports 3D distances in model space and 2D distances on a layout in paper space. In model space, changes in X, Y, and Z component distances and angles are measured in 3D relative to the current UCS. In paper space, distances are normally reported in 2D paper space units. However, when using object snaps on model space objects that are displayed in a single viewport, distances are reported as 2D model space distances projected onto a plane parallel to your screen.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point or <Multiple points>: Specify a second point The distance is displayed in the current units format.

DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or second point if you omit the Z coordinate value. NOTE When using the DIST command for 3D distances, it is recommended that you switch to model space. Multiple Points If you specify multiple points, a running total of the distance based on the existing line segments and the current rubberband line is displayed in the tooltip. A dynamic dimension is also displayed. The distance is updated as you move the cursor.

DIST | 349

DISTANTLIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Distant Lights

Creates a distant light.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Lights tool group (expanded) Distant Light Menu: View Render Light New Distant Light

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify light direction FROM <0,0,0> or [Vector]: Specify a point or enter v Specify light direction TO <1,1,1>: Specify a point If you enter the Vector option, the following prompt is displayed: Specify vector direction <0.0000,-0.0100,1.0000>: Enter a vector After you specify the light direction and if the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name/Intensity/Status/shadoW/Color/eXit] <eXit>: If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name/Intensity factor/Status/Photometry/shadoW/filterColor/eXit] <eXit>:

350 | Chapter 5 D Commands

NOTE When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the Attenuation option has no affect on the creation of the light. It is only maintained for scripting compatibility.

Name
Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters.

Intensity/Intensity Factor
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system.

Status
Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect.

Photometry
Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux is the perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface, per unit area. Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface.

Candela (symbol: cd) is the SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction). Cd/Sr Lux (symbol: lx) is the SI unit of illuminance. Lm/m^2 Foot-candle (symbol: fc) is the American unit of illuminance. Lm/ft^2

DISTANTLIGHT | 351

Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterick (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value.

Color/Filter Color
Controls the color of the light. True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color. HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color. Color Book Specifies a color from a color book.

DIVIDE
Quick Reference
See also:

Divide an Object into Equal Segments

Creates evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object.

352 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group (expanded) Point flyout Divide Menu: Draw Point Divide

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select object to divide: Use an object selection method Enter number of segments on page 353 or [Block]: Enter a value from 2 through 32,767, or enter b

Number of Segments
Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects.

Use DDPTYPE on page 258 to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing.

Block
Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included.

DIVIDE | 353

Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be tangent to, or collinear with, the divided object at the dividing points. No Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation. The illustration shows an arc divided into five equal parts using a block consisting of a vertically oriented ellipse.

DONUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Donuts

Creates a filled circle or a wide ring.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) Donut Menu: Draw Donut

Summary
A donut consists of two arc polylines that are joined end-to-end to create a circular shape. The width of the polylines is determined by the specified inside and outside diameters. To create solid-filled circles, specify an inside diameter of zero.

354 | Chapter 5 D Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify inside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press Enter If you specify an inside diameter of 0, the donut is a filled circle. Specify outside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press Enter Specify center of donut or <exit>: Specify a point (1) or press Enter to end the command

The location of the donut is set based on the center point. After you specify the diameters, you are prompted for the locations at which to draw donuts. A donut is drawn at each point specified (2). How the interior of a donut is filled depends on the current setting of the FILL command.

DRAGMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls the way dragged objects are displayed.

DRAGMODE | 355

Access Method
Command entry: 'dragmode for transparent use

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter new value [ON/OFF/Auto] <current>: Enter an option or press Enter On Permits dragging, but you must enter drag where appropriate in a drawing or editing command to initiate dragging.

Off Ignores all dragging requests, including those embedded in menu items.

Auto Turns on dragging for every command that supports it. Dragging is performed whenever it is possible. Entering drag each time is not necessary.

DRAWORDER
Quick Reference
See also:

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Changes the draw order of images and other objects.

Access Methods

Button

356 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Move/Rotate/Scale tool group (expanded) Draw Order flyout Menu: Tools Draw Order Shortcut menu: Select an object, right-click, and then click Draw Order.

Summary
Use the DRAWORDERCTL system variable to control the default display behavior of overlapping objects. In addition, the TEXTTOFRONT command brings all text and dimensions in a drawing in front of other objects, and the HATCHTOBACK command sends all hatch objects behind other objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter object ordering option [Above objects/Under objects/Front/Back] <Back>: Enter an option or press Enter Above Objects Moves the selected object above the specified reference objects. Under Objects Moves the selected objects below the specified reference objects. Front Moves the selected objects to the top of the order of objects in the drawing. Back Moves the selected objects to the bottom of the order of objects in the drawing. When you change the draw order (display and plotting order) of multiple objects, the relative draw order of the selected objects is maintained. By default, when you create new objects from existing ones (for example, FILLET or PEDIT), the new objects are assigned the draw order of the original object you selected first. By default, while you edit an object (for example, MOVE or STRETCH), the object is displayed on top of all objects in the drawing. When you are finished editing, your drawing is partially regenerated so that the object is displayed according to its correct draw order. This can result in some edit operations taking slightly longer. You can use DRAWORDERCTL to change the default draw order settings.

DRAWORDER | 357

DSETTINGS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Precision Tools

Sets grid and snap, polar and object snap tracking, object snap modes, and Dynamic Input.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap Mode, Grid Display, Polar Tracking, Object Snap, Object Snap Tracking, Dynamic Input on the status bar. Click Settings.

Summary
The Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed.

Drafting Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Precision Tools

Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids.

Summary
The following categories are available.

Snap and Grid on page 359 Polar Tracking on page 362 Object Snap on page 365 3D Object Snap on page 369

358 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Dynamic Input on page 374

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Snap and Grid Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)

Specifies Snap and Grid settings.

Snap On
Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking Snap on the status bar, by pressing F9, or by using the SNAPMODE system variable.

Snap Spacing
Controls an invisible, rectangular grid of snap locations that restricts cursor movement to specified X and Y intervals. Snap X Spacing

Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 359

Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. The value must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system variable) Snap Y Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the Y direction. The value must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system variable) Equal X and Y Spacing Forces the X and Y spacing to the same values for snap spacing and for grid spacing. The snap spacing intervals can be different from the grid spacing intervals.

Polar Spacing
Controls the PolarSnap increment distance. Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is selected under Snap Type & Style. If this value is 0, the PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing. The Polar Distance setting is used in conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap tracking. If neither tracking feature is enabled, the Polar Distance setting has no effect. (POLARDIST system variable)

Snap Type
Sets the snap style and snap type. Grid Snap Sets the snap type to Grid. When you specify points, the cursor snaps along vertical or horizontal grid points. (SNAPTYPE system variable) Rectangular Snap: Sets the snap style to standard Rectangular snap mode. When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to a rectangular snap grid. (SNAPSTYL system variable) Isometric Snap Sets the snap style to Isometric snap mode. When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to an isometric snap grid. (SNAPSTYL system variable) PolarSnap Sets the snap type to Polar. When Snap mode is on and you specify points with polar tracking turned on, the cursor snaps along polar alignment angles

360 | Chapter 5 D Commands

set on the Polar Tracking tab relative to the starting polar tracking point. (SNAPTYPE system variable)

Grid On
Turns the grid on or off. You can also turn grid mode on or off by clicking Grid on the status bar, by pressing F7, or by using the GRIDMODE on page 1338 system variable.

Grid Style
Sets the grid style in 2D contexts. You can also set grid style by using the GRIDSTYLE on page 1339 system variable. 2D Model Space Sets the grid style to dotted grid for 2D model space. (GRIDSTYLE on page 1339 system variable) Block Editor Sets the grid style to dotted grid for the Block Editor. (GRIDSTYLE on page 1339 system variable) Sheet/Layout Sets the grid style to dotted grid for sheet and layout. (GRIDSTYLE on page 1339 system variable)

Grid Spacing
Controls the display of a grid that helps you visualize distances. NOTE The limits of the grid are controlled by the LIMITS command and the GRIDDISPLAY system variable. Grid X Spacing Specifies the grid spacing in the X direction. If this value is 0, the grid assumes the value set for Snap X Spacing. (GRIDUNIT system variable) Grid Y Spacing Specifies the grid spacing in the Y direction. If this value is 0, the grid assumes the value set for Snap Y Spacing. (GRIDUNIT system variable) Major Line Every Specifies the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Grid lines rather than grid dots are displayed when GRIDSTYLE on page 1339 is set to 0. (GRIDMAJOR system variable)

Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 361

Grid Behavior
Controls the appearance of the grid lines that are displayed when GRIDSTYLE on page 1339 is set to 0. Adaptive Grid Limits the density of the grid when zoomed out. (GRIDDISPLAY system variable) Allow Subdivision Below Grid Spacing: Generates additional, more closely spaced grid lines when zoomed in. The frequency of these grid lines is determined by the frequency of the major grid lines. (GRIDDISPLAY and GRIDMAJOR system variables) Display Grid Beyond Limits Displays the grid beyond the area specified by the LIMITS command. (GRIDDISPLAY system variable) Follow Dynamic UCS Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS. (GRIDDISPLAY system variable)

Polar Tracking Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)

Controls the AutoTrack settings.

362 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Polar Tracking On
Turns polar tracking on and off. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP system variable.

Polar Angle Settings

Sets the alignment angles for polar tracking. (POLARANG system variable) Increment Angle Sets the polar increment angle used to display polar tracking alignment paths. You can enter any angle, or select a common angle of 90, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15, 10, or 5 degrees from the list. (POLARANG system variable) Additional Angles Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking. The Additional Angles check box is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable, and the list of additional angles is also controlled by the POLARADDANG system variable.

Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 363

NOTE Additional angles are absolute, not incremental. List of Angles If Additional Angles is selected, lists the additional angles that are available. To add new angles, click New. To remove existing angles, click Delete. (POLARADDANG system variable) New Adds up to 10 additional polar tracking alignment angles. NOTE Before adding fractional angles, you must set the AUPREC system variable to the appropriate decimal precision to avoid undesired rounding. For example, if the value of AUPREC is 0 (the default value), all fractional angles you enter are rounded to the nearest whole number. Delete Deletes selected additional angles.

Object Snap Tracking Settings

Sets options for object snap tracking. Track Orthogonally Only Displays only orthogonal (horizontal/vertical) object snap tracking paths for acquired object snap points when object snap tracking is on. (POLARMODE system variable) Track Using All Polar Angle Settings Applies polar tracking settings to object snap tracking. When you use object snap tracking, the cursor tracks along polar alignment angles from acquired object snap points. (POLARMODE system variable) NOTE Clicking Polar and Otrack on the status bar also turns polar tracking and object snap tracking on and off.

Polar Angle Measurement

Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are measured. Absolute Bases polar tracking angles on the current user coordinate system (UCS). Relative to Last Segment Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn.

364 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)

Controls running object snap settings. With running object snap settings, also called Osnap, you can specify a snap point at an exact location on an object. When more than one option is selected, the selected snap modes are applied to return a point closest to the center of the aperture box. Press TAB to cycle through the options.

Object Snap On
Turns running object snaps on and off. The object snaps selected under Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. (OSMODE system variable)

Object Snap Tracking On

Turns object snap tracking on and off. With object snap tracking, the cursor can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn on one or more object snaps. (AUTOSNAP system variable)

Object Snap Modes

Lists object snaps that you can turn on as running object snaps.

Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 365

Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, spline, region, or ray, or to the closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face.

Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, region, solid, spline, or xline.

Center Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.

Node Snaps to a point object, dimension definition point, or dimension text origin.

366 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Quadrant Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.

Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region, spline, or xline. Extended Intersection is not available as a running object snap.

NOTE You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. Intersection and Extended Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids. Extension Causes a temporary extension line or arc to be displayed when you pass the cursor over the endpoint of objects, so you can specify points on the extension. NOTE When working in perspective view, you cannot track along the extension line of an arc or elliptical arc. Insertion Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, a shape, or text. Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region, solid, spline, or xline.

Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 367

Deferred Perpendicular snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one perpendicular snap. You can use a line, arc, circle, polyline, ray, xline, multiline, or 3D solid edge as an object from which to draw a perpendicular line. You can use Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such objects. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point, an AutoSnap tooltip and marker are displayed.

Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, or spline. Deferred Tangent snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one tangent snap. You can use Deferred Tangent to draw a line or xline that is tangent to arcs, polyline arcs, or circles. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Tangent snap point, a marker and an AutoSnap tooltip are displayed.

NOTE When you use the From option in conjunction with the Tangent snap mode to draw objects other than lines from arcs or circles, the first point drawn is tangent to the arc or circle in relation to the last point selected in the drawing area. Nearest Snaps to the nearest point on an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, point, polyline, ray, spline, or xline. Apparent Intersection Snaps to the visual intersection of two objects that are not in the same plane but may appear to intersect in the current view. Extended Apparent Intersection is not available as a running object snap. Apparent and Extended Apparent Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids.

368 | Chapter 5 D Commands

NOTE You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. Parallel Constrains a line segment, polyline segment, ray or xline to be parallel to another linear object. After you specify the first point of a linear object, specify the parallel object snap. Unlike other object snap modes, you move the cursor and hover over another linear object until the angle is acquired. Then, move the cursor back toward the object that you are creating. When the path of the object is parallel to the previous linear object, an alignment path is displayed, which you can use to create the parallel object. NOTE Turn off ORTHO mode before using the parallel object snap. Object snap tracking and polar snap are turned off automatically during a parallel object snap operation. You must specify the first point of a linear object before using the parallel object snap. Select All Turns on all object snap modes. Clear All Turns off all object snap modes.

3D Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)

Controls running object snap settings for 3D objects. With running object snap settings, also called Osnap, you can specify a snap point at an exact location on an object. When more than one option is selected, the selected snap modes are applied to return a point closest to the center of the aperture box. Press TAB to cycle through the options.

Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 369

3D Object Snap On
Turns 3D object snaps on and off. The 3D object snaps selected under 3D Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. (3DOSMODE on page 1173 system variable)

3D Object Snap Modes

Lists the 3D object snaps modes. Vertex Snaps to the closest vertex of a 3D object.

370 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Midpoint on Edge Snaps to the midpoint of a face edge.

Center of Face

Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 371

Snaps to the center of a face.

Knot Snaps to a knot on a spline.

372 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to a face.

Nearest to Face Snaps to a point that is nearest to a 3D object face.

Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 373

Select All Turns on all 3D object snap modes. Clear All Turns off all 3D object snap modes.

Dynamic Input Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)

Controls pointer input, dimension input, dynamic prompting, and the appearance of drafting tooltips.

374 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Enable Pointer Input

Turns on pointer input. When pointer input and dimensional input are both turned on, dimensional input supersedes pointer input when it is available. (DYNMODE system variable)

Pointer Input
Displays the location of the crosshairs as coordinate values in a tooltip near the cursor. When a command prompts you for a point, you can enter coordinate values in the tooltip instead of in the Command window. Preview Area Shows an example of pointer input. Settings Displays the Pointer Input Settings dialog box.

Drafting Settings Dialog Box | 375

Enable Dimension Input

Turns on dimensional input. Dimensional input is not available for some commands that prompt for a second point. (DYNMODE system variable)

Dimension Input
Displays a dimension with tooltips for distance value and angle value when a command prompts you for a second point or a distance. The values in the dimension tooltips change as you move the cursor. You can enter values in the tooltip instead of on the command line. Preview Area Shows an example of dimensional input. Settings Displays the Dimension Input Settings dialog box.

Dynamic Prompts
Displays prompts in a tooltip near the cursor when necessary in order to complete the command. You can enter values in the tooltip instead of on the command line. Preview Area Shows an example of dynamic prompts. Show Command Prompting and Command Input near the Crosshairs Displays prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips. (DYNPROMPT system variable)

Drafting Tooltip Appearance

Displays the Tooltip Appearance dialog box.

Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Controls the settings of pointer input tooltips.

376 | Chapter 5 D Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Format
Controls coordinate format in the tooltips that are displayed when pointer input is turned on. Polar Format Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in polar coordinate format. Enter a comma (,) to change to Cartesian format. (DYNPIFORMAT system variable) Cartesian Format Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in Cartesian coordinate format. Enter an angle symbol (<) to change to polar format. (DYNPIFORMAT system variable) Relative Coordinates Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in relative coordinate format. Enter a pound sign (#) to change to absolute format. (DYNPICOORDS system variable) Absolute Coordinates Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in absolute coordinate format. Enter an at sign ( ) to change to relative format. Note that you cannot use the direct distance method when this option is selected. (DYNPICOORDS system variable)

Visibility
Controls when pointer input is displayed. (DYNPIVIS system variable) As Soon As I Type Coordinate Data When pointer input is turned on, displays tooltips only when you start to enter coordinate data. (DYNPIVIS system variable) When a Command Asks for a Point When pointer input is turned on, displays tooltips whenever a command prompts you for a point. (DYNPIVIS system variable) AlwaysEven When Not in a Command Always displays tooltips when pointer input is turned on. (DYNPIVIS system variable)

Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box | 377

Dimension Input Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Controls the settings of dimension input tooltips.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Visibility
Controls which tooltips are displayed during grip stretching when dimensional input is turned on. (DYNDIVIS system variable) Show Only 1 Dimension Input Field at a Time Displays only the length change dimensional input tooltip when you are using grip editing to stretch an object. (DYNDIVIS system variable) Show 2 Dimension Input Fields at a Time Displays the length change and resulting dimensional input tooltips when you are using grip editing to stretch an object. (DYNDIVIS system variable) Show the Following Dimension Input Fields Simultaneously When you are using grip editing to stretch an object, displays the dimensional input tooltips that are selected below. (DYNDIVIS and DYNDIGRIP system variables) Resulting Dimension Displays a length dimensional tooltip that is updated as you move the grip. Length Change Displays the change in length as you move the grip. Absolute Angle Displays an angle dimensional tooltip that is updated as you move the grip. Angle Change

378 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Displays the change in the angle as you move the grip. Arc Radius Displays the radius of an arc, which is updated as you move the grip.

Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Controls the appearance of tooltips.

Summary
Use the TOOLTIPMERGE system variable to combine drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. For more information about tooltips, see Set Interface Options.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Previews
Displays an example of the current tooltip appearance settings.

Size
Specifies a size for tooltips. The default size is 0. Use the slider to make tooltips larger or smaller.

Transparency
Controls the transparency of tooltips. The lower the setting, the less transparent the tooltip. A value of 0 sets the tooltip to opaque.

Apply To
Specifies whether the settings apply to all drafting tooltips or only to Dynamic Input tooltips. (DYNTOOLTIPS system variable) Override OS Settings for All Drafting Tooltips

Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box | 379

Applies the settings to all tooltips, overriding the settings in the operating system. Use Settings Only for Dynamic Input Tooltips Applies the settings only to the drafting tooltips used in Dynamic Input.

DVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify 3D Views

Defines parallel projection or perspective views by using a camera and target.

Summary
NOTE Transparent ZOOM PAN are not available in DVIEW. When you define a perspective view, ZOOM, PAN, transparent ZOOM and PAN are not available while that view is current.

List of PromptsObject Selection on page 381

The following prompts are displayed. Select objects on page 381 or <use >.DVIEWBLOCK on page 381 Enter option [CAmera on page 382/TArget on page 383/Distance on page 383/POints on page 384/PAn on page 385/Zoom on page 385/TWist on page 386/CLip on page 386/Hide on page 387/Off on page 387/Undo on page 387]: Specify a point on page 381 with your pointing device, or enter an option

380 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Object Selection
Specifies objects to use in the preview image as you change views. Selecting too many objects slows image dragging and updating.

DVIEWBLOCK
If you press Enter at the Select Objects prompt, DVIEWBLOCK displays a preview image. You can create your own DVIEWBLOCK block in a 1 unit by 1 unit by 1 unit area, with its origin at the lower-left corner. The following illustration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view (moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view).

Point Specification
Rolls the view under the camera. The point you select with your pointing device is a start point for the dragging operation. Your viewing direction changes about the target point as you move the pointing device.

DVIEW | 381

The angles must be positive. The direction angle indicates the front of the view, and the magnitude angle determines how far the view rolls.

Camera
Specifies a new camera position by rotating the camera about the target point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation. Camera Location Sets the camera's position based on the specified point. Enter Angle from the XY Plane Sets the camera's position at an angle above or below the XY plane. An angle of 90 degrees looks down from above, and an angle of -90 looks up from below. A camera angle of 0 degrees places the camera parallel to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS). Toggle (Angle In) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an angle at the Command prompt locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and you can use the cursor to rotate the camera. Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Sets the position at an angle in the XY plane relative to the X axis of the current UCS. This angle measures from -180 to 180 degrees. A rotation angle of 0 degrees looks down the X axis of the UCS toward the origin.

The illustration shows the camera rotating to the left from its initial position, leaving its angle from the XY plane unchanged.

382 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Toggle (Angle From) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an angle at the Command prompt locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and you can use the cursor to rotate the camera.

Target
Specifies a new position for the target by rotating it around the camera. The effect is like turning your head to see different parts of the drawing from one vantage point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation. Enter Angle from the XY Plane Enter Angle from the XY Plane on page 382 Toggle (Angle In) Toggle (Angle In) on page 382 Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis on page 382The illustration shows the effect of moving the target point from left to right, leaving its angle from the XY plane unchanged.

Toggle (Angle From) Toggle (Angle From) on page 383

Distance
Moves the camera in or out along the line of sight relative to the target. This option turns on perspective viewing, which causes objects farther from the camera to appear smaller than those closer to the camera. A special perspective icon replaces the coordinate system icon. You are prompted for the new camera-to-target distance.

DVIEW | 383

A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current distance. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the distance between camera and target. Moving it to the left decreases that distance. To turn off perspective viewing, click the Off option from the main DVIEW prompt. If the target and camera points are close together, or if you specify a long-focal-length lens, you might see very little of your drawing when you specify a new distance. If you see little or none of your drawing, try the maximum scale value (16x) or enter a large distance. To magnify the drawing without turning perspective viewing on, use the Zoom option of DVIEW.

The illustration shows the effect of moving the camera along the line of sight relative to the target, where the field of view remains constant.

Points
Locates the camera and target points using X,Y,Z coordinates. You can use XYZ point filters. To help you define a new line of sight, a rubber-band line is drawn from the current camera position to the crosshairs. You are prompted for a new camera location. A rubber-band line connects the target point to the crosshairs to help you place the camera relative to the target. The illustration shows the change in view as you swap the camera and target points. Lens and distance settings are the same in each case.

384 | Chapter 5 D Commands

For information about entering direction and magnitude angles, see Point Specification.

Pan
Shifts the image without changing the level of magnification.

Zoom
If perspective viewing is off, dynamically increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport. A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current scale. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the scale. Moving it to the left decreases the scale. If perspective viewing is on, Zoom adjusts the camera lens length, which changes the field of view and causes more or less of the drawing to be visible at a given camera and target distance. The default lens length is 50mm, simulating what you'd see with a 35mm camera and a 50mm lens. Increasing the lens length is similar to switching to a telephoto lens. Decreasing the lens length widens the field of view, as with a wide-angle lens. A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current lens length. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the lens length. Moving it to the left decreases the lens length.

DVIEW | 385

Twist
Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight. The twist angle is measured counterclockwise, with 0 degrees to the right.

Clip
Clips the view, obscuring portions of the drawing that are behind or in front of the front clipping plane. The front and back clipping planes are invisible walls that you can position perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and target. Back Obscures objects located behind the back clipping plane.

Distance from Target. Positions the back clipping plane and turns on back clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane between the target and the camera. A negative distance places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to drag the clipping plane. On. Turns on back clipping at the current clipping distance. Off. Turns off back clipping.

386 | Chapter 5 D Commands

Front Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane.

Distance from Target.Positions the front clipping plane and turns on front clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane between the target and the camera. A negative distance places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to drag the clipping plane. Eye. Positions the front clipping plane at the camera. On. Turns on front clipping. This option is available only when perspective viewing is off. Off. Turns off front clipping. This option is available only when perspective viewing is off.

Off Turns off front and back clipping. If perspective viewing is on, front clipping remains on at the camera position.

Hide
Suppresses hidden lines on the selected objects to aid in visualization. Circles, solids, traces, regions, wide polyline segments, 3D faces, polygon meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness are considered to be opaque surfaces that hide objects.This hidden line suppression is quicker than that performed by HIDE, but it can't be plotted.

Off
Turns off perspective viewing. The Distance option turns on perspective viewing.

Undo
Reverses the effects of the last DVIEW action. You can undo multiple DVIEW operations.

DVIEW | 387

DXBIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Convert DXF and DXB Files to DWG Format

Imports an AutoCAD DXB (drawing interchange binary) file.

Access Methods
Menu: Insert Drawing Exchange Binary

Summary
AutoCAD DXB files contain only 2D vectors in binary format with 16-bit integer precision. These vectors are imported as line objects, and they assume the current layer and object properties. The Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the name of the file to import.

388 | Chapter 5 D Commands

E Commands

EATTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Edits attributes in a block reference.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group Edit Attributes flyout Multiple Menu: Modify Object Attribute Single

Summary
Edits the values, text options, and properties of each attribute in a block.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

389

Select a block: After you select a block with attributes, the Enhanced Attribute Editor is displayed.

Enhanced Attribute Editor

Quick Reference
See also:

Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of each attribute.

Summary
The Enhanced Attribute Editor contains the following tabs:

Attribute Text Options Properties

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Block Name of the block whose attributes you are editing. Tag Tag identifying the attribute. Select Block Temporarily closes the dialog box while you select a block with your pointing device.

Attribute Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor)

Displays the tag, prompt, and value assigned to each attribute. You can change only the attribute value.

390 | Chapter 6 E Commands

List Lists the attributes in the selected block instance and displays the tag, prompt, and value for each attribute. Value Assigns a new value to the selected attribute. Single-line attributes include a button to insert a field. When clicked, the Field dialog box is displayed. Multiple-line attributes include a button with an ellipsis. Click to open the In-Place Text Editor with the ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE system variable, the Text Editor visor displayed is either the abbreviated version, or the full version To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut menu to display the Field dialog box.

Text Options Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor)

Sets the properties that define the way an attribute's text is displayed in the drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab.

Enhanced Attribute Editor | 391

Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that the attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for the attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Multiline Text Box Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text. Not available for single-line attributes. Text Style

392 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Specifies the text style for the attribute text. Default values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box. Backwards Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed backwards. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Upside Down Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed upside down. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Justification Specifies how the attribute text is justified (left-, center-, or right-justified).

Properties Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor)

Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the lineweight, linetype, and color for the attribute text. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab.

Enhanced Attribute Editor | 393

Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on. Linetype Specifies the linetype of the attribute. Color Specifies the color of the attribute. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the attribute. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY on page 1406 system variable is off. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available.

EDGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify 3D Subobjects

Changes the visibility of 3D face edges.

Summary
This command only affects objects created using the 3DFACE command.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify edge of 3D face to toggle visibility or [Display]:

Edge of 3D face to toggle visibility

Controls the visibility of the edges you select.

394 | Chapter 6 E Commands

If the edges of one or more 3D faces are collinear, the program alters the visibility of each collinear edge.

Display
Selects invisible edges of 3D faces so that you can redisplay them.

All Selects the hidden edges of all 3D faces in the drawing and displays them. If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again, use the Edge option. You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it. AutoSnap markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed, indicating the apparent snap locations on each invisible edge. Select Selects hidden edges of a partially visible 3D face and displays them.

If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again, use the Edge option. You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it. AutoSnap markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed, indicating the apparent snap locations on each invisible edge.

EDGE | 395

EDGESURF
Quick Reference
See also:

Construct Meshes from Other Objects

Creates a mesh between four contiguous edges or curves.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Meshes Edge Mesh

Summary
Select four adjoining edges that define the mesh. The edges can be lines, arcs, splines, or open polylines. The edges must touch at their endpoints to form a single, closed loop.

You can select the four edges in any order. The first edge (SURFTAB1) determines the M direction of the generated mesh, which extends from the endpoint closest to the selection point to the other end. The two edges that touch the first edge form the N edges (SURFTAB2) of the mesh.

The MESHTYPE system variable sets which type of mesh is created. Mesh objects are created by default. Set the variable to 0 to create legacy polyface or polygon mesh.

396 | Chapter 6 E Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Object 1 for surface edge Specifies the first edge to be used as a boundary. Object 2 for surface edge Specifies the second edge to be used as a boundary. Object 3 for surface edge Specifies the third edge to be used as a boundary. Object 4 for surface edge Specifies the final edge to be used as a boundary.

Edit PGP
Quick Reference
See also:

Enter Commands on the Command Line

Opens the Program Parameters (PGP) text file that defines command abbreviations

Summary
Commands can have abbreviated names called command aliases that you can enter at the Command prompt. Command aliases are defined in the PGP file. If you edit the PGP file while the program is running, enter REINIT to use the revised file. You can also restart program to reload the file automatically.

ELEV
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the User Coordinate System in 3D

Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects.

Edit PGP | 397

Access Methods
Command entry: 'elev for transparent use

Summary
ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects. The elevation is reset to 0.0 whenever you change the coordinate system to the world coordinate system (WCS).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify New Default Elevation The current elevation is the default Z value for new objects when you specify only X and Y values for a 3D point. The elevation setting is the same for all viewports regardless of their user coordinate systems (UCS definitions). New objects are created at the specified Z value relative to the current UCS in the viewport. Specify New Default Thickness The thickness sets the distance to which a 2D object is extruded above or below its elevation. A positive value is extruded along the positive Z axis; a negative value is extruded along the negative Z axis.

398 | Chapter 6 E Commands

ELLIPSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Ellipses

Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group Ellipse flyout Center Menu: Draw Ellipse Center

Summary
The first two points of the ellipse determine the location and length of the first axis. The third point determines the distance between the center of the ellipse and the end point of the second axis.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center/Isocircle]: Specify a point or enter an option

Axis Endpoint
Defines the first axis by its two endpoints. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the ellipse. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis of the ellipse.

ELLIPSE | 399

Distance to Other Axis Defines the second axis using the distance from the midpoint of the first axis to the endpoint of the second axis (3).

Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about the first axis. Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circular ellipse.

Arc
Creates an elliptical arc. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the elliptical arc. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis depending on its size. The first two points of the elliptical arc determine the location and length of the first axis. The third point determines the distance between the center of the elliptical arc and the endpoint of the second axis. The fourth and fifth points are the start and end angles.

Axis Endpoint Defines the start point of the first axis. Rotation Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about the first axis. The higher the value from 0 through 89.4 degrees, the greater the ratio of minor to major axis. Values between 89.4 degrees and

400 | Chapter 6 E Commands

90.6 degrees are invalid because the ellipse would otherwise appear as a straight line. Multiples of these angle values result in a mirrored effect every 90 degrees. Start Angle Defines the first endpoint of the elliptical arc. The Start Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated.

Parameter Requires the same input as Start Angle, but creates the elliptical arc using the following parametric vector equation: p(u) = c + a * cos(u) + b * sin(u) where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its major and minor axes, respectively.

End Parameter: Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc by using a parametric vector equation. The Start Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to Parameter mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated. Angle: Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc. The Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated. Included Angle: Defines an included angle beginning at the start angle.

Center
Creates an ellipse using a center point, the endpoint of the first axis, and the length of the second axis. You can specify the distances by clicking a location at the desired distance or by entering a value for the length.

ELLIPSE | 401

Distance to Other Axis Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the ellipse, or midpoint of the first axis, to the point you specify. Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about the first axis. Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circle.

Isocircle
Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane. NOTE The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP to Isometric.

Radius Creates a circle using a radius you specify. Diameter Creates a circle using a diameter you specify. Specify diameter of isocircle: Specify a distance

ERASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Erase Objects

Removes objects from a drawing.

Access Methods

Button

402 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Explode and Erase tool group Erase Menu: Modify Erase Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area, and click Erase.

Summary
You can erase selected objects from the drawing. This method does not move objects to the Clipboard, where they can then be pasted to another location. If you are working with 3D objects, you can also erase subobjects such as faces, meshes, and vertices. Instead of selecting objects to erase, you can enter an option, such as L to erase the last object drawn, p to erase the previous selection set, or ALL to erase all objects. You can also enter ? to get a list of all options.

EXPLODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode)

Breaks a compound object into its component objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Explode and Erase tool group Explode Menu: Modify Explode

EXPLODE | 403

Summary
Explodes a compound object when you want to modify its components separately. Objects that can be exploded include blocks, polylines, and regions, among others.

The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change. Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you're exploding. See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the results for each. To explode objects and change their properties at the same time, use XPLODE. NOTE If you're using a script or an ObjectARX function, you can explode only one object at a time. 2D and Lightweight Polyline Discards any associated width or tangent information. For wide polylines, the resulting lines and arcs are placed along the center of the polyline. 3D Polyline Explodes into line segments. Any linetype assigned to the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line segment. 3D Solid Explodes planar faces into regions. Nonplanar faces explode into surfaces. Annotative Objects Explodes the current scale representation into its constituent parts which are no longer . Other scale representations are removed. Arc If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into elliptical arcs. Block Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the block exposes the polyline or nested block object, which must then be exploded to expose its individual objects. Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into unexpected objects. When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that cannot be exploded, they are collected into an anonymous block (named with a *E prefix) and referenced with the nonuniform scaling. If all the objects in such a block cannot be exploded, the selected block reference will not be exploded. Body, 3D Solid, and Region entities in a nonuniformly scaled block cannot be exploded.

404 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the attribute values and redisplays the attribute definitions. Blocks inserted with MINSERT and external references (xrefs) and their dependent blocks cannot be exploded. Body Explodes into a single-surface body (nonplanar surfaces), regions, or curves. Circle If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into ellipses. Leaders Explodes into lines, splines, solids (arrow heads), block inserts (arrow heads, annotation blocks), multiline text, or tolerance objects, depending on the leader. Mesh Objects Explodes each face into a separate 3D face object. Color and materials assignments are retained. Multiline Text Explodes into text objects. Multiline Explodes into lines and arcs. Polyface Mesh Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object. Two-vertex meshes explode into a line. Three-vertex meshes explode into 3D faces. Region Explodes into lines, arcs, or splines.

EXPORT
Quick Reference
See also:

Export Drawings to Other File Formats

Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format.

Access Methods
Menu: File Export

Summary
The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.

EXPORT | 405

If you do not see the file format that you need in the Files of Type drop-down list, also check the PLOT command for other file types, including PDF. NOTE The Export Data dialog box records the last used file format selection and stores it for use during the current drawing session and between drawing sessions. The following output types are available:

ACIS (*.sat): ACIS solid object file (see ACISOUT) Lithography (*.stl): Solid object stereolithography file (see STLOUT) Encapsulated PS (*.eps): Encapsulated PostScript file DXX Extract (*.dxx): Attribute extract DXF file (see ATTEXT) Bitmap (*.bmp): Device-independent bitmap file (see BMPOUT) Block (*.dwg): Drawing file (see WBLOCK)

EXPORTTOAUTOCAD
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Custom and Proxy Objects

Creates a new DWG file with all AEC objects exploded.

Access Methods
Command entry: -exporttoautocad or aectoacad

Summary
You can create a new version of a drawing file with all proxy AEC objects exploded into basic AutoCAD for Mac objects. The new version of the drawing loses the intelligence of the custom AEC objects, but the resulting basic objects can be displayed and accessed in earlier versions of AutoCAD for Mac when object enablers are not available for those versions. NOTE Any subsequent changes you make to this new drawing file do not affect the original drawing file.

406 | Chapter 6 E Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Export options [Format/Bind/bind Type/Maintain/Prefix/Suffix/?] <Enter for filename>: Enter an option or press Enter to specify a file name

Enter for Filename

Creates a new drawing file with the specified name. NOTE You can use the Prefix option to create a unique file name for this drawing and to prevent overwriting the existing drawing file.

Format
Determines the drawing file format for the resulting drawing file.

Bind
Determines how xrefs are treated when creating the new drawing. Yes Binds all xrefs to the drawing. Layers and other xref-dependent named objects are merged into the new drawing. No Maintains the xrefs as links to other drawings.

Bind Type
Determines how xref-dependent objects are treated when the Bind option is turned on. Bind Maintains the names of layers and other xref-dependent objects when binding xrefs. Insert Merges the names of xref-dependent objects into the new drawing without including the original file name.

Maintain
Determines how blocks within custom AEC objects are treated. Yes Explodes all block instances within custom AEC objects into basic AutoCAD for Mac objects. The resulting basic objects revert to their original properties rather than the properties of the block definitions. No Does not explode any block instances within custom AEC objects. The properties of the block instances are determined in the usual way, depending on how the objects in the blocks were created and the property settings of the layers on which the blocks are inserted.

Prefix
Specifies the prefix to be added to the current drawing file name.

Suffix
Specifies the suffix to be added to the current drawing file name.

EXPORTTOAUTOCAD | 407

? List Settings
Lists the current settings for the command.

EXTEND
Quick Reference
See also:

Trim or Extend Objects

Extends objects to meet the edges of other objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Modify tool group Extend Menu: Modify Extend

Summary
To extend objects, first select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects that you want to extend. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first Select Objects prompt.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

408 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select boundary edges... Select objects or <select all>: Select one or more objects and press Enter, or press Enter to select all displayed objects Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Fence/Crossing/Project/Edge/Undo]: Select objects to extend, or hold down SHIFT and select an object to trim, or enter an option

Boundary Object Selection

Uses the selected objects to define the boundary edges to which you want to extend an object.

Object to Extend
Specifies the objects to extend. Press Enter to end the command.

Shift-Select to Trim
Trims the selected objects to the nearest boundary rather than extending them. This is an easy method to switch between trimming and extending.

Fence
Selects all objects that cross the selection fence. The selection fence is a series of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points. The selection fence does not form a closed loop.

Crossing
Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points. NOTE Some crossing selections of objects to be extended are ambiguous. EXTEND resolves the selection by following along the rectangular crossing window in a clockwise direction from the first point to the first object encountered.

Project
Specifies the projection method used when extending objects.

None Specifies no projection. Only objects that intersect with the boundary edge in 3D space are extended.

EXTEND | 409

UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects in 3D space are extended.

View Specifies projection along the current view direction.

Edge
Extends the object to another object's implied edge, or only to an object that actually intersects it in 3D space.

410 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space.

No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object that actually intersects it in 3D space.

Undo
Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND.

EXTERNALREFERENCES
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Opens the Reference Manager palette.

Access Methods
Menu: Insert References Manager

Summary
The EXTERNALREFERENCES command opens the Reference Manager palette when the palette is closed.

EXTERNALREFERENCES | 411

NOTE The FILEDIA system variable is ignored when attaching files from the Reference Manager palette.

Reference Manager Palette

Quick Reference
See also:

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Manage external references attached to the current drawing.

412 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Summary
The Reference Manager palette organizes, displays, and manages referenced files, such as DWG files (xrefs) and raster images. The Reference Manager palette contains a toolbar along the top. You can right-click over the files list to display a shortcut menu that allows you to attach or manage an attached external reference. Click the Show Details button on the toolbar to view details and thumbnail preview for the selected external reference.

Reference Manager Palette Toolbar

Quick Reference
See also:

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Use the toolbar at the top of the Reference Manager palette to attach a drawing and to refresh the status of a referenced file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Attach Reference
Displays the Select Reference File dialog box. Select the file format you want to attach and then the file you want to attach to the drawing. You can attach the following reference file types:

DWG files. Starts the XATTACH command. Raster images files. Starts the IMAGEATTACH command.

Toggle References State

Unloads the selected file reference or reloads the file reference if it is currently unloaded.

Detach Referenced File

Detaches the selected file reference from the drawing.

Refresh Content
Synchronizes the status of the selected file reference with the data in memory.

Reference Manager Palette | 413

Relink File
Displays the Select <Reference Type> File to Relink dialog box where you can update the location of the selected file reference.

Show Details
Displays the Details and Preview panel on page 417 which displays a thumbnail preview and details for the selected file reference.

File References Panel Shortcut Menus

Quick Reference
See also:

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

When working in the File References panel, there are several shortcut menus that can be displayed when you right-click on a file reference or an empty area.The following tables show the shortcut menu items that you are presented under certain conditions.

Current Drawing File Selected

When the current drawing file is selected, the top node in the tree, the shortcut menu presents the following functions: Menu Item
Show Details

Description
Displays the thumbnail preview and details for the selected file reference. Opens the drawing in a new drawing window as read-only. Opens Finder and displays the location where the current drawing file is stored. Displays the Print dialog box. Reloads all file referenced files attached to the current drawing. (Unavailable if no file references are attached.)

Open a Copy Reveal in Finder

Print Reload

414 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Menu Item
Close File

Description
Closes the drawing file. If changes were made, you are prompted to save or discard them before the drawing can be closed.

No File Reference Selected

When no file reference is selected, the shortcut menu presents the following functions: Menu Item
Attach Reference Reload All References

Description
Displays the Select Reference File dialog box. Reloads all file referenced files attached to the current drawing. (Unavailable if no file references are attached.)

File Reference Selected

When you select a file reference, the shortcut menu presents the following functions: Menu Item
Show in Model

Description
Zooms to the location of the file reference attachment in the drawing so it is fully displayed in the drawing area.

Reference Status
Available only for file references with a Loaded status - Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved. Available only for file references with a Loaded status - Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved. Always available - status has no affect on this function. Available only for file references with a Loaded status - Unavailable when Un-

Open File

Opens the selected file reference in the default editor (specified by the operating system).

Show Details

Displays the thumbnail preview and details for the selected file reference. Opens Finder and displays the location where the file reference is stored.

Reveal in Finder

Reference Manager Palette | 415

Menu Item

Description

Reference Status
loaded, Not Found or Unresolved.

Attach

Switches the selected DWG file reference to the Attach attachment type.

Always available for DWG file references - status has no affect on this function. Always available for DWG file references - status has no affect on this function. Always available - status has no affect on this function. Always available - status has no affect on this function. Always available - status has no affect on this function.

Overlay

Switches the selected DWG file reference to the Overlay attachment type.

Unload

Unloads the selected file references.

Reload

Reloads the selected file reference.

Relink File

Displays the Select <Reference Type> File to Relink dialog box dialog box where you can update the location of the selected file reference. Binds the selected DWG reference to the current drawing. Xref-dependent named objects are changed from blockname|definitionname to blockname$n$definitionname syntax. In this manner, unique named objects are created for all xref-dependent definition tables bound to the current drawing. Binds the DWG reference to the current drawing in a way similar to detaching and inserting the reference drawing. Rather than being renamed using blockname$n$definitionname syntax, xref-dependent named objects are stripped of the xref name. As with inserting drawings, no name-incrementing occurs if a local named object shares the same name as a bound xref-

Bind

Available only for DWG file references with a Loaded status - Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.

Bind-Insert

Available only for DWG file references with a Loaded status - Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.

416 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Menu Item

Description
dependent named object. The bound xref-dependent named object assumes the properties of the locally defined named object.

Reference Status

Detach

Detaches the selected file reference.

Available for all file references types.

Details and Preview Panel

Quick Reference
See also:

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

The Details and Preview panel, located below the File References panel, allows you to get information about the file reference in AutoCAD for Mac and information about the file on disk.

Reference Manager Palette | 417

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Details
Each file reference shares a common set of properties. Referenced images, display additional properties specific to the file type. The common set of details displayed for each file reference is name, status, file size, file type, creation date, saved path, and found at path. Some of the properties can be edited. Reference Name Displays the file reference name. This property is editable for all file reference types. Status Shows whether the file reference is loaded, unloaded or not found. This property cannot be edited. Size Shows the file size of the selected file reference. The size is not displayed for file references that are not found. This property cannot be edited. Type Indicates whether the file reference is an attachment or overlay, or the type of raster image file. This property cannot be edited. However, if the file reference is a DWG, the property can be toggled from the File Reference panel. Date Displays the last date the file reference was modified. This date is not displayed if the file reference is not found. This property cannot be edited. Saved Path Shows the saved path of the selected file reference (this is not necessarily where the file reference is found). This property cannot be edited. Found At Displays the full path of the currently selected file reference. This is where the referenced file is actually found and is not necessarily the same as the saved path. Clicking the Open button displays the Open dialog box where you can select a different path or file name. You can also type directly into the path field. These changes are stored to the Saved Path property if the new path is valid.

DWG Specific Properties

If you select a referenced DWG (xref), additional properties are displayed. None of the added image properties can be edited. Block Unit Specifies the INSUNITS on page 1371 value for the inserted block. Unit factor Displays the unit scale factor, which is calculated based on the INSUNITS on page 1371 value of the block and the drawing units.

418 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Image Specific Properties

If you select a referenced image, additional properties are displayed. None of the added image properties can be edited. Color System Displays the color system. Color Depth The amount of information that is stored in each pixel of a raster image. Higher color depth values produce smoother degrees of shading. Pixel Width The width of the raster image measured in pixels. Pixel Height The height of the raster image measured in pixels. Resolution The width and height resolution in dots per inch (dpi). Default Size The width and height of the raster image measured in AutoCAD for Mac units.

Thumbnail Preview
The thumbnail preview displays a small image of the file reference that was selected from the File References panel. If there is no preview available, the text Preview not available is displayed in the center of the pane.

EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Closes the Reference Manager palette.

Summary
The EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE command closes the Reference Managers palette when currently displayed.

EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE | 419

EXTRUDE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Extruding

Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Extrude Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Extrude

Summary
You can extrude either an open or closed object to create a 3D surface or solid. If you extrude a surface, you will create a regular surface or a NURBS surface depending on how the SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable is set. To extrude meshes, use the MESHEXTRUDE on page 631 command.

420 | Chapter 6 E Commands

The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the object(s) and path (if selected) are automatically deleted when the solid or surface is created or whether you are prompted to delete the object(s) and path. You can use the following objects and subobjects with EXTRUDE: Objects That Can Be Extruded or Used as Paths Object type
3D faces Arcs Circles Ellipses Elliptical arcs Helixes Lines Meshes: faces Meshes: edges X X X X

Can be extruded?
X X X X X

Can be extrusion path?

Comments

X X X X X X

EXTRUDE | 421

Object type
2D Polylines

Can be extruded?
X

Can be extrusion path?

Comments
2D polylines with crossing segments cannot be extruded. Thickness and width are ignored. The extrusion extends from the center line.

3D Polylines Regions 2D Solids 3D Solids: edges 3D Solids: faces Splines: 2D and 3D Surfaces: edges Surfaces: planar and non-planar Traces

X X X X X X

X X

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Objects to Extrude Specifies the objects to extrude.

NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them.

422 | Chapter 6 E Commands

Mode Controls whether the extruded object is a solid or a surface. Surfaces are extruded as either NURBS surfaces or procedural surfaces, depending on the SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable. Height of extrusion Extrudes objects along the positive Z axis of the object's coordinate system if you enter a positive value. If you enter a negative value, the objects are extruded along the negative Z axis. Objects do not have to be parallel to the same plane. If all objects are on a common plane, the objects are extruded in the direction of the normal of the plane. By default, planar objects are extruded in the direction of the objects normal.

Direction Specifies the length and direction of the extrusion with two specified points. (The direction cannot be parallel to the plane of the sweep curve created by the extrusion.)

Start point of direction. Specifies the first point in the direction vector. End point of direction. Specifies the second point in the direction vector.

Path Specifies the extrusion path based on a selected object. The path is moved to the centroid of the profile. Then the profile of the selected object is extruded along the chosen path to create solids or surfaces.

NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. The path should not lie on the same plane as the object, nor should the path have areas of high curvature. The extrusion starts from the plane of the object and maintains its orientation relative to the path.

EXTRUDE | 423

If the path contains segments that are not tangent, the program extrudes the object along each segment and then miters the joint along the plane bisecting the angle formed by the segments. If the path is closed, the object should lie on the miter plane. This allows the start and end sections of the solid to match up. If the object is not on the miter plane, the object is rotated until it is on the miter plane. Objects with multiple loops are extruded so that all of the loops appear on the same plane at the end section of the extruded solid. Taper angle Specifies the taper angler for the extrusion.

Positive angles taper in from the base object. Negative angles taper out. The default angle, 0, extrudes a 2D object perpendicular to its 2D plane. All selected objects and loops are tapered to the same value. Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion height. Individual loops of a region are always extruded to the same height. When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion, the angle of the arc remains constant, and the radius of the arc changes.

Angle of taper. Specifies the taper between -90 and +90 degrees. Specify two points. Specifies the taper angle based on two specified points. The taper angle is the distance between the two specified points.

Drag the cursor horizontally to specify and preview the taper angle. You can also drag the cursor to adjust and preview the height of the extrusion. The dynamic input origin should be placed on the extruded shape, on the projection of the point to the shape. When you select the extruded object, the position of the taper grip is the correspondent point of the dynamic input origin on the top face of the extrusion. Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the extrusion height. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations.

424 | Chapter 6 E Commands

F Commands

FIELD
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Fields in Text

Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Fields tool group Insert Field Menu: Insert Field Shortcut menu: Right-click while editing text in an in-place text editor, and click Insert Field.

Summary
Fields can be inserted in any kind of text except tolerances. The FIELDEVAL system variable and the UPDATEFIELD command determine how fields are updated.

425

The Insert Field dialog box is displayed.

Insert Field Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Fields in Text

Inserts a field in the drawing.

Summary
The options available change based on the selected field category and field name.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Field Category Sets the types of fields to be listed under Field Names (for example, Date & Time, Document, and Objects). Field Names Lists the fields that are available in a category. Select a field name to display the options available for that field.

426 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Field Value Displays the current value of the field, or displays an empty string (----) if the field value is invalid. The label for this item changes with the field name. For example, when Filename is selected in the Field Names list, the label is Filename and the value is the name of the current drawing file. The label is Property for object fields. Exception: when a date field is selected, the selected date format is displayed; for example, M/d/yyyy. Format List Lists options for display of the value of the field. For example, date fields can display the name of the day or not, and text strings can be uppercase, lowercase, first capital, or title case. The value displayed in the Fields dialog box reflects the format that you select. Field Expression Displays the expression that underlies the field. The field expression cannot be edited, but you can learn how fields are constructed by reading this area.

Options for Fields in the Objects Field Category

Named Object Type/Object Type When NamedObject is selected in Field Names, lists the types of named objects in the drawing. When Object is selected, displays the type of object selected. Use the Select Object button to temporarily close the dialog box and select an object in the drawing. Property/Name When NamedObject is selected in Field Names, lists the names of all the objects in the drawing of the selected type. When Object is selected in Field Names, lists the properties of the selected object that are available as fields. When a block with attributes is selected, the attribute names are displayed in the list of properties.

Formula
When Formula is selected in Field Names, provides a place for creating a formula to insert in text or in a table cell. Average/Sum/Count When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify table cells. The result is appended to the formula. Cell When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify a table cell. The cell address is appended to the formula. Precision Specifies precision for fields based on the selected format. Select Current Precision to use the current setting of the LUPREC on page 1405 system variable. Additional Format Displays the Additional Format dialog box.

Insert Field Dialog Box | 427

FILL
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text

Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press Enter On Turns on Fill mode. For the filling of a 3D object to be visible, its extrusion direction must be parallel to the current viewing direction, and hidden lines must not be suppressed.

Off Turns off Fill mode. Only the outlines of objects are displayed and plotted. Changing Fill mode affects existing objects after the drawing is regenerated. The display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode setting.

428 | Chapter 7 F Commands

FILLET
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Fillets

Rounds and fillets the edges of objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Modify tool group Fillet Menu: Modify Fillet

Summary
In the example, an arc is created that is tangent to both of the selected lines. The lines are trimmed to the ends of the arc. To create a sharp corner instead, enter a radius of zero.

You can fillet arcs, circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, splines, and xlines. You can also fillet 3D solids and surfaces. If you select a mesh object for filleting, you can choose to convert the mesh to a solid or surface and continue the operation.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current Select first objector [Undo/Polyline/Radius/Trim/Multiple]: Use an object selection method or enter an option

FILLET | 429

First Object
Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or selects the edge of a 3D solid to round or fillet the edge.

Select second object or shift-select to apply corner: Use an object selection method or hold down Shift and select an object to create a sharp corner If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the fillet arc. You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override the current fillet radius with a value of 0. If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they can be adjacent or separated by one other segment. If they are separated by another polyline segment, FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and replaces it with the fillet. More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. Select the objects close to where you want the endpoints of the fillet.

FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.

430 | Chapter 7 F Commands

If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the edges individually. Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press Enter Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, or enter r

Edge
Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press Enter.

If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner of a box, FILLET computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the three incident fillets have the same radii.

Chain
Changes from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent edges, called a chain selection. Edge Chain Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single edge. For example, if you select an edge on the top of a 3D solid box, FILLET also selects the other tangential edges on the top.

FILLET | 431

Edge Switches to a single-edge selection mode.

Radius
Defines the radius of the rounded edge.

Undo
Reverses the previous action in the command.

Polyline
Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments meet. Select 2D polyline: If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they approach the arc segment, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet arc.

Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc. The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs.

Trim
Controls whether FILLET trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.

Multiple
Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects.

432 | Chapter 7 F Commands

FILLETEDGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Fillets

Rounds and fillets the edges of solid objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Edit tool group Fillet Edge Menu: Modify Solid Editing Fillet Edges

Summary
You can select more than one edge. Enter a value for the fillet radius or click and drag the fillet grip.

FILLETEDGE | 433

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select an Edge Specifies an edge to fillet. After pressing Enter, you can drag the fillet grip to specify a radius, or use the Radius option. Radius Specifies a radius value. Chain Specifies more than one edge.

FIND
Quick Reference
See also:

Find and Replace Text

Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Text tool group Find Text Menu: Edit Find Shortcut menu: With no commands active, right-click in the drawing area and click Find.

Summary
The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.

434 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND

Quick Reference
See also:

Find and Replace Text

Specifies the text you want to find, replace, or select and controls the scope and results of the search.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Find What Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a text string, including any wild-card characters, or choose one of the six most recently used strings from the list. For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the Users Guide. Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text. Enter a string, or choose one of the most recently used strings from the list. Where to Check

Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND | 435

Specifies whether to search the entire drawing, the current layout, or the currently-selected object. If an object is already selected, then Selected Objects is the default value. If no object is selected, then Entire Drawing is the default value. You can use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the dialog box and create or modify the selection set. Select Objects Button Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select objects in your drawing. Press Enter to return to the dialog box. When you select objects, Where to Check displays Selected Objects by default. Advanced Find Options Displays options to define the type of objects and words that you want to find. Replace Replaces found text with the text that you enter in Replace With and moves to the next instance of the found text if one exists. Replace All Finds all instances of the text that you enter in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. The Where to Check setting controls whether to find and replace text in the entire drawing or text in the currently selected object or objects. Find Finds the text that you enter in Find What. The first text object that matches the search criteria is zoomed to. Once you find the first instance of the text, the Find option acts like a Find Next, which you can use to find the next text object.

Search Options
Defines the type of objects and words to be found. Match Case Includes the case of the text in Find What as part of the search criteria. Find Whole Words Only Finds only whole words that match the text in Find What. For example, if you select Find Whole Words Only and search for Front Door, FIND does not locate the text string Front Doormat.

436 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Use Wildcards Allows the use of wild-card characters in searches. For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the Users Guide. Search XRefs Includes text in externally referenced files in search results. Search Blocks Includes text in blocks in search results. Ignore Hidden Items Ignores hidden items in search results. Hidden items include text on layers that are frozen or turned off, text in block attributes created in invisible mode, and text in visibility states within dynamic blocks. Match Diacritics Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results. Match Half or Full Width Forms Matches half- and full-width characters in search results.

Text Types
Specifies the type of text objects you want to include in the search. By default, all options are selected. Block Attribute Value Includes block attribute text values in search results. Dimension or Leader Text Includes dimension and leader object text in search results. Single-Line or Multiline Text Includes text objects such as single-line and multiline text in search results. Table Text Includes text found in AutoCAD for Mac table cells in search results. Hyperlink Description Includes text found in hyperlink descriptions in search results. Hyperlink

Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND | 437

Includes hyperlink URLs in search results.

FLATSHOT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Flattened View

Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Section tool group Flatshot

Summary
The Flatshot dialog box is displayed. The edges of all 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes are projected line-of-sight onto a plane parallel to the viewing plane. The 2D representations of these edges are inserted as a block on the XY plane of the UCS. This block can be exploded for additional changes.

438 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Flatshot Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Flattened View

Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view.

Flatshot Dialog Box | 439

Summary
The edges of all 3D solids and surfaces are projected line-of-sight onto a plane parallel to the viewing plane. The 2D representations of these edges are inserted as a block on the XY plane of the UCS. This block can be exploded for additional changes. The result can also be saved as a separate drawing file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Destination
Controls where the flattened representation is created. Insert As New Block Specifies to insert the flattened representation as a block in the current drawing. Replace Existing Block Replaces an existing block in the drawing with the newly created block. Select Block

440 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Closes the dialog box temporarily while you select the block you are replacing in the drawing. When you finish selecting the block, press Enter to re-display the Flatshot dialog box. Block Selected / No Block Selected Indicates whether a block has been selected. Export to a File Saves the block to an external file.

Foreground Lines
Contains controls for setting the color and linetype of lines that are not obscured in the flattened view. Color Sets the color of lines that are not obscured in the flattened view. Linetype Sets the linetype of lines that are not obscured in the flattened view.

Obscured Lines
Controls whether lines that are obscured in the drawing are displayed in the flattened view, and sets the color and linetype of these obscured lines. Show Controls whether obscured lines are shown in the flattened representation. When selected, the 2D flattened representation displays lines hidden by other objects. Color Sets the color of lines that lie behind geometry in the flattened view. Linetype Sets the linetype of lines that lie behind geometry in the flattened view.

Include Tangential Lines

Creates silhouette edges for curved surfaces.

Create
Creates the flattened view.

Flatshot Dialog Box | 441

FREESPOT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Spotlights

Creates free spotlight which is similar to a spotlight without a specified target.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Specify source location <0,0,0>: Enter coordinate values or use the pointing device If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name/Intensity/Status/Hotspot/Falloff/shadoW/Attenuation/Color/eXit] <eXit>: If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name/Intensity factor/Photometry/Status/Hotspot/Falloff/shadoW/filterColor/eXit] <eXit>: NOTE When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the Attenuation option has no affect on the creation of the light. It is only maintained for scripting compatibility.

Name
Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters.

Intensity/Intensity Factor
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system.

Hotspot
Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known to lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS.

442 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Falloff
Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as the field angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The default is 50 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS. The falloff angle must be greater than or equal to the hotspot angle.

Status
Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect.

Photometry
Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface, per unit area. Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface.

Enter f to specify the perceived power in a luminous flux value. If you enter i, you can specify the intensity of the light based on an illuminance value. The illuminance value can be specified in either lux or foot-candles. Enter d to specify a distance to use to calculate illuminance. Color Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value.

FREESPOT | 443

Shadow
Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Map Size Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Softness Specifies the softness that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources. Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.) Specify the sample size by entering a. Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v.

Attenuation
Enter an option to change [attenuation Type/Use limits/attenuation start Limit/attenuation End limit/eXit]<eXit>: Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a spotlight, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay.

None. Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the spotlight are as bright as objects close to the light. Inverse Linear. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is half as strong as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter as strong. The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity. Inverse Squared. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is one quarter as strong as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one sixteenth as strong.

Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits or not.

444 | Chapter 7 F Commands

Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset from the center of the light. The default is 0. Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time.

FREEWEB
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Weblights

Creates a free web light which is similar to a web light without a specified target.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify source location <0,0,0>: Enter coordinate values or use the pointing device Enter an option to change [Name/Intensity factor/Status/Photometry/weB/shadoW/filterColor/eXit] <eXit>: NOTE The LIGHTINGUNITS system variable must be set to a value other than 0 to create and use freeweb lights.

Name
Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters.

FREEWEB | 445

Intensity Factor
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system.

Status
Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect.

Photometry
Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface, per unit area. Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface.

Web
Specifies the intensity for a light at points on a spherical grid.

446 | Chapter 7 F Commands

File Specifies which web file to use to define the properties of the web. Web files have the file extension .ies. X Specifies the X rotation for the web. Y Specifies the Y rotation for the web. Z Specifies the Z rotation for the web.

Shadow
Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map. Softness Specifies the softness that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources. Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.) Specify the sample size by entering a. Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v.

Filter Color
Controls the color of the light. True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color. HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color. Color Book Specifies a color from a color book.

FREEWEB | 447

448

G Commands

GCCOINCIDENT
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a curve).

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Coincident Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Coincident

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Coincident option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. A constraint point on an object can be made coincident with an object or a constraint point on another object.

449

Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment Circle Arc Polyline arc Ellipse Spline Two valid constraint points

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select first point on page 450 or [Object on page 450/Autoconstrain on page 450] <Object>: Select a constraint point, or an object, or enter a to apply constraints to selected objects

Point
Specifies a point to be constrained. First Point Specifies the first point of the object to be constrained. Second Point Specifies the second point of the object to be constrained.

Object
Selects an object to be constrained. Point Point on page 450 Multiple Picks successive points to coincide with the first object. The Multiple option is displayed when you use the Object option to select the first object.

Autoconstrain
Selects multiple objects. Coincident constraints are applied to selected objects with unconstrained points that are coincident to each other. The number of constraints applied is displayed at the Command prompt. When a coincident constraint is applied between a point and an arc or line, the point can lie on the line or arc or the extension of the line or arc.

450 | Chapter 8 G Commands

GCCOLLINEAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Collinear Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Collinear

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Collinear option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment Ellipse Multiline text

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select first object on page 451 or [Multiple on page 452]: Select an object or enter m to select multiple points or objects

Object
Selects an object to be constrained.

GCCOLLINEAR | 451

First object Selects the first object to be constrained. Second object Selects the second object to be constrained.

Multiple
Picks successive points or objects to be made collinear with the first object.

GCCONCENTRIC
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Concentric Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Concentric

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Concentric option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Circle Arc Polyline arc Ellipse

452 | Chapter 8 G Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select first object on page 453: Select a circle, arc, or ellipse

Object
Selects an object to be constrained. First object Selects the first circle, arc, or ellipse to be constrained. Second object Selects the second circle, arc, or ellipse to be constrained.

GCEQUAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same radius, or selected lines to the same length.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Equal Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Equal

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Equal option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment

GCEQUAL | 453

Circle Arc Polyline arc

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select first object on page 454 or [Multiple on page 454]: Select an object or enter m to select multiple objects

Object
Selects an object to be constrained. First object Selects the first object to be constrained. Second object Selects the second object to be made equal with the first object.

Multiple
Picks successive objects to be made equal with the first object.

GCFIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Locks points and curves in position.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Fix Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Fix

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Fix option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. When you apply the Fix constraint to a point on an object, you lock the node in place. You can move the object around the locked node.

454 | Chapter 8 G Commands

When you apply the Fix constraint to an object, the object is locked and cannot be moved. Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment Circle Arc Polyline arc Ellipse Spline

GCHORIZONTAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Horizontal Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Horizontal

GCHORIZONTAL | 455

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Horizontal option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. You can select different constraint points on the same object or different objects. The following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment Ellipse Multiline text Two valid constraint points

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select an object or [2Points on page 456] <2Points>: Select an object or two constraint points

2Points
Selects two constraint points instead of an object. The second selected point on an object is made horizontal to the first selected point.

456 | Chapter 8 G Commands

GCPARALLEL
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Parallel Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Parallel

GCPARALLEL | 457

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Parallel option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment Ellipse Multiline text

GCPERPENDICULAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Perpendicular Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Perpendicular

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Perpendicular option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. Lines do not have to intersect to be perpendicular.

458 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment Ellipse Multiline text

GCSMOOTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with another spline, line, arc, or polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Smooth Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Smooth

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Smooth option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Spline, line Polyline segment

GCSMOOTH | 459

Arc Polyline arc

The splines are updated to be contiguous with one another. NOTE Endpoints of the curves to which you apply the smooth constraints are made coincident.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select first spline curve on page 460: Select a spline object

Curve
Selects an endpoint of a curve. First Spline Curve Selects the first spline curve to be constrained. Second Curve Selects the second curve to be made continuous with the first spline curve.

GCSYMMETRIC
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Causes selected objects to become symmetrically constrained about a selected line.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Symmetric

460 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Symmetric

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Symmetric option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. For lines, the lines angle is made symmetric (and not the endpoints). For arcs and circles, the center and radius are made symmetric (not the endpoints of the arc). Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment Circle Arc Polyline arc Ellipse

NOTE You must have an axis around which you will constrain the objects or points to be symmetrical. This is referred to as the symmetry line.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select first object on page 461 or [2Points on page 461] <2Points>: Select an object or two constrained points

Object
Selects an object to be constrained. First Object Selects the first object to be made symmetrical. Second Object Selects the second object to be made symmetrical. Symmetric Line Specifies the axis in which the objects and points are made to be symmetrical.

2Points
Selects two points and a symmetry line. First Point Selects the first point to be made symmetrical.

GCSYMMETRIC | 461

Second Point Selects the second point to be made symmetrical. Select Symmetric Line Symmetric Line on page 461

GCTANGENT
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their extensions.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Tangent Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Tangent

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Tangent option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment Circle, arc, polyline arc, ellipse Combination of circles, arcs, or ellipses

A circle can be tangent to a line even if the circle does not touch the line. A curve can be tangent to another even if they do not physically share a point.

462 | Chapter 8 G Commands

GCVERTICAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Parametric tool group Geometric Contraints flyout Vertical Menu: Parametric Geometric Constraints Vertical

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Vertical option in GEOMCONSTRAINT on page 464. Following are the valid constraint objects and points:

Line Polyline segment Ellipse Multiline text Two valid constraint points

You can select different constraint points on the same object or two separate objects.

GCVERTICAL | 463

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select an object or [2Points on page 464] <2Points>: Select an object or two constraint points

2Points
Selects two constraint points instead of an object.

GEOMCONSTRAINT
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Applies or persists geometric relationships between objects or points on objects.

Summary
When you apply a geometric constraint to a pair of objects, the order in which the objects are selected and the point on which each object is selected can affect how the objects are positioned relative to each other. The following table outlines the valid constraint points for an object. Objects
Line Arc Spline Circle Ellipse Polyline

Valid Constraint Points

Endpoints, midpoint Center, endpoints, midpoint Endpoints Center Center, major and minor axes Endpoints, midpoints of line and arc subobjects, center of arc subobjects Insertion point

Xref, attribute, table

464 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Objects
Block Text, multiline text

Valid Constraint Points

Insertion point, nested entities Insertion point, alignment point

The following commands are equivalent to each GEOMCONSTRAINT option: Horizontal (GCHORIZONTAL on page 455) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system. Vertical (GCVERTICAL on page 463) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system. Perpendicular (GCPERPENDICULAR on page 458) Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another. Parallel (GCPARALLEL on page 457) Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other. Tangent (GCTANGENT on page 462) Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their extensions. Smooth (GCSMOOTH on page 459) Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with another spline, line, arc, or polyline. Coincident (GCCOINCIDENT on page 449) Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a curve). Concentric (GCCONCENTRIC on page 452) Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point. Collinear (GCCOLLINEAR on page 451) Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line. Symmetric (GCSYMMETRIC on page 460) Causes selected objects to become symmetrically constrained about a selected line. Equal (GCEQUAL on page 453) Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same radius, or selected lines to the same length. Fix (GCFIX on page 454) Locks points and curves in position.

GEOMCONSTRAINT | 465

GRADIENT
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group Gradient Menu: Draw Gradient

Summary
A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between one or two colors.

GRID
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Drafting Settings

466 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Toolbar: Status bar Grid

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Major/aDaptive/Limits/Follow/Aspect] <current>: Specify a value or enter an option Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. Entering x after the value sets the grid spacing to the specified value multiplied by the snap interval. On Turns on the grid using the current spacing.

Off Turns off the grid.

Snap Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP command. Major Specifies the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Grid lines rather than grid dots are displayed in any visual style except 2D Wireframe. (GRIDMAJOR system variable)

GRID | 467

Adaptive Controls the density of grid lines when zoomed in or out.

Adaptive Behavior. Limits the density of grid lines or dots when zoomed out. This setting is also controlled by theGRIDDISPLAY system variable. Allow Subdivision Below Grid Spacing. If turned on, generates additional, more closely spaced grid lines or dots when zoomed in. The frequency of these grid lines is determined by the frequency of the major grid lines.

Limits Displays the grid beyond the area specified by the LIMITS command. Follow Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS. This setting is also controlled by theGRIDDISPLAY system variable. Aspect Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions. Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple of the snap interval rather than the drawing units. The Aspect option is not available when the current snap style is Isometric.

GROUP (-GROUP)
Quick Reference
See also:

Group Objects

Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

468 | Chapter 8 G Commands

Enter a group option [?/Order/Add/Remove/Explode/REName/Selectable/Create] <Create>: Enter an option or press Enter

?List Groups
Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing.

Order
Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the cut order for the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern. Position Number Specifies the position number of the object to reorder. To reorder a range of objects, specify the first object's position number. Reverse Order Reverses the order of all members in a group.

Add
Adds objects to a group.

Remove
Removes objects from a group. If you remove all the group's objects, the group remains defined. You can remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option.

Explode
Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component objects.

Ungroup
Removes the group name and the association of objects in the group.

Rename
Assigns a new name to an existing group.

Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected.

Create
Creates a group. Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces. The name is converted to uppercase characters.

GROUP (-GROUP) | 469

470

H Commands

HATCH
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group Hatch Menu: Draw Hatch

Summary
The Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 472 is displayed. If you enter -hatch at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 486.

471

NOTE To prevent the creation of an enormous number of hatch lines, the maximum number of hatch lines created in a single hatch operation is limited. This limit prevents memory and performance problems. However, you can change the maximum number of hatch lines with the HPMAXLINES on page 1360 system variable. Choose from several methods to specify the boundaries of a hatch.

Specify a point in an area that is enclosed by objects. Select objects that enclose an area. Specify boundary points using the -HATCH Draw option. Drag a hatch pattern into an enclosed area from a tool palette or DesignCenter.

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Defines the boundaries, pattern, or fill properties, and other parameters for hatches and fills.

List of Options

Hatch tab on page 477 Gradient tab on page 480 More Options section on page 482 Add: Pick Points on page 473

472 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Add: Select Objects on page 473 Remove Boundaries on page 474 Recreate Boundary on page 475 View Selections on page 475 Select Boundary Objects on page 475 Options on page 475 Inherit Properties on page 476 Preview on page 476

Add: Pick Points

Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point. Pick Internal Point While specifying internal points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut menu that contains several options.

If you turn on Island Detection, objects that enclose areas within the outermost boundary are detected as islands. How HATCH detects objects using this option depends on which island detection method is specified. NOTE Red circles are displayed at unconnected endpoints of boundary objects to identify gaps in the hatch boundary. These circles are temporary and can be removed with REDRAW on page 868 or REGEN on page 869.

Add: Select Objects

Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area.

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 473

Select Objects Interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style.

Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set.

While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections, change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or fill.

Remove Boundaries
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were added previously. Select Objects Removes objects from the boundary definition.

474 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Add Boundaries Adds objects to the boundary definition.

Recreate Boundary
Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it.

View Selections
Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is available only when a boundary has been defined.

Select Boundary Objects

Selects the objects that form the boundaries of the selected associative hatch object. Use the displayed grips to modify the hatch boundaries. NOTE This option is available only in the Hatch Edit dialog box on page 493and replaces the View Selections option. When you select an associative hatch, a single, circular grip called the control grip is displayed. No boundary grips are displayed because the boundaries of an associative hatch can be modified only by changing its associated boundary objects. Use the Select Boundary Objects option to select and grip-edit the boundary objects. To modify the boundaries of a nonassociative hach, you modify the boundaries of the hatch object itself. Thus, when you select a nonassociative hatch, both the control grip and the boundary grips are displayed.

Options
Controls several commonly used hatch or fill options. Annotative Specifies that the hatch is . This property automates the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper. (HPANNOTATIVE on page 1352 system variable)

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 475

Associative Specifies that the hatch or fill is associative. A hatch or fill that is associative is updated when you modify its boundary objects. (HPASSOC system variable) Create Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified. (HPSEPARATE system variable) Draw Order Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER system variable) Layer Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer. Select Use Current to use the current layer. (HPLAYER on page 1360 system variable) Transparency Sets the transparency leve for new hatch or fills, overriding the current object transparency. Select Use Current to use the current object transparency setting. (HPTRANSPARENCY on page 1365 system variable)

Inherit Properties
Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill properties of a selected hatch object. After selecting the hatch object whose properties you want the hatch to inherit, right-click in the drawing area and use the options on the shortcut menu to switch between the Select Objects and Pick Internal Point options. The HPINHERIT system variable controls whether the hatch origin of the resulting hatch is determined by HPORIGIN or by the source object.

Preview
Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. Click in the drawing area or press Esc to return to the dialog box. Right-click or press Enter to accept the hatch or fill.

More Options
Expands the Hatch and Gradient dialog box to display more options on page 482.

476 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Hatch Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Type and Pattern

Specifies the hatchs type, pattern, color, and background color. Type Specifies whether to create a predefined, user-defined, or custom hatch pattern.

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 477

Predefined patterns are stored in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat files supplied with the program. User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you have added to the search path. Pattern Displays a selection of ANSI, ISO, and other industry-standard hatch patterns. Select SOLID to create solid fill. The Pattern option is available only when Type is set to Predefined. (HPNAME system variable) [] Button Displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 485, in which you can preview images for all predefined patterns. Hatch Color Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. (HPCOLOR on page 1355 system variable) Background Color Specifies the background color for new hatch objects. Choose None to turn off the background color. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR on page 1353 system variable) Swatch Displays a preview of the selected pattern. Click the swatch to display the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 485. Custom Pattern Lists the available custom patterns. The most recently used custom patterns appear at the top of the list. The Custom Pattern option is available only when Type is set to Custom. (HPNAME system variable) [] Button Displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box on page 485, in which you can preview images for all custom patterns.

Angle and Scale

Specifies an angle and scale for the selected hatch pattern. Angle

478 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS. (HPANG system variable) Scale Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. This option is available only when Type is set to Predefined or Custom. (HPSCALE system variable) Double For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines at 90 degrees to the original lines, creating a crosshatch. This option is available only when Type is set to User Defined. (HPDOUBLE system variable) Relative to Paper Space Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. This allows you to display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your named layout. This option is available only from a named layout. Spacing Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. This option is available only when Type is set to User Defined. (HPSPACE system variable) ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. This option is available only when Type is set to Predefined and Pattern is set to one of the available ISO patterns.

Hatch Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches, such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin. Use Current Origin Uses the hatch origin point stored in the HPORIGIN on page 1361 system variable. Specified Origin Assigns a new hatch origin using the following options. Click to Set New Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly. Default to Boundary Extents

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 479

Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular extents of the boundary for the hatch object. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and its center. (HPORIGINMODE system variable) Store as Default Origin Stores the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN system variable.

Gradient Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be applied.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

480 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Color
Specifies whether to fill the hatch boundary with a monochormatic or two-color blend. One Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between a color and a specified tint (the color mixed with white) or between a color and a specified shade (the color mixed with black). (GFCLRSTATE on page 1335 system variable) Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors. (GFCLRSTATE on page 1335 system variable) Color Swatches Specifies the colors for the gradient fill (either one color or two colors). Click the Browse button [] to display the Color Palette dialog box, where you can select an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color, true color, or color book color. (GFCLR1 on page 1333 and GFCLR2 on page 1334 system variables) Shade and Tint Slider Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color. (GFCLRLUM on page 1335 system variable)

Gradient Patterns
Displays fixed patterns for gradient fills. These patterns include linear sweep, spherical, and parabolic.

Orientation
Specifies the angle of the gradient and whether it is symmetrical. Centered Specifies a symmetrical gradient configuration. If this option is not selected, the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion of a light source to the left of the object. (GFSHIFT on page 1336 system variable) Angle Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the current UCS. This option is independent of the angle specified for hatch patterns. (GFANG on page 1333 system variable)

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 481

More Options (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Controls the operation of islands and boundaries.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Islands
Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost boundary. Island Detection Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. (HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE on page 1359 system variable) Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If an internal island is encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until another island within the island is encountered. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1359 system variable)

Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This option hatches or fills only the specified area and leaves the internal islands unaffected. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1359 system variable)

482 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. (HPISLANDDETECTION on page 1359 system variable)

The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select objects to define your boundaries.

Boundary Retention
Specifies whether to create an object that encloses the hatch. Retain Boundaries Creates an object that encloses each hatch object. (HPBOUNDRETAIN on page 1354 system variable) Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. The resulting boundary object can be either a polyline or a region object. This option is available only when Retain Boundaries is selected. (HPBOUND on page 1354 system variable) For more information about regions, see Create and Combine Areas (Regions).

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box | 483

Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a boundary. By default, when you use the Add: Pick Point option to define a boundary, HATCH analyzes all objects in the current viewport extents. By redefining the boundary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove those objects. For large drawings, redefining the boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because HATCH examines fewer objects. Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from all objects within the extents of the current viewport. Existing Set Defines the boundary set from the objects selected with the New option. New Specifies a limited set of objects for evaluation by the pick point when creating the hatch.

Gap Tolerance
Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose the area with no gaps. Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary. Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify are ignored, and the boundary is treated as closed. (HPGAPTOL system variable)

Inherit Options
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when you create a hatch with the Inherit Properties option. (HPINHERIT on page 1358 system variable) Use Current Origin Uses the current hatch origin setting. Use Source Hatch Origin Uses the hatch origin of the source hatch.

484 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns.

Summary
Organizes patterns on four tabs, with images arranged alphabetically on each tab. Click an image to select a pattern and click OK.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. ANSI Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with the program. ISO Displays all ISO patterns shipped with the program. Other Predefined Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped with the program.

Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box | 485

Custom Displays a list of custom PAT files that you have added to the Support File Search Path of the program. Preview Displays a preview image of the selected custom pattern.

-HATCH
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Uses command prompts to fill an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or solid fill.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify internal point or [Properties/Select objects/draW boundary/remove Boundaries/Advanced/DRaw order/Origin/ANnotative/hatch COlor on page 492/LAyer on page 492/Transparency on page 492]: Specify a point or enter an option

Internal Point
Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point. Pick Internal Point While specifying internal points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut menu that contains several options.

486 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Properties
Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply. Pattern NamePredefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file. Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the pattern name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch object. ?List Pattern Names Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the acad.pat file. Solid Specifies a solid fill and redisplays the first HATCH prompt, where you can define a boundary. User Defined Specifies a user-defined pattern. Enter u, followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch object. Double Hatch Area Specifies a second set of lines to be drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines.

Select Objects
Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area. Select Objects Interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style.

-HATCH | 487

Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set.

Draw Boundary
Uses specified points to define the boundary of a hatch or fill. The options that are available as you specify points are also available in PLINE. When you complete the polyline boundary, press Enter. You can then create additional polyline boundaries, or press Enter to twice to apply the hatch.

Remove Boundaries
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were previously added. Select Objects Removes objects from the boundary definition. Add Boundaries Adds objects to the boundary definition.

Advanced
Sets the method used to create the hatch boundary.

Boundary Set
Specifies a limited set of objects, called a boundary set, for evaluation by the pick point of the hatch New Creates a boundary set from the selected objects. Everything Creates a boundary set from everything visible in the current viewport. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set and uses everything visible in the drawing or in the current viewport.

Retain Boundary
Creates an object that encloses each hatch object.

488 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Island Detection
Specifies whether to use objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. Specifying no island detection prompts for the ray casting method. Nearest Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. +X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.

-X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.

+Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.

-HATCH | 489

-Y Runs a line in the negative Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.

Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.

Style
Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost hatch boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use the Normal style. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them.

Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This

490 | Chapter 9 H Commands

option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank.

Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another island within the island.

Associativity
Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are modified. A new hatch pattern's associativity is set by the HPASSOC system variable. Changing the associativity setting here also changes the setting in the HPASSOC system variable.

Separate Hatches
Controls whether the command creates a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects when several separate closed boundaries are specified.

Draw Order
Assigns the draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in front of the hatch boundary.

-HATCH | 491

Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches, such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin. Use Current Origin Sets the value of the HPORIGINMODE on page 1362 system variable. The last 5 options listed below correspond to the values 1-5. Set New Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly. Default to Boundary Extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular extents of the hatch. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and its center. You can also store the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN on page 1361 system variable.

Annotative
Specifies that the hatch is . This property automates the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper.

Hatch Color
Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR on page 1355 system variable. When Hatch Type is set to Pattern, you can also specify a new background color. The background color value is stored in the HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR on page 1353 system variable. To set the hatch color back to the current color for objects, enter . or Use Current. To turn off the background color, enter . or none. Default Object Color Enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the color red by entering the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) number 1 or the ACI name red. You can also set the hatch color to ByLayer or ByBlock. Truecolor Specify an RGB color expressed as values from 0 to 255, such as 210,155,95. Colorbook Specify a custom color from a color book installed on your system.

Layer
Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer. Enter Use Current or . to use the current layer. (HPLAYER on page 1360 system variable)

Transparency
Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding the current object transparency. Enter Use Current or . to use the current object transparency setting. (HPTRANSPARENCY on page 1365 system variable)

492 | Chapter 9 H Commands

HATCHEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Hatches and Fills

Modifies an existing hatch or fill.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Object Hatch Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Hatch Edit.

Summary
Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an existing hatch or fill.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Select hatch object: Use an object selection method The Hatch Edit dialog box is displayed. If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, the associated options are displayed in the command line.

Hatch Edit Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Hatches and Fills

Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale and angle for an existing hatch or fill.

HATCHEDIT | 493

Summary
The options in the Hatch Edit dialog box are the same as the options for the Hatch and Gradient dialog box on page 472. Certain options are available only when creating hatches.

-HATCHEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Hatches and Fills

Uses command prompts to modify hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an existing hatch or fill.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch object: Enter hatch option [DIsassociate/Style/Properties/DRaw order/ADd boundaries/Remove boundaries/recreate Boundary/ASsociate/separate Hatches/Origin on page 495/ANnotative/hatch COlor/LAyer/Transparency] <Properties>: Enter an option or press Enter

Disassociate
Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch or fill.

Style
Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost boundary. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another island within the island.

494 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Properties
Specifies new hatch properties for the selected hatch. For an explanation of setting pattern and fill properties at the Command prompt, see -HATCH on page 486.

Draw Order
Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER system variable)

Add Boundaries
Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by adding boundaries. For more information, see Add: Pick Points or Add: Select Objects.

Remove Boundaries
Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by removing boundaries. For more information, see Remove Boundaries.

Recreate Boundary
Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it. For more information, see Recreate Boundary.

Associate
Specifies that the hatch or fill is associative. A hatch or fill that is associative is updated when you modify its boundary objects. Specify Internal Point Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point, and associates the selected hatch with the boundary objects. Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area, and associates the selected hatch with the boundary objects.

Separate Hatches
Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified.

-HATCHEDIT | 495

Default to Boundary Extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular extents of the hatch. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and its center. You can also store the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN on page 1361 system variable.

Annotative
Specifies that the hatch is . This property automates the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper.

Hatch Color
Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR on page 1355 system variable. When Hatch Type is set to Pattern, you can also specify a new background color. The background color value is stored in the HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR on page 1353 system variable. To set the hatch color back to the current color for objects, enter . or Use Current. To turn off the background color, enter . or none. Default object color Enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the color red by entering the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) number 1 or the ACI name red. You can also set the hatch color to ByLayer or ByBlock. Truecolor Specify an RGB color expressed as values from 0 to 255, such as 210,155,95. Colorbook Specify a custom color from a color book installed on your system.

Layer
Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer. Enter Use Current or . to use the current layer.

Transparency
Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding the current object transparency. Enter Use Current or . to use the current object transparency setting.

HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

496 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Creates a non-associated polyline around a selected hatch.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Generate Boundary.

Summary
Creates a new non-associative polyline boundary around the selected hatch.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER.

HATCHSETBOUNDARY
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Redefines a selected hatch or fill to conform to a different closed boundary.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Boundary.

Summary
Trims a selected hatch to within a selected boundary or geometry.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch object: Select hatch object to be trimmed.

HATCHSETBOUNDARY | 497

Select objects to be used for the new boundary: Select the new boundary or geometry and press ENTER.

HATCHSETORIGIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation for a selected hatch.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Origin.

Summary
Controls the hatch origin location point for solid and gradient hatches. You can select and change multiple hatch objects and change their hatch origin for multiple hatches at the same time.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch object: Select the hatch object. Select new hatch origin: Click inside the hatch to change the origin point.

HATCHTOBACK
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

498 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Move/Rotate/Scale tool group (expanded) Draw Order flyout Send Hatches to Back Menu: Tools Draw Order Send Hatches to Back

Summary
Selects all hatches in the drawing, including hatch patterns, solid fills, and gradient fills, and sets their draw order to be behind all other objects. Hatch objects on locked layers are also modified.

HELIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Helixes

Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Open Shapes tool group (expanded) Helix Menu: Draw Helix

HELIX | 499

Summary
Use a helix as a sweep path for the SWEEP on page 1028 command to create springs, threads, and circular stairways.

Initially, the default base radius is set to 1. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value for any solid primitive or helix. The default value for the top radius is always the value of the base radius. The base radius and top radius cannot both be set to 0.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Number of turns = 3 (default) Twist = CCW (default) Specify center point of base: Specify a point Specify base radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>: Specify a base radius, enter d to specify the diameter, or press ENTER to specify the default base radius value Specify top radius or [Diameter] <1.0000>: Specify a top radius, enter d to specify the diameter, or press ENTER to specify the default top radius value Specify helix height or [Axis endpoint/Turns/turn Height/tWist] <1.0000>: Specify a helix height, or enter an option

Diameter (Base)
Specifies the diameter of the base of the helix. Specify diameter <2.0000>: Specify a diameter or press Enter to specify the default value Initially, the default base diameter is set to 2. During a drawing session, the default value for the base diameter is always the previously entered base diameter value.

Diameter (Top)
Specifies the diameter of the top of the helix. Specify diameter <2.0000>: Specify a diameter or press Enter to specify the default value The default value for the top diameter is always the value of the base diameter.

500 | Chapter 9 H Commands

Axis Endpoint
Specifies the endpoint location for the helix axis. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the helix. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point

Turns
Specifies the number of turns (revolutions) for the helix. The number of turns for a helix cannot exceed 500. Initially, the default value for the number of turns is three. During a drawing session, the default value for the number of turns is always the previously entered number of turns value. Enter number of turns: Enter a number

Turn Height
Specifies the height of one complete turn within the helix. The number of turns in the helix will automatically update accordingly when a turn height value is specified. If the number of turns for the helix has been specified, you cannot enter a value for the turn height. Specify distance between turns <default>: Enter a number to specify the height for each turn in the helix

Twist
Specifies whether the helix is drawn in the clockwise (CW) or the counterclockwise (CCW) direction. The default value for the helix twist is CCW. Enter twist direction of helix [CW/CCW] <CCW>: Specify a twist direction for the helix

HELP
Quick Reference
See also:

Access and Search the Product Help

Displays Help.

HELP | 501

Access Methods
Menu: Help AutoCAD for Mac Help Command entry: Cmd-/ or Fn-F1 (or 'help for transparent use)

Summary
Executing the HELP command while a command is active displays Help for that command. You can also click the Help icon that appears on the right side of the command line when a command is active. Clicking the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that dialog box.

HIDE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Regenerates a 3D wireframe model with hidden lines suppressed.

Access Methods
Menu: View Hide

Summary
When you use VPOINT, DVIEW, or VIEW to create a 3D view of your 2D drawing, a wireframe is displayed in the current viewport. All lines are present, including those hidden by other objects. HIDE eliminates the hidden lines from the screen. HIDE considers the following to be opaque surfaces that hide objects: circles, solids, traces, text, regions, wide polyline segments, 3D faces, polygon meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness. If they are extruded, circles, solids, traces, and wide polyline segments are treated as solid objects with top and bottom faces. You cannot use HIDE on objects whose layers have been frozen; however, you can use HIDE on objects whose layers have been turned off. To hide text created with MTEXT or TEXT, the HIDETEXT system variable must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness value.

502 | Chapter 9 H Commands

When using the HIDE command, if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable is on, face-to-face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed as polylines. The 3D Hidden visual style does not honor the setting of INTERSECTIONDISPLAY. If the DISPSILH system variable is on, HIDE displays 3D solid objects with silhouette edges only. It won't show the internal edges produced by objects that have facets. If the HIDETEXT system variable is off, HIDE ignores text objects when producing the hidden view. Text objects are always displayed regardless of whether they are obscured by other objects, and objects obscured by text objects are unaffected.

HIDEOBJECTS
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Objects

Hides selected objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Isolate Hide Objects Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate Hide Objects.

HIDEOBJECTS | 503

Summary
Temporarily hides selected objects in the current view. All other objects are visible.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method

HIDEPALETTES
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify the Behavior of Palettes

Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window.

Access Methods
Command entry: Tab

Summary
Hides all currently displayed palettes such as the Command Line, Layers, and Properties Inspector.

504 | Chapter 9 H Commands

I Commands

ID
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations

Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Inquiry ID Point Command entry: 'id for transparent use

Summary
ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point The UCS coordinate values of the location are displayed at the Command prompt.

505

If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as that of the selected feature of the object.

IMAGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Raster Images

Displays the Reference Manager palette.

Access Methods
Menu: File Attach Menu: Insert External References

Summary
The Reference Manager palette is displayed. If you enter -image at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

-IMAGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Raster Images

Attaches a raster image to the drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter image option [?/Detach/Path/Reload/Unload/Attach] <Attach>: Enter an option or press Enter

506 | Chapter 10 I Commands

?List Images
Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is attached to the drawing, and the path where the image is stored. Images are listed in alphabetical order, regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT system variable.

Detach
Detaches the named image from the drawing, marks it for deletion, and erases all occurrences of the image.

Path
Updates the path name (including file name) associated with a particular image. This option is useful if you change the location of an image file, rename the file, or replace an old image file with a new file; for instance, you can update image01.png and save it as image02.png. If you enter an asterisk (*), the following prompt is displayed: Old path: Lists the current path name for each image Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image

Reload
Reloads the selected images, making that information available for display and plotting.

Unload
Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not displayed, thus improving performance. All information associated with the image remains stored with the drawing. The image frame of each attached image remains visible.

Attach
Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing. The Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. The file name without the extension is assigned as the image name. Image names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by the operating system or this program. If the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object, the Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed. A valid image name is generated from the file name and an underscore and number are appended to the name. If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing, the following prompts are displayed and the image is inserted as a copy: Image file name has already been loaded.

-IMAGE | 507

Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition. Specify insertion point <0,0>: Specify an insertion point Base image size: Width: current width, Height: current height, current unit Specify scale factor: Enter a value or press Enter Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or press Enter If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed instead of the dialog box: Enter image file name to attach <last>: Enter an image name The last image name attached to the drawing during the current session is the default. To avoid errors when entering an image name, it is recommended that you specify both the image name and the file name as follows: imagename=path name\long file name.bmp or imagename="path name\long file name.bmp" If you enter a valid image name without a file extension, the program searches for the file in this order: first, an existing image definition in the drawing, and second, an image file in the folders in order of the search path. The program searches for all the image files with the specified name, regardless of extension, and uses the first name found. If no image name or image file is found, the message Image Not Found is displayed and the prompt is repeated. To specify a long file name that does not conform to this program's naming rules, enter the name as follows: "imagename=filename" You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the imagename=filename convention at the Command prompt. Enter a tilde (~) at the Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt. If you press Esc after the dialog box opens, the Enter Image Name prompt is displayed.

508 | Chapter 10 I Commands

IMAGEADJUST (-IMAGEADJUST)
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Raster Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade

Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of images.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Object Image Adjust

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. If you select a single image, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are the current property settings of the image. If you select multiple images, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are 50, 50, and 0, respectively. Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly, the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image. The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast. Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more the image blends with the current background color. A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background. Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting, the background color for fade is white.

IMAGEADJUST (-IMAGEADJUST) | 509

IMAGEATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Raster Images

Inserts a reference to an image file.

Access Methods
Menu: Insert Raster Image Reference

Summary
When you attach an image file, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Once you select an image file, the Attach Image Dialog Box on page 510 is displayed. NOTE When Texture Compression is turned on, the amount of video memory required to open a drawing that contains attached images is decreased. Texture compression can reduce the amount of video memory necessary to display the drawing, but it can increase the time it takes to load the images the first time that they are accessed; it can reduce the quality of the images when they are displayed in the viewport or plotted. To determine whether Texture Compression is turned on, enter -3DCONFIG. When the -3dconfig comman dis active, use the Acceleration option followed by the Hardware and Texture Compression options.

Attach Image Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Raster Images

510 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Locates, inserts, names, and defines the parameters and details of attached images.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Identifies the image you have selected to attach.

Browse
Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box on page 723).

Preview
Displays the image that you have selected to attach.

Path Type
Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the image file, or No Path, the name of the image file (the image file must be located in the same folder as the current drawing file).

Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the selected image file. Specify On-Screen is the default. The default insertion point is 0,0,0. Specify On-Screen Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the insertion point in X, Y, and Z. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value.

Scale
Specifies the scale factor of the selected image. If INSUNITS is set to unitless or if the image does not contain resolution information, the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and

Attach Image Dialog Box | 511

the image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined. Specify On-Screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1. Scale Factor Field Enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image. Specify On-Screen If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value at the Command prompt. Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0.

Show Details
Displays details about the selected image file.

Resolution
Displays the number of horizontal and vertical pixels per the current unit measurement in AutoCAD for Mac.

Unit
Displays the current AutoCAD for Mac unit.

Image Size in Pixels

Displays the width and height of the raster image measured in pixels.

Image Size in Units

Displays the width and height of the raster image measured in AutoCAD for Mac units.

Path
Found In Displays the path where the image file is located. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the image file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.

512 | Chapter 10 I Commands

IMAGECLIP
Quick Reference
See also:

Clip Raster Images

Crops the display of a selected image to a specified boundary.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Clip Image

Summary
The clipping boundary determines the portion of a raster image that is hidden, either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the IMAGEFRAME system variable. The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

On
Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined boundary.

Off
Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame. If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.

Delete
Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image.

New Boundary
Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline. NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected IMAGE underlay after the old boundary is deleted.

IMAGECLIP | 513

Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect itself. Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points that you specify for the vertices of a polygon. Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify for opposite corners. Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped either outside the boundary or inside the boundary.

IMAGEQUALITY
Quick Reference
See also:

Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images

Controls the display quality of images.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Object Image Quality

Summary
The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take longer to display. Changing the setting updates the display immediately without causing a regeneration of the drawing. NOTE Images are always plotted using a high-quality setting.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. High Produces a high-quality display of the image. Draft Produces a lower-quality display of the image.

514 | Chapter 10 I Commands

IMPORT
Quick Reference
See also:

Import Other File Formats

Imports files of different formats into the current drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: File Import

Summary
You can import data files, other than DWG files, that were created with other applications into the current drawing. The import process translates data into the corresponding DWG file data. The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. In Files of Type, select the file format to import. In File Name, select the file name to import. The file is imported into the drawing. The following formats are available for import:

ACIS (*.sat): ACIS solid object file (see ACISIN on page 56)

If FILEDIA = 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter import file name: Enter path and file name

IMPRINT
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Edges and Faces to Solids

Imprints 2D geometry on a 3D solid or surface, creating additional edges on planar faces.

IMPORT | 515

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Solid Editing Imprint Edges

Summary
2D geometry located on a face or the intersection of a 3D solid with a face can be combined with that face to create additional edges. These edges can provide a visual effect, and can be pressed and pulled to create indentations and extrusions.

The object to be imprinted must intersect one or more faces on the selected solid in order for imprinting to be successful. Imprinting is limited to the following objects: arcs, circles, lines, 2D and 3D polylines, ellipses, splines, regions, bodies, and 3D solids.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select a 3D solid or surface Specifies a 3D solid or surface object to be imprinted. Select an object to imprint Specifies an object that intersects the 3D object you selected. Delete the source object Specifies whether to remove the object whose shape served as the imprint outline.

516 | Chapter 10 I Commands

INSERT
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group Insert Menu: Insert Block

Summary
The Insert Block dialog box is displayed. If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, options are displayed. A good practice is to insert a block from a block library. A block library can be a drawing file that stores related block definitions or it can be a folder that contains related drawing files, each of which can be inserted as a block. With either method, blocks are standardized and accessible to multiple users.

Insert Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Specifies the name and position of the block or drawing to insert.

INSERT | 517

Summary
The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS.

Name
Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a block. Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can select a block or drawing file to insert. Path Specifies the path to the block. Explode Block Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When Explode is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only.

518 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the CONTINUOUS linetype. Description Displays the description that was saved with the block. Preview Displays a preview of the specified block to insert. A lightning bolt icon in the lower-right corner of the preview indicates that the block is dynamic. A

icon indicates that the block is .

Show\Hide Insertion Options

Expands or collapses the Insertion Options section to allow you to specify the insertion poihnt, rotation and scale for the block reference being created.

Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the block. Specify On-Screen Specifies the insertion point of the block using the pointing device. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value.

Scale
Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X, Y, and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block. Specify On-Screen Specifies the scale of the block using the pointing device. X Sets the X scale factor.

Insert Dialog Box | 519

Y Sets the Y scale factor. Z Sets the Z scale factor. Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS. Specify On-Screen Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device. Angle Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block.

Block Unit
Displays information about the block units. Unit Specifies the INSUNITS value for the inserted block. Factor Displays the unit scale factor, which is calculated based on the INSUNITS value of the block and the drawing units.

-INSERT
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.

520 | Chapter 10 I Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter block name or [?] <last>: Enter a name, enter ?, enter ~, or press Enter Units: <INSUNITS specified for inserted block> Conversion: <conversion scale> Specify insertion point or [Basepoint/Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate]: Specify a point or enter an option

Block Name
Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups. You can list unnamed groups with the GROUP on page 468 command. Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). You can control block insertion behavior in response to the Enter Block Name prompt by following the listed examples.

Inserting Exploded Blocks: Preceding the name of the block with an asterisk (*) explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of it. The block definition is not added to the drawing. Updating a Block Path: If you enter a block name without a path name, INSERT searches the current drawing data for an existing block definition by that name. You can replace an existing block definition with an external file by entering the following at the Enter Block Name prompt: block name=file name Updating a Block Definition: If you make changes to a block file that is inserted in your drawing and you want to change the existing block definition without creating a new block insertion, enter the following at the Specify Insertion Point prompt (following the Enter Block Name prompt): block name= If you enter = after the block name, the following prompt is displayed: Block "current" already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] <No>: Enter y, enter n, or press Enter If you choose to redefine the block, the existing block definition is replaced with the new block definition. The drawing is regenerated, and the new definition is applied to all existing insertions of the block definition. Press Esc when prompted for the insertion point if you do not want to insert a new block into the drawing.

?List Block Names

Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing.

-INSERT | 521

Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the block or drawing. Scale Factor All X and Y dimensions of the block or drawing are multiplied by the X and Y scale factors. The block or drawing is rotated by the specified angle, using the insertion point as the center of rotation. Corner Defines the X and Y scale factors at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box. The X and Y dimensions of the box become the X and Y scale factors. The insertion point is the first corner. XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.

X Scale Factor: Defines X, Y, and Z scale factors for the block or drawing. Corner: Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box, and then defines the Z scale.

Basepoint
Temporarily drops the block in the drawing where it is currently positioned and allows you to specify a new base point for the block reference as it is dragged into position. This does not affect the actual base point defined for the block reference.

Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the absolute value of the specified scale factor.

X
Sets the X scale factor.

Y
Sets the Y scale factor.

Z
Sets the Z scale factor.

Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for the block.

522 | Chapter 10 I Commands

INTERFERE
Quick Reference
See also:

Check 3D Models for Interferences

Creates a temporary 3D solid from the interferences between two sets of selected 3D solids.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Analysis tool group Interference Checking Menu: Modify 3D Operations Interference Checking

Summary
Interferences are highlighted with a temporary 3D solid that represents the intersecting volume. You can also choose to retain the overlapping volumes.

INTERFERE | 523

If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another. If you define two selection sets, INTERFERE checks the solids in the first selection set against those in the second selection set. If you include the same 3D solid in both selection sets, INTERFERE considers the 3D solid part of the first selection set and ignores it in the second selection set. Pressing Enter starts the interference testing of pairs of 3D solids and displays the Interference Checking dialog box. If you enter -interfere at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

524 | Chapter 10 I Commands

First set of objects Specifies a set of objects to be checked. If you do not select a second set of objects, all objects in this selection set are checked against each other.

Second set of objects Nested selection Settings

Second set of objects Specifies an additional set of objects to be compared against the first set of objects. If you select the same object twice, the object is handled as part of the first selection set.

Second set of objects Nested selection Check first set. Initiates interference checking for only the first selection set and displays the Interference Checking dialog box. Check. Initiates interference checking for both sets of objects and displays the Interference Checking dialog box.

Nested selection Provides access to individual solid objects that are nested in blocks and xrefs.

Select nested objects. Specifies which nested objects to include in the selection set. Exit. Restores normal object selection (not nested).

Settings Displays the Interference Settings dialog box.

Interference Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Check 3D Models for Interferences

Controls the display of interference objects

Interference Settings Dialog Box | 525

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Interference Objects
Specifies the visual style and color for interference objects. Visual Style Specifies the visual style for interference objects (INTERFEREOBJVS). Color Specifies the color for interference objects (INTERFERECOLOR). Highlight Interfering Pair Highlights the interfering pair of solids. Highlight Interference Highlights the interference objects created from the interfering pair.

Viewport
Specifies the viewport display while checking for interferences. Visual Style Specifies the visual style for the viewport while checking for interferences (INTERFEREVPVS).

Interference Checking Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Check 3D Models for Interferences

Cycles through, zooms, and deletes or retains interference objects.

526 | Chapter 10 I Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Interfering Objects
Displays the number of interferences found between each set during the INTERFERE command. First Set Displays the number of objects selected in the first set. Second Set Displays the number of objects selected in the second set. Interfering Pairs Found Displays the number of interferences found among the selected objects.

Zoom
Closes the dialog box and starts the ZOOM command.

Pan
Closes the dialog box and starts the PAN command.

3D Orbit
Closes the dialog box and starts the 3DORBIT command.

Delete Interference Objects Created on Close

Deletes the interference objects when the dialog box is closed.

Zoom to Pair
Zooms to interference objects while using Previous and Next.

Interference Checking Dialog Box | 527

Previous
Highlights the previous interference object.

Next
Highlights the next interference object.

-INTERFERE
Quick Reference
See also:

Check 3D Models for Interferences

Summary
INTERFERE highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of objects selected and the number of interfering pairs. If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another. If you define two selection sets, INTERFERE checks the solids in the first selection set against those in the second selection set. If you include the same 3D solids in both selection sets, INTERFERE considers the 3D solid part of the first selection set and ignores it in the second selection set.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Check for interferences between 2 sets of objects or within 1 set of objects... Select first set of objects or [Nested selection]: Use an object selection method or enter an option Select second set of objects or [Nested selection/checK current] <checK>: Use an object selection method, enter n, or press Enter to check for interferences Create Interference Objects Creates and highlights new 3D solids on the current layer that are the intersections of the interfering pairs of 3D solids. If there are more than two interfering 3D solids, it may not be clear which pairs are interfering if all the interfering 3D objects are highlighted at once.

Zoom to pairs of interfering objects

528 | Chapter 10 I Commands

Next Pair Cycles through the interfering pairs of 3D solids.

Nested Selection
Allows you to select individual solid objects that are nested in blocks and xrefs.

INTERSECT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Composite Objects

Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or regions.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Edit tool group Booleans flyout Intersect Menu: Modify Solid Editing Intersect

Summary
With INTERSECT, you can create a 3D solid from the common volume of two or more existing 3D solids, surfaces, or regions. If you select a mesh, you can convert it to a solid or surface before completing the operation. You can extrude 2D profiles and then intersect them to create a complex model efficiently.

The selection set can contain regions, solids, and surfaces that lie in any number of arbitrary planes. INTERSECT divides the selection set into subsets and tests for intersections within each subset. The first subset contains all the

INTERSECT | 529

solids and surfaces in the selection set. The second subset contains the first selected region and all subsequent coplanar regions. The third subset contains the next region that is not coplanar with the first region and all subsequent coplanar regions, and so on until all regions belong to a subset.

ISOLATEOBJECTS
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Objects

Displays selected objects across layers; unselected objects are hidden.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Isolate Isolate Objects Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate Isolate Objects.

Summary
Displays selected objects in the current view. All other objects are temporarily hidden.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method

530 | Chapter 10 I Commands

ISOPLANE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Isometric Grid and Snap

Specifies the current isometric plane.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'isoplane for transparent use

Summary

The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE. You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing Fn+F5 (or F5).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter isometric plane setting [Left/Top/Right] <Top>: Enter an option or press Enter Left

Selects the left-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 150-degree axis pair.

ISOPLANE | 531

Top

Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane, defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair. Right

Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair.

532 | Chapter 10 I Commands

J Commands

JOIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Break and Join Objects

Joins the endpoints of lines, 2D and 3D polylines, arcs, elliptical arcs, helixes, and splines to create single object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Modify tool group (expanded) Join Menu: Modify Join

Summary
Most objects to be joined must be located in the same plane. You can join objects in different planes if the source object is a spline or a 3D polyline. Each type of object has additional restrictions.

533

The following rules apply when you join different types of objects using a single selection set:

A line object results from joining collinear lines even if there is a gap between their endpoints. An arc or circle object results from joining coplanar arcs with the same center point and radius even if there is a gap between their endpoints. A circle object results if the joined arcs form a complete circle. A spline object results from joining splines, elliptical arcs, or helixes together, or to other objects. A polyline object results from joining lines, arcs, polylines, or 3D polylines that are coplanar. A 3D polyline results from joining non-coplanar, non-spline objects.

NOTE When joining coplanar arcs with the same center point and radius, lengthening occurs in a counterclockwise direction.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select source object: Select a line, polyline, 3D polyline, arc, elliptical arc, helix, or spline. After selecting the source object, the prompt that follows depends on the type of source object selected. Line The line objects must be collinear (lying on the same infinite line), but can have gaps between them. Polyline The objects can be lines, polylines, or arcs. The objects cannot have gaps between them, and must lie on the same plane parallel to the UCS XY plane.

534 | Chapter 11 J Commands

3D Polyline The 3D polyline and other objects must be contiguous (lying end-to-end), but they can be lying in different planes. The resulting object is a single 3D polyline. Arc The arc objects must lie on the same imaginary circle, but can have gaps between them. When joining two or more arcs, the arcs are joined counterclockwise beginning from the source object. The Close option converts the source arc into a circle. Elliptical Arc The elliptical arcs must lie on the same ellipse, but can have gaps between them. When joining two or more elliptical arcs, the elliptical arcs are joined counterclockwise beginning from the source object. The Close option closes the source elliptical arc into a complete ellipse. Helix The helix objects must be contiguous (lying end-to-end). The resulting object is a single spline. Spline The spline and other objects must be contiguous (lying end-to-end), but they can be lying in different planes. The resulting object is a single spline.

JPGOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Export Raster Files

Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format.

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press ENTER to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER A JPEG file is created that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot options are preserved in the file when you use this command. Light glyphs that are

JPGOUT | 535

displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), command prompts are displayed.

536 | Chapter 11 J Commands

L Commands

LAYER
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Manages layers and layer properties.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Layer Command entry: 'layer for transparent use

Summary
The Layers Paletteis displayed. If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

537

Use layers to control the visibility of objects and to assign properties such as color and linetype. Objects on a layer normally assume the properties of that layer. However, you can override any layer property of an object. For example, if an objects color property is set to BYLAYER, the object displays the color of that layer. If the objects color is set to Red, the object displays as red, regardless of the color assigned to that layer.

Layers Palette
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Layers

Displays a list of the layers in the drawing and their properties.

538 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
You can add, delete, and rename layers, change their properties, set property overrides for layout viewports, or add layer descriptions and apply changes in realtime. When switching layouts or when activating a viewport on named (paper space) layout, the Layers palette is updated and displays the current state of the layer properties in the current space.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Layer Drop-down
Displays the current layer and its color, along with some of its common properties. Click the drop-down list to adjust a layers On/Off, Lock/Unlock, or Thaw/Freeze state. You can also select a layer to set it current.

Toolbar
Make Current Sets the current layer to that of a selected object. (See LAYMCUR on page 554) Layer Match Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer. (See LAYMCH on page 553) Previous Layer Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings. (See LAYERP on page 548) Isolate Layer Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects. (See LAYISO on page 551) Unisolate Layer Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command. (See LAYUNISO on page 559) Freeze Layer Freezes the layer of selected objects. (See LAYFRZ on page 549) Layer Off Turns off the layer of a selected object. (See LAYOFF on page 555) Lock Layer Locks the layer of a selected object. (See LAYLCK on page 552) Unlock Layer Unlocks the layer of a selected object. (See LAYULK on page 558)

Show/Hide Layer List

Displays or hides the Layer list which you use to modify the properties of the layers in the current drawing.

Layer List
Displays the layers in the current drawing and their properties.

Layers Palette | 539

Click in the columns for a layer to change its properties. Status Indicates the status of the layer: layer in use, empty layer, or current layer. Object Selection Indicates if the layer is assigned to an object that is currently selected. Objects must be selected when no command is active. Visibility Indicates if the layer is on and off. When a layer is on, it is visible and available for plotting. When a layer is off, it is invisible and not plotted, even if Plot is on. Color Displays the color associated with the layer. Clicking the color name displays a drop-down list with the standard colors. Choose Select Color at the bottom of the drop-down list to display the Color Palette dialog box. Name Displays the name of the layer. Press Fn-F2 to enter a new name or click over the name when the layer is highlighted. Freeze Indicates if the layer is frozen or thawed. Layers can be frozen in all layouts and viewports, including the Model layout. You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN, and many other operations; improve object selection performance; and reduce regeneration time for complex drawings. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, plotted, hidden, rendered, or regenerated. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, plotted, hidden, or regenerated. Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long periods. If you plan to switch visibility settings frequently, use the On/Off property to avoid regenerating the drawing. You can freeze a layer in all viewports, in the current layout viewport, or in new layout viewports as they are created. Lock Indicates if the layer is locked or unlocked. Objects on a locked layer cannot be modified. Lineweight Displays the lineweight associated with the layer. Clicking the lineweight name displays a drop-down list with the available lineweights. Linetype Displays the linetype associated with the layer. Clicking the linetype name displays a drop-down list with the loaded linetypes. Choose Other at the bottom of the drop-down list to display the Select Linetype dialog box. Transparency Controls the visibility of all objects on the selected layer. When transparency is applied to individual objects, the objects transparency property

540 | Chapter 12 L Commands

overrides the transparency setting of the layer. Drag the slider to adjust the transparency of objects on the layer. Plot Indicates if the objects on layer should be plotted or not. If you turn off plotting for a layer, the objects on that layer are still displayed. Layers that are off or frozen are not plotted, regardless of the Plot setting. Plot Style Displays the plot style associated with the layer. If you are working with color-dependent plot styles (thePSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot change the plot style associated with a layer. Clicking the plot style name displays a drop-down list with the available plot styles. New VP Freeze Freezes the layer in new viewports created on a named (paper space) layout. For example, freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new viewports restricts the display of dimensions on that layer in any newly created named layout viewports but does not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in existing viewports. If you later create a viewport that requires dimensions, you can override the default setting by changing the current viewport setting. VP Freeze (not available on the Model layout) Freezes the layer in the current named (paper space) layout viewport. You can freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport without affecting layer visibility in other viewports. VP Freeze overrides the Thaw setting for a layer in the drawing. That is, you can freeze a layer in the current viewport if it's thawed in the drawing, but you can't thaw a layer in the current viewport if it's frozen or off in the drawing. A layer is not visible when it is set to Off or Frozen in the drawing. VP Color (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the color associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space) layout viewport. VP Linetype (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the linetype associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space) layout viewport. VP Lineweight (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the lineweight associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space) layout viewport. VP Transparency (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for transparency associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space) layout viewport. VP Plot Style (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the plot style associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space)

Layers Palette | 541

layout viewport. Override settings are not visible in the viewport or plotted when the visual style in the drawing is set to Conceptual or Realistic. If you are working with color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot set a plot style override. Description Text string that describes the layer.

List View Column Heading Label Shortcut Menu

Display All Layer Colors Toggles the display of the White color swatch in the Color column of the Layer list. Optimize all columns Changes the width of all columns to maximize display of the column content. Optimize column Changes the width of a column to maximize display of the column content. Restore All Columns to Defaults Restores all columns to their default display and width settings.

List View Shortcut Menu

Set Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer. (CLAYER system variable) New Layer Creates a new layer. The layer list displays a layer named LAYER1. You can edit this layer name immediately. The new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and so on). Rename Layer Renames the selected layer. Delete Layer Deletes the selected layer from the drawing. You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers. NOTE Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. New Layer Frozen in All Viewports Creates a new layer and freezes it in all existing layout viewports and new viewports. VP Freeze Layer in All Viewports Freezes the selected layer in all existing layout viewports and new viewports. VP Thaw Layer in All Viewports Thaws the selected layer in all existing layout viewports and new viewports.

542 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Isolate Selected Layers Isolates the selected layers in the drawing. All layers except those selected, are turned off and locked. (See LAYISO on page 551) Select All Selects everything displayed in the list view. Clear All Removes selection from all items in the list view except the most recently selected layer or filter. Select All but Current Selects everything displayed in the list view except the current layer. Invert Selection Selects everything displayed in the list view except the items that are currently selected.

New Layer (+)

Creates a new layer. The list displays a layer named LAYER1. The name is selected so that you can enter a new layer name immediately. The new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and so on). The new layer is created below the last currently selected layer.

Delete Layer (-)

Deletes selected layers. You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers. Layers in a partially opened drawing are also considered referenced and cannot be deleted. NOTE Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards.

Search Layer
Filters the layer list by name quickly as you enter characters. This filter is not saved when you close the Layers palette.

Select Linetype Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Layers

Select Linetype Dialog Box | 543

Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing. Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, in which you can load selected linetypes into the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes.

-LAYER
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Manages layers and layer properties.

544 | Chapter 12 L Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current layer: <"current"> Enter an option [?/Make/Set/New/Rename/ON/OFF/Color/Ltype/LWeight/TRansparency on page 546/MATerial/Plot/PStyle/Freeze/Thaw/LOck/Unlock/stAte/Description/rEconcile]: NOTE The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.

?List Layers
Displays a list of the currently defined layers, showing their names, states, color numbers, linetypes, lineweights, and whether they are externally dependent layers.

Make
Creates a layer and makes it current. New objects are drawn on the current layer. If no layer exists for the name you enter, a new layer with that name is created. The new layer is on and assumes the following properties by default: color number 7, the CONTINUOUS linetype, and a lineweight of DEFAULT. If the layer exists but is turned off, it is turned on.

Set
Specifies a new current layer but does not create the layer if it does not already exist. If the layer exists but is turned off, it is turned on and made current. A frozen layer cannot be made current.

New
Creates layers. You can create two or more layers by entering names separated by commas.

Rename
Renames an existing layer.

On
Makes selected layers visible and available for plotting.

Off
Makes selected layers invisible and excludes them from plotting.

Color
Changes the color associated with a layer. Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255.

-LAYER | 545

True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to used for the selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as PANTONE . The color is assigned to the layer or layers, and the layers are turned on. To assign a color but turn off the layer, precede the color with a minus sign (-).

Ltype
Changes the linetype associated with a layer.

Lweight
Changes the lineweight associated with a layer. If you enter a valid lineweight, the current lineweight is set to the new value. If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, the current lineweight is set to the nearest fixed lineweight value. If you would like to plot an object with a custom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights.

Transparency
Changes the transparency level associated with a layer. Enter a value from 0 to 90. After specifying a transparency value, the following prompt is displayed: Enter name list of layer(s) for transparency specified value% <0>: Enter the names of the layers to which to apply this transparency level, or press Enter to apply it to the current layer only

Material
Attaches a material to a layer. The material must be available in the drawing before it can be assigned to a layer.

Plot
Controls whether visible layers are plotted. If a layer is set to plot but is currently frozen or turned off, the layer is not plotted.

Pstyle
Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1). See Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects in the User's Guide. If you select a plot style other than NORMAL, the following prompt is displayed:

546 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Enter name list of layer(s) for plot style current <current>: Enter the names of the layers to use this plot style, or press Enter to apply the style to the current layer only

Freeze
Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration and plotting.

Thaw
Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and plotting.

Lock
Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers.

Unlock
Unlocks selected locked layers, permitting editing of objects on those layers.

State
Saves and restores the state and property settings of the layers in a drawing. ?List Named Layer States Lists the named layer state (LAS) files in the support path for the drawing. Save Saves the state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing under a specified layer state name. When saving a layer state, you specify which layer settings are affected when the layer state is later restored. Restore Restores the state and property settings of all layers to previously saved settings. Restores only those layer state and property settings that were selected when the layer state was saved. Edit Changes the saved layer settings for a specified layer state. When the layer state is restored, the specified settings are used. Name Changes the name of a saved layer state. Delete Removes a saved layer state. Import Loads a previously exported layer state (LAS) file, or layers states from a file (DWG, DWS, DWT) into the current drawing. Additional layers may be created as a result of importing a layer state file. Export Saves a selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file.

Description
Sets the description property value of the existing layer. A warning prompt is displayed when you enter a description to a layer with an existing description.

-LAYER | 547

Reconcile
Sets the unreconciled property of an unreconciled layer. ? - Name List of Layers Displays a list of all unreconciled layers.

LAYERCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Layers

Closes the Layers palette.

Summary
Closes the Layers palette if it is open.

LAYERP
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties

Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette Previous Layer Menu: Format Layer Tools Layer Previous

548 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. If settings are restored, a message is displayed: Restored previous layer states. When you use Layer Previous, it undoes the most recent change using the Layers palette or -LAYER command. Every change you make to layer settings is tracked and can be undone by Layer Previous. LAYERP (Layer Previous) does not undo the following changes:

Renamed layers: If you rename a layer and change its properties, Layer Previous restores the original properties but not the original name. Deleted layers: If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does not restore it. Added layers: If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous does not remove it.

LAYERPMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties

Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings.

Summary
When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked.

LAYFRZ
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LAYERPMODE | 549

Freezes the layer of selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette Freeze Layer Menu: Format Layer Tools Layer Freeze

Summary
Objects on frozen layers are invisible. In large drawings, freezing unneeded layers speeds up operations involving display and regeneration. In a layout, you can freeze layers in individual layout viewports.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Viewports=current, Block nesting level=current Select an object on a layer to be frozen on page 550 or [Settings/Undo]: Select an object or enter s or u Layer <layer name> has been frozen.

Select an Object on a Layer to be Frozen

Specifies the layer to be frozen. Layer <layer name> has been frozen.

Settings
Displays settings for viewports and block definitions. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Enter setting type for [Viewports/Block selection]: Viewports Displays settings for viewports. In paper space viewport use [Freeze/Vpfreeze] <Vpfreeze>: Enter f to freeze objects in all viewports or v to freeze an object in the current viewport only Block Selection Displays settings for block definitions.

Block. If a selected object is nested in a block, freezes the layer of that block. If a selected object is nested in an xref, freezes the layer of the object.

550 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Entity. Freezes the layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an xref or a block. None. If a block or an xref is selected, freezes the layer containing that block or xref.

Undo
Cancels the previous layer selection.

LAYISO
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette Isolate Layer Menu: Format Layer Tools Layer Isolate

Summary
All layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked are called isolated.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current setting: <current settings> Select objects on the layer(s) to be isolated or [Settings]: Select objects or enter s

LAYISO | 551

Select Objects on the Layer(s) to be Isolated

After selecting one or more objects, all layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked are termed isolated. NOTE Locked layers are faded by default. You can specify the percent of the fading from the Lock option in this command. You can later change the value with the LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable. If you make changes to layers within a session and you want to restore the layers to the state they were in immediately before you entered the LAYISO command, use the LAYUNISO command.

Settings
Controls whether layers are turned off, frozen in the current layout viewports, or locked. Off Turns off or freezes all layers except the layers of the selected objects. Vpfreeze In a layout, freezes all but the selected layers in the current layout viewport only. Other layout viewports in the drawing are unchanged. If not in a layout, all other layers are turned off instead. Off Turns off all but the selected layers in all viewports.

Lock and Fade

Locks all layers except the layers of the selected objects, and sets the fading for locked layers.

LAYLCK
Quick Reference
See also:

Prevent Objects from Being Selected

Locks the layer of a selected object.

552 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette Lock Layer Menu: Format Layer Tools Layer Lock

Summary
Using this command, you can prevent objects on a layer from being accidentally modified. You can also fade the objects on a locked layer using the LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable.

LAYMCH
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette Layer Match Menu: Format Layer Tools Layer Match

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects to be changed: Select an object to change its layer

LAYMCH | 553

Select object on destination layer on page 554 or [Name on page 554]: Select an object or enter n to open the Change to Layer dialog box Select Object on Destination Layer Select an object on the destination layer. Name Displays the Change to Layer dialog box on page 554. If you create an object on the wrong layer, you can change its layer to the one you want using LAYMCH.

Change to Layer Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Displays a list of layers to choose as the destination layer. You can also create a new destination layer.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Current Layer Displays the currently selected layer. Create a new layer name by entering a name. Destination Layer list Displays a list of layers in the drawing.

LAYMCUR
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Sets the current layer to that of a selected object.

554 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette Make Current Menu: Format Layer Tools Make Objects Layer Current

Summary
You can change the current layer by selecting an object on that layer. This is a convenient alternative to specifying the layer name in the Layer Properties Manager.

LAYOFF
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Turns off the layer of a selected object.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Layers palette Layer Off Menu: Format Layer Tools Layer Off

Summary
Turning off the layer of a selected object makes that object invisible. This command is useful if you need an unobstructed view when working in a drawing or if you dont want to plot details such as reference lines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Viewports=current, Block nesting level=current

LAYOFF | 555

Select an object on the layer to be turned off or [Settings/Undo]: Select an object, enter s, or enter u

Select an Object on the Layer to be Turned Off

Selects one or more objects whose layers you want to turn off.

Settings
Displays the Viewports and Block Definition setting types. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Viewports Displays the Viewports setting types. Returns the following prompt:

Vpfreeze: In paper space, freezes the layer selected in the current viewport. Off: In paper space, turns off selected layers in all viewports.

Block Selection Displays the Block Selection setting types, where you can freeze layers of selected objects.

Block: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a selected object is nested in a block, the layer containing that block is turned off. If a selected object is nested in an xref, the layer of the object is turned off. Entity: Turns off layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an xref or a block. None: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a block or an xref is selected, the layer containing that block or xref is turned off.

Undo
Cancels the previous layer selection.

LAYOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space)

Creates and modifies drawing layouts.

556 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Access Methods
Menu: Insert Layout New Layout Menu: Insert Layout Layout from Template Toolbar: Status bar Layout drop-down Create New Layout

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter layout option [Copy/Delete/New/Template/Rename/SAveas/Set/?] <set>: NOTE Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name. Copy Copies a layout. If you do not provide a name, the new layout assumes the name of the copied layout with an incremental number in parentheses. The new tab is inserted before the copied layout tab. Delete Deletes a layout. The most current layout is the default. The Model tab cannot be deleted. To remove all the geometry from the Model tab, you must select all geometry and use the ERASE command. New Creates a new layout tab. Up to 255 layouts can be created in a single drawing. Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. Only the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab. Template Creates a new layout tab based on an existing layout in a template (DWT), drawing (DWG), or drawing interchange (DXF) file. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is displayed for selecting a DWT, DWG, or DXF file. After you select a file, the Insert Layouts dialog box is displayed, which lists the layouts saved in the selected file. After you select a layout, the layout and all objects from the specified template or drawing file are inserted into the current drawing. Rename Renames a layout. The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to rename. Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. Saveas Saves a layout as a drawing template(DWT) file without saving any unreferenced symbol table and block definition information. You can then use the template to create new layouts in your drawings without having to eliminate unnecessary information. See Reuse Layouts and Layout Settings in the User's Guide.

LAYOUT | 557

The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to save as a template. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can specify the template file in which to save the layout. The default layout template directory is specified in the Application Preferences dialog box. Set Makes a layout current. ?List Layouts Lists all the layouts defined in the drawing.

LAYULK
Quick Reference
See also:

Prevent Objects from Being Selected

Unlocks the layer of a selected object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette Unlock Layer Menu: Format Layer Tools Layer Unlock

Summary
When you move the cursor over objects on locked layers, the locked icon is displayed. You can select an object on a locked layer and unlock that layer without specifying the name of the layer. Objects on unlocked layers can be selected and modified.

558 | Chapter 12 L Commands

LAYUNISO
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette Unisolate Layer Menu: Format Layer Tools Layer Unisolate

Summary
Reverses the effects of the previous LAYISO command. Any additional changes made to layer settings after you use the LAYISO command will be retained. LAYUNISO restores layers to the state they were in just before you entered the LAYISO command. Changes to layer settings after LAYISO is used are retained when you enter the LAYUNISO command. If LAYISO was not used, LAYUNISO does not restore any layers. NOTE You can also restore layers to their previous layer state by using the Layer Previous button on the Layers toolbar (or by entering LAYERP at the Command prompt), as long as you have not made any changes to layer settings.

LAYUNISO | 559

LEADER
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Leaders Create and Modify Leaders

Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature.

Summary
It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER on page 652 command to create leader objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify leader start point: Specify next point: A leader line segment is drawn and prompts for points and options are displayed. Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>: Specify a point, enter an option, or press Enter

Point Specification
Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt you for points and options.

Annotation
Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be single or multiple lines of text, a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances, or a block. If you press Enter at the Annotation prompt without entering text first, the following options are displayed: Tolerance Creates a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances using the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (see TOLERANCE). You can create datum indicators and basic dimension notation in these dialog boxes. After you specify the geometric tolerance, LEADER ends.

560 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Copy Copies text, a multiline text object, a feature control frame with geometric tolerances, or a block and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. The display of the hook line depends on the object copied. The value of the current text gap (see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP system variable) determines where the text and multiline text objects are inserted. Blocks or feature control frames with geometric tolerances are attached to the end of the leader line. Block Inserts a block at the end of the leader line. The prompts are the same as for INSERT on page 517. The block reference is inserted at an offset from the end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line, meaning that if the block moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. No hook line is displayed.

None Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line. Mtext Creates text using the In-Place Text Editor when you specify an insertion point and a second point for the text boundary. Enter the characters for the text. Enclose format strings for prefixes and suffixes in angle brackets (< >). Enclose format strings for alternate units in square brackets ([ ]). For more information about adding a prefix or suffix, see Control the Display of Dimension Units in the User's Guide. The units settings and the current text style determine how the text is displayed. The multiline text is vertically centered and horizontally aligned according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices of the leader line. The text is offset from the hook line by the distance specified under Offset from Dim Line on the Text tab of the New, Modify, or Override Dimension Style dialog box. If the offset specified is negative, the multiline text is enclosed in a box as a basic dimension.

LEADER | 561

Format
Controls the way the leader is drawn and whether it has an arrowhead.

Spline Draws the leader line as a spline. The vertices of the leader line are the control points, each of equal unit weight. Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments. Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line. None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point.

Undo
Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. The previous prompt is displayed.

LENGTHEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Resize or Reshape Objects

Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs.

Access Methods

Button

562 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Modify tool group Lengthen Menu: Modify Lengthen

Summary
You can specify changes as a percentage, an increment, or as a final length or angle. LENGTHEN is an alternative to using TRIM or EXTEND.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object or enter an option

Object Selection
Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object. LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS).

Delta
Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Delta also changes the angle of an arc by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. A positive value extends the object; a negative value trims it. Delta Length Changes the length of the object by the specified increment.

LENGTHEN | 563

Angle Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle.

Percent
Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length.

Total
Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a specified total angle.

Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Angle Sets the included angle of the selected arc.

Dynamic
Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected object by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed.

564 | Chapter 12 L Commands

LIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Guidelines for Lighting

Creates a light.

List of Prompts
Depending on the type of light you specify, the prompts that are displayed are identical to the prompts in the POINTLIGHT, SPOTLIGHT, WEBLIGHT, TARGETPOINT, FREESPOT, FREEWEB or DISTANTLIGHT command.

LIMITS
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or named layout.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Drawing Limits Command entry: 'limits for transparent use

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify lower left corneror [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a point, enter on or off, or press Enter Lower-Left Corner Specifies the lower-left corner for the grid limits.

LIGHT | 565

On Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on, you cannot enter points outside the grid limits. Because limits checking tests only points that you enter, portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the grid limits. Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next time you turn on limits checking.

LINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Lines

Creates straight line segments.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group Line Menu: Draw Line

566 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
With LINE, you can create a series of contiguous line segments. Each segment is a line object that can be edited separately.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point: Specify a point or press Enter to continue from the last drawn line or arc Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Continue Continues a line from the endpoint of the most recently drawn line.

If the most recently drawn object is an arc, its endpoint defines the starting point of the line, and the line is drawn tangent to the arc.

Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment, which forms a closed loop of line segments. You can use Close after you have drawn a series of two or more segments.

LINE | 567

Undo Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence.

Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you created them.

LINETYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Linetypes

Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Linetype Command entry: 'linetype for transparent use

Summary
The Linetype Manager is displayed. If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

568 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Linetype Manager
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Linetypes

Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Linetype Filters
Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are referenced by objects.

Linetype Manager | 569

Load (+)
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, in which you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad.lin file and add them to the linetype list.

Current
Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. Setting the current linetype to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned to a particular layer. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever the block is inserted, all objects inherit the block's linetype. The CELTYPE system variable stores the linetype name.

Delete (-)
Deletes selected linetypes from the drawing. You can delete only unused linetypes. The BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and CONTINUOUS linetypes cannot be deleted. NOTE Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. The deleted linetype definition remains stored in the acad.lin or acadiso.lin file and can be reloaded.

List of Linetypes
Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype list to display the shortcut menu. Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes. To rename a linetype, select it and then click it again and enter a new name. BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, CONTINUOUS, and xref-dependent linetypes cannot be renamed. Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes. Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes, which can be edited in the Details area.

Details
Provides alternative access to properties and additional settings. Name Displays the selected linetype name, which can be edited. Description Displays the description of the selected linetype, which can be edited.

570 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Global Scale Factor Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes. (LTSCALE system variable) Current Object Scale Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor. (CELTSCALE system variable) ISO Pen Width Sets the linetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO values. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor. Use Paper Space Units for Scaling Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. Useful when working with multiple viewports. (PSLTSCALE system variable)

Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Linetypes

Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file.

Summary
The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes.

Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box | 571

List of Options
The following options are displayed. File Name Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter the name of another LIN file or click the File button to select a file from the Select Linetype File dialog box. Browse Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box, in which you can select a different linetype (LIN) file. Available Linetypes Displays the linetypes available to load. To select or clear all of the linetypes on the list, right-click and choose Select All or Clear All.

-LINETYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Linetypes

Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [?/Create/Load/Set]: ?List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). After you select an LIN file, the linetypes available in the file are listed. Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file. The Create or Append Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Specify the file to which you want the linetype added. You cannot create complex linetypes with LINETYPE. For more information, see Custom Linetypes in the Customization Guide.

572 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Descriptive Text Enter a linetype description up to 47 characters long. The description can be a comment or a series of underscores, dots, dashes, and spaces to show a simple representation of the linetype pattern. Linetype Pattern Enter a pattern definition as a series of numbers separated by commas. Enter positive values to specify lengths of dashes, and enter negative values to specify lengths of spaces. Use a zero to represent a dot.

The A in the pattern definition prompt specifies the pattern alignment used at the ends of individual lines, circles, and arcs. Only A-type alignment is supported. With A-type alignment, lines and arcs are guaranteed to start and end with a dash. The A is automatically included in the definition. If you use a text editor to create a linetype, you must enter a at the beginning of the definition. After creating a linetype, you must load it to make it accessible. Load Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a file. The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes. The Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter or select the file in which the linetype you want to load is stored. Set Sets the current linetype for objects that will be drawn subsequently. You can control the linetype of objects individually or by layer. The linetype you enter becomes the current linetype. All new objects are drawn with this linetype, regardless of the current layer. If the linetype you request is not loaded, the program searches for its definition in the acad.lin file. If the linetype is neither loaded nor in acad.lin, the program displays a message and returns you to the Command prompt. Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter bylayer, new objects inherit the linetype associated with the layer on which the object is drawn. If you enter byblock, new objects are drawn using the CONTINUOUS linetype until they are grouped into a block. Whenever you insert that block, the objects inherit the linetype of the block.

-LINETYPE | 573

LIST
Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Displays property data for selected objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Inquiry List

Summary
You can use LIST to display and then copy the properties of selected objects to a text file. The text window displays the object type, object layer, and the X,Y,Z position relative to the current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object is in model space or paper space. LIST also reports the following information:

Color, linetype, lineweight, and transparency information, if these properties are not set to BYLAYER. The thickness of an object, if it is nonzero. Elevation (Z coordinate information). Extrusion direction (UCS coordinates), if the extrusion direction differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS. Additional information related to the specific object type. For example, for dimensional constraint objects, LIST displays the constraint type (annotation or dynamic), reference type (yes or no), name, expression, and value.

574 | Chapter 12 L Commands

LIVESECTION
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Live Section to Adjust the Cross Section

Turns on live sectioning for a selected section object.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a section plane object. Right-click and choose Activate Live Sectioning.

Summary
When turned on, the cross sections of 3D objects interesected by the section object are displayed. Live sectioning only works with objects that were created with SECTIONPLANE.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select section object Turns on live sectioning for the section object you select.

LIVESECTION | 575

LOAD
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Shape Files

Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command.

Summary
The Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list. You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it; it is loaded automatically thereafter. The shape file must be available each time you edit the drawing.

LOFT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting

Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Loft Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Loft

576 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
Creates a 3D solid or surface by specifying a series of cross sections. The cross sections define the shape of the resulting solid or surface. You must specify at least two cross sections.

Loft profiles can be open or closed, planar or non-planar, and can also be edge subobjects. Use the mode option to select whether to create a surface or a solid.

When creating surfaces, use SURFACEMODELINGMODE on page 1509 to control whether the surface is a NURBS surface or a procedural surface. Use SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 1507 to control whether procedural surfaces are associative. You can use the following objects and subobjects with LOFT: Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Used as Cross Sec- Used as a Loft Path Used as Guides tions
2D polyline 2D solid 2D spline Arc Circle Helix Arc Circle 3D spline Arc 2D polyline NOTE 2D polylines can be used as guides if they contain only 1 segment. Spline 2D spline

LOFT | 577

Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Objects That Can Be Used as Cross Sec- Used as a Loft Path Used as Guides tions
Edge sub-objects Ellipse Elliptical arc Helix Line Planar or non-planar face of solid Planar or non-planar surface Points (first and last cross section only) Region Trace 3D polyline Edge subobjects Ellipse Elliptical arc 2D polyline Line Line Edge subobjects 3D polyline Elliptical arc

To automatically delete the cross sections, guides, and paths, use DELOBJ. If surface associativity on page 1507 is on, DELOBJ is ignored and the originating geometry is not deleted.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Cross Sections in Lofting Order Specifies open or closed curves in the order in which the surface or solid will pass through them. Point If you select the Point option, you must also select a closed curve. Join Multiple Curves Joins multiple, end-to-end curves as one cross section. Mode Controls whether the lofted object is a solid or a surface. Options

Guides

578 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Path Cross sections only Settings on page 580

Continuity This option only displays if the LOFTNORMALS on page 1397 system variable is set to 1 (smooth fit). Specifies whether the continuity is G0, G1, or G2 where the surfaces meet. Bulge Magnitude This option only displays if the LOFTNORMALS on page 1397 system variable is set to 1 (smooth fit). Specifies a bulge magnitude value for objects that have a continuity of G1 or G2.

Guides
Specifies guide curves that control the shape of the lofted solid or surface. You can use guide curves to control how points are matched up on corresponding cross sections to prevent undesired results, such as wrinkles in the resulting solid or surface.

Intersects each cross section Starts on the first cross section Ends on the last cross section

Select any number of guide curves for the lofted surface or solid and press Enter.

Path
Specifies a single path for the lofted solid or surface.

LOFT | 579

The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections.

Cross Sections Only

Creates lofted objects without using guides or paths.

Settings
Displays the Loft Settings dialog box.

Loft Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting

Controls the contour of a lofted surface at its cross sections. Also allows you to close the surface or solid.

580 | Chapter 12 L Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Ruled
Specifies that the solid or surface is ruled (straight) between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS system variable)

Smooth Fit
Specifies that a smooth solid or surface is drawn between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the start and end cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS system variable) Start Continuity Sets the tangency and curvature of the first cross section. Start Bulge Magnitude Sets the size of the curve of the first cross section. End Continuity Sets the tangency and curvature of the last cross section. End Bulge Magnitude Sets the size of the curve of the last cross section.

Loft Settings Dialog Box | 581

Normal To
Controls the surface normal of the solid or surface where it passes through the cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS system variable) Start Cross Section Specifies that the surface normal is normal to the start cross section. End Cross Section Specifies that the surface normal is normal to the end cross section. Start and End Cross Sections Specifies that the surface normal is normal to both the start and end cross sections. All Cross Sections Specifies that the surface normal is normal to all cross sections.

Draft Angles
Controls the draft angle and magnitude of the first and last cross sections of the lofted solid or surface. The draft angle is the beginning direction of the surface. 0 is defined as outward from the plane of the curve. (LOFTNORMALS system variable)

The following illustration shows the affect of using a different draft angle for the first and last cross sections of a lofted solid. The first cross section is assigned a draft angle of 45 degrees, while the last cross section is assigned a draft angle of 135 degrees.

You can also use the draft angle handle to adjust the draft angle (triangular grip) and magnitude (circular grip).

582 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Start Angle Specifies the draft angle for the start cross section. (LOFTANG1 system variable) Start Magnitude Controls the relative distance of the surface from the start cross section in the direction of the draft angle before the surface starts to bend toward the next cross section. (LOFTMAG1 system variable) End Angle Specifies the draft angle for the end cross section. (LOFTANG2 system variable) End Magnitude Controls the relative distance of the surface from the end cross section in the direction of the draft angle before the surface starts to bend toward the previous cross section. (LOFTMAG2 system variable)

Close Surface or Solid

Closes and opens a surface or solid. When using this option, the cross sections should form a torus-shaped pattern so that the lofted surface or solid can form a closed tube. (LOFTPARAM system variable)

Loft Settings Dialog Box | 583

Periodic (Smooth Ends)

Creates a smooth, closed surface whose seam will not kink if it is reshaped. This option is only available if the loft is ruled or smooth fit and the Close Surface or solid option is selected.

LOGFILEOFF
Quick Reference
See also:

View and Edit Within the Command History

Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON.

Summary
The program stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.

LOGFILEON
Quick Reference
See also:

View and Edit Within the Command History

Writes the contents of the command history to a file.

584 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
The contents of the text window are recorded in the log file until you exit the program or use the LOGFILEOFF command. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.

LTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Linetype Scale

Sets the global linetype scale factor.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'ltscale for transparent use

Summary
Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a drawing. Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to be regenerated.

LTSCALE | 585

LWEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Lineweights

Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Lineweight Shortcut menu: Right-click Show/Hide Lineweight on the status bar and choose Settings. Command entry: 'lweight for transparent use

Summary
The Lineweight Settings dialog box is displayed. If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Lineweight Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Lineweights

Sets the current lineweight, sets the lineweight units, controls the display and display scale of lineweights, and sets the DEFAULT lineweight value for layers.

586 | Chapter 12 L Commands

Summary
For a table of valid lineweights, see Overview of Lineweights in the User's Guide.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Units
Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. You can also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS system variable. Millimeters (mm) Specifies lineweight values in millimeters. Inches (in.) Specifies lineweight values in inches.

Default
Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. The initial DEFAULT lineweight is 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. (LWDEFAULT system variable)

Lineweights
Displays the available lineweight values and shows which lineweight is current. The current lineweight is shown highlighted in the list.

Lineweight Settings Dialog Box | 587

Lineweight values consist of standard settings including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable, which has an initial value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. All new layers use the default setting. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at one pixel wide in model space. NOTE Use the LWDISPLAY system variable or toggle the Show/Hide Lineweights button on the status bar to display lineweights in the drawing area. Regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more than one pixel. This option does not affect how objects are plotted.

Preview Scaling
Controls the display scale of lineweights on the Model layout. On the Model layout, lineweights are displayed in pixels. Lineweights are displayed using a pixel width in proportion to the real-world unit value at which they plot. If you are using a high-resolution monitor, you can adjust the lineweight display scale to better display different lineweight widths. The Lineweight list reflects the current display scale. Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one pixel may increase regeneration time. If you want to optimize performance when working in the Model layout, set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether.

-LWEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Lineweights

Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current lineweight: current Enter default lineweight for new objects or [?]: Enter a valid lineweight or enter ?

588 | Chapter 12 L Commands

The current lineweight value is displayed; if the value is not BYLAYER, BYBLOCK or DEFAULT, the value is displayed in millimeters or inches. Default Lineweight Sets the current default lineweight. Lineweight values consist of fixed settings, including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. Values are calculated in either inches or millimeters; millimeters are the default. If you enter a valid lineweight value, the current default lineweight is set to the new value. If you enter any other value, the default is set to the nearest valid value. To plot an object with a lineweight that is not found in the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use plot styles to control plotted lineweights. See Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype in the User's Guide. The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable and has an initial value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at a value of one pixel in model space. ?List Lineweights Displays a list of valid lineweight values in the current lineweight units. NOTE If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14, or earlier, format, the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the earlier format does not display lineweights.

-LWEIGHT | 589

590

M Commands

MASSPROP
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Inquiry Region/Mass Properties

Summary
Refer to the Help system for a complete list of definitions for each of the region or mass properties computed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method If you select multiple regions, only those that are coplanar with the first selected region are accepted. MASSPROP displays the mass properties in the text window, and then asks if you want to write the mass properties to a text file (.mpr).

591

The properties that MASSPROP displays depend on whether the selected objects are regions, and whether the selected regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS), or 3D solids. For a list of the parameters that control the MASSPROP units, see Calculations Based on the Current UCS.

Regions
The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for all regions. Mass properties for all regions Mass property Description
Area Perimeter The surface area of solids or the enclosed area of regions. The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. The perimeter of a solid is not calculated. The surface area of AutoCAD 3D solids or the enclosed area of regions. The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. The perimeter of a 3D solid is not calculated. The two coordinates that define the bounding box. For regions that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system, the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a rectangle that encloses the region. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the region. A 2D or 3D coordinate that is the center of area for regions. For regions that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate is a 2D point. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate is a 3D point.

Area Perimeter

Bounding box

Centroid

If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, the additional properties shown in the following table are displayed. Additional mass properties for coplanar regions Mass property Description
Moments of inertia A value used when computing the distributed loads, such as fluid pressure on a plate, or when calculating the forces inside a bending

592 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Additional mass properties for coplanar regions Mass property Description

or twisting beam. The formula for determining area moments of inertia is area_moments_of_inertia = area_of_interest * radius2 The area moments of inertia has units of distance to the fourth power. Products of inertia Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object. It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared. Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a 3D solid. The formula for the radii of gyration is gyration_radii = (moments_of_ inertia/body_mass)1/2 Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units. Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and that also passes through the centroid. A third value included in the results is somewhere between the high and low values.

Radii of gyration

Principal moments and X,Y,Z directions about centroid

3D Solids
The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for solids. Mass properties for solids Mass property Description
Mass The measure of inertia of a body. Because a density of one is used, mass and volume have the same value. The amount of 3D space that a solid encloses. The diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the solid. A 3D point that is the center of mass for solids. A solid of uniform density is assumed.

Volume Bounding box Centroid

MASSPROP | 593

Mass properties for solids Mass property Description

Moments of inertia The mass moments of inertia, which is used when computing the force required to rotate an object about a given axis, such as a wheel rotating about an axle. The formula for mass moments of inertia is mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis2 Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the distance squared. Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object. It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared. Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. The formula for the radii of gyration is gyration_radii = (moments_of_inertia/body_mass)1/2 Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units. Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and that also passes through the centroid. A third value included in the results is somewhere between the high and low values.

Products of inertia

Radii of gyration

Principal moments and X,Y,Z directions about centroid

Calculations Based on the Current UCS

The following table shows the parameters that control the units in which mass properties are calculated. Parameters that control MASSPROP units Parameter
DENSITY LENGTH LENGTH*LENGTH

Used to calculate
Mass of solids Volume of solids Area of regions and surface area of solids

594 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Parameters that control MASSPROP units Parameter

LENGTH*LENGTH*LENGTH

Used to calculate
Bounding box, radii of gyration, centroid, and perimeter Moments of inertia, products of inertia, and principal moments

DENSITY*LENGTH*LENGTH

MATBROWSERCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Browse Material Libraries

Closes the Materials Browser.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Materials tool group Material Browser Menu: View Render Materials Browser

Summary
This command closes the Materials Browser on page 596.

MATBROWSERCLOSE | 595

MATBROWSEROPEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Browse Material Libraries

Opens the Materials Browser.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Materials tool group Material Browser Menu: View Render Materials Browser

Summary
The Materials Browser on page 596 is displayed.

Materials Browser
Quick Reference
See also:

Browse Material Libraries

The Materials Browser allows you to navigate and manage your materials.

596 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Materials tool group Material Browser Menu: View Render Materials Browser

Summary
You can also manage your material libraries in the Materials Browser. It also allows you search and sort materials in all open libraries and in the drawing.

Materials Browser | 597

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Search Searches for material appearances in multiple libraries. Document Materials Displays the materials saved with the open drawing. Use the drop-down list on the left to filter which materials are displayed in the list. The following filters and options are available:

Show All. Display all materials in the current drawing. (Default option) Show Applied. Display only the materials being used in the current drawing. Show Selected. Display only the materials applied to the selected objects in the current drawing. Show Unused. Display only the materials that are not used in the current drawing. Purge All Unused. Removes all unused materials from current drawing.

The Sort drop-down controls the order in which document materials are displayed. The following sort options are available:

By Name. Lists materials alphabetically by name. (Default option) By Type. Lists materials according to the type of material that it was created from. By Material Color. Lists materials by their assigned color. The color might not be the same that is displayed in the material swatch preview.

Show/Hide Library Tree Controls the visibility of the library tree. Libraries Displays the selected library name. The library tree displays the libraries and the categories of materials in each available library. Select a library or category to display the associated materials in the Materials list.

Autodesk Libray. A standard system library which contains the Autodesk Materials provided by Autodesk for use by all applications. My Materials. A special user library which stores the collection of user-defined materials. It cannot be renamed.

598 | Chapter 13 M Commands

The Sort drop-down controls the order in which materials in the library are displayed. The following sort options are available:

By Name. Lists materials in the selected library alphabetically by name. (Default option) By Type. Lists materials in the selected library according to the type of material that it was created from. By Category. Lists materials in the selected library according to the category of material it was added to. (Default option) By Material Color. Lists materials in the selected library by their assigned color. The color might not be the same that is displayed in the material swatch preview.

Materials List Displays the materials in the selected library or category. The Sort drop-down controls the order in which materials are displayed. The following sort options are available:

By Name. Lists materials alphabetically by name. (Default option) By Category. Lists materials by their assigned category. By Type. Lists materials by the type of material that it was created from. By Material Color. Lists materials by their assigned color. The color might not be the same that is displayed in the material swatch preview.

View Controls the details view display of the library content. The following view options are available:

Grid View. All materials are represented by a thumbnail and the name of the material below. (Default option) List View. All materials are displayed in a grid with thumbnail, name, type, and category in columns. Text View. All materials are displayed in a grid with name, type, and category in columns. No thumbnail is displayed.

Swatch Size Adjusts the size of the swatches.

Materials Browser | 599

MATCHCELL
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Text and Blocks to Tables

Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: With a table and table cell selected, on the Table Cell visor, click Match Cell

Summary
All the properties of the source cell are copied to the destination cells except for the cell type: text or block.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select source cell: Click inside a cell in a table whose properties you want to copy Select destination cell: Click inside table cells to copy properties from the source cell, and right-click or press Enter or Esc to exit

MATCHPROP
Quick Reference
See also:

Copy Properties Between Objects

600 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Match Properties Command entry: painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use)

Summary
The types of properties that can be applied include color, layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, plot style, transparency, and other specified properties.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one or more objects to copy properties to Destination Object(s) Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the properties of the source object. Settings Displays the Match Properties Settings dialog box, in which you can control which object properties to copy to the destination objects. By default, all object properties are selected for copying.

Match Properties Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Copy Properties Between Objects

Specifies the properties that are copied from the select source object to the destination objects.

Match Properties Settings Dialog Box | 601

Summary
Specifies which basic properties and special properties to copy from the source object to the destination objects.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Basic Properties
Color Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Layer Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Linetype Scale

602 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Lineweight Changes the lineweight of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Transparency Changes the transparency of the of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Thickness Changes the thickness of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for arcs, attributes, circles, lines, points, 2D polylines, regions, text, and traces. Plot Style Changes the plot style of the destination object to that of the source object. If you are working in color-dependent plot style mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1), this option is unavailable. Available for all objects, except those with the Jitter edge modifier applied.

Special Properties
Dimension In addition to basic object properties, changes the dimension style and properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for dimension, leader, and tolerance objects. Polyline In addition to basic object properties, changes the width and linetype generation properties of the destination polyline to those of the source polyline. The fit/smooth property and the elevation of the source polyline are not transferred to the destination polyline. If the source polyline has variable width, the width property is not transferred to the destination polyline. Material In addition to basic object properties, changes the material applied to the object. If the source object does not have a material assigned and the destination object does, the material is removed from the destination object. Text

Match Properties Settings Dialog Box | 603

In addition to basic object properties, changes the text style and properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for single-line and multiline text objects. Viewport In addition to basic object properties, changes the following properties of the destination paper space viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off, display locking, standard or custom scale, shade plot, snap, grid, and UCS icon visibility and location. The settings for clipping and for UCS per viewport and the freeze/thaw state of the layers are not transferred to the destination object. Shadow Display In addition to basic object properties, changes the shadow display. The object can cast shadows, receive shadows, or both, or it can ignore shadows. Hatch In addition to basic object properties, changes the hatch properties (including its properties) of the destination object to that of the source object. To match the hatch origin, use Inherit Properties in HATCH or HATCHEDIT. Available only for hatch objects. Table In addition to basic object properties, changes the table style of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for table objects. Multileader In addition to basic object properties, changes the multileader style and properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for multileader objects.

MATERIALS
Quick Reference
See also:

Manage and Organize Materials

Opens the Materials Browser.

604 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Materials tool group Material Browser Menu: View Render Materials Browser

Summary
The Materials Browser is displayed. The Materials Browser allows you navigate and manage your materials. You can organize, sort, search, and select materials for use in your drawing.

MATERIALSCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Materials

Closes the Materials Browser.

Summary
Closes the Materials Browser on page 596.

MEASURE
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Measured Intervals on Objects

MATERIALSCLOSE | 605

Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or perimeter of an object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group (expanded) Point flyout Measure Menu: Draw Point Measure

Summary
The resulting points or blocks are always located on the selected object and their orientation is parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. Use DDPTYPE to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing.

The points or blocks are placed in the Previous selection set, so you can select them all by entering p at the next Select Objects prompt. You can use the Node object snap to draw an object by snapping to the point objects. You can then remove the points by entering erase previous.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select object to measure: Specify length of segment or [Block]: Specify a distance or enter b Length of Segment Places point objects at the specified interval along the selected object, starting at the endpoint closest to the point you used to select the object.

606 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex (the first one drawn). Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current snap rotation angle. If the snap rotation angle is 0, then the measurement of the circle starts to the right of center, on its circumference.

The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0.5-unit distances along a polyline, with the PDMODE on page 1436 system variable set to 35.

Block Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected object. Align Block With Object

Yes. The block is rotated about its insertion point so that its horizontal lines are aligned with, and drawn tangent to, the object being measured. No. The block is always inserted with a 0 rotation angle.

After you specify the segment length, the block is inserted at the specified interval. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included.

MEASURE | 607

MEASUREGEOM
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Utilities tool group Measure flyout Distance Menu: Tools Inquiry Distance

Summary
The MEASUREGEOM command performs many of the same calculations as the following commands:

AREA DIST MASSPROP

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Distance/Radius/Angle/ARea/Volume] <Distance>: Specify Distance, Radius, Angle, Area, or Volume Information displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip in the current units format.

608 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Distance
Measures the distance between specified points. The following display at the Command prompt and in the tooltip:

The current UCS X axis Distance in X direction (Delta X) Distance in Y direction (Delta Y)

Multiple Points A running total of distance based on existing line segments and the current rubber-band line is calculated. The total updates as you move the cursor and displays in the tooltip. If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines display.

Radius
Measures the radius and diameter of a specified arc or circle.

Angle
Measures the angle of a specified arc, circle, line, or vertex. Arc Measures the angle of an arc. Circle Measures a specified angle within a circle. The angle updates as you move the cursor. Line Measures the angle between two lines. Vertex Measures the angle of a vertex.

Area
Measures the area and perimeter of an object or defined area. NOTE MEASUREGEOM cannot calculate the area of a self-intersecting object. Specify Corner Points Calculates the area and perimeter defined by specified points. If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo, Options for Selecting Polylines display. Add Area Turns on Add mode and keeps a running total of area as you define areas. You can use the Add Area option to calculate the

Individual areas of defined areas and objects Individual perimeters of defined areas and objects Total area of all defined areas and objects Total perimeter of all defined areas and objects

MEASUREGEOM | 609

Subtract Area Subtracts a specified area from the total area. The total area and perimeter displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip.

Volume
Measures the volume of an object or a defined area. Object Measures the volume of an object or defined area. You can select a 3D solids or 2D objects. If you select a 2D object you must specify a height for that object. If you define an object by specifying points, you must specify at least three points to define a polygon. All must lie on a plane parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. If you do not close the polygon, an area will be calculated as if a line existed between the first and last points entered. If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines display. Add Volume Turns on Add mode and keeps a running total of volume as you define areas. Subtract Volume Turns on Subtract mode and subtracts a specified volume from the total volume.

Options for Selecting Polylines

You can select polylines when using the Distance, Area, and Volume options. Arc Adds arc segments to the polyline. Endpoint of Arc Draws an arc segment. The arc segment is tangent to the previous segment of the polyline. Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point. Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering a negative number creates clockwise arc segments.

Endpoint of Arc on page 788

Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment. Center Specifies the center of the arc segment.

Endpoint of Arc on page 788 Angle on page 788

Length Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new arc segment is drawn tangent to the previous arc segment.

610 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point, creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this option. Direction Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment.

Endpoint of Arc on page 788

Half width Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges. The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used. Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment.

Endpoint of Arc on page 788 Angle on page 788

Second Pt Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc.

Endpoint of Arc on page 788

Width Specifies the width of the next arc segment. The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or when a dot-dash linetype is used. Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn tangent to that arc segment. Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline. Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point, creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this option.

MEASUREGEOM | 611

MESH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create 3D Mesh Primitives

Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Meshes Primitives

Summary
The basic mesh forms, known as mesh primitives, are the equivalent of the primitive forms for 3D solids. You can reshape mesh objects by smoothing, creasing, refining, and splitting faces. You can also drag edges, faces, and vertices to mold the overall form. NOTE By default, new mesh primitives are created with no smoothness. To change the default smoothness, enter mesh at the Command prompt. Specify the Settings option before you specify the type of mesh primitive you want to create.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select primitive [Box/Cone/CYlinder/Pyramid/Sphere/Wedge/Torus/SEttings]

Box
Creates a 3D mesh box.

612 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Specify the length of the sides. First corner / Corner Sets the first corner of the mesh box.

Other corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box. Cube Length

Center Sets the center of the mesh box.

Corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box. Cube Length

Cube Sets all edges of the box to be of equal length.

Length

Length Sets the length of the mesh box along the X axis.

Width (not available for cubes)

Width Sets the width of the mesh box along the Y axis.

Height 2Point (height)

MESH | 613

Height Sets the height of the mesh box along the Z axis. 2Point (height) Sets the height based on the distance between two points:

First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Cone
Creates a 3D mesh with a circular or elliptical base that tapers symmetrically to a point or to a planar face.

Specify the diameter and height. Center point of base Sets the center point of the base of the mesh cone.

Base radius Diameter

3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh cone by specifying three points:

First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh cone base. Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh cone base. Third point. Sets the size and planar rotation of the mesh cone base.

Height

614 | Chapter 13 M Commands

2Point (height) Axis endpoint Top radius

2P (diameter) Defines the base diameter of the mesh cone based on two points:

First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first location on the circumference of the mesh cone base. Second endpoint of diameter. Determines the general location and size of the mesh cone base by setting the endpoint of the diameter.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint Top radius

Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines the base of the mesh cone with a specified radius that is tangent to two objects:

Point on object for first tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve as the first tangent point. Point on object for second tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve as the second tangent point. Radius of circle. Sets the radius of the mesh cone base.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint Top radius

If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used.

MESH | 615

Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the mesh cone.

Endpoint of first axis. Sets the start point for the first axis of the mesh cone base and then specifies the other axis endpoints:

Other endpoint of first axis. Sets the first axis endpoint. Endpoint of second axis. Sets the second axis endpoint

Center. Specifies the method for creating an elliptical mesh cone base that starts with the center point of the base:

Center point. Sets the center of the mesh cone base. Distance to first axis. Sets the radius of the first axis. Endpoint of second axis. Sets the endpoint of the second axis.

Base radius Sets the radius of the mesh cone base.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint Top radius

Diameter Sets the diameter for the base of the cone.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint Top radius

Height Sets the height of the mesh cone along an axis that is perpendicular to the plane of the base. 2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh cone by specifying the distance between two points:

First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

616 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top point of the cone or the center of the top face of a cone frustum. The orientation of the axis endpoint can be anywhere in 3D space. Top radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint

Cylinder
Creates a 3D mesh cylinder.

Specify the size of the base and height. Center point of base Sets the center point of the mesh cylinder base.

Base Radius Diameter

3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh cylinder by specifying three points:

First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh cylinder base.

MESH | 617

Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh cylinder base. Third point. Sets the size and planar rotation of the mesh cylinder base.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint

2P (diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh cylinder base by specifying two points:

First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point on the diameter of the mesh cylinder base. Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the second point on the diameter of the mesh cylinder base.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint

2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh cylinder by specifying the distance between two points:

First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines the base of the mesh cylinder with a specified radius that is tangent to two objects. If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used.

Height 2Point (height)

618 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Axis endpoint

Base Radius Sets the radius of the mesh cylinder base.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint

Diameter Sets the diameter for the base of the cylinder.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint

Height Sets the height of the mesh cylinder along an axis that is perpendicular to the plane of the base. Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top face of the cylinder. The orientation of the axis endpoint can be anywhere in 3D space. Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the mesh cylinder.

Endpoint of first axis. Sets the start point for the first axis of the mesh cone base.

Other endpoint of first axis. Sets the first axis endpoint. Endpoint of second axis. Sets the second axis endpoint.

Center. Specifies the method for creating an elliptical mesh cone base that starts with the center point of the base.

Center point. Sets the center of the mesh cone base. Distance to first axis. Sets the radius of the first axis. Endpoint of second axis. Sets the endpoint of the second axis.

Pyramid
Creates a 3D mesh pyramid.

MESH | 619

Specify the diameter and height. Center point of base Sets the center point of the mesh pyramid base.

Base radius Inscribed

Edge Sets the length of the one edge of the mesh pyramid base, as indicated by two points that you specify:

First endpoint of edge. Sets the first location of the edge of the mesh pyramid. Second endpoint of edge. Sets the second location of the edge of the mesh pyramid.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint Top radius

Sides Sets the number of sides for the mesh pyramid. Enter a positive value from 3-32.

Center point of base

620 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Edge Sides. Resets the number of sides for the mesh pyramid.

Base radius Sets the radius of the mesh pyramid base.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint Top radius

Inscribed Specifies that the base of the mesh pyramid is inscribed, or drawn within, the base radius.

Base radius Circumscribed

Height Sets the height of the mesh pyramid along an axis that is perpendicular to the plane of the base. 2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh cylinder by specifying the distance between two points:

First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top point of the pyramid or the center of the top face of a pyramid frustum. The orientation of the axis endpoint can be anywhere in 3D space. Top radius Specifies the top radius of the mesh pyramid, creating a pyramid frustum.

Height 2Point (height) Axis endpoint

Circumscribed Specifies that the base of the pyramid is circumscribed, or is drawn around, the base radius.

Base radius Inscribed

MESH | 621

Sphere
Creates a 3D mesh sphere.

Specify the size of the sphere (diameter or radius). Center point Sets the center point of the sphere.

Radius. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified radius. Diameter. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified diameter.

3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh sphere by specifying three points:

First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh sphere. Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh sphere. Third point. Sets the size and planar rotation of the mesh sphere.

2P (diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh sphere by specifying two points:

First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point on the diameter of the mesh sphere. Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the opposite point on the diameter of the mesh sphere.

622 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines a mesh sphere with a specified radius that is tangent to two objects:

If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used.

Wedge
Creates a 3D mesh wedge.

Specify the length and width of the base and the height. First corner Sets the first corner of the mesh wedge base.

Other corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh wedge base, located on the X,Y plane.

Height 2Point (height)

Cube

MESH | 623

Length

Center Sets the center point of the mesh wedge base.

Corner. Sets one corner of the mesh wedge base.

Height 2Point (height)

Cube Length

Cube Sets all edges of the mesh wedge base to be of equal length.

Length

Length Sets the length of the mesh wedge base along the X axis.

Width (not available for Cube)

Width Sets the width of the mesh box along the Y axis.

Height 2Point (height)

Height Sets the height of the mesh wedge. Enter a positive value to draw the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Enter a negative value to draw the height along the negative Z axis. 2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh wedge by specifying the distance between two points:

First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Torus
Creates a 3D mesh primitive torus.

624 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Specify two values: the size of the tube and the distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube. Center point Sets the center point of the mesh torus.

Radius (torus) Diameter (torus)

3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and rotation of the mesh torus by specifying three points. The path of the tube passes through the specified points:

First point. Sets the first point on the path of the tube. Second point. Sets the second point on the path of the tube. Third point. Sets the third point on the path of the tube.

Tube radius 2Point (tube radius) Diameter (tube)

MESH | 625

2P (torus diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh torus by specifying two points. The diameter is calculated from the center point of the torus to the center point of the tube.

First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point used to specify the torus diameter distance. Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the second point used to specify the torus diameter distance.

Tube radius 2Point (tube radius) Diameter (tube)

Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines a mesh torus radius that is tangent to two objects. The specified tangent points are projected into the current UCS:

If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used. Radius (torus) Sets the radius of the mesh torus, measured from the center point of the torus to the center point of the tube.

Tube radius 2Point (tube radius) Diameter (tube)

Diameter (torus) Sets the diameter of the mesh torus, measured from the center point of the torus to the center point of the tube.

Tube radius 2Point (tube radius) Diameter (tube)

626 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Tube radius Sets the radius of the profile that is swept around the mesh torus path. 2Point (tube radius) Sets the radius of the profile of the tube based on the distance between two points that you specify:

First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Tube diameter Sets the diameter of the profile of the mesh torus tube.

Settings
Modifies the smoothness and tessellation values for the new mesh object. Level of smoothness Sets the initial degree of smoothness, or roundness, to be applied to the mesh. Enter 0 to eliminate smoothness. Enter a positive integer up to 4 for increased degrees of smoothness. The value is retained for the current drawing session. This smoothness value is limited by the value of SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV. Tessellation Enter a tessellation values (the number of faces) for each dimension of a mesh primitive option.

MESHCAP
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Close Mesh Gaps

Creates a mesh face that connects open edges.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Close Hole

Summary
You can close gaps in mesh objects by selecting the edges of the surrounding mesh faces. For best results, the faces should be on the same plane.

MESHCAP | 627

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select connecting mesh edges to create a new mesh face Specifies which mesh edges form the boundary for the closure. Click the edges to select them.

MESHCOLLAPSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Mesh Faces

Merges the vertices of selected mesh faces or edges.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Collapse Face or Edge

628 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Summary
You can cause the vertices of surrounding mesh faces to converge at the center of a selected edge or face. The shapes of surrounding faces change to accommodate the loss of one or more vertices.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select mesh face or edge to collapse Specifies a mesh edge or a face whose midpoint becomes the point of convergence for the surrounding faces. Click a single mesh edge or face.

MESHCREASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Creases to Mesh

Sharpens the edges of selected mesh subobjects.

MESHCREASE | 629

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Crease

Summary
You can sharpen, or crease, the edges of mesh objects. Creasing deforms mesh faces and edges that are adjacent to the selected subobject. Creases added to mesh that has no smoothness are not apparent until the mesh is smoothed.

You can also apply creases to mesh subobjects by changing the crease type and crease level in the Properties Inspector palette on page 830.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select mesh subobjects to crease Specifies the mesh subobjects to crease. Click mesh faces, edges, and vertices to crease their associated edges. Press Shift+click to remove a subobject from the selection set.

Crease value Always

Crease value Sets highest smoothing level at which the crease is retained. If the smoothing level exceeds this value, the crease is also smoothed. Enter a value of 0 to remove an existing crease.

630 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Always Specifies that the crease is always retained, even if the object or subobject is smoothed or refined. A crease value of -1 is the same as Always.

MESHEXTRUDE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Mesh Faces

Extends a mesh face into 3D space.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Extrude Face

Summary
When you extrude, or extend, a mesh face, you can specify several options to determine the shape of the extrusion. You can also determine whether extruding multiple mesh faces results in joined or separate extrusions.

MESHEXTRUDE | 631

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Mesh face(s) to extrude Specifies the mesh faces to extrude. Click one or more faces to select them.

Height of extrusion Direction Path Taper angle

Setting (Available only when you start the command before selecting faces) Sets the style for extruding multiple adjacent mesh faces.

Join adjacent mesh faces when extruding Specifies whether adjacent mesh faces are extruded singly or as a unit. (The difference between the two options is not always apparent on a mesh that has not been smoothed.)

Yes. Extrudes all adjacent faces as a unit.

No. Extrudes each adjacent face separately.

Height of extrusion Extrudes mesh faces along the Z axis. Enter a positive value to extrude the face along the positive Z axis. Enter a negative value to extrude along the negative Z axis. Multiple mesh faces do not need to be parallel to the same plane.

632 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Direction Specifies the length and direction of the extrusion. (The direction cannot be parallel to the plane of the sweep curve created by the extrusion.)

Start point of direction. Specifies the first point in the direction vector. End point of direction. Specifies the second point in the direction vector.

Path Specifies an object, such as a line or spline, that determines the path and length of the extrusion. The outline of the mesh face is swept along the path. The new orientation of the swept mesh face is perpendicular to the endpoint of the path.

The path should not lie on the same plane as the mesh face or have areas of high curvature. For extrusions that adhere closely to the curved path, use a spline, not an arced polyline, as the path. Taper angle Sets an angle of taper for an extrusion.

Positive angles taper inward from the base mesh face. Negative angles taper outward. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to the plane of the mesh. If the adjacent faces are not set to be joined, the faces that are selected for extrusion are tapered to the same value. However, for joined extrusions, the taper is applied only to the portion of the extrusion that is not adjacent to another extruded face.

MESHEXTRUDE | 633

Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion height.

Angle of taper. Sets an angle between -90 and +90 degrees. Specify two points. Sets the taper angle to be the distance between two specified points.

MESHMERGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Mesh Faces

Merges adjacent faces into a single face.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Merge Face

Summary
You can merge two or more adjacent mesh faces to form a single face.

634 | Chapter 13 M Commands

The merge operation is performed only on mesh faces that are adjacent. Other types of subobjects are removed from the selection set. Merging mesh faces that wrap a corner can have unintended results when you try to edit the mesh or convert it to other types of solid objects. For example, the mesh might no longer be watertight. For best results, restrict mesh merging to faces that are on the same plane.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select adjacent faces to merge Specifies the mesh faces to combine. Click each face to select it.

MESHREFINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Refine Mesh Objects or Subobjects

Multiplies the number of faces in selected mesh objects or faces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Refine Mesh

Summary
Refining a mesh object increases the number of editable faces, providing additional control over fine modeling details. To preserve program memory, you can refine specific faces instead of the entire object.

Refining an object resets the smoothing level that was assigned to the object to 0 (zero). This level of smoothness becomes the new baseline for the object. That is, the smoothness level can no longer be decreased beyond that level. Refining a subobject does not reset the smoothing level.

MESHREFINE | 635

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Mesh object or face subobjects to refine Specifies 3D mesh objects or mesh faces to be refined. Press Ctrl+click to isolate a specific face.

MESHSMOOTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Meshes Smooth Mesh

Summary
Take advantage of the detailed modeling capabilities of 3D mesh by converting objects such as 3D solids and surfaces to mesh.

636 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Object type
3D surfaces 3D faces Polyface and polygon meshes (legacy) Regions Closed polylines

MESHSMOOTHLESS
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Mesh Smoothness Levels

Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Smooth Less

Summary
Decrease the smoothness of selected mesh objects by one level. You can only decrease the smoothness of objects whose level of smoothness is 1 or higher. You cannot decrease the smoothness level of objects that have been refined.

MESHSMOOTHLESS | 637

You can decrease the smoothness of multiple objects. If the selected objects have different levels of smoothness, their respective levels are decreased by one. If the selection set contains ineligible objects, those objects can be filtered out.

MESHSMOOTHMORE
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Mesh Smoothness Levels

Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Smooth More

Summary
Smoothing increases the number of facets in the mesh, resulting in a rounder object.

638 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Facets are the underlying components of each mesh face. You can increase the smoothness level up to the value of SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV as long as the number of faces does not exceed the value in the SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE system variable. If you select multiple objects with differing levels of smoothness, their respective levels are increased by one. You can only smooth mesh objects. However, you have the option of converting some types of objects to mesh during the smoothing operation. You can also filter out ineligible objects that you do not want to convert. For a list of objects that can be converted, see MESHSMOOTH on page 636.

MESHSPIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Mesh Faces

Spins the adjoining edge of two triangular mesh faces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Spin Triangle Face

MESHSPIN | 639

Summary
You can rotate the edge that joins two triangular mesh faces to modify the shapes of the faces. The edge shared by the selected faces spins to intersect the apex of each face.

NOTE You can use MESHSPLIT to divide a rectangular face into two triangular faces. If you plan to spin the edge between the triangular faces, use the Vertex option to ensure that the split extends precisely from one vertex to the other.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. First triangular mesh face to spin Specifies one of two faces to be modified. Click a triangular mesh face. Second adjacent triangular mesh face to spin Specifies the second of two faces to be modified. Click a triangular mesh face that is next to the first selected face.

640 | Chapter 13 M Commands

MESHSPLIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Mesh Faces

Splits a mesh face into two faces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Split Face

Summary
Split a face to add more definition to an area without having to refine it. Because you specify the start and endpoint of the split, this method provides greater control over the location of the split.

For more precision in the placement of the split, you can specify that the split starts or ends at a vertex. The Vertex option is useful for creating two triangular faces from a rectangular face. It provides the precision you need if you later want to spin the new edge using MESHSPIN.

MESHSPLIT | 641

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed: Face to split In the drawing area, specifies which mesh face to split.

First split point on face edge. Sets the location on an edge of the mesh face to start the split.

Second split point on face edge. Sets a second location on an edge of the mesh face to define the path of the split. Vertex

Vertex Limits the first endpoint of the split to a mesh vertex.

First vertex for the split. Specifies a vertex on a mesh face.

Second split point on face edge. Sets the second location on an edge of the mesh face to define the path of the split. Vertex. Limits the second endpoint so that it can only intersect with a vertex.

Second vertex for the split. Specifies a second vertex on the same mesh face.

MESHUNCREASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Creases to Mesh

Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Mesh Editing Uncrease

Summary
Restore smoothness to an edge that has been creased.

642 | Chapter 13 M Commands

You can also remove a selected crease in the Crease area of Properties Inspector by changing the Type value to None when a face on a mesh is selected.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed: Select crease to remove Specifies which creased edges to smooth. You do not need to press Ctrl to select a creased subobject.

MINSERT
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array.

Summary
Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before you specify its position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0. If you enter one of the options, respond to the prompts by specifying a distance for the scale options or an angle for rotation. Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded. You cannot use MINSERT with blocks.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name, enter ? to list the currently defined blocks in the drawing, or enter ~ to display the Select Drawing File dialog box NOTE You cannot precede the name of a block with an asterisk to explode the block's objects during insertion, as you can with INSERT.

MINSERT | 643

Specify insertion point or [Basepoint on page 645/Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate]: Specify a point or enter an option

Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the blocks. Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value, enter an option, or press Enter X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors. Specify Rotation Angle The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Number of Rows/Columns Specifies the number of rows and columns in the array. Distance Between Rows Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. You can use the pointing device to specify the distance between rows, or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns. Distance Between Columns Specifies the distance (in units) between columns. Corner Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point and the opposite corner.

Specify Rotation Angle on page 644 Number of Rows/Columns on page 644 Distance Between Rows on page 644 Distance Between Columns on page 644

XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.

X Scale Factor on page 644 Corner on page 644 Specify Rotation Angle on page 644 Number of Rows/Columns on page 644 Distance Between Rows on page 644 Distance Between Columns on page 644

644 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the absolute value of the specified scale factor.

XYZ on page 644 Specify Rotation Angle on page 644 Number of Rows/Columns on page 644 Distance Between Rows on page 644 Distance Between Columns on page 644

X
Sets the X scale factor.

Specify Rotation Angle on page 644 Number of Rows/Columns on page 644 Distance Between Rows on page 644 Distance Between Columns on page 644

Y
Sets the Y scale factor.

Specify Rotation Angle on page 644 Number of Rows/Columns on page 644 Distance Between Rows on page 644 Distance Between Columns on page 644

Z
Sets the Z scale factor.

Specify Rotation Angle on page 644 Number of Rows/Columns on page 644

MINSERT | 645

Distance Between Rows on page 644 Distance Between Columns on page 644

Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array.

Specify Rotation Angle on page 644 X Scale Factor on page 644 Number of Rows/Columns on page 644 Distance Between Rows on page 644 Distance Between Columns on page 644 Corner on page 644 XYZ on page 644

Preview Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position.

X Scale Factor on page 644 Corner on page 644 XYZ on page 644

Preview X
Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position.

X Scale Factor on page 644 Corner on page 644 XYZ on page 644

Preview Y
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position.

X Scale Factor on page 644 Corner on page 644

646 | Chapter 13 M Commands

XYZ on page 644

Preview Z
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position.

X Scale Factor on page 644 Corner on page 644 XYZ on page 644

Preview Rotate
Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.

X Scale Factor on page 644 Corner on page 644 XYZ on page 644

MIRROR
Quick Reference
See also:

Mirror Objects

Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Copy tool group Mirror Menu: Modify Mirror

MIRROR | 647

Summary
You can create objects that represent half of a drawing, select them, and mirror them across a specified line to create the other half.

NOTE By default, when you mirror a text object, the direction of the text is not changed. Set the MIRRTEXT on page 1412 system variable to 1 if you do want the text to be reversed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter to finish Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point

The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the selected objects are mirrored. For mirroring in 3D, this line defines a mirroring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line. Erase source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press Enter Yes Places the mirrored image into the drawing and erases the original objects. No Places the mirrored image into the drawing and retains the original objects.

648 | Chapter 13 M Commands

MIRROR3D
Quick Reference
See also:

Mirror Objects

Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects across a mirroring plane.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Copy tool group 3D Mirror Menu: Modify 3D Operations 3D Mirror

Summary
It is recommended that you use the gizmos available through the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, and 3DSCALE commands to manipulate 3D objects. For more information about using gizmos, see Use Gizmos to Modify Objects. For example:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter to finish

MIRROR3D | 649

Specify first point of mirror plane (3 points) or [Object/Last/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/ZX/3points] <3points>: Enter an option, specify a point, or press Enter

Object Uses the plane of a selected planar object as the mirroring plane.

Delete Source Objects If you enter y, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are deleted. If you enter n or press Enter, the reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained. Last Mirrors the selected objects about the last defined mirroring plane. Z Axis Defines the mirroring plane by a point on the plane and a point normal to the plane.

650 | Chapter 13 M Commands

View Aligns the mirroring plane with the viewing plane of the current viewport through a point. XY/YZ/ZX Aligns the mirroring plane with one of the standard planes (XY, YZ, or ZX) through a specified point.

3 Points Defines the mirroring plane by three points. If you select this option by specifying a point, the First Point on Mirror Plane prompt is not displayed.

MIRROR3D | 651

MLEADER
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Leaders

Creates a multileader object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Leaders tool group Multileader Menu: Dimension Multileader

Summary
A multileader object typically consists of an arrowhead, a horizontal landing, a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or a block. Multileaders can be created arrowhead first, leader landing first, or content first. If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created from that specified style.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

652 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Specify leader arrowhead location on page 653 or [leader Landing first/Content first/Options] <Options>:

Leader Arrowhead First

Specifies a location for the arrowhead of the multileader object. Specify Leader Landing Location Sets placement of the leader landing for the new multileader object. If you exit the command at this point, then no text is associated with the multileader object.

Leader Landing First

Specifies a location for the landing line of the multileader object. Specify Leader Arrowhead Location Sets placement of the arrowhead for the new multileader object. If you exit the command at this point, then no text is associated with the multileader line.

Content First
Specifies a location for the text or block associated with the multileader object. Point Selection Sets placement for the text box for the text label associated with the multileader object. When you finish entering your text, click OK or click outside the text box. If you choose End at this point, then no landing line is associated with the multileader object.

Options
Specifies options for placing the multileader object. Leader Type Specifies a straight, spline, or no leader line.

Straight. Spline. None.

Leader Landing Changes the distance of the horizontal landing line

Yes. No.

If you choose No at this point, then no landing line is associated with the multileader object.

MLEADER | 653

Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be used for the multileader.

Block on page 654 Mtext on page 654 None on page 654

Block Specifies a block within your drawing to associate with the new multileader.

Enter block name.

Mtext Specifies that multiline text is included with the multileader.

Enter the multiline text.

None Specifies no content type. Maxpoints Specifies a maximum number of points for the new leader line.

Enter the maximum points for leader line. None.

First Angle Constrains the angle of the first point in the new leader line.

Enter first angle constraint. None.

Second Angle Constrains the second angle in the new leader line.

Enter second angle constraint. None.

MLEADERALIGN
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Leaders

Aligns and spaces selected multileader objects.

654 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Leaders tool group Align Leaders Menu: Modify Object Multileader Align

Summary
After multileaders have been selected, specify the multileader to which all others are aligned.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select multileader to align to or [Options on page 655]:

Options
Specifies options for aligning and spacing the selected multileaders. Distribute Spaces content evenly between two selected points. Make Leader Segments Parallel Places content so that each of the last leader segments in the selected multileaders are parallel. Specify Spacing Specifies spacing between the extents of the content of selected multileaders. Use Current Spacing Uses the current spacing between multileader content.

MLEADERALIGN | 655

MLEADERCOLLECT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Leaders

Organizes selected multileaders that contain blocks into rows or columns, and displays the result with a single leader.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Leaders tool group Collect Leaders Menu: Modify Object Multileader Collect

Summary
After you select multileaders, you can specify their placement. For example:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify collected multileader location on page 657 or [Vertical on page 657/Horizontal on page 657/Wrap on page 657]

656 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Specify Collected Multileader Location Specifies the point for placing the multileader collection in the upper-left corner of the collection. Vertical Places the multileader collection in one or more columns. Horizontal Places the multileader collection in one or more rows. Wrap Specifies a width for a wrapped multileader collection.

Specify wrap width. Number. Specifies a maximum number of blocks per row in the multileader collection.

MLEADEREDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Leaders

Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Leaders tool group Add Leader, Remove Leader Menu: Modify Object Multileader Add Leader, Remove Leader

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify leader arrowhead location on page 657 or [Remove Leader on page 658] Add Leader

MLEADEREDIT | 657

Adds a leader line to a selected multileader object. The new leader line is added to the left or right of the selected multileader, depending on the location of the cursor.

Remove Leader Removes a leader line from a selected multileader object. For example:

MLEADERSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Leader Styles

Creates and modifies multileader styles.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Multileader Style

658 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Summary
The Multileader Style Manager is displayed.

Multileader Style Manager

Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Leader Styles

Creates and modifies styles that you can use to create multileader objects

Summary
Sets the current multileader style and creates, modifies, and deletes multileader styles. The appearance of multileaders is controlled by multileader styles. These styles specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines, arrowheads, and content.

Multileader Style Manager | 659

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Current Multileader Style

Displays the name of the multileader style that is applied to multileaders you create. The default multileader style is Standard.

Styles
Displays a list of multileader styles. The current style is highlighted.

List
Controls the contents of the Styles list. Click All Styles to display all multileader styles available in the drawing. Click Styles In Use to display only the multileader styles that are referenced by multileaders in the current drawing.

Preview Of
Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list.

New
Displays the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can define new multileader styles.

Delete
Deletes the multileader style selected in the Styles list. A style that is being used in the drawing cannot be deleted.

Options
Manages the multileader styles in the list. Set Current Sets the multileader style selected in the Styles list as the current style. All new multileaders are created using this multileader style. Modify Displays the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can modify multileader styles. Rename Edits the name of the style selected in the list.

660 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Leader Styles

Modifies an existing multileader style.

Summary
Controls the general appearance of the multileader.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Preview Displays a preview image of the style being modified.

Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box | 661

List of Tabs
The following tabs are displayed.

Leader Format Tab on page 662 Leader Structure Tab on page 663 Content Tab on page 664

Leader Format Tab

Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Leader Styles

Controls the formatting of the leader lines and arrowheads for the multileader.

General
Controls the general settings of the arrowheads. Type Determines the type of leader line. You can choose a straight leader, a spline, or no leader line. Color Determines the color of the leader line. Linetype Determines the linetype of the leader line. Lineweight Determines the lineweight of the leader line.

Arrowhead
Controls the appearance of the multileader arrowheads. Symbol Sets the arrowhead symbol for the multileader. Size

662 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Displays and sets the size of arrowheads.

Leader Break
Controls the settings used when adding a dimension break to a multileader. Break Size Displays and sets the break size used for the DIMBREAK command when the multileader is selected.

Leader Structure Tab

Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Leader Styles

Controls the number of leader points, landing size, and scale for the multilieader.

Constraints
Controls the constraints of the multileader. Maximum Leader Points Specifies a maximum number of points for the leader line. First Segment Angle Specifies the angle of the first point in the leader line. Second Segment Angle Specifies the angle of the second point in the multileader landing line.

Landing Settings
Controls the landing settings of the multileader. Automatically Include Landing Attaches a horizontal landing line to the multileader content. Set Landing Distance Determines the fixed distance for the multileader landing line.

Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box | 663

Scale
Controls the scaling of the multileader. Annotative Specifies that the multileader is annotative. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Scale to Layout Determines a scaling factor for the multileader based on the scaling in the model space and paper space viewports. This option is available when the multileader is not annotative. Specify Scale Specifies the scale for the multileader. This option is available when the multileader is not annotative.

Content Tab
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Leader Styles

Controls the type of content attached to the multilieader. Multileader Type Determines whether the multileader contains text or a block.

MText: Text Options

Controls the appearance of the text for the multileader. Default Text Sets default text for the multileader content. The [...] button launches the MTEXT In Place Editor. Text Style Lists the available text styles.

664 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Text Style Button Displays the Text Style dialog box where you can create or modify text styles. Text Angle Specifies the rotation angle of the multileader text. Text Color Specifies the color of the multileader text. Text Height Specifies the height of the multileader text. Always Left Justify Specifies that the multileader text is always left justified. Frame Text Frames the multileader text content with a text box.

Mtext: Leader Connection

Controls the leader connection settings of the multileader.

Attachment
Specifies how the multiline text should be attached to the multileader.

Horizontal
Inserts the leader to the left or right of the text content. A horizontal attachment includes a landing line between the text and the leader. Left Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the right of the leader. Right Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the left of the leader. Landing Gap Specifies the distance between the landing line and the multileader text.

Vertical
Inserts the leader at the top or bottom of the text content. A vertical attachment does not include a landing line between the text and the leader. Top

Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box | 665

Attaches the leader to the top center of the text content. Click the drop-down to insert an overline between the leader attachment and the text content. Bottom Attaches the leader to the bottom of the text content. Click the drop-down to insert an underline between the leader attachment and the text content.

Block: Block Options

Controls the properties of block content in a multileader object. Source block Specifies the block used for multileader content. Attachment Specifies the way the block is attached to the multileader object. You can attach the block by specifying the insertion point of the block or the center point of the block. Color Specifies the color of the multileader block content. The Block color control in the MLEADERSTYLE Content tab only takes effect if the object color included in the block is set to ByBlock. Scale Specifies the scale of the block upon insertion. For example, if the block is a 1 inch square and the scale specified is 0.5000, then the block is inserted as a 1/2 inch square.

Create New Multileader Style Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Leader Styles

Specifies a name for the new multileader style and specifies the existing multileader style on which the new multileader style will be based.

666 | Chapter 13 M Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed. New Style Name Names the new multileader style. Start With Specifies an existing multileader style whose settings are the default for the new multileader style. Annotative Specifies that the multileader object is . Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Continue Displays the Multileader Style Manager, in which you define the new multileader style.

MLINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Multiline Objects

Creates multiple parallel lines.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw Multiline

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point or [Justification/Scale/STyle]: Specify a point or enter an option

Start Point
Specifies the next vertex of the multiline. If you create a multiline with two or more segments, the prompt includes the Close option.

MLINE | 667

Next Point Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using the current multiline style and continues to prompt for points.

Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline. Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments.

Justification
Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify.

Top on page 668 Zero on page 668 Bottom on page 669

Top Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line with the most positive offset is at the specified points.

Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor, so that the MLSTYLE Element Properties offset of 0.0 is at the specified points.

668 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Bottom Draws the multiline above the cursor, so that the line with the most negative offset is at the specified points.

Scale
Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect linetype scale. The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style definition. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset linethe smallest on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value. A scale factor of 0 collapses the multiline into a single line.

Style
Specifies a style to use for the multiline.

Style Name on page 669 ? on page 669

Style Name Specifies the name of a style that has already been loaded or that's defined in a multiline library (MLN) file you've created. ?List Styles Lists the loaded multiline styles.

MLINE | 669

MODEL
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Model Space and Paper Space

Switches from a named (paper space) layout to the Model layout.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Status bar Quick View Model Toolbar: Status bar Layout dropdown Model

Summary
On the Model layout, you can create drawings in model space. The Model layout automatically sets the TILEMODE on page 1522 system variable to 1, and you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing. Once you have completed your drawing, you can choose a named (paper space) layout to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot. For possible performance gains when you switch between layouts or between the Model and named layouts, use the LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable to control how the display list is updated.

MOVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Move Objects

Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.

670 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Move/Rotate/Scale tool group Move Menu: Modify Move Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move. Right-click in the drawing area and click Move.

Summary
Use coordinates, grid snaps, object snaps, and other tools to move objects with precision.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Specify base point or [Displacement]: Specify second point or <use first point as displacement>: The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects move 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current position. Displacement Enter coordinates to represent a vector The coordinate values that you enter specify a relative distance and direction.

MOVE | 671

MREDO
Quick Reference
See also:

Correct Mistakes

Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter number of actions or [All/Last]: Number of Actions Reverses the specified number of actions. All Reverses all previous actions. Last Reverses only the last action.

MSPACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Model Space and Paper Space

In a layout, switches from paper space to model space in a layout viewport.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Double-click over a viewport on a named layout. Double-click outside of a viewport on a named layout to return to paper space.

Summary
Commands operate in either model space or paper space. You use model space (the Model layout) to do drafting and design work and to create two-dimensional drawings or three-dimensional models. You use paper space (a named layout) to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting.

672 | Chapter 13 M Commands

When you are in a layout, you can enter mspace at the Command prompt to make the last viewport in the layout current, and then work in model space in that viewport within the layout.

MTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Multiline Text

Edits multiline text.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Double-click a multiline text object.

Summary
Displays either the multiline text visor and the In-Place Text Editor to modify the formatting or content of the selected mtext object. The In-Place Text Editor is displayed.

MTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Creates a multiline text object.

Access Methods

Button

MTEDIT | 673

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Text tool group Multiline flyout Multiline Text Menu: Draw Text Multiline Text

Summary
You can create several paragraphs of text as a single multiline text (mtext) object. With the built-in editor, you can format the text appearance, columns, and boundaries. After you specify the point for the opposite corner the Text Editor visor on page 678 is displayed which contains text formatting options. If you specify one of the other options, or if you enter -mtext at the Command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the In-Place Text editor and displays additional Command prompts. See also:

Symbols and Special Characters on page 695

In-Place Text Editor

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Creates or modifies single or multiline text objects.

674 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Summary
You can import or paste text from other files to use in multiline text, set tabs, adjust paragraph and line spacing and alignment, and create and modify columns. The In-Place Text Editor includes

Text Editor visor on page 678 Paragraph dialog box on page 681 Column Settings dialog box on page 684 Background Mask dialog box on page 685 Columns menu on page 683

When a table cell is selected for editing, the In-Place Text Editor displays column letters and row numbers. NOTE Not all options available when creating single-line text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Text Editor Shortcut Menu

Select All Selects all the text in the text editor. Clipboard Contains options to Cut, Copy, and Paste text to or from the clipboard. The Paste Special option allows you to paste without character or paragraph formatting. Insert Field Displays the Insert Field dialog box. Symbol Displays a list of available symbols. You can also select a Non-breaking space and open the Characters dialog box for additional symbols. Import Text Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Select any file that is in ASCII or RTF format. Imported text retains its original character formatting and style properties, but you can edit and format the imported text in the editor. After you select a text file to import, you can replace either selected text or all text, or append the inserted text to text selected within the text boundary. The file size for imported text is limited to 32 KB. (Not available for single-line text.)

In-Place Text Editor | 675

The editor automatically sets the text color to BYLAYER. When black characters are inserted and the background color is black, the editor automatically changes to white or the current color. Paragraph Alignment Sets alignment for the multiline text object. You can choose to align your text to the left, center, or right. You can justify your text, or align the first and last characters of your text with the margins of your mtext box, or center each line of text within the margins of your mtext box. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line. (Not available for single-line text.) Paragraph Displays options for paragraph formatting. See the Paragraph dialog box on page 681. (Not available for single-line text.) Bullets and Lists Displays the options for numbering lists. (Not available for single-line text.) Displays options for creating lists. (Not available for table cells.) The list is indented to align with the first selected paragraph.

Off: When selected, removes letters, numbers, and bullets from selected text that has list formatting applied. Indentation is not changed. Lettered: Applies list formatting that uses letters with periods for the items in the list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the sequence continues by using double letters. Numbered: Applies list formatting that uses numbers with periods for the items in the list. Bulleted: Applies list formatting that uses bullets for the items in the list. Restart: Starts a new letter or number sequence in list formatting. If the selected items are in the middle of a list, unselected items below them also become part of the new list. Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected items below the selected items continue the sequence. Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}). Use Tab Delimiter Only: Limits the Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and Lists options. List formatting is applied to text only when the space after the letter, number, or bullet character was created by Tab, not Space.

676 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Allow Bullets and Lists: When this option is selected, list formatting is applied to all plain text in the multiline text object that looks like a list. Text that meets the following criteria is considered to be a list. The line begins with (1) one or more letters or numbers or a symbol, followed by (2) punctuation after a letter or number, (3) a space created by pressing Tab, and (4) some text before the line is ended by Enter or Shift+Enter. When you clear the check mark, any list formatting in the multiline text object is removed and the items are converted to plain text. Allow Auto-list is turned off, and all the Bullets and Lists options are unavailable except Allow Bullets and Lists.

Columns Displays options for columns. See the Columns menu on page 683. (Not available for single-line text.) Find and Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box. Change Case Changes the case of selected text. Options are Uppercase and Lowercase. AutoCAPS Converts all new and imported text to uppercase. AutoCAPS does not affect existing text. To change the case of existing text, select the text and right-click. Click Change Case. Character Set Displays a menu of code pages. Select a code page to apply it to the selected text. (Not available for single-line text.) Combine Paragraphs Combines selected paragraphs into a single paragraph and replaces each paragraph return with a space. (Not available for single-line text.) Remove Formatting Removes character formatting for selected characters, paragraph formatting for a selected paragraph, or all formatting from a selected paragraph. (Not available for single-line text.) Background Mask Displays the Background Mask dialog box. (Not available for table cells and single-line text.) Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected. When the stack characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right. By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-justified tolerance values. Text that contains the forward slash converts to center-justified fractional numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer text string. Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated by a diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. The characters above the

In-Place Text Editor | 677

diagonal fraction bar are bottom-right aligned; the characters beneath the diagonal bar are top-left aligned. Editor Settings Displays a list of options for the text editor. See Editor Settings for more information.

Editor Settings
Provides options for changing the behavior of the text editor and provides additional editing options. Options are specific to the Editor Settings menu and are not available elsewhere in the text editor. NOTE Some options may not be available depending on what you are editing. Always Display As WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) Controls display of the In-Place Text Editor and the text within it. When unchecked, text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it. When this option is checked, the MTEXTFIXED system variable will be set to 0. Otherwise, MTEXTFIXED will be set to 2. Show Rulers Controls the display of the ruler. Opaque Background When selected, makes the background of the editor opaque. (Not available for table cells.) Check Spelling Determines whether As-You-Type spell checking is on or off. Check Spelling Settings Displays the Check Spelling Settings dialog box, where you can specify text options that will be checked for spelling errors within your drawing. Text Highlight Color Specifies the highlight color when text is selected.

Text Editor Visor

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Formats the text of the current multiline text object.

678 | Chapter 13 M Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Text Editor Visor - Row 1 Style Options

Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The Standard text style is active by default. Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text. If the current text style has no fixed height, the text height is the value stored in theTEXTSIZE system variable. A multiline text object can contain characters of various heights.

Text Height

Formatting Options
Bold Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. Turns underlining on and off for new or selected text. Turns overline on and off for new or selected text.

Italic

Underline Overline

Editor Options
Undo Undoes actions in the text editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Redoes actions in the text editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Closes the text editor and changes are ignored. Closes the text editor and saves your changes. Expands the Text Editor visor to show additional options.

Redo

Cancel Save More

Text Editor Visor | 679

Text Editor Visor - Row 2 Additional Formatting Options

Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. TrueType fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD for Mac compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored. Custom fonts and third-party fonts are displayed in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts. Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text.

Color

Paragraph Options
MText Justification Displays the MText Justification menu with nine alignment options available. Top Left is the default. See the Paragraph dialog box for a list of additional options.

Insert Options
Symbol Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position. You can also insert symbols manually. See Symbols and Special Characters on page 695. Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu, along with their control code or Unicode string. Click Other to display the Character dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font available on your system. When you have selected the character that you want to use, click Insert to place the character in the text editor. Close the Characters dialog box when you are done inserting special characters. Symbols are not supported in vertical text. Displays the Insert Field dialog box, where you can select a field to insert in the text. When the dialog box closes, the current value of the field is displayed in the text.

Insert Field

Tools Options
Find and Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box.

680 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Paragraph Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Sets indentation for paragraphs and the first lines of paragraphs.

Summary
Specifies tab stops, indents, controls paragraph alignment, paragraph spacing, and paragraph line spacing. NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are supported in AutoCAD 2007 and previous releases. See MTEXT Paragraph and Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases in the Users Guide.

Paragraph Dialog Box | 681

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Tab
Specifies the tab stops and decimal styles to use for the paragraph. Tab Stops Displays tab setting options, including adding and removing tabs. Options include setting left, center, right, and decimal tabs. You can also set tabs from the Tab selection button on the In-Place Editors ruler. Decimal style Sets the decimal style based on current user locale. Options include setting the decimal style as period, comma, and space. This setting is preserved with the drawing even if the locale setting is changed.

Indent
Controls the left and right indents for the paragraph. Left Sets the indent value for the first line or hanging indent to the selected or current paragraphs. Right Applies the indent to the entire selected or current paragraph.

Alignment & Spacing

Defines the alignment and spacing for the paragraph. Paragraph Alignment Sets the alignment properties for the current or selected paragraphs. Paragraph Spacing Specifies the spacing before or after the current or selected paragraphs. The distance between two paragraphs is determined by the total of the after paragraph spacing value of the upper paragraph and the before paragraph spacing value of the lower paragraph. Paragraph Line Spacing Sets the spacing between individual lines in the current or selected paragraphs.

682 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Columns Menu
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Allows you to format an mtext object into multiple columns.

Summary
You can specify column and gutter width, height, and number of columns. You can edit column width and height with grip-editing. To create multiple columns you always start with a single column. Depending on the column mode you choose, you have two different methods for creating and manipulating columns static mode or dynamic mode.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. No Columns Specifies no columns for the current mtext object. Dynamic Columns Sets dynamic columns mode to the current mtext object. Dynamic columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affects text flow and text flow causes columns to be added or removed. Auto height or Manual height options are available. Static Columns Sets static columns mode to the current mtext object. You can specify the total width and height of the mtext object, and the number of columns. All the columns share the same height and are aligned at both sides. Insert Column Break Alt+Enter Inserts a manual column break. Column Settings Displays Column Settings dialog box on page 684.

Columns Menu | 683

Column Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Displays options for setting up columns such as the type, number of columns, height, and width, and gutter size.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Column Type Displays choices for the type of columns you want to create. Column Number Sets the number of columns. This is only active when you select Static Columns. Height Displays mtext height when Auto Height with Dynamic or Static Columns is selected.

684 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Width Displays and specifies control column and gutter width values. The gutter value is five times the default mtext text height. Also displays the total width value of the mtext object.

Background Mask Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Controls using an opaque background behind multiline text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Use Background Mask

Puts an opaque background behind the text. NOTE When you apply a background mask to mtext multiple columns only the column areas will be masked. The space between the columns commonly referred to as gutters will be unmasked.

Border Offset Factor

Specifies the margin around the text for the opaque background. The value is based on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the multiline text object. A factor of 1.5 extends the background by 0.5 times the text height.

Background Mask Dialog Box | 685

Fill Color
Specifies the color for the background. Use Background Drawing Color Provides a background that is the same color as the background of the drawing. Color Specifies a color for the opaque background. You can select one of the colors in the list or click Select Color to open the Color Palette dialog box.

Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select the Find and Replace icon in the text editor or from the MTEXT shortcut menu

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Find What Provides a space for you to type the text you want to find.

686 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Replace With Provides a space for you to type the text you want to replace the text you typed in Find What. Find Next Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What. Replace Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Replace All Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Match Case Finds only text with uppercase and lowercase characters as specified in Find What. The case of all characters in the text string must match the case of the text in Find What. When this option is cleared, a match is found for specified text strings regardless of case. Match Whole Word Only Finds only whole words specified in Find What. Text that is part of another word is ignored. When this option is cleared, a match is found for text strings, whether they are single words or parts of other words. Use Wildcards Allows the use of wildcard characters in searches. For more information on wildcard searches, see Find and Replace Text in the Users Guide. Match Diacritics Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results. Match Half/Full Width Forms (East Asian Languages) Matches half- and full-width characters in search results.

Stack Properties Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Edits the text, stack type, alignment, and size of stacked text.

Stack Properties Dialog Box | 687

Summary
To open the Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click, and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu. You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options control the stack style, position, and text size of the stacked text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Text
Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction. Upper Edits the number in the upper part or first half of a stacked fraction. Lower Edits the number in the lower part or second half of a stacked fraction.

Appearance
Edits the style, position, or text size of a stacked fraction.

Style
Specifies a style format for stacked text: horizontal fraction, diagonal fraction, tolerance, and decimal. Fraction (Horizontal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a horizontal line.

688 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Fraction (Diagonal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a diagonal line. NOTE Releases of AutoCAD earlier than AutoCAD 2000 do not support diagonal fractions. If a multiline text object contains diagonal fractions, the fractions are converted to horizontal fractions when you save the drawing to pre-AutoCAD 2000 releases. Diagonal fractions are restored when the drawing is re-opened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release. If a single multiline text object contains both horizontal and diagonal fractions, all fractions are converted to diagonal fractions when the drawing is reopened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release. Tolerance Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number. There is no line between the numbers. Decimal A variation of the Tolerance style that aligns the decimal point of both the upper and lower numbers of selected text.

Position
Specifies how fractions are aligned. Center alignment is the default. All stacked text in an object uses the same alignment. Top Aligns the top of the fraction with the top of the text line. Center Centers the fraction vertically at the center of the text line. Bottom Aligns the bottom of the fraction with the text baseline.

Text Size
Controls the size of the stacked text as a percentage of the size of the current text style (from 25 to 125 percent).

Defaults
Saves the new settings as defaults or restores the previous default values to the current stacked text.

AutoStack Button
Displays the AutoStack Properties dialog box. AutoStack only stacks numeric characters immediately before and after the carat, slash, and pound characters. To stack nonnumeric characters, or text that includes spaces, select the text and choose Stack from the text editor shortcut menu.

Stack Properties Dialog Box | 689

AutoStack Properties Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Sets the defaults for automatically stacking characters.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select stacked text in the text editor. Right-click and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box, click AutoStack.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Enable AutoStacking Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before and after the carat, slash, or pound character. For example, if you type 1#3 followed by a nonnumeric character or space, the text is automatically stacked as a diagonal fraction. Remove Leading Blank Removes blanks between a whole number and a fraction. Convert It to a Diagonal Fraction Converts the slash character to a diagonal fraction when AutoStack is on.

690 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Convert It to a Horizontal Fraction Converts the slash character to a horizontal fraction when AutoStack is on. NOTE Whether AutoStack is on or off, the pound character is always converted to a diagonal fraction, and the carat character is always converted to a tolerance format.

-MTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Creates a multiline text object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner. Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width/Columns].

Opposite Corner
As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object. Arrows within the rectangle indicate the direction of the paragraph's text flow.

Height
Specifies the text height to use for multiline text characters.

Specify Height.

The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is not .

Specify Paper Text Height.

The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is annotative. The default height, if nonzero, is the height of the current style; otherwise, it is the height stored in the TEXTSIZE on page 1521 system variable. Character

-MTEXT | 691

height is calculated in drawing units. Changing the height updates the value stored in TEXTSIZE on page 1521.

Justify
Determines both text justification and text flow, for new or selected text, in relation to the text boundary. The current justification is applied to new text. The text is justified within the specified rectangle based on the justification setting and one of nine justification points on the rectangle. The justification point is based on the first point used to specify the rectangle. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line. Text flow controls whether text is aligned from the middle, the top, or the bottom of the paragraph with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries. Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] <TL>. Justify Options Option
TL TC TR ML MC MR BL BC BR

Meaning
Top Left Top Center Top Right Middle Left Middle Center Middle Right Bottom Left Bottom Center Bottom Right

The following illustrations show each justification option.

692 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Line Spacing
Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom of the next line of text. NOTE Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table. Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not overlap. At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest character in the line. When At Least is selected, lines of text with taller characters have added space between lines. Distance Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units. Valid values must be between 0.0833 (0.25x) and 1.3333 (4x). Exactly Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text in the multiline text object. Spacing is based on the text height of the object or text style.

-MTEXT | 693

Spacing Factor Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You can enter a spacing factor as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. For example, specify single spacing by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering 2x.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary.

Specify rotation angle.

If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the rotation angle is determined by the angle between the X axis and the line defined by the most recently entered point (default 0,0,0) and the specified point. The previous prompt is redisplayed until you specify the opposite corner of the text boundary.

Style
Specifies the text style to use for multiline text. Style Name Specifies a text style name. Text styles can be defined and saved using the STYLE command. ?List Styles Lists text style names and characteristics. The previous prompt is redisplayed until you specify the opposite corner of the text boundary.

Width
Specifies the width of the text boundary. If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the width is calculated as the distance between the start point and the specified point. Words within each line of the multiline text object wrap to fit the width of the text boundary. If you specify a width of 0, word wrap is turned off and the width of the multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text. You can end a line of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing Enter. To end the command, press Enter at the MTEXT prompt.

Columns
Specifies the column options for an mtext object. Static Specifies the total column width, the number of columns, the gutter width (the space between the columns), and the height of columns.

694 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Dynamic Specifies column width, gutter width and column height. Dynamic columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affect text flow and text flow causes columns to be added or removed. No columns Sets no column mode to current mtext object. The default column setting is stored in the MTEXTCOLUMN system variable.

Symbols and Special Characters

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

You can enter the following special characters and symbols by entering a control code or a Unicode string. Or in the In-Place Text Editor on page 674, right-click and click Symbol on the shortcut menu. NOTE Symbols are not supported in vertical text. Unicode strings and control codes Control Codes
%%d %%p %%c

Unicode Strings Result

\U+00B0 \U+00B1 \U+2205 Diameter symbol ( ) Degree symbol () Tolerance symbol ()

To insert the following text symbols, click Symbol on the expanded Text Formatting toolbar or enter the appropriate Unicode string: Text symbols and Unicode strings Name
Almost equal

Symbol

Unicode String
\U+2248

Symbols and Special Characters | 695

Text symbols and Unicode strings Name

Angle

Symbol

Unicode String
\U+2220

Boundary line

\U+E100

Centerline

\U+2104

Delta

\U+0394

Electrical phase

\U+0278

Flow line

\U+E101

Identity Initial length

\U+2261 \U+E200

Monument line

\U+E102

Not equal

\U+2260

Ohm

\U+2126

Omega

\U+03A9

Plate/property line

\U+214A

696 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Text symbols and Unicode strings Name

Subscript 2

Symbol

Unicode String
\U+2082

Squared Cubed

\U+00B2 \U+00B3

These text symbols are available in the following True Type (TTF) and SHX fonts:

Simplex* Romans* gdt* amgdt* Isocp Isocp2 Isocp3 Isoct Isoct2 Isoct3 Isocpeur (TTF only)* Isocpeur italic (TTF only) Isocteur (TTF only) Isocteur italic (TTF only)

* These fonts also include the Initial Length symbol used for arc length dimensions.

Symbols and Special Characters | 697

MULTIPLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Enter Commands on the Command Line

Repeats the next command until canceled.

Summary
The command that you enter is repeated until you press Esc. Because MULTIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be specified each time. MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes. NOTE You cannot use MULTIPLE as an argument to the AutoLISP command function.

MVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Layout Viewports

Creates and controls layout viewports.

Access Methods
Menu: View Viewports 1 Viewport, 2 Viewports, 3 Viewports, 4 Viewports

Summary
In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64 viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP). Objects in model space

698 | Chapter 13 M Commands

are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active are blank. Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify corner of viewportor [ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/Restore/LAyer/2/3/4].

Corner of Viewport
Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport.

On
Makes a selected viewport active. An active viewport displays objects in model space. The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time. If your drawing contains more viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP, you must turn one off to make another one active.

Off
Makes a selected viewport inactive. Objects in model space are not displayed in an inactive viewport.

Fit
Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the printable area. When the paper background and printable area are turned off, the viewport fills the display.

Shadeplot
Specifies how viewports in named (paper space) layouts are plotted. As Displayed Specifies that a viewport is plotted the same way it is displayed. Wireframe Specifies that a viewport is plotted wireframe regardless of the current display. Hidden Specifies that a viewport is plotted with hidden lines removed regardless of the current display.

MVIEW | 699

All Visual Styles Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified visual style. All Render Presets Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified render preset.

Lock
Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed when working in model space.

Object
Specifies a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle to convert into a viewport. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can contain an arc as well as line segments.

Polygonal
Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points. Arc Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport. For a description of the options for creating arc segments, see the Arc option in PLINE. Close Closes the boundary. If you press Enter after specifying at least three points, the boundary is closed automatically. Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn tangent to that arc segment. Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to the polygonal viewport.

Restore
Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS command.

Enter Viewport Configuration Name. ?

First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; the viewports are fit into the selected area. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

700 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Layer
Resets layer property overrides for the selected viewport to their global layer properties.

Reset Viewport Layer Property Overrides Back To Global Properties. Enter Y to remove all layer property overrides. Select Viewports.

2
Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of equal size.

Enter Viewport Arrangement.

First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; the viewports are fit into the selected area. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

3
Divides the specified area into three viewports. The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. The other options split the area into three viewports: one large viewport and two smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed.

First Corner on page 701

MVIEW | 701

Fit on page 701

4
Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of equal size.

First Corner on page 701 Fit on page 701

MVSETUP
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Layout Viewports

Sets up the specifications of a drawing.

Summary
When you enter mvsetup, the prompts displayed depend on whether you are on the Model layout (model space) or on a named layout (paper space).

702 | Chapter 13 M Commands

MVSETUP on the Model Layout

Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Layout Viewports

The Model layout is most useful for plotting multiple views of a drawing within a single border. On the Model layout, you set the units type, drawing scale factor, and paper size at the Command prompt using MVSETUP. Using the settings you provide, a rectangular border is drawn at the grid limits.

List of Prompts
When the TILEMODE system variable is on (the default), the following prompt are displayed: Enable paper space? [No/Yes] <Y>: Enter n or press Enter Pressing Enter turns off TILEMODE and proceeds as described in the following section, MVSETUP on a Named Layout Entering n displays the following prompt: Enter units type [Scientific/Decimal/Engineering/Architectural/Metric]: Enter an option A list of available units and prompts for the scale factor and paper size are displayed. Enter the scale factor: Enter a value Enter the paper width: Enter a value Enter the paper height: Enter a value A bounding box is drawn and the command ends.

MVSETUP on the Model Layout | 703

MVSETUP on a Named Layout

Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Layout Viewports

On a named layout, you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into the drawing and create a set of layout viewports within the title block. You can specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block in the layout and the drawing on the Model layout. To easily specify all layout page settings and prepare your drawing for plotting, you can also use the Page Setup Manager.

List of Prompts
When the TILEMODE system variable is off, or when you enter y or press Enter at the Enable Paper Space prompt, the following prompts are displayed: Enter an option [Align on page 704/Create on page 705/Scale viewports on page 706/Options on page 706/Title block on page 706/Undo on page 706]: Enter an option or press Enter to end the command

Align
Pans the view in a viewport so that it aligns with a base point in another viewport. The current viewport is the viewport that the other point moves to. Angled Pans the view in a viewport in a specified direction. The next two prompts specify the distance and angle from the base point to the second point. Horizontal Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns horizontally with a base point in another viewport. This option should be used only if the two viewports are oriented horizontally. Otherwise, the view might be panned outside the limits of the viewport. Vertical Alignment Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns vertically with a base point in another viewport. This option should be used only if the two viewports are oriented vertically. Otherwise, the view might be panned outside the limits of the viewport. Rotate View Rotates the view in a viewport about a base point. Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

704 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Create
Creates viewports.

Delete Objects
Deletes existing viewports.

Create Viewports
Displays options for creating viewports. Layout Number to Load Controls creation of viewports. Entering 0 or pressing Enter creates no viewports. Entering 1 creates a single viewport whose size is determined by the following prompts. Entering 2 creates four viewports by dividing a specified area into quadrants. You are prompted for the area to be divided and the distance between the viewports. The viewing angle for each quadrant is set as shown in the table. Standard engineering viewports Quadrant
Upper-left Upper-right Lower-left Lower-right

View
Top (XY plane of UCS) SE isometric view Front (XZ plane of UCS) Right side (YZ plane of UCS)

Entering 3 defines a matrix of viewports along the X and Y axes. Specifying points at the next two prompts defines the rectangular area of the drawing that contains the viewport configuration. If you have inserted a title block, the Specify First Corner prompt also includes an option for selecting a default area. If you enter more than one viewport in each direction, the following prompts are displayed: Specify distance between viewports in X direction <0.0>: Specify a distance Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0.0>: Specify a distance The array of viewports is inserted into the defined area. Redisplay Redisplays the list of viewport layout options.

MVSETUP on a Named Layout | 705

Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

Scale Viewports
Adjusts the zoom scale factor of the objects displayed in the viewports. The zoom scale factor is a ratio between the scale of the border in paper space and the scale of the drawing objects displayed in the viewports. Interactively Selects one viewport at a time and displays the following prompts for each: For example, for an engineering drawing at a scale of 1:4, or quarter scale, enter 1 for paper space units and 4 for model space units. Uniform Sets the same scale factor for all viewports.

Options
Sets the MVSETUP preferences before you change your drawing. Layer Specifies a layer on which to insert the title block. Limits Specifies whether to reset the grid limits to the drawing extents after a title block has been inserted. Units Specifies whether the sizes and point locations are translated to inch or millimeter paper units. Xref Specifies whether the title block is inserted or externally referenced.

Title Block
Prepares paper space, orients the drawing by setting the origin, and creates a drawing border and a title block.

Delete Objects
Deletes objects from paper space.

Origin
Relocates the origin point for this sheet.

Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

Insert
Displays title block options. Title Block to Load Inserts a border and a title block. Entering 0 or pressing Enter inserts no border. Entering 1 through 13 creates a standard border of the appropriate size. The list includes ANSI and DIN/ISO standard sheets.

706 | Chapter 13 M Commands

Add Adds title block options to the list. Selecting this option prompts you to enter the title block description to be displayed in the list and the name of a drawing to insert. A line similar to the following example is added after the last entry in the mvsetup.dfs default file:
A/E (24 x 18in),arch-b.dwg,(1.12 0.99 0.00),(18.63 17.02 0.00),in

The last field of the line specifies whether the title block has been created in inches or in millimeters. The units field allows title blocks created in either unit system to be changed by setting the unit type using the Options option. You can also add title blocks that have variable attributes. Delete Removes entries from the list. Redisplay Redisplays the list of title block options.

Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

MVSETUP on a Named Layout | 707

708

N Commands

NAVVCUBE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use ViewCube

Indicates the current viewing direction. Dragging or clicking the ViewCube tool rotates the scene.

Access Methods
Menu: View Display ViewCube On

Toolbar: Status bar ViewCube

Summary
Click the ViewCube tool to rotate and fill the window with the entire model or an object selected in the view. The Home button displayed near the ViewCube tool rotates the model to a three-fourths view or a user-defined view while performing a fit-to-view. Use the ViewCube menu to define the Home view for the model.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

709

Enter an option [ON/OFF/Settings] <ON>: On Displays the ViewCube tool. Off Turns off the display of the ViewCube tool. Settings Displays the ViewCube Settings dialog box on page 710, in which you can control the appearance and location of the ViewCube.

ViewCube Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use ViewCube

Controls the display properties of the ViewCube tool.

710 | Chapter 14 N Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Display
Location Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed. (NAVVCUBELOCATION system variable) Size Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool. (NAVVCUBESIZE system variable) Select Automatic to have the size of the ViewCube tool adjust based on the current size of the active viewport, zoom factor of the active layout, or drawing window. Inactive Opacity Controls the opacity of the ViewCube tool when inactive. (NAVVCUBEOPACITY system variable)

When Dragging
Snap to Closest View Specifies if the current view is adjusted to the closest preset view when changing the view by dragging the ViewCube tool.

When Clicking
Zoom to Extents Specifies if the model is forced to fit the current viewport after a view change. Orient ViewCube to Current UCS Controls whether the ViewCube tool reflects the current UCS or WCS. (NAVVCUBEORIENT system variable) Animate When Switching Views Controls the use of smooth view transitions when switching between views.

Show
Compass Controls whether the compass is displayed below the ViewCube tool. The North direction indicated on the compass is the value defined by the NORTHDIRECTION system variable.

ViewCube Settings Dialog Box | 711

Keep
Scene Upright Specifies whether the viewpoint of the model can be turned upside-down.

Restore Defaults
Applies the default settings for the ViewCube tool.

NEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Starting a New Drawing

Creates a new drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: File New

Summary
If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt is displayed.

NEW Command Prompt

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Starting a New Drawing

Summary
Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).

712 | Chapter 14 N Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter template file name or [. (for none)] <current>: Enter a name, enter a period (.), or press ENTER

NEW Command Prompt | 713

714

O Commands

OBJECTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Annotation Scale

Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify Annotative Object Scale Add/Delete Scales Toolbar: Annotation tool set Annotation Scaing tool group Add/Delete Scales Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object. Right-click in the drawing area and click Annotative Object Scale Add/Delete Scales. Command entry: 'objectscale for transparent use

715

Summary
An annotative object can support several annotation scales for views at different scales. You can add or delete scales from the list of scales assigned to the selected annotative objects. If you enter objectscale, you are prompted to select annotative objects. The Annotation Object Scale List dialog box on page 716 is displayed. If you enter -objectscale at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 718.

Annotation Object Scale List Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Adds or deletes supported scales for the selected object.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

716 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Object Scale List Displays the list of scales supported by the selected object. List all scales for selected objects Specifies that all scales supported by the selected objects are displayed in the Object Scale List. List scales common to all selected objects only Specifies that only the supported scales that are common to all selected objects are displayed in the Object Scale List. Add (+) Displays the Add Scales to Object Dialog Box on page 717. Delete (-) Removes the selected scale from the scale list. NOTE The current scale or scales referenced by objects or views cannot be deleted.

Add Scales to Object Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Adds a new scale to the selected object.

Add Scales to Object Dialog Box | 717

List of Options
The following option is displayed. Scale List Displays the list of scales that can be added to the selected annotative object. Multiple scales can be selected by holding down the Shift or Command key while selecting the scales. Use the SCALELISTEDIT on page 913 command to add custom scales to this list.

-OBJECTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

718 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Select annotative objects: Use an object selection method Enter an option [Add on page 719/Delete on page 719/? on page 719] <Add>: Enter a or d or press Enter

Add
Adds an annotation scale to the selected objects. When created, an annotative object supports one annotation scale: the current annotation scale. However, an annotative object can be updated to support additional annotation scales for views at different scales.

Enter named scale to add. ? on page 719

? Displays the list of scales in the scale list.

Delete
Removes a specified current annotation scale from the selected objects. If an annotative object supports a single scale, that scale cannot be deleted from the object.

Enter named scale to delete. ? on page 719

? Displays the union of all scales of the selected objects.

OFFSET
Quick Reference
See also:

Offset an Object

Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.

OFFSET | 719

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Copy tool group Offset Menu: Modify Offset

Summary
You can offset an object at a specified distance or through a point. After you offset objects, you can trim and extend them as an efficient method to create drawings containing many parallel lines and curves.

The OFFSET command repeats for convenience. To exit the command, press Enter.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Erase source = current Layer = current OFFSETGAPTYPE = current Specify Offset Distance on page 720or [Through on page 721/Erase on page 721/Layer on page 721] <current>: Specify a distance, enter an option, or press Enter

Offset Distance
Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object.

720 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Exit Exits the OFFSET command. Multiple Enters the Multiple offset mode, which repeats the offset operation using the current offset distance. Undo Reverses the previous offset.

Through
Creates an object passing through a specified point. NOTE For best results when you offset a polyline with corners, specify the through point near the midpoint of a line segment, not near a corner.

Exit on page 721 Multiple on page 721 Undo on page 721

Erase
Erases the source object after it is offset.

Layer
Determines whether offset objects are created on the current layer or on the layer of the source object.

OFFSET | 721

OOPS
Quick Reference
See also:

Erase Objects

Restores erased objects.

Summary
OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE command.

You can also use OOPS after BLOCK or WBLOCK because these commands can erase the selected objects after creating a block. You cannot use OOPS to restore objects on a layer that has been removed with the PURGE command.

OPEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Open a Drawing

Opens an existing drawing file.

Access Methods
Menu: File Open

722 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Summary
The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a Command prompt.

Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

Several commands display standard file selection dialog boxes, in which you can navigate through the files and folders on a local and network drive. While each dialog box may vary slightly, the following is a list of common options.

Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes | 723

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Task Pane
Provides quick access to categories that represent locations files might be stored in; devices, shared and predefined places, and media. You can reorder the items under a category by dragging them to a new position. To add a new item to Places, drag a folder from the list. Changes to Places affect all standard file selection dialog boxes.

Devices
Lists the local storage devices attached to your computer.

Shared
Lists the network location paths added to your computer.

724 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Places
Lists a number of predefined, user added, or Smart folders that are dependent on your user profile. Documents Displays the contents of the Documents folder for the current user profile. Desktop Displays the contents of your desktop.

Search For
Lists the files that you most recently searched for.

Media
Lists folders related to media located on your computer, such as photos or movies.

Back
Returns to the previous file location.

Forward
Returns you to the file location before Back was clicked.

Views
Controls the appearance of the icons for the files and folders in the current place, specifies whether to show a preview image when a file is selected. Icon Displays each file or folder as an icon. The icons used are determined by the operating system, or a thumbnail preview of the contents of a file might be used. List Displays a list of the files and folders. Folders can be expanded to show the hierarchy of the files or folders they contain. Column Displays a multi-column list with each column representing a folder in the hierarchy of the contents on your computer. When a file is selected, a preview and details of the file are displayed in the next available column.

Where
Displays the current folder or drive. Click the dropdown arrow to view the hierarchy of the folder path and to navigate up to a previous folder, drive or recent place. To control whether the last used paths in each particular standard file selection dialog box are stored across sessions, use the REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable.

Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes | 725

Search
Allows you to search for a file or folder located on the computer using Spotlight. Search results can be saved as Smart folders under Places in the Task Pane.

Files List
Displays the files and folders in the current place. Use the Views buttons to control navigation behavior, and how files and folders are listed.

File Format
When you are opening or saving files, File Format specifies the format of the files you can select for open or in which the file is saved.

Read Only
WIndicates if the file should be opened as read-only. You cannot save changes to the file using the original file name.

Open/Save
Depending on the purpose of the specific file selection dialog box, opens or saves the selected file or enters the path of the selected folder in the previous dialog box..

New Folder
Creates a new folder in the current place using a name that you specify.

OPEN Command Prompt

Quick Reference
See also:

Open a Drawing

Opens an existing drawing file.

Access Methods
Menu: File Open WhenFILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays the following Command prompt.

726 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Enter name of drawing to open: Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box.

OPTIONS
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Customizes the program settings.

Access Methods
Menu: AutoCAD for Mac Preferences Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area. Click Preferences.

Summary
The Application Preferences dialog box is displayed.

Application Preferences Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Customizes the program settings.

List of Tabs
The Application Preferences dialog box includes the following tabs:

General on page 728

OPTIONS | 727

Cursor & Selection on page 730 Units & Guides on page 732 Look & Feel on page 734 Application on page 736 Document Settings on page 741

General Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box)

See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls the behavior of program features.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Mouse & Trackpad Customization

Controls the behavior of the mouse or trackpad. Enable Quick Secondary Click as Return Key Controls right-click behavior. A quick click is the same as pressing Enter. A longer click displays a shortcut menu. You can set the duration of the longer click in milliseconds. (DBLCLKEDIT on page 1222 system variable)

728 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Reverse Zoom Direction Toggles the direction of transparent zoom operations when you scroll the middle mouse wheel. (ZOOMWHEEL on page 1595 system variable)

Spacebar Customization
Controls the behavior of the spacebar when pressed or held. Enable Spacebar Hold to Pan Toggles if you can hold down the Spacebar to enable panning. (SPACEPAN on page 1496 system variable)

File Save Precautions

Assists in avoiding data loss. Automatic Save Saves your drawing automatically at the intervals you specify. You can specify the location of all Autosave files by using the SAVEFILEPATH system variable.SAVEFILE (read-only) stores the name of the Autosave file. NOTE Automatic save is disabled when the Block Editor on page 127 is open. Minutes Between Saves: When Automatic Save is on, specifies how often the drawing is saved. (SAVETIME system variable)

Zoom Adjustment
Controls thezoom behavior of the input device. Zoom Speed Controls how much the magnification changes when the mouse wheel is rolled forward or backward, or you single swipe on Magic Mouse or a trackpad. (ZOOMFACTOR system variable)

Layout Elements
Controls the tasks that the program performs when a new layout is created. Create Viewports in New Layouts Creates a single viewport automatically when you create a new layout. (LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT on page 1387 system variable) Show Page Setup Manager Displays the Page Setup Manager on page 748 the first time you click a named (paper space) layout. Use this dialog box to set options related to paper and print settings. (SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS on page 1485 system variable)

Application Preferences Dialog Box | 729

Cursor & Selection Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box)

See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls the appearance and behavior of the cursor and selection.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Selection Modes
Controls the selection of objects in the drawing area. Use Shift Key to Add to Selection Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. To clear a selection set quickly, draw a selection window in a blank area of the drawing. (PICKADD system variable) Click and Drag to Start Selection Controls the method of drawing a selection window. If this option is cleared, you can draw a selection window by selecting two separate points with the pointing device. (PICKDRAG system variable)

Selection Tool
Controls the appearance of the cursor in the drawing area. Preview Shows a representation of how the crosshair, ObjectSnap aperture, and pickbox will appear in the drawing area.

730 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Crosshair Color Controls the color of the crosshair, ObjectSnap aperture, and pickbox in the drawing area. Automatic is the default color. When set to Automatic, the actual color applied changes between white and black based on the background color of the drawing area. Crosshair Lines Length Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. Valid settings range from 1 to 100 percent. When set to 100, the crosshairs are full-screen and the ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When less than 100, the ends of the crosshairs may be visible when the cursor is moved to one edge of the screen. (CURSORSIZE system variable) ObjectSnap Aperture Size Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. Aperture size determines how close to a snap point you can be before the magnet locks the aperture box to the snap point. Values range from 1 to 50 pixels. (APERTURE system variable) Pickbox Size Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. (PICKBOX on page 1441 system variable)

Autosnap Marker
Controls the appearance of the Autosnap Marker. Marker Size Sets the display size for the AutoSnap marker.

Grips
Grips are small squares displayed on an object after it has been selected. Enable Grips Controls the display of grips on selected objects. You can edit an object with grips by selecting a grip and using the shortcut menu. Displaying grips in a drawing significantly affects performance. Clear this option to optimize performance. (GRIPS system variable) Enable Grips with Blocks Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. (GRIPBLOCK system variable)

Application Preferences Dialog Box | 731

Enable Grips Tips Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. This option has no effect on standard objects. (GRIPTIPS system variable) Limit Grip Display To N Selected Objects Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. The valid range is 1 to 32,767. The default setting is 100. (GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable) Grip Size Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. (GRIPSIZE system variable)

3D Modeling Dynamic Input

Controls dynamic input in 3D. Show Z Field for Pointer Input Displays a field for the Z coordinate when using dynamic input.

Units & Guides Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box)

See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls the units used when inserting blocks or referencing objects, and which drafting guides are enabled.

732 | Chapter 15 O Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Insertion Scale
Controls the default scale for inserting blocks and drawings into a drawing. Source Content Units Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. If Unspecified-Unitless is selected, the object is not scaled when inserted. (INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system variable) Target Drawing Units Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. (INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable)

Coordinate Display
Controls the display of the coordinates display. Display Coordinates on Drawing Toggles the coordinates display in the lower-right corner of the drawing area. (VPCOORDDISPLAY on page 1553 system variable)

3D Objects
Controls the number of isolines to display for surfaces and meshes. U Size Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U isolines density on surface objects. (SURFU system variable) V Size Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the V isolines density on surface objects. (SURFV system variable)

AutoTrack Settings

Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack behavior, which is available when polar tracking or object snap tracking is turned on (see DSETTINGS). Display Polar Tracking Vector Displays a vector along specified angles when polar tracking is on. With polar tracking, you can draw lines along angles. Polar angles are 90-degree divisors, such as 45, 30, and 15 degrees. (TRACKPATH system variable = 2) In a 3D view, a polar tracking vector parallel to the Z axis of the UCS is also displayed, and the tooltip displays +Z or -Z for the angle depending on the direction along the Z axis. Display Full-screen Tracking Vector Tracking vectors are construction lines from which you can draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to other objects. If this option is selected, alignment vectors are displayed as infinite lines. (TRACKPATH system variable = 1)

Application Preferences Dialog Box | 733

Display AutoTrack Tooltip Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. (AUTOSNAP system variable)

Drawing Scale
Defines the default scales used by the program. Default Scales List Displays the Default Scale List dialog box. Use this dialog box to manage the default list of scales displayed in several dialog boxes associated with layout viewports and printing. You can delete all custom scales and restore the default list of scales.

Fields
Sets preferences related to fields. Display Background of Fields Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. When this option is cleared, fields are displayed with the same background as any text. (FIELDDISPLAY system variable)

Look & Feel Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box)

See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls the appearance of the program user interface.

734 | Chapter 15 O Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Interface Theme
Defines the color scheme for the user interface. Themes Controls which theme to apply to elements such as the status bar, palettes, and the drawing windows. You can choose from a Dark or Light theme.

Tooltip Appearance
Controls the appearance of drafting tooltips. Size Specifies a size for tooltips. The default size is 0. Use the slider to make tooltips larger or smaller. Transparency Controls the transparency of tooltips. The lower the setting, the less transparent the tooltip. A value of 0 sets the tooltip to opaque.

Interface Overrides
Overrides used to fine tune the colors applied to the background of the drawing area. Model Space Specifies the background color of the drawing area when the Model layout is active. Choose a color or Select Color to specify one of the non-standard colors. Paper Space Specifies the background color of the drawing area when a named (paper space) layout is active. Block Editor Specifies the background color of the drawing area when the Block Editor environment is active.

Navigation Controls
Controls the display of the ViewCube and the UCS icon. Display UCS Icon in Controls when the UCS icon should be displayed in a viewport.

2D Model Space - Display UCS icon when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current. 3D Model Space - Display UCS icon when a 3D visual style is current.

Display ViewCube in Controls when the ViewCube tool should be displayed in a viewport.

2D Model Space - Display the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current.

Application Preferences Dialog Box | 735

3D Model Space - Display the ViewCube tool when a 3D visual style is current.

ViewCube Settings
Displays the ViewCube Settings dialog box on page 710.

Fade Controls
Controls the fading intensity value for annotative objects and xrefs. Annotative Objects Specifies the fading intensity value for objects during in-place reference editing. Objects that are not being edited are displayed at a lesser intensity. (XFADECTL system variable) With in-place reference editing, you can edit a block reference or external reference from within the current drawing. The valid range is 0 through 90 percent. Xrefs Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects. (XDWGFADECTL on page 1592 system variable) This option only affects the display on the screen. It does not affect plotting or plot preview.

Application Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box)

See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Lists the folders in which the program searches for support, driver, menu, and other files. Also lists optional, user-defined settings such as which dictionary to use for checking spelling.

736 | Chapter 15 O Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Support File Search Path

Specifies the folders in which the program should look for text fonts, customization files, plug-ins, drawings to insert, linetypes, and hatch patterns that are not in the current folder.

Working Support File Search Path

Displays the active directories that the program searches for support files specific to your system. The list is read-only and displays valid paths from the Support Files Search Path that exist within the current directory structure and network mappings.

Device Driver File Search Path

Specifies the search path for device drivers for the video display, pointing devices, printers, and plotters. WARNING Do NOT remove DRV path and always add paths as secondary paths.

Project Files Search Path

Specifies a project name for the drawing. The project name corresponds to a search path for external reference (xref) files associated with the project. You can create any number of project names with associated folders, but each drawing can have only one project name.

Customization Files
Specifies the names and locations of various types of files.

Application Preferences Dialog Box | 737

Main Customization File Specifies the default location of the main customization file (acad.cui). Custom Icon Location Specifies the location for custom icons referenced by your customization files. Command Aliases Specifies the location of the PGP file that should be loaded when AutoCAD for Mac is started.

Help and Miscellaneous File Names

Specifies the names and locations of various types of files. Help File Specifies the location of the local Help file. (HELPPREFIX on page 1350 system variable) Default Internet Location Specifies the default Internet location used by the BROWSER command. Configuration File Specifies the location of the configuration file used to store hardware device driver information.

Text Editor, Dictionary, and Font File Names

Specifies a number of optional settings. Alternate Font File Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. (FONTALT system variable) If you click Browse, the Alternate Font dialog box is displayed, from which you can choose an available font. Font Mapping File Specifies the font mapping file to be used. (FONTMAP system variable)

Print File, Spooler, and Prolog Section Names

Specifies settings related to plotting. Plot File Name for Legacy Plotting Scripts Specifies a default name for the temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created with AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier. The default name is the drawing name plus the .plt file extension. The default name used with AutoCAD 2000 and later drawings is the drawing name-layout name plus the .plt file name extension. Some plotting device drivers, however, use a different plot file extension. Print Spool Executable Specifies the application to use for print spooling. You can enter the executable file name as well as any command line arguments you want to use. For example, you can enter myspool.bat %s to spool print files to myspool.bat and have a unique print file name automatically generated.

738 | Chapter 15 O Commands

PostScript Prolog Section Name Present for legacy reasons only. Autodesk has dropped active support of PostScript and the PSIN, PSOUT, and PSPROLOG commands.

Printer Support File Path

Specifies search path settings for printer support files. Print Spooler File Location Specifies the path for print spool files. Printer Configuration Search Path Specifies the path for printer configuration files. Printer Description File Search Path Specifies the path for files with a .pmp file extension, or printer description files. Plot Style Table Search Path Specifies the path for files with an .stb or .ctb extension, or plot style table files (both named plot style tables and color-dependent plot style tables).

Automatic Save File Location

Specifies the path for the file created when you select Automatically Save on the General tab. (SAVEFILEPATH system variable)

Color Book Locations

Specifies the path for color book files that can be used when specifying colors in the Color Palette dialog box on page 188. You can define multiple folders for each path specified. This option is saved with the user profile.

Template Settings
Specifies the drawing template settings. Drawing Template File Location Specifies the path to locate drawing template files used by the Select Template dialog box. Default Template File Name for QNEW Specifies the drawing template file used by the QNEW command.

Log File Location

Specifies the path for the log file created when you select Maintain a Log File on the Open and Save tab. (LOGFILEPATH system variable)

Plot and Publish Log File Location

Specifies the path for the log file that is created when you use the PLOT on page 793 command.

Application Preferences Dialog Box | 739

Temporary Drawing File Location

Specifies the location to store temporary files. This program creates temporary files and then deletes them when you exit the program. If you plan to run the program from a write-protected folder (for example, if you are working on a network or opening files from a CD), specify an alternate location for your temporary files. The folder you specify must not be write-protected. A character limit of 255 for the combined file name and path length of temporary files is used. The TEMPPREFIX system variable (read-only) stores the current location of temporary drawing files.

Temporary External Reference File Location

Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-loaded xref files. (XLOADPATH system variable)

Texture Maps Search Path

Specifies the folders to search for rendering texture maps.

Web File Search Path

Specifies the folders to search for photometric web files.

Add
Adds a search path for the selected folder.

Remove
Removes the selected search path or file.

Options
Edits or changes the order of a selected path. Change Path Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box, depending on what you selected in the Files list. Move Item Up Moves the selected search path above the preceding search path. Move Item Down Moves the selected search path below the following search path. Set as Current Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current.

Reset Hidden Messages

Resets the display of all message boxes that you marked to not display again or to always use a specified option in them.

Reset Application Options

Displays the Reset Application Options dialog box. Click Reset & Restart AutoCAD for Mac to restore the program defaults.

740 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Document Settings Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box)

See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Controls the display settings for a drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

2D Display Resolution
Controls the display of 2D objects. Polyline Curve Segments Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. (SPLINESEGS system variable) Arc & Circle Smoothness Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. (VIEWRES command)

3D Display Resolution
Controls the display of 3D objects. Contour Lines per Surface Specifies the number of contour lines per surface on objects. (ISOLINES system variable)

Application Preferences Dialog Box | 741

Smoothness for 3D Printing and Rendering Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed. (FACETRES system variable)

Select Alternate Font Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Application Fonts

Specifies the location of the font file to use if the original font cannot be located and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Application Preferences dialog box, Application tab

Summary
You can also set the location of Alternate Font File by using the FONTALT system variable. If you do not specify an alternate font, when you open a drawing containing fonts that cannot be located, a dialog box is displayed in which you specify a font to use for each missing font.

742 | Chapter 15 O Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Font Name Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all SHX fonts in the Fonts folder. Font Style Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. If the missing font is a Big Font, this option changes to Big Font and lists all available Asian-language Big Font files.

Default Scale List Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Controls the default list of scales stored in the registry.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Application Preferences dialog box, Units & Guides tab

Summary
When the scale list in a drawing is reset, the list is restored to the default list of scales defined in the Default Scale List dialog box.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Scale List
Metric Displays the default list of metric scales. Imperial Displays the default list of imperial scales. If a scale name is duplicated, but has a different value, a number is appended to the name.

Default Scale List Dialog Box | 743

Add
Creates a new scale in the scale list. Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited.

Delete
Removes the selected scale from the scale list.

Options
Manages items in the scale list. Edit Edits the selected scale in-place in the scale list. Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited. Reset Deletes all custom scales and restores the default list of scales defined in AutoCAD for Mac.

ORTHO
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode)

Constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical direction.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Drafting Settings

Toolbar: Status bar Ortho Command entry: 'ortho for transparent use

Summary
In the illustration, a line is drawn using Ortho mode. Point 1 is the first point specified, and point 2 is the position of the cursor when the second point is specified.

744 | Chapter 15 O Commands

Ortho mode is used when you specify an angle or distance by means of two points using a pointing device. In Ortho mode, cursor movement is constrained to the horizontal or vertical direction relative to the UCS. Horizontal is defined as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and vertical as being parallel to the Y axis. In a 3D view, ORTHO is additionally defined as being parallel to the Z axis of the UCS, and the tooltip displays +Z or -Z for the angle depending on the direction along the Z axis.

OSNAP
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Object Snaps

Sets running object snap modes.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Drafting Settings

Toolbar: Status bar Osnap Shortcut menu: Press Shift while right-clicking in the drawing area and choose Osnap Settings. Command entry: 'osnap for transparent use

Summary
The Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed. If you enter -osnap at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed.

OSNAP | 745

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current osnap modes: current Enter list of object snap modes on page 746: Enter names of object snap modes separated with commas, or enter none or off

Object Snap Modes

Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first three characters of the name. If you enter more than one name, separate the names with commas.
ENDpoint MIDpoint INTersection EXTension APParent Intersection CENter NODe QUAdrant INSertion PERpendicular TANgent NEArest PARallel

For a description of each of these object snap modes, see the Object Snaps tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box. QUIck Snaps to the first snap point found. Quick must be used in conjunction with other object snap modes. NONe Turns off object snap modes.

746 | Chapter 15 O Commands

P Commands

PAGESETUP
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Page Setup Settings

Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout.

Access Methods
Menu: File Page Setup Manager Toolbar: Status bar Quick View. In the Quick View dialog box, right-click a layout and click Page Setup.

Summary
The Page Setup Manager is displayed. A page setup is a collection of plot device and other settings that determine the appearance and format of your final output. These settings are stored in the drawing file and can be modified and applied to other layouts.

747

Page Setup Manager

Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Page Setup Settings

Specifies the page setup for the current layout.

Summary
You can also create named page setups, modify existing ones, or import page setups from other drawings.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

748 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Current Layout
Lists the current layout to which the page setup will be applied.

Page Setups
Displays the current page setup, sets a different page setup as current, creates a new page setup, modifies an existing page setup, and imports page setups from other drawings. Page Setup List Lists the page setups that are available to apply to the current layout. The list includes the named page setups and layouts that are available in the drawing. Layouts that have a named page setup applied to them are enclosed in asterisks, with the named page setup in parentheses; for example, *Layout 1 (System Scale-to-fit)*. The current page setup is selected by default. You can double-click a page setup in this list to set it as the current page setup for the current layout. Create a New Page Setup (+) Displays the New Page Setup dialog box, in which you can enter a name for the new page setup and specify the page setup to use as a starting point. Delete the Selected Page Setup (-) Removes the selected page setup. A page setup assigned to a layout cannot be removed. Import Displays the Select Page Setup From File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select a drawing format (DWG), DWT, or drawing interchange format (DXF) file from which to import one or more page setups. If you select DWT as the file type, the Template folder opens automatically in the Select Page Setup From File dialog box. When you click Open, the Import Page Setups dialog box is displayed.

Settings
Allows you to manage and import page setups. Edit Displays the Page Setup dialog box, in which you can modify the settings for the selected page setup. Set Current Sets the selected page setup as the current page setup for the current layout. You cannot set the current layout as the current page setup. Import

Page Setup Manager | 749

Displays the Select Page Setup From File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select a drawing format (DWG), DWT, or drawing interchange format (DXF) file from which to import one or more page setups. If you select DWT as the file type, the Template folder opens automatically in the Select Page Setup From File dialog box. When you click Open, the Import Page Setups dialog box is displayed.

Details
Displays information about the selected page setup. Device Name Displays the name of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Printer Displays the type of output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Page Size Displays the paper size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup.

New Page Setup Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Page Setup Settings

Specifies a name for the new page setup, as well as the page setup to use as a starting point.

750 | Chapter 16 P Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

New Page Setup Name

Specifies the name for the new page setup.

Start With
Specifies a page setup to use as a starting point for the new page setup. When you click OK, the Page Setup dialog box is displayed with the settings of the selected page setup, which you can modify as necessary. <Default Output Device> Specifies that the default output device is set as the printer in the new page setup.

Page Setup Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Page Setup Settings

Specifies page layout and plotting device settings.

Page Setup Dialog Box | 751

Summary
The Page Setup dialog box is displayed in the following cases:

When you create a new page setup through the Page Setup Manager When you modify an existing page setup through the Page Setup Manager When you modify an existing page setup through the Print dialog box

The page setup settings that you specify are stored with the layout and can be applied to other layouts or imported into other drawings.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

752 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Page Setup
Name Displays the name of the current page setup.

Printer/Plotter
Specifies a configured output device to use when printing layouts. Printer Lists the available system printers from which you can select to print the current layout. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup.

Paper Size
Displays standard paper sizes that are available for the selected plotting device. If the selected plotter does not support the layout's selected paper size, a warning is displayed, and you can select the plotter's default paper size or a custom paper size.

What to Print
Specifies the area of the drawing to be plotted. Layout/Limits When plotting a layout, plots everything within the printable area of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the layout. When plotting from the Model layout, plots the entire drawing area that is defined by the grid limits. If the current viewport does not display a plan view, this option has the same effect as the Extents option. Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects. All geometry in the current layout is plotted. The drawing may be regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting. Display Plots the view in the current viewport in the current layout. View Plots a view that was previously saved with the VIEW command. Window Plots any portion of the drawing that you specify. When you specify the two corners of the area to plot, the Window button becomes available.

Page Setup Dialog Box | 753

Click the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted, or enter coordinate values.

Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support landscape or portrait orientation. Portrait Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page. NOTE The orientation of plots is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system variable. Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units. NOTE If the Layout option is specified in What to Print, the layout is plotted at 1:1 regardless of the setting specified in Scale. Fit to Paper Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size and displays the custom scale factor in the Scale, Inch =, and Units boxes. Scale Defines the exact scale for the output. Custom defines a user-defined scale. You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches (or millimeters) equal to the number of drawing units. NOTE You can modify the list of scales with SCALELISTEDIT. Inch(es) =/mm = Specifies the number of inches or millimeters equal to the specified number of units. Inch/mm Specifies inches or mm for display of units. The default is based on the paper size and changes each time a new paper size is selected. Unit

754 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Specifies the number of units equal to the specified number of inches or millimeters. Scale Lineweights Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of output objects and are output with the linewidth size regardless of the scale.

Advacned
Displays the Page Setup - Advanced dialog box on page 757 which allows you to edit additional output options.

Import Page Setups Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Page Setup Settings

Displays the page setups in the selected drawing that are available to import.

Import Page Setups Dialog Box | 755

Summary List of Options

The following options are displayed.

Source Drawing
Displays the source drawing that contains the listed page setups that are available to import.

Page Setups
Lists the page setups that are available to import and their location in the source drawing. Selected page setups are imported into the current drawing when you click OK. Name Specifies the name of the page setup available to import. Location Specifies the location (Model or named layout) of the page setup in the drawing from which you are importing the page setup.

Details
Displays information about the selected page setup.

756 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Device Name Displays the name of the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup. Printer Displays the type of output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Page Size Displays the paper size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup.

Page Setup - Advanced Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Page Setup Settings

Specifies advanced settings for page layouts.

Page Setup - Advanced Dialog Box | 757

Summary
The Page Setup - Advanced dialog box is displayed and allows you to modify advanced settings for a page setup.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments)

Sets the plot style table. Name Displays a list of availabe plot style tables. Print with Plot Styles Specifies whether plot styles applied to objects and layers are printed. Display Plot Styles Controls whether the properties of plot styles assigned to objects are displayed on the screen.

758 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Plot Offset
Specifies an offset of the plot area relative to the lower-left corner of the printable area or to the edge of the paper, depending on the value of the PLOTOFFSET on page 1446 system varaibale. The Plot Offset area of the Page Setup dialog box displays the specified plot offset option in parentheses. The printable area of a drawing sheet is defined by the selected output device and is represented by a dashed line in a layout. When you change to another output device, the printable area may change. You can offset the geometry on the paper by entering a positive or negative value in the X and Y offset boxes. The plotter unit values are in inches or millimeters on the paper. Center on Page Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the paper. X Specifies the plot origin in the X direction relative to the setting of the Plot Offset Definition option. Y Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction relative to the setting of the Plot Offset Definition option.

3D Viewports
Specifies how shaded and rendered viewports are plotted and determines their resolution levels and dots per inch (dpi). Shading Specifies how views are plotted. To specify this setting for a viewport on a layout tab, select the viewport and then, on the Tools menu, click Properties. From the Model layout, you can select from the following options:

As Displayed: Plots objects the way they are displayed on the screen. Legacy Wireframe: Plots objects in wireframe regardless of the way they are displayed on the screen. Legacy Hidden: Plots objects with hidden lines removed regardless of the way they are displayed on the screen. Conceptual: Plots objects with the Conceptual visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen.

Page Setup - Advanced Dialog Box | 759

Hidden: Plots objects with the Hidden visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. Realistic: Plots objects with the Realistic visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. Shaded: Plots objects with Shaded visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. Shaded with Edges: Plots objects with Shded with Edges visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. Shades of Gray: Plots objects with Shades of Gray visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. Sketchy: Plots objects with Sketchy visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. Wireframe: Plots objects with the Wireframe visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. X-ray: Plots objects with x-ray visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen.

Quality Specifies the resolution at which shaded viewports are plotted. You can select from the following options:

Draft: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted as wireframe. Preview: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at one quarter of the current device resolution, to a maximum of 150 dpi. Normal: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at one half of the current device resolution, to a maximum of 300 dpi. Presentation: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at the current device resolution, to a maximum of 600 dpi. Maximum: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at the current device resolution with no maximum. Custom: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to be plotted at the resolution setting that you specify in the DPI box, up to the current device resolution.

760 | Chapter 16 P Commands

DPI Specifies the dots per inch for shaded and rendered views, up to the maximum resolution of the current plotting device.

Plot Stamp
Controls the placement of a plot stamp on each layout and/or logs it to a file. Plot stamp settings are specified in the Plot Stamp Settings dialog box on page 803, in which you can specify the information that you want applied to the plot stamp, such as drawing name, date and time, plot scale, and so on. Include Plot Stamp Turns on plot stamping for the layout. Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp Settings dialog box on page 803 when Include Plot Stamp is selected.

Print Options
Specifies options for lineweights, transparency, and the order in which objects are plotted. Print Object Lineweights Specifies whether lineweights assigned to objects and layers are printed. Print Transparency Specifies whether object transparency is printed. This option should only be used when printing drawings with transparent objects. IMPORTANT For perfomance reasons, printing transparency is disabled by default. To print transparent objects, check the Print Transparency option. This setting can be overridden by the PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE on page 1447 system variable. By default, the system variable honors the setting in the Page Setup - Advanced dialog box. Print Paper Space Last Prints model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually printed before model space geometry. Hide Paper Space Objects Specifies whether the HIDE operation applies to objects in the paper space viewport. This option is available only from a named (paper space) layout. The effect of this setting is reflected in the output, but not in the display of the layout. Print Upside Down

Page Setup - Advanced Dialog Box | 761

Orients and prints the drawing upside-down.

Sharing
Allows you to import settings from a PC3 file. Import Device Settings From Enables importing of settings from a PC3 file. PC3 Files List Lists the avilable PC3 files that you can select from to import print settings file. The program looks in the location specified by the value in Printer Suppoprt File Path Printer Configuration Search Path under Application in the the Application Preferences dialog box on page 727.

PALETTEICONON
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify the Behavior of Palettes

Collapses all open palettes, except command line and status bar, to a small bar displayed along the left or right side of the screen.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Palettes Show Palettes as Icons Menu: Window Show Palettes as Icons Toolbar: On a palette, in the upper-right corner, click the Collapse as Icons/Show as Palettes button Shortcut menu: Right-click the title bar of a palette and choose Collapse as Icons (Left), Collapse as Icons (Right)

Summary
All open palettes with the exception of the command line and status bar are collapsed to an icon state. While icon state is active, each additional palette opened is added to the palette bar that is displayed along the left or right side of the screen. Click a button on the bar to display the associated palette. The palette will remain open until you click the button again or click a different button on

762 | Chapter 16 P Commands

the palette bar. Use the PALETTEICONOFF on page 763 command to return to palette state.

PALETTEICONOFF
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify the Behavior of Palettes

Restores the display of all palettes collapsed by PALETTEICONON.

Access Methods
Toolbar: On a palette, in the upper-right corner, click the Collapse as Icons/Show as Palettes button Shortcut menu: Right-click the palette bar and choose Show as Palettes

PAN
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

Moves the view planar to the screen.

Access Methods
Menu: View Pan Realtime

Toolbar: Status bar Pan Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Pan.

PALETTEICONOFF | 763

Summary
You can pan the drawing display in real time.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Press Esc or Enter to exit, or right-click to display a shortcut menu. If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN displays command prompts, and you can specify a displacement to pan the drawing display. Position the cursor at the start location and press the mouse button down. Drag the cursor to the new location. You can also press the mouse scroll wheel or middle button down and drag the cursor to pan.

Panning in Real Time

Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

As a view is being panned, the cursor updates to let you know when you have reached the extents of the drawing.

Summary
The cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding down the pick button on the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current location relative to the viewport coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the cursor.

When you reach a logical extent (edge of the drawing space), a bar is displayed on the hand cursor on that edge. Depending on whether the logical extent is at the top, bottom, or side of the drawing, the bar is either horizontal (top or bottom) or vertical (left or right side).

764 | Chapter 16 P Commands

When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the pick button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press the pick button again to pan the display from that location. To stop panning at any time, press Enter or Esc.

-PAN
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

Moves the view planar to the screen by specifying a distance and direction the view should be moveed in.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify base point or displacement: Specify a point You can specify a single point, indicating the relative displacement of the drawing with respect to the current location, or (more commonly) you can specify two points, in which case the displacement is computed from the first point to the second point.

If you press Enter, the drawing is moved by the amount you specified in the Specify Base Point or Displacement prompt. For example, if you specify 2,2 at the first prompt and press Enter at the second prompt, the drawing is moved 2 units in the X direction and 2 units in the Y direction. If you specify a point at the Specify Second Point prompt, the location of the first point is moved to the location of the second point.

-PAN | 765

You cannot use PAN transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW, or while another ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW command is in progress.

Pan Shortcut Menu

Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

Pan and Zoom shortcut menu allows for switching between navigation tools and cancelling the current navigation tool. To access the Pan shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while PAN is active.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Exit Cancels PAN or ZOOM. Pan Switches to PAN. Zoom Switches to ZOOM in real time. 3D Orbit Switches to 3DORBIT. Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window. Zoom Original Restores the original view. Zoom Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents.

PARAMETERS (-PARAMETERS)
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Constraints to Geometry

766 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Controls the associative parameters used in the drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter a parameter option [New/Edit/Rename/Delete/? List Parameters ]: NOTE You cannot use the -PARAMETERS command in the Block Editor on page 127. New Creates a user variable. Edit Edits the expression of the specified user variable. Rename Renames the user variable. Delete Removes the user variable from the list. ? List Parameters Lists available user variables in the drawing.

PASTECLIP
Quick Reference
See also:

Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

Pastes objects from the Clipboard into the current drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: Edit Paste Shortcut menu: With no command active, right-click in the drawing area, and click Clipboard Paste. Command entry: Cmd-V

Summary
If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, the text is inserted as a multiline text (mtext) object using the MTEXT defaults. A spreadsheet is inserted as a table object.

PASTECLIP | 767

When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format that retains the most information is used. You can also use Copy and Paste to transfer objects between drawings. NOTE If the cursor is in the drawing area, PASTECLIP behaves as described. If the cursor is at the Command prompt, text from the Clipboard is pasted at the current prompt.

PEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Polylines

Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Object Polyline Shortcut menu: Select a polyline to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Polyline Edit.

Summary
Common uses for PEDIT include joining 2D polylines, converting lines and arcs into 2D polylines, and converting polylines into curves that approximate B-splines (spline-fit polylines).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select polyline or [MULTIPLE]: Use an object selection method or enter m The remaining prompts depend on whether you have selected a 2D polyline, a 3D polyline, or 3D polygon mesh. If the selected object is a line, arc, or a spline, the following prompt is displayed: Object selected is not a polyline.

768 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Do you want it to turn into one? <Y>: Enter y or n, or press Enter If you enter y, the object is converted into a single-segment 2D polyline that you can edit. You can use this operation to join lines and arcs into a polyline. Before the selected spline is converted to a polyline, the following prompt is displayed: Specify a precision <10>: Enter a new precision value or press Enter The precision value determines how accurately the resulting polyline is to fit to the source spline. Valid value is an integer between 0 and 99. NOTE A high precision value may cause performance problems. The PLINECONVERTMODE on page 1443 system variable determines whether the polylines are created with linear or arc segments. When the PEDITACCEPT on page 1437system variable is set to 1, this prompt is suppressed, and the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline. The conversion in both PEDIT and SPLINEDIT will obey the DELOBJ on page 1228 system variable.

Multiple Selection (PEDIT)

Quick Reference
Enables selection for more than one object. If the selection set includes lines, arcs, or splines, the following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Convert Lines, Arcs and Splines to polylines [Yes/No]? <Y>: Enter y or n or press Enter Specify a precision for spline conversion <10>: Enter a new precision value or press Enter The entered precision value affects all splines in the selection set. The precision value is an integer between 0 and 99.

Multiple Selection (PEDIT) | 769

2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT)

Quick Reference
If you select a 2D polyline, the following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype gen/Reverse/Undo]: Enter an option or press Enter to end the command NOTE You can select a single arc or line segment, also called a subobject, within a polyline by pressing the Ctrl key when you click over it. If the polyline you select is a closed polyline, Open replaces the Close option in the prompt. You can edit a 2D polyline if its normal is parallel to and in the same direction as the Z axis of the current UCS.

Close
Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with the first. The polyline is considered open unless you close it using the Close option.

Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed unless you open it using the Open option.

Join
Adds lines, arcs, or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the curve fitting from a curve-fit polyline. For objects to join the polyline, their endpoints must touch unless you use the Multiple option at the first PEDIT prompt. In this case, you can join polylines that do not touch if the fuzz distance is set to a value large enough to include the endpoints.

Jointype
Sets the method of joining selected polylines. Extend Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming the segments to the nearest endpoints.

770 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Add Joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between the nearest endpoints. Both Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming if possible. Otherwise joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between the nearest endpoints.

Width
Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline. You can use the Width option of the Edit Vertex option to change the starting and ending widths of a segment.

Edit Vertex
Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen. If you have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in that direction.

Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.

Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.

Break
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex.

2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) | 771

If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the result is one truncated polyline. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline, or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break.

Next on page 771 Previous on page 771

Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode.

Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode.

Insert
Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex.

Move
Moves the marked vertex.

Regen
Regenerates the polyline.

772 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Straighten
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex. If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0.

Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select, replaces them with single straight line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex mode. If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X marker, the segment following that vertex is straightened if it is an arc. Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode.

Tangent

Attaches a tangent direction to the marked vertex for use later in curve fitting.

Width
Changes the starting and ending widths for the segment that immediately follows the marked vertex. You must regenerate the polyline to display the new width.

2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) | 773

Exit
Exits Edit Vertex mode.

Fit
Creates an arc-fit polyline, a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair of vertices. The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses any tangent direction you specify.

Spline
Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a curve approximating a B-spline. This curve, called a spline-fit polyline, passes through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was closed. The curve is pulled toward the other points but does not necessarily pass through them. The more control points you specify in a particular part of the frame, the more pull they exert on the curve. Quadratic and cubic spline-fit polylines can be generated.

Spline-fit polylines are very different from the curves produced by the Fit option. Fit constructs pairs of arcs that pass through every control point. Both of these curves are different from true B-splines produced with the SPLINE command. If the original polyline included arc segments, they are straightened when the spline's frame is formed. If the frame has width, the resulting spline tapers smoothly from the width of the first vertex to the width of the last vertex. All intermediate width information is ignored. Once spline-fit, the frame, if displayed, is shown with zero width and CONTINUOUS linetype. Tangent specifications on control point vertices have no effect on spline-fitting.

774 | Chapter 16 P Commands

When a spline-fit curve is fit to a polyline, the spline-fit curve's frame is stored so that it can be recalled by a subsequent decurving. You can turn a spline-fit curve back into its frame polyline by using the PEDIT Decurve option. This option works on fit curves in the same manner as it does on splines. Most editing commands act the same when applied to spline-fit polylines or fit curves.

MOVE, ERASE, COPY, MIRROR, ROTATE, and SCALE operate on both the spline curve and its frame, whether the frame is visible or not. EXTEND changes the frame by adding a new vertex where the initial or final line of the frame intersects the boundary geometry. BREAK and TRIM generate a polyline with only the fit spline, which is consistent with fit curves, where the curve fitting is permanent. EXPLODE deletes the frame and generates lines and arcs to approximate the spline-fit polyline. OFFSET generates a polyline with only the fit spline, which is consistent with its behavior with fit curves. DIVIDE, MEASURE, and the Object option of AREA and HATCH see only the fit spline, not the frame. STRETCH refits the spline to the stretched frame after a spline is stretched.

The Join option of PEDIT decurves the spline and discards the spline information of the original and any added polylines. Once the Join operation is complete, you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline. The Edit Vertex options of PEDIT have the following effect:

The Next and Previous options move the X marker only to points on the frame of the spline, whether visible or not. The Break option discards the spline. The Insert, Move, Straighten, and Width options automatically refit the spline. The Tangent option has no effect on splines.

Object snap uses only the spline-fit curve itself, not the frame. If you want to snap to the frame control points, use PEDIT to recall the polyline frame first.

2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) | 775

The SPLINETYPE system variable controls the type of spline curve approximated. Setting SPLINETYPE to 5 approximates a quadratic B-spline. Setting SPLINETYPE to 6 approximates a cubic B-spline.

You can examine or change the fineness or coarseness of the spline approximation with the SPLINESEGS system variable, or you can use AutoLISP . The default value is 8. If you set the value higher, a greater number of line segments are drawn and the approximation to the ideal spline becomes more precise. The generated spline occupies more space in the drawing file and takes longer to generate. If you set SPLINESEGS to a negative value, the program generates segments using the absolute value of the setting and then applies a fit-type curve to those segments. Fit-type curves use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs yields a smoother generated curve when few segments are specified, but the curve can take longer to generate.

To change the number of segments used to fit an existing spline, change SPLINESEGS and respline the curve. You do not have to decurve it first.

Decurve
Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a spline-fit polyline with a command such as BREAK or TRIM, you cannot use the Decurve option.

Ltype Gen
Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the polyline. When turned off, this option generates the linetype starting and ending with a dash at each vertex. Ltype Gen does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.

776 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Reverse
Reverses the order of vertices of the polyline. Use this option to reverse the direction of objects that use linetypes with included text. For example, depending on the direction in which a polyline was created, the text in the linetype might be displayed upside down.

Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.

3D Polyline Selection (PEDIT)

Quick Reference
If you select a 3D polyline, the following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Close/Join/Edit vertex/Spline curve/Decurve/Reverse/Undo]: Enter an option or press Enter If the polyline you select is closed, Open replaces the Close option in the prompt.

Close
Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with the first. The polyline is considered open unless you close it with Close.

Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed unless you open it with Open.

Join
Joins an open curve to the 3D polyline. The curve can be on a different plane, but must be contiguous with the 3D polyline.

3D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) | 777

Edit Vertex
Performs various editing tasks on one vertex of the polyline and segments that follow it.

Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.

Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.

Break
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex.

Previous on page 778 Previous on page 771

Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode. Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode. If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the polyline is truncated. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline, or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break mode.

Insert
Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex.

Move
Moves the marked vertex.

Regen
Regenerates the polyline.

Straighten
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select, replaces them with single straight line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex

778 | Chapter 16 P Commands

mode. If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X marker, the segment following that vertex is made straight if it is an arc. Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode. To remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then to extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0.

Exit
Exits Edit Vertex mode.

Spline Curve
Fits a 3D B-spline curve to its control points. The SPLFRAME system variable controls the accuracy and display of the control points for the 3D B-spline, whose curves can be approximated only by line segments. Negative values for spline segments are ignored.

Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.

3D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) | 779

3D Polygon Mesh Selection (PEDIT)

Quick Reference
If you select a polygon mesh, the following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Edit vertex/Smooth surface/Desmooth/Mclose/Nclose/Undo]: Enter an option or press Enter to end the command Mclose and Nclose are replaced by Mopen and Nopen if the polygon mesh is currently closed in the M or N direction.

Edit Vertex
Edits individual vertices of a polygon mesh that can be seen as a rectangular M by N array, where M and N are the dimensions specified in 3DMESH. The SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2 system variables store M and N values for RULESURF, TABSURF, REVSURF, and EDGESURF. Pressing Enter accepts the current default, which is either Next or Previous.

Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Left Moves the X marker to the previous vertex in the N direction. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Right Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the N direction. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed.

780 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Up Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the M direction. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Down Moves the X marker to the previous vertex in the M direction. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Move Repositions the vertex and moves the editing mark. Regen Regenerates the polygon mesh. Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode.

Smooth Surface
Fits a smooth surface. The SURFTYPE system variable controls the type of surface this option fits. The types of surfaces include quadratic B-spline, cubic B-spline, and Bezier.

Desmooth
Restores the original control-point polygon mesh.

Mclose
Closes the M-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the M direction.

Mopen
Opens the M-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the M direction.

Nclose
Closes the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the N direction.

3D Polygon Mesh Selection (PEDIT) | 781

Nopen
Opens the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the N direction.

Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.

PFACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Custom Mesh (Legacy)

Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify location for vertex on page 782 1: Specify a point Specify location for vertex 2 or <define faces on page 782>: Specify a point or press Enter Specify location for vertex n or <define faces>: Specify a point or press Enter

Vertex Location
You specify all vertices used in the mesh. The vertex numbers displayed in the prompts are the numbers used to reference each vertex. The prompt is repeated until you press Enter. If you press Enter on a blank line, you are prompted for the vertices to be assigned to each face.

Define Faces
Vertex Number You define each face by entering vertex numbers for all the vertices of that face. The mesh is drawn after you have defined the last face and pressed Enter after the prompt.

782 | Chapter 16 P Commands

To make an edge invisible, you can enter a negative vertex number for the beginning vertex of the edge. You can create polygons with any number of edges. PFACE automatically breaks them into multiple face objects with the appropriate invisible edges. Faces with one or two vertices behave like point or line objects without the special properties of Point Display modes or linetypes. You can use them to embed wireframe images within a mesh. Use Endpoint object snap to snap to a face composed of one or two vertices. All object snap modes that apply to line objects work with visible edges of polyface meshes. You cannot use PEDIT to edit polyface meshes. Color Faces created with PFACE adopt the current layer and color. Unlike polyline vertices, polyface mesh faces can be created with layer and color properties different from their parent object. You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book. Layer Faces created with PFACE adopt the current layer and color. Unlike polyline vertices, polyface mesh faces can be created with layer and color properties different from their parent object. Layer visibility behaves normally on faces of a polyface mesh. However, if you create a polyface mesh on a frozen layer, the program does not generate any of its faces, including those on non-frozen layers.

PLAN
Quick Reference
See also:

Change to a View of the XY Plane

Displays an orthographic view of the XY plane of a specified user coordinate system.

Access Methods
Menu: View 3D Views Plan View

PLAN | 783

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Current UCS Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit in the current viewport of the current UCS.

UCS Changes to a plan view of a previously saved UCS and regenerates the display. Enter name of UCS or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all UCSs in the drawing If you enter ? at the prompt, the following prompt is displayed: Enter UCS name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name or enter * to list all UCSs in the drawing

784 | Chapter 16 P Commands

World Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit on the screen of the world coordinate system.

PLANESURF
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Creating Surfaces Convert Objects to Procedural Surfaces

Creates a planar surface.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Create tool group Planar Surface Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Planar Surface

Summary
You can create a planar surface by selecting closed objects or by specifying the opposite corners of a rectangular surface. Supports pick-first selection and generates a planar surface out of a closed profile. When you specify the corners

PLANESURF | 785

of the surface through the command, the surface is created parallel to the workplane.

The SURFU and SURFV system variables control the number of lines displayed on the surface.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner or [Object]: Specify the first point for the planar surface Specify other corner: Specify second point (other corner) for the planar surface

Object
Creates a planar or trimmed surface by object selection. You can select one closed object or multiple objects that form a closed area. Similar to the REGION command, valid objects include: line, circle, arc, ellipse, elliptical arc, 2D polyline, planar 3D polyline, and planar spline. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the object(s) you select are automatically deleted when the surface is created or whether you are prompted to delete the object(s).

PLINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Polylines

Creates a 2D polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group Polyline

786 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Menu: Draw Polyline

Summary
A 2D polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single planar object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two.

NOTE At least two points must be specified to use the Close option. The PLINEGEN system variable controls the linetype pattern display around and the smoothness of the vertices of a 2D polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 1 generates new polylines in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the completed polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 0 starts and ends the polyline with a dash at each vertex. PLINEGEN does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point: Specify a point Current line-width is <current> Specify next point on page 786 or [Arc on page 787/Close on page 791/Halfwidth on page 791/Length on page 792/Undo on page 792/Width on page 792]: Specify a point or enter an option

Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.

Arc
Adds arc segments to the polyline. Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Halfwidth/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo/Width]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option NOTE For the Center option of the PLINE command, enter ce; for the Center object snap, enter cen or center.

PLINE | 787

Endpoint of Arc
Draws an arc segment. The arc segment is tangent to the previous segment of the polyline. The previous prompt is repeated.

Angle
Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point. Specify included angle:

Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering a negative number creates clockwise arc segments. Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]: Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Center Specifies the center of the arc segment. Specify center point of arc: Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment. Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance Specify direction of chord for arc <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER

Center
Specifies the center of the arc segment. Specify center point of arc: Specify a point (2) Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/Length]: Specify a point (3) or enter an option

788 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point. Specify included angle: Length Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new arc segment is drawn tangent to the previous arc segment. Specify length of chord:

Close
Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point, creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this option.

Direction
Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment. Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point (2) Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point (3)

Halfwidth
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges. Specify starting half-width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending half-width <starting width>: Enter a value or press ENTER

PLINE | 789

The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line.

Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used.

Line
Exits the Arc option and returns to the initial PLINE command prompts.

Radius
Specifies the radius of the arc segment. Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle]: Specify a point or enter a

Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Angle Specifies the included angle for the arc segment. Specify included angle: Specify direction of chord for arc <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER

Second Pt
Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc. Specify second point on arc: Specify a point (2) Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)

790 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Undo
Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline.

Width
Specifies the width of the next arc segment. Specify starting width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending width <starting width>: Enter a value or press ENTER

The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or when a dot-dash linetype is used.

Close
Draws a line segment from the last point specified to the starting point, creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this option.

Halfwidth
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of its edges.

PLINE | 791

Specify starting half-width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending half-width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line.

Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used.

Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn tangent to that arc segment. Specify length of line: Specify a distance

Undo
Removes the most recent line segment added to the polyline.

Width
Specifies the width of the next line segment. Specify starting width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending width <starting width>: Enter a value or press ENTER

792 | Chapter 16 P Commands

The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used.

PLOT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plotting

Outputs a drawing to a printer or file.

Access Methods
Menu: File Print Toolbar: Status bar Quick View. In the Quick View window, right-click a layout and click Print.

Summary
The Print dialog box is displayed. Click OK to begin printing with the current settings. If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

PLOT | 793

Print Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plotting

Specifies device and media settings, and plots your drawing.

Summary
You can display more options by clicking the Show Advanced Settings button to the right of the Printer drop-down list. Printing is done by default for a single layout. If you want to print more than one layout at a time, use the QuickView dialog box on page 859 and select the layouts to print. After selecting the layouts, right-click and choose Print.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Printer
Specifies an output device to use when printing layouts.

794 | Chapter 16 P Commands

If the selected output device does not support the layout's selected paper size, a warning is displayed and you can select the device's default paper size or a custom paper size. Click the disclosure triangle to the right of the Printer drop-down list to expand the Print dialog box. When the dialog box is expanded, additional settings are available that allow you to control the printing of the layout.

Presets
Specifies the named print preset to use for printing the current layout. Print presets store the following information:

Number of Copies Collated Two-sided Paper size Orientation

Copies
Specifies the number of copies to print. This option is not available when you print to an electronic file, such as a PDF file.

Collated
Controls if multi-page prints should be collated.

Two-sided
Controls if multi-page prints should be printed on both sides of a page.

List of Options - Single Layout

The following options are available when printing a layout.

Paper Size
Displays standard paper sizes that are available for the selected output device. If no output device is selected, the full standard paper size list is displayed and available for selection. If the selected printer does not support the selected paper size, a warning is displayed, and you can select one of the available paper sizes. The actual printable area of the page, which is determined by the selected output device and paper size, is indicated in the layout by a dashed line. If you are outputting a raster image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, the size of the print is specified in pixels, not in inches or millimeters.

Print Dialog Box | 795

Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support landscape or portrait orientation. The paper icon represents the media orientation of the selected paper. The letter icon represents the orientation of the drawing on the page. NOTE Drawing orientation is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system variable.

Print Options
Specifies which advanced print settings should be used for printing. Select AutoCAD to use the page setup assigned to the layout. See the Mac Help documentation for information on the other options.

Page Setup
Displays a list of any named and saved page setups in the drawing. You can base the current page setup on a named page setup saved in the drawing, or you can create a new named page setup based on the layouts settings by clicking Edit Page Setup. Name Displays the name of the current page setup. Edit Page Setup Displays the Page Setup dialog box, in which you can edit the page setup for the layout. You can also modify the page setup through the Page Setup Manager on page 748.

What to Print
Specifies the area of the drawing to be plotted. Layout/Limits When outputting a layout, everything within the printable area of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the layout. When outputting from the Model layout, the entire drawing area that is defined by the grid limits. If the current viewport does not display a plan view, this option has the same effect as the Extents option. Extents Outputs the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects. All geometry in the current layout is outputted. The drawing may be regenerated to recalculate the extents before outputting. Display Outputs the view in the current viewport in the current layout. View Outputs a view that was previously saved with the VIEW command. Window

796 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Outputs any portion of the drawing that you specify. When you specify the two corners of the area to output, the Window button becomes available. Click the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to be outputted, or enter coordinate values.

Scale
Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units. NOTE If the Layout option is specified in What to Print, the layout is plotted at 1:1 regardless of the setting specified in Scale. Fit to Paper Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size and displays the custom scale factor in the Scale, Inch =, and Units boxes. Scale Defines the exact scale for the output. Custom defines a user-defined scale. You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches (or millimeters) equal to the number of drawing units. NOTE You can modify the list of scales with SCALELISTEDIT. Inch(es) =/mm = Specifies the number of inches or millimeters equal to the specified number of units. Inch/mm Specifies inches or mm for display of units. The default is based on the paper size and changes each time a new paper size is selected. Unit Specifies the number of units equal to the specified number of inches or millimeters. Scale Lineweights Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of output objects and are output with the linewidth size regardless of the scale.

Advanced
Displays the Page Setup - Advanced dialog box on page 757 which allows you to edit additional output options.

Print Dialog Box | 797

List of Options - Multiple Layouts

The following options are available when printing multiple layouts from the QuickView dialog box.

Page Setup
Allows you to use the assigned page setup for each layout or to assign a page setup override from the page setups stored in the drawing. Use Assigned Page Setups for Each Sheet Prints each layout using its own stored page setup settings. Use Named Page setup Override for All Sheets Prints all layouts with the page setup you choose from those saved in the current drawing. Choose Displays the Choose Page Setup dialog box, in which you can select a page setup to use. The bottom of the dialog box lists some details about the selected page setupPage Setup Manager on page 748. Use the Page Setup Manager on page 748 to create page setups that you can use.

PDF
Lists options for printing to an electronic file. Some of the available options allow you to create PDF and PostScript files.

Preview
Displays the drawing as it will appear when printed on paper. (See PREVIEW command) Exit the print preview and return to the Print dialog box to complete the print.

Supplies
Displays a web page for ordering printer supplies through the Apple Store.

-PLOT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plotting

798 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file in the command line. If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Detailed plot configuration [Yes on page 799/No on page 799] <No>: Enter y or n or press ENTER

No
Indicates that you do not want a detailed plot configuration for this plot. Enter a layout name or [?] <current>: Enter a page setup name < >: Enter an output device name or [?] <current>: Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] <current>: Enter file name: <dwgname-layoutname.plt>: Save changes to layout [Yes/No] <No>: Proceed with Plot [Yes/No] <Y>: For information about these prompts, see the description for Yes.

Yes
Specifies detailed page settings for the Model tab or layout tab you are plotting. Enter a layout name or [?] <current>: Specify the name of the layout tab you want to plot Enter an output device name or [?] <current>: Specify the name of the output device to which you want to plot the Model tab or layout tab you selected If you enter a new device name without an extension, the program assumes that the device is a PC3 file (Autodesk HDI plotter configuration file). If no PC3 file is found, the program searches for a Windows system printer with that device name. Enter paper size or [?] <current>: Specify the paper size to use for the plot or enter ? to view the actual list of paper sizes defined for the plotter driver You must specify a paper size exactly as it is defined by the plotter driver. Enter paper units [Inches/Millimeters] <current>:

-PLOT | 799

The Enter Paper Units prompt is not displayed if you are plotting a raster image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, because the size of the plot is assumed to be in pixels. Enter drawing orientation [Portrait/Landscape] <current>: Portrait Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Plot upside down [Yes/No] <No>: Orients and plots the drawing upside down. Enter plot area [Display/Extents/Limits/Layout/View/Window] <current>: Display Plots the view in the current viewport on the Model tab or the current view in the layout, depending on which tab you select to plot. Extents Plots all of the objects in the current viewport, except objects on frozen layers. From a layout tab, plots all the geometry in paper space. The drawing may be regenerated to recalculate the extents before plotting. If you plot the drawing's extents with a perspective view active and the camera position is within the drawing extents, this option has the same effect as the Display option. Limits Plots the drawing area defined by the grid limits. Available only when the Model tab is selected. Layout Plots everything within the printable area of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the layout. Available only when a layout tab is selected. View Plots a view saved previously with the VIEW command. You can select a named view from the list provided. If there are no saved views in the drawing, this option is unavailable. Window Plots any portion of the drawing you specify. This option prompts you to specify the corners of the window. Enter lower left corner of window: Specify a point Enter upper right corner of window: Specify a point Enter plot scale (Plotted Inches = Drawing Units) or [Fit] <current>: Specify the scale of the plot

800 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Plotted Inches = Drawing Units Calculates the plot scale based on the inches or millimeters to drawing units that you specify. You can also enter a real number as a fraction (for example, you can enter 1=2 or .5). Fit Calculates the scale to fit the area on the sheet of paper. The default scale setting is 1:1 when you are plotting a layout, unless you modified and saved the setting. The default setting is Fit when plotting a Model tab. Enter plot offset (x, y) or [Center] <current>: Specify the plot offset in either the X or Y direction, or enter c to center the plot on the paper Plot with plot styles [Yes/No] <current>: Specify whether to plot using the plot styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table If you specify Yes to plot with plot styles, the following prompt is displayed: Enter plot style table name or [?] (enter . for none) <current>: Enter a plot style table name, ? to view plot style tables, or . (period) for none All style definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the current plot style table and can be attached to the geometry. This setting replaces pen mapping in earlier versions of the program. Plot with lineweights [Yes/No] <current>: Scale lineweights with plot scale [Yes/No] <current>: NOTE The Scale Lineweights with Plot Scale prompt is displayed only when you plot from a layout tab. Settings for the shaded plotting type are available only when you plot from the Model tab. To control shaded plotting settings of viewports in a layout tab, use the Shadeplot option of the -vports command when you create a viewport. Enter shade plot setting [As displayed/Wireframe/Hidden/Visual styles/Rendered] <As displayed>: Enter a shade plot option Specifies how model space views are plotted. As Displayed Specifies that a model space view is plotted the same way it is displayed. Wireframe Specifies that a model space view is plotted in wireframe regardless of display. Hidden Specifies that a model space view is plotted with hidden lines removed regardless of display.

-PLOT | 801

Visual Styles Plots a model space view with the specified visual style applied regardless of the current display in the viewport. If you specify Visual Styles, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option [Wireframe/Hidden/Realistic/Conceptual/Shaded/shaded with Edges/shades of Gray/SKetchy/X-ray/Other] <Realistic>: These options are the same as the options in VSCURRENT on page 1126. Rendered Specifies that model space view plots are rendered regardless of display. Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y if you want to write the plotted drawing to a file, or press Enter to plot to an output device If you specify Yes, the following prompt is displayed: Enter file name: <dwgname-layoutname.plt>: Enter a file name Save changes to page setup? Or set shade plot quality? [Yes/No/Quality] <No>: If you enter y, the current settings in the Page Setup dialog box are saved. If you enter q, you are prompted for the shaded plotting quality and are given the option of providing a custom dpi. Then you are prompted to save the page setup with the added quality settings. Enter shade plot quality [Draft/Preview/Normal/pResentation/Maximum/Custom] <Normal>: Enter c if you want to specify a dpi, or to use a preset dpi, specify a different quality option Enter custom dpi <150>: Save changes to page setup [Yes/No]? <No>: Plot paper space first [Yes/No] <current>: Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. If you enter n, the model space geometry is plotted first, and paper space geometry is plotted last. This option is available only if you are plotting from a layout tab. Hide paperspace objects? [Yes/No] <No>: Specifies whether the Hide operation applies to objects in the paper space viewport. This option is available only from a layout tab. Proceed with plot [Yes/No] <Y>:

802 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PLOTSTAMP
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Options for Plotted Objects

Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file.

Summary
The Plot Stamp Settings dialog box is displayed. If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Plot Stamp Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Set Options for Plotted Objects

Specifies the information for the plot stamp.

PLOTSTAMP | 803

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

AutoCAD Fields
Specifies the drawing information you want applied to the plot stamp. The selected fields are separated by commas and a space. Drawing Name Includes the drawing name and path in the plot stamp information. Layout Name

804 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Includes the name of the layout in the plot stamp information. Date and Time Includes the date and time in the plot stamp information. NOTE A plot stamp uses the current date and time format setting of the operating system. Plot stamp specifically uses the short date style for dates. Login Name Includes the user login name in the plot stamp information. The user login name is contained in the LOGINNAME system variable. Device Name Includes the current plotting device name in the plot stamp information. Paper Size Includes the paper size for the currently configured plotting device in the plot stamp information. Plot Scale Includes the plot scale in the plot stamp information.

User Defined Fields

Provides text that can optionally be plotted, logged, or both plotted and logged at plot time. The selected value in each user-defined list will be plotted. For example, you might populate one list with media types or prices and the other with job names. If the user-defined value is set to <none>, then no user-defined information is plotted Add/Edit Displays the Add User Defined Fields dialog box, where you can add, edit, or delete user-defined fields.

Parameter File
Stores plot stamp information in a file with a .pss extension. Multiple users can access the same file and stamp their plots based on company standard settings. Two PSS files are provided, Mm.pss and Inches.pss, which are located in the Support folder. The initial default plot stamp parameter file name is determined by the regional settings of the operating system when the program is installed. Path

Plot Stamp Settings Dialog Box | 805

Specifies the location of the plot stamp parameter file. Load Displays the Plotstamp Parameter File Name dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) in which you can specify the location of the parameter file you want to use. Save As Saves the current plot stamp settings in a new parameter file.

Show/Hide Advanced Settings

Expands or collapses the Advanced Settings section towhich contains placement and text options for the plot stamp.

Location and Offset

Determines the plot stamp location, the orientation of the plot stamp, and the offset you want to apply relative to either the printable area or the paper border. Location Indicates the area where you want to place the plot stamp. Selections include Top Left, Bottom Left (default), Bottom Right, and Top Right. The location is relative to the image orientation of the drawing on the page. Orientation Indicates the rotation of the plot stamp in relation to the specified page. The options are Horizontal and Vertical for each of the locations (for example, Top Left Horizontal and Top Left Vertical). Stamp Upside-Down Rotates the plot stamp upside down. X Offset Determines the X offset value that is calculated from either the corner of the paper or the corner of the printable area, depending on which setting you specify. If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border, the offset value is calculated so that the plot stamp information fits within the designated paper size. If the offset value positions the plot stamp information beyond the printable area, the plot stamp text is cut off. Y Offset Determines the Y offset value that is calculated from either the corner of the paper or the corner of the printable area, depending on which setting you

806 | Chapter 16 P Commands

specify. If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border, the offset value is calculated so that the plot stamp information fits within the designated paper size. If the offset value positions the plot stamp information beyond the printable area, the plot stamp text is cut off. Offset Relative to Printable Area Calculates the offset values that you specify from the corner of the printable area of the paper (not the corner of the paper). Offset Relative to Paper Border Calculates the offset values that you specify from the corner of the paper (not the corner of the printable area of the paper).

Text and Units

Determines the font, height, and number of lines you want to apply to the plot stamp text. Font Specifies the TrueType font you want to apply to the text used for the plot stamp information. Height Specifies the text height you want to apply to the plot stamp information. Single Line Plot Stamp If selected, places the plot stamp information in a single line of text. The plot stamp information can consist of up to two lines of text, but the placement and offset values you specify must accommodate text wrapping and text height. If the plot stamp contains text that is longer than the printable area, the plot stamp text will be cut off. If this option is cleared, plot stamp text is wrapped after the third field. Units Specifies the units to use to calculate the height of the text: inches, millimeters, and pixels.

Log File
Writes the plot stamp information to a log file instead of, or in addition to, stamping the current plot. If plot stamping is turned off, the log file can still be created. Create a Log File

Plot Stamp Settings Dialog Box | 807

Writes the plot stamp information to a log file. The default log file is plot.log, and it is located in the main application folder. You can specify a different file name and path. After the initial plot.log file is created, the plot stamp information in each succeeding plotted drawing is added to this file. Each drawing's plot stamp information is a single line of text. The plot stamp log file can be placed on a network drive and shared by multiple users. Plot stamp information from each user is appended to the plot.log file. Log File Name Specifies the file name for the log file you are creating. Enter a new file name if you do not want to use the default file name, plot.log. Browse Lists the currently saved plot stamp log files. You can choose to overwrite an existing plot stamp log file with the currently specified plot stamp information, and then to save this file.

Add User Defined Fields Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Set Options for Plotted Objects

Create and mange user-defined fields.

Summary
User-defined fields are created and edited using the User Defined Fields dialog box, which is displayed when you choose the Add/Edit button in the Plot Stamp dialog box.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Fields Lists the available user-defined fields. Double-click the text of a user-defined field to edit the value. Add (+)

808 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Adds an editable user-defined field. Delete (-) Deletes the selected user-defined field.

-PLOTSTAMP
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Options for Plotted Objects

Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file. If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. The settings in the PSS file are displayed as defaults for each prompt. You can use -PLOTSTAMP as part of a plotting script to modify plot stamp information for a drawing.

LIst of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [On/OFF/Fields/User fields/Log file/LOCation/Text properties/UNits]: On Turns on the plot stamp for the current drawing. OFF Turns off the plot stamp for the current drawing. Fields Specifies the plot stamp field information you want to apply to the current plot stamp. Stamp drawing name? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Stamp layout name? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Stamp date and time? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Stamp login name? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Stamp plot device name? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Stamp paper size? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Stamp plot scale? [Yes/No] <Yes>:

-PLOTSTAMP | 809

User Fields Specifies the user-defined fields you want to apply to the current plot stamp. Enter User field 1 <>: Enter any user-defined field Enter User field 2 <>: Enter any user-defined field Log File Specifies writing the current plot stamp information to a log file rather than applying this information to the current plotted drawing. The default log file is plot.log, unless you specify another file path. Write plot stamp to log file? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter log file path <plot.log>: Location Determines the location of the plot stamp on the page based on offset, orientation, and relationship to either the printable area or the border of the paper. Location selections include and are relative to the printable area or the border of the paper, depending on what you specify at the prompt. Enter stamp location [TL/TR/BL/BR] <BL>:

TL: Top Left TR: Top Right BL: Bottom Left BR: Bottom Right

Text orientation indicates the rotation angle of the plot stamp in relation to the page. Enter text orientation [Horizontal/Vertical] <Horizontal>:

Horizontal: Plot stamp will be horizontal relative to the page. Vertical: Plot stamp will be vertical relative to the page.

Stamp upside-down [Yes/No] <No>: Specify plot stamp offset <0.1000,0.1000>: Specifying an offset relative to the paper border calculates the offset values that you specify from the corner of the paper. Specifying an offset relative to the printable area calculates the offset values that you specify from the corner of the printable area. Specify offset relative to [paper Border/printable Area] <printable Area>: Text Properties Determines the font name and text height for the current plot stamp text. You can also specify to place the text on one line or to wrap

810 | Chapter 16 P Commands

the text to two lines. The placement and offset values you specify for this plot stamp must accommodate the text wrapping and the text height. Enter font name <>: Enter a font name Enter text height <0.1500>: Enter a value Place plot stamp on single line? [Yes/No] <No >: Units Specifies the units used to measure X offset, Y offset, and height. You can define units using inches, millimeters, or pixels. Enter measurement units [Inches/Millimeters/Pixels] <Inches>:

PLOTSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects

Controls the named plot styles that are attached to the current layout and can be assigned to objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Plot Style

Summary
To use the PLOTSTYLE command, the drawing must be configured to use named plot styles.

To configure a new drawing to use named plot styles, set PSTYLEPOLICY to 0 before creating the new drawing.

Entering plotstyle or -plotstyle at the Command prompt displays options related to listing all available plostyles and setting a plotstyle current on page 812.

PLOTSTYLE | 811

-PLOTSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects

Lists all available plotstyles in the current drawing and to set a plotstyle current.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current plot style is "current" Enter an option [?/Current]: ?List Plot Styles Lists the plot styles in the attached plot style table. Current Specifies the plot style to use for new objects.

PNGOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Export Raster Files

Saves selected objects to a file in a Portable Network Graphics format.

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press Enter to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter

812 | Chapter 16 P Commands

A Portable Network Graphics file is created that contains the objects you select. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed at the Command prompt.

POINT
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Reference Points

Creates a point object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group (expanded) Point flyout Multiple Points Menu: Draw Point

Summary
Points can act as nodes to which you can snap objects. You can specify a full three-dimensional location for a point. The current elevation is assumed if you omit the Z coordinate value. The PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables control the appearance of point objects. PDMODE values 0, 2, 3, and 4 specify a figure to draw through the point. A value of 1 specifies that nothing is displayed.

POINT | 813

Specifying the value 32, 64, or 96 selects a shape to draw around the point, in addition to the figure drawn through it:

PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0 and 1. A setting of 0 generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area height. A positive PDSIZE value specifies an absolute size for the point figures. A negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport size. After you change PDMODE and PDSIZE, the appearance of existing points changes the next time the drawing is regenerated. You can use MEASURE and DIVIDE to create points along an object. Use DDPTYPE to specify point size and styles easily.

List of Prompts
Specify a point: Specify a point in the drawing

814 | Chapter 16 P Commands

POINTLIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Point Lights

Creates a point light that radiates light in all directions from its location.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Lights tool group Point Light Menu: View Render Light New Point Light

Summary
Use point lights for general lighting effects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify source location <0,0,0>: Enter coordinate values or use the pointing device If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name on page 816/Intensity on page 816/Status on page 816/shadoW on page 817/Attenuation on page 818/Color on page 819/eXit on page 819] <eXit>: If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name on page 816/Intensity factor on page 816/Status on page 816/Photometry/shadoW on page 817/Attenuation on page 818/filterColor on page 819/eXit on page 819] <eXit>:

POINTLIGHT | 815

NOTE When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the Attenuation option has no affect on the creation of the light. It is only maintained for scripting compatibility.

Name
Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters. Enter light name:

Intensity/Intensity Factor
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Enter intensity (0.00-max float) <1.0000>:

Status
Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect Enter status [oN/oFf] <On>:

Photometry
Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a is the perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface, per unit area. Enter a photometric option to change [Intensity/Color/eXit] <I>: Intensity Enter intensity (Cd) or enter an option [Flux/Illuminance] <1500.0000>: Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface.

816 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Enter f to specify the perceived power in a luminous flux value. Enter Flux (Lm) <18849.5556>: If you enter i, you can specify the intensity of the light based on an illuminance value. Enter Illuminance ("Lx"|"Fc") or enter an option [Distance] <1500.0000>: The illuminance value can be specified in either lux or foot-candles. Enter d to specify a distance to use to calculate illuminance. Enter Distance <1.0000>: Color Enter color name or enter an option [?/Kelvin] <D65White>: Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter color name(s) to list <*>: Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Enter Kelvin temperature <3600.0000>: Exit Exits the command option.

Shadow
Makes the light cast shadows. Enter shadow settings [Off/Sharp/soFtmapped/softsAmpled] <Sharp>: Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Enter map size [64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096] <256>: Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map. Enter softness (1-10) <1>: Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map. Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources. Enter an option to change [Shape/sAmples/Visible/eXit]<eXit> :

POINTLIGHT | 817

Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.) Enter shape [Linear, Disk, Rect, Sphere,Cylinder] <Sphere>: Specify the sample size by entering a. Enter Shadow Sample <16.0000>: Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v. Enter Shape Visibility [Yes/No]<No>:

Attenuation
Enter an option to change [attenuation Type/Use limits/attenuation start Limit/attenuation End limit/eXit]<eXit>: Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a point light, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay. Enter attenuation type [None/Inverse linear/inverse Squared] <Inverse linear>:

None. Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the point light are as bright as objects close to the light. Inverse Linear. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is half as strong as at the point light; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter as strong. The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity. Inverse Squared. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is one quarter as strong as at the point light; at a distance of 4 units, light is one sixteenth as strong.

Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits or not. Limits [oN/oFf] <Off>: Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset from the center of the light. The default is 0. Specify start limit offset <1.0000>: Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time. Specify end limit offset <10.0000>:

818 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Color/Filter Color
Controls the color of the light. Enter true color (R,G,B) or enter an option [Index color/Hsl/colorBook]<255,255,255>: True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color. Enter color name or number (1-255): HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color. Enter HSL color (H,S,L) <0,0,100>: Color Book Specifies a color from a color book. Enter Color Book name:

Exit
Exits the command.

POLYGON
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Rectangles and Polygons

Creates an equilateral closed polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) Polygon Menu: Draw Polygon

POLYGON | 819

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter number of sides <current>: Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press Enter Specify center of polygon on page 820 or [Edge on page 821]: Specify a point (1) or enter e

Center of Polygon
Defines the center of the polygon. Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle] <current>: Enter i or c or press Enter Inscribed in Circle Specifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of the polygon lie. Specify radius of circle: Specify a point (2) or enter a value

Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon. Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle. Circumscribed about Circle Specifies the distance from the center of the polygon to the midpoints of the edges of the polygon. Specify radius of circle: Specify a distance

820 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Edge
Defines a polygon by specifying the endpoints of the first edge. Specify first endpoint of edge: Specify a point (1) Specify second endpoint of edge: Specify a point (2)

You can specify the different parameters of the polygon including the number of sides. The difference between the inscribed and circumscribed options is shown.

POLYGON | 821

POLYSOLID
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Polysolid

Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Solid Primitives flyout Polysolid Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Polysolid

Summary
You can create walls with straight and curved segments of constant height and width.

With the POLYSOLID command, you can convert an existing line, 2D polyline, arc, or circle to a solid with a rectangular profile. A polysolid can have curved segments, but the profile is always rectangular by default.

822 | Chapter 16 P Commands

You can draw a solid with POLYSOLID just as you would a polyline. The PSOLWIDTH system variable sets the default width for the solid. The PSOLHEIGHT system variable sets the default height for the solid.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point or [Object on page 823/Height on page 823/Width on page 824/Justify on page 824] <Object>: Specify a start point for the profile of the solid, press Enter to specify an object to convert to a solid, or enter an option Specify the next point on page 824 or [Arc on page 825/Undo on page 825]: Specify the next point for the profile of the solid, or enter an option

Object
Specifies an object to convert to a solid. You can convert:

Line Arc 2D polyline Circle

Select object: Select an object to convert to a solid

Height
Specifies the height of the solid. The default height is set to the current PSOLHEIGHT setting. Specify height <default>: Specify a value for the height, or press Enter to specify the default value The specified height value will update the PSOLHEIGHT setting.

POLYSOLID | 823

Width
Specifies the width of the solid. The default width is set to the current PSOLWIDTH setting. Specify width <current>: Specify a value for the width by entering a value or specifying two points, or press Enter to specify the current width value The specified width value will update the PSOLWIDTH setting.

Justify
Sets the width and height as the solid to be left, right, or center justified when defining the profile with the command. The justification is based on the starting direction of the first segment of the profile. Enter justification [Left/Center/Right] <Center>: Enter an option for the justification or press Enter to specify center justification

Next Point
Specify the next point or [Arc/Close/Undo]: Specify the next point for the profile of the solid, enter an option, or press Enter to end the command Arc Adds an arc segment to the solid. The default starting direction of the arc is tangent to the last drawn segment. You can specify a different starting direction with the Direction option. Specify endpoint of arc or [Close/Direction/Line/Second point/Undo]: Specify an endpoint or enter an option

Close. Closes the solid by creating a line or arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point of the solid. At least two points must be specified to use this option. Direction. Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment. Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point

Line. Exits the Arc option and returns to the initial POLYSOLID command prompts. Second Point. Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc segment. Specify second point on arc: Specify a point Specify end point of arc: Specify a point

Undo. Removes the most recent arc segment added to the solid.

824 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Close Closes the solid by creating a line or arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point of the solid. At least three points must be specified to use this option. Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the solid.

Arc
Adds an arc segment to the solid. The default starting direction of the arc is tangent to the last drawn segment. You can specify a different starting direction with the Direction option. Specify endpoint of arc or [Close/Direction/Line/Second point/Undo]: Specify an endpoint or enter an option Close Closes the solid by creating a linear or arc segment from the last vertex to the start of the solid. Direction Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment. Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point Line Exits the Arc option and returns to the initial POLYSOLID command prompts. Second Point Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc segment. Specify second point on arc: Specify a point Specify end point of arc: Specify a point Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the solid.

Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the solid.

PRESSPULL
Quick Reference
See also:

Press or Pull Bounded Areas

Presses or pulls bounded areas.

PRESSPULL | 825

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Presspull

Summary
Press or pull a bounded area by clicking inside the area. Then drag or enter a value to indicate the amount of extrusion. As you move the cursor, the extrusion changes dynamically.

You can press or pull any of the following types of bounded areas: Bounded areas that can be pressed or pulled
Areas that can be hatched by picking a point (with zero gap tolerance) Areas enclosed by crossing coplanar, linear geometry, including edges and geometry in blocks Closed polylines, regions, 3D faces, and faces of 2D solids that have coplanar vertices

826 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Bounded areas that can be pressed or pulled

Areas enclosed by geometry (including 2D objects and edges of faces) that is coplanar to the face of a 3D solid.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Click inside bounded areas to press or pull Specifies which closed area you want to modify. Click and drag to set the distance you want to press or pull. You can also enter a value.

PREVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Preview a Plot

Displays the drawing as it will be printed.

Summary
The preview is based on the current print configuration, as defined by the settings in the Page Setup dialog box on page 751. It shows exactly how the drawing will look when printed, including lineweights, fill patterns, and other print options. NOTE An output device must be assigned to the layout before a preview can be generated. The toolbar along the top of the Preview window allows you to view different areas of the print, search for text, and copy a selected area to the Clipboard.

Preview Window Toolbar

Provides options in the Preview window. Previous Displays the previous page in a multi-page preview. Next Displays the next page in a multi-page preview.

PREVIEW | 827

Zoom Reduces or enlarges the preview image. Click (-) to reduce the preview image and (+) to enlarge the preview image. Move Moves the preview image planar to the screen.

Text Allows you to select text objects. (Not available in AutoCAD for Mac) Select Creates a selection window in the preview image that allows you to copy part of the preview to the Clipboard. Sidebar Displays a secondary pane that contains thumbnails for multi-page previews. Search Allows you to serach for a text string in the preview. (Not available in AutoCAD for Mac)

PROJECTGEOMETRY
Quick Reference
See also:

Trim and Untrim Surfaces

Projects points, lines, or curves onto a 3D solid or surface from different directions.

Summary
By projecting geometry you can do on of the following:

Project points or curves onto a 3D solid or surface. Project and trim a selected 3D solid or surface.

To trim the surface, set the SURFACEAUTOTRIM on page 1508 system variable to 1. You can project any curve (line, arc, circle, ellipse, 2D polyline, 2D spline-fit polyline, 2D curve-fit polyline, 3D polyline, 3D spline-fit polyline, spline, or helix) onto any type of surface or solid.

828 | Chapter 16 P Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Project to UCS Projects the geometry along the positive or negative Z axis of the current UCS.

Project to View Projects the geometry based on the current view.

Project to Two Points Projects the geometry along a path between two points.

PROPERTIES
Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Controls properties of existing objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Properties Shortcut menu: Select the objects whose properties you want to view or modify, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties.

Summary
The Properties Inspector palette is displayed and lists the properties of the selected objects. When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all selected objects are displayed.

PROPERTIES | 829

When no objects are selected, only the current settings of general properties are displayed. You can also view or modify properties of third-party application objects that are based on AutoCAD application programming interface (API) standards. There are several general properties common to all objects. All other object properties are specific to the type of object.

Properties Inspector Palette

Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Displays the properties of the selected object or set of objects.

Current Properties

Layer Properties

830 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Summary
When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all selected objects are displayed. When no objects are selected, only the current settings of general properties are displayed. You can specify a new value to modify any property that can be changed. Click the value and use one of the following methods:

Enter a new value. Click the down arrow a the right and select a value from the list. Click the Pick Point button to use the pointing device to change a coordinate value. Click the [] button and change the property value in a dialog box. Select or clear a check box to toggle a property on or off. Drag a slider left or right.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Current Displays the properties for the current drawing or selected objects. Layer Displays the properties for the layer selected in the Layer list of the Layers palette. Object Type Displays the type of objects that are selected and filters which objects you are modifying. Essentials Displays the most commonly edited or viewed properties for the current drawing or selected objects. All Displays all the properties associated with the current drawing or the selected objects. Match Properties Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects. Drawing/Objects/Layer Properties Displays a list of available properties that can currently be edited. The list of properties show is based on the following conditions:

No objects selected in the current drawing. Drawing specific properties are displayed.

Properties Inspector Palette | 831

Objects selected in the current drawing. Properties common to all selected objects are displayed. Layer selected from the Layer list in the Layers palette. Layer properties are displayed.

General Properties of Objects

Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Each graphical object in a drawing shares a common set of properties known as the general properties.

Summary
The following general properties are common to most objects and custom objects (third-party application objects based on AutoCAD API standards). NOTE Layers or objects that are assigned property overrides in viewports display a ByLayer (VP) value and a background color for applicable properties.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Color Specifies the color for objects. Selecting Select Color in the color list displays the Select Color dialog box (see COLOR). You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the color of objects by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and color book colors. Layer Specifies the current layer of the object. The list shows all layers in the current drawing (see LAYER). Linetype Specifies the current linetype of the object. The list shows all linetypes in the current drawing (see LINETYPE).

832 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Linetype Scale Specifies the linetype scale factor of the object (see LTSCALE). Plot Style Lists NORMAL, BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, plus any plot styles contained in the current plot style table (see PLOTSTYLE). Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the object. The list shows all available lineweights in the current drawing (see LWEIGHT). Hyperlink Attaches a hyperlink to a graphical object. If a description has been assigned to the hyperlink, the description is displayed. If no description has been assigned, the URL is displayed (see HYPERLINK). Transparency Specifies the transparency of the object (see TRANSPARENCY). Thickness Sets the current 3D thickness. This property does not apply to all objects (see CHPROP).

Cell Border Properties Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Sets the properties of the borders of table cells.

Cell Border Properties Dialog Box | 833

Access Methods
Pointing device: With a table cell selected and the Properties Inspector palette open, click All. Under the Cell section, click the button to the right of the Border Style field.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Properties
Controls the properties of the borders of the selected table cells. Lineweight Sets the lineweight to be used for borders that are displayed. If you use a heavy lineweight, you may have to change the cell margins. Linetype Sets the linetype to be used for borders that are displayed.

834 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Color Sets the color to be used for borders that are displayed. Double Line When checked, a double line border will be added to the selected cells. Spacing Determines the spacing of double-line borders. The default value is .1800.

Preview
Displays a preview of how the borders of the selected table will look. NOTE Linetypes will not display in the preview. All Borders Applies the border properties settings to all borders of the selected table cells. Outside Borders Applies the border properties settings to the outside borders of the selected table cells. Inside Borders Applies the border properties settings to the inside borders of the selected table cells. No Borders Applies the border properties settings to none of the borders of the selected table cells. Top Border Applies the border properties setting to the top borders of the selected table cells. Inside Horizontal Border Applies the border properties setting to the inside horizontal borders of the selected table cells. Bottom Border Applies the border properties setting to the bottom borders of the selected table cells. Left Border Applies the border properties setting to the left borders of the selected table cells. Inside Vertical Border Applies the border properties setting to the inside vertical border of the selected table cells.

Cell Border Properties Dialog Box | 835

Right Border Applies the border properties setting to the right border of the selected table cells.

Lighting Properties
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Light Properties

Sets the properties of the lights.

Summary
Different properties area available depending on the lighting units (standard or photometric) and lighting type (Spotlight on page 996, Pointlight on page 815, or Weblight on page 1133). Other lighting types such as Freespot on page 442, Targetpoint on page 1036, and Freeweb on page 445 display similar properties. By right-clicking on a light and clicking Properties, the Lighting category of the Properties Inspector palette is displayed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

General Properties
The following property settings are available: Name Specifies the name of the light. Type (Light Distribution) Specifies the type of light. Determines the distribution of light from the . The type of lighting can be changed after the light has been added to the drawings.

Spotlight - Default value for Spotlight and Freespot lights. Point - Default for Pointlight and Targetpoint lights. Web - Default for Weblight and Freeweb lights.

On/Off Status Indicates whether the light is on or off. Shadows Indicates if the light is casting a shadow.

836 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Hotspot Angle (Spotlight and Freespot only) Specifies the angle of the brightest cone of light. Falloff Angle (Spotlight and Freespot only) Specifies the outer extremity of the light, where it meets the darkness. Intensity Factor Magnifies the effect of the skylight. Filter Color Specifies the secondary color of the light. Represents the color of a physical filter over the lamp. Default color is white. When lighting is set to photometric units this represents a secondary color filter on the light. When lighting is set to generic lighting this represents the total color of the light. Plot Glyph Allows the ability to plot the drawing with the glyphs on.

Photometric Properties
The following property settings are available: Lamp Color Specifies the inherent color of the light in Kelvin temperature or standard. Resulting Color Reports the final color of the light. This is determined by a combination of the Lamp Color and the Filter Color. (Read-only) Intensity Method Specifies the value in which light intensity should be measured.

Intensity (Candela). Specifies the number of candelas (cd) is the SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction). Flux (Lumen). Represents the rate of total energy leaving the lamp. It is specified in lumens (SI and American). Mathematically, the flux is the integral of the luminous intensity over the sphere. The calculation of flux depends on the distribution of intensities. For a point light with constant intensity, the flux is simply the product of the intensity and the solid angle of a sphere: 4 Pi * Intensity. For a spot light, the flux is the product of the intensity and the solid angle of the hotspot cone, plus the incremental solid angle of the fall-off region. For a weblight, there isnt any analytical formula. The flux is obtained by numerically integrating the intensities provided in the web file. Illuminance (Foot-candles). Represents the energy per area arriving at a surface (Area-flux-density). It is specified in lux (SI) and foot-candles (American). For a near light, because the light rays are diverging, you have to talk about the illuminance at a specific distance from the lamp. So this

Lighting Properties | 837

requires an extra control to specify this distance and an additional affordance in the viewport to show the distance. Lamp Intensity Specifies the brightness of a lamp. More specifically, it represents the luminous intensity, or power in a particular direction. Intensity Factor Magnifies the effect of the skylight. Resulting Intensity Reports the final brightness of the light. This is determined by the product of the Lamp Intensity and the Intensity factor. (Read-only)

PhotometricWeb
The following property settings are available for Web and Freeweb lights: Web File Specifies the data file describing the intensity distribution of the light.

Web Offsets
Under the Web offsets panel, the following property settings are available under the Weblight and Freeweb types of lights: Rotate X Specifies a rotational offset of the web about the optical X axis. Rotate Y Specifies a rotational offset of the web about the optical Y axis. Rotate Z Specifies a rotational offset of the web about the optical Z axis.

Geometry
Under the Geometry panel, the following property settings are available: Position X Specifies the X coordinate position of the light. Position Y Specifies the Y coordinate position of the light. Position Z Specifies the Z coordinate position of the light. Target X Specifies the X coordinate target position of the light. (Spotlight, Targetpoint, and Weblight only) Target Y Specifies the Y coordinate target position of the light. (Spotlight, Targetpoint, and Weblight only) Target Z Specifies the Z coordinate target position of the light. (Spotlight, Targetpoint, and Weblight only) Targeted Specifies if the light displays a target grip for orienting the light. Disabled is the default for Freespot, Pointlight, and Freeweb. Enabled is the default for Spotlight, Targetpoint, and Weblight.

838 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Attenuation
In the real world, the intensity of light diminishes over distance. Objects far from the light source appear darker than objects near the source. This effect is known as attenuation. Attenuation is available under standard lighting workflow only. Under the Attenuation panel the following property settings are available: Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a spotlight, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay.

Inverse Linear (Standard lights only). Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is half as strong as at the point light; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter as strong. The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity. Inverse Square (Photometric lights). Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is one quarter as strong as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one sixteenth as strong. None (Standard lights only). Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the point light are as bright as objects close to the light.

Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits. The default is No. (Standard lights only)

Rendered Shadow Details

Under the Rendered Shadow Details panel, the following property settings are available: Type Specifies the type of shadow cast by the light.

Soft (shadow map). Sets the type to Soft. This selection activates additional options for Map size and Softness. Sharp (default). Sets the rendered shadow to sharp. Soft (sampled). Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is one quarter as strong as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one sixteenth as strong.

Map Size Specifies the size of the shadow map. (Soft shadow map type only)

Lighting Properties | 839

Softness Specifies the softness or fuzziness of the shadow-mapped shadow. (Soft shadow map type only) Samples Specifies the number of shadow rays for the light. (Soft sampled type only) Visible in Render Specifies whether the light shape is actually rendered. The default is No. (Soft sampled type only) Shape Specifies the shape of the lamp bulb. For the Spotlight distribution type selection under the General panel, options are Rectangle (default) and Disk. For Point and Web types the options are Linear, Rectangle, Disk, Cylinder and Sphere (default). (Soft sampled type only) Length Specifies spacial dimension of shadow shape for the length of the shadow. (Soft sampled type only) Width Specifies spacial dimension of shape for the width of the shadow. (Soft sampled type only) Radius Specifies spacial radius dimension of the shape selection of disk, cylinder, or sphere. (Soft sampled type only)

Sun & Sky Properties

Quick Reference
See also:

Sun and Sky Simulation

Sets the properties of the sun and sky.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Sun - Sun Angle

Source Vector Displays the coordinates of the direction of the sun. This setting is read-only. Date and Time Displays the current date and time setting.

840 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Longitude Displays the longitude of the current location. You can enter a value or select a location on the map. (LONGITUDE on page 1403 system variable) The valid range is -180 to +180 as a floating point number. Latitude Sets the latitude of the current location. You can enter a value or select a location on the map. (LATITUDE on page 1383 system variable) The valid range is -90 and +90 as a floating point number. Daylight Saving Displays the current setting for daylight saving time. Azimuth Displays the angle of the sun along the horizon clockwise from due north. This setting is read-only. Altitude Displays the angle of the sun vertically from the horizon. The maximum is 90 degrees, or directly overhead. This setting is read-only. Display Sun Light Turns the sun on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect. Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the sun. The range is from 0 (no light) to maximum. The higher the number, the brighter the light. Color Controls the color of the light. Cast Shadows Turns display and calculation of shadows for the sun on and off. Turning shadows off increases performance.

Sun - Sun Disk Appearance

Disk Scale Specifies the scale of the sun disk (1.0 = correct size). Glow Intensity Specifies the intensity of the sun glow. Values are 0.0-25.0. Disk Intensity Specifies the intensity of the sun disk. Values are 0.0-25.0.

Sky
Display Sky Determines if the sky illumination is computed at render time. This has no impact on the viewport illumination or the background. It simply makes the sky available as a gathered light source for rendering. Note this does not control the background. Intensity Factor Provides a way to magnify the effect of the skylight. Values are 0.0-MAX. [1.0] is default. Haze Determines the magnitude of scattering effects in the atmosphere. Values are 0.0-15.0. [0.0] is default.

Sun & Sky Properties | 841

Sky - Sky Horizon

Height Determines the absolute position of the ground plane relative to world zero. This parameter represents a world-space length and should be formatted in the current length unit. Values are -10.0 to +10.0 [0.0] is default. Blur Determines the amount of blurring between ground plane and sky. Values are 0-10. [.1] is default. Ground Color Determines the color of the ground plane.

Sky - Advanced Sky

Night Color Specifies the color of the night sky. Aerial Perspective Specifies if aerial perspective is applied. Values are On/Off. Visibility Distance Specifies the distance at which 10% haze occlusion results. Values are 0.0-MAX.

Rendered Shadow Details

Type Displays the setting for shadow type. This setting is read-only when display of shadows is turned off. The selections are Sharp, Soft (mapped) which display the Map size option and Soft (area) which displays the Samples option. Soft (area) is the only option for the sun in photometric workflow (LIGHTINGUNITS = 1 or 2). Samples Specifies the number of samples to take on the solar disk. This setting is read-only when display of shadows is turned off. Values are 0-1000. Softness Displays the setting for the appearance of the edges of shadows. This setting is read-only when display of shadows is turned off. Values are 1-10.

PROPERTIESCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Closes the Properties Inspector palette.

Summary
The Properties Inspector palette closes.

842 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PSETUPIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Page Setup Settings

Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout.

Summary
The Select Page Setup From File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed in which you can select the drawing (.dwg), template (.dwt), or drawing interchange format (.dxf) file whose page setups you want to import. If FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero) and you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt, PSETUPIN displays command prompts. When you select the drawing file that you want to use, the Import Page Setups dialog box is displayed.

-PSETUPIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Page Setup Settings

If you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. Enter file name: Enter the name of the drawing file that contains the pagesetup to import Enter user defined page setup to import or [?]: Enter the name of the page setup to import

PSETUPIN | 843

PSPACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work on the Model Layout

In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space.

Summary
The program switches from model space to paper space when you are working on a named (paper space) layout.

On the named layout, use paper space to create a finished layout of a drawing for printing. As part of designing your layout, you create layout viewports, which are windows containing different views of the model. By switching from paper space to model space (see MSPACE), you can edit the model and views within the current layout viewport. You can make a viewport current by double-clicking inside it. You can switch to paper space by double-clicking an area of the paper space layout that is not within a viewport. You can also switch between layouts by using the Layouts dropdown list or QuickView on the status bar.

844 | Chapter 16 P Commands

PURGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Erase Objects

Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.

Summary
Entering purge or -purge at the Command prompt displays options related to removing unused named objects and some empty geometric objects. Unused named objects can be removed from the current drawing. These include include block definitions, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles. Zero-length geometry and empty text objects can also be removed. NOTE The PURGE command will not remove unnamed objects (zero-length geometry or empty text and mtext objects) from blocks or locked layers.

-PURGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Erase Objects

Removes unused named objects, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing at the Command prompt.

Summary
Allows you to remove unused named objects from a drawing at the Command prompt. You can only remove one level of reference at a time. Repeat the command until there are no unreferenced, named objects. NOTE The PURGE command will not remove unnamed objects (zero-length geometry or empty text and mtext objects) from blocks or locked layers.

PURGE | 845

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Type of Unused Objects to Purge

Deletes unused applications from blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, materials, multileader styles, plot styles, shapes, text styles, multiline styles, table styles, visual styles, regapps, zero-length geometry, empty text objects, or all. Enter Name (s) to Purge Enter an object name of * to list the objects. Verify Each Name to Be Purged? Enter y to verify each name.

PYRAMID
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid Pyramid

Creates a 3D solid pyramid.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Solid Primitives flyout Pyramid Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Pyramid

Summary
By default, a pyramid is defined by the center of the base point, a point on the middle of the edge, and another point that determines the height.

846 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Initially, the default base radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value for any solid primitive. Use the Top Radius option to create a pyramid frustum.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Edge Specifies the length of one edge of the base of the pyramid; you pick two points. Specify first endpoint of edge: Specify a point Specify second endpoint of edge: Specify a point Sides Specifies the number of sides for the pyramid. You can enter a number from 3 to 32. Specify number of sides <default>: Specify a diameter or press Enter to specify the default value Initially, the number of sides for the pyramid is set to 4. During a drawing session, the default value for the number of sides is always the previously entered value for the number of sides. Inscribed Specifies that the base of the pyramid is inscribed within (drawn within) the base radius of the pyramid.

PYRAMID | 847

Circumscribed Specifies that the pyramid is circumscribed around (drawn around) the base radius of the pyramid. 2Point Specifies that the height of the pyramid is the distance between two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the pyramid axis. This endpoint is the top of the pyramid. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the pyramid. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point Top Radius Specifies the top radius of the pyramid, creating a pyramid frustum. Specify top radius: Enter a value Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius value for any solid primitive. Specify height or [2Point (Two Points)/Axis Endpoint] <default>: Specify a height, enter an option, or press Enter to specify the default height value

2Point. Specifies that the height of the pyramid is the distance between two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point

Axis Endpoint. Specifies the endpoint location for the pyramid axis. This endpoint is the top of the pyramid. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the pyramid. Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point

848 | Chapter 16 P Commands

Q Commands

QDIM
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Dimensioning

Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group Quick Dimension Menu: Dimension Quick Dimension

Summary
This command is particularly useful for creating a series of baseline or continued dimensions, or for dimensioning a series of circles and arcs.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

849

Select geometry to dimension: Select the objects you want to dimension or the dimensions you want to edit and press Enter Specify dimension line position, or [Continuous/Staggered/Baseline/Ordinate/Radius/Diameter/datumPoint/Edit/seTtings] <current>: Enter an option or press Enter Continuous Creates a series of continued dimensions. Staggered Creates a series of staggered dimensions. Baseline Creates a series of baseline dimensions. Ordinate Creates a series of ordinate dimensions. Radius Creates a series of radial dimensions. Diameter Creates a series of diameter dimensions. Datum Point Sets a new datum point for baseline and ordinate dimensions. Edit Edits a series of dimensions. You are prompted to add or remove points from existing dimensions. Settings Sets the default object snap for specifying extension line origins.

QLEADER
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Leaders Create and Modify Leaders

Creates a leader and leader annotation.

Summary
It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER on page 652 command to create leader objects. You can use QLEADER to

Specify leader annotation and annotation format Set the location where leaders attach to multiline text annotation

850 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Limit the number of leader points Constrain the angle of the first and second leader segments

You can use the Leader Settings dialog box to customize the command so that it prompts you for the number of leader points and the annotation type suited to your drawing needs. If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC, the leader start point can be associated with a location on an object. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line stretches, but the text or feature control frame remains in place.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first leader point, or [Settings] <Settings>: Specify the first leader point, or press Enter to specify leader settings

First Leader Point

The Number of Points setting on the Leader Line & Arrow tab of the Leader Settings dialog box determines the number of leader points you are prompted to specify. Width If you set the text width value to 0.00, the width of the multiline text is unlimited. Tolerance If Tolerance is selected on the Annotation tab, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box is displayed. Use the dialog box to create the tolerance feature control frame. Enter block name or [?]: Enter the name, or enter ? to display a list of blocks defined in the drawing Insertion Point For a description of the insertion options, see -INSERT on page 520.

Settings
Displays the Leader Settings dialog box.

QLEADER | 851

Leader Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Create Leaders Create and Modify Leaders

Creates a leader and leader annotation.

Summary
Customizes the QLEADER command and sets properties for leaders and leader annotations.

List of Tabs
The following tabs are displayed.

Annotation Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)

Annotation Type
Sets the leader annotation type. The type you select changes the QLEADER leader annotation prompt. MText

852 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Prompts you to create multiline text (mtext) annotation. Copy an Object Prompts you to copy a multiline text, single-line text, tolerance, or block reference object and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. The display of the hook line depends on the object copied. Tolerance Displays the Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to create a feature control frame to attach to the leader. Block Reference Prompts you to insert a block reference. The block reference is inserted at an offset from the end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line, meaning that if the block moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. No hook line is displayed. None Creates a leader with no annotation.

MText Options
The options are available only when the multiline text annotation type is selected. Prompt for Width Prompts you to specify the width of the multiline text annotation. Always Left Justify Left-justifies the multiline text annotation, regardless of leader location. Frame Text Places a frame around multiline text annotation.

Annotation Reuse
Sets options for reusing leader annotation. None Does not reuse leader annotation. Reuse Next

Leader Settings Dialog Box | 853

Reuses the next annotation you create for all subsequent leaders. Reuse Current Reuses current annotation. This option is automatically selected when you reuse annotation after selecting Reuse Next.

Leader Line & Arrow Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)

Leader Line
Sets the leader line format. Straight Creates straight-line segments between the points you specify. Spline Creates a spline object using the leader points you specify as control points.

Arrowhead
Defines the leader arrowhead. The arrowheads are also available for dimension lines (DIMSTYLE command). If you select User Arrow, a list of blocks in the drawing is displayed.

Number of Points
Sets the number of leader points that QLEADER prompts you to specify before prompting for the leader annotation. For example, if you set the points to 3, QLEADER automatically prompts you to specify the annotation after you

854 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

specify two leader points. Set the number to one more than the number of leader segments you want to create. If you set the option to No Limit, QLEADER prompts for leader points until you press Enter.

Angle Constraints
Sets angle constraints for the first and second leader lines. First Segment Sets the angle of the first leader segment. Second Segment Sets the angle of the second leader segment.

Attachment Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)

Sets the attachment location for leader lines and multiline text annotation. This tab is available only when Mtext is selected on the Annotation tab.

Top of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the top of the top multiline text line. Middle of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the middle of the top multiline text line. Middle of Multiline Text Attaches the leader line at the middle of the multiline text.

Leader Settings Dialog Box | 855

Middle of Bottom Line Attaches the leader line at the middle of the bottom multiline text line. Bottom of Bottom Line Attaches the leader line at the bottom of the bottom multiline text line. Underline Bottom Line Underlines the bottom multiline text line.

QNEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Drawing Template File

Starts a new drawing from a selected drawing template file.

Summary
QNEW creates a new drawing from the default drawing template file and folder path specified in Default Template File Name for QNEW in the Application section of the Application Preferences dialog box. When a default drawing template file is set to None or is not specified, QNEW displays the Select Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). If the system variable, FILEDIA, is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt is displayed.

QSAVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

856 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Saves the current drawing using the specified default file format.

Access Methods
Menu: File Save

Summary
If the drawing is named, the program saves the drawing and does not request a new file name. Use the SAVEAS command if you need to save a drawing with a different name. If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS command to save the changed file under a different name. If the drawing is unnamed, the Save Drawing As dialog box (see SAVEAS) is displayed and the drawing is saved with the file name and format you specify. NOTE The file format specified in the Application tab of the Application Preferences dialog box is used when saving a drawing with this command.

QTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text

Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects.

Summary
When QTEXT (Quick Text) is on, each text and attribute object is displayed as a bounding box around the text object. Turning QTEXT mode on reduces the time it takes the program to redraw and regenerate drawings that contain many text objects.

QTEXT | 857

QUIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Start a Drawing

Exits the program.

Access Methods
Menu: AutoCAD for Mac Quit AutoCAD for Mac

Summary
Quits the program if there have been no changes since the drawing was last saved. If the drawing has been modified, you are prompted to save or discard the changes before quitting. You can quit a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made no modifications or if you are willing to discard them. To save modifications to a read-only drawing, use the SAVEAS command to save the drawing under another name.

QUICKVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing

Displays a list of all open drawings, and the layouts contained in the current drawing or the selected drawing when more than one drawing is open.

Access

Toolbar: Status bar Show Drawings & Layouts

858 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Toolbar: Status bar Model/Layout drop-down Show Drawings & Layouts Command entry: Cmd-.

Summary
Displays the QuickView dialog box. Drawing previews are displayed vertically along the left, while the layout previews of the selected drawing are displayed on the right. The preview for Model is always located in the top-left of the layout previews.

QuickView Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing

Displays a list of all open drawings and the layouts in the current drawing.

QuickView Dialog Box | 859

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Drawing List
Displays a list of all open drawings. Double-clicking a thumbnail to set that drawing current. You can also right-click a thumbnail to display a shortcut menu of additional file management options. The following items are on the Drawing shortcut menu:

Save. - Saves the drawing using its current name and location. Close <drawing>. - Closes the drawing. You are prompted to save changes if the drawing has been changed since it was last saved. Close All. - Closes all open drawings. You are prompted to save any drawings that have been changed before they are closed. Duplicate. - Allows you to create a copy of the drawing. The Save Drawing As dialog box is displayed (see SAVEAS on page 910). Create New Layout. - Adds a new layout to the drawing. The Create/Duplicate Layout dialog box is displayed. Enter a name for the new layout.

Layouts List
Displays a list of all layouts in the current drawings. Double-clicking a thumbnail switch to that layout. You can also right-click a thumbnail to display a shortcut menu of additional layout management options. The following items are on the Layout shortcut menu:

Rename. - Allows you to change the name of the layout. The Model layout cannot be renamed. Duplicate. - Creates a copy of the selected layout. The Create/Duplicate Layout dialog box is displayed. Enter a name for the new layout. Delete. - Removes the layout from the drawing. Duplicate. - Allows you to create a copy of the drawing. The Save Drawing As dialog box is diaplayed (see SAVEAS on page 910). Create New Layout. - Adds a new layout to the drawing. The Create/Duplicate Layout dialog box is displayed. Enter a name for the new layout.

860 | Chapter 17 Q Commands

Print. - Allows you to output the layout to hardcopy or PDF. The Print dialog box on page 794 is displayed. NOTE You can select more than one layout to print from the QuickView dialog box.

Page Setup. - Allows you to manage the output settings for the layout. The Page Setup Manager on page 748 is displayed.

QuickView Dialog Box | 861

862

R Commands

RAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Construction Lines (and Rays)

Creates a line that starts at a point and continues to infinity.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group (expanded) Ray Menu: Draw Ray

Summary
The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the direction defined by the starting point and the through point. The prompt for a through point is redisplayed so you can create multiple rays. Press Enter to end the command.

863

Lines that extend to infinity in one direction, known as rays, can be used as references for creating other objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point: Specify a point (1) Specify through point: Specify a point for the ray to pass through (2)

RECOVER
Quick Reference
See also:

Repair a Damaged Drawing File

Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file.

Summary
The program extracts as much material as it can from the damaged file. Files that can be recovered include DWG, DWT, and DWS files. Performing a recover on a DXF file will only open the file.

864 | Chapter 18 R Commands

In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), enter the drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file. Results are displayed in the text window. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), RECOVER displays the following command prompt. Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File dialog box.

RECTANG
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Rectangles and Polygons

Creates a rectangular polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group Rectangle Menu: Draw Rectangle

Summary
With this command, you can specify the rectangle parameters (length, width, rotation) and control the type of corners (fillet, chamfer, or square).

RECTANG | 865

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Rotation = 0 Specify first corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: Specify a point or enter an option

First Corner Point

Specifies a corner point of the rectangle. Other Corner Point Creates a rectangle using the specified points as diagonally opposite corners.

Area Creates a rectangle using the area and either a length or a width. If the Chamfer or Fillet option is active, the area includes the effect of the chamfers or fillets on the corners of the rectangle. Dimensions Creates a rectangle using length and width values. Rotation Creates a rectangle at a specified rotation angle.

Chamfer
Sets the chamfer distances for the rectangle.

Elevation
Specifies the elevation of the rectangle.

Fillet
Specifies the fillet radius of the rectangle.

Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the rectangle.

Width
Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn.

866 | Chapter 18 R Commands

REDEFINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Built-in Commands in Macros

Restores AutoCAD internal commands overridden by UNDEFINE.

Summary
If a command has been undefined, you can still use it if you precede the command name with a period. Enter the name of an AutoCAD command turned off by the UNDEFINE command.

REDO
Quick Reference
See also:

Correct Mistakes

Reverses the effects of previous UNDO or U command.

Access Methods
Menu: Edit Redo Shortcut menu: With no command active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Redo. Command entry: Cmd-Y

Summary
REDO reverses the effects of a single UNDO or U command. REDO must immediately follow the U or UNDO command.

REDEFINE | 867

REDRAW
Quick Reference
See also:

Erase Objects

Refreshes the display in the current viewport.

Access Methods
Menu: View Redraw Command entry: 'redraw for transparent use

Summary
When BLIPMODE is on, marker blips left by editing commands are removed from the current viewport.

REDRAWALL
Quick Reference
See also:

Erase Objects

Refreshes the display in all viewports.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'redrawall for transparent use

868 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Summary
When BLIPMODE is on, marker blips left by editing commands are removed from all viewports.

REGEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text

Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport.

Access Methods
Menu: View Regen

Summary
REGEN regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in the current viewport. It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance.

REGEN | 869

REGENALL
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text

Regenerates the drawing and refreshes all viewports.

Access Methods
Menu: View Regen All

Summary
REGENALL regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in all viewports. It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance.

REGENAUTO
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text

Controls automatic regeneration of a drawing.

870 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Access Methods
Command entry: 'regenauto for transparent use

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press Enter On Regenerates the drawing immediately if any suppressed regenerations exist in the queue and continues to regenerate automatically whenever you perform an action that requires regeneration. Off Inhibits regeneration of the drawing until you use the REGEN or REGENALL command, or set REGENAUTO to on. If you perform an action that requires a regeneration and that action is irrevocable (such as thawing layers), the following message is displayed: Regen queued If you perform an action that requires a regeneration and that action is revocable, the following message is displayed: About to regenproceed? If you click OK, the drawing is regenerated. If you click Cancel, the last action is cancelled and the drawing is not regenerated.

REGION
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object.

Access Methods

Button

REGION | 871

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) Region Menu: Draw Region

Summary
Regions are two-dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops. Closed polylines, lines, and curves are valid selections. Curves include circular arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, ellipses, and splines. You can combine several regions into a single, complex region.

Closed 2D and exploded planar 3D polylines in the selection set are converted to separate regions and then converts polylines, lines, and curves to form closed planar loops (outer boundaries and holes of a region). If more than two curves share an endpoint, the resulting region might be arbitrary. The boundary of the region consists of end-connected curves where each point shares only two edges. All intersections and self-intersecting curves are rejected. If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit option of PEDIT, the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the smoothed polyline. The polyline is not converted to a spline object. REGION deletes the original objects after converting them to regions unless the system variable DELOBJ is set to 0. If the original objects were hatched, hatch associativity is lost. To restore associativity, rehatch the region.

872 | Chapter 18 R Commands

RENAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Resolve Name Conflicts in External References

Changes the names assigned to items such as layers and dimension styles.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Rename

Summary
Named objects are categories of items such as layers, dimension styles, table styles, text styles, and so on. It is strongly recommended that you create standard naming conventions for them and save them in drawing template files. The Rename dialog box is displayed. If you enter -rename at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Rename Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Resolve Name Conflicts in External References

Changes the names assigned to named objects such as layers and dimension styles.

RENAME | 873

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Named Objects Lists named objects in a drawing by category. Items Displays items of the type specified in Named Objects.

-RENAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Resolve Name Conflicts in External References

Changes the names assigned to named objects from the Command prompt.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter object type to rename [Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Material/multileadeRstyle/Plotstyle/textStyle/Tablestyle/Ucs/VIew/VPort]: Enter a named object type to rename an object Enter old object name: Enter the old name

874 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Enter new object name: Enter the new name

RENDER
Quick Reference
See also:

Render 3D Objects for Realism

Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Render tool group Render Menu: View Render Render

Summary
The RENDER command begins the rendering process and displays the rendered image in the Render Window on page 876.

By default, all objects in the current view in the drawing are rendered. If a named view is not specified, the current view is rendered. If you enter -render at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

RENDER | 875

Render Window
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Displays rendered output of the current model

Summary
From the Render Window, you can

Save the image to a file. Monitor the progress of the current rendering.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

876 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Image Pane
Primary output target of the renderer.

Progress Meter
Displays the overall progress of the current rendering. Clicking the X icon next to the progress meter, or by pressing Esc to cancel the current rendering.

Save
Displays the Render Output File dialog box where you can save the image to disk.

Render Output File Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Saves a rendering to a raster image file.

Summary
The Render Output File dialog box is a standard file selection dialog boxes. You specify the file name of the image you want to save and the output file format. In this dialog box, you can only choose from raster image output file formats. The file formats for saving your rendered images to include the following:

List of Options
The following options are displayed. BMP (*.bmp) BMP files are still-image bitmap files in the Windows bitmap (.bmp) format. Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the BMP Image Options dialog box. PCX (*.pcx) PCX files are relatively simple files that provide minimum compression using run length encoding (RLE).

Render Output File Dialog Box | 877

Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the PCX Image Options dialog box. TGA (*.tga) The Targa (TGA) format supports up to 32-bit true color. This format is typically used as a true color format to render still images. Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the Targa Image Options dialog box. TIF (*.tif) TIF (Tagged Image File) format is a multiplatform bitmap format. TIF is a common choice if you plan to send your output to a print service bureau or import the image into a page-layout program. Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the TIFF Image Options dialog box. JPEG (*.jpg) JPEG (.jpeg or .jpg) files follow the standards set by the Joint Photography Experts Group. These files use a variable compression method that is called lossy compression because of the loss of image quality as you increase the compression. However, the JPEG compression scheme is extremely good and you can sometimes compress the file up to 200:1 without severe loss of image quality. JPEG is consequently a popular format for posting image files on the Internet for minimum file size and minimum download time. Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the JPEG Image Options dialog box. PNG (*.png) PNG (Portable Network Graphics) is a still-image file format developed for use with the Internet and World Wide Web. PNG is a format that generates a compressed image without any loss of quality, unlike the loss of quality found in JPEG files. Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the PNG Image Options dialog box.

BMP Image Options Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Options used when saving a rendering to a BMP image file.

878 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Summary
When BMP is chosen as the output format, the BMP Image Options dialog box is displayed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

PCX Image Options Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Options used when saving a rendering to a PCX image file.

Summary
When PCX is chosen as the output format, the PCX Image Options dialog box is displayed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Color
Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray.

Render Output File Dialog Box | 879

8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors.

Targa Image Options Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Options used when saving a rendering to a TGA image file.

Summary
When TGA is chosen as the output format, the Targa Image Options dialog box is displayed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Color
8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 24 Bits (16.7 Million Colors) Creates a 24 bit color image that uses a 16.7 million color palette. 32 Bits (24 Bits + Alpha) Creates a 24 bit color image that includes an 8 bit alpha channel. Alpha is a type of data, found in 32-bit image files, that assigns transparency to the pixels in the image.

Bottom Up
Saves the image from bottom to top.

880 | Chapter 18 R Commands

TIFF Image Options Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Options used when saving a rendering to a TIFF image file.

Summary
When TIF is chosen as the output format, the TIFF Image Options dialog box is displayed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Color
Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 24 Bits (16.7 Million Colors) Creates a 24 bit color image that uses a 16.7 million color palette. 32 Bits (24 Bits + Alpha) Creates a 24 bit color image that includes an 8 bit alpha channel. Alpha is a type of data, found in 32-bit image files, that assigns transparency to the pixels in the image.

Compressed
Applies lossless compression to the file.

Dots Per Inch

Sets the dots per inch (dpi) for the saved image. This setting does not change the resolution of the final image, but can affect the way it prints in documents.

Render Output File Dialog Box | 881

JPEG Image Options Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Options used when saving a rendering to a JPEG image file.

Summary
When JPG is chosen as the output format, the JPEG Image Options dialog box is displayed.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Image Control
Quality Sets the level of quality: the higher the quality, the larger the file size. In general, files compressed with the slider set to Best have compression ratios between 5:1 and 15:1. File Size Sets the size of file you want: the larger the file, the higher the quality.

PNG Image Options Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Options used when saving a rendering to a PNG image file.

Summary
When PNG is chosen as the output format, the PNG Image Options dialog box is displayed.

882 | Chapter 18 R Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Color
Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 16 Bits (65,536 Grayscale) Creates a grayscale 16-bit image that uses 65,536 shades of gray. 24 Bits (16.7 Million Colors) Creates a larger, true color (24-bit) file. 32 Bits (24 Bits + Alpha) Creates a 24 bit color image that includes an 8 bit alpha channel. Alpha is a type of data, found in 32-bit image files, that assigns transparency to the pixels in the image.

Progressive
Provides faster display in Web browsers.

Dots Per Inch

Sets the dots per inch (dpi) for the saved image. This setting does not change the resolution of the final image, but can affect the way it prints in documents.

-RENDER
Quick Reference
See also:

Render Views, Selected Objects, or Cropped Content

Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model from the Command prompt.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify render preset [Draft/Low/Medium/High/Presentation/Other] <Medium>: Enter an option or press Enter

-RENDER | 883

Specify render destination [Render Window/Viewport] <Render Window>: Enter an option or press Enter

Draft

Draft is the lowest level standard render preset. This setting is intended for very fast, test renderings where anti-aliasing is bypassed and sample filtering is very low. This render preset produces very low quality rendering, but results in the fastest rendering speed.

Low

The Low render preset provides better quality than the Draft preset. Anti-aliasing is bypassed but sample filtering is improved. Raytracing is also active, by default, so better quality shading occurs. This preset is best used for test rendering that requires better quality than Draft.

Medium

You can expect much better sample filtering and anti-aliasing is active when you use the Medium render preset. Raytracing is active with increased reflection depth settings when compared to the Low render preset. This preset offers a good balance between quality and render speed.

884 | Chapter 18 R Commands

High

The High we preset matches the Medium preset settings with regards to anti-aliasing, but sample filtering and raytracing is improved. Due to the improved sample filtering and raytracing, rendered images take longer to process, but the image quality is much better.

Presentation

The Presentation render preset is used for high quality, photo-realistic rendered images and takes the longest to process. Sample filtering and raytracing is further improved. Since this preset is used for final renderings, global illumination settings are commonly used in conjunction.

Other
The Other option allows you to specify a custom render preset if one or more are present. ?List Custom Render Presets Lists all the custom render presets that are stored with the model. Only custom render presets are listed.

Render Window
The image will be displayed in the render window when processing in complete. Output Width/Height The output width and height values designate how wide and how tall the rendered image is going to be. Both values are measured in pixels. Save rendering to a file You can save the image to one of the following file formats: BMP, TGA, TIF, PCX, JPG, or PNG. If you accept the default value of No, the Render Window is displayed and the image is rendered. Answering Yes results in another prompt:

Viewport
If you choose Viewport, anything that is currently displayed in the viewport gets rendered.

-RENDER | 885

RENDERENVIRONMENT
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Rendering Environment

Controls visual cues for the apparent distance of objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Render tool group Render Environment Menu: View Render Render Environment

Summary
The Render Environment dialog box is displayed.

Render Environment Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Rendering Environment

Defines the cues for distance between objects and the current viewing direction.

886 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Summary
Fog and depth cueing are atmospheric effects that cause objects to appear to fade as they increase in distance from the camera. Fog uses a white color while depth cueing uses black.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Fog and Depth Cue

Enable Fog Turns fog on and off without affecting the other settings in the dialog box. Color Specifies the color of the fog. Near Distance Specifies the distance from the camera where the fog begins. It is specified as a percentage of the distance to the far clipping plane. The Near Distance setting cannot be greater than the Far Distance setting. Far Distance Specifies the distance from the camera where the fog ends. It is specified as a percentage of the distance to the far clipping plane. The Far Distance setting cannot be less than the Near Distance setting. Near Fog Percentage Specifies the opacity of the fog at the near distance. Far Fog Percentage Specifies the opacity of the fog at the far distance.

Render Environment Dialog Box | 887

RENDEROUTPUTSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Specifies the image size to create when rendering a 3D model.

Summary
Displays the Output Size dialog box on page 888. If you enter -renderoutputsize at the Command prompt, options are displayed on page 889.

Output Size Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Sets the output image size when rendering a 3D model.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

888 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Output Image Size (Pixels) List of commonly used output sizes. Choose Custom to specify the output width and height for the image. Width (Pixels) Sets the width resolution of the output image, in pixels. The valid range for the width is 8 to 4096. Height (Pixels) Sets the height resolution of the output image, in pixels. The valid range for the height is 8 to 4096. Aspect Ratio Sets the aspect ratio, the ratio of width to height, of the rendered image. Changing this value changes the Height value to maintain the correct dimensions for the active resolution. The image aspect value is always expressed as a multiplier value. Lock Aspect Ratio Locks the aspect ratio when using a custom output resolution. When it is locked, the Width and Height spinners are locked to each other; adjusting one alters the other to maintain the aspect-ratio value. When unlocked, changes to either Width or Height affects only the Aspect Ratio setting. NOTE In viewports, the camera's frustum changes to reflect the image aspect ratio you set in the Output Size dialog box. This change takes place when you exit the dialog box.

-RENDEROUTPUTSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Specifies the image size to create when rendering a 3D model.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed: Enter render output width: Enter a width and press Enter Enter render output height: Enter a height and press Enter

-RENDEROUTPUTSIZE | 889

The valid range for the width and height is 8 to 4096.

RENDERWIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Basics of Rendering

Displays the Render window without starting a rendering operation.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Render tool group (expanded) Show Render Window

Summary
The Render Window is displayed, but a rendering of the current drawing is not initiated. If the drawing was previously rendered, you can view and save the rendered image.

RESETBLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings

Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block definition.

890 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a dynamic block reference in a drawing. Right-click in the drawing area and click Reset Block.

RESETPALETTES
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify the Behavior of Palettes

Resets all palettes to their default placement settings.

Summary
Menu: Window Reset Palettes

Summary
The Reset Palettes message box is displayed. Resetting palettes closes and restarts AutoCAD for Mac.

List of Options
The following prompts are displayed. Reset Palettes & Restart Closes and restarts AutoCAD for Mac. After AutoCAD for Mac restarts, the placement of all palettes is reset to their default settings. Dont Reset Palettes The Reset Palettes message box is closed and all palettes are left unchanged.

RESUME
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Command Scripts

RESETPALETTES | 891

Continues an interrupted script.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'resume for transparent use

Summary
You can interrupt a macro script that is running by pressing Esc or Backspace. Any error encountered while processing input from a script file causes the script to be suspended. If a script is suspended while the program is active, you can use RESUME to continue the script.

REVCLOUD
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Revision Clouds

Creates a revision cloud using a polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) Revision Cloud Menu: Draw Revision Cloud

892 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Summary

NOTE REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry. This value is multiplied by DIMSCALE to provide consistency when the program is used with drawings that have different scale factors. You can create a new revision cloud by dragging your cursor, or you can convert a closed object such as an ellipse or polyline into a revision cloud. Use revision clouds to highlight parts of a drawing that are being reviewed.

The resulting object is a polyline.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Minimum arc length: 0.5000 Maximum arc length: 0.5000 Specify start point or [Arc length/Object/Style] <Object>: Drag to draw the revision cloud, enter an option, or press Enter Arc Length Specifies the length of the arcs in a revision cloud. The maximum arc length cannot be set to more than three times the minimum arc length. Object Specifies an object to be converted to a revision cloud. Style Specifies the style of the revision cloud.

REVCLOUD | 893

REVERSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Polylines

Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Modify tool group (expanded) Reverse

Summary
For example, when a linetype with text is specified with relative rotation in a LIN file, the text in the linetype might be displayed upside down. Reversing the vertices of the object changes the orientation of the text.

The REVERSE command does not change the orientation of text where rotation is specified as upright. For more information, see Text in Custom Linetypes.

REVOLVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving

894 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Solid Creation flyout Revolve Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Revolve

Summary
Open profiles create surfaces and closed profiles can create either a solid or a surface. The MOde option controls is a solid of surface is created. When creating a surface, SURFACEMODELINGMODE on page 1509 system variable controls if a procedural or NURBS surface is created.

Revolve path and profile curves can be:

Open or closed Planar or non-planar Solid and surface edges

REVOLVE | 895

A single object (to extrude multiple lines, convert them to a single object with the JOIN on page 533 command) A single region (to extrude multiple regions, convert them to a single object with the REGION command)

To automatically delete the profile, use the DELOBJ system variable. If associativity on page 1507 is on, the DELOBJ system variable is ignored and the originating geometry is not deleted.

Objects That Can Be Revolved

Surfaces Solids Arcs Circles Elliptical arcs 2D and 3D splines 2D and 3D polylines Regions 2D solids Traces Ellipses

NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. You cannot revolve objects contained within a block or objects that will self-intersect. REVOLVE ignores the width of a polyline and revolves from the center of the path of the polyline. The right-hand rule determines the positive direction of rotation. For more information, see Control the User Coordinate System in 3D.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Objects to Revolve Specifies the objects to be revolved about an axis. Mode Controls whether the revolve action creates a solid or a surface. Surfaces are extended as either NURBS surfaces or procedural surfaces, depending on the SURFACEMODELINGMODE on page 1509 system variable. Axis Start Point Specifies the first point of the axis of revolution. The positive axis direction is from the first to the second point. Axis Endpoint Sets the endpoint for the axis of revolution. Start Angle Specifies an offset for the revolution from the plane of the object being revolved.

896 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Drag your cursor to specify and preview the start angle of the object. Angle of Revolution Specifies how far the selected object revolves about the axis. A positive angle revolves the objects in a counterclockwise direction. A negative angle revolves the objects in a clockwise direction. You can also drag the cursor to specify and preview the angle of revolution.

Object Specifies an existing object to be used as an axis. The positive axis direction is from the closest to the farthest endpoint of this object.

You can use lines, linear polyline segments, and linear edges of solids or surfaces as an axis. NOTE Select an edge subobject by pressing Ctrl while you select an edge. X (Axis) Sets the positive X axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction.

REVOLVE | 897

Y (Axis) Sets the positive Y axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction.

Z (Axis) Sets the positive Z axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction. Reverse Changes the direction of the revolve; similar to entering a - (minus) angle value. The revolved object on the right shows a spline revolved at the same angle as the object on the left, but using the reverse option.

Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the revolve angle. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations.

REVSURF
Quick Reference
See also:

Construct Meshes from Other Objects

Creates a mesh by revolving a profile about an axis.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Meshes Revolved Meshes

898 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Summary
Select a line, arc, circle, or 2D or 3D polyline to sweep in a circular path around a selected axis.

The MESHTYPE system variable sets which type of mesh is created. Mesh objects are created by default. Set the variable to 0 to create legacy polyface or polygon mesh. The density of the generated mesh is controlled by the SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2 system variables. SURFTAB1 specifies the number of tabulation lines that are drawn in the direction of revolution. If the path curve is a line, arc, circle, or spline-fit polyline, SURFTAB2 specifies the number of tabulation lines that are drawn to divide it into equal-sized intervals. If the path curve is a polyline that has not been spline fit, tabulation lines are drawn at the ends of straight segments, and each arc segment is divided into the number of intervals specified by SURFTAB2.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current SURFTAB2=current Object to revolve Select a line, arc, circle, or 2D or 3D polyline. Object that defines axis of revolution Select a line or open 2D or 3D polyline. The axis direction cannot be parallel to the plane of the original object.

REVSURF | 899

The path curve is swept about the selected axis to define the mesh. The path curve defines the N direction of the mesh. Selecting a circle or a closed polyline as the path curve closes the mesh in the N direction.

The vector from the first to the last vertex of the polyline determines the rotation axis. Any intermediate vertices are ignored. The axis of revolution determines the M direction of the mesh. Start Angle If set to a nonzero value, starts the mesh of revolution at an offset from the generating path curve. Specifying a start angle starts the mesh of revolution at an offset from the generating path curve. Included Angle Specifies how far about the axis of revolution the mesh extends. The included angle is the distance through which the path curve is swept. Entering an included angle that is less than a full circle prevents the circle from closing.

900 | Chapter 18 R Commands

The point you use to select the axis of revolution affects the direction of revolution. The mesh in the following example was created by specifying a start angle of 0 degrees and an included angle of 90 degrees.

ROTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Rotate Objects

Rotates objects around a base point.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Move/Rotate/Scale tool group Rotate Menu: Modify Rotate Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotat. Right-click in the drawing area and click Rotate.

Summary
You can rotate selected objects around a base point to an absolute angle.

ROTATE | 901

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current positive angle in UCS: ANGDIR=current ANGBASE=current Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish Specify base point: Specify a point Specify rotation angle or [Copy/Reference]: Enter an angle, specify a point, enter c, or enter r Rotation Angle Determines how far an object rotates around the base point. The axis of rotation passes through the specified base point and is parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS. Copy Creates a copy of the selected objects for rotation. Reference Rotates objects from a specified angle to a new, absolute angle. When you rotate a viewport object, the borders of the viewport remain parallel to the edges of the drawing area.

ROTATE3D
Quick Reference
See also:

Rotate Objects

Moves objects about a 3D axis.

Summary
It is recommended that you use the gizmos available through the 3DMOVE and 3DROTATE commands to manipulate 3D objects. For more information about using gizmos, see Use Gizmos to Modify Objects.

902 | Chapter 18 R Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish Specify first point on axis or define axis by [Object/Last/View/Xaxis/Yaxis/Zaxis/2points]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press Enter

Object
Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object.

Line
Aligns the axis of rotation with the line selected. Rotation Angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specified amount from the current orientation. Reference Specifies the reference angle and the new angle. The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle.

Circle
Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the circle (perpendicular to the plane of the circle and passing through the center of the circle).

Rotation Angle on page 903 Reference on page 903

ROTATE3D | 903

Arc
Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the arc (perpendicular to the plane of the arc and passing through the center of the arc).

Rotation Angle on page 903 Reference on page 903

2D Polyline Segment
Aligns the axis of rotation with a segment of the polyline. Treats a straight segment as a line segment. Treats an arc segment as an arc.

Rotation Angle on page 903 Reference on page 903

Last
Uses the last axis of rotation.

Rotation Angle on page 903 Reference on page 903

View
Aligns the axis of rotation with the viewing direction of the current viewport that passes through the selected point.

Rotation Angle on page 903 Reference on page 903

X Axis, Y Axis, Z Axis

Aligns the axis of rotation with one of the axes (X, Y, or Z) that pass through the selected point.

Rotation Angle on page 903 Reference on page 903

2 Points
Uses two points to define the axis of rotation.

904 | Chapter 18 R Commands

Rotation Angle on page 903 Reference on page 903

RSCRIPT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Command Scripts

Repeats a script file.

Summary
RSCRIPT is useful for demonstrations that repeat a script; for example, a script that must run over and over during a trade show or in a showroom. If RSCRIPT is the last line in a script file, the file runs continuously until interrupted by Esc. NOTE Consider turning off UNDO and any log files if you anticipate running the script over a long period; otherwise, these log files continue to grow and take up increasing amounts of disk space.

RSCRIPT | 905

RULESURF
Quick Reference
See also:

Construct Meshes from Other Objects

Creates a mesh that represents the surface between two lines or curves.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Meshes Ruled Mesh

Summary
Select two edges that define the mesh. The edges can be lines, arcs, splines, circles, or polylines. If one of the edges is closed, then the other edge must also be closed. You can also use a point as one edge for either an open or a closed curve.

The MESHTYPE system variable sets which type of mesh is created. Mesh objects are created by default. Set the variable to 0 to create legacy polyface or polygon mesh. For closed curves, the selection does not matter. If the curve is a circle, the ruled mesh begins at the 0-degree quadrant point, as determined by the current X axis plus the current value of the SNAPANG system variable. For closed polylines, the ruled mesh starts at the last vertex and proceeds backward along the segments of the polyline. Creating a ruled mesh between a circle and a closed polyline can be confusing. Substituting a closed semicircular polyline for the circle might be preferable.

906 | Chapter 18 R Commands

The ruled mesh is constructed as a 2 by N polygon mesh. RULESURF places half the mesh vertices at equal intervals along one defining curve, and the other half at equal intervals along the other curve. The number of intervals is specified by the SURFTAB1 system variable. It is the same for each curve; therefore, the distance between the vertices along the two curves differs if the curves are of different lengths. The N direction of the mesh is along the boundary curves. If both boundaries are closed, or if one is closed and the other is a point, the resulting polygon mesh is closed in the N direction and N equals SURFTAB1. If both boundaries are open, N equals SURFTAB1 + 1, because division of a curve into n parts requires n + 1 tabulations. The 0,0 vertex of the mesh is the endpoint of the first selected curve nearest the point you used to select that curve. Selecting objects at the same ends creates a polygon mesh.

Selecting objects at opposite ends creates a self-intersecting polygon mesh.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. First defining curve Specifies an object and start point for the new mesh object. Second defining curve Specifies an object and start point for the sweep of the new mesh object.

RULESURF | 907

908

S Commands

SAVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name.

Summary
The Save Drawing As dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Save the drawing under the current file name, or enter a different file name to save a copy of the drawing under that name. If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS on page 910 command to save changes under a different file name. NOTE The SAVE command is functionally identical to the QSAVE command. The Save option on the File menu is QSAVE.

909

SAVEAS
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name.

Access Methods
Menu: File Save As

Summary
The Save Drawing As standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Enter a file name and type. Saving a drawing to any DXF format affects performance. See Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats for a description of the limitations that result from saving to an earlier version. The file is saved with the specified file name. If the drawing is already named, the drawing is saved with the new file name. If you save the file as a drawing template, the template options are displayed, where you can set the units of measurement and provide a description for the template. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), SAVEAS displays command prompts.

Template Options
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

Summary
When a drawing is saved as a drawing template, you are prompted for the measurement to use when a new drawing is created from the drawing template and a description for the template.

910 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter template measurement [English/Metric] <current>: Enter e or m to specify the measurement to assign to the template and press Enter Enter a template description: Enter a description and press Enter

SAVEAS Command Prompts

Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current file format: current Enter file format [R14(LT98&LT97)/2000(LT2000)/2004(LT2004)2007(LT2007)/2010(LT2010)/Standards/DXF/T emplate] <2010>: Enter file format [R14(LT98&LT97)/2000(LT2000)/2004(LT2004)2007(LT2007)/2010(LT2010)/DXF/Template] <2010>: Enter an option or press Enter Save drawing as <current>: Enter a name or press Enter

SAVEIMG
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Rendered Image

Saves a rendered image to a file.

SAVEAS Command Prompts | 911

Summary
The Render Output File dialog box is displayed. NOTE SAVEIMG is not available if the current rendering device does not support scan-line images.

SCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Resize or Reshape Objects

Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Move/Rotate/Scale tool group Scale Menu: Modify Scale Shortcut menu: Select the objects to scale. Right-click in the drawing area and click Scale.

Summary
To scale an object, specify a base point and a scale factor. The base point acts as the center of the scaling operation and remains stationary. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the object.

912 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish Specify base point: Specify a point The base point you specify identifies the point that remains in the same location as the selected objects change size (and thus move away from the stationary base point). NOTE When you use the SCALE command with objects, the position or location of the object is scaled relative to the base point of the scale operation, but the size of the object is not changed. Specify scale factor or [Copy/Reference]: Specify a scale, enter c, or enter r Scale Factor Multiplies the dimensions of the selected objects by the specified scale. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the objects. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the objects. You can also drag the cursor to make the object larger or smaller. Copy Creates a copy of the selected objects for scaling. Reference Scales the selected objects based on a reference length and a specified new length.

SCALELISTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

SCALELISTEDIT | 913

Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Annotation Scaling tool group Scale List Menu: Format Scale List Command entry: 'scalelistedit for transparent use

Summary
A list of predefined scales used throughout the program. This list can be easily modified to display only the scales you need. The Edit Scale List dialog box is displayed. If you enter -scalelistedit at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Edit Drawing Scales Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting.

914 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Scale List Displays the list of currently defined scales. Also displays temporary scales that are imported when xrefs are attached. If a scale name is duplicated, but has a different value, a number is appended to the name. Add Creates a new scale in the scale list. Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited. Delete Removes the selected scale from the scale list. NOTE You cannot delete a scale that is referenced by an object.

Options
Manages items in the scale list. Edit Edits the selected scale in-place in the scale list. Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited. NOTE You cannot edit temporary scales. Reset Deletes all custom scales and unused scales and restores the default list of scales.

Edit Drawing Scales Dialog Box | 915

-SCALELISTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter option [?/Add/Delete/Reset/Exit] <Add>: Enter an option or press Enter ? Displays a list of defined scales. Add Adds a new scale to the scale list. Enter a ratio in the format n:m, where n is the number of paper units and m is the number of drawing units Delete Removes a specified scale. If a scale is current or supported by an object, it cannot be deleted. Reset Deletes all custom scales as a result and restores the default list of scales.

SCRIPT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Command Scripts

Executes a sequence of commands from a script file.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'script for transparent use

916 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
A script is a text file with an .scr file extension. Each line of the script file contains a command that can be completed at the Command prompt, including alternative versions of commands that normally display dialog boxes. The Select Script File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name of a script to run that script. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), SCRIPT displays the following command prompt.

SECTION
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Section Objects

Uses the intersection of a plane and solids, surfaces, or mesh to create a region.

Summary
The SECTION command creates a region object that represents a 2D cross section of 3D objects, including 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes. This method does not have the live sectioning capabilities that are available for section plane objects that are created using the SECTIONPLANE command.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Select objects Selects one or more 3D objects. Selecting several objects creates separate regions for each object.

SECTION | 917

Specify the first point on the sectioning plane using one of the following methods:

Object Z Axis View XY YZ ZX 3points

Object Aligns the sectioning plane with a circle, ellipse, circular or elliptical arc, 2D spline, or 2D polyline segment.

Z Axis Defines the sectioning plane by specifying a point on the sectioning plane and another point on the Z axis, or normal, of the plane.

Point on the section plane. Sets the first point on the plane. Point on the Z-axis (normal) of the plane. Specifies a point that defines the axis that is perpendicular to the plane.

View Aligns the sectioning plane with the viewing plane of the current view.

918 | Chapter 19 S Commands

XY Aligns the sectioning plane with the XY plane of the current UCS.

YZ Aligns the sectioning plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS.

ZX Aligns the sectioning plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS.

3points Uses three points to define the sectioning plane:

SECTION | 919

SECTIONPLANE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Section Objects

Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Section tool group Section Plane Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Section Plane

Summary
Section plane objects create sections of 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes. Use live sectioning with section plane objects to analyze a model, and save sections as blocks for use in layouts.

920 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Face or Any Point to Locate Section Line Specifies a face to establish the plane of the section object. Alternatively, you can select any point on the screen that is not on a face to create a section object independent of the solid or surface. The first point establishes a point around which the section object rotates.

Through point. Sets a second point that defines the plane of the section object.

Draw section Defines the section object with multiple points to create a section line with jogs. This option creates a section object in the Section Boundary state with live sectioning turned off. Orthographic Aligns the section object to an orthographic orientation relative to the UCS.

SECTIONPLANE | 921

A section object that contains all 3D objects is created with the specified orientation relative to the UCS (not the current view). This option creates a section object in the Section Plane state with live sectioning turned on.

Align section to. Sets the position of the section object to align with one of the following UCS orientations that you specify:

Front Back Top Bottom Left Right

922 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SECTIONPLANEJOG
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Jogs to a Section

Adds a jogged segment to a section object.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a section plane. Right-click in the drawing area and click Add Jog to Section.

Summary
You can insert a jog, or angle, into a section object as you create it. The jog is created on the section line. The jogged segment is created at a 90-degree angle to the section line.

NOTE The SECTIONPLANEJOG command was previously called JOGSECTION. Entering jogsection at the Command prompt runs SECTIONPLANE JOG.

SECTIONPLANEJOG | 923

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select section object Specifies which section line to modify. Point on the section line to add jog Specifies the location of the jog.

SECTIONPLANESETTINGS
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Section Object States and Properties

Sets display options for the selected section plane.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Section tool group (expanded) Section Plane Settings Shortcut menu: Select a live section object. Right-click in the drawing area and click Live Section Settings.

Summary
The Section Settings dialog box is displayed.

924 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Section Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Set Section Object States and Properties

Sets display options for section planes.

Section Settings Dialog Box | 925

Summary
The Section Settings dialog box contains display settings for creating 2D and 3D sections from the Generate Section / Elevation dialog box and for live sectioning. All settings are stored with the section object.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Section Plane
If a section plane has not been selected, specifies a selection plane to be modified. Select Section Plane Temporarily closes the Section Settings dialog box so that you can select a section object in the drawing area.

Setting type
Specifies which setting types are displayed in the properties list. 2D Section / Elevation Block Creation Settings Determines how a 2D section from a 3D object is displayed when generated. 3D Section Block Creation Settings Determines how a 3D object is displayed when generated. Live Section Settings Determines how sectioned objects are displayed in the drawing when live sectioning is turned on. Activate Live Section Turns on live sectioning for the selected section object.

Properties
Sets the properties to be applied to the new section block. Intersection Boundary Sets the appearance of line segments that outline the intersection surface of the section object plane.

Color. Sets the color of the intersection boundary. Layer. Sets the layer. Select an existing layer, or select <Component_Name>*LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box. (2D and 3D section blocks only)

926 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or a type that you specify. Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. Plot Style. Displays the current plot style. (2D and 3D section blocks only) Lineweight. Sets whether the lineweight is ByLayer, ByBlock, matches the default, or has a unique value. Division Lines. Sets whether division lines are displayed. (2D section blocks only) Show. Sets whether the intersection boundary is displayed. (3D section blocks only)

Intersection Fill Sets the optional fill that is displayed inside the boundary area of the cut surface where the section object intersects the 3D object.

Show. Sets whether the intersection fill is displayed. Face Hatch. Sets the hatch pattern to be used for the face of the cut surface. To select a pattern from a list, click Select Hatch Pattern Type. Angle. Sets the hatch angle. Hatch Scale. Sets the hatch scale. Hatch Spacing. Sets the distance between hatch lines. Color. Sets the color of the intersection fill. Layer. (2D and 3D section blocks only.) Sets the layer. Select an existing layer, or select <Component_Name>*LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box. Lineweight. Sets whether the lineweight is ByLayer, ByBlock, matches the default, or has a unique value. Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. Plot Style. Displays the current plot style. (2D and 3D section blocks only) Lineweight. Sets whether the lineweight is ByLayer, ByBlock, matches the default, or has a unique value.

Section Settings Dialog Box | 927

Surface Transparency. Sets the percentage of transparency for the intersection fill. (Live Section only)

Background Lines Controls the display of background lines. (2D and 3D section blocks only)

Show. Sets whether the component is displayed. (2D section blocks only) Hidden Line. Sets whether hidden lines (lines that are behind other lines in the 3D view) are displayed. (2D section blocks only) Color. Sets the color of the component. Layer. Sets the layer of the component. Select an existing layer, or select <Component_Name>*LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box. Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or Continuous. Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. Plot Style. Displays the current plot style. Lineweight. Sets whether the lineweight is ByLayer, ByBlock, matches the default, or has a unique value.

Cut-away Geometry Sets properties for the cut-away objects.

Show. Sets whether the component is displayed. Color. Sets the color of the cutaway geometry. Layer. Sets the layer of the cutaway geometry. Select an existing layer, or select <Component_Name>*LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box. (2D and 3D section blocks only) Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or Continuous. Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. Plot Style. Displays the current plot style. (2D and 3D section blocks only) Lineweight. Sets whether the lineweight is ByLayer, ByBlock, matches the default, or has a unique value.

928 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Face Transparency. Sets the percentage of transparency of the face created where the live section object interfaces with the 3D objects. (Live Section only) Edge Transparency. Sets the percentage of transparency of the edges of the foreground lines. (Live Section only)

Curve Tangency Lines Controls the inclusion of curved lines that are tangent to the section plane. (2D section blocks only)

Show. Sets whether the curve tangency lines are displayed. Color. Sets the color of the curve tangency lines. Layer. Sets the layer of the curve tangency lines. Select an existing layer, or select <Component_Name>*LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box. Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or Continuous. Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. Plot Style. Displays the current plot style. Lineweight. Sets whether the lineweight is ByLayer, ByBlock, matches the default, or has a unique value.

Apply Settings to All Section Objects

When selected, applies all the settings to all section objects in the drawing. When cleared, applies settings to the current section object only.

Reset
Resets all settings in the dialog box to their default values.

New Layer Name Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Set Section Object States and Properties

New Layer Name Dialog Box | 929

Adds a custom prefix or suffix to layer names to help organize components of a section block

Access Methods
Pointing device: In the Section Settings dialog box, Layer list, click New Layer Name Settings.

Summary
By default, all section block geometry is placed on Layer 0 (zero). However, you can specify suffix or prefix labels to help organize section block components, such as intersection boundaries and fill. When the section block is inserted, the section block components are placed on new layers whose name combines the name of the layer that contains the sectioned object and the prefix or suffix you specify. If the section plane includes objects on two or more layers, two or more new object layers are created. For example, suppose you create a suffix called _kitchen and then select *ObjectByLayer*_kitchen in the Section Settings dialog box, under Intersection Boundary. If you create a section block that bisects objects on the Walls and Cabinetry layers, two new layers are created to contain the block geometry for intersection boundaries: Walls_kitchen and Cabinetry_kitchen. You can then easily modify the appearance of a set of block components by changing their properties. If a property such as Color is set as an object override in the Section Settings dialog box, you can change the property in that location. If the property is set to ByLayer, you can change it in the Layers palette on page 538.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

930 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Added Text Type Specifies whether or how identifying text is added to the layer name for the section block component.

None. No additional text is added to the layer name. The section block geometry is placed on the same layer as the original geometry. Prefix. If the Layer property is specified as *ObjectByLayer* in the Section Settings dialog box, the label is added in front of the layer name. Suffix. If the Layer property is specified as *ObjectByLayer* in the Section Settings dialog box, the label is added to the end of the layer name.

Added Text Specifies identifying text to be added to the name of the layer that contains the component geometry when the section block is inserted.

SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:

Save Sections as Blocks, Drawings, or ToolsSave Sections as Blocks or Drawings

Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a live section object. Right-click in the drawing area and click Generate 2D/3D Section.

Summary
The Generate Section /Elevation dialog box is displayed.

SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK | 931

Generate Section /Elevation Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Create Section Objects

Saves 2D and 3D sections as blocks.

932 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
Specify the display settings for the cross sections that you save and reuse.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Section Plane
Select Section Plane Closes the dialog box so that you can select a section plane to modify or save as a block.

2D/3D
2D Section/Elevation Creates and saves or inserts a block that represents a 2D cross section. 3D Section Creates and saves or inserts a cutaway 3D block.

Hide/Show Advanced Settings

Controls the display of the Source Geometry, Destination, and Section Settings options.

Source Geometry
Include All Objects Includes all 3D objects (3D solids, surfaces, and regions) in the drawing, including objects in xrefs and blocks. Select Objects to Include Specifies that you will manually select the 3D objects (3D solids, surfaces, meshes, and regions) from which to generate a section. Select Objects Closes the dialog box temporarily while you select the objects for the section. When you finish selecting objects, press Enter to redisplay the Generate Section/Elevation dialog box. Objects Selected Indicates the number of objects selected.

Destination
Insert as New Block Inserts the generated section as a block in the current drawing.

Generate Section /Elevation Dialog Box | 933

Replace Existing Block Replaces an existing block in the drawing with the newly generated section. Select Block Closes the dialog box temporarily while you select the block to be replaced in the drawing. When you finish selecting the block, press Enter to redisplay the Generate Section/Elevation dialog box. Export to a File Saves the section to an external file. Filename and Path Specifies a file name and path where the section will be saved.

Section Settings
Opens the Section Settings dialog box.

Create
Creates the section.

SELECT
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects Individually

Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Selection tool group Select

934 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
A small box, called the object selection target or pickbox, replaces the crosshairs on the graphics cursor.

At the Select Objects prompt in a subsequent command, use the Previous option to retrieve the previous selection set. You can also press and hold the Ctrl key to select original individual forms that are part of composite solids or vertices, edges, and faces on 3D solids. You can select one of these subobjects, or create a selection set of more than one subobject. Your selection set can include more than one type of subobject. To view all options, enter ? at the Command prompt.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method Expects a point or W d wLs/ r si gB XA LFneW oy o / P l g nGo pA dRm v/ utpePe i u/ n oA t /I geS b betO jc i o / atCosn / O / L / e c/ P l g nC oy o / r u / d / e o eM li l/ rvo sU d / UoSn l/U o jc/ bet n Select objects: Specify a point or enter an option Window Selects all objects completely inside a rectangle defined by two points. Specifying the corners from left to right creates a window selection. (Specifying the corners from right to left creates a crossing selection.)

SELECT | 935

Last Selects the most recently created visible object. The object must be in the current space, that is, model space or paper space, and its layer must not be set to frozen or off. Crossing Selects objects within and crossing an area defined by two points. A crossing selection is displayed as dashed or otherwise highlighted to differentiate it from window selection.

Box Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified by two points. If the rectangle's points are specified from right to left, Box is equivalent to Crossing. Otherwise, Box is equivalent to Window. All Selects all objects in either model space or the current layout, except those objects on frozen or on locked layers.

Fence Selects all objects crossing a selection fence. The Fence method is similar to CPolygon except that that the fence is not closed, and a fence can cross itself. Fence is not affected by the PICKADD system variable.

936 | Chapter 19 S Commands

WPolygon Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. The last segment of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times. WPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system variable.

CPolygon Selects objects within and crossing a polygon defined by specifying points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. The last segment of the polygon is drawn so that it is closed at all times. CPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system variable.

Group Selects all objects within a specified group. Add Switches to the Add method: selected objects can be added to the selection set by using any of the object selection methods. Auto and Add are the default methods.

Remove Switches to the Remove method: objects can be removed from the current selection set using any object selection method. An alternative to

SELECT | 937

Remove mode is to hold down Shift while selecting single objects or use the Automatic option. Multiple Selects objects individually without highlighting them during object selection. This speeds up object selection for highly complex objects. Previous Selects the most recent selection set. The Previous selection set is cleared by operations that delete objects from the drawing. NOTE The Previous selection set is ignored if you switch spaces. Undo Cancels the selection of the object most recently added to the selection set. Auto Switches to automatic selection: pointing to an object selects the object. Pointing to a blank area inside or outside an object forms the first corner of a box defined by the Box method. Auto and Add are the default methods. Single Switches to the Single method: selects the first object or set of objects designated rather than continuing to prompt for further selections. Subobject Allows you to select original individual forms that are part of composite solids or vertices, edges, and faces on 3D solids. You can select one of these subobjects, or create a selection set of more than one subobject. Your selection set can include more than one type of subobject. Pressing and holding the Ctrl key is the same as selecting the SELECT commands Subobject option.

Object Ends the ability to select subobjects. Allows you to use object selection methods.

SELECTSIMILAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects by Properties

938 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Adds similar objects to the selection set based on selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Selection tool group Select Similar Shortcut menu: Select theobject that you want to use as the template object to select similar objects. Right-click in the drawing area and click Select Similar.

Summary
Selects similar objects of the same type based on specified matching properties, such as the color or block name.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed. Select objects or [SEttings]: Use an object selection method and press Enter The Settings option displays the Select Similar Settings dialog box.

Select Similar Settings Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects by Properties

Controls which properties must match for an object of the same type to be selected.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Color Considers objects with matching colors to be similar. Layer Considers objects on matching layers to be similar.

Select Similar Settings Dialog Box | 939

Linetype Considers objects with matching linetypes to be similar. Linetype scale Considers objects with matching linetype scales to be similar. Lineweight Considers objects with matching lineweights to be similar. Plot style Considers objects with matching plot styles to be similar. Object style Considers objects with matching styles (such as text styles, dimension styles, and table styles) to be similar. Name Considers referenced objects (such as blocks, xrefs, and images) with matching names to be similar.

SETVAR
Quick Reference
See also:

Enter Commands on the Command Line

Lists or changes the values of system variables.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Inquiry Set Variable Command entry: 'setvar for transparent use

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter variable name or [?] <current>: Enter a variable name, enter ?, or press Enter Variable Name Specifies the name of the system variable you want to set. You can also change the value of system variables at the Command prompt by entering the name of the variable and its new value. ?List Variables Lists all system variables in the drawing and their current settings.

940 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SHADEMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Starts the VSCURRENT command.

-SHADEMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter option [2D wireframe/3D wireframe/Hidden/Flat/Gouraud/fLat+edges/gOuraud+edges] <current>: 2D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Raster and OLE objects, linetypes, and lineweights are visible. 3D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Material colors that you have applied to the objects are shown. Hidden Displays the objects using 3D wireframe representation and hides lines representing back faces. Flat Shaded Shades the objects between the polygon faces. The objects appear flatter and less smooth than Gouraud-shaded objects. Materials that you have applied to the objects show when the objects are flat shaded. Gouraud Shaded Shades the objects and smooths the edges between polygon faces. This gives the objects a smooth, realistic appearance. Materials that you have applied to the objects show when the objects are Gouraud shaded.

SHADEMODE | 941

Flat Shaded, Edges On Combines the Flat Shaded and Wireframe options. The objects are flat shaded with the wireframe showing through. Gouraud Shaded, Edges On Combines the Gouraud Shaded and Wireframe options. The objects are Gouraud shaded with the wireframe showing through.

SHAPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Shape Files

Inserts a shape from a shape file that has been loaded using LOAD.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter shape name or [?]: Enter a name, or enter ? Shape Name Loads the shape. If a shape belongs to an external reference (xref) attached to the current drawing, the shape file is identified as externally dependent. Externally dependent shapes cannot be used in the current drawing unless they are reloaded. ?List Shapes Lists shapes and the files in which the shapes are defined. If you enter an asterisk (*), the program lists shape names.

SHELL
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Command Aliases

Accesses operating system commands.

942 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Summary
When SHELL prompts you for an OS command, you can enter most valid commands for your OS. When the command has been executed, SHELL returns you to the Command prompt. Pressing Enter at the OS Command prompt displays the system prompt with an extra close angle bracket (>). You can enter operating system commands as if you were at the normal system prompt. WARNING Do not use the SHELL command to delete lock files (file name extension .??k) or temporary files (file name extensions .ac$ or .$a). Do not use SHELL to run chkdsk, reset the serial I/O ports, or run external programs that require disk swapping while editing a drawing stored on removable media. Load Terminate-and-Stay-Resident programs into memory before starting this program.

SHOWPALETTES
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify the Behavior of Palettes

Restores the display of hidden palettes.

Access Methods
Command entry: Tab

Summary
Restores the state of the display and position of palettes hidden by HIDEPALETTES. NOTE If a palette was manually turned back on, it is not affected by SHOWPALETTES (even if it was manually closed again)

SHOWPALETTES | 943

SKETCH
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Freehand Sketches

Creates a series of freehand line segments.

Summary
Sketching is useful for creating irregular boundaries or for tracing with a digitizer. Specify the object type (line, polyline, or spline), increment, and tolerance before sketching.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Sketch on page 944 or [Type on page 944/Increment on page 945/toLerance on page 945]: Sketch Creates a sketch. Type Specifies the object type for the sketch line. (SKPOLY on page 1487 system variable)

Line on page 566 Polyline on page 786 Spline on page 986

944 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Increment Defines the length of each freehand line segment. You must move the pointing device a distance greater than the increment value to generate a line. (SKETCHINC on page 1487 system variable) Tolerance For Splines, specifies how closely the splines curve fits to the freehand sketch. (SKTOLERANCE on page 1488 system variable)

SLICE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create 3D Solids by Slicing

Creates new 3D solids and surfaces by slicing, or dividing, existing objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Edit tool group (expanded) Slice Menu: Modify 3D Operations Slice

Summary
The cutting plane is defined with 2 or 3 points, by specifying a major plane of the UCS, or by selecting a surface object (but not a mesh). Either one or both sides of the sliced 3D solids can be retained.

SLICE | 945

The sliced objects retain the layer and color properties of the original solids. However, the resulting solid or surface objects do not retain a history of the original objects. Objects that Can Be Used in a Slice Operation Objects that can be sliced
3D solids Surfaces

Objects that can be used as cutting planes

Surfaces Circles Ellipses Circular or elliptical arcs 2D splines 3D polyline segments

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Objects to slice Specifies the 3D solid or surface object that you want to slice. If you select a mesh object, you can choose to convert it to a 3D solid or surface before completing the slice operation.

Start point of slicing plane

946 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Planar object Surface Z axis View XY YZ ZX 3points

Start point of slicing plane Sets the first of two points that define the angle of the slicing plane. The slicing plane is perpendicular to the XY plane of the current UCS.

Second point on plane. Sets the second of two points on the slicing plane.

Point on desired side Keep both sides

Planar object Aligns the cutting plane with a plane that contains a selected circle, ellipse, circular or elliptical arc, 2D spline, or 2D polyline segment.

Select a circle, ellipse, arc, 2D-spline, or 2D-polyline. Specifies the object to use for alignment.

Surface Aligns the cutting plane with a surface.

SLICE | 947

Select a surface. Specifies a surface to be used for alignment. NOTE You cannot select meshes created with the EDGESURF, REVSURF, RULESURF, and TABSURF commands.

Point on desired side Keep both sides

Z axis Defines the cutting plane by specifying a point on the plane and another point on the Z axis (normal) of the plane.

Specify a point on the section plane. Sets a point on the slicing plane. Specify a point on the Z-axis (normal) of the plane. Specifies a point that defines the axis that is perpendicular to the slicing plane.

Point on desired side Keep both sides

View Aligns the cutting plane with the current viewport's viewing plane. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane.

948 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Specify a point on the current view plane. Sets a point on the object to start the slice.

Point on desired side Keep both sides

XY Aligns the cutting plane with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane.

Point on the XY-plane. Sets the location of the slice.

Point on desired side Keep both sides

YZ Aligns the cutting plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane.

SLICE | 949

Point on the YZ-plane. Sets the location of the slice.

ZX Aligns the cutting plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane.

Point on the ZX-plane. Sets the location of the slice. If a single object is sliced into more than two objects, one solid or surface is created from the objects on one side of the plane and another solid or surface is created from the objects on the other side.

3points Defines the cutting plane using three points.

950 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Point on desired side Uses a point to determine which side of the sliced solids your drawing retains. The point cannot lie on the cutting plane.

Keep both sides Retains both sides of the sliced solids. Slicing a single solid into two pieces creates two solids from the pieces on either side of the plane. SLICE never creates more than two new composite solids for each selected solid.

SNAP
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals.

SNAP | 951

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Drafting Settings

Toolbar: Status bar Snap Command entry: snap or snap for transparent use

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify snap spacing on page 952 or [ON on page 952/OFF on page 952/Aspect on page 952/Style on page 952/Type on page 953] <current>: Specify a distance, enter an option, or press Enter

Snap Spacing
Activates Snap mode with the value you specify.

On
Activates Snap mode using the current settings of the snap grid.

Off
Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings.

Aspect
Specifies different spacing in the X and Y directions.

Style
Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric.

Standard
Sets a rectangular snap grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. X and Y spacing may differ.

952 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Spacing Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid. Aspect Specifies the horizontal and vertical spacing of the snap grid separately.

Isometric
Sets an isometric snap grid, in which the snap locations are initially at 30-degree and 150-degree angles. Isometric snap cannot have different Aspect values. The lined grid does not follow the isometric snap grid.

ISOPLANE determines whether the crosshairs lie in the top isometric plane (30- and 150-degree angles), the left isoplane (90- and 150-degree angles), or the right isoplane (30- and 90-degree angles).

Type
Specifies the snap type, polar or rectangular. This setting is also controlled by the SNAPTYPE system variable. Polar Sets the polar angle increment. (POLARANG system variable) Grid Sets the snap to Grid. When you specify points, the cursor snaps along vertical or horizontal grid points.

SOLDRAW
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Flattened View

Generates profiles and sections in layout viewports created with SOLVIEW.

SOLDRAW | 953

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Setup Drawing

Summary
After using SOLVIEW, visible and hidden lines representing the silhouette and edges of solids in the viewport are created and then projected to a plane perpendicular to the viewing direction.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select viewports to draw ... Select objects: Select the viewports to be drawn SOLDRAW can only be used in viewports that have been created with SOLVIEW. Visible and hidden lines representing the silhouette and edges of solids in the viewport are created and then projected to a plane perpendicular to the viewing direction. Silhouettes and edges are generated for all solids and portions of solids behind the cutting plane. For sectional views, cross-hatching is created using the current values of the HPNAME, HPSCALE, and HPANG system variables. Any existing profiles and sections in the selected viewport are deleted, and new ones are generated. All layers, except those required to display the profile or section, are frozen in each viewport. WARNING Do not place permanent drawing information on the view name-VIS, view name-HID, and view name-HAT layers. The information stored on these layers is deleted and updated when SOLDRAW is run. To undo a viewport drawn by SOLDRAW, you must use the Back option of UNDO. NOTE SOLDRAW is defined by the acsolids.arx application and is intended to be used only interactively. For more information, see Externally Defined Commands.

954 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SOLID
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Hatch Properties

Creates solid-filled triangles and quadrilaterals.

Summary
2D solids are filled only when the FILLMODE system variable is on (1) and the viewing direction is orthogonal to the 2D solid.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. First point Sets the first point in the 2D solid. Second point Sets the first edge of the 2D solid. Third point Sets the corner that is opposite the second point. Fourth point or <exit> The fourth point is diagonally opposite the first point. Pressing Enter at the Fourth Point prompt creates a filled triangle. Specifying a fifth point creates a quadrilateral area.

Specifying successive third and fourth points creates further connected triangles and four-sided polygons in a single solid object.

SOLID | 955

SOLIDEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Clean and Check 3D Solids

Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Edit tool group (expanded)

Summary
You can extrude, move, rotate, offset, taper, copy, delete, and assign colors and materials to faces. You can also copy and assign colors to edges. You can imprint, separate, shell, clean, and check the validity of the entire 3D solid object (body). You cannot use SOLIDEDIT with mesh objects. However, if you select a closed mesh object, you will be prompted to convert it to a 3D solid.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter a solids editing option [Face/Edge/Body/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:

Face Face
Edits selected 3D solid faces by extruding, moving, rotating, offsetting, tapering, deleting, copying, or changing their color. Enter a face editing option [Extrude/Move/Rotate/Offset/Taper/Delete/Copy/coLor/mAterial/ Undo/eXit]:

956 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Face: Extrude
Extrude Extends a 3D solid face in the X, Y, or Z direction. You can change the shape of the object by moving its faces.

Select faces. Specifies which faces to modify. Undo Remove

Remove Removes previously selected faces from the selection set.

Remove faces. Removes the selected face from the solid object. Undo Add All

Undo Cancels the selection of the faces you added most recently to the selection set and redisplays the prompt.

Add Adds faces you select to the selection set.

SOLIDEDIT | 957

Undo Remove All

All Selects all faces and adds them to the selection set.

Select faces. Selects specific faces (instead of all of them). Undo Remove

Height of extrusion Sets the direction and distance of the extrusion. Entering a positive value extrudes the face in the direction of its normal. Entering a negative value extrudes the face in the direction opposite to its normal.

Angle of taper for extrusion. Specify an angle between -90 and +90 degrees.

958 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Tapering the selected face with a positive angle tapers the face in, and a negative angle tapers the face out. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to its plane. All selected faces in the selection set are tapered to the same value. If you specify a large taper angle or height, you can cause the face to taper to a point before it reaches the extrusion height. Path Sets a path for the extrusion path based on a specified line or curve. All the profiles of the selected face are extruded along the chosen path to create the extrusion.

Select an extrusion path.

Lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, or splines can be paths. The path should not lie on the same plane as the face, nor should it have areas of high curvature. The extruded face starts from the plane of the profile and ends on a plane perpendicular to the path at the path's endpoint. One of the endpoints of

SOLIDEDIT | 959

the path should be on the plane of the profile; if not, the path is moved to the center of the profile. If the path is a spline, the path should be perpendicular to the plane of the profile and at one of the endpoints of the path. If not, the profile is rotated to be perpendicular to the spline path. If one of the endpoints of the spline is on the plane of the face, the face is rotated about the point; otherwise, the spline path is moved to the center of the profile and the profiles are rotated about its center. If the path contains segments that are not tangent, the object is extruded along each segment and then the joint along the plane is mitered, bisecting the angle formed by the segments. If the path is closed, the profile lies on the miter plane. This allows the start and end sections of the solid to match up. If the profile is not on the miter plane, the path is rotated until it is on the miter plane.

Face: Move
Move Moves the selected face on a 3D solid object to a specified height or distance. You can select multiple faces at one time.

Select faces Undo. Cancels selection of the faces that you selected most recently. Remove All

You can change the shape of the object by moving its faces. This option is recommended for minor adjustments.

960 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Select faces Specifies the face to be moved.

Base point of displacement. Sets the base point for the move. If you specify a single point, usually entered as a coordinate, and then press Enter, the coordinate is used as the new location. Second point of displacement. Sets a displacement vector that indicates how far the selected face is moved and in what direction.

Face: Rotate
Rotate Rotates one or more faces or a collection of features on a solid about a specified axis. You can change the shape of the object by rotating its faces. This option is recommended for minor adjustments.

Select faces (rotate) Undo. Cancels selection of the faces that you selected most recently. Remove All

Select faces (rotate) Rotates the face according to the specified angle and axis. In the drawing area, select one or more faces.

Axis point

SOLIDEDIT | 961

Axis by object View Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis 2Point

Axis point, 2Point Sets two points to define the axis of rotation.

Pressing Enter at the main Rotate prompt displays the following prompts. Specifying a point at the main prompt skips the prompt for the first point:

First point on the rotation axis. Sets the first point on the axis of revolution. Second point on the rotation axis. Sets the second point on the axis.

Rotation angle Reference

Axis by object Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object. You can select the following objects:

Line: Aligns the axis with the selected line. Circle: Aligns with the 3D axis of the circle (perpendicular to the plane of the circle and passing through the center of the circle). Arc: Aligns with the 3D axis of the arc (perpendicular to the plane of the arc and passing through the center of the arc). Ellipse: Aligns with the 3D axis of the ellipse (perpendicular to the plane of the ellipse and passing through the center of the ellipse). 2D polyline: Aligns with the 3D axis formed by the polyline start points and endpoints.

962 | Chapter 19 S Commands

3D polyline: Aligns with the 3D axis formed by the polyline start points and endpoints. Spline: Aligns with the 3D axis formed by the spline's start points and endpoints.

View Aligns the axis of rotation with the viewing direction of the current viewport that passes through the selected point.

Origin of rotation

Rotation angle Reference

Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis Aligns the axis of rotation with the axis (X, Y, or Z) that passes through the selected point.

Origin of rotation

Rotation angle Reference

Origin of rotation Sets the point of rotation.

Rotation angle Reference

Rotation angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specified amount from the current orientation. Reference Specifies the reference angle and the new angle.

Reference (starting) angle. Sets the start point for the angle. Ending angle. Sets the endpoint for the angle. The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle.

Face: Offset
Offset Offsets faces equally by a specified distance or through a specified point. A positive value increases the size or volume of the solid. A negative value decreases the size or volume of the solid.

Select faces (offset) Undo

SOLIDEDIT | 963

Remove All

Select faces (offset) Specifies the faces you want to offset. NOTE The size of holes inside a solid object that is offset decreases as the volume of the solid increases.

Specify the offset distance. Sets a positive value to increase the size of the solid or a negative value to decrease the size of the solid.

Face: Taper
Taper Tapers faces on a 3D solid at a specified angle. The rotation of the taper angle is determined by the selection sequence of the base point and second point along the selected vector.

A positive angle tapers the face in, and a negative angle tapers the face out. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to its plane. All selected faces in the selection set are tapered to the same value.

964 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Select faces (taper) Undo Remove All

Select faces (taper) Specifies the faces to be tapered and then sets the slope of the taper.

Base point. Sets the first point for determining the plane. Another point along the axis of tapering. Sets the orientation of the axis that determines the direction of the taper. Taper angle. Specify an angle between -90 and +90 degrees to set the slope of the taper from the axis.

Face: Delete
Delete Deletes or removes faces, including fillets and chamfers. Use this option to remove and later modify filleted and chamfered edges. The face is not deleted if the change results in a non-valid 3D solid.

SOLIDEDIT | 965

Select faces (copy) Undo. Cancels the selection of the faces that you selected most recently. Remove All

Select faces (delete) Specifies the face to be removed. The face must be in a location that can be filled by surrounding faces after it is removed.

Face: Copy
Copy Copies faces as a region or a body. If you specify two points, SOLIDEDIT uses the first point as a base point and places a single copy relative to the base point. If you specify a single point (usually entered as a coordinate) and then press Enter, SOLIDEDIT uses the coordinate as the new location.

Creates a new object with the original orientation and profile of the face. The result can be used as a reference to create a new 3D solid.

Select faces (copy) Undo. Cancels the selection of the faces that you selected most recently.

966 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Remove All

Select faces (copy) Specifies the face to be copied.

Base point or displacement. Sets the first point to determine the distance and direction for the placement of the copied face (displacement). Second point of displacement. Sets the second displacement point.

Face: Color
Color Changes the color of faces. Colored faces can be used to highlight details within a complex 3D solid model.

Select faces (color) Undo. Cancels the selection of the faces that you selected most recently. Remove All

Select faces (color) Specifies the faces to be modified. The Select Color dialog box is displayed.

Face: Material
Material Assigns a material to selected faces.

Select faces (material) Undo. Cancels the selection of the faces that you selected most recently. Remove All

Select faces (material) Specifies the faces to be modified. The Select Color dialog box is displayed.

Enter new material name. Enter the name of the material to be assigned to the selected face. (The name of a material can be found by opening the Materials window and selecting the material swatch to display the name in the Name field.) ByLayer. Assigns the material based on the layer assignment.

SOLIDEDIT | 967

Face: Undo
Reverses actions as far back as the beginning of the SOLIDEDIT session.

Face: Exit
Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option prompt.

Edge Edge
Edits 3D solid objects by changing the color of or copying individual edges. Enter an edge editing option [Copy/coLor/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:

Edge: Copy
Copies selected edges on a 3D solid as 2D arcs, circles, ellipses, lines, or splines.

Retains the angle of the edge and allows you to make modifications and extensions, and create new geometry based on the extracted edge. Provides a method for making modifications, extensions, and new 3D solids based on the extracted edge.

Select Edges (copy) Undo Remove

Select Edges (copy) Specifies the edges to copy. Press Ctrl+click to select the edge. Then set the displacement:

Base point of displacement. Sets the first point for determining where the new object is placed. Second point of displacement. Sets the relative direction and distance for the new object.

968 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Undo Cancels selection of the edges you added most recently to the selection set. The previous prompt is displayed. If all edges have been removed, the following prompt is displayed: Remove Removes previously selected edges from the selection set. The prompt is redisplayed.

Remove edges. Removes the edges you select from the current selection set. Undo Add

Add Adds edges to the selection set.

Select Edges (copy) Undo Remove

Edge: Color
Changes the color of individual edges on a 3D solid object.

Select edges (color) Undo Remove

Select edges (color) Colored edges can be used to highlight intersections, interferences, or critical clearances. Press Ctrl+click to select the edge.

Edge: Undo
Reverses actions as far back as the beginning of the SOLIDEDIT session.

Edge: Exit
Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option prompt.

SOLIDEDIT | 969

Body Body
Edits the entire solid object by imprinting other geometry on the solid, separating the solid into individual solid objects, shelling, cleaning, or checking the selected solid. Enter a body editing option [Imprint/seParate solids/Shell/cLean/Check/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:

Body: Imprint
Imprints an object on the selected solid. The object to be imprinted must intersect one or more faces on the selected solid in order for imprinting to be successful. Imprinting is limited to the following objects: arcs, circles, lines, 2D and 3D polylines, ellipses, splines, regions, bodies, and 3D solids.

Select a 3D solid. Specifies the 3D solid to be imprinted. Select an object to imprint. Specifies an object that overlaps the first selection. Delete the source object. Specifies whether the object to imprint is removed when the operation is complete.

Body: Separate Solids

Separates 3D solid objects with disjointed volumes (sometimes called lumps) into independent 3D solid objects. Combining discrete solid objects using a union operation (UNION) can result in disjointed volumes. A union or subtract operation can result in a single 3D solid that consists of more than one continuous volume. You can separate these volumes into independent 3D solids.

970 | Chapter 19 S Commands

NOTE Separating solids does not separate Boolean objects that form a single volume. Select a 3D solid Specifies the 3D solid object to separate. Press Ctrl+click to select the edge.

Body: Shell
Shelling creates a hollow, thin wall with a specified thickness. You can specify a constant wall thickness for all the faces. You can also exclude faces from the shell by selecting them. A 3D solid can have only one shell. New faces are created by offsetting existing ones outside their original positions. It is recommended that you create a copy of a 3D solid before converting it into a shell. That way if you need to make significant modification, use the original version and shell it again.

Select a 3D solid (shell) Specifies a 3D solid.

Remove faces. Specifies the face subobjects to be removed when the object is shelled. Undo. Reverses the last action. Add. Press Ctrl+click an edge to indicate which faces to retain. All. Temporarily selects all faces for removal. You can then use Add to add the faces you want to retain.

SOLIDEDIT | 971

Enter the shell offset distance Sets the size of the offset. Specify a positive value to create a shell to the inside perimeter of the solid. Specify a negative value to create a shell on the outside perimeter of the solid.

Body: Clean
Removes shared edges or vertices having the same surface or curve definition on either side of the edge or vertex. Removes all redundant edges, vertices, and unused geometry. Does not remove imprinted edges. In unusual circumstances, this option removes shared edges or vertices having the same surface or curve definition on either side of the edge or vertex.

Select a 3D solid (clean) Specifies a 3D solid object that you want to clean.

Body: Check
Validates the 3D solid object as a valid solid, independent of the SOLIDCHECK setting.

Select a 3D object (check). Specifies the 3D solid object to be validated. If the object is valid, the following prompt is displayed: This object is a valid ShapeManager solid.

This option is used as a debugging tool to compare stages in a highly complex 3D solid model.

Body: Undo
Undoes the editing action.

Body: Exit
Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option prompt.

Undo Undo
Undoes the editing action.

972 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Exit Exit
Exits the SOLIDEDIT command.

SOLPROF
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Flattened View

Creates 2D profile images of 3D solids for display in a layout viewport.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Setup Profile

Summary
The selected 3D solids are projected onto a 2D plane parallel with the current layout viewport. The resulting 2D objects are generated on separate layers for hidden and visible lines and are displayed only in that viewport.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method Display hidden profile lines on separate layer? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n, or press Enter Yes Generates only two blocks: one for the visible lines and one for the hidden lines of the entire selection set. When you generate hidden lines, solids can partially or completely hide other solids. The visible profile block is drawn in the BYLAYER linetype, and the hidden profile block is drawn in the HIDDEN linetype (if loaded). The visible and hidden profile blocks are placed on uniquely named layers using the following naming conventions: PV-viewport handle for the visible profile layer PH-viewport handle for the hidden profile layer For example, if you create a profile in a viewport whose handle is 4B, the blocks containing the visible lines are inserted on layer PV-4B, and the block containing the hidden lines (if requested) is inserted on layer PH-4B. If these

SOLPROF | 973

layers do not exist, the command creates them. If the layers do exist, the blocks are added to the information already on the layers. NOTE To determine the handle of a viewport, select the viewport while in paper space and use the LIST command. Choose a layout tab to move from model space to paper space. SOLPROF does not change the display of layers; if you want to view only the profile lines that you have created, turn off the layer containing the original solid (usually the current layer). No Treats all profile lines as visible lines and creates a block for the profile lines of each selected solid. All profile lines for each solid in the selection set are generated, even if a solid is partially or completely obscured by another solid. The visible profile blocks are drawn in the same linetype as the original solid and placed on a uniquely named layer using the naming convention described under the Yes option.

NOTE Solids that overlap each other (share some common volume) produce dangling edges if you request hidden-line removal. This happens because the edges must be broken at the point where they enter another solid to separate them into visible and hidden portions. You can eliminate dangling edges by combining the overlapping solids (using UNION) before generating a profile. Yes Creates the profile lines with 2D objects. The 3D profile is projected onto a plane normal to the viewing direction and passing through the origin of the UCS. SOLPROF cleans up the 2D profile by eliminating lines that are parallel to the viewing direction and by converting arcs and circles that are viewed on edge into lines. No Creates the profile lines with 3D objects. The next prompt determines whether tangential edges are displayed. A tangential edge is the transition line between two tangent faces. It's the

974 | Chapter 19 S Commands

imaginary edge at which two faces meet and are tangent. For example, if you fillet the edge of a box, tangential edges are created where the cylindrical face of the fillet blends into the planar faces of the box. Tangential edges are not shown for most drafting applications.

SOLVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Flattened View

Creates orthographic views, layers, and layout viewports automatically for 3D solids.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Setup View

Summary
This command automates the manual process of creating views, layers, and layout viewports for 3D models. For ongoing work, it is recommended that you create drawing template (DWT) files customized for 3D. NOTE SOLVIEW must be run on a layout tab. If the Model tab is current, the last active layout tab is made current.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

SOLVIEW | 975

Enter an option [Ucs on page 976/Ortho on page 977/Auxiliary on page 978/Section on page 979]: Enter an option or press Enter to exit the command SOLVIEW places the viewport objects on the VPORTS layer, which it creates if it does not already exist. The view-specific information that is saved with each viewport you create is used by SOLDRAW to generate the final drawing view. SOLVIEW creates layers that SOLDRAW uses to place the visible lines and hidden lines for each view, view name-VIS, view name-HID, view name-HAT, and a layer where you can place dimensions that are visible in individual viewports, view name-DIM. WARNING The information stored on these layers is deleted and updated when you run SOLDRAW. Do not place permanent drawing information on these layers. NOTE SOLVIEW is defined by the acsolids.bundle application and is intended to be used only interactively.

UCS
Creates a profile view relative to a user coordinate system. If no viewports exist in your drawing, the UCS option is a good way to create an initial viewport from which other views can be created. All other SOLVIEW options require an existing viewport. You have the option of using the current UCS or a previously saved one as the profile plane. The viewport projection is created parallel to the XY plane of the UCS with the X axis facing right and the Y axis upward.

976 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Named Uses the XY plane of a named UCS to create a profile view. Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The center is based on the current model space extents. World Uses the XY plane of the WCS to create a profile view. Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The center is based on the current model space extents. ?List Named UCSs Lists the names of existing user coordinate systems. The list is filtered using the wild-card combinations you enter (wild-card characters accepted by the UCS command are valid). Current Uses the XY plane of the current UCS to create a profile view. Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The center is based on the current model space extents.

Ortho
Creates a folded orthographic view from an existing view.

SOLVIEW | 977

Once you select the side of the viewport you want to use for projecting the new view, a rubber-band line perpendicular to the side of the viewport helps you locate the center of the new view.

Auxiliary
Creates an auxiliary view from an existing view. An auxiliary view is one that is projected onto a plane perpendicular to one of the orthographic views and inclined in the adjacent view.

978 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Two points define the inclined plane used for the auxiliary projection. Both points must be located in the same viewport. A rubber-band line perpendicular to the inclined plane helps you select the center of the new viewport.

Section
Creates a drafting sectional view of solids, complete with cross-hatching. When you use SOLDRAW on a sectional view created with this option, it creates a temporary copy of the solids and uses SLICE to perform the operation at the cutting plane that you define. SOLDRAW then generates a profile of the visible half of the solids and discards the original copy. Finally SOLDRAW sections the solids. Solids not crossing the cutting plane are generated as full profiles. Because drafting standards recommend not drawing hidden lines in sectional views, SOLVIEW freezes the View Name-HID layer.

SOLVIEW | 979

In the original viewport, specify two points to define the sectioning plane. Define the viewing side by specifying a point on one side of the cutting plane. Enter the scale of the new view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The default value is a 1:1 scale, which is equivalent to zoom 1.0xp. At the next prompt, specify the center of the new viewport. If you accepted the default scale (by pressing Enter), a rubber-band line perpendicular to the sectioning plane helps you locate the center of the new view. Otherwise, you can place the view anywhere.

SPELL
Quick Reference
See also:

Check Spelling

Checks spelling in a drawing.

980 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Text tool group Check Spelling Menu: Tools Spelling Toolbar: Text Command entry: 'spell for transparent use

Summary
When you enter spell at the Command prompt, the Check Spelling dialog box is displayed. Select the Start button to begin the spelling check. If Check Spelling is set to Entire Drawing, spelling is checked on the Model layout, then on named (paper space) layouts. If a flagged word is identified, the drawing area highlights and zooms to that word. NOTE Invisible text such as text on hidden layers, and hidden block attributes is not checked. Non-uniformly scaled blocks and objects not on the supported annotation scale are also not checked.

Check Spelling Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Check Spelling

Displays the spelling checker dialog box that picks and displays the wrongly spelt words and suggests alternate words.

Check Spelling Dialog Box | 981

Summary
Checks the spelling in single-line text, multiline text, multileader text, text within block attributes, text within xrefs, and text added to dimensions. In block attributes, only the attribute values are checked. The spelling in text objects within block references and nested block references is checked, but spell checking in block definitions is performed only if the associated block reference has been selected.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Where to Check
Displays the areas you want checked for spelling.

982 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Select Text Objects

Limits the spelling check to the selected single-line text, multiline text, dimension text, multileader text, text within block attributes, and text within xrefs.

Not in Dictionary
Displays the word identified as misspelled.

Suggestions
Displays a list of suggested replacement words from the current dictionary. You can select another replacement word from the list, or edit or enter a replacement word in the top Suggestions text area.

Start
Starts checking text for spelling errors.

Change
Replaces the current word with the word in the Suggestions box.

Change All
Replaces the current word in all selected text objects in the spell check area.

Add Word
Adds the current word to the current custom dictionary. The maximum word length is 63 characters.

Ignore
Skips the current word.

Ignore All
Skips all remaining words that match the current word.

Undo
Reverses the previous check spelling action or series of actions, including Ignore, Ignore All, Change, Change All, and Add Word.

Show/Hide Options
Controls the display of advanced search options.

Include
Dimension Text Searches dimension text.

Check Spelling Dialog Box | 983

Block Attributes Searches block attributes text for spelling errors. External References Specifies to search external references for spelling errors.

Options
Ignore Capitalized Words Specifies to ignore capitalized words. Ignore Words with Mix Cases Specifies to ignore words that contain uppercase and lowercase letters. Ignore Words in Uppercase Specifies to ignore words that are in all uppercase. Ignore Words with Numbers Specifies to ignore words that include numbers. Ignore Words Containing Punctuation Specifies to ignore words that contain punctuation.

SPHERE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid Sphere

Creates a 3D solid sphere.

Access Methods

Button

984 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Solid Primitives flyout Sphere Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Sphere

Summary
You can create a sphere by specifying a center point and a point on the radius. You can control the smoothness of curved 3D solids, such as a sphere, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point on page 985 or [3P on page 985/2P on page 986/Ttr on page 986]: Specify a point or enter an option

Center Point
Specifies the center point of the sphere. When you specify the center point, the sphere is positioned so that its central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Latitudinal lines are parallel to the XY plane. Radius Defines the radius of the sphere. Diameter Defines the diameter of the sphere.

3P (Three Points)
Defines the circumference of the sphere by specifying three points anywhere in 3D space. The three specified points also define the plane of the circumference.

SPHERE | 985

2P (Two Points)
Defines the circumference of the sphere by specifying two points anywhere in 3D space. The plane of the circumference is defined by the Z value of the first point.

TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)

Defines the sphere with a specified radius tangent to two objects. The specified tangency points are projected onto the current UCS.

SPLINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Splines

Creates a smooth B-spline curve that passes through or near a set of points that controls the shape of the curve.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group Spline Menu: Draw Spline

Summary
There are two methods for creating B-splines: with fit points or with control vertices. Splines created with fit points pass through the specified points by default, but splines created using control vertices are defined by the points on a control frame that are often not located on the spline. Each method has its advantages and options.

986 | Chapter 19 S Commands

For splines that are not selected, use the CVSHOW on page 239 and CVHIDE on page 233 commands to display and hide the control vertices and control frame. For splines created with control vertices, you can display the control frame by selecting the spline.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point or [Method on page 987/Degree on page 991/Object on page 989]:

Method
Controls whether the spline is created with fit points or with control vertices. The options available differ depending on the method. See Options for Splines with Fit Points on page 989 or Options for Splines with Control Vertices on page 991. Fit Creates a degree 3 (cubic) B-spline by specifying fit points that the spline must pass through or, when the tolerance value is greater than 0, within the specified tolerance distance. Changing the Method updates the SPLMETHOD on page 1500 system variable.

SPLINE | 987

Control Vertices Creates a B-spline by specifying control vertices. Use this method to create B-splines of degree 1 (linear), degree 2 (quadratic), degree 3 (cubic), and so on up to degree 10. Adjusting the shape of a spline by moving control vertices often provides better results than by moving fit points. This is the preferred method if you are creating geometry to use with 3D NURBS surfaces.

988 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Object Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent splines. The original polyline is retained or discarded depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable. Next Point Creates additional curve segments until you press Enter.

Undo Removes the last specified point. Close Closes the spline curve by defining the last point to be coincident with the first and making it tangent at that point (C1 continuity).

Options for Splines with Fit Points

The following options are specific to the fit point method. Knots Specifies the knot parameterization, one of several computational methods that blend the component curves between successive fit points within a B-spline. The method used determines the shape of the spline between the fit points. (SPLKNOTS on page 1500 system variable)

SPLINE | 989

Chord - The chord-length method spaces the knots connecting each component curve to be proportional to the distances between each associated pair of fit points. An example is the green curve in the illustration. Square Root - Also called centripetal parameterization, this method spaces the knots connecting each component curve to be proportional to the square root of the distance between each associated pair of fit points. This method usually produces gentler curves. An example is the blue curve in the illustration. Uniform - Also called equidistant, this method spaces the knots of each component curve to be equal, regardless of the spacing of the fit points. This method often produces curves that overshoot the fit points. An example is the magenta curve in the illustration.

Start Tangency Specifies a tangent condition on the starting point of the spline.

End Tangency Specifies a tangent condition on the ending point of the spline.

990 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Tolerance A tolerance value of 0 requires that the resulting spline must pass through specified fit points. A tolerance value greater than 0, allows the spline to deviate from the fit points by the tolerance distance. The tolerance value applies to all fit points except the starting and ending fit points, which always have a tolerance of 0.

Options for Splines with Control Vertices

The following options are specific to the control vertices (CV) method. (SPLMETHOD on page 1500 system variable) Degree Sets the polynomial degree of the resulting spline. Use this option to create B-splines of degree 1 (linear), degree 2 (quadratic), degree 3 (cubic), and so on up to degree 10.

SPLINEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Splines

Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a spline.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Object Spline Shortcut menu: Select a spline to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Spline.

Summary
Modifies the data that defines a spline, such as the number and weight of control vertices, the fit tolerance, and the starting and ending tangents. NOTE SPLINEDIT automatically converts spline-fit polylines to splines even if you immediately exit SPLINEDIT after selecting the spline-fit polyline.

SPLINEDIT | 991

The data that defines a spline is represented in one of two formats: as a control frame or as fit points. The format can change depending on how the spline was orginally created, the options selected from the grip menus, or the options used in SPLINEDIT. You can change any of following data:

Control frame data consists of control vertices, the polynomial degree of the spline, and the weights assigned to each control vertex. Fit data consists of fit points, knot parameterization, the fit tolerance, and the tangents at the endpoints of the spline.

NOTE Switching from displaying control vertices to fit points automatically changes the selected spline to degree 3. Splines originally created using higher-degree equations will likely change shape as a result.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select spline: Enter an option [Close on page 992/Join on page 992/Fit data on page 992/Edit Vertex on page 994/convert to Polyline on page 995/Reverse on page 996/Undo on page 996] <eXit>:

Close/Open
One of the following options displays, depending on whether the selected spline is open or closed. An open spline has two endpoints, while a closed spline forms a loop. Close Closes an open spline by defining the last point to be coincident with the first and making it tangent at that point (C1 continuity). Open Opens a closed spline by removing the final curve segment between the first and last points specified when the spline was originally created.

Join
Combines a selected spline with other splines, lines, polylines, and arcs at coincident endpoints to form a larger spline. Objects are joined with kinks at the points where they are joined (C0 continuity).

Fit Data
Edits fit point data using the following options: Enter a fit data option [Add on page 993/Close on page 993Delete on page 993/Kink on page 993/Move on page 993/Purge on page 994/Tangents on page 994/toLerance on page 994/eXit on page 994] <eXit>:

992 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Add
Adds fit points to the spline. After selecting a fit point, specify a new fit point to be added to the spline in the direction of the next fit point, which is automatically highlighted. If you select the last fit point on an open spline, the new fit point is added to the end of the spline. If you select the first fit point on an open spline, you have the option of specifying whether the new fit point is added before or after the first point.

Delete
Removes selected fit points from a spline.

Kink
Adds a knot and fit point at the specified location on the spline, which does not maintain tangent or curvature continuity at that point.

Move
Moves fit points to new locations. New Location Moves the selected fit point to the specified location.

SPLINEDIT | 993

Next Selects the next fit point. Previous Selects the previous fit point. Select Point Select any fit point on the spline.

Purge
Replaces the fit data from the spline with control vertices.

Tangents
Changes the starting and ending tangents of a spline. Specify a point to establish a tangent direction. You can use object snaps such as Perpendicular or Parallel. If the spline is closed, the prompt becomes Specify Tangent or [System
Default].

The System Default option calculates the default end tangents.

Tolerance
Refits the spline to the existing fit points using the new tolerance value.

Exit
Returns to the previous prompt.

Edit Vertex
Edits control frame data using the following options: Enter a vertex editing option [Add on page 994/Delete on page 995/Elevate order on page 995/Move on page 995/Weight on page 995/eXit on page 995] <eXit>:

Add
Adds a new control vertex at the point you specify that is located between two existing control vertices.

994 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Delete
Removes a selected control vertex.

Elevate Order
Increases the polynomial order (degree plus one) of the spline. This results in increasing the number of control vertices across the spline. The maximum value is 26.

Move
Relocates a selected control vertex.

New Location on page 993 Next on page 994 Previous on page 994 Select Point on page 994

Weight
Changes the weight of a specified control vertex. New Weight Recalculates the spline based on the new weight value for the specified control vertex. A larger value pulls the spline closer to the control vertex.

Next on page 994 Previous on page 994 Select Point on page 994

Exit
Returns to the previous prompt.

Convert to Polyline
Converts the spline to a polyline. The precision value determines how closely the resulting polyline matches the spline. Valid values are any integer between 0 and 99. NOTE A high precision value will decrease performance. The PLINECONVERTMODE system variable determines whether the polylines are created with linear or arc segments. The DELOBJ system variable determines whether the original spline is retained.

SPLINEDIT | 995

Reverse
Reverses the direction of the spline. This option is intended primarily for third-party applications.

Undo
Cancels the last action.

Exit
Returns to the Command prompt.

SPOTLIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Spotlights

Creates a spotlight that emits a directional cone of light.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Lights tool group Spotlight Menu: View Render Light New Spotlight

Summary
A spotlight distribution casts a focused beam of light like a flashlight, a follow spot in a theater, or a headlight.

996 | Chapter 19 S Commands

If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name on page 997/Intensity on page 997/Status on page 997/Hotspot on page 997/Falloff on page 997/shadoW on page 998/Attenuation on page 999/Color on page 999/eXit on page 999] <eXit>: If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name on page 997/Intensity factor on page 997/Photometry on page 997/Status on page 997/Hotspot on page 997/Falloff on page 997/shadoW on page 998/Attenuation on page 999/filterColor on page 999/eXit on page 999] <eXit>: NOTE When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the Attenuation option has no affect on the creation of the light. It is only maintained for scripting compatibility.

Name
Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name.

Intensity/Intensity Factor
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system.

Status
Turns the light on and off.

Photometry
Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived

SPOTLIGHT | 997

power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface, per unit area. Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface.

Map Size. Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map. Softness. Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map.

Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources.

998 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.) Specify the sample size by entering a. Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v.

Attenuation
Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a spotlight, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay.

Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits. Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset from the center of the light. The default is 0. Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time.

Exit
Exits the command.

SPOTLIGHT | 999

STATUS
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain General Drawing Information

Displays drawing statistics, modes, and extents.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Inquiry Status Command entry: 'status for transparent use

Summary
All coordinates and distances are displayed by STATUS in the format specified by UNITS. STATUS reports the number of objects in the current drawing. This includes graphical objects such as arcs and polylines, and nongraphical objects such as layers and linetypes, and block definitions. In addition to overall drawing statistics and settings, the amount of installed memory free on your system, the amount of disk space available, and the amount of free space in the swap file are also listed. When used at the DIM prompt, STATUS reports the values and descriptions of all dimensioning system variables. In addition, STATUS displays the following information.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Model or Paper Space Limits Are Displays the grid limits defined by LIMITS. The first line shows the XY coordinate of the limit's lower-left corner, stored in the LIMMIN system variable. The second line shows the XY coordinate of the limit's upper-right corner, stored in the LIMMAX system variable. The notation Off to the right of the Y coordinate value indicates that limits checking is set to 0. Model or Paper Space Uses Displays the drawing extents, which includes all objects in the database and can exceed the grid limits. The first line shows the

1000 | Chapter 19 S Commands

XY coordinate of the lower-left corner of the extents. The second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper-right corner. The notation Over to the right of the Y coordinate value indicates that the drawing extends outside the grid limits. Display Shows Lists the portion of the drawing extents visible in the current viewport. The first line shows the XY coordinate of the display's lower-left corner. The second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper-right corner. Insertion Base Is Stores the insertion base point set by BASE, which gets expressed as a UCS coordinate for the current space. (INSBASE system variable) Snap Resolution Is Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. (SNAPUNIT system variable) Grid Spacing Is Specifies the grid spacing (X and Y) for the current viewport. (GRIDUNIT system variable) Current Space Shows whether model space or paper space is active. Current Layout Displays Model or the name of the current layout. Current Layer Sets the current layer. (CLAYER system variable) Current Color Sets the color of new objects. (CECOLOR system variable) Current Linetype Sets the linetype of new objects. (CELTYPE system variable) Current Material Sets the material of new objects. (CMATERIAL system variable) Current Lineweight Sets the lineweight of new objects. (CELWEIGHT system variable) Current Plot Style Controls the current plot style for new objects. (CPLOTSTYLE system variable) Current Elevation Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS. (ELEVATION system variable) Thickness Sets the current 3D thickness.

STATUS | 1001

(THICKNESS system variable) Fill, Grid, Ortho, Qtext, Snap, Tablet Shows whether these modes are on or off. Object Snap Modes Lists the running object snap modes specified by OSNAP.

STLOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Export Stereolithography STL Files

Stores solids in an ASCII or binary file.

Summary
The FACETRES system variable determines how the solid is triangulated. A higher value creates a finer mesh that more accurately represents the model. This also results in a much larger file. Select solids or watertight meshes You can select blocks or external references (xrefs) that contain solids or watertight meshes. Only solids and watertight meshes of the selected blocks of xrefs are included in the STL file. All other geometry is discarded. Create a binary STL file? [Yes/No] <Yes>: To create a STL file, enter y or press Enter. To create an ASCII file, enter n The Create STL File Dialog Box displays. The file is created with the .stl file name extension. The STL file format is compatible with stereolithography apparatus (SLA). The solid data is transferred to the SLA as a faceted representation of the model. The facets consist of a set of triangles (with outward pointing normals) that approximate the faces of the model. From the faceted data, the SLA workstation produces a set of contours that defines a series of layers representing the part to be built.

1002 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Create STL File Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Export Stereolithography STL Files

Saves a drawing as an STL file.

Access Methods
Command entry: stlout

Summary
The Create STL File dialog box is a standard file selection dialog box. The STL file format is preferred by 3D printing service providers. If you have prepared your drawing for 3D printing, you save it with the STLOUT command. The FACETRES system variable determines how the solid is triangulated. A higher value creates a finer mesh that more accurately represents the model. This also results in a much larger file.

STRETCH
Quick Reference
See also:

Resize or Reshape Objects

Stretches objects crossed by a selection window or polygon.

Access Methods

Button

Create STL File Dialog Box | 1003

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Move/Rotate/Scale tool group Stretch Menu: Modify Stretch

Summary
Objects that are partially enclosed by a crossing window are stretched. Objects that are completely enclosed within the crossing window, or that are selected individually, are moved rather than stretched. Several objects such as circles, ellipses, and blocks, cannot be stretched.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects to stretch by crossing-window or crossing-polygon... Select objects: Use the cpolygon option or the crossing object selection method, and press Enter. Individually selected objects and objects that are completely enclosed by the crossing selection are moved rather than stretched.

STRETCH moves only the vertices and endpoints that lie inside the crossing selection, leaving those outside unchanged. STRETCH does not modify 3D solids, polyline width, tangent, or curve-fitting information.

Base Point
Specify base point or [Displacement] <last displacement>: Specify a base point or enter displacement coordinates Specify second point or <use first point as displacement>: Specify a second point, or press Enter to use the previous coordinates as a displacement

1004 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Displacement
Specify displacement <last value>: Enter displacement values for X,Y (and optionally Z)

If you enter a second point, the objects are stretched the vector distance from the base point to the second point. If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is treated as an X,Y,Z displacement.

STYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Text Styles

Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Text Style Command entry: 'style for transparent use

Summary
The Text Style dialog box is displayed. If you enter -style at the Command prompt, options are displayed. You can specify the current text style to determine the appearance of all new text. A text style includes the font, size, obliquing angle, orientation, and other text characteristics.

STYLE | 1005

Text Style Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Text Styles

Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

Summary
Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Preview
Displays sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and modify the effects.

1006 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Effects
Modifies characteristics of the font, such as its height, width factor, and obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down, backwards, or vertically aligned.

Annotative (

Specifies that the text is . Click the information icon to learn more about the annotative objects. Match Text Orientation to Layout Specifies that the orientation of the text in paper space viewports matches the orientation of the layout. This option is available when the Annotative option is selected. Upside Down Displays the characters upside down. Backwards Displays the characters backwards. Vertical Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for TrueType fonts. Text Height Changes the size of the text. This option is available when the Annotative option is cleared. Paper Text Height Sets the text height based on the value you enter. Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the text height for this style automatically. If you enter 0.0, the text height defaults to the last text height used, or the value stored in the drawing template file. TrueType fonts might be displayed at a smaller height than SHX fonts with the same height setting. If the Annotative option is selected, the value entered sets the text height in paper space. See Set Text Height for more information. Width Factor

Text Style Dialog Box | 1007

Sets the character spacing. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Angle Sets the obliquing angle of the text. Entering a value between -85 and 85 italicizes the text. NOTE TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear bold on the screen. Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output. Fonts are plotted as specified by applied character formatting.

Styles
Displays the list of styles in the drawing. Style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-).

Family List
Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the Fonts folder. When you select a name from the list, the program reads the file for the specified font. The file's character definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use by another text style. You can define several styles that use the same font. For more information, see Assign Text Fonts.

Typeface
Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. When a SHX font fuile is selected from the Family list, you can select a Big Font file name from the Asian Set list.

Asian Set
Lists the available Big Font files when an SXH file is selected from the Family list. Select None if you do not want to use a Bif Font.

New (+)
Adds a new text style to the Styles list and automatically supplies the name stylen (where n is the number of the supplied style) for the current settings. You can accept the default or enter a name and close the Text Style dialog box to apply the current style settings to the new style name.

Delete (-)
Removes the selected text style.

1008 | Chapter 19 S Commands

NOTE You cannot remove text styles that are in use by an annotation object or style.

Style List Filter

The drop-down list specifies whether all styles or only the styles in use are displayed in the styles list.

Family Filter
Filters the fonts listed in the Family list.

-STYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Text Styles

Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter name of text style or [?] <current>: Enter a style name, enter ?, or press Enter Text Style Name Specifies the text style name. To define a style that uses Big Fonts, you can use long file names that do not contain commas. Commas are used to separate SHX files and Big Font files for defining a Big Font file. Enter a TrueType font family name or an SHX font file name. If you do not enter a file name extension, this program searches for an SHX file. If the file is not located, Windows substitutes the first located registered TrueType font. All long file names except those containing commas are accepted at the prompt. The comma is reserved for the Big Font naming convention: an SHX file followed by a comma (,), followed by the Big Font file name. A space is interpreted as part of the font name, not as a carriage return. If you enter annotative, you are prompted to create an text style. Tilde (~) Displays the Select Font File dialog box. In the Select Font File dialog box, valid types include SHX and TTF. The character definitions of the selected font file are loaded automatically unless

-STYLE | 1009

the file is already in use by another text style. You can define several styles that use the same font file. Match Text Orientation to Layout If you enter yes the current text style orientation in paper space viewports matches the layout. Height of Text If you enter a height of 0.0, you are prompted for the text height each time you enter text using this style. Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the Text Height (Non annotative), entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the Paper Text Height (Annotative), for this style. Width Factor Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Obliquing Angle Entering a value between -85 and 85 obliques the text. Vertical Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation. ?List Text Styles Lists the text styles available in the drawing. At the Enter Text Style(s) to List prompt, entering the name of a style displays the name, font file, height, width factor, obliquing angle, and generation of the style and exits the command. Entering an asterisk (*) or pressing Enter displays the height, width factor, obliquing angle, and generation (whether text is drawn backwards, upside-down, vertically, or normally) of each style, and then exits the command.

SUBTRACT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Composite Objects

Combines selected 3D solids or 2D regions by subtraction.

Access Methods

Button

1010 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Edit tool group Booleans flyout Subtract Menu: Modify Solid Editing Subtract

Summary
With SUBTRACT, you can create a 3D solid by subtracting one set of existing 3D solids from another, overlapping set. You can create a 2D region object by subtracting one set of existing region objects from another, overlapping set. You can select only regions for use with this command. NOTE Using SUBTRACT with 3D surfaces is not recommended. Use the SURFTRIM on page 1024 command instead. Select the objects that you want to keep, press Enter, then select the objects that you want to subtract.

Objects in the second selection set are subtracted from objects in the first selection set. A single new 3D solid, surface, or region is created.

SUBTRACT | 1011

You can only subtract regions from other regions that are on the same plane. However, you can perform simultaneous SUBTRACT actions by selecting sets of regions on different planes. The program then produces separate subtracted regions on each plane. Regions for which there are no other selected coplanar regions are rejected. You cannot use SUBTRACT with mesh objects. However, if you select a mesh object, you will be prompted to convert it to a 3D solid or surface.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects (to subtract from) Specifies the 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to be modified by subtraction. Select objects (to subtract) Specifies the 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to subtract.

1012 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SURFBLEND
Quick Reference
See also:

Blend a Surface

Creates a continuous blend surface between two existing surfaces.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Create tool group Surface Blend Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Surfaces Blend

Summary
When you blend two surfaces together, you specify surface continuity and bulge magnitude. Set SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 1507 to 1 to create a relationship between the blend surface and the originating curves.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Select Surface Edge

Selects an edge subobject or a surface or region (not the surface itself) as the first and second edges.

Continuity
Measures how smoothly surfaces flow into each other. The default is G0. Select a value or use the grip to change the continuity.

SURFBLEND | 1013

Bulge Magnitude
Sets the roundness of the blend surface edge where it meets the originating surface. The default is 0.5. Valid values are between 0 and 1.

SURFEXTEND
Quick Reference
See also:

Extend a Surface

Lengthens a surface by a specified distance.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Edit tool group (expanded) Surface Extend Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Surfaces Extend

Summary

1014 | Chapter 19 S Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify Extension Distance Specifies the extension length. Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the length of the surface extension. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations. Modes

Extend - Extrudes the surface in a way that tries to mimic and continue the shape of the surface. Stretch - Extrudes the surface without trying to mimic and continue the shape of the surface.

Creation Type

Merge - Extends the surface the specified distance without creating a new surface. Append - Creates a new extension surface that is adjacent to the original surface. If the originating surface is a NURBS surface, the new extension surface will also be a NURBS surface.

SURFFILLET
Quick Reference
See also:

Fillet a Surface

Creates a filleted surface between two other surfaces.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Edit tool group Surface Fillet

SURFFILLET | 1015

Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Surfaces Fillet

Summary
The fillet surface has a constant radius profile and is tangent to the original surfaces. The original surfaces are automatically trimmed to connect the edges of the fillet surface.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. First and Second Surface or Region Specifies the first and second surfaces or regions. Radius Specifies fillet radius. Use the Fillet grip or enter a value to change the radius. You cannot enter a value that is smaller than the gap between the surfaces. If no radius value is entered, the FILLETRAD3D on page 1327 system variable value is used. Trim Surface Trims the original surfaces or regions to the edges of the fillet surface. Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the fillet radius. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations.

1016 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SURFNETWORK
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Network Surfaces

Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects).

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Create tool group Surface Network Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Surfaces Network

Summary
A network surface can be created between a network of curves or between the edges of other 3D surfaces or solids.

SURFNETWORK | 1017

The surface will be dependent on the curves or edges from which it was created if the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 1507 system variable is set to 1.

List of Prompts
The following prompts display:
Select Curves or Surface Edges in the First Direction Select a network

of open curves, open surface edges, or region edges (not the surfaces or regions) for the U or V direction.
Select Curves or Surface Edges in the Second Direction Select a network

of open curves, open surface edges, or region edges (not the surfaces or regions) for the U or V direction.
Bulge Magnitude Sets the roundness of the network surface edge where it

meets the originating surface. Valid values are between 0 and 1. The default is 0.5. This option displays only if a lofting edge belongs to a 3D solid or surface (not a curve).

1018 | Chapter 19 S Commands

SURFOFFSET
Quick Reference
See also:

Offset a Surface

Creates a parallel surface a specified distance from the original surface.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Create tool group (expanded) Surface Offset Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Surfaces Offset

Summary
Reverse the direction of the offset with the Flip Direction option.

SURFOFFSET | 1019

List of Prompts
The following prompts display. Specify Offset Distance Specifies the distance between the offset surface and the original surface. Flip Direction Reverses the offset direction shown by the arrows.

Both Sides Offsets the surface in both directions (creates two new surfaces in instead of one).

Solid Creates a solid from the offset. This is similar to the THICKEN on page 1049 command.

Connect Connects multiple offset surfaces, if the original surfaces are connected.

1020 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the distance of the surface offset. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations.

SURFPATCH
Quick Reference
See also:

Patch a Surface

Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Create tool group Surface Patch Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Surfaces Patch

SURFPATCH | 1021

Summary
You can also add an additional curve over the closed loop to constrain and guide the patch surface.

When you create a patch surface, you can specify surface continuity and bulge magnitude. If the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 1507 system variable is set to 1, associativity is maintained between the patch surface and the originating edges or curves.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Select Surface Edges or Curves

Select one or more closed surface edges (not the surface itself) or one or more curves. You cannot choose both edges and curves at the same time.

Continuity
Measures how smoothly surfaces flow into each other. The default is G0. See Understand Surface Continuity and Bulge Magnitude. Select a value or use the grip to change the continuity.

Bulge Magnitude
For best results, enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the roundness of the patch surface edge where it meets the originating surface. The default is 0.5.

1022 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Constrain Geometry
Uses additional guide curves to shape the patch surface. Guide curves can be curves or points.

SURFSCULPT
Quick Reference
See also:

Convert a Group of Surfaces to a 3D Solid

Trims and combines surfaces that bound a watertight area to create a solid.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Create tool group (expanded) Surface Sculpt Menu: Modify Surface Editing Sculpt

Summary
The SURFSCULPT command automatically combines and trims a collection of surfaces that enclose a watertight area to create a solid.

SURFSCULPT | 1023

NOTE The area enclosed by the surfaces must be watertight and the surfaces must have a continuity of G0 or the SURFSCULPT command cannot complete. The SURFSCULPT command also works with solid and mesh objects. If you are working with meshes, the operation uses the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT on page 1489 setting.

SURFTRIM
Quick Reference
See also:

Trim and Untrim Surfaces

Trims portions of a surface where it meets another surface or type of geometry.

Access Methods

Button

1024 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Edit tool group Surface Trim Menu: Modify Surface Editing Trim

Summary
Trims portions of a surface where it meets or bisects a curve, region, or another surface.

If the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 1507 system variable is set to 1, the trimmed surface updates whenever the trimming edges are modified.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select Surfaces or Regions to Trim Select one or more surfaces or regions

to trim.
Select Cutting Curves, Surfaces, or Regions The curves that can be used

as a trimming edge includes lines, arc, circles, ellipses, 2D polylines, 2D spline fit polylines, 2D curve fit polylines, 3D polylines, 3D spline-fit polylines, splines, and helixes. You can also use surfaces and regions as trimming boundaries.
Select Area to Trim Select one or more regions on a surface to remove.

Extend Controls whether the cutting surface is trimmed to meet the edge of the trimmed surface.

SURFTRIM | 1025

Projection Direction The cutting geometry is projected onto the surface. Controls the projection angle as follows:
Automatic When trimming a surface or region in plan, parallel view (for example, the default Top, Front, and Right view), the cutting geometry is projected onto the surface in the view direction. When trimming a surface or region with a planar curve in an angled parallel or perspective view, the cutting geometry is projected onto the surface in a direction perpendicular to the curve plane. When trimming a surface or region with a 3D curve in an angled, parallel or perspective view (for example, the default perspective view), the cutting geometry is projected onto the surface in a direction parallel to the Z direction of the current UCS.

View UCS None

Projects the geometry based on the current view. Projects the geometry in the +Z and -Z axis of the current UCS. The surface will only be trimmed if the cutting curve lies on the surface.

SURFUNTRIM
Quick Reference
See also:

Trim and Untrim Surfaces

Replaces surface areas removed by the SURFTRIM command.

1026 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Surfaces - Edit tool group (expanded) Surface Untrim Menu: Modify Surface Editing Untrim

Summary
If the trimmed edge is dependent on another surface edge that has also been trimmed, you may not be able to fully restore the trimmed area.

NOTE SURFUNTRIM does not restore areas removed by the SURFAUTOTRIM system variable and PROJECTGEOMETRY.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select Edges on Surfaces to Un-Trim [SURface] Select the edges of trimmed

areas to replace or enter SUR to untrim surfaces.

Select Surfaces to Un-Trim Select a surface to replace all trimmed areas.

SURFUNTRIM | 1027

SWEEP
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Sweeping

Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Solid Creation flyout Sweep Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Sweep

Summary
Creates a solid or surface by sweeping an open or closed, planar or non-planar curve (profile) along an open or closed path. Open curves create surfaces and closed curves create solids or surfaces, depending on the specified mode.

You can use the following objects and paths when creating a swept solid or surface: Objects for sweeping Objects that Can Be Swept
2D and 3D splines

Objects that Can Be Used as a Sweep Path

2D and 3D splines

1028 | Chapter 19 S Commands

Objects that Can Be Swept

2D polylines 2D solids 3D solid face subobjects Arcs Circles Ellipses Elliptical arcs Lines Regions Solid, surface and mesh edge subobjects Trace

Objects that Can Be Used as a Sweep Path

2D and 3D polylines Solid, surface and mesh edge subobjects Helices Arcs Circles Ellipses Elliptical arcs Lines

NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. To automatically delete the original geometry used to create the object, use the DELOBJ system variable. For associative surfaces on page 1507, the DELOBJ system variable is ignored and the originating geometry is not deleted.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Objects to Sweep Specifies an object to use as the sweep profile. Sweep Path Specifies the sweep path based on the object you select. Mode Controls whether the sweep action creates a solid or a surface. Surfaces are swept as either NURBS surfaces or procedural surfaces, depending on the SURFACEMODELINGMODE on page 1509 system variable.

SWEEP | 1029

Alignment Specifies whether the profile is aligned to be normal to the tangent direction of the sweep path. NOTE If the profile is not perpendicular (normal) to the tangent of the start point of the path, then the profile automatically aligns. Enter No at the alignment prompt to prevent this. Base Point Specifies a base point for the objects to be swept. Scale Specifies a scale factor for a sweep operation. The scale factor is uniformly applied to the objects that are swept from the start to the end of the sweep path.

Reference. Scales the selected objects based on the length you reference by picking points or entering values.

Twist Sets a twist angle for the objects being swept. The twist angle specifies the amount of rotation along the entire length of the sweep path.

Bank. Specifies whether the curve(s) being swept will naturally bank (rotate) along a 3D sweep path (3D polyline, spline, or helix).

1030 | Chapter 19 S Commands

T Commands

TABLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Tables

Creates an empty table object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Tables tool group Table Menu: Draw Table

Summary
A table is a compound object that contains data in rows and columns. It can be created from an empty table or a table style. When you create a table, the number of columns and rows created is determined by the two points picked to define the size of the table. If you enter -table at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

1031

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner: Specify a point for the first corner of the table Specify second corner: Specify the opposite corner of the table

-TABLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Tables

Creates an empty table object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current table style: "Standard" Cell width: 2.5000 Cell height: 1 line(s) Enter number of columns on page 1032 or [Auto/from Style/data Link] <5>:

Number of Columns
Specifies the number of columns.

Number of Rows
Specifies the number of rows. Insertion Point Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table. If the table style sets the direction of the table to read from the bottom up, the insertion point is the lower-left corner of the table. Width Specifies a width for the table columns. Height Specifies a height for the table rows. Style Specifies a table style for the table. The specified table style must contain a starting table. Auto Specifies a size and a location for the table. When this option is selected, you can set the number of columns or the column width, but not both. The number of rows and the row height depend on the size of the window you specify.

1032 | Chapter 20 T Commands

First Corner Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table. If the table style sets the direction of the table to read from the bottom up, the insertion point is the lower-left corner of the table. Height Specifies a height for the table rows.

Auto
Specifies a size and a location for the table. Number of Rows Specifies the number of rows.

From Style
Specifies a table style for creating the table. You can use the pointing device or enter coordinate values at the Command prompt. The specified table style must contain a starting table. Insertion Point Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table. If the table style sets the direction of the table to read from the bottom up, the insertion point is the lower-left corner of the table. Style Specifies a table style for the table. Entering [?] displays a list of table styles available in your drawing. Rows Specifies the number of rows you want to add to the table stored in the specified table style. The rows are added to the rows already in the specified table. Columns Specifies the number of columns you want to add to the table stored in the specified table style. The columns are added to the columns already in the specified table.

Options
Specifies special formatting options that can be inserted in the table. Label Text Retains rows with a cell type of Label found in the table styles starting table. The cell type is set in the Properties Inspector palette. The Header and Title cell styles use the Label cell type by default. Data Text Retains rows with a cell type of Data found in the table styles starting table. The cell type is set in the Properties Inspector palette. The Data cell style uses the Data cell type property by default. Formulas Retains formulas found in the specified table styles starting table. Fields Retains fields found in the specified table styles starting table. For more information, see Use Fields in Text.

-TABLE | 1033

Blocks Retains blocks found in the specified table styles starting table. Cell Style Overrides Retains cell style overrides found in the specified table styles starting table.

TABLEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Text and Blocks to Tables

Edits text in a table cell.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Double-click inside a table cell. Pick a table cell: Click inside a table cell, and enter text or use the Text Formatting toolbar or the Options shortcut menu to make changes

TABLEEXPORT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Tables

Exports data from a table object in CSV file format.

Access Methods Summary

A standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Table data is exported in the comma-separated (CSV) file format. All formatting of the table and its text is lost.

1034 | Chapter 20 T Commands

TABSURF
Quick Reference
See also:

Construct Meshes from Other Objects

Creates a mesh from a line or curve that is swept along a straight path.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Meshes Tabulated Mesh

Summary
Select a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or polyline to sweep in a straight path. Then select a line or polyline to determine the first and last points of a vector that indicates the direction and length of the polygon mesh.

The MESHTYPE system variable sets which type of mesh is created. Mesh objects are created by default. Set the variable to 0 to create legacy polyface or polygon mesh. For polygon meshes, TABSURF constructs a 2 by n mesh, where n is determined by the SURFTAB1 system variable. The M direction of the mesh is always 2 and lies along the direction vector. The N direction lies along the path curve. If the path curve is a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or spline-fit polyline, tabulation lines are drawn that divide the path curve into intervals of equal size set by SURFTAB1. If the path curve is a polyline that has not been spline fit, tabulation lines are drawn at the ends of straight segments, and each arc segment is divided into intervals set by SURFTAB1.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

TABSURF | 1035

Object for path curve Specifies which object is swept along the path. The path curve defines the approximated surface of the polygon mesh. It can be a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or 2D or 3D polyline. The mesh is drawn starting at the point on the path curve closest to the selection point. Object for direction vector. Specifies a line or open polyline that defines the direction of the sweep.

Only the first and last points on a polyline are considered, and intermediate vertices are ignored. The direction vector indicates the direction and length of the shape to be extruded. The end selected on the polyline or line determines the direction of the extrusion. The original path curve is drawn with wide lines to help you visualize how the direction vector dictates the construction of a tabulated mesh.

TARGETPOINT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Point Lights

Creates a target point light.

1036 | Chapter 20 T Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify source location <0,0,0>: Enter coordinate values or use the pointing device Specify target location <0,0,-10>: Enter coordinate values or use the pointing device If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name on page 1037/Intensity on page 1037/Status on page 1037/shadoW on page 1038/Attenuation on page 1039/Color on page 1039/eXit on page 1039] <eXit>: If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an option to change [Name on page 1037/Intensity factor on page 1037/Status on page 1037/Photometry on page 1037/shadoW on page 1038/Attenuation on page 1039/filterColor on page 1039/eXit on page 1039] <eXit>: NOTE When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the Attenuation option has no affect on the creation of the light. It is only maintained for scripting compatibility.

Name
Specifies the name of the light.

Intensity/Intensity Factor
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light.

Status
Turns the light on and off.

TARGETPOINT | 1037

Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface.

Shadow
Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off the display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Map Size Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Softness Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map. Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources.

1038 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Shape Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.)

Attenuation
Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a point light, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay.

Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits or not. Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset from the center of the light. Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time.

Exit
Exits the command.

TARGETPOINT | 1039

TEXT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Single-Line Text

Creates a single-line text object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Text tool group Multiline Text flyout Single Line Menu: Draw Text Single Line Text

Summary
You can use single-line text to create one or more lines of text, where each text line is an independent object that you can move, format, or otherwise modify. Right-click in the text box to select options on the shortcut menu. If TEXT was the last command entered, pressing Enter at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt skips the prompts for paper height and rotation angle. The text that you enter in the text box is placed directly beneath the previous line of text. The point that you specified at the prompt is also stored as the insertion point of the text. When creating text, you can click anywhere in a drawing to create a new text block. You can also use the keyboard to move among text blocks (for example: for new text created using the TEXT command, you can navigate through text groups by pressing Tab or Shift+Tab, or edit a group of text lines by pressing Alt and clicking each text object.) NOTE Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it.

1040 | Chapter 20 T Commands

You can enter special characters and format text by entering Unicode strings and control codes. Use -TEXT to honor the TEXTEVAL system variable.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current text style: <current> Current text height: <current> Annotative: <current> Specify start point on page 1041 of text or [Justify on page 1041/Style on page 1044]: Specify a point or enter an option

Start Point
Specifies a start point for the text object. Enter text in the In-Place Text Editor for single-line text. The SpecifyHeight prompt is displayed only if the current text style is not and does not have a fixed height. The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is annotative.

Justify
Controls justification of the text. You can also enter any of these options at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt. Align Specifies both text height and text orientation by designating the endpoints of the baseline. The size of the characters adjusts in proportion to their height. The longer the text string, the shorter the characters.

Fit Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with two points and a height. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

TEXT | 1041

The height is the distance in drawing units that the uppercase letters extend from the baseline. Designated text height is the distance between the start point and a point you specify. The longer the text string, the narrower the characters. The height of the characters remains constant. Center Aligns text from the horizontal center of the baseline, which you specify with a point. The rotation angle specifies the orientation of the text baseline with respect to the center point. You can designate the angle by specifying a point. The text baseline runs from the start point toward the specified point. If you specify a point to the left of the center point, the text is drawn upside down.

Middle Aligns text at the horizontal center of the baseline and the vertical center of the height you specify. Middle-aligned text does not rest on the baseline. The Middle option differs from the MC option in that it uses the midpoint of all text, including descenders. The MC option uses the midpoint of the height of uppercase letters.

Right Right-justifies the text at the baseline, which you specify with a point.

TL (Top Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

TC (Top Center) Centers text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

1042 | Chapter 20 T Commands

TR (Top Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

ML (Middle Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

MC (Middle Center) Centers the text both horizontally and vertically at the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. The MC option differs from the Middle option in that it uses the midpoint of the height of uppercase letters. The Middle option uses the midpoint of all text, including descenders.

MR (Middle Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

BL (Bottom Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

BC (Bottom Center) Centers text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

BR (Bottom Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only.

TEXT | 1043

Style
Specifies the text style, which determines the appearance of the text characters. Text you create uses the current text style. Entering ? lists the current text styles, associated font files, height, and other parameters.

Text Shortcut Menu

Quick Reference
See also:

Create Single-Line Text

Displays options available for creating and modifying single-line text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Opaque Background When checked, makes the background of the editor opaque. Insert Field Displays the Field dialog box, where you can select a field to insert in the text. Find and Replace Displays the Replace dialog box. Select All Selects all the text in the single-line text object. Change Case Changes the case of selected text.

1044 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Special Unicode Characters

Quick Reference
See also:

Create Single-Line Text

When entering text, you can create special characters, including the degree symbol, plus/minus tolerance symbol, and the diameter symbol, by entering the following Unicode character strings.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. \U+00B0 Degrees symbol () \U+00B1 Tolerance symbol () \U+2205 Diameter symbol ( )

See Unicode Font Descriptions in the Customization Guide.

Control Codes and Special Characters

Quick Reference
See also:

Create Single-Line Text

Summary
In addition to using Unicode characters for entering special characters, you can also overscore text, underscore text, or insert a special character by including control information in the text string. Use a pair of percent signs to introduce each control sequence. You can use this control code with standard AutoCAD for Mac text fonts and Adobe PostScript fonts.

Special Unicode Characters | 1045

List of Options
The following options are displayed. %%nnn Draws character number nnn. You can use these control codes with standard AutoCAD for Mac text fonts only: %%o Toggles overscoring on and off.

%%u Toggles underscoring on and off.

%%d Draws degrees symbol ().

%%p Draws plus/minus tolerance symbol ().

%%c Draws circle diameter dimensioning symbol ().

%%% Draws a single percent sign (%). This is valid for the TEXT command only.

Overscoring and underscoring can be in effect at the same time. Both turn off automatically at the end of the text string.

You can use the %%nnn control sequence to display special characters using the PostScript fonts. A sample drawing (truetype.dwg) showing the character map for each font is provided in the sample folder.

1046 | Chapter 20 T Commands

TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable

Quick Reference
See also:

Create Single-Line Text

Summary
Entering -text at the Command prompt displays the same prompts as the TEXT command. Unlike the TEXT command, -TEXT honors the setting of the TEXTEVAL system variable. When the TEXTEVAL system variable is set to 2, AutoLISP expressions are evaluated when the -TEXT command ends. AutoLISP expressions that are entered using this method must begin with an exclamation point or left parenthesis. The TEXT command honors the TEXTEVAL system variable setting only if used in a script or AutoLISP expression and all the TEXT command prompts are included within the script or AutoLISP expression.

TEXTEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied

Edits a dimensional constraint, dimension, or text object.

Summary
Displays the in-place text editor, and updates the dimension text on exit. The TEXTEDIT command works with TEXT, MTEXT, dimensions, and dimensional constraints.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable | 1047

Select an annotation object: Select a text, mtext, dimensional, or dimensional constraint object to edit

TEXTTOFRONT
Quick Reference
See also:

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Brings text and dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Move/Rotate/Scale tool group (expanded) Draw Order flyout Bring Text to Front, Bring Dimensions to Front Menu: Tools Draw Order Bring Text and Dimensions to Front

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Bring to front: [Text/Dimensions/Both] <Both>: Enter an option or press Enter Text Brings all text in front of all other objects in the drawing. Dimensions Brings all dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing. Both Brings all text and dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing. NOTE Text and dimensions that are contained within blocks and xrefs cannot be brought to the front apart from the containing object. Also, text in multileaders and tables are not supported.

1048 | Chapter 20 T Commands

THICKEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Create 3D Solids from Objects

Converts a surface into a 3D solid with a specified thickness.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Edit (expanded) Thicken Menu: Modify 3D Operations Thicken

Summary
A useful technique for modeling a complex 3D curved solid is to first create a surface and then convert it to a 3D solid by thickening it. Initially, the default thickness value is zero. During a drawing session, the default value for the thickness is the previously entered thickness value. The DELOBJ system variable controls whether the object(s) you select are automatically deleted when the surface is created or whether you are prompted to delete the object(s). If you select a mesh face to thicken, you can choose to convert the mesh object to a solid or surface before completing the operation.

List of Options
The following prompts are displayed. Surfaces to thicken Specifies one or more surfaces to thicken into solids. Thickness Sets the height of the thickened object.

THICKEN | 1049

TIFOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Export Raster Files

Saves selected objects to a file in TIFF file format.

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press Enter to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter A TIFF file is created that contains the objects you select. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. NOTE When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), command prompts are displayed.

TIME
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain General Drawing Information

Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Inquiry Time Command entry: 'time for transparent use

1050 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Summary List of Prompts

The following prompts are displayed. Current time: Wednesday, December 31, 2003 9:54:51:406 AM Times for this drawing: Created: Friday, December 12, 2003 1:21:36:203 AM Last Updated: Wednesday, December 31, 2003 9:49:19:208 AM Total Editing Time: 0 days 06:44:10.520 Elapsed Timer (on): 0 days 00:07:05.312 Next Automatic Save In: 0 days 01:59:15.570 Enter option [Display/On/OFF/Reset]: Enter an option or press Enter Current Time Displays the current date and time to the nearest millisecond using a 24-hour clock. Created Displays the date and time that the current drawing was created. Last Updated Displays the date and time of the latest update of the current drawing. This date and time is initially the drawing creation time. The time is revised whenever the drawing file is saved. Total Editing Time Displays the time spent editing the current drawing. This timer is updated by the program and cannot be reset or stopped. Plotting time is not included in the total editing time. If you quit the editing session without saving the drawing, the time you spent in the editing session is not added to the accumulated editing time. Elapsed Timer Runs as another timer while the program is running. You can turn it on and off or reset it whenever you like. Next Automatic Save In Indicates the time remaining until the next automatic save. You can set the time interval using OPTIONS or the SAVETIME system variable. Display Repeats the display with updated times. On Starts the user elapsed timer if it was off. Off Stops the user elapsed timer. Reset Resets the user elapsed timer to 0 days 00:00:00.000.

TIME | 1051

TINSERT
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Text and Blocks to Tables

Inserts a block in a table cell.

Access Methods
Toolbar: With a table and table cell selected, click Insert Block on the Table Cell visor.

Summary
The Insert a Block in a Table Cell dialog box is displayed.

Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Add Text and Blocks to Tables

Specifies options for inserting a block in a table cell.

1052 | Chapter 20 T Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Name Specifies the block reference to insert. Browse Displays the Select Drawing File dialog box. Select the drawing file to insert as a block reference. Path Displays the location of the drawing file selected in the Select Drawing File dialog box. Scale Specifies the scale for the block reference. Enter a value or select AutoFit to scale the block to fit in the selected cell. AutoFit Controls if the block reference should be scaled to fit in the select table cell, or if the height and width of the table cell should be adjusted to fit the block reference being inserted. Rotation Angle Specifies a rotation angle for the block. Overall Cell Alignment Specifies alignment for the block in the table cell. The block is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the cell. The block is center-, left-, or right-aligned with respect to the left and right borders of the cell.

Insert a Block in a Table Cell Dialog Box | 1053

TOLERANCE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Geometric Tolerances

Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Dimensions tool group (expanded) Tolerance Menu: Dimension Tolerance

Summary
The Geometric Tolerance dialog box is displayed. Geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout. Feature control frames can be created with leader lines using TOLERANCE, LEADER, or QLEADER.

1054 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Geometric Tolerances

Specifies the symbols and values for a feature control frame.

Summary
After you select geometric characteristic symbols, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box closes and the following prompt is displayed: Enter tolerance location: Specify a location The feature control frame is placed at the specified location.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Sym
Displays the geometric characteristic symbol, which you select from the Symbol dialog box. The dialog box is displayed when you select one of the Sym boxes.

Tolerance 1
Creates the first tolerance value in the feature control frame. The tolerance value indicates the amount by which the geometric characteristic can deviate

Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box | 1055

from a perfect form. You can insert a diameter symbol before the tolerance value and a material condition symbol after it.

First Box Inserts a diameter symbol in front of the tolerance value. Click the box to insert the diameter symbol. Second Box Creates the tolerance value. Enter a value in the box. Third Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box, in which you select a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size. The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the first tolerance value in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.

Tolerance 2
Creates the second tolerance value in the feature control frame. Specify the second tolerance value in the same way as the first.

Datum 1
Creates the primary datum reference in the feature control frame. The datum reference can consist of a value and a modifying symbol. A datum is a theoretically exact geometric reference used to establish the tolerance zone for a feature.

First Box Creates the datum reference value. Second Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box, in which you select a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the datum reference.

1056 | Chapter 20 T Commands

The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the primary datum reference in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.

Datum 2
Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference.

Datum 3
Creates the tertiary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference.

Height
Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the feature control frame. A projected tolerance zone controls the variation in height of the extended portion of a fixed perpendicular part and refines the tolerance to that specified by positional tolerances.

Projected Tolerance Zone

Inserts a projected tolerance zone symbol after the projected tolerance zone value.

Datum Identifier
Creates a datum-identifying symbol consisting of a reference letter. A datum is a theoretically exact geometric reference from which you can establish the location and tolerance zones of other features. A point, line, plane, cylinder, or other geometry can serve as a datum.

Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box | 1057

Symbol Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Geometric Tolerances

Displays the geometric characteristic symbols for location, orientation, form, profile, and runout.

Summary

The symbol is inserted into the Sym text box in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. The following table describes the symbols. Geometric characteristic symbols Symbol Characteristic
Position

Type
Location

Concentricity or coaxiality

Location

Symmetry

Location

Parallelism

Orientation

1058 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Geometric characteristic symbols Symbol Characteristic

Perpendicularity

Type
Orientation

Angularity

Orientation

Cylindricility

Form

Flatness

Form

Circularity or roundness

Form

Straightness

Form

Profile of a surface

Profile

Profile of a line

Profile

Circular runout

Runout

Total runout

Runout

Symbol Dialog Box | 1059

Material Condition Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Geometric Tolerances

Specifies a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size.

Summary
The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the first or second tolerance value in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.

TOOLSETS
Quick Reference
See also:

The Tool Sets Palette

Opens the Tool Sets palette.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Palettes Tool Sets

1060 | Chapter 20 T Commands

TOOLSETSCLOSE
Quick Reference
See also:

The Tool Sets Palette

Closes the Tool Sets palette.

TORUS
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid Torus

Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Solid Primitives flyout Torus Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Torus

Summary
You can create a torus by specifying the center, then the radius or diameter of the torus, and then the radius or diameter of the tube that surrounds the torus. You can control the smoothness of curved 3D solids, such as a torus, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable.

TOOLSETSCLOSE | 1061

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point or [3P on page 1062/2P on page 1062/TTR on page 1062]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option When you specify the center point, the torus is positioned so that its central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). The torus is parallel to and bisected by the XY plane of the current workplane. Specify radius on page 1062 or [diameter on page 1063] <default>: Specify a distance or enter d

3P (Three Points)
Defines the circumference of the torus with three points that you specify. The three specified points also define the plane of the circumference.

2P (Two Points)
Defines the circumference of the torus with two points that you specify. The plane of the circumference is defined by the Z value of the first point.

TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)

Defines the torus with a specified radius tangent to two objects. The specified tangency points are projected onto the current UCS.

Radius
Defines the radius of the torus: the distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube. A negative radius creates a solid shaped like an American football. Radius Defines the radius of the tube. Diameter Defines the diameter of the tube.

1062 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Diameter
Defines the diameter of the torus.

Radius on page 1062 Diameter on page 1062

TRACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Linear Objects

Creates solid lines.

Summary
The endpoints of a trace are on the center line and are always cut square. TRACE automatically calculates the correct bevels for connection to adjacent segments. Each segment is drawn after you either specify the next segment or press Enter. Because of the way bevels are handled, TRACE has no undo option. Traces are solid filled when Fill mode is on. When Fill mode is off, only the outline of a trace is displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify trace width <current>: Specify a distance or press Enter Specify start point: Specify a point (1) Specify next point: Specify a point (2) Specify next point: Specify a point (3) or press Enter to end the command

TRACE | 1063

TRANSPARENCY
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Color and Transparency for Bitonal Raster Images

Controls whether background pixels in an image are transparent or opaque.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Object Image Transparency

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Select image(s): Enter transparency mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter an option or press Enter On Turns transparency on so that objects beneath the image are visible. Off Turns transparency off so that objects beneath the image are not visible.

TREESTAT
Quick Reference
See also:

Increase Performance with Large Referenced Drawings

Displays information about the drawing's current spatial index.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'treestat for transparent use

Summary
The program indexes objects in a region by recording their positions in space. The result is called a spatial index. The spatial index is tree structured and has branching nodes to which objects are attached. The index has two major

1064 | Chapter 20 T Commands

branches. The paper space branch is called a quad-tree and treats objects as two-dimensional. The model space branch is called an oct-tree and treats objects as either two- or three-dimensional. The model space branch can also be changed to a quad-tree when you are working on two-dimensional drawings. TREESTAT displays information about each branch. The most important information is in the first two lines of the reportnumber of nodes, number of objects, maximum depth of the branch, and average number of objects per node. If REDRAW and object selection are very slow, you can improve their performance. For example, if there are 50 megabytes of memory available and the current drawing has 50,000 objects with only 1,000 nodes in the index tree, increase the TREEDEPTH value to improve performance. Each node consumes about 80 bytes of memory. The fewer objects per node of the oct-tree, the better the performance.

TRIM
Quick Reference
See also:

Trim or Extend Objects

Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Modify tool group Trim Menu: Modify Trim

TRIM | 1065

Summary
To trim objects, select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects that you want to trim. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first Select Objects prompt.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select cutting edges... Select objects or <select all>: Select one or more objects and press Enter, or press Enter to select all displayed objects

Select the objects that define the cutting edges to which you want to trim an object, or press Enter to select all displayed objects as potential cutting edges. TRIM projects the cutting edges and the objects to be trimmed onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). NOTE To select cutting edges that include blocks, you can use only the single selection, Crossing, Fence, and Select All options. Select object to trim on page 1067 or shift-select to extend on page 1067 or [Fence on page 1067/Crossing on page 1067/Project on page 1067/Edge on page 1068/eRase on page 1069/Undo on page 1069]: Select an object to trim, hold down SHIFT and select an object to extend it instead, or enter an option

1066 | Chapter 20 T Commands

Specify an object selection method to select the objects to trim. If more than one trim result is possible, the location of the first selection point determines the result.

Object to Trim
Specifies the object to trim.

Shift-Select to Extend
Extends the selected objects rather than trimming them. This option provides an easy method to switch between trimming and extending.

Crossing
Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points. NOTE Some crossing selections of objects to be trimmed are ambiguous. TRIM resolves the selection by following along the rectangular crossing window in a clockwise direction from the first point to the first object encountered.

Project
Specifies the projection method used when trimming objects. None Specifies no projection. The command trims only objects that intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space.

TRIM | 1067

UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current UCS. The command trims objects that do not intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space.

View Specifies projection along the current view direction. The command trims objects that intersect the boundary in the current view.

Edge
Determines whether an object is trimmed at another object's extrapolated edge or only to an object that intersects it in 3D space.

Extend Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to intersect an object in 3D space.

No Extend Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting edge that intersects it in 3D space.

1068 | Chapter 20 T Commands

NOTE When trimming hatches, do not set Edge to Extend. If you do, gaps in the trim boundaries will not be bridged when trimming hatches, even when the gap tolerance is set to a correct value.

Erase
Deletes selected objects. This option provides a convenient method to erase unneeded objects without leaving the TRIM command.

Undo
Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM.

TRIM | 1069

1070

U Commands

U
Quick Reference
See also:

Correct Mistakes

Reverses the most recent operation.

Access Methods
Menu: Edit Undo Shortcut menu: With no command active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Undo. Command entry: Cmd-Z

Summary
You can enter u as many times as you wish, backing up one step at a time, until the drawing is as it was when you began the current editing session. When an operation cannot be undone, the command name is displayed but no action is performed. Operations external to the current drawing, such as plotting or writing to a file, cannot be undone. If you changed modes or used transparent commands during a command, their effects are undone, along with the effects of the main command. The U command is equivalent to entering undo 1.

1071

UCS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

Manages user coordinate systems.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Coordinates tool group World UCS Menu: Tools New UCS Origin Shortcut menu: Right-click the UCS icon to access UCS commands from the UCS shortcut menu.

Summary
Yhe UCS is a movable coordinate system that you can relocate or rotate to support your work.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify Origin of UCS on page 1072 or [Face on page 1073/NAmed on page 1073/OBject on page 1074/Previous on page 1076/View on page 1076/World on page 1076/X/Y/Z on page 1077/ZAxis on page 1078] <World>:

Specify Origin of UCS

Defines a new UCS using one, two, or three points. If you specify a single point, the origin of the current UCS shifts without changing the orientation of the X, Y, and Z axes. If you specify a second point, the UCS rotates around the previously specified origin point such that the positive X axis of the UCS passes through the point. If you specify a third point, the UCS rotates around the X axis such that the positive Y half of the XY plane of the UCS contains the point.

1072 | Chapter 21 U Commands

The three points specify an origin point, a point on the positive X axis, and a point on the positive XY plane.

NOTE If you enter the coordinates for a point and you do not specify a Z coordinate value, the current Z value is used.

Face
Dynamically aligns the UCS to a face on a 3D solid. Select a face by clicking within the boundary or on an edge of the face. The UCS X axis is aligned with the closest edge of the original face selected.

Next Locates the UCS on either the adjacent face or the back face of the selected edge. Xflip Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the X axis. Yflip Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the Y axis. Accept If you press Enter, accepts the location. The prompt repeats until you accept a location. TIP The Move And Align command on the UCS Origin grip menu also lets you dynamically align the UCS with 3D solid faces.

Named
Save and restore UCS definitions by name.

UCS | 1073

Restore
Restores a saved UCS so that it becomes the current UCS. Name Specifies a named UCS. ?List UCS definitions Lists the names of currently defined UCSs.

Save
Saves the current UCS to a specified name. Name Saves the current UCS with the specified name.

Delete
Removes the specified UCS from the list of saved UCS definitions. If you delete a named UCS that is current, the current UCS is renamed UNNAMED.

?List UCS Definitions

Lists names of saved UCS definitions with the origin and X, Y, and Z axes for each saved UCS relative to the current UCS. If the current UCS is unnamed, it is listed as WORLD or UNNAMED, depending on whether it's the same as the WCS.

Object
Aligns the user coordinate system to a selected object. The positive Z axis of the UCS is aligned perpendicular to the plane in which the object was originally created.

The following objects cannot be used with this option: 3D polylines, 3D meshes, and xlines. For most objects, the origin of the new UCS is located at the nearest vertex to where you select the object, and the X axis is aligned with an edge or is tangent to an edge. For planar objects, the XY plane of the UCS is aligned with the plane in which the object is located. For complex objects, the origin is relocated, but the current orientation of the axes is maintained.

1074 | Chapter 21 U Commands

The new UCS is defined as shown in the following table Define a UCS by selecting an object Object
Arc

Method of determining UCS

The center of the arc becomes the new UCS origin. The X axis passes through the arc endpoint that is closest to the selection point. The center of the circle becomes the new UCS origin. The X axis passes through the selection point. The midpoint of the dimension text becomes the new UCS origin. The direction of the new X axis is parallel to the X axis of the UCS in effect when the dimension was drawn. The endpoint nearest the selection point becomes the new UCS origin. The new X axis is set so that the line lies in the XZ plane of the new UCS. The line's second endpoint has a Y coordinate of zero in the new UCS. The point becomes the new UCS origin. The start point of the polyline is the new UCS origin. The X axis extends along the line segment from the start point to the next vertex. The first point of the solid determines the new UCS origin. The new X axis lies along the line between the first two points. The first point of the solid determines the new UCS origin. The new X axis lies along the line between the first two points. The from point of the trace becomes the UCS origin, with the X axis lying along its centerline. The new UCS origin is taken from the first point, the X axis from the first two points, and the Y positive side from the first and fourth points. The Z axis follows by application of the right-hand rule. The insertion point of the object becomes the new UCS origin, and the new X axis is defined by the rotation of the object about

Circle

Dimension

Line

Point 2D polyline

Solid

2D Solid

Trace

3D face

Shape, text, block reference, attribute definition

UCS | 1075

Define a UCS by selecting an object Object Method of determining UCS

its extrusion direction. The object you select to establish a new UCS has a rotation angle of zero in the new UCS. Text, block reference, attribute definition The insertion point of the object becomes the new UCS origin, and the new X axis is defined by the rotation of the object about its extrusion direction. The object you select to establish a new UCS has a rotation angle of zero in the new UCS.

Previous
Restores the previous UCS. The last 10 user coordinate systems created in model space and the last 10 created in paper space layouts are retained. Repeating this option steps back through one set or the other, depending on which space is current. UCS definitions saved in one viewport are not retained in the Previous list for a different viewport. However, if you change a UCS setting within a viewport, the last UCS setting is retained in the Previous list. For example, changing the UCS from World to UCS1 would retain World at the top of the Previous list. If you then switch viewports with Front as the current UCS, and then change the UCS to Right, the Front UCS is retained at the top of the Previous list. If you then choose the UCS Previous option twice in this viewport, the UCS setting changes to Front, and then back to World. (UCSVP system variable)

View
Aligns the XY plane of the user coordinate system to a plane perpendicular to your viewing direction. The origin point remains unchanged, but the X and Y axes become horizontal and vertical.

World
Sets the current user coordinate system to the world coordinate system (WCS). The WCS is the basis for all user coordinate systems and cannot be redefined.

1076 | Chapter 21 U Commands

X, Y, Z
Rotates the current UCS about a specified axis. Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the X axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis.

Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Y axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis.

Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Z axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis.

You can define any UCS by specifying an origin and one or more rotations around the X, Y, or Z axis.

UCS | 1077

Z Axis
Aligns the user coordinate system to a specified positive Z axis. The UCS origin is moved to the first point specified and its positive Z axis passes through the second point specified.

Object Aligns the Z axis in the direction tangent to the endpoint nearest to where the object was selected. The positive Z axis points away from the object.

Apply
Applies the current UCS setting to a specified viewport or all active viewports when other viewports have a different UCS saved in the viewport. (UCSVP system variable). Viewport Applies the current UCS to the specified viewport and ends the UCS command. All Applies the current UCS to all active viewports.

1078 | Chapter 21 U Commands

UCSICON
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon

Controls the visibility and placement of the UCS icon.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Coordinates tool group (expanded) UCS Icon Properties Menu: View Display UCS Icon Properties

Summary
The UCS icon displays the orientation of the user coordinate system (UCS) axes and the location of the UCS origin. If the location of the UCS origin is not visible in a viewport, the UCS icon is displayed in the lower-left corner of the viewport instead. A UCS can be stored with a viewport if the UCSVP system variable is set to 1 for that viewport. Different coordinate system icons are displayed in paper space and model space. In both cases, a plus sign (+) appears at the base of the icon when it is positioned at the origin of the current UCS. The letter W appears in the Y portion of the icon if the current UCS is the same as the world coordinate system. With the 3D UCS icon, a square is displayed in the XY plane at the origin when the UCS is the same as the world coordinate system. A box is formed at the base of the icon if you are viewing the UCS from above (the positive Z direction). The box is missing if you are viewing the UCS from below.

UCSICON | 1079

With the 3D UCS icon, the Z axis is solid when viewed from above the XY plane and dashed when viewed from below the XY plane. If the UCS is rotated so that the Z axis lies in a plane parallel to the viewing planethat is, if the XY plane is edge-on to the viewerthe 2D UCS icon is replaced by a broken pencil icon. The 3D UCS icon does not use a broken pencil icon.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [ON/OFF/All/Noorigin/ORigin/Properties] <current>: Enter an option or press Enter

On Displays the UCS icon. Off Turns off display of the UCS icon. All Applies changes to the icon in all active viewports. Otherwise, UCSICON affects only the current viewport.

1080 | Chapter 21 U Commands

No Origin Displays the icon at the lower-left corner of the viewport regardless of the location of the UCS origin. Origin Displays the icon at the origin (0,0,0) of the current coordinate system. If the origin is off the screen, or if the icon cannot be positioned at the origin without being clipped at the viewport edges, the icon is displayed at the lower-left corner of the viewport. Properties Displays the UCS Icon dialog box, in which you can control the style, visibility, and location of the UCS icon.

UCS Icon Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon

Controls the style, visibility, and location of the UCS icon.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

UCS Icon Dialog Box | 1081

UCS Icon Style

Specifies display of either the 2D or the 3D UCS icon and its appearance. 2D Displays a 2D icon without a representation of the Z axis. 3D Displays a 3D icon. Line Width Controls the line width of the UCS icon if the 3D UCS icon is selected.

Preview
Displays a preview of the UCS icon in model space.

Size
Controls the size of the UCS icon as a percentage of viewport size. The default value is 50, and the valid range is from 5 to 95. Note that the size of the UCS icon is proportional to the size of the viewport in which it is displayed.

Color
Controls the colors of the UCS icon in model space viewports and in layout tabs. Model Space Icon Color Controls the color of the UCS icon in model space viewports. Layout Tab Icon Color Controls the UCS icon color in layout tabs. Apply Single Color Applies the selected Model space icon color to all axes of the 2D UCS icon.

UCSMAN
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

1082 | Chapter 21 U Commands

Manages defined user coordinate systems.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Coordinates tool group (expanded) Named UCS Menu: Tools Named UCS

Summary
The UCS dialog box is displayed.

UCS Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

Controls the UCS and UCS icon settings for viewports.

Summary
Lists, renames, and restores previously defined user coordinate systems, and controls UCS and UCS icon settings for viewports.

List of Tabs

Named on page 1083 Orthographic on page 1085 Settings on page 1086

Named Tab (UCS Dialog Box)

Lists user coordinate systems and sets the current UCS.

UCS Dialog Box | 1083

Current UCS Displays the name of the current UCS. If the UCS has not been saved and named, it is listed as UNNAMED. UCS Names List Lists the coordinate systems defined in the current drawing. If there are multiple viewports and multiple unnamed UCS settings, the list includes only the unnamed UCS of the current viewport. Unnamed UCS definitions that are locked to other viewports (UCSVP system variable = 1) are not listed in the current viewport. A pointer indicates the current UCS. UNNAMED is always the first entry if the current UCS is unnamed. World is always listed and cannot be renamed or deleted. If you define other coordinate systems for the active viewport during the current editing session, a Previous entry is next. You can step back through these coordinate systems by selecting Previous and Set Current repeatedly. To add a UCS name to this list, use the Save option of the UCS command. Delete (-) Deletes a named UCS. You cannot delete the World or Previous UCS.

Options
Manages the selected UCS in the dialog box. Set Current Restores the selected coordinate system. Rename Renames a customized UCS. You cannot rename the World UCS.

1084 | Chapter 21 U Commands

Details Displays the UCS Details dialog box, which displays UCS coordinate data.

Orthographic Tab (UCS Dialog Box)

Changes the UCS to one of the orthographic UCS settings.

Current UCS Displays the name of the current UCS. If the UCS has not been saved and named, it is listed as UNNAMED. Orthographic UCS Names Lists the six orthographic coordinate systems defined in the current drawing. The orthographic coordinate systems are defined relative to the UCS specified in the Relative To list.

Name. Specifies the name of the orthographic coordinate system. Depth. Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system specified by the UCSBASE system variable. The parallel plane of the UCSBASE coordinate system can be an XY, YZ, or XZ plane. NOTE You can specify the depth or a new origin for the selected orthographic UCS. See Depth option.

Relative To

UCS Dialog Box | 1085

Specifies the base coordinate system for defining the orthographic UCSs. By default, WCS is the base coordinate system. Whenever you change the Relative To setting, the origin of the selected orthographic UCS is restored to its default position. If you save an orthographic coordinate system in a drawing as part of a viewport configuration, or if you select a setting in Relative To other than World, the orthographic coordinate system name changes to UNNAMED to distinguish it from the predefined orthographic coordinate system.

Options
Manages the selected UCS in the dialog box. Set Current Restores the selected coordinate system. Reset Restores the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system. The origin is restored to its default location (0,0,0) relative to the specified base coordinate system. Depth Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system. In the Orthographic UCS Depth dialog box, enter a value or choose the Select New Origin button to use the pointing device to specify a new depth or a new origin. Details Displays the UCS Details dialog box, which displays UCS coordinate data.

Settings Tab (UCS Dialog Box)

Displays and modifies UCS icon settings and UCS settings saved with a viewport.

1086 | Chapter 21 U Commands

UCS Icon Settings

Specifies the UCS icon display settings for the current viewport. On Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport. Display at UCS Origin Point Displays the UCS icon at the origin of the current coordinate system in the current viewport. If this option is cleared, or if the origin of the coordinate system is not visible in the viewport, the UCS icon is displayed at the lower-left corner of the viewport. Apply to All Active Viewports Applies the UCS icon settings to all active viewports in the current drawing.

UCS Settings
Specifies UCS behavior when the UCS setting is updated. Save UCS with Viewport Saves the coordinate system setting with the viewport (UCSVP system variable). If this option is cleared, the viewport reflects the UCS of the viewport that is current. Update View to Plan When UCS Is Changed Restores Plan view when the coordinate system in the viewport is changed. (UCSFOLLOW system variable)

UCS Dialog Box | 1087

Orthographic UCS Depth Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

Specifies the depth for an orthographic UCS.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: On the Orthographic tab, click Options Depth.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. <Name> Depth Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system. Select New Origin Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify a new depth location in the drawing. To reset the origin of the selected orthographic UCSs to the default location (0,0,0), click Options Reset.

UCS Details Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

Displays information about the origin and axes of the selected UCS.

1088 | Chapter 21 U Commands

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: On the Named or Orthographic tab, click Options Details.

Summary
By default, the origin and the values for the X, Y, and Z axes are calculated relative to the world coordinate system.

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Name Displays the name of the current named UCS. Origin Displays the UCS origin relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. X Axis Displays the values for the X axis relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. Y Axis Displays the values for the Y axis relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. Z Axis Displays the values for the Z axis relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. Relative To Sets a base coordinate system for calculating the values for Origin, X Axis, Y Axis, and Z Axis. (UCSBASE system variable)

UNDEFINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Built-in Commands in Macros

Allows an application-defined command to override an internal command.

UNDEFINE | 1089

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter command name: Enter a command name to suppress that command. The suppressed command name can then be redefined to perform some other function. You can undefine only built-in AutoCAD commands. You cannot undefine commands defined by AutoLISP . This includes ObjectARX application commands registered by acedDefun(). You also cannot undefine external commands and aliases defined in the acad.pgp file. If an AutoLISP or ObjectARX application has redefined a command with the same name as a built-in AutoCAD command, the application-defined command is active. You can restore an undefined command with REDEFINE. You can always access a built-in AutoCAD command by preceding the command name with a period (.). ObjectARX application commands that are registered by acedRegCmd can be accessed by preceding the command name with a period (.), followed by the command's group name, followed by another period (.). For example, the MTEXT command can be accessed with .acad_mtext.mtext. To determine command names and groups of an ObjectARX application, use the ARX command, and choose the Commands option to see a listing of all currently loaded ObjectARX commands and their group names.

UNDO
Quick Reference
See also:

Correct Mistakes

Reverses the effect of commands.

1090 | Chapter 21 U Commands

Summary
UNDO displays the command or system variable name at the Command prompt to indicate that you have stepped past the point where the command was used. NOTE UNDO has no effect on some commands and system variables, including those that open, close, or save a window or a drawing, display information, change the graphics display, regenerate the drawing, or export the drawing in a different format.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter the number on page 1091 of operations to undo or [Auto on page 1091/Control on page 1091/BEgin/End on page 1092/Mark/Back on page 1092]: Enter a positive number, enter an option, or press Enter to undo a single operation

Number
Undoes the specified number of preceding operations. The effect is the same as entering u multiple times.

Auto
Groups the commands in a macro, such as a menu macro, into a single action, making them reversible by a single U command. UNDO Auto is not available if the Control option has turned off or limited the UNDO feature.

Control
Limits or turns off UNDO. All Turns on the full UNDO command. None Turns off the U and UNDO commands and discards any UNDO command information saved earlier in the editing session. The Undo button on the Standard toolbar is unavailable. The Auto, Begin, and Mark options are not available when None or One is in effect. If you attempt to use UNDO while it is turned off, the following prompt is displayed: Enter an UNDO control option [All/None/One/Combine/Layer] <All>: One Limits UNDO to a single operation. The Auto, Begin, and Mark options are not available when None or One is in effect. The main prompt for the UNDO command changes to show that only

UNDO | 1091

a Control option or a single step of the UNDO command is available when the One option is in effect. Combine Controls whether multiple, consecutive zoom and pan commands are combined as a single operation for undo and redo operations. NOTE Pan and zoom commands that are started from the menu are not combined, and always remain separate actions. Layer Controls whether the layer dialog operations are combined as a single undo operation.

Begin, End
Groups a sequence of actions into a set. After you enter the Begin option, all subsequent actions become part of this set until you use the End option. Entering undo begin while a group is already active ends the current set and begins a new one. UNDO and U treat grouped actions as a single action. If you enter undo begin without undo end, using the Number option undoes the specified number of commands but does not back up past the begin point. If you want to go back to before the begin point, you must use the End option, even if the set is empty. The same applies to the U command. A mark placed by the Mark option disappears inside an UNDO group.

Mark, Back
Mark places a mark in the undo information. Back undoes all the work done back to this mark. If you undo one operation at a time, you are informed when you reach the mark. You can place as many marks as necessary. Back moves back one mark at a time, removing the mark. If no mark is found, Back displays the following prompt: This will undo everything. OK? <Y>: Enter y or n or press Enter Enter y to undo all commands entered in the current session. Enter n to ignore the Back option. When you use the Number option to undo multiple actions, UNDO stops if it encounters a mark.

1092 | Chapter 21 U Commands

Undocumented Command or System Variable

Quick Reference
This command or system variable is not documented in the Help system for one of several reasons, including

It is obsolete, but included in the product to maintain legacy script compatibility It was included for testing purposes and has limited or no functionality

Use Search to find additional information about the feature in which you are interested, and the documented commands and system variables associated with it.

UNION
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Composite Objects

Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition. Combines selected regions by addition.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Edit tool group Booleans flyout Union Menu: Modify Solid Editing Union

Undocumented Command or System Variable | 1093

Summary
You can combine two or more 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions into a single, composite 3D solid, surface, or region. You must select the same type of objects to combine.

Using the Union Command with Surfaces

Although you can use the UNION command with surfaces, it will cause the surface to lose associativity. Instead, it is recommended that you use the surface editing commands:

SURFBLEND on page 1013 SURFFILLET on page 1015 SURFPATCH on page 1021

Using the Union Command with Solids and Regions

The selection set can contain objects that lie in any number of arbitrary planes. For mixed object types, selection sets are divided into subsets that are joined separately. Solids are grouped in the first subset. The first selected region and all subsequent coplanar regions are grouped in the second set, and so on.

The resulting composite solid includes the volume enclosed by all of the selected solids. Each of the resulting composite regions encloses the area of all regions in a subset.

1094 | Chapter 21 U Commands

You cannot use UNION with mesh objects. However, if you select a mesh object, you will be prompted to convert it to a 3D solid or surface.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed. Select objects Select the 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to be combined.

UNISOLATEOBJECTS
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Objects

Displays previously hidden objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools Isolate End Object Isolation Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate End Object Isolation.

Summary
Displays objects previously hidden with the ISOLATEOBJECTS on page 530 or HIDEOBJECTS on page 503 command.

UNISOLATEOBJECTS | 1095

UNITS
Quick Reference
See also:

Determine the Units of Measurement

Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.

Access Methods
Menu: Format Units Command entry: 'units for transparent use

Summary
The format, precision, and other conventions to be used in displaying coordinates, distances, and angles are set and saved in drawing template files. These settings can also be changed in the current drawing file. The Drawing Units dialog box is displayed. If you enter -units at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Drawing Units Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Determine the Units of Measurement

Controls the displayed precision and format for coordinates and angles.

1096 | Chapter 21 U Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Length
Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units. Type Sets the current format for units of measure. The values include Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, and Scientific. The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feet-and-inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch. The other formats can represent any real-world unit. Precision Sets the number of decimal places or fractional size displayed for linear measurements.

Drawing Units Dialog Box | 1097

Angle
Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle display. Type Sets the current angle format. Precision Sets the precision for the current angle display. The following conventions are used for the various angle measures: decimal degrees appear as decimal numbers, grads appear with a lowercase g suffix, and radians appear with a lowercase r suffix. The degrees/minutes/seconds format uses d for degrees, ' for minutes, and " for seconds; for example: 123d45'56.7" Surveyor's units show angles as bearings, using N or S for north or south, degrees/minutes/seconds for how far east or west the angle is from direct north or south, and E or W for east or west; for example: N 45d0'0" E The angle is always less than 90 degrees and is displayed in the degrees/minutes/seconds format. If the angle is precisely north, south, east, or west, only the single letter representing the compass point is displayed. Clockwise Calculates positive angles in the clockwise direction. The default direction for positive angles is counterclockwise. When prompted for an angle, you can point in the desired direction or enter an angle regardless of the setting specified for Clockwise.

Preview
Displays an example of the current settings for units and angles.

Lighting
Controls the unit of measurement for the intensity of photometric lights in the current drawing. NOTE In order to create and use photometric lights, a unit other than Generic must be specified from the list of options. If Insertion Scale is set to Unitless, a warning message is displayed informing you that the rendered output might not be as expected.

1098 | Chapter 21 U Commands

Insertion Scale
Controls the unit of measurement for blocks and drawings that are inserted into the current drawing. A block or a drawing that is created with units that are different from the units specified with this option is scaled when inserted. The insertion scale is the ratio of the units used in the source block or drawing and the units used in the target drawing. Select Unitless to insert the block without scaling it to match the specified units. NOTE In the Application Preferences dialog box, Units & Guides tab, the Source Content Units and Target Drawing Units settings are used when, either in the source block or the target drawing, Insertion Scale is set to Unitless.

Base Angle Directions

Sets the direction of the zero angle. The following options affect the entry of angles, the display format, and the entry of polar, cylindrical, and spherical coordinates. East Specifies the compass direction east (the default). North Specifies the compass direction north. West Specifies the compass direction west. South Specifies the compass direction south. Other Specifies a direction different from the points of the compass. Angle Specifies a value for the zero angle when Other is selected. Pick an Angle Button Defines the zero angle in the graphics area based on the angle of an imaginary line that connects any two points you specify with the pointing device.

-UNITS
Quick Reference
See also:

Determine the Units of Measurement

Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision.

-UNITS | 1099

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Report formats: (Examples) 1. Scientific 1.55E+01 2. Decimal 15.50 3. Engineering 1'-3.50" 4. Architectural 1'-3 1/2" 5. Fractional 15 1/2 Enter choice, 1 to 5 <current>: Enter a value (1-5) or press Enter The following prompt for decimal precision is displayed if you specify the scientific, decimal, or engineering format: Enter number of digits to right of decimal point (0 to 8) <current>: Enter a value (0-8) or press Enter The following prompt for the denominator of the smallest fraction is displayed if you specify the architectural or fractional format. Enter denominator of smallest fraction to display (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256) <current>: Enter a value (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256) or press Enter The next prompt is for angle formats and precision: Systems of angle measure: (Examples) 1. Decimal degrees 45.0000 2. Degrees/minutes/seconds 45d0'0" 3. Grads 50.0000g 4. Radians 0.7854r 5. Surveyor's units N 45d0'0" E Enter choice, 1 to 5 <current>: Enter a value (1-5) or press Enter Enter number of fractional places for display of angles (0 to 8) <current>: Enter a value (0-8) or press Enter The next prompt is for the direction for angle 0: Direction for angle 0: East 3 o'clock = 0 North 12 o'clock = 90 West 9 o'clock = 180 South 6 o'clock = 270 Enter direction for angle 0 <current>: Enter a value or press Enter The default direction for 0 degrees is to the east quadrant, or 3 o'clock. The default direction for positive angular measurement is counterclockwise.

1100 | Chapter 21 U Commands

Measure angles clockwise? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n or press Enter

UPDATEFIELD
Quick Reference
See also:

Update Fields

Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set Fields tool group Update Menu: Tools Update Fields Shortcut menu: With any text command active and a field selected, right-click and click Update Field.

Summary
You can update a field manually when you want to see the latest value. With Date fields, you must update them manually, they never update automatically.

UPDATETHUMBSNOW
Quick Reference
See also:

Switch Between Open Drawings

Manually updates thumbnail previews for named views, drawings, and layouts.

UPDATEFIELD | 1101

Summary
The UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable controls how the thumbnail previews are updated. The UPDATETHUMBSNOW command updates the following:

Sheets, sheet views, and model space views thumbnails in the Sheet Set Manager Quick View images

NOTE The thumbnail previews displayed in the Sheet Set Manager is not available in AutoCAD LT and AutoCAD for Mac. This command is made available for use in mixed environments.

UPLOADTOWS
Quick Reference
Uploads a drawing file to AutoCAD WS.

Access Methods
Menu: File Upload Drawing Online

Summary
Displays the Upload to AutoCAD WS dialog box. NOTE Prior to uploading a drawing file, you need to log in to AutoCAD WS. If you do not have an account, click Create an Account and follow the on screen instructions. For additional information and tutorials on how to use AutoCAD WS, see http://butterfly.autodesk.com/blog.

1102 | Chapter 21 U Commands

Upload to AutoCAD WS Dialog Box

Quick Reference
Allows you to log in to AutoCAD WS and upload the current drawing file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Sign in to Access AutoCAD WS

Allows you to log in using an existing account or create a new account for AutoCAD WS. Create an Account Displays the text/ Email Enter the e-mail address for your account to login. Password Enter the password for your account to login. Forgot Your Password? Allows you to retrieve your password based on the e-mail address you used to create the account. Remember Me on This Computer The account information you enter is retained for the next time you go to upload a drawing to AutoCAD WS.

Sign Out
Logs you out of AutoCAD WS and removes your log in information from the computer. You will be prompted to log in the next time you upload a drawing to AutoCAD WS.

Launch in AutoCAD WS
Launches AutoCAD WS in your default Web browser.

Upload to AutoCAD WS Dialog Box | 1103

1104

V Commands

VEDITFROMWS
Quick Reference
Launches AutoCAD WS in your default Web browser, from there you can view and edit previously uploaded drawings.

Access Methods
Menu: File View/Edit Online

Summary
Launches AutoCAD WS in your default Web browser. Once logged in, you can view and edit the drawing files that you have uploaded to AutoCAD WS or have been shared with you. Drawings that you upload can be shared with other AutoCAD WS users. Drawings can be uploaded from the AutoCAD WS user interface or with the UPLOADTOWS on page 1102 command in AutoCAD for Mac.

1105

VIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Save and Restore Views

Saves and restores named model space views, layout views, and preset views.

Summary
The options are displayed at the Command prompt, options are displayed. If you enter -view at the Command prompt, the options are displayed at the Command prompt as well. NOTE The VIEW command cannot be used transparently.

-VIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Save and Restore Views

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [?/Delete/Orthographic/Restore/Save/sEttings/Window]: ?List Views Lists the named views and cameras in the drawing. The list includes the name of each specified view and the space in which it was defined. M designates model space, and P designates paper space. Delete Deletes one or more named views. Orthographic Restores the predefined orthographic view you specify to the current viewport.

1106 | Chapter 22 V Commands

The view orientation of the specified orthographic view is based on the UCSBASE system variable, which is set to the world coordinate system by default. When one of the orthographic views is restored, the program zooms to the extents in the current viewport. Restore Restores the view you specify to the current viewport. If a UCS setting was saved with the view, it is also restored. The center point and magnification of the saved view are also restored. If you restore a model space view while working in paper space, you are prompted to select a viewport in which to restore that view. Select the viewport by clicking its border. The viewport you select must be on and active. The program switches to model space and restores the view in the selected viewport. If you restore a paper space view while working in model space in a layout tab, the program switches to paper space and restores the view. You can't restore a paper space view if you are working in the Model tab. Save Saves the display in the current viewport using the name you supply. The current value of the UCSVIEW system variable is displayed when you save a view. To change the setting and turn this option on or off, use the UCS option of VIEW. Settings Specifies various settings for the VIEW command. Categorize Specifies a category for the named view. Named views are displayed by category on the View List tab in the Sheet Set Manager. Layer Snapshot Saves the current layer visibility settings with the new named view. Live Section For model views only, specifies the live section applied when the view is restored. UCS Determines whether the current UCS and elevation settings are saved when a view is saved. (UCSVIEW system variable)

-VIEW | 1107

Visual Style Sets or updates a visual style for a view. Window Saves a portion of the current display as a view. Restoring such a view may display objects outside the window you specified because the shape of the window may differ from that of the viewport in which you are restoring the view. However, plotting the view plots only the objects inside the window, not the entire viewport display.

VIEWPLOTDETAILS
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plotting

Displays information about completed print jobs.

Summary
The Print Details dialog box is displayed. You can view detailed information about all completed print jobs, or just the errors that have occurred. You can also copy the information displayed in the dialog box to the Clipboard.

Print Details Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plotting

Displays information about plotting and publishing jobs that have been completed in the current session.

1108 | Chapter 22 V Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

View
Specifies what is displayed. You can also right-click in the details area and click View Errors Only or View All to change this setting. All Displays information about all completed print jobs and sheets within those jobs. Errors Lists errors that have occurred as jobs were printed.

Copy to Clipboard
Copies all highlighted text to the Clipboard.

Details Area
Lists details of completed print jobs.

Print Details Dialog Box | 1109

VIEWRES
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Views

Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.

Summary
The model is regenerated. VIEWRES controls the appearance of circles, arcs, splines, and arced polylines using short vectors. The greater the number of vectors, the smoother the appearance of the circle or arc. For example, if you create a very small circle and then zoom in, it might appear to be a polygon. Using VIEWRES to increase the zoom percentage and regenerate the drawing updates and smooths the circle's appearance.

NOTE Increasing the zoom percentage in VIEWRES may increase the time it takes to regenerate the drawing. When a named (paper space) layout is made current for the first time and a default viewport is created in the layout, the viewing resolution for this initial viewport is the same as the viewing resolution for the Model layout viewport. The VIEWRES setting is saved in the drawing. To change the default for new drawings, consider specifying the VIEWRES setting in the template files on which you base your new drawings.

1110 | Chapter 22 V Commands

VISUALSTYLES (-VISUALSTYLES)
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Creates and modifies visual styles from the command line.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [set Current on page 1111/Saveas on page 1111/Rename on page 1111/Delete on page 1111/? on page 1111]:

Set Current
These options are the same as the options in VSCURRENT.

Save As
Name Saves the visual style with the name you specify. NOTE You must be in model space to save a visual style. If you enter a name that is already in use for a visual style, you can either replace the existing visual style or enter a different name.

Rename
Name Renames the visual style.

Delete
Name Deletes the visual style.

?List Visual Styles

Lists the visual styles in the drawing.

VPCLIP
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Layout Viewports

VISUALSTYLES (-VISUALSTYLES) | 1111

Clips layout viewport objects and reshapes the viewport border.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Clip Viewport Shortcut menu: Select the viewport to clip. Right-click in the drawing area and choose Viewport Clip.

Summary
You can either select an existing object to designate as the new boundary, or specify the points of a new boundary. The new boundary does not clip the old boundary, it redefines it.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Clipping Object Specifies an object to act as a clipping boundary. Objects that are valid as clipping boundaries include closed poly-lines, circles, ellipses, closed splines, and regions. Polygonal Draws a clipping boundary. You can draw line segments or arc segments by specifying points. The following prompt is displayed: The descriptions of the Next Point, Arc, Close, Length, and Undo options match the descriptions of the corresponding options in the PLINE command. Delete Deletes the clipping boundary of a selected viewport. This option is available only if the selected viewport has already been clipped. If you clip a viewport that has been previously clipped, the original clipping boundary is deleted, and the new clipping boundary is applied.

VPLAYER
Quick Reference
See also:

Freeze Specified Layers in a Layout Viewport

Sets layer visibility within viewports.

1112 | Chapter 22 V Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [? on page 1113/Color on page 1113/Ltype/LWeight/PStyle on page 1114/TRansparency on page 1114/Freeze on page 1114/Thaw on page 1114/Reset on page 1114/Newfrz on page 1115/Vpvisdflt on page 1115]: In the Model layout, the VPLAYER command has two options. Enter an option [Newfrz/Vpvisdflt]:

?List Frozen Layers

Displays the names of frozen layers in a selected viewport.

Color
Changes the color associated with a layer. True Color Specifies a true color to use for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to use for the selected object. All Applies the changes in all viewports. Select Applies the changes in selected viewports. Current Applies the changes in the current viewport only.

Ltype
Changes the linetype associated with a layer.

All on page 1113 Select on page 1113 Current on page 1113

Lweight
Changes the lineweight associated with a layer. If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, the current lineweight is set to the nearest fixed lineweight value.

All on page 1113 Select on page 1113 Current on page 1113

VPLAYER | 1113

Pstyle
Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY on page 1459 system variable is set to 1). See Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects in the Users Guide.

All on page 1113 Select on page 1113 Current on page 1113

Transparency
Changes the transparency level associated with a layer.

All on page 1113 Select on page 1113 Current on page 1113

Freeze
Freezes a layer or set of layers in one or more viewports. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, regenerated, or plotted.

All on page 1113 Select on page 1113 Current on page 1113

Thaw
Thaws layers in specific viewports.

All on page 1113 Select on page 1113 Current on page 1113

Reset
Sets the visibility of layers in specified viewports to their current default setting.

All on page 1113 Select on page 1113 Current on page 1113

1114 | Chapter 22 V Commands

Newfrz (New Freeze)

Creates new layers that are frozen in all viewports.

Vpvisdflt (Viewport Visibility Default)

Thaws or freezes the specified layers in subsequently created viewports.

VPMAX
Quick Reference
See also:

Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport

Expands the current layout viewport for editing.

Access Methods

Toolbar: Status bar Maximize Viewport Pointing device: Viewport label menus General Viewport label menu (+) Maximize Viewport Shortcut menu: Select a named layout viewport to mazimize. Right-click and click Maximize Viewport. Pointing device: Double-click a named layout viewport.

Summary
The viewport is expanded to fill the screen and switched to model space for editing.

VPMIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport

VPMAX | 1115

Restores the current layout viewport.

Access Methods

Toolbar: Status bar Minimize Viewport Pointing device: Viewport label menus General Viewport label menu (+) Restore Layout Shortcut menu: Select a named layout viewport to mazimize. Right-click and click Minimize Viewport. Pointing device: Double-click outside of the maximized viewport.

Summary
The center point and magnification are returned to the settings that were in effect before the viewport was maximized.

VPOINT
Quick Reference
See also:

Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles

Sets the viewing direction for a 3D visualization of the drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: View 3D Views Viewpoint

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify a view pointor [Rotate] <display compass and tripod>: Specify a point, enter r, or press Enter to display a compass and axis tripod View Point Creates a vector that defines a direction from which the drawing can be viewed. The view defined is as if the viewer is looking from the point back at the origin (0,0,0).

1116 | Chapter 22 V Commands

Rotate Specifies a new viewing direction using two angles.

Enter angle in XY plane from X axis.

The first angle is specified with respect to the X axis, in the XY plane.

Enter angle from XY plane.

The second angle is specified up or down from the XY plane.

Compass and Axis Tripod Displays a compass and axis tripod, which you use to define a viewing direction in the viewport.

The compass is a two-dimensional representation of a globe. The center point is the north pole (0,0,n), the inner ring is the equator (n,n,0), and the entire outer ring is the south pole (0,0,-n). As you move the crosshairs, the axis tripod rotates to conform to the viewing direction indicated on the compass. To select a viewing direction, move your pointing device to a location on the globe and click.

VPOINT | 1117

VPORTS
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Model Space Viewports

Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space.

Access Methods
Menu: View Viewports New Viewports, Named Viewports

Summary
The Viewports dialog box is displayed. If you enter -vports at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

Viewports Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Set Model Space Viewports

Creates new viewport configurations, or names and saves a model space viewport configuration.

Summary
The options available depend on whether you are configuring model space viewports (on the Model layout) or layout viewports (on a named (paper space) layout).

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

1118 | Chapter 22 V Commands

New Viewports TabModel Space (Viewports Dialog Box)

New Name Specifies a name for the new model space viewport configuration. If you do not enter a name, the viewport configuration is applied but not saved. If a viewport configuration is not saved, it cannot be used in a layout. Standard Viewports Lists and sets the standard viewport configurations, including CURRENT, which is the current configuration. Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewport in the configuration. Apply To Applies the model space viewport configuration to the entire display or to the current viewport.

Display: Applies the viewport configuration to the entire Model tab display. Current Viewport: Applies the viewport configuration to the current viewport only.

Viewports Dialog Box | 1119

Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration. Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list. You can choose a named view, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can select from the list of standard views. Use the Preview area to see the choices. Visual Style Applies a visual style to the viewport. All available visual styles are displayed.

Named Viewports TabModel Space (Viewports Dialog Box)

Lists all saved model viewport configurations in the drawing.

Current Name Displays the name of the current viewport configuration.

New Viewports TabLayouts (Viewports Dialog Box)

Standard Viewports Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures layout viewports.

1120 | Chapter 22 V Commands

Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewport in the configuration. Viewport Spacing Specifies the spacing you want to apply between the layout viewports you are configuring. Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration. Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list. You can choose a named view, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can select from the list of standard views.

Named Viewports TabLayouts (Viewports Dialog Box)

Displays any saved and named model space viewport configurations for you to use in the current layout. You cannot save and name a layout viewport configuration.

-VPORTS
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Model Space Viewports

Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space.

Summary
The command prompts available depend on whether you are configuring model viewports (on the Model tab) or layout viewports (on a layout tab).

-VPORTS | 1121

-VPORTS - Model Space Viewports

Quick Reference
See also:

Set Model Space Viewports

Creates multiple viewports in model space.

Summary
The number and layout of active viewports and their associated settings are called viewport configurations.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Save/Restore/Delete/Join/Single/?/2/3/4] <3>: Enter an option Save Saves the current viewport configuration using a specified name. Restore Restores a previously saved viewport configuration. Delete Deletes a named viewport configuration. Join Combines two adjacent model viewports into one larger viewport. The two model viewports must share a common edge of the same length. The resulting viewport inherits the view of the dominant viewport.

Single Returns the drawing to a single viewport view, using the view from the current viewport.

1122 | Chapter 22 V Commands

?List Viewport Configurations Displays the identification numbers and screen positions of the active viewports. The lower-left and upper-right corners of the viewport define its location. For these corners, values between 0.0,0.0 (for the lower-left corner of the drawing area) and 1.0,1.0 (for the upper-right corner) are used. The current viewport is listed first. 2 Divides the current viewport in half. 3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports. The Horizontal and Vertical options split the area into thirds. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed. 4 Divides the current viewport into four viewports of equal size.

-VPORTS - Layout Viewports

Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Layout Viewports

Creates multiple viewports in named (paper space) layouts.

Summary
The number and layout of active viewports and their associated settings are called viewport configurations.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

-VPORTS | 1123

Specify corner of viewport or [ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/Restore/LAyer/2/3/4] <Fit>: Specify a point or enter an option On Turns on a viewport, making it active and making its objects visible. Off Turns off a viewport. When a viewport is off, its objects are not displayed, and you cannot make that viewport current. Fit Creates one viewport that fills the available display area. The actual size of the viewport depends on the dimensions of the paper space view. Shadeplot Specifies how viewports in layouts are plotted.

As Displayed: Plots the same way it is displayed Wireframe: Plots wireframe regardless of display Hidden: Plots with hidden lines removed regardless of display Visual Styles: Plots using the specified visual style; all visual styles in the drawing are listed as options whether in use or not Render Presets: Plots using the specified render preset; all render presets are listed as options

Lock Locks the current viewport. This is similar to layer locking. Object Creates a nonrectangular layout viewport from a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can contain arcs as well as line segments. Polygonal Creates a nonrectangular layout viewport defined by a series of line and arc segments. The descriptions of the Next Point, Arc, Close, Length, and Undo options match the descriptions of the corresponding options in the PLINE command. Restore Restores a previously saved viewport configuration. Layer Resets layer property overrides for the selected viewport to their global layer properties. 2 Divides the current viewport in half.

1124 | Chapter 22 V Commands

3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports. Horizontal and Vertical split the area into thirds. The other options create one large viewport in half the available area and two smaller ones in the other half. Above, Below, Left, and Right specify where the larger viewport is placed.

4 Divides the current viewport into four viewports of equal size.

-VPORTS | 1125

VSCURRENT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Sets the visual style in the current viewport.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [2dwireframe/Wireframe/Hidden/Realistic/Conceptual/Shaded on page 1126/shaded with Edges on page 1126/shades of Gray on page 1127/SKetchy on page 1127/X-ray on page 1127/Other] <2dwireframe>: NOTE To display lighting from point lights, distant lights, spotlights, or the sun, set the visual style to Realistic, Conceptual, or a custom visual style with shaded objects. 2D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Raster images, linetypes, and lineweights are visible. Even if the value for the COMPASS on page 1209 system variable is set to 1, it does not appear in the 2D Wireframe view. Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon. You can set the COMPASS system variable to 1 to view the compass. Hidden Displays the objects using 3D wireframe representation and hides lines representing back faces. Realistic Shades the objects and smooths the edges between polygon faces. Materials that you have attached to the objects are displayed. Conceptual Shades the objects and smooths the edges between polygon faces. Shading uses a transition between cool and warm colors. The effect is less realistic, but it can make the details of the model easier to see. Shaded Produces a smooth shaded model. Shaded with Edges Produces a smooth shaded model with visible edges.

1126 | Chapter 22 V Commands

Shades of Gray Produces a gray color effect by using the monocolor face color mode. Sketchy Produces a hand-sketched effect by using the overhang and jitter. X-ray Changes the opacity of faces to make the whole scene partially transparent. Other Displays the following prompt: Enter a visual style name [?]: Enter the name of a visual style in the current drawing, or enter ? to display a list of names and repeat the prompt

VSSAVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Saves a visual style.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Save current visual style as or [?] Enter a name or enter ? to list all the visual styles in the drawing. NOTE You must be in model space to save a visual style. If you enter a name that is already in use for a visual style, you can either replace the existing visual style or enter a different name.

VSSAVE | 1127

1128

W Commands

WBLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks

Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Block tool group (expanded) Write Block

Summary
The Write Block dialog box is displayed. Entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file, followed by command prompts. If FILEDIA is set to 0, the standard file selection dialog box is suppressed.

1129

Write Block Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks

Saves objects or converts a block to a file.

Summary
The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on whether nothing is selected, a single block is selected, or objects other than blocks are selected.

1130 | Chapter 23 W Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Save Location
Specifies the new name and location of the file and the units of measurement to be used when the block is inserted. File Name and Path Specifies a file name and path where the block or objects will be saved. Browse Displays a standard file selection dialog box.

Preview
Displays a preview of the objects selected to be written to a drawing file.

Creation
Specifies blocks and objects, saves them as a file, and specifies insertion points. Selected Objects Selects objects to save as a file. Specify a base point and select objects below. Entire Drawing Selects current drawing to save as another file. Block Specifies an existing block to save as a file. Select a name from the list.

Base Point
Specifies a base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0. Pick Point Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing. X Specifies the X coordinate value for the base point. Y Specifies the Y coordinate value for the base point. Z

Write Block Dialog Box | 1131

Specifies the Z coordinate value for the base point.

Source Objects
Sets the effect of block creation on objects used to create a block. Select Objects Button Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select one or more objects to save to the file. Convert to Block Converts the selected object or objects to a block in the current drawing after saving them as a file. Retain objects Retains the selected objects in the current drawing after saving them as a file. Delete objects Deletes the selected objects from the current drawing after saving them as a file. Objects Selected Indicates the number of objects selected.

Extended Options
Blocks Unit Specifies the unit value to be used for automatic scaling when the new file is inserted as a block in a drawing that uses different units. Select Unitless if you do not want to automatically scale the drawing when you insert it. See INSUNITS.

Description
Specifies the text description of the block.

-WBLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks

1132 | Chapter 23 W Commands

Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file.

Summary
If FILEDIA is set to 1, entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file. If FILEDIA is set to 0, entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays a prompt. The new drawing is saved in the file format that is specified in Save As on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box. After the file is created, the selected objects are deleted from the drawing. You can use OOPS to restore the objects. In the new drawing, the world coordinate system (WCS) is set parallel to the user coordinate system (UCS).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter name of output file: Enter name of existing block or [= (block=output file)/* (whole drawing)] <define new drawing>: Existing Block Writes that block to a file. You cannot enter the name of an external reference (xref) or one of its dependent blocks. = Specifies that the existing block and the output file have the same name. * Writes the entire drawing to the new output file, except for unreferenced symbols. Model space objects are written to model space, and paper space objects are written to paper space.

WEBLIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Weblights

Creates a web light.

WEBLIGHT | 1133

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Lights tool group (expanded) Weblight

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify source location <0,0,0>: Enter coordinate values or use the pointing device Specify target location <1,1,1>: Enter coordinate values or use the pointing device Enter an option to change [Name on page 1134/Intensity factor on page 1134/Status on page 1134/Photometry on page 1134/weB on page 1135/shadoW on page 1135/filterColor on page 1136/eXit on page 1136] <eXit>: NOTE The LIGHTINGUNITS system variable must be set to a value other than 0 to create and use weblights.

Name
Specifies the name of the light.

Intensity Factor
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light.

Status
Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect.

1134 | Chapter 23 W Commands

Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface.

Web
Specifies the intensity for a light at points on a spherical grid. File Specifies which web file to use to define the properties of the web. Web files have the file extension .ies. X Specifies the X rotation for the web. Y Specifies the Y rotation for the web. Z Specifies the Z rotation for the web.

Shadow
Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off the display and calculation of shadows for the light. Use this option to increase performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges.

WEBLIGHT | 1135

Map Size Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map. Softness Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map. Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources. Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.) Specify the sample size by entering a. Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v.

Exit
Exits the command.

WEDGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid Wedge

Creates a 3D solid wedge.

Access Methods

Button

1136 | Chapter 23 W Commands

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Create tool group Solid Primitive flyout Weblight Menu: Draw 3D Modeling Wedge

Summary
The direction of the taper is always in the positive X-axis direction of the UCS.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner or [Center on page 1137]: Specify a point or enter c for center Specify other corner or [Cube on page 1138/Length on page 1138]: Specify the other corner of the wedge or enteran option If the other corner of the wedge is specified with a Z value that differs from the first corner, then no height prompt is displayed. Specify height or [2Point on page 1138] <default>: Specify the height or enter 2P for the 2 Point option Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis.

Center
Creates the wedge by using a specified center point.

Cube Creates a wedge with sides of equal length.

WEDGE | 1137

Length Creates a wedge with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. If you pick a point to specify the length, you also specify the rotation in the XY plane.

Cube
Creates a wedge with sides of equal length.

Length
Creates a wedge with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.

2Point
Specifies that the height of the wedge is the distance between the two specified points.

1138 | Chapter 23 W Commands

WHOHAS
Quick Reference
See also:

Open a Drawing

Displays ownership information for opened drawing files.

Summary
You can use WHOHAS to track which users have certain drawing files open. After you select a file, the ownership information is displayed at the Command prompt. The information includes the current user's computer name, login ID, and full name (if available) and the date and time the drawing file was opened. NOTE Similar information is displayed automatically when you try to open a drawing file that another user has already opened. The information displayed by WHOHAS is stored in a temporary DWL (drawing lock) file. A DWL file is deleted when the file is closed.

WIPEOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects

Creates a wipeout object, and controls whether wipeout frames are displayed in the drawing.

WHOHAS | 1139

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) Wipeout Menu: Draw Wipeout

Summary
Creates a polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current background color. The wipeout area is bounded by a frame that you can turn on for editing and turn off for plotting.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point on page 1140 or [Frames on page 1140/Polyline on page 1140] <Polyline>. First Point Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout object from a series of points. Frames Determines whether the edges of all wipeout objects are displayed or hidden. Polyline Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout objects from a selected polyline. Erase Polyline Enter y to erase the polyline that was used to create the wipeout object. Enter n to retain the polyline.

1140 | Chapter 23 W Commands

X Commands

XATTACH
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Drawing References (Xrefs)

Inserts DWG files as an external reference (xref).

Access Methods
Menu: Insert DWG Reference

Summary
When you attach a drawing file as an xref, you link that referenced drawing to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced drawing are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. After you select the DWG files, the Attach External Reference dialog box is displayed.

1141

Attach External Reference Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Drawing References (Xrefs)

Attaches drawings as an external reference (xref).

Summary
If you attach a drawing that contains an attached xref, the attached xref appears in the current drawing. You can select multiple DWG files to attach. Like blocks, attached xrefs can be nested. If another person is currently editing the xref, the attached drawing is based on the most recently saved version.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Identifies the DWG you have selected to attach.

1142 | Chapter 24 X Commands

Browse
Displays the Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can select a new external reference for the current drawing.

Preview
Displays the DWG you have selected to attach.

Reference Type
Specifies whether the external reference is an attachment or an overlay. Unlike an xref that is an attachment, an overlay is ignored when the drawing to which it is attached is then attached as an xref to another drawing. See Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) and Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings.

Scale
Specify On-screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. X Sets the X scale factor. Y Sets the Y scale factor. Z Sets the Z scale factor. Uniform Scale Sets the Y and X scale factors as the same as Z.

Insertion Point
Specify On-Screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value.

Attach External Reference Dialog Box | 1143

Path Type
Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the external reference file, or No Path, the name of the external reference (the file must be located in the same folder as the current drawing file).

Rotation
Specify on-screen If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or at the Command prompt. Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box.

Details
Displays block and path information about the external reference being attached.

Block
Displays information about the block in the drawing. Unit Displays the specified INSUNITS value for the inserted block. Factor Displays the unit scale factor, which is calculated based on the INSUNITS value of the block and the drawing units.

Path
Displays the external reference file paths. Found In Displays the path where the external reference file is located. Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the external reference is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.

XBIND
Quick Reference
See also:

Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind)

1144 | Chapter 24 X Commands

Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Object External Reference Bind

Summary
The Xbind dialog box is displayed. If you enter -xbind at the Command prompt, options are displayed. NOTE The Bind option of XREF binds the xref file. Use XBIND for individual dependent definitions.

Bind External Definitions Dialog Box

Quick Reference
See also:

Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind)

Adds xref-dependent named objects (such as blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles) to your drawing.

Bind External Definitions Dialog Box | 1145

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Xrefs Lists the xrefs currently attached to the drawing. Selecting an xref (double-clicking) displays the named object definitions in the attached xref. Definitions to Bind Lists the xref-dependent named object definitions to bind to the host drawing. Add Moves the named object definitions selected in the Xrefs list into the Definitions to Bind list. Remove Moves the xref-dependent named object definition selected in the Definitions to Bind list back to its xref-dependent definition table.

1146 | Chapter 24 X Commands

-XBIND
Quick Reference
See also:

Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind)

Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter symbol type to bind [Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Style]: Enter an option Depending on the option, you are prompted for a xref-dependent named object (symbol) such as a block, dimension style, layer, linetype, or text style. Enter dependent Symbol name(s): Enter a name list or * to bind all xref-dependent named objects (symbols) from that definition table The name you specify must be the full name, including the vertical bar character ( | ). The xref-dependent named objects you specify are added to your drawing. You can manipulate them as you would any other named object. The vertical bar character ( | ) from each xref-dependent named object is replaced with a number (usually 0) between two dollar signs ($). If you specify a layer whose associated linetype is not CONTINUOUS, XBIND also binds the referenced linetype. If you apply XBIND to a block, any block, dimension style, layer, linetype, or text style that's referenced by objects in the block is also bound. If the block contains an xref, XBIND binds that xref and all its dependent named objects.

-XBIND | 1147

XCLIP
Quick Reference
See also:

Clip External References and Blocks

Crops the display of a selected external reference or block reference to a specified boundary.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify Clip Xref Shortcut menu: Select an xref. Right-click in the drawing area and click Clip Xref.

Summary
The clipping boundary determines the portion of an xref or block instance that is hidden, either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the XCLIPFRAME system variable.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

On
Displays the clipped portion of the external reference or block in the current drawing.

Off
Displays all of the geometry of the external reference or block in the current drawing, ignoring the clipping boundary.

Clipdepth
Sets the front and back clipping planes on an xref or block. Objects outside the volume defined by the boundary and the specified depth are not displayed. Regardless of the current UCS, the clip depth is applied parallel to the clipping boundary. Front Clip Point Creates a clipping plane passing through and perpendicular to the clipping boundary. Distance Creates a clipping plane the specified distance from and parallel to the clipping boundary.

1148 | Chapter 24 X Commands

Remove Removes both the front and back clipping planes.

Delete
Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block. To temporarily turn off a clipping boundary, use the Off option. Delete erases the clipping boundary and the clipdepth. The ERASE command cannot be used to delete clipping boundaries.

Generate Polyline
Automatically draws a polyline coincident with the clipping boundary. The polyline assumes the current layer, linetype, lineweight, and color settings. Use this option when you want to modify the current clipping boundary using PEDIT and then redefine the clipping boundary with the new polyline. To see the entire xref while redefining the boundary, use the Off option.

New Boundary
Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline. Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect itself. Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points that you specify for the vertices of a polygon. Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify for opposite corners. Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped either outside the boundary or inside the boundary. NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected XREF underlay when the old boundary is deleted.

XEDGES
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Wireframe Models

XEDGES | 1149

Creates wireframe geometry from the edges of a 3D solid, surface, mesh, region, or subobject.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set Solids - Edit tool group (expanded) Extract Edges Menu: Modify 3D Operations Extract Edges

Summary
With the XEDGES command, you can create wireframe geometry by extracting all the edges from the following objects:

3D solids 3D solid history subobjects Meshes Regions Surfaces Subobjects (edges and faces)

Press and hold Ctrl to select faces, edges and component objects, repeating if necessary. Objects such as lines, arcs, splines, or 3D polylines are created along the edges of the selected objects or subobjects.

1150 | Chapter 24 X Commands

XLINE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Construction Lines (and Rays)

Creates a line of infinite length.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set Open Shapes tool group (expanded) Construction Line Menu: Draw Construction Line

Summary
Lines that extend to infinity, such as xlines, can be used to create construction and reference lines, and for trimming boundaries.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify a point on page 1151 or [Hor on page 1152/Ver on page 1152/Ang on page 1152/Bisect on page 1152/Offset on page 1153.

Point
Specifies the location of the infinite line using two points through which it passes. The xline is created through the specified point.

XLINE | 1151

Hor
Creates a horizontal xline passing through a specified point. The xline is created parallel to the X axis.

Ver
Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point. The xline is created parallel to the Y axis.

Ang
Creates an xline at a specified angle.

Angle of Xline Specifies the angle at which to place the line. Reference Specifies the angle from a selected reference line. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the reference line.

Bisect
Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the angle between the first and second line.

1152 | Chapter 24 X Commands

The xline lies in the plane determined by the three points.

Offset
Creates an xline parallel to another object. Offset Distance Specifies the distance the xline is offset from the selected object. Through Creates an xline offset from a line and passing through a specified point.

XOPEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Edit a Referenced Drawing in a Separate Window

Opens a selected drawing reference (xref) in a new window.

Summary
Opens a selected drawing reference in a separate window for editing.

XPLODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode)

Breaks a compound object into its component objects.

XOPEN | 1153

Summary
Reports how many objects were selected and, of those, how many objects cannot be exploded.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Individually on page 1154/Globally on page 1155].

Individually
Applies changes to the selected objects one at a time. The following prompt is displayed for each object. All Sets the color, linetype, lineweight, and layer of the component objects after you explode them. The prompts associated with the Color, Linetype, Lineweight, and Layer options are displayed. Color Sets the color of the objects after you explode them.

Enter bylayer to inherit the color of the exploded object's layer. Enter byblock to inherit the color of the exploded object. Enter t for a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter co for a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.

Layer Sets the layer of the component objects after you explode them. The default option is to inherit the current layer rather than the layer of the exploded object. LType Sets the linetype of the component objects after you explode them. Enter bylayer to inherit the linetype of the exploded object's layer. Enter byblock to inherit the linetype of the exploded object. LWeight Sets the lineweight of the component objects after you explode them.

1154 | Chapter 24 X Commands

Inherit from Parent Block Sets the color, linetype, lineweight, and layer of the component objects to that of the exploded object if the component objects' color, linetype, and lineweight are BYBLOCK and the objects are drawn on layer 0. Explode Breaks a compound object into its component objects exactly as the EXPLODE command does.

Globally
Applies changes to all the selected objects.

XREF
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Starts the EXTERNALREFERENCES command.

Summary
The Reference Manager palette is displayed. If you enter -xref at the Command prompt, options are displayed.

-XREF
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

XREF | 1155

Enter an Option
?List Xrefs Lists the DWG reference name, path, and type and the number of DWG references currently attached to your drawing. Bind Converts a specified DWG reference into a block, making it a permanent part of the drawing. The xref-dependent named objects, such as layer names, of the former xref are added to your drawing. In each xref-dependent named object, the vertical bar (|) is replaced with three new characters: a number (usually 0) between two dollar signs ($). The number is increased if the same name already exists in the current drawing. Detach Detaches one or more DWG references from your drawing, erasing all instances of a specified xref and marking the xref definition for deletion from the definition table. Only the xrefs attached or overlaid directly to the current drawing can be detached; nested xrefs cannot be detached. Path Displays and edits the path name associated with a particular DWG reference. This option is useful if you change the location of or rename the drawing file associated with the xref. Unload Unloads the selected DWG references. A marker is left in place of the xref so that it can be reloaded later. Reload Reloads one or more DWG references. This option reloads and displays the most recently saved version of that drawing. If the program encounters an error while reloading, it ends XREF and undoes the entire reloading sequence. Overlay Displays the Enter Name of File to Overlay dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). If you reference a drawing that contains an overlaid xref, the overlaid xref does not appear in the current drawing. Unlike blocks and attached xrefs, overlaid xrefs cannot be nested. If another person is currently editing the xref file, the program overlays the most recently saved version. If the xref you specify is not already overlaid, a new xref is crated, using the name of the referenced file. If FILEDIA is set to 0, the following prompt is displayed: Enter Name of File to Overlay. You can enter a tilde (~) to display a dialog box. Attach Displays the Select Reference File dialog box. See XATTACH. If you reference a drawing that contains an attached xref, the attached xref appears in the current drawing. Like blocks, attached xrefs can be nested. If

1156 | Chapter 24 X Commands

another person is currently editing the xref file, the most recently saved version is attached.

Specify Insertion Point

Specify a point or enter an option Scale Sets the scale factor. All X and Y dimensions of the xref are multiplied by the X and Y scale factors. The xref is rotated by the specified angle, using the insertion point as the center of rotation. X, Y, and Z Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.

X Scale Factor. Defines X, Y, and Z scale factors for the xref. Corner. Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box, and then defines the Z scale.

Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for the xref. PScale Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the xref as it is dragged into position. PX, PY, and PZ Sets the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the xref as it is dragged into position. PRotate Sets the rotation angle of the xref as it is dragged into position.

-XREF | 1157

1158

Z Commands

ZOOM
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport.

Access Methods
Menu: View Zoom Realtime

Toolbar: Status bar Zoom Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and choose Zoom to zoom in real time.

Summary
You can change the magnification of a view by zooming in and out, which is similar to zooming in and out with a camera. Using ZOOM does not change the absolute size of objects in the drawing. It changes only the magnification of the view. In a perspective view, ZOOM displays the 3DZOOM prompts.

1159

NOTE You cannot use ZOOM transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW or while ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW is in progress.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed. Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP), or [All on page 1160/Center/Dynamic/Extents on page 1161/Previous/Scale/Window/Object] <real time. All Zooms to display all visible objects and visual aids. The model fills the window using the greater extents calculated by all visible objects, or the extents of all visible objects and some visual aids. Visual aids might be the model's grid, a gizmo, or other.

In the illustration, LIMITS is greater than the extents of the drawing. Because it always regenerates the drawing, you cannot use ZOOM All transparently. Center Zooms to display a view defined by a center point and a magnification value or a height. A smaller value for the height increases the magnification. A larger value decreases the magnification. Not available in perspective projection.

Dynamic Pans and zooms using a rectangular view box. The view box represents your view, which you can shrink or enlarge and move around the

1160 | Chapter 25 Z Commands

drawing. Positioning and sizing the view box pans or zooms to fill the viewport with the view inside the view box. Not available in perspective projection.

To change the size of the view box, click, resize it, and click again to accept the new size of the view box. To pan with the view box, drag it to the location you want and press Enter.

Extents Zooms to display the maximum extents of all objects. The extents of each object in the model are calculated and used to determine how the model should fill the window.

Previous Zooms to display the previous view. You can restore up to 10 previous views.

NOTE If you change the visual style, the view is changed. If you enter ZOOM Previous, it restores the previous view, which is shaded differently but not zoomed differently.

ZOOM | 1161

Scale Zooms to change the magnification of a view using a scale factor.

Enter a value followed by x to specify the scale relative to the current view. Enter a value followed by xp to specify the scale relative to paper space units.

For example, entering .5x causes each object to be displayed at half its current size on the screen.

Entering .5xp displays model space at half the scale of paper space units. You can create a layout with each viewport displaying objects at a different scale. Enter a value to specify the scale relative to the grid limits of the drawing. (This option is rarely used.) For example, entering 2 displays objects at twice the size they would appear if you were zoomed to the limits of the drawing.

Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window. With the cursor, you can define an area of the model to fill the entire window.

1162 | Chapter 25 Z Commands

Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the view. You can select objects before or after you start the ZOOM command. Real Time Zooms interactively to change the magnification of the view. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (-) signs. See Zoom Shortcut Menu on page 1163 for a description of the options that are available while zooming in real time.

Holding down the pick button at the midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the top of the window zooms in to 100%. Conversely, holding the pick button down at the midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the bottom of the window zooms out by 100%. When you reach the zoom-in limit, the plus sign in the cursor disappears, indicating that you can no longer zoom in. When you reach the zoom-out limit, the minus sign in the cursor disappears, indicating that you can no longer zoom out. When you release the pick button, zooming stops. You can release the pick button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press the pick button again and continue to zoom the display from that location. To exit zooming, press Enter or Esc.

Zoom Shortcut Menu

Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

Shortcut menu allows you to switch between pan and different zoom options.

Summary
When the ZOOM command is active, you can exit ZOOM or switch to PAN or 3DORBIT using the options on the Zoom shortcut menu. To access the Zoom shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while ZOOM is active.

Zoom Shortcut Menu | 1163

List of Options
The following options are displayed. Exit Cancels ZOOM or PAN. Pan Switches to PAN. Zoom Switches to ZOOM in real time. 3D Orbit Switches to 3DORBIT. Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window. Zoom Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the drawing area. Zoom Original Restores the original view. Zoom Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents.

1164 | Chapter 25 Z Commands

Command Modifiers

You can use command modifiers to help you locate points or select objects while a command is in progress. Use the Coordinate Filter, Direct Distance Entry, From, MTP, and Tracking command modifiers at any prompt that requires point specification. Use the Selection Mode command modifiers at any prompt that requires object selection.

Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier)

Quick Reference
See also:

Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters)

Combines X, Y, and Z values from different points to specify a single point Command entry: Enter .x, .y, .xy, .xz, or .yz At any prompt for locating a point, you can enter point filters to specify a single coordinate by extracting the X, Y, and Z values of several points. In the following example, the start point for the line has a coordinate constructed from the X value of the midpoint of the first object you select, with the Y and Z values of the midpoint of the second object you select. Command: line Specify first point: .x of mid of Select an object of (need YZ) mid of Select another object To point: Specify a point

1165

Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier)

Quick Reference
See also:

Enter Direct Distances

Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor Command entry: At a prompt to locate a point, enter a numeric value With direct distance entry, you can quickly specify a point relative to the last point you entered. At any prompt for a point location, you move the cursor first to specify the direction, and then enter a numeric distance. In the following example, the second point for the line will be located 5 units toward the direction of the cursor. The direct distance that you enter is measured along the path from the last point to the current location of the cursor. This feature is usually used with Ortho or Snap mode turned on. Command: line Specify first point: Specify a point Specify next point: Move the cursor in the desired direction and enter 5 NOTE The direct distance entry method is not available while you are using temporary override keys for Ortho, object snap tracking, or polar tracking.

FROM (Command Modifier)

Quick Reference
See also:

Offset from Temporary Reference Points

Locates a point offset from a reference point within a command. Toolbar: Object Snap Command entry: At a prompt to locate a point, enter from Base Point: Specify a point to use as a base point of <offset>: Enter a relative offset

1166 | Chapter 26 Command Modifiers

At a prompt for locating a point, enter from, and then enter a temporary reference or base point from which you can specify an offset to locate the next point. Enter the offset location from this base point as a relative coordinate, or use direct distance entry. NOTE You cannot use this method during dragging in commands such as MOVE and COPY. Specifying an absolute coordinate, either by keyboard entry or with a pointing device, cancels the FROM command.

MTP (Command Modifier)

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Object Snaps

Locates the midpoint between two points. Command entry: At a prompt to locate a point, enter mtp The midpoint between two points (MTP) command modifier can be used with running object snaps or object snap overrides. (OSNAP command) At any Command prompt to locate a point, enter mtp or m2p. First point of mid: Specify a point Second point of mid: Specify a second point

TRACKING (Command Modifier)

Quick Reference
See also:

Track to Offset Point Locations (Tracking)

Locates a point from a series of temporary points. Command entry: At a prompt to locate a point, enter tracking Tracking turns on Ortho mode and can be used with Snap mode.

MTP (Command Modifier) | 1167

At any prompt to locate a point, enter tracking, track, or tk. First tracking point: Specify a location or distance Next point (Press ENTER to end tracking): Specify a second location or distance Tracking specifies a series of temporary points, each offset from the previous one. Thus, you specify a new point location from a series of directions and distances. To determine the location of each temporary point, you can use direct distance entry. First move the cursor to specify the direction, and then enter a numeric distance. Alternatively, tracking can establish a new point by combining the X and Y values of two specified points. You can specify these two points in any order, depending on the cursor direction after the first point. Direct distance entry specifies a distance in the direction of the current location of your cursor. Coordinate filters combine X, Y, and Z values from different points into a single point. Relative coordinate entry locates a point relative to the last point entered. You can also access tracking by holding down SHIFT and right-clicking to display the object snap shortcut menu.

Object Snaps (Command Modifier)

Quick Reference
See also:

Use Object Snaps

Specifies a precise point at a location on an object. Command entry: Within a command, at a prompt to locate a point, specify an object snap When you specify an object snap, the cursor snaps to the specified point on an object closest to the center of the cursor. By default, a marker and a tooltip are displayed when you move the cursor over the object snap location on an object.

Specify a Single Object Snap

If you specify a single object snap, it stays in effect only for the next point you specify.

1168 | Chapter 26 Command Modifiers

You can specify an object snap with any of the following methods:

Enter a object snap by typing its name. To see a list of valid object snaps, refer to the OSNAP on page 745 command or the Drafting Settings Dialog Box on page 358. Click an object snap from the Object Snap toolbar. Click an object snap from the Object Snap shortcut menu. You can diisplay this shortcut menu by pressing SHIFT while you right-click.

Use Running Object Snaps

Using the OSNAP or DSETTINGS commands, you can specify a set of running object snaps. Running object snaps are one or more object snaps that remain in effect as you work.

To turn running object snaps on and off, click the OSNAP button on the status bar or press F3. Press TAB to cycle through the object snap possibilities before you specify the point. To turn off running object snaps for the next point only, specify the None object snap.

Selection Modes (Command Modifier)

Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects

Controls how you create selection sets Command entry: At a prompt to select objects, enter one of the valid selection modes described in the SELECT command The selection mode you enter remains active only for the current Select Objects prompt.

Selection Modes (Command Modifier) | 1169

1170

System Variables

AutoCAD for Mac stores the values for its operating environment and some of its commands in system variables. You can examine any system variable and change any writable system variable directly at the command prompt by entering the system variable name or by using the SETVAR command or the AutoLISP getvar and setvar functions. Many system variables are also accessible through dialog box options To access a list of system variables, on the Contents tab of the Help window, click the + sign next to System Variables.

1171

1172

3D System Variables

3DOSMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Object Snaps

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 11 Controls the settings for the 3D object snaps. Controls which 3D object snaps are enabled. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
Value 0 1 2 4 8 16 Description Enables all 3D object snaps Disables all 3D object snaps Snaps to a vertex or a control vertex Snaps to the midpoint on a face edge Snaps to the center of a face Snaps to a spline or surface knot ZNON ZVER ZMID ZCEN ZKNO Shortcut Keys

1173

Snaps to a perpendicular face (planar faces only) Snaps to an object nearest to a face Turns on all 3D object snaps

ZPER

64 126

ZNEA

To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum or their values. For example, entering 6 specifies the vertex (2) and midpoint (4) object snaps. Entering 126 turns on all 3D object snaps.

3DSELECTIONMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects Individually

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the selection precedence of both visually and physically overlapping objects when using 3D visual styles.
0 1 Use legacy 3D selection precedence. Use line-of-sight 3D selection precedence for selecting 3D solids and surfaces. Also, a defining object associated with a surface is given selection precedence with this setting.

3DSELECTIONMODE has no effect when selecting 3D solids if they are displayed as 2D or 3D wireframes.

1174 | Chapter 27 3D System Variables

A System Variables

ACADLSPASDOC
Quick Reference
See also:

AutoLISP and Visual LISPAutoLISP

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the acad.lsp file is loaded into every drawing or just the first drawing opened in a session.
0 Loads acad.lsp into just the first drawing opened in a session Loads acad.lsp into every drawing opened

ACADPREFIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

1175

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the directory path, if any, specified by the ACAD environment variable, with path separators appended if necessary.

ACADVER
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize the Drawing Environment

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the AutoCAD version number. This variable differs from the DXF file $ACADVER header variable, which contains the drawing database level number.

ACISOUTVER
Quick Reference
See also:

Export ACIS SAT Files

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 70 Controls the ACIS version of SAT files created using the ACISOUT command. ACISOUT only supports a value of 15 through 18, 20, 21, 30, 31, 40, 50, 60, and 70.

1176 | Chapter 28 A System Variables

AFLAGS
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Block Attributes

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 16 Sets options for attributes. The value is the sum of the following:
0 1 2 4 8 16 32 No attribute mode selected Invisible Constant Verify Preset Lock position in block Multiple lines

ANGBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Angular Dimensions

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000

AFLAGS | 1177

Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS.

ANGDIR
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Angular Dimensions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the direction of positive angles. Angle values are measured from angle 0 relative to the orientation of the current UCS.
0 1 Counterclockwise Clockwise

ANNOALLVISIBLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Annotative Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Hides or displays annotative objects that do not support the current annotation scale.
0 Only annotative objects that support the current are displayed

1178 | Chapter 28 A System Variables

All annotative objects are displayed

The ANNOALLVISIBLE setting is saved individually for model space and each layout. NOTE When ANNOALLVISIBLE is set to 1, annotative objects that support more than one scale will only display one .

ANNOAUTOSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Annotation Scale

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: -4 Updates annotative objects to support the annotation scale when the annotation scale is changed. When the value is negative, the autoscale functionality is turned off, but the settings are maintained:
0 Newly set annotation scale is not added to annotative objects. Adds the newly set annotation scale to annotative objects that support the current scale except for those on layers that are turned off, frozen, locked or that are set to Viewport > Freeze. Adds the newly set annotation scale to annotative objects that support the current scale except for those on layers that are turned off, frozen, or that are set to Viewport > Freeze. Adds the newly set annotation scale to annotative objects that support the current scale except for those on layers that are locked.

ANNOAUTOSCALE | 1179

Adds the newly set annotation scale to all annotative objects that support the current scale.

ANNOTATIVEDWG
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies whether or not the drawing will behave as an annotative block when inserted into another drawing.
0 1 Nonannotative Annotative

NOTE The ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable becomes read-only if the drawing contains annotative objects.

APBOX
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Turns the display of the AutoSnap aperture box on or off.

1180 | Chapter 28 A System Variables

The aperture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object.
0 1 Off On

APERTURE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Object Snaps

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10 Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. Enter a value (1-50). The higher the number, the larger the target box. You can also change this setting on the Application Preferences dialog box, Cursor & Selection tab on page 730. APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the PICKBOX system variable.

AREA
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

APERTURE | 1181

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the last area computed by the AREA command. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.

ATTDIA
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry.
0 1 Issues Command prompts Uses a dialog box

ATTIPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Block Attributes

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0

1182 | Chapter 28 A System Variables

Controls the display of the in-place editor used to create multiline attributes.
0 Displays a limited in-place editor that includes only a few formatting options Displays the full in-place editor with all formatting options

Use the limited in-place editor when creating multiline attributes for best compatibility with releases prior to AutoCAD 2008.

ATTMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Block Attributes

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls display of attributes.
0 1 Off: Makes all attributes invisible Normal: Retains current visibility of each attribute; visible attributes are displayed; invisible attributes are not On: Makes all attributes visible

ATTMULTI
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Block Attributes

ATTMODE | 1183

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether multiline attributes can be created.
0 Turns off all access methods for creating multiline attributes. They can still be viewed and edited. Turns on all access methods for creating multiline attributes.

ATTREQ
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of blocks.
0 1 Assumes the defaults for the values of all attributes Turns on prompts or a dialog box for attribute values, as specified by ATTDIA

AUDITCTL
Quick Reference
See also:

Repair a Damaged Drawing File

1184 | Chapter 28 A System Variables

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether AUDIT creates an audit report (ADT) file.
0 1 Prevents writing of ADT files Writes ADT files

AUNITS
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Unit Format Conventions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets units for angles.
0 1 2 3 4 Decimal degrees Degrees/minutes/seconds Gradians Radians Surveyor's units

AUNITS | 1185

AUPREC
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Unit Format Conventions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the display precision for angular units and coordinates. However, the internal precision of angular values and and coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision. AUPREC does not affect the display precision of dimension text (see DIMSTYLE on page 306). Valid values are integers from 0 to 8.

AUTOSNAP
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 63 Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. Also turns on polar and object snap tracking, and controls the display of polar tracking, object snap tracking, and Ortho mode tooltips. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 Turns off the AutoSnap marker, tooltips, and magnet. Also turns off polar tracking, object snap tracking, and tooltips for polar tracking, object snap tracking, and Ortho mode Turns on the AutoSnap marker

1186 | Chapter 28 A System Variables

2 4 8 16 32

Turns on the AutoSnap tooltips Turns on the AutoSnap magnet Turns on polar tracking Turns on object snap tracking Turns on tooltips for polar tracking, object snap tracking, and Ortho mode

AUTOSNAP | 1187

1188

B System Variables

BACKZ
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a 3D Dynamic View (DVIEW)

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. Meaningful only if clipping is specified in CAMERA, DVIEW, or 3DCLIP. If there are several cameras, the value is the last back clipping plane that you set current. The distance of the back clipping plane from the camera point can be found by subtracting BACKZ from the camera-to-target distance.

BINDTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind)

1189

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls how xref names are handled when binding xrefs or editing xrefs in place.
0 Traditional binding behavior ("xref1|one" becomes "xref$0$one") Insert-like behavior ("xref1|one" becomes "one")

BLIPMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Erase Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether marker blips are visible. This system variable has the same name as the BLIPMODE command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.
0 1 Turns off marker blips Turns on marker blips

BLOCKEDITOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Edit Dynamic Blocks

1190 | Chapter 29 B System Variables

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether or not the Block Editor is open.
0 1 Indicates that the Block Editor is not open Indicates that the Block Editor is open

BTMARKDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Define Blocks

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether or not value set markers are displayed for dynamic block references.
0 1 Specifies that value set markers are not displayed Specifies that value set markers are displayed

BTMARKDISPLAY | 1191

1192

C System Variables

CAMERADISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify 3D Views

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Turns the display of camera objects on or off. The value changes to 1 (to display cameras) when you use the CAMERA command.
0 1 Camera glyphs are not displayed Camera glyphs are displayed

1193

CANNOSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Annotation Scale

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1:1 Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. You can only enter a named scale that exists in the drawings named scale list.

CANNOSCALEVALUE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Annotation Scale

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Returns the value of the current annotation scale.

CCONSTRAINTFORM
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

1194 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects.
0 1 Dynamic Annotational

When this system variable is set to 0, dynamic constraints are created, by default, when you use the DIMCONSTRAINT command.

CDATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain General Drawing Information

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the current date and time in decimal format. The date and time displays in a decimal format starting with the year. After the decimal point, CDATE displays the time using a 24-hour clock. For example, the ninth day of February in the year 2006 at 3:05 pm displays as 20060209.150500.

CECOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Change the Color of an Object

CDATE | 1195

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: BYLAYER Sets the color of new objects. Valid values include the following:

BYLAYER or BYBLOCK AutoCAD Color Index (ACI): integer values from 1 to 255, or a color name from the first seven colors True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" Color Books: Text from standard PANTONE or custom color books, the DIC color guide, or RAL color sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43"

CELTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Linetype Scale

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. Sets the linetype scaling for new objects relative to the LTSCALE on page 585 command setting. A line created with CELTSCALE = 2 in a drawing with LTSCALE set to 0.5 would appear the same as a line created with CELTSCALE = 1 in a drawing with LTSCALE = 1.

1196 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

CELTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Current Linetype

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: BYLAYER Sets the linetype of new objects.

CELWEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Current Lineweight

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -1 Sets the lineweight of new objects.
-1 -2 -3 Sets the lineweight to "BYLAYER." Sets the lineweight to "BYBLOCK." Sets the lineweight to "DEFAULT." "DEFAULT" is controlled by the LWDEFAULT system variable.

Other valid values entered in hundredths of millimeters include 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, and 211. All values must be entered in hundredths of millimeters. (Multiply a value by 2540 to convert values from inches to hundredths of millimeters.)

CELTYPE | 1197

CENTERMT
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Multiline Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how grips stretch multiline text that is centered horizontally. CENTERMT does not apply to stretching multiline text by using the ruler in the In-Place Text Editor.
0 When you move a corner grip in centered multiline text, the center grip moves in the same direction, and the grip on the opposite side remains in place When you move a corner grip in centered multiline text, the center grip stays in place, and both sets of side grips move in the direction of the stretch

CETRANSPARENCY
Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: ByLayer Sets the transparency level for new objects.
ByLayer Transparency value determined by layer

1198 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

ByBlock 0 1-90

Transparency value determined by block Fully opaque (not transparent) Transparency value defined as a percentage

To change the transparency of existing objects, use the Properties Inspector or Layers palette. NOTE Transparency is limited to 90 percent to avoid confusion with layers that are turned off or frozen. The transparency level for new hatch objects is controlled by the HPTRANSPARENCY system variable.

CHAMFERA
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Chamfers

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the first chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0.

CHAMFERB
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Chamfers

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000

CHAMFERA | 1199

Sets the second chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0.

CHAMFERC
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Chamfers

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the chamfer length when CHAMMODE is set to 1.

CHAMFERD
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Chamfers

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the chamfer angle when CHAMMODE is set to 1.

CHAMMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Chamfers Integer

Type:

1200 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Sets the input method for CHAMFER
0 1 Requires two chamfer distances Requires a chamfer length and an angle

CIRCLERAD
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Circles

Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the default circle radius. A zero indicates no default.

CLASSICKEYS
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the behavior of the AutoCAD for Mac shortcut keys.
0 1 To copy, press Cmd-C To cancel, press Cmd-C

CIRCLERAD | 1201

CLAYER
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the current layer.

CLEANSCREENSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Parts of the User Interface

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
0 1 Off On

1202 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

CLISTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

The Command Line

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the Command Line is open or closed.
0 1 Closed Open

CMATERIAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Manage Materials

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: BYLAYER Sets the material of new objects. Valid values are BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and the name of a material in the drawing.

CLISTATE | 1203

CMDACTIVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Enter Commands on the Command Line

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether an ordinary command, transparent command, script, or dialog box is active. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 2 4 8 16 32 No active command Ordinary command is active Transparent command is active Script is active Dialog box is active Not used AutoLISP is active (only visible to an ObjectARX-defined command) ObjectARX command is active

1204 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

CMDDIA
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Leaders

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of the In-Place Text Editor for the LEADER and QLEADER commands.
0 1 Off On

CMDECHO
Quick Reference
See also:

AutoLISP and Visual LISPAutoLISP

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Controls whether prompts and input are echoed during the AutoLISP command function.
0 1 Turns off echoing Turns on echoing

CMDDIA | 1205

CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX
Quick Reference
See also:

Enter Commands on the Command Line

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 20 Sets the maximum number of previous input values that are stored for a prompt in a command. Display of the history of user input is controlled by the INPUTHISTORYMODE system variable.

CMDNAMES
Quick Reference
See also:

Enter Commands on the Command Line

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Displays the names of the active and transparent commands. For example, LINE'ZOOM indicates that the ZOOM command is being used transparently during the LINE command. This variable is designed for use with programming interfaces such as AutoLISP and DIESEL. The following is a simple example that demonstrates how to use DIESEL to display the current command at the status line. Command: modemacro New value for MODEMACRO, or . for none <"">: $(getvar, cmdnames)

1206 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

CMLEADERSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Leader Styles

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Standard Sets the name of the current multileader style.

CMLJUST
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Multilines

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies multiline justification.
0 1 2 Top Zero (Middle) Bottom

CMLEADERSTYLE | 1207

CMLSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Multilines

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 (imperial) or 20.0000 (metric) Controls the overall width of a multiline. A scale factor of 2.0 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A zero scale factor collapses the multiline into a single line. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset lines (that is, the smallest or most negative is placed on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right).

CMLSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Multilines

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Standard Sets the multiline style that governs the appearance of the multiline.

COLORSCHEME
Quick Reference
See also:

Interface Themes and Background Color

1208 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Stores the current color scheme used by the program.
0 1 Dark Light

COMPASS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use 3D Navigation Tools

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls whether the 3D compass is on or off in the current viewport.
0 1 Turns off the 3D compass Turns on the 3D compass

CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3

COMPASS | 1209

Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings.
0 Does not display constraint bars for selected objects after applying geometric constraints NOTE Constraint bars will always be displayed when CONSTRAINTBAR = Showall, even if you set the value of the CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY system variable to 0. 1 Displays constraint bars for selected objects after applying constraints Temporarily displays constraint bars for the selected geometrically constrained objects Bits 1 and 2 are both turned on

CONSTRAINTBARMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 4095 Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars.
1 2 4 8 Horizontal Vertical Perpendicular Parallel

1210 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048

Tangent Smooth Coincident Concentric Colinear Symmetric Equal Fix

For example, set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 12 (8+4) to display parallel and perpendicular constraints on the constraint bars. Set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 4095 to display constraint bars for all constraint types.

CONSTRAINTINFER
Quick Reference
See also:

Infer Geometric Constraints

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the geometric constraints are inferred while drawing and editing geometry.
0 1 Geometric constraints are not inferred Geometric constraints are inferred

CONSTRAINTINFER | 1211

CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the text format for dimensional constraints.
0 1 2 Name (for example, Width) Value (for example, 4.0000) Expression (for example, width = 4.0000)

NOTE The CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT system variable is also applicable to the block constraint parameters in the Block Editor.

CONSTRAINTRELAX
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
0 1 Maintains constraints Relaxes constraints

1212 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

Use this system variable when you run scripts and want to relax any constraints.

CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Objects with Geometric Constraints Applied

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints.
0 Does not retain the size of the geometry when a constraint is applied or modified Retains the size of the geometry when a constraint is applied or modified

When the CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE is set to 0, resizing a constrained line may result in unpredictable behavior.

CONTENTSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

The Content Palette

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies

CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE | 1213

Indicates whether the Content palette is open or closed.

0 1 Closed Open

COPYMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Copy Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the COPY command repeats automatically.
0 1 Sets the COPY command to repeat automatically Sets the COPY command to create a single copy

CPLOTSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plot Styles

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: ByColor Controls the current plot style for new objects. If the current drawing you are working in is in color-dependent mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1), CPLOTSTYLE is read-only and has a value of

1214 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

BYCOLOR. If the current drawing you are working in is in named plot styles mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 0), CPLOTSTYLE can be set to the following values (BYLAYER is the default): "BYLAYER" "BYBLOCK" "NORMAL" "USER DEFINED"

CPROFILE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: <<Unnamed Profile>> Displays the name of the current profile.

CROSSINGAREACOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 100 Controls the color of the selection area during crossing selection. The valid range is 1 to 255. The SELECTIONAREA on page 1478 system variable must be on.

CPROFILE | 1215

CSHADOW
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Backgrounds and Shadows

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the shadow display property for a 3D object. To be visible, shadows must be turned on in the visual style that is applied to the viewport.
0 1 2 3 Casts and receives shadows Casts shadows Receives shadows Ignores shadows

CTAB
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Model Space Viewports

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Model Returns the name of the current layout in the drawing. Provides a means for the user to determine which layout is active.

1216 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

CTABLESTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Table Styles

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Standard Sets the name of the current table style.

CULLINGOBJ
Quick Reference
See also:

Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether 3D subobjects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected.
0 No subobject culling Rolling over 3D objects highlights all 3D subobjects, including hidden subobjects. Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects all 3D subobjects, including hidden subobjects.

Apply subobject culling Rolling over 3D objects highlights only the subobjects that are normal in the current view. Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects only the subobjects that are normal in the current view.

CTABLESTYLE | 1217

CULLINGOBJSELECTION
Quick Reference
See also:

Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether 3D objects that are hidden from view can be highlighted or selected.
0 No object culling Rolling over 3D objects highlights all 3D objects, including hidden objects. Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects all 3D objects, including hidden objects.

Apply object culling Rolling over 3D objects highlights only the objects that are normal in the current view. Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects only the objects that are normal in the current view.

CURSORSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 5 Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size.

1218 | Chapter 30 C System Variables

Valid settings range from 1 to 100 percent. When set to 100, the crosshairs are full-screen and the ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When less than 100, the ends of the crosshairs may be visible when the cursor is moved to one edge of the screen.

CVPORT
Quick Reference
See also:

Select and Use the Current Viewport

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Displays the identification number of the current viewport. You can change this value, which changes the current viewport, if the following conditions are met:

The identification number you specify is that of an active viewport. A command in progress has not locked cursor movement to that viewport. Tablet mode is off.

CVPORT | 1219

1220

D System Variables

DATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain General Drawing Information

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format. This value is represented as a Modified Julian Date (MJD), which is the Julian day number and decimal fraction of a day in the format: <Julian day number>.<Decimal fraction of a day> The Modified Julian Date, conventionally called UT1, is a worldwide scientific standard that assigns day numbers beginning at an essentially arbitrary date and time of 12:00 a.m. on 1 January 4713 B.C. (B.C.E.). With this system, 4 July 1997 at 2:29:58 p.m. corresponds to 2450634.60387736, and 1 January 1998 at 12:00 noon corresponds to 2450815.50000000. You can compute differences in date and time by subtracting the numbers returned by DATE. To extract the seconds since midnight from the value returned by DATE, use AutoLISP expressions:
(setq s (getvar "DATE")) (setq seconds (* 86400.0 (- s (fix s))))

1221

Because your computer clock provides the date and time, the DATE system variable returns a true Julian date only if the system clock is set to UTC/Zulu (Greenwich Mean Time). TDCREATE and TDUPDATE have the same format as DATE, but their values represent the creation time and last update time of the current drawing.

DBLCLKEDIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Objects Modify Complex Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the double click editing behavior in the drawing area. The system variable can accept the values of On and Off in place of 1 and 0.
0 1 Disabled Enabled

DBMOD
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0

1222 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Indicates the drawing modification status. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
1 4 8 16 32 Object database modified Database variable modified Window modified View modified Field modified

The DBMOD value is reset to 0 when you save the drawing.

DEFAULTGIZMO
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Gizmos

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection.
0 The 3D Move gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style. The 3D Rotate gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style. The 3D Scale gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style.

DEFAULTGIZMO | 1223

No gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style.

Set this variable to display the gizmo you use most often by default.

With the 3D Move gizmo, you can restrict the movement of selected objects along an X, Y, or Z axis, or within a specified plane. To specify the movement limitations, hover the cursor over the gizmo until the axis or plane is highlighted. With the 3D Rotate gizmo, you can restrict the rotation of selected objects about an X, Y, or Z axis. To specify the rotation axis, hover the cursor over the gizmo until the axis line is displayed in red and the revolution path is highlighted in yellow.

1224 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

With the 3D Scale gizmo, you can resize selected objects uniformly, resize them along an X, Y, or Z axis, or resize them along a specified plane. To specify the scale limitations, hover the cursor over the gizmo. Highlight the solid area between the axes for uniform resizing. Highlight the double lines between the axes to specify resizing along a plane. Highlight an axis to specify resizing along an axis.

DEFAULTGIZMO | 1225

No gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style.

DEFAULTLIGHTING
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Lighting

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Turns on and off default lighting in place of other lighting. Default lighting is provided by a set of distant lights that follow the view direction. When default lighting is on, the sun and other lights do not cast light, even if they are turned on. The setting of this system variable is viewport-specific.
0 Default lighting is automatically turned off when point lights, spotlights, distant lights, or the sun are on

1226 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Default lighting only is turned on

DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Lighting

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies the type of default lighting, old or new. The default lighting provided in AutoCAD 2006 and earlier releases used one distant light. The new default lighting uses two distant lights to illuminate more of the model and also adjusts ambient light. The setting of this system variable is viewport-specific.
0 1 Old type of default lighting New type of default lighting

DEFLPLSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plot Styles

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: ByColor Specifies the default plot style for all layers in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or for Layer 0 when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.

DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE | 1227

When the drawing is opened and PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1 (color-dependent plot style mode), DEFLPLSTYLE is read-only and has a value of BYCOLOR. If PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 0 (named plot style mode) when the drawing is opened, DEFLPLSTYLE is writable and has a default value of NORMAL.

DEFPLSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plot Styles

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: ByColor Specifies the default plot style for new objects in a drawing when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000, or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template. When the drawing is opened and PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1 (color-dependent plot style mode), DEFPLSTYLE is read-only and has a value of BYCOLOR. If PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 0 (named plot style mode), DEFPLSTYLE is writable and has a default value of BYLAYER.

DELOBJ
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Controls whether geometry used to create 3D objects is retained or deleted.

1228 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

If the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 1507 system variable is set to 1, the DELOBJ setting is ignored.
0 1 All defining geometry is retained. Deletes profile curves, including those used with the EXTRUDE, SWEEP, REVOLVE, and LOFT commands. Removes all defining geometry for CONVTOSOLID on page 214, CONVTOSURFACE on page 216, CONVTONURBS on page 213, and CONVTOMESH on page 212 commands. Cross sections used with the LOFT command are also deleted. Deletes all defining geometry, including paths and guide curves used with the SWEEP and LOFT commands. Deletes all defining geometry, including paths and guide curves used with the SWEEP and LOFT commands if the action results in a solid object. Removes all defining geometry for CONVTOSOLID, CONVTOSURFACE, CONVTONURBS, and CONVTOMESH commands. Displays prompts to delete profile curves, including those used with the EXTRUDE, SWEEP, REVOLVE, and LOFT commands. Prompts to remove cross sections used with the LOFT command. The original geometry for CONVTOSOLID, CONVTOSURFACE, and CONVTOMESH commands is removed without prompting. Displays prompts to delete all defining geometry, including paths and guide curves used with the SWEEP and LOFT commands. The original geometry for CONVTOSOLID, CONVTOSURFACE, and CONTOMESH commands is removed without prompting. Displays prompts to delete all defining geometry if the resulting entities are a surface of any type. Deletes all original geometry resulting in a solid entity, original geometry for CONVTOSOLID, CONVTOSURFACE, CONVTONURBS, and CONVTOMESH commands is removed without prompting

-1

-2

-3

DELOBJ | 1229

DEMANDLOAD
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Demand Loading

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Specifies if and when to demand-load certain applications. If you set this system variable to 0, third-party applications and some AutoCAD commands cannot function.
0 1 Turns off demand-loading. Demand-loads the source application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects. This setting does not demand-load the application when you invoke one of the application's commands. Demand-loads the source application when you invoke one of the application's commands. This setting does not demand-load the application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects. Demand-loads the source application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects or when you invoke one of the application's commands

DIASTAT
Quick Reference
See also:

Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line

1230 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores the exit method of the most recently used dialog box.
0 1 Cancel OK

NOTE The DIASTAT system variable does not apply to standard file selection dialog boxes, such as the Select File and the Save Drawing As dialog boxes.

DIMADEC
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Angular Dimensions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the number of precision places displayed in angular dimensions.
-1 Angular dimensions display the number of decimal places specified by DIMDEC. Specifies the number of decimal places displayed in angular dimensions (independent of DIMDEC)

0-8

DIMADEC | 1231

DIMALT
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions. See also DIMALTD, DIMALTF, DIMALTTD, DIMALTTZ, DIMALTZ, and DIMAPOST.
Off On Disables alternate units Enables alternate units

DIMALTD
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 (imperial) or 3 (metric) Controls the number of decimal places in alternate units. If DIMALT is turned on, DIMALTD sets the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the alternate measurement.

1232 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMALTF
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 25.4000 (imperial) or 0.0394 (metric) Controls the multiplier for alternate units. If DIMALT is turned on, DIMALTF multiplies linear dimensions by a factor to produce a value in an alternate system of measurement. The initial value represents the number of millimeters in an inch.

DIMALTRND
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Rounds off the alternate dimension units.

DIMALTTD
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

DIMALTF | 1233

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 (imperial) or 3 (metric) Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate units of a dimension.

DIMALTTZ
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
0 1 2 3 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet

To suppress leading or trailing zeros, add the following values to one of the preceding values:
4 8 Suppresses leading zeros Suppresses trailing zeros

1234 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMALTU
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets the units format for alternate units of all dimension substyles except Angular.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Scientific Decimal Engineering Architectural (stacked) Fractional (stacked) Architectural Fractional System Format

DIMALTZ
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units Integer

Type:

DIMALTU | 1235

Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values. DIMALTZ values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only.
0 1 2 3 4 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5)

DIMANNO
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Annotative Dimensions and Tolerances

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Indicates whether or not the current dimension style is annotative.
0 1 Nonannotative Annotative

1236 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMAPOST
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the alternate dimension measurement for all types of dimensions except angular. For instance, if the current units are Architectural, DIMALT is on, DIMALTF is 25.4 (the number of millimeters per inch), DIMALTD is 2, and DIMAPOST is set to "mm", a distance of 10 units would be displayed as 10"[254.00mm]. To turn off an established prefix or suffix (or both), set it to a single period (.).

DIMARCSYM
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Arc Length Dimensions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension.
0 1 2 Places arc length symbols before the dimension text Places arc length symbols above the dimension text Suppresses the display of arc length symbols

DIMAPOST | 1237

DIMASSOC
Quick Reference
See also:

Associative Dimensions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded.
0 Creates exploded dimensions. There is no association between the various elements of the dimension. The lines, arcs, arrowheads, and text of a dimension are drawn as separate objects. Creates non-associative dimension objects. The elements of the dimension are formed into a single object. If one of the definition points of the dimension moves, the dimension is updated. Creates associative dimension objects. The elements of the dimension are formed into a single object, and one or more definition points of the dimension are coupled with association points on geometric objects. If the association point on the geometric object moves, the dimension location, orientation, and value are updated.

DIMASSOC is not stored in a dimension style. Drawings saved in a format previous to AutoCAD 2002 retain the setting of the DIMASSOC system variable. When the drawing is reopened in AutoCAD 2002 or later, the dimension associativity setting is restored.

1238 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMASZ
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Arrowheads

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.1800 (imperial) or 2.5000 (metric) Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrowheads. Also controls the size of hook lines. Multiples of the arrowhead size determine whether dimension lines and text should fit between the extension lines. DIMASZ is also used to scale arrowhead blocks if set by DIMBLK. DIMASZ has no effect when DIMTSZ is other than zero.

DIMATFIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines.
0 1 2 3 Places both text and arrows outside extension lines Moves arrows first, then text Moves text first, then arrows Moves either text or arrows, whichever fits best

DIMASZ | 1239

A leader is added to moved dimension text when DIMTMOVE is set to 1.

DIMAUNIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Angular Dimensions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the units format for angular dimensions.
0 1 2 3 Decimal degrees Degrees/minutes/seconds Gradians Radians

DIMAZIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Suppress Zeros in Dimensions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Suppresses zeros for angular dimensions.
0 Displays all leading and trailing zeros

1240 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) Suppresses leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5)

DIMBLK
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Arrowheads

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the arrowhead block displayed at the ends of dimension lines. To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). Arrowhead block entries and the names used to select them in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes are shown below. You can also enter the names of user-defined arrowhead blocks. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.
"" "_DOT" "_DOTSMALL" "_DOTBLANK" closed filled dot dot small

dot blank

DIMBLK | 1241

"_ORIGIN" "_ORIGIN2" "_OPEN" "_OPEN90" "_OPEN30" "_CLOSED" "_SMALL" "_NONE" "_OBLIQUE" "_BOXFILLED" "_BOXBLANK" "_CLOSEDBLANK" "_DATUMFILLED" "_DA TUMBLANK" "_INTEGRAL" " A C TC " _ R HI K

origin indicator

origin indicator 2

open right angle open 30 closed dot small blank none oblique

box filled

box

closed blank

datum triangle filled

datum triangle

integral

architectural tick

1242 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMBLK1
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Arrowheads

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowheads, see DIMBLK. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.

DIMBLK2
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Arrowheads

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the arrowhead for the second end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.

DIMBLK1 | 1243

DIMCEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Radial Dimensions

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0900 (imperial) or 2.5000 (metric) Controls drawing of circle or arc center marks and centerlines by the DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands. For DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS, the center mark is drawn only if you place the dimension line outside the circle or arc.
0 <0 >0 No center marks or lines are drawn Centerlines are drawn Center marks are drawn

The absolute value specifies the size of the center mark or centerline. The size of the centerline is the length of the centerline segment that extends outside the circle or arc. It is also the size of the gap between the center mark and the start of the centerline. The size of the center mark is the distance from the center of the circle or arc to the end of the center mark.

DIMCLRD
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Dimension Lines Integer

Type:

1244 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. Also controls the color of leader lines created with the LEADER command. Color numbers are displayed in the Select Color dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256.

DIMCLRE
Quick Reference
See also:

Override a Dimension Style

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Assigns colors to extension lines, center marks, and centerlines. Color numbers are displayed in the Select Color dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256.

DIMCLRT
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Appearance of Dimension Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Assigns colors to dimension text. The color can be any valid color number.

DIMCLRE | 1245

DIMCONSTRAINTICON
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints.
0 Does not display the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints Displays the icon for dynamic constraints Displays the icon for annotational constraints Displays the icon for dynamic and annotational constraints

1 2

DIMDEC
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 4 (imperial) or 2 (metric) Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the primary units of a dimension.

1246 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

The precision is based on the units or angle format you have selected. Specified value is applied to angular dimensions when DIMADEC on page 1231 is set to -1.

DIMDLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Dimension Lines

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads.

DIMDLI
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Dimension Lines

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.3800 (imperial) or 3.7500 (metric) Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Each dimension line is offset from the previous one by this amount, if necessary, to avoid drawing over it. Changes made with DIMDLI are not applied to existing dimensions.

DIMDLE | 1247

DIMDSEP
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: Single-character Saved in: Drawing Initial value: . (imperial) or , (metric) Specifies a single-character decimal separator to use when creating dimensions whose unit format is decimal. When prompted, enter a single character at the Command prompt. If dimension units is set to Decimal, the DIMDSEP character is used instead of the default decimal point. If DIMDSEP is set to NULL (default value, reset by entering a period), the decimal point is used as the dimension separator.

DIMEXE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Extension Lines

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.1800 (imperial) or 1.2500 (metric) Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond the dimension line.

1248 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMEXO
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Extension Lines

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0625 (imperial) or 0.6250 (metric) Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. With fixed-length extension lines, this value determines the minimum offset.

DIMFRAC
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Fractions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the fraction format when DIMLUNIT is set to 4 (Architectural) or 5 (Fractional).
0 1 2 Horizontal stacking Diagonal stacking Not stacked (for example, 1/2)

DIMEXO | 1249

DIMFXL
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Extension Lines

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin.

DIMFXLON
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Extension Lines

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls whether extension lines are set to a fixed length. When DIMFXLON is on, extension lines are set to the length specified by DIMFXL.

DIMGAP
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Location of Dimension Text

1250 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0900 (imperial) or 0.6250 (metric) Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. Also sets the gap between annotation and a hook line created with the LEADER command. If you enter a negative value, DIMGAP places a box around the dimension text. DIMGAP is also used as the minimum length for pieces of the dimension line. When the default position for the dimension text is calculated, text is positioned inside the extension lines only if doing so breaks the dimension lines into two segments at least as long as DIMGAP. Text placed above or below the dimension line is moved inside only if there is room for the arrowheads, dimension text, and a margin between them at least as large as DIMGAP: 2 * (DIMASZ + DIMGAP).

DIMJOGANG
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Radial Dimensions

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 45 Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a jogged radius dimension. Jogged radius dimensions are often created when the center point is located off the page. Valid settings range is 5 to 90.

DIMJOGANG | 1251

DIMJUST
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Location of Dimension Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
0 Positions the text above the dimension line and centerjustifies it between the extension lines Positions the text next to the first extension line Positions the text next to the second extension line Positions the text above and aligned with the first extension line Positions the text above and aligned with the second extension line

1 2 3

DIMLDRBLK
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Leader Objects

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Specifies the arrow type for leaders.

1252 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK on page 1241. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.

DIMLFAC
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Scale for Dimensions

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. All linear dimension distances, including radii, diameters, and coordinates, are multiplied by DIMLFAC before being converted to dimension text. Positive values of DIMLFAC are applied to dimensions in both model space and paper space; negative values are applied to paper space only. DIMLFAC applies primarily to nonassociative dimensions (DIMASSOC set 0 or 1). For nonassociative dimensions in paper space, DIMLFAC must be set individually for each layout viewport to accommodate viewport scaling. DIMLFAC has no effect on angular dimensions, and is not applied to the values held in DIMRND, DIMTM, or DIMTP.

DIMLIM
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Lateral Tolerances Switch

Type:

DIMLFAC | 1253

Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Generates dimension limits as the default text. Setting DIMLIM to On turns DIMTOL off.
Off On Dimension limits are not generated as default text Dimension limits are generated as default text

DIMLTEX1
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Extension Lines

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the linetype of the first extension line. The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype.

DIMLTEX2
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Extension Lines

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the linetype of the second extension line. The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype.

1254 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMLTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Dimension Lines

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Sets the linetype of the dimension line. The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype.

DIMLUNIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets units for all dimension types except Angular.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Scientific Decimal Engineering Architectural (always displayed stacked) Fractional (always displayed stacked) System Format

DIMLTYPE | 1255

DIMLWD
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Dimension Lines

Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -2 Assigns lineweight to dimension lines.
-3 -2 -1 Default (the LWDEFAULT value) BYBLOCK BYLAYER

The integer represents 1/100th of a mm.

DIMLWE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Extension Lines

Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -2 Assigns lineweight to extension lines.
-3 -2 -1 Default (the LWDEFAULT value) BYBLOCK BYLAYER

1256 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

The integer represents 1/100th of a mm.

DIMPOST
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimension Units

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: None Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension measurement. For example, to establish a suffix for millimeters, set DIMPOST to mm; a distance of 19.2 units would be displayed as 19.2 mm. If tolerances are turned on, the suffix is applied to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. Use <> to indicate placement of the text in relation to the dimension value. For example, enter <>mm to display a 5.0 millimeter radial dimension as "5.0mm". If you entered mm <>, the dimension would be displayed as "mm 5.0". Use the <> mechanism for angular dimensions.

DIMRND
Quick Reference
See also:

Round Off Dimension Values

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified value. For instance, if DIMRND is set to 0.25, all distances round to the nearest 0.25 unit. If you set DIMRND to 1.0, all distances round to the nearest integer.

DIMPOST | 1257

Note that the number of digits edited after the decimal point depends on the precision set by DIMDEC. DIMRND does not apply to angular dimensions.

DIMSAH
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Arrowheads

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls the display of dimension line arrowhead blocks.
Off On Use arrowhead blocks set by DIMBLK Use arrowhead blocks set by DIMBLK1 and DIMBLK2

DIMSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Scale for Dimensions

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. Also affects the leader objects with the LEADER command.

1258 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Use MLEADERSCALE to scale multileader objects created with the MLEADER command.
0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space. If you are in paper space or model space and not using the paper space feature, the scale factor is 1.0. A scale factor is computed that leads text sizes, arrowhead sizes, and other scaled distances to plot at their face values.

DIMSCALE does not affect measured lengths, coordinates, or angles. Use DIMSCALE to control the overall scale of dimensions. However, if the current dimension style is , DIMSCALE is automatically set to zero and the dimension scale is controlled by the CANNOSCALE system variable. DIMSCALE cannot be set to a non-zero value when using annotative dimensions.

DIMSD1
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Dimension Lines

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls suppression of the first dimension line and arrowhead. When turned on, suppresses the display of the dimension line and arrowhead between the first extension line and the text.
Off On First dimension line is not suppressed First dimension line is suppressed

DIMSD1 | 1259

DIMSD2
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Dimension Lines

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead. When turned on, suppresses the display of the dimension line and arrowhead between the second extension line and the text.
Off On Second dimension line is not suppressed Second dimension line is suppressed

DIMSE1
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Extension Lines

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Suppresses display of the first extension line.
Off On Extension line is not suppressed Extension line is suppressed

1260 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMSE2
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Extension Lines

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Suppresses display of the second extension line.
Off On Extension line is not suppressed Extension line is suppressed

DIMSOXD
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Dimension Lines

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines.
Off On Arrowheads are not suppressed Arrowheads are suppressed

If not enough space is available inside the extension lines and DIMTIX is on, setting DIMSOXD to On suppresses the arrowheads. If DIMTIX is off, DIMSOXD has no effect.

DIMSE2 | 1261

DIMSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Standard (imperial) or ISO-25 (metric) Stores the name of the current dimension style. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. The DIMSTYLE system variable is read-only; to change the current dimension style, use the DIMSTYLE command.

DIMTAD
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Location of Dimension Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 1 (metric) Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line.
0 1 Centers the dimension text between the extension lines. Places the dimension text above the dimension line except when the dimension line is not horizontal and text inside the extension lines is forced horizontal (DIMTIH = 1). The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current DIMGAP value.

1262 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Places the dimension text on the side of the dimension line farthest away from the defining points. Places the dimension text to conform to Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS). Places the dimension text below the dimension line.

DIMTDEC
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Lateral Tolerances

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 4 (imperial) or 2 (metric) Sets the number of decimal places to display in tolerance values for the primary units in a dimension. This system variable has no effect unless DIMTOL is set to On. The default for DIMTOL is Off.

DIMTFAC
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Scale for Dimensions

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT.

DIMTDEC | 1263

For example, if DIMTFAC is set to 1.0, the text height of fractions and tolerances is the same height as the dimension text. If DIMTFAC is set to 0.7500, the text height of fractions and tolerances is three-quarters the size of dimension text.

DIMTFILL
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Appearance of Dimension Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the background of dimension text.
0 1 2 No background The background color of the drawing The background specified by DIMTFILLCLR

DIMTFILLCLR
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Appearance of Dimension Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the color for the text background in dimensions. Color numbers are displayed in the Select Color dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256.

1264 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMTIH
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Location of Dimension Text

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: On (imperial) or Off (metric) Controls the position of dimension text inside the extension lines for all dimension types except Ordinate.
Off On Aligns text with the dimension line Draws text horizontally

DIMTIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Draws text between extension lines.
Off Varies with the type of dimension. For linear and angular dimensions, text is placed inside the extension lines if there is sufficient room. For radius and diameter dimensions that don't fit inside the circle or arc, DIMTIX has no effect and always forces the text outside the circle or arc. Draws dimension text between the extension lines even if it would ordinarily be placed outside those lines

DIMTIH | 1265

DIMTM
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Lateral Tolerances

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the minimum (or lower) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. DIMTM accepts signed values. If DIMTOL is on and DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value, a tolerance value is drawn. If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is drawn above the lower, and a plus sign is added to the DIMTP value if it is positive. For DIMTM, the program uses the negative of the value you enter (adding a minus sign if you specify a positive number and a plus sign if you specify a negative number).

DIMTMOVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Dimension Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets dimension text movement rules.
0 1 Moves the dimension line with dimension text Adds a leader when dimension text is moved

1266 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Allows text to be moved freely without a leader

DIMTOFL
Quick Reference
See also:

Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off (imperial) or On (metric) Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines even when the text is placed outside. For radius and diameter dimensions (when DIMTIX is off), draws a dimension line inside the circle or arc and places the text, arrowheads, and leader outside.
Off Does not draw dimension lines between the measured points when arrowheads are placed outside the measured points Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when arrowheads are placed outside the measured points

DIMTOH
Quick Reference
See also:

Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: On (imperial) or Off (metric)

DIMTOFL | 1267

Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines.

Off On Aligns text with the dimension line Draws text horizontally

DIMTOL
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Lateral Tolerances

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Appends tolerances to dimension text. Setting DIMTOL to on turns DIMLIM off.

DIMTOLJ
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Lateral Tolerances

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 (imperial) or 0 (metric) Sets the vertical justification for tolerance values relative to the nominal dimension text. This system variable has no effect unless DIMTOL is set to On. The default for DIMTOL is Off.
0 Bottom

1268 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

1 2

Middle Top

DIMTP
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Scale for Dimensions

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. DIMTP accepts signed values. If DIMTOL is on and DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value, a tolerance value is drawn. If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is drawn above the lower and a plus sign is added to the DIMTP value if it is positive.

DIMTSZ
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Arrowheads

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Specifies the size of oblique strokes drawn instead of arrowheads for linear, radius, and diameter dimensioning.
0 Draws arrowheads.

DIMTP | 1269

Draws oblique strokes instead of arrowheads. The size of the oblique strokes is determined by this value multiplied by the DIMSCALE value.

DIMTVP
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Location of Dimension Text

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension line. The DIMTVP value is used when DIMTAD is off. The magnitude of the vertical offset of text is the product of the text height and DIMTVP. Setting DIMTVP to 1.0 is equivalent to setting DIMTAD to on. The dimension line splits to accommodate the text only if the absolute value of DIMTVP is less than 0.7.

DIMTXSTY
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Appearance of Dimension Text

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Standard Specifies the text style of the dimension.

1270 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIMTXT
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Appearance of Dimension Text

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.1800 (imperial) or 2.5000 (metric) Specifies the height of dimension text, unless the current text style has a fixed height.

DIMTXTDIRECTION
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Appearance of Dimension Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.
0 1 Displays dimension text in a Left-to-Right reading style Displays dimension text in a Right-to-Left reading style

DIMTXT | 1271

DIMTZIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Lateral Tolerances

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 8 (metric) Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values. Values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only.
0 1 2 3 4 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5)

DIMUPT
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Location of Dimension Text

1272 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls options for user-positioned text.
Off On Cursor controls only the dimension line location Cursor controls both the text position and the dimension line location

DIMZIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Suppress Zeros in Dimensions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 8 (metric) Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value. Values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only:
0 1 2 3 4 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5)

DIMZIN | 1273

DIMZIN also affects real-to-string conversions performed by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions.

DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN2D
Quick Reference
See also:

Use ViewCube

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe visual style is applied to a viewport.
0 Off. Do not display the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe visual style is applied On. Display the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe visual style is applied

DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN3D
Quick Reference
See also:

Use ViewCube

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1

1274 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Controls the display of the ViewCube tool when a 3D visual style is applied to a viewport.
0 Off. Do not display the ViewCube tool when a 3D visual style is applied On. Display the ViewCube tool when a 3D visual style is applied

DISPSILH
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls display of silhouette edges of 3D solid objects in a 2D Wireframe or 3D Wireframe visual style.
0 1 Off. Do not display silhouette edges On. Display silhouette edges

When turned on, DISPSILH also suppresses the mesh displayed when using the HIDE command in the 2D wireframe visual style. Use the REGEN command to display the results.

DISTANCE
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations

DISPSILH | 1275

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the distance computed by the DIST command.

DIVMESHBOXHEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Box

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of a mesh box along the Z axis.

This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH command.

1276 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DIVMESHBOXLENGTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Box

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh box along the X axis.

This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHBOXWIDTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Box

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of a mesh box along the Y axis.

DIVMESHBOXLENGTH | 1277

This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHCONEAXIS
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Cone

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 8 Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cone base.

1278 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHCONEBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Cone

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions between the perimeter and the center point of the mesh cone base.

DIVMESHCONEBASE | 1279

This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Cone

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the point or top of the mesh cone.

1280 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHCYLAXIS
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Cylinder

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 8 Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cylinder base.

DIVMESHCYLAXIS | 1281

This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHCYLBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Cylinder

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of radial subdivisions from the center of the mesh cylinder base to its perimeter.

1282 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Cylinder

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh cylinder.

DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT | 1283

This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHPYRBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Pyramid

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of radial subdivisions between the center of the mesh pyramid base and its perimeter.

1284 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Pyramid

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh pyramid.

DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT | 1285

This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHPYRLENGTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Pyramid

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions along each dimension of a mesh pyramid base.

1286 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Sphere

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 12 Sets the number of radial subdivisions around the axis endpoint of the mesh sphere.

DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS | 1287

This setting affects new mesh spheres that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Sphere

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 6 Sets the number of subdivisions between the two axis endpoints of the mesh sphere.

1288 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

This setting affects new mesh spheres that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHTORUSPATH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Torus

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 8 Sets the number of subdivisions in the path that is swept by the profile of a mesh torus.

This setting affects new mesh tori that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHTORUSPATH | 1289

DIVMESHTORUSSECTION
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Torus

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 8 Sets the number of subdivisions in the profile that sweeps the path of a mesh torus.

This setting affects new mesh tori that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHWEDGEBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Wedge

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3

1290 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Sets the number of subdivisions between the midpoint of the perimeter of triangular dimension of the mesh wedge.

This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Wedge

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of the mesh wedge along the Z axis.

DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT | 1291

This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Wedge

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 4 Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh wedge along the X axis.

1292 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Wedge

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions in the slope that extends from the apex of the wedge to the edge of the base.

DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE | 1293

This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command.

DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Mesh Wedge

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3 Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of the mesh wedge along the Y axis.

1294 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH command.

DONUTID
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Donuts

Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.5000 Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut.

DONUTOD
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Donuts Real

Type:

DONUTID | 1295

Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut. The value must be nonzero. If DONUTID is larger than DONUTOD, the two values are swapped by the next command.

DRAGMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the display of objects being dragged. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. When it is on, the image of an object is displayed as you drag it to another position. With some computer configurations, dragging can be time-consuming. Use DRAGMODE to suppress dragging.
0 1 Does not display an outline of the object as you drag it Displays the outline of the object as you drag it only if you enter drag at the Command prompt after selecting the object to drag Auto; always displays an outline of the object as you drag it

1296 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DRAGP1
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10 Sets the regen-drag input sampling rate.

DRAGP2
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 25 Sets the fast-drag input sampling rate.

DRAGVS
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid Box

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: ""

DRAGP1 | 1297

Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. You can enter a period (.) to specify the current visual style. DRAGVS can only be set to a visual style that is saved in the drawing. DRAGVS has no effect when the current viewport's visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. The visual style specified for DRAGVS cannot be removed with the PURGE command.

DRAWORDERCTL
Quick Reference
See also:

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Controls the default display behavior of overlapping objects when they are created or edited.
0 Turns off the default draw order of overlapping objects: after objects are edited, regardless of their draw order, the objects are displayed on top until a drawing is regenerated (REGEN) or reopened. This setting also turns off draw order inheritance: new objects that are created from another object using the commands listed below are not assigned the draw order of the original object. Use this setting to improve the speed of editing operations in large drawings. The commands that are affected by inheritance are BREAK, FILLET, HATCH, HATCHEDIT, EXPLODE, TRIM, JOIN, PEDIT, and OFFSET. Turns on the default draw order of objects: after objects are edited, they are automatically displayed according to the correct draw order.

1298 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Turns on draw order inheritance: new objects created from another object using the commands listed above are assigned the draw order of the original object. Provides full draw order display. Turns on the correct draw order of objects, and turns on draw order inheritance.

NOTE Full draw order display may slow some editing operations.

DTEXTED
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Single-Line Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text. Obsolete command. Replaced by the TEXTED system variable.

DWGCHECK
Quick Reference
See also:

Open a Drawing

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1

DTEXTED | 1299

Checks drawings for potential problems when opening them.

0 If a drawing that you try to open has a potential problem, you are warned before the drawing is opened. If a drawing that you try to open has a potential problem, or if it was saved by an application other than one released by Autodesk or based on RealDWG, you are warned before the drawing is opened. If a drawing that you try to open has a potential problem, you are notified at the Command prompt. If a drawing that you try to open has a potential problem, you are notified at the Command prompt. If the drawing has a potential problem and the drawing was saved by an application other than one released by Autodesk or based on RealDWG, you are warned before the drawing is opened.

DWGCODEPAGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Text Fonts for International Work

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the same value as SYSCODEPAGE (for compatibility reasons).

1300 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

DWGNAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Drawing1.dwg Stores the name of the current drawing. If a new drawing has not been saved yet, DWGNAME defaults to Drawing1.dwg. Additional new drawings are named Drawing2.dwg, Drawing3.dwg, and so on. The location of the saved drawing file is stored in DWGPREFIX on page 1301.

DWGPREFIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores the drive and folder prefix for the drawing.

DWGNAME | 1301

DWGTITLED
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the current drawing has been named.
0 1 Drawing has not been named Drawing has been named

DYNCONSTRAINTMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected.
0 Keeps constraints hidden when an object is selected Displays hidden constraints when dimensionally constrained objects are selected

1302 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

NOTE This system variable takes effect when dynamic constraints are hidden (see DCDISPLAY on page 249).

DYNDIGRIP
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 31 Controls which dynamic dimensions are displayed during grip stretch editing. The DYNDIVIS system variable must be set to 2, which displays all dynamic dimensions. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 2 4 8 16 None Resulting dimension Length change dimension Absolute angle dimension Angle change dimension Arc radius dimension

The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off.

DYNDIGRIP | 1303

DYNDIVIS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls how many dynamic dimensions are displayed during grip stretch editing. DYNDIGRIP controls which dynamic dimensions are displayed during grip stretch editing.
0 1 2 Only the first dynamic dimension in the cycle order Only the first two dynamic dimensions in the cycle order All dynamic dimensions, as controlled by the DYNDIGRIP system variable

The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off.

DYNMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Turns Dynamic Input features on and off. When all features are on, the context governs what is displayed.

1304 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

When DYNMODE is set to a negative value, the Dynamic Input features are not turned on, but the setting is stored. Press the Dynamic Input button in the status bar to set DYNMODE to the corresponding positive value.
0 All Dynamic Input features, including dynamic prompts, off Pointer input on Dimensional input on Both pointer input and dimensional input on

1 2 3

If dynamic prompts are on (DYNPROMPT is set to 1), they are displayed when DYNMODE is set to 1, 2, or 3. When dimensional input is turned on (DYNMODE = 2 or 3), the program switches to pointer input when you enter a comma or an angle bracket (<), or when you select multiple grip points. When DYNMODE is set to 1, 2, or 3, you can turn off all features temporarily by holding down the temporary override key, F12. Settings are on the Dynamic Input tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box.

DYNPICOORDS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether pointer input uses relative or absolute format for coordinates.
0 1 Relative Absolute

DYNPICOORDS | 1305

The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off.

DYNPIFORMAT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether pointer input uses polar or Cartesian format for coordinates. This setting applies only to a second or next point.
0 1 Polar Cartesian

The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off.

DYNPIVIS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls when pointer input is displayed.
0 1 Only when you type at a prompt for a point Automatically at a prompt for a point

1306 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

Always

The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off.

DYNPROMPT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls display of prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips.
0 1 Off On

The DYNMODE system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. When DYNMODE is set to 0 (off), prompts are not displayed regardless of the DYNPROMPT setting.

DYNTOOLTIPS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Dynamic Input

Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1

DYNPROMPT | 1307

Controls which tooltips are affected by tooltip appearance settings.

0 1 Only Dynamic Input value fields All drafting tooltips

1308 | Chapter 31 D System Variables

E System Variables

EDGEMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Trim or Extend Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and boundary edges.
0 1 Uses the selected edge without any extensions Extends or trims the selected object to an imaginary extension of the cutting or boundary edge

Lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, rays, and polylines are objects eligible for natural extension. The natural extension of a line or ray is an unbounded line (xline), an arc is a circle, and an elliptical arc is an ellipse. A polyline is broken down into its line and arc components, which are extended to their natural boundaries.

1309

ELEVATION
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS) Enter 3D Coordinates

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS.

ERHIGHLIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Drawing References (Xrefs)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether reference names or reference objects are highlighted when their counterparts are selected in the External References palette or in the drawing window.
0 1 Referenced objects are not highlighted. Referenced objects are highlighted.

1310 | Chapter 32 E System Variables

ERRNO
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of AutoLISP

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Displays the number of the appropriate error code when an AutoLISP function call causes an error that AutoCAD detects. AutoLISP applications can inspect the current value of ERRNO with (getvar "errno"). The ERRNO system variable is not always cleared to zero. Unless it is inspected immediately after an AutoLISP function has reported an error, the error that its value indicates may be misleading. This variable is always cleared when starting or opening a drawing. See the AutoLISP Developer's Guide for more information.

ERSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Drawing References (Xrefs)

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the Reference Manager palette is open or closed.
0 Closed

ERRNO | 1311

Open

EXPERT
Quick Reference
See also:

Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls whether certain prompts are issued.
0 1 Issues all prompts normally. Suppresses About to regen, proceed? and Really want to turn the current layer off? (-LAYER) Suppresses the preceding prompts and Block already defined. Redefine it? (-BLOCK) and A drawing with this name already exists. Overwrite it? (SAVE or WBLOCK). Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by the LINETYPE Command prompt (-LINETYPE) if you try to load a linetype that's already loaded or create a new linetype in a file that already defines that linetype. Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by UCS Save and VPORTS Save if the name you supply already exists. Suppresses the prompt, That name is already in Use, redefine it? issued by the -DIMSTYLE Save option when you supply the name of an existing dimension style. Suppresses the same prompt issued by the -SCALELISTEDIT Add option.

1312 | Chapter 32 E System Variables

When a prompt is suppressed by EXPERT, the operation in question is performed as though you entered y at the prompt. Setting EXPERT can affect scripts, menu macros, AutoLISP, and the command functions.

EXPLMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode)

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Controls whether the EXPLODE command supports nonuniformly scaled (NUS) blocks.
0 1 Does not explode NUS blocks Explodes NUS blocks

EXTMAX
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the upper-right point of the drawing extents. Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world coordinates for the current space.

EXPLMODE | 1313

EXTMIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the lower-left point of the drawing extents. Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world coordinates for the current space.

EXTNAMES
Quick Reference
See also:

Resolve Name Conflicts in External References

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Sets the parameters for named object names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables.
0 Uses AutoCAD for Mac Release 14 parameters, which limit names to 31 characters in length. Names can include the letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (). Uses AutoCAD 2000 (and later releases) parameters. Names can be up to 255 characters in length, and can include the letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, spaces, and

1314 | Chapter 32 E System Variables

any special characters not used by the operating system and AutoCAD for Mac for other purposes.

EXTNAMES | 1315

1316

F System Variables

FACETERDEVNORMAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Type: Real Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 40 Sets the maximum angle between the surface normal and contiguous mesh faces. This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) Use this setting to retain visual consistency between mesh objects that have the same shape but different sizes. You can enter any non-negative number between 0 (zero) and 180. Lowering the value increases the density in areas of high curvature and decreases density in flatter areas. Lowering the value might increase the drawing file size, and should be saved for larger objects with high FACETERDEVSURFACE settings. Avoid lowering this value for objects with small details such as holes or fillets. NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness.

1317

FACETERDEVSURFACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Type: Real Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0.001 Sets how closely the converted mesh object adheres to the original shape of the solid or surface. This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) You can enter any non-negative number, including 0 (zero). Smaller values result in a higher number of faces, more accurate meshes with less deviation from the object surface, and slower performance. Set the value to 0 to turn off the option. NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness.

FACETERGRIDRATIO
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Type: Real Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the maximum aspect ratio for the mesh subdivisions that are created for solids and surfaces converted to mesh.

1318 | Chapter 33 F System Variables

This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) Permissible values range from 0 to 100, and set the height/width ratio of the face. Use this variable to prevent long, thin faces that can result from cylindrical object conversions. Smaller values result in more, better-formed faces, but can affect performance. Set this value to 0 to turn it off. If the value you enter is less than 1, the ratio calculation is based on 1/n. For example, if you enter 0.2, the variable value is 1/0.2 = 5. NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness.

FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Type: Real Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the maximum length of edges for mesh objects that are created by conversion from solids and surfaces. You can use any non-negative number, including 0 (zero). This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness.

FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH | 1319

FACETERMAXGRID
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 4096 Sets the maximum number of U and V grid lines for solids and surfaces converted to mesh. This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) Permissible values range from 0 to 4096. NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness.

FACETERMESHTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Sets the type of mesh to be created.
0 Objects are converted to an optimized mesh object type with fewer faces Faces are mostly quadrilateral

1320 | Chapter 33 F System Variables

Faces are mostly triangular

FACETERMINUGRID
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Sets the minimum number of U grid lines for solids and surfaces that are converted to mesh. This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) Permissible values range from 0 to 1023. Setting 0 (zero) turns off the setting. The value of this system variable cannot exceed the value of FACETERMAXGRID/FACETERMINVGRID. NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness.

FACETERMINVGRID
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

FACETERMINUGRID | 1321

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Sets the minimum number of V grid lines for solids and surfaces that are converted to mesh. This setting affects mesh that is converted from a 3D solid or surface object using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.) Permissible values range from 0 to 1023. Setting 0 (zero) turns off the setting. The value of this system variable cannot exceed the value of FACETERMAXGRID/FACETERMINUGRID. NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness.

FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Type: Bitcode Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Specifies whether smoothness settings for objects that are converted to mesh are derived from the Mesh Tessellation Options or the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box.
0 Applies settings from the Mesh Tessellation Options dialog box to the converted object. Applies settings from the Mesh Primitive Options dialog box to the converted object.

This setting affects mesh that is converted from a primitive 3D solid object (such as box or cone) using the MESHSMOOTH command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.)

1322 | Chapter 33 F System Variables

FACETERSMOOTHLEV
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Meshes by Conversion

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Sets the default level of smoothness for objects that are converted to mesh.
-1 or any negative number 0 1 2 3 Does not smooth the object after conversion

Does not smooth the object after conversion Applies smoothness level 1 after conversion Applies smoothness level 2 after conversion Applies smoothness level 3 after conversion

This variable sets the default level of smoothness that is applied to mesh that is created as a result of conversion from another object with the MESHSMOOTH command. The value cannot be greater than the value of SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV. Mesh objects that are created under the following circumstances are always created without smoothness, and are not affected by this system variable:

Mesh created using REVSURF, TABSURF, RULESURF, or EDGESURF Mesh created using MESHSMOOTH when the type of mesh is set to be quadrilateral or triangular (FACETERMESHTYPE)

For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh.

FACETERSMOOTHLEV | 1323

FACETRATIO
Quick Reference
See also:

Create 3D Solid Primitives

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls the aspect ratio of faceting for cylindrical and conic solids.
0 1 Creates an N by 1 mesh for cylindrical and conic solids Creates an N by M mesh for cylindrical and conic solids

A setting of 1 increases the density of the mesh to improve the quality of rendered and shaded models. The faceting is visible only in the 2D Wireframe visual style.

FACETRES
Quick Reference
See also:

Balance Mesh Density for Smooth Geometry

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5000 Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed. Valid values are from 0.01 to 10.0.

1324 | Chapter 33 F System Variables

FIELDDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Update Fields

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether fields are displayed with a gray background. The background is not plotted.
0 1 Fields are displayed with no background Fields are displayed with a gray background

FIELDEVAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Update Fields

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 31 Controls how fields are updated. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 2 Not updated Updated on open Updated on save

FIELDDISPLAY | 1325

4 8 16

Updated on plot Updated on use of ETRANSMIT Updated on regeneration

NOTE The Date field is updated by UPDATEFIELD, but it is not updated automatically based on the setting of the FIELDEVAL system variable.

FILEDIA
Quick Reference
See also:

Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes.
0 Does not display dialog boxes. You can still request a file dialog box to appear by entering a tilde (~) in response to the command's prompt. The same is true for AutoLISP and ObjectARX. Displays dialog boxes. However, if a script or AutoLISP/Ob jectARX program is active, an ordinary prompt is displayed.

1326 | Chapter 33 F System Variables

FILLETRAD
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Fillets

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects. If you use the FILLET on page 429 command to change the radius of a 2D fillet, the value of this system variable changes to match.

FILLETRAD3D
Quick Reference
See also:

Fillet a Surface Modify Edges on 3D Objects

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Stores the current fillet radius for 3D objects. Stores the default radius for 3D solid and surface fillets created with the FILLETEDGE on page 433 and SURFFILLET on page 1015 commands. If you change the radius while using the FILLETEDGE or SURFFILLET commands, the FILLETRAD system variable does not update to this new value.

FILLETRAD | 1327

FILLMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in.
0 1 Objects are not filled Objects are filled

FONTALT
Quick Reference
See also:

Substitute Fonts

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: simplex.shx Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. When a drawing file with a defined text style is opened and an alternate font is not specified, the Alternate Font dialog box is displayed.

1328 | Chapter 33 F System Variables

FONTMAP
Quick Reference
See also:

Substitute Fonts

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: acad.fmp Specifies the font mapping file to be used. A font mapping file contains one font mapping per line; the original font used in the drawing and the font to be substituted for it are separated by a semicolon (;). For example, to substitute the Times TrueType font for the Roman font, the line in the mapping file would read as follows:
romanc.shx;times.ttf

If FONTMAP does not point to a font mapping file, if the FMP file is not found, or if the font file name specified in the FMP file is not found, the font defined in the style is used. If the font in the style is not found, a font is substituted according to the substitution rules. FONTMAP only works with text created through the MTEXT command.

FRAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries Update Referenced Drawing Attachments

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Turns the display of frames on and off for all external references and raster images.

FONTMAP | 1329

The FRAME setting overrides the individual XCLIPFRAME and IMAGEFRAME settings.
0 The frame is not visible and it is not plotted. The frame temporarily reappears during selection preview or object selection. Displays and plots the frame. Displays but does not plot the frame. The individual setting varies for all underlays in the current drawing (external references and raster images have different frame settings). NOTE This value is used internally by AutoCAD for Mac.

1 2 3

FRONTZ
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a 3D Dynamic View (DVIEW)

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the front clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. The front clipping and front clip not at eye bitcodes in VIEWMODE are on. The FRONTZ value is the last front clipping plane value set current with the DVIEW command. The distance of the front clipping plane from the camera point is found by subtracting FRONTZ from the camera-to-target distance.

1330 | Chapter 33 F System Variables

FULLOPEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Open a Drawing

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the current drawing is partially open.
0 1 Indicates a partially open drawing Indicates a fully open drawing

FULLPLOTPATH
Quick Reference
See also:

Print or Plot Drawings

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the full path of the drawing file is sent to the plot spooler.
0 1 Sends the drawing file name only Sends the full path of the drawing file

FULLOPEN | 1331

1332

G System Variables

GFANG
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Specifies the angle of a gradient fill. Valid values are 0 to 360 (degrees).

GFCLR1
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "Blue"

1333

Specifies the color for a one-color gradient fill or the first color for a two-color gradient fill. Valid values include the following:

AutoCAD Color Index (ACI): integer values from 1 to 255, or a color name from the first seven colors True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" Color Books: Text from standard PANTONE color books, the DIC color guide, or RAL color sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43"

GFCLR2
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "Yellow" Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill. Valid values include the following:

1334 | Chapter 34 G System Variables

GFCLRLUM
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Controls the tint or shade level in a one-color gradient fill. A tint gradient transitions toward white and a shade gradient transitions toward black. Valid values range from 0.0 (darkest) to 1.0 (lightest).

GFCLRSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Specifies whether a gradient fill uses one color or two colors.
0 1 Two-color gradient fill One-color gradient fill

GFCLRLUM | 1335

GFNAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Linear Cylindrical Inverted cylindrical Spherical Hemispherical Curved Inverted spherical Inverted hemispherical Inverted curved

GFSHIFT
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

1336 | Chapter 34 G System Variables

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left.
0 1 Centered Shifted up and to the left

GRIDDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls the display behavior and display limits of the grid. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 Restricts the grid to the area specified by the LIMITS command Does not restrict the grid to the area specified by the LIMITS command Turns on adaptive grid display, which limits the density of the grid when zoomed out If the grid is set to adaptive display and when zoomed in, generates additional, more closely spaced grid lines in the same proportion as the intervals of the major grid lines Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS.

GRIDDISPLAY | 1337

NOTE Setting 4 is ignored unless setting 2 is specified.

GRIDMAJOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 5 Controls the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Valid values range from 1 to 100. Grid lines are displayed in any visual style.

GRIDMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off.
0 1 Turns the grid off Turns the grid on

1338 | Chapter 34 G System Variables

GRIDSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the style of grid displayed for 2D model space, Block Editor, 3D parallel projection, 3D perspective projection, and Sheet and Layout tabs. The setting is stored as an integer using the sum of the following values:
0 Displays lined grid for 2D model space, Block Editor, 3D parallel projection, 3D perspective projection, and Sheet and Layout. Displays dotted grid for 2D model space. Displays dotted grid for Block Editor. Displays dotted grid for Sheet and Layout.

1 2 4

GRIDUNIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5000,0.5000 (imperial) or 10,10 (metric) Specifies the grid spacing (X and Y) for the current viewport.

GRIDSTYLE | 1339

GRIPBLOCK
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Grips in Blocks Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the display of grips in blocks.
0 1 Assigns a grip only to the insertion point of the block Assigns grips to objects within the block

GRIPCOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Grip Modes

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 150 Controls the color of unselected grips. The valid range is 1 to 255.

1340 | Chapter 34 G System Variables

GRIPCONTOUR
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Grip Modes

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 251 Controls the color of the grip contour. The valid range is 1 to 255.

GRIPHOT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Grip Modes

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 12 Controls the color of selected grips. The valid range is 1 to 255.

GRIPHOVER
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Grip Modes Integer

Type:

GRIPCONTOUR | 1341

Saved in: Registry Initial value: 11 Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. The valid range is 1 to 255.

GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Method to Modify Objects Modify Polylines Edit Objects with Grips

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Specifies the access methods to multi-functional grips.
0 1 Access to multi-functional grips is disabled Access multi-functional grips with Ctrl-cycling and the Hot Grip shortcut menu Access multi-functional grips with the dynamic menu and the Hot Grip shortcut menu Access multi-functional grips with Ctrl-cycling, the dynamic menu, and the Hot Grip shortcut menu

1342 | Chapter 34 G System Variables

GRIPOBJLIMIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Grip Modes

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 100 Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. The valid range is 0 to 32,767. For example, when set to 1, grips are suppressed when more than one object is selected. When set to 0, grips are always displayed.

GRIPS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Grip Modes

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
0 1 2 Hides grips Displays grips Displays additional midpoint grips on polyline segments

To adjust the size of the grips and the effective selection area used by the cursor when you snap to a grip, use GRIPSIZE.

GRIPOBJLIMIT | 1343

GRIPSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Grip Modes

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 5 Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. The valid range is 1 to 255.

GRIPSUBOBJMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces Choose a Method to Modify Objects

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether grips are automatically made hot when subobjects are selected.
0 1 Does not turn the grips hot when subobjects are selected. Turns the face, edge, or vertex grips hot when subobjects of 3D objects (solid, surface, or mesh) are selected. Turns the grips hot when subobjects of 2D polyline objects (line or arc segments) are selected.

1344 | Chapter 34 G System Variables

Turns the grips hot when subobjects of 3D objects (faces, edges, or vertices) are selected 2D polyline objects (line or arc segments) are selected

Setting this system variable to 1 is especially helpful for quickly modifying groups of faces, edges, and vertices on mesh objects.

GRIPTIPS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Grip Modes Choose a Method to Modify Objects Modify Objects with Multi-Functional Grips

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. Hover your cursor over the multi-functional grips and pause to display grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips.
0 1 Hides grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. Displays grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips.

GRIPTIPS | 1345

GTAUTO
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Gizmos

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether 3D gizmos are automatically displayed when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style.
0 Gizmos are not displayed automatically when you select objects before starting a command. Gizmos are displayed automatically after you create a selection set.

This system variable affects the display of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, and 3D Scale gizmos. Gizmos were previously known as grip tools.

GTDEFAULT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Gizmos

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0

1346 | Chapter 34 G System Variables

Controls whether the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale operation starts automatically when you start the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE command in a viewport with a 3D visual style.
0 Does not automatically start the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or 3DSCALEcommands when the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE commands are started in a 3D view. Automatically starts the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or 3DSCALE commands when the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE commands are started in a 3D view.

GTLOCATION
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Gizmos

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the initial location of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style.
0 Places the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo at the same location as the UCS icon. The gizmo orientation is aligned with the current UCS. Places the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo at the geometric center of the selection set.

This system variable affects the display of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, and 3D Scale gizmos. Gizmos were previously known as grip tools.

GTLOCATION | 1347

1348

H System Variables

HALOGAP
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies a gap to be displayed where an object is hidden by another object. The value is specified as a percent of one unit and is independent of the zoom level. HALOGAP is available only in 2D views. In 3D views, the VSHALOGAP system variable is used.

HANDLES
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Command Scripts

1349

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: On Reports whether object handles can be accessed by applications. Because handles can no longer be turned off, has no effect except to preserve the integrity of scripts.

HELPPREFIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area Application Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box) on page 736

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Sets the file path for the Help system.

HIDEPRECISION
Quick Reference
See also:

Shade a Model and Use Edge Effects

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. Hides can be calculated in double precision or single precision. Setting HIDEPRECISION to 1 produces more accurate hides by using double precision,

1350 | Chapter 35 H System Variables

but this setting also uses more memory and can affect performance, especially when hiding solids.
0 1 Single precision; uses less memory Double precision; uses more memory

HIDETEXT
Quick Reference
See also:

Shade a Model and Use Edge Effects

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: On Specifies whether text objects created by the TEXT or MTEXT command are processed during a HIDE command.
Off On Text is not hidden and does not hide other objects Text is hidden but does not hide other objects

HIGHLIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1

HIDETEXT | 1351

Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips.
0 1 Turns off object selection highlighting Turns on object selection highlighting

HPANG
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the angle for new hatch patterns.

HPANNOTATIVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Scaling Annotations

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative.
0 1 Nonannotative Annotative

1352 | Chapter 35 H System Variables

HPASSOC
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether hatches and fills are associative.
0 Hatches and fills are not associated with their defining boundary objects Hatches and fills are associated with their defining boundary objects and are updated when the boundary objects change

HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: None Controls the background color for hatch patterns. Valid values include the following:

None or . for no background color AutoCAD Color Index (ACI): integer values from 1 to 255, or a color name from the first seven colors

HPASSOC | 1353

True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" Color Books: Text from standard PANTONE color books, the DIC color guide, or RAL color sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43"

HPBOUND
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY.
0 1 Creates a region Creates a polyline

A polyline or region object is created only if the HPBOUNDRETAIN system variable is turned on.

HPBOUNDRETAIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0

1354 | Chapter 35 H System Variables

Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills.
0 1 Does not create boundary objects Creates boundary objects according to the HPBOUND system variable

HPCOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: use current Sets a default color for new hatches. Valid values include the following:

. to use the current color set in the CECOLOR system variable ByLayer or ByBlock AutoCAD Color Index (ACI): integer values from 1 to 255, or a color name from the first seven colors True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" Color Books: Text from standard PANTONE color books, the DIC color guide, or RAL color sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43"

Values other than the . (use current) value override the current color (CECOLOR).

HPCOLOR | 1355

HPDLGMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 2 Controls the display of the Hatch and Gradient dialog box and the Hatch Edit dialog box.
0 Hatch and Gradient dialog box is not displayed for HATCH and GRADIENT unless Settings is entered at the Command prompt Hatch and Gradient dialog box is displayed for HATCH and GRADIENT

1 or 2

HPDOUBLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns. Doubling specifies a second set of lines drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines.
0 Turns off hatch pattern doubling

1356 | Chapter 35 H System Variables

Turns on hatch pattern doubling

HPDRAWORDER
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 3 Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. Controls whether hatch and fill objects are displayed in front or behind all other objects, or in front or behind their associated boundaries.
0 1 None. The hatch or fill is not assigned a draw order. Send to back. The hatch or fill is sent to the back of all other objects. Bring to front. The hatch or fill is brought to the front of all other objects. Send behind boundary. The hatch or fill is sent behind the hatchs boundary objects. Bring in front of boundary. The hatch or fill is brought in front of the hatchs boundary objects.

HPDRAWORDER | 1357

HPGAPTOL
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas

Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0.0000 Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects enclose the area, with no gaps. Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary.

HPINHERIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when using the Inherit Properties option in HATCH and HATCHEDIT.
0 1 The hatch origin is taken from HPORIGIN The hatch origin is taken from the source hatch object

1358 | Chapter 35 H System Variables

HPISLANDDETECTION
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated.
0 1 2 Normal. Hatches islands within islands. Outer. Hatches only areas outside of islands. Ignore. Hatches everything within the boundaries.

An island is an enclosed area within the area to be hatched.

HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected.
0 Off . On (recommended). Hatches or ignores islands according to HPISLANDDETECTION.

HPISLANDDETECTION | 1359

HPLAYER
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: use current Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. Values other than the . (use current) value override the current layer (CELAYER).

HPMAXLINES
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns

Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1000000 Sets the maximum number of hatch lines that are generated in a hatch operation. Valid values are from 100 to10,000,000.

HPNAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

1360 | Chapter 35 H System Variables

Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: ANSI31 (imperial) or ANGLE (metric) Sets the default hatch pattern name. Valid names can contain up to 34 characters without spaces. The value "" indicates that there is no default. Enter a period (.) to reset HPNAME to the default value.

HPOBJWARNING
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10000 Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before displaying a warning message. The maximum value can vary, but is significantly larger than 100000000 (one hundred million).

HPORIGIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Hatch Origin Point

Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000 Sets the hatch origin point for new hatch patterns relative to the current user coordinate system.

HPOBJWARNING | 1361

HPORIGINMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Hatch Origin Point

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined.
0 1 Uses HPORIGIN Uses the bottom-left corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundaries Uses the bottom-right corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundaries Uses the top-right corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundaries Uses the top-left corner of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundaries Uses the center of the rectangular extents of the hatch boundaries

HPQUICKPREVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill Switch

Type:

1362 | Chapter 35 H System Variables

Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls whether to display a preview when specifying internal points for a hatch.
0 or OFF 1 or ON No preview Quick preview

HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Sets the maximum duration that the hatch preview should be displayed before the preview is canceled. Duration is measured in seconds. The valid range is 1 to 300.

HPSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns

Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the hatch pattern scale factor.

HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT | 1363

HPSEPARATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Hatch and Fill Areas

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries.
0 1 A single hatch object is created Separate hatch objects are created

HPSPACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns

Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns.

1364 | Chapter 35 H System Variables

HPTRANSPARENCY
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: use current Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. Valid values include use current (or .), ByLayer, ByBlock, and integer values from 0 to 90. The higher the value, the more transparent the hatch. Values other than use current or . override the current transparency (CETRANSPARENCY on page 1198). Changing this value does not affect existing hatch objects.

HPTRANSPARENCY | 1365

1366

I System Variables

IMAGEFRAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. The FRAME system variable overrides the IMAGEFRAME setting. Use the IMAGEFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the image frame settings.
0 The image frame is not diplayed or plotted. The frame temporarily reappears during selection preview or object selection. Displays and plots the image frame. Displays but does not plot the image frame.

1 2

1367

IMAGEHLT
Quick Reference
See also:

Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the entire raster image or only the raster image frame is highlighted.
0 1 Highlights only the raster image frame Highlights the entire raster image

IMPLIEDFACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Press or Pull Bounded Areas

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the detection of implied faces.
0 1 Implied faces cannot be detected. Implied faces can be detected.

An implied face is a closed area that creates a boundary by intersecting or overlapping a face on a 3D solid object.

1368 | Chapter 36 I System Variables

This variable affects the ability to use implied faces when you press Ctrl-Shift-E and drag the area inside the boundary to create an extrusion dynamically. This variable must be set to 1 if you want to select and modify implied faces.

INETLOCATION
Quick Reference
See also:

Get Started with Internet Access

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: http://www.autodesk.com Stores the Internet location used by the BROWSER command and the Browse the Web dialog box.

INPUTHISTORYMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

The Command Line Work with Shortcut Menus

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 15 Controls the content and location of the user input history. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 No history of recent input is displayed. History of recent input is displayed at the command line or in a dynamic prompt tooltip. Access with the Up Arrow

INETLOCATION | 1369

and Down Arrow keys at the Command prompt, or at an input prompt. 2 History of recent input for the current command is displayed in the shortcut menu under Recent Input. History of recent input for all commands in the current session is displayed in the shortcut menu under Recent Input. Markers for recent input of point locations are displayed. Use the arrow keys at the Command prompt for specifying a point location.

INSBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the insertion base point set by BASE, which gets expressed as a UCS coordinate for the current space.

INSNAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks String Not-saved

Type: Saved in:

1370 | Chapter 36 I System Variables

Initial value: "" Sets a default block name for the INSERT command. The name must conform to symbol naming conventions. Returns "" if no default is set. Enter a period (.) to set no default.

INSUNITS
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 (imperial) or 4 (metric) Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing. NOTE The INSUNITS setting is ignored when inserting blocks into a drawing.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Unspecified (No units) Inches Feet Miles Millimeters Centimeters Meters Kilometers Microinches Mils

INSUNITS | 1371

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Yards Angstroms Nanometers Microns Decimeters Dekameters Hectometers Gigameters Astronomical Units Light Years Parsecs

INSUNITSDEFSOURCE
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Valid range is 0 to 20.
0 1 Unspecified (No units) Inches

1372 | Chapter 36 I System Variables

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Feet Miles Millimeters Centimeters Meters Kilometers Microinches Mils Yards Angstroms Nanometers Microns Decimeters Dekameters Hectometers Gigameters Astronomical Units Light Years Parsecs

INSUNITSDEFSOURCE | 1373

INSUNITSDEFTARGET
Quick Reference
See also:

Insert Blocks

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Valid range is 0 to 20.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Unspecified (No units) Inches Feet Miles Millimeters Centimeters Meters Kilometers Microinches Mils Yards Angstroms Nanometers Microns

1374 | Chapter 36 I System Variables

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Decimeters Dekameters Hectometers Gigameters Astronomical Units Light Years Parsecs

INTELLIGENTUPDATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 20 Controls the graphics refresh rate. The default value is 20 frames per second. If you encounter problems related to graphics generation or timing, turn off the variable by setting it to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE works by suppressing the graphics update until the timer expires. Subsequent updates reset the timer. The performance improvement significantly affects updates for scripts and AutoLISP graphics. Those using regular AutoCAD commands will not see a noticeable difference in performance.

INTELLIGENTUPDATE | 1375

INTERFERECOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Check 3D Models for Interferences

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Sets the color for interference objects. Valid values include BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, a color name, and integers from 0 to 255. Valid values for True Colors are a string of integers each from 0 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB. The True Color setting is entered as follows: RGB:000,000,000 If you have a color book installed, you can specify any colors that are defined in the book.

INTERFEREOBJVS
Quick Reference
See also:

Check 3D Models for Interferences

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Realistic Sets the visual style for interference objects. INTERFEREOBJVS can only be set to a visual style that is saved in the drawing. The visual style specified for INTERFEREOBJVS cannot be removed with the PURGE command.

1376 | Chapter 36 I System Variables

INTERFEREVPVS
Quick Reference
See also:

Check 3D Models for Interferences

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3D Wireframe Specifies the visual style for the viewport during interference checking. INTERFEREVPVS can only be set to a visual style that is saved in the drawing. The visual style specified for INTERFEREVPVS cannot be removed with the PURGE command.

INTERSECTIONCOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Controls the color of polylines at the intersection of 3D surfaces when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available. The INTERSECTIONCOLOR setting is visible only if INTERSECTIONDISPLAY is turned on and if the HIDE on page 502 command is used.

INTERFEREVPVS | 1377

INTERSECTIONDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Off Controls the display of polylines at the intersection of 3D surfaces when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe.
Off On Turns off the display of intersection polylines Turns on the display of intersection polylines

ISAVEBAK
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings. ISAVEBAK controls the creation of a backup file (BAK). In the operating system, copying the file data to create a BAK file for large drawings takes a major portion of the incremental save time.
0 1 No BAK file is created (even for a full save) A BAK file is created

1378 | Chapter 36 I System Variables

WARNING In some cases (such as a power failure in the middle of a save), it's possible that drawing data can be lost.

ISAVEPERCENT
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. The value of ISAVEPERCENT is an integer between 0 and 100. The default value of 50 means that the estimate of wasted space within the file does not exceed 50 percent of the total file size. Wasted space is eliminated by periodic full saves. When the estimate exceeds 50 percent, the next save will be a full save. This resets the wasted space estimate to 0. If ISAVEPERCENT is set to 0, every save is a full save.

ISOLINES
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Wireframe Models

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 8 Specifies the number of contour lines per surface on objects. Valid settings are integers from 0 to 2047.

ISAVEPERCENT | 1379

NOTE When you create a new drawing that is based on a template, the initial value may differ.

1380 | Chapter 36 I System Variables

L System Variables

LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls large object size limit support when you open and save drawings.
0 Use legacy object size limits from AutoCAD 2009 and prior Use object size limits

LASTANGLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Arcs

1381

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the XY plane of the current UCS for the current space.

LASTPOINT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Coordinate Entry

Type: 3D-point Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the last point specified, expressed as UCS coordinates for the current space. You can reference the last point specified by entering the @ symbol at a point prompt. This is equivalent to entering @0,0,0.

LASTPROMPT
Quick Reference
See also:

Enter Commands on the Command Line

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Stores the last string echoed to the Command prompt. This string is identical to the last line seen at the Command prompt and includes any user input.

1382 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

LATITUDE
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Units and Unit Formats

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 37.7950 Specifies the latitude of the drawing model in decimal format. The default is the latitude of San Francisco, California. The valid range is -90 to +90. Positive values represent north latitudes. This value is affected by the settings of the LUPREC system variable. This value is not affected by the settings of the AUNITS and AUPREC system variables.

LAYEREVAL
Quick Reference
See also:

LAYEREVALCTL on page 1384 LAYERNOTIFY on page 1385

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs. The setting is stored in an integer using one of the following values:
0 Off

LATITUDE | 1383

Detects when new xref layers have been added in the drawing Detects when new layers have been added in the drawing and xrefs

NOTE LAYEREVALCTL overrides the LAYEREVAL and LAYERNOTIFY setvars when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. It acts like a global off (but not a global on). There is no effect even if LAYEREVALCTL is turned on if LAYERNOTIFY = 0 or LAYEREVAL = 0. LAYEREVALCTL must be set to 1 for LAYERNOTIFY and LAYEREVAL to function correctly.

LAYEREVALCTL
Quick Reference
See also:

LAYEREVAL on page 1383 LAYERNOTIFY on page 1385

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls the overall Unreconciled New Layer filter list in Layers palette which is evaluated for new layers. This system variable also affects whether the new layer notification is displayed or not.
0 1 Disables the evaluation and notification of new layers Enables the evaluation of new layers on LAYEREVAL settings in DWG file

1384 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

LAYERMANAGERSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates whether the Layers palette is open or closed.
0 1 Closed Open

LAYERNOTIFY
Quick Reference
See also:

LAYEREVAL on page 1383 LAYERNOTIFY on page 1385

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0

LAYERMANAGERSTATE | 1385

Specifies when an alert displays when unreconciled new layers are found.
0 1 2 4 8 16 32 Off Plot Open Load/Reload/Attach for xrefs Restore layer state Save Insert

LAYLOCKFADECTL
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Controls the amount of fading for objects on locked layers. Fades the objects on locked layers to contrast them with objects on unlocked layers and reduces the visual complexity of a drawing. Objects on locked layers are still visible for reference and for object snapping.

1386 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

The range for controlling the fading for objects on locked layers is from -90 to 90.
0 >0 Locked layers are not faded When the value is positive, controls the percent of fading up to 90 percent When the value is negative, locked layers are not faded, but the value is saved for switching to that value by changing the sign

NOTE The fading value is limited to 90 percent to avoid confusion with layers that are turned off or frozen.

LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Specifies if a single viewport should be created on each new layout added to a drawing.
0 A single viewport is not automatically added to each new layout created

LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT | 1387

A single viewport is added to each new layout created

LAYOUTREGENCTL
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout tabs. For each tab, the display list is updated either by regenerating the drawing when you switch to that tab or by saving the display list to memory and regenerating only the modified objects when you switch to that tab. Changing the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting can improve performance.
0 1 The drawing is regenerated each time you switch tabs. For the Model tab and the last layout made current, the display list is saved to memory and regenerations are suppressed when you switch between the two tabs. For all other layouts, regenerations still occur when you switch to those tabs. The drawing is regenerated the first time you switch to each tab. For the remainder of the drawing session, the display list is saved to memory and regenerations are suppressed when you switch to those tabs.

The performance gain achieved by changing the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting is dependent on several factors, including the drawing size and type, the objects contained in the drawing, the amount of available memory, and the effect of other open drawings or applications. When LAYOUTREGENCTL is set to 1 or 2, the amount of additional memory used is the size of the Model tab's display list multiplied by the number of viewports in each layout for which the display list is saved.

1388 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

If LAYOUTREGENCTL is set to 1 or 2 and performance seems slow in general or when you switch between tabs for which the display list is saved, consider changing to a setting of 0 or 1 to find the optimal balance for your work environment. Regardless of the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting, if you redefine a block or undo a tab switch, the drawing is regenerated the first time you switch to any tab that contains saved viewports.

LEGACYCTRLPICK
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects Individually SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE on page 1502 Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies the keys for selection cycling and the behavior for Ctrl-click.
0 Ctrl+click is used to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices) on 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes. Ctrl+click is used to cycle through overlapping objects. Disallows using Ctrl+click to select subobjects on 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes. Ctrl+click is used to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices) on 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes when SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE on page 1502 is set to 0.If SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE is set to 1, 2, 3, or 4, it is not necessary to hold down the Ctrl key to select subobjects.If you hold down the Ctrl key when SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE is set to 1, 2, 3, or 4, the subobject filter is turned off until the Ctrl key is released.

LEGACYCTRLPICK | 1389

LENSLENGTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Camera

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 50.0000 Stores the length of the lens (in millimeters) used in perspective viewing.

LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Lights

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Turns on and off the display of light glyphs. When this system variable is set to Off, the glyphs that represent lights in the drawing are not displayed. A light glyph is a symbolic representation of a point lights and spotlights.
0 1 Off On

1390 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

LIGHTINGUNITS
Quick Reference
See also:

Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls whether generic or photometric lights are used, and specifies the lighting units for the drawing. When this system variable is set to 1 or 2, photometric lighting is enabled; otherwise standard (generic) lighting is used.
0 No lighting units are used and standard (generic) lighting is enabled. American lighting units (foot-candles) are used and photometric lighting is enabled. International lighting units (lux) are used and photometric lighting is enabled.

LIGHTSINBLOCKS
Quick Reference
See also:

Incorporate Luminaire Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether lights contained in blocks are used when rendering.

LIGHTINGUNITS | 1391

By default, this system variable is turned on in AutoCAD for Mac drawings. When this system variable is off, lights in blocks do not affect 3D objects in the current viewport when rendering. Previous versions of AutoCAD for Mac did not support rendering lights in blocks.
0 (Off) 1 (On) Lights in blocks are disabled Lights in blocks are enabled

LIMCHECK
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the creation of objects outside the grid limits.
0 1 Objects can be created outside the limits Objects cannot be created outside the limits

LIMMAX
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 12.0000,9.0000 (imperial) or 420.0000,297.0000 (metric)

1392 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

Stores the upper-right grid limits for the current space, expressed as world coordinates. LIMMAX is read-only when paper space is active and the paper background or printable area is displayed.

LIMMIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000 Stores the lower-left grid limits for the current space, expressed as a world coordinate. LIMMIN is read-only when paper space is active and the paper background or printable area is displayed.

LINEARBRIGHTNESS
Quick Reference
See also:

Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. Controls the brightness level of the viewport when standard lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0). Valid settings are integers from -10 to 10. The brightness level in photometric lighting can be controlled by the LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS systems variable.

LIMMIN | 1393

LINEARCONTRAST
Quick Reference
See also:

Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. Controls the contrast level of the viewport when standard lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0). Valid settings are integers from -10 to 10. The contrast level in photometric lighting can be controlled by LOGEXPCONTRAST.

LOCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Search Paths and File Locations Organize Program and Support Files

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies by country/region Displays a code that indicates the current locale. This code appears as a three-letter abbreviation returned by the operating system.

1394 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

LOCALROOTPREFIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of File Organization

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed. The Template and Textures folders are in this location, and you can add any customizable files that you do not want to roam on the network. See ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX on page 1473 for the location of the roamable files.

LOFTANG1
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting.

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 90 Sets the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation. The 0 direction is measured outward from the curve on the plane of the curve. The positive direction is measured toward the next cross section. Valid values include 0 to less than 360.

LOCALROOTPREFIX | 1395

LOFTANG2
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting.

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 90 Sets the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation. The 0 direction is measured outward from the curve on the plane of the curve. The positive direction is measured toward the previous cross section. Valid values include 0 to less than 360.

LOFTMAG1
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting.

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation. Controls how soon the surface starts bending back toward the next cross section.

1396 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

LOFTMAG2
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting.

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation. Controls how soon the surface starts bending back toward the next cross section.

LOFTNORMALS
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting.

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the normals of a lofted object where it passes through cross sections. This setting is ignored when specifying a path or guide curves.
0 1 2 3 Ruled Smooth Fit Start cross section End cross section

LOFTMAG2 | 1397

4 5 6

Start and End cross sections All cross sections Use draft angle and magnitude

LOFTPARAM
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 7 Controls the shape of lofted solids and surfaces. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
1 2 No twist (minimizes the twist between cross sections) Align direction (aligns the start to end direction of each cross section curve) Simplify (produces simple solids and surfaces, such as a cylinder or plane, instead of spline solids and surfaces) Close (closes the surface or solid between the first and the last cross sections)

1398 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS
Quick Reference
See also:

Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 65.0 Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. Controls the brightness level of the viweport when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS on page 1391 system variable is set to 1 or 2). Valid range is from 0.0 to 200.0. The brightness level in standard lighting can be controlled by the LINEARBRIGHTNESS on page 1393 systems variable.

LOGEXPCONTRAST
Quick Reference
See also:

Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 50.0 Controls the contrast level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. Controls the contrast level of the viewport when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS on page 1391 system variable is set to 1 or 2). Valid range is from 0.0 to 100.0. The contrast level in standard lighting can be controlled by the LINEARCONTRAST on page 1394 systems variable.

LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS | 1399

LOGEXPDAYLIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Controls if the exterior daylight flag is enabled when using photometric lighting. When this system variable is off, exterior daylight is turned off when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS on page 1391 system variable is set to 1 or 2). When on, the exposure control algorithm in the rendering acts as if there is an extremely bright light source in the scene. Therefore, the default setting of Auto is tied directly to the sun setting. Under special circumstances, it may be desirable to manually set this variable due to extremely bright artificial light sources or, conversely, due to a sun-lit scene that it is illuminated only by a small amount of directly visible sunlight.
0 1 2 Off On Auto, current sun status is used

LOGEXPMIDTONES
Quick Reference
See also:

Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0

1400 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

Controls the mid tones level of the viewport when using photometric lighting. Controls the mid tones level of the viewport when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS on page 1391 system variable is set to 1 or 2). Valid range from 0.01 to 20.0.

LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1500.0000 Controls the relative brightness of self-illuminated materials in a photometric environment. This global scale factor is used to adjust the relative brightness of self-illuminated materials in a photometric environment. Valid values range from 0.001 to 200000.

LOGFILEMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Specifies whether the contents of the command history are written to a log file.
0 Log file is not maintained

LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE | 1401

Log file is maintained

LOGFILENAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current drawing. The initial value varies depending on the name of the current drawing and the installation folder.

LOGFILEPATH
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a session. You can also specify the path by using the OPTIONS command. The initial value is based on the installation folder.

1402 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

LOGINNAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Open a Drawing

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Displays the current users login name and is saved with the file properties statistics of DWG and related files.

LONGITUDE
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Units and Unit Formats

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -122.3940 Specifies the longitude of the drawing model in decimal format. The default is the longitude of San Francisco, California. The valid range is -180 to +180. Positive values represent east longitudes. This value is affected by the settings of the LUPREC system variable. This value is not affected by the settings of the AUNITS and AUPREC system variables.

LOGINNAME | 1403

LTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control Linetype Scale

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the global linetype scale factor. The linetype scale factor cannot equal zero. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.

LUNITS
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Unit Format Conventions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets linear units.
1 2 3 4 5 Scientific Decimal Engineering Architectural Fractional

1404 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

LUPREC
Quick Reference
See also:

Set the Unit Format Conventions

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 4 Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates. However, the internal precision of distance, area, and volume values, and linear coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision. LUPREC does not affect the display precision of dimension text (see DIMSTYLE on page 306). Valid values are integers from 0 to 8.

LWDEFAULT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Lineweights

Type: Enum Saved in: Registry Initial value: 25 Sets the value for the default lineweight. The default lineweight can be set to any valid lineweight value in hundredths of millimeters, including: 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, and 211. All values must be entered in hundredths of millimeters. (Multiply a value by 2540 to convert values from inches to hundredths of millimeters.)

LUPREC | 1405

LWDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Lineweights

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: OFF Controls whether the lineweights of objects are displayed. This setting is controlled separately for model space and for all paper space layouts.
OFF ON Lineweights are not displayed Lineweights are displayed

LWUNITS
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Lineweights

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches or millimeters.
0 1 Inches Millimeters

1406 | Chapter 37 L System Variables

M System Variables

MATBROWSERSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Browse Material Libraries

Type: Switch Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Controls the state of the Materials Browser.
0 1 Materials Browser is closed. Materials Browser is open.

MAXACTVP
Quick Reference
See also:

Turn Layout Viewports On or Off Integer

Type:

1407

Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 64 Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout. MAXACTVP has no effect on the number of viewports that are plotted.

MAXSORT
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Blocks

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1000 Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing commands. If the total number of items exceeds this value, no items are sorted. The value of MAXSORT is an integer between 0 and 32767.

MBUTTONPAN
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the behavior of the third button or wheel on the pointing device.
0 Supports the action defined in the customization file

1408 | Chapter 38 M System Variables

Supports panning when you hold and drag the button or wheel

MEASUREINIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Starting a New Drawing

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies by country/region Controls whether a drawing you start from scratch uses imperial or metric default settings. Specifically, MEASUREINIT controls which hatch pattern and linetype files are used. The Drawing1.dwg that opens when you start the program is a drawing that is started from scratch.
0 Imperial; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file designated by the ANSIHatch and ANSILinetype registry settings Metric; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file designated by the ISOHatch and ISOLinetype registry settings

MEASUREMENT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Starting a New Drawing Integer Drawing

Type: Saved in:

MEASUREINIT | 1409

Initial value: 0 (imperial) or 1 (metric) Controls whether the current drawing uses imperial or metric hatch pattern and linetype files.
0 Imperial; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file designated by the ANSIHatch and ANSILinetype registry settings Metric; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file designated by the ISOHatch and ISOLinetype registry settings

MENUECHO
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Macros

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Sets menu echo and prompt control bits. The value is the sum of the following:
1 Suppresses echo of menu items (^P in a menu item toggles echoing) Suppresses display of system prompts during menu Disables ^P toggle of menu echoing Displays input/output strings; debugging aid for DIESEL macros

2 4 8

1410 | Chapter 38 M System Variables

MENUNAME
Quick Reference
See also:

User Interface Customization

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: customization_file_name Stores the customization file name, including the path for the file name.

MESHTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Construct Meshes from Other Objects

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the type of mesh that is created by REVSURF, TABSURF, RULESURF and EDGESURF.
0 Creates legacy polygon or polyface mesh when you use REVSURF on page 898, TABSURF on page 1035, RULESURF on page 906, or EDGESURF on page 396 Creates full-featured mesh objects when you use REVSURF, TABSURF, RULESURF, or EDGESURF (recommended)

This option does not affect mesh created using the 3DMESH and PFACE commands.

MENUNAME | 1411

MIRRHATCH
Quick Reference
See also:

Mirror Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
0 1 Retains hatch pattern direction Mirrors the hatch pattern direction

MIRRTEXT
Quick Reference
See also:

Mirror Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how MIRROR reflects text.
0 1 Retains text direction Mirrors the text

1412 | Chapter 38 M System Variables

MLEADERSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Leaders

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000 Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. Use DIMSCALE to scale leader objects created with the LEADER command.
0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space. If you are in paper space or model space and not using the paper space feature, the scale factor is 1.0. A scale factor is computed that leads text sizes, arrowhead sizes, and other scaled distances to plot at their face values.

MLEADERSCALE does not affect measured lengths, coordinates, or angles. When MLEADERSCALE is set to 0, and the current multileader style is not , the overall multileader scale of multileader objects created in paper space viewports is determined by the viewport scale. When the current multileader style is annotative, the MLEADERSCALE value is set to 0. Changes to the MLEADERSCALE value are ignored and the value is reset to 0.

MSLTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Annotative Objects Integer

Type:

MLEADERSCALE | 1413

Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the
0 Linetypes displayed on the Model tab are not scaled by the annotation scale Linetypes displayed on the Model tab are scaled by the annotation scale

NOTE MSLTSCALE is set to 0 when you open drawings created in AutoCAD 2007 and earlier.

MTEXTCOLUMN
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Edit Columns in Multiline Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Sets the default column setting for an mtext object.
0 1 2 No column. Dynamic columns with auto height. Dynamic column with manual height.

1414 | Chapter 38 M System Variables

MTEXTFIXED
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Sets the display size and orientation of multiline text in a specified text editor.
0 or 1 Displays the In-Place Text Editor and the text within it at the size, position, and rotation of the multiline text object in the drawing. Displays the In-Place Text Editor and the text within it at the size, position, and rotation of the multiline text object in the drawing. Text that would otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily read and edit it.

MTJIGSTRING
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Multiline Text

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: "abc" Sets the content of the sample text displayed at the cursor location when the MTEXT command is started.

MTEXTFIXED | 1415

The text string is displayed in the current text size and font. You can enter any string of up to ten letters or numbers or enter a period (.) to display no sample text.

MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Search Paths and File Locations

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the full path to the Documents folder for the user currently logged on.

1416 | Chapter 38 M System Variables

N System Variables

NAVVCUBEDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Use ViewCube

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Controls the display of the ViewCube tool in the current visual style and the current viewport.
0 1 ViewCube is not displayed in 2D and 3D visual styles ViewCube is displayed in 3D visual styles, but not in 2D visual styles ViewCube is displayed in 2D visual styles, but not in 3D visual styles ViewCube is displayed in both 2D and 3D visual styles

1417

NAVVCUBELOCATION
Quick Reference
See also:

Use ViewCube

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed.
0 1 2 3 Upper-right Upper-left Lower-left Lower-right

NAVVCUBEOPACITY
Quick Reference
See also:

Use ViewCube

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 50 Controls the opacity of the ViewCube tool when inactive. Valid values are from 0 to 100 percent. When set to 100, the ViewCube appears fully opaque against the drawing window and obscures all objects under it in the viewport. When set to less than 100, the ViewCube fades into the drawing window, which results in the objects under it to appear less obscured. If set to 0, the ViewCube is not displayed in the viewport unless the cursor is positioned over top of the ViewCubes location.

1418 | Chapter 39 N System Variables

NAVVCUBEORIENT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use ViewCube

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the ViewCube tool reflects the current UCS or WCS.
0 1 ViewCube is oriented to reflect WCS ViewCube is oriented to reflect the current UCS

NAVVCUBESIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use ViewCube

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 4 Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool.
0 1 2 3 Small Normal Large Tiny

NAVVCUBEORIENT | 1419

Automatic; the size of the ViewCube tool is scaled up or down based on the size of the active viewport, zoom factor of the active layout, or drawing window

NOMUTT
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

Type: Short Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Suppresses the message display (muttering) when it wouldn't normally be suppressed. Displaying messages is the normal mode, but message display is suppressed during scripts, AutoLISP routines, and so on.
0 1 Resumes normal muttering behavior Suppresses muttering indefinitely

NORTHDIRECTION
Quick Reference
See also:

Guidelines for Lighting

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Specifies the angle of the sun from north.

1420 | Chapter 39 N System Variables

This value is affected by the settings of the AUNITS and AUPREC system variables. NOTE The angle is interpreted in the context of the world coordinate system (WCS). This value is completely separate from surveyor angular units, which are always set relative to the current UCS.

NORTHDIRECTION | 1421

1422

O System Variables

OBJECTISOLATIONMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Controls whether hidden objects remain hidden between drawing sessions. OJBECTISOLATIONMODE controls whether objects that are hidden using the ISOLATEOBJECTS on page 530 or HIDEOBJECTS on page 503 command remain hidden after saving and reopening the drawing.
0 Isolated/hidden objects are temporary for current drawing session Isolated/hidden objects persist between drawing sessions

1423

OBSCUREDCOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 257 Specifies the color of obscured lines. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI). An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by changing its color and linetype. OBSCUREDCOLOR is available only in 2D views. In 3D views, the VSOBSCUREDCOLOR system variable is used. The OBSCUREDCOLOR setting is visible only if the OBSCUREDLTYPE system variable is turned on by setting it to a value other than 0.

OBSCUREDLTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Specifies the linetype of obscured lines. An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by changing its color and linetype. OBSCUREDLTYPE is available only in 2D views. In 3D views, the VSOBSCUREDLTYPE system variable is used.

1424 | Chapter 40 O System Variables

Obscured linetypes are independent of zoom level, unlike regular linetypes. The linetype values are defined as follows:
0 1 Off Solid

Dashed

Dotted

Short Dash

Medium Dash

Long Dash

Double Short Dash

Double Medium Dash

Double Long Dash

Medium Long Dash

Sparse Dot

OBSCUREDLTYPE | 1425

OFFSETDIST
Quick Reference
See also:

Offset an Object

Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: -1.0000 Sets the default offset distance.
<0 0 Offsets an object through a specified point Sets the default offset distance

OFFSETGAPTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Offset an Object

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls how potential gaps between segments are treated when polylines are offset.
0 1 Fills the gaps by extending the polyline segments Fills the gaps with filleted arc segments (the radius of each arc segment is equal to the offset distance) Fills the gaps with chamfered line segments (the perpendicular distance is equal to the offset distance)

1426 | Chapter 40 O System Variables

OPMSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Display and Change the Properties of Objects

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the Properties Inspector palette is open or closed.
0 1 Closed Open

ORTHOMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode)

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Constrains cursor movement to the perpendicular. When ORTHOMODE is turned on, the cursor can move only horizontally or vertically relative to the UCS and the current grid rotation angle
0 1 Turns off Ortho mode Turns on Ortho mode

OPMSTATE | 1427

OSMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Object Snaps

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 4133 Sets running object snaps The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 NONe ENDpoint MIDpoint CENter NODe QUAdrant INTersection INSertion PERpendicular TANgent NEArest Clears all object snaps APParent Intersection EXTension

1428 | Chapter 40 O System Variables

8192

PARallel

To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum of their values. For example, entering 3 specifies the Endpoint (bitcode 1) and Midpoint (bitcode 2) object snaps. Entering 16383 specifies all object snaps. When object snaps are switched off using the Osnap button on the status bar, a bitcode of 16384 (0x4000) is returned, in addition to the normal value of OSMODE. With this additional value, developers can distinguish this mode from Object Snap modes that have been turned off from within the Drafting Settings dialog box. Setting this bit toggles running object snaps off. Setting OSMODE to a value with this bit off toggles running object snaps on.

OSNAPCOORD
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls whether coordinates entered on the command line will override running object snaps.
0 Running object snap settings override keyboard coordinate entry Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings except in scripts

1 2

OSNAPCOORD | 1429

OSNAPNODELEGACY
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Multiline Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the Node object snap can be used to snap to multiline text objects. The number and location of nodes on a multiline text object snap depends on the vertical and horizontal justification of the multiline text object.
0 1 Node object snap can be used with multiline text objects Node object snap ignores multiline text objects

OSNAPZ
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Object Snaps

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls whether object snaps are automatically projected onto a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS at the current elevation.
0 1 Osnap uses the Z-value of the specified point Osnap substitutes the Z-value of the specified point with the elevation (ELEV on page 397) set for the current UCS

1430 | Chapter 40 O System Variables

OSOPTIONS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Object Snaps

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Automatically suppresses object snaps on hatch objects and geometry with negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS. Automatically suppresses object snaps on hatch objects. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 Object snaps operate on hatch objects, and on geometry with negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS Object snaps ignore hatch objects Object snaps ignore geometry with negative Z values during use of a dynamic UCS

1 2

OSOPTIONS | 1431

1432

P System Variables

PALETTEICONSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify the Behavior of Palettes

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Indicates whether palettes are in icon state.
0 1 Palettes are expanded, not as icons Palettes are collapsed as icons and displayed along the left side of the screen Palettes are collapsed as icons and displayed along the right side of the screen

1433

PAPERUPDATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Paper Size

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file.
0 Displays a warning dialog box if the paper size specified in the layout is not supported by the plotter Sets paper size to the configured paper size of the plotter configuration file

PARAMETERCOPYMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Apply Dimensional Constraints

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls how constraints and referenced user parameters are handled when constrained objects are copied between drawings, Model space and layouts, and block definitions. Parameters and their values apply to the current space only. Model space, individual paper space layouts, and various block definitions in the block editor cannot access each other's parameters. Several commands, including PASTECLIP on page 767 and EXPLODE on page 403, can introduce dimensional

1434 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

constraints and constraint parameters into an environment where referenced user parameters are no longer accessible or are in conflict. The PARAMETERCOPYMODE system variable provides several options for handling these situations.
0 Do not copy any dimensional constraints or constraint parameters. Constraints are removed from copied objects. Copy dimensional constraints and constraint parameters. Always replace expressions with numerical constants. Rename dimensional parameters if there is a naming conflict. Copy dimensional constraints, constraint parameters, and user parameters. Reference existing user parameters when available, otherwise replace expressions with numerical constants. Copy dimensional constraints, constraint parameters, and user parameters. Reference existing user parameters when available, otherwise create any missing user parameters. Change missing referenced dimensional constraints into user parameters. Copy all dimensional constraints, constraint parameters, and expressions. Rename the parameters of copied objects if conflicts in value occurs for copied parameters.

PARAMETERCOPYMODE | 1435

PDMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Divide an Object into Equal Segments

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how point objects are displayed. For information about values to enter, see the POINT on page 813 command.

PDSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Divide an Object into Equal Segments

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the display size for point objects.
0 >0 <0 Creates a point at 5 percent of the drawing area height Specifies an absolute size Specifies a percentage of the viewport size

1436 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

PEDITACCEPT
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Polylines

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Suppresses display of the Object Selected Is Not a Polyline prompt in PEDIT. The prompt is followed by Do you want it to turn into one? Entering y converts the selected object to a polyline. When the prompt is suppressed, the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline.
0 1 The prompt is displayed The prompt is suppressed

PELLIPSE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Ellipses

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the ellipse type created with ELLIPSE.
0 1 Creates a true ellipse object. Creates a polyline representation of an ellipse

PEDITACCEPT | 1437

PERIMETER
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA or LIST command. Also stores perimeter values computed by DBLIST

PERSPECTIVE
Quick Reference
See also:

Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW)

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Specifies whether the current viewport displays a perspective view.
0 1 Perspective view turned off Perspective view turned on

Perspective views are available only in model space, and only with 3D visual styles. NOTE PERSPECTIVE is set to 0 when the drawing file or DXF file is saved to a file format earlier than AutoCAD 2007.

1438 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

PERSPECTIVECLIP
Quick Reference
See also:

Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW)

Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 5.0000 Determines the location of eyepoint clipping. The value determines where the eye point clipping occurs as a percentage. Values can range between 0.01 and 10.0. If you select a small value, the z-values of objects will be compressed at the target view and beyond. If you select a value such as 0.5%, the clipping will appear very close to the eyepoint of the view. In some extreme cases it might be appropriate to use 0.1%, but it is recommended to change the setting to a higher value such as 5%.

PFACEVMAX
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Custom Mesh (Legacy)

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 4 Sets the maximum number of vertices per face. This system variable affects only legacy polyface meshes such as those created by PFACE.

PERSPECTIVECLIP | 1439

PICKADD
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Multiple Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 2 Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it.
0 Turns off PICKADD. The objects and subobjects most recently selected become the selection set. Previously selected objects and subobjects are removed from the selection set. Add more objects or subobjects to the selection set by pressing SHIFT while selecting. Turns on PICKADD. Each object and subobject selected, either individually or by windowing, is added to the current selection set. To remove objects or subobjects from the set, press SHIFT while selecting. Turns on PICKADD. Each object and subobject selected, either individually or by windowing, is added to the current selection set. To remove objects or subobjects from the set, press SHIFT while selecting. Keeps objects selected after the SELECT on page 934 command ends.

PICKAUTO
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Multiple Objects

1440 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt.
0 1 Turns off PICKAUTO. Draws a selection window (for either a window or a crossing selection) automatically at the Select Objects prompt

PICKBOX
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects Individually

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. NOTE When PICKBOX is set to 0, selection previewing of objects is not available.

PICKDRAG
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Multiple Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0

PICKBOX | 1441

Controls the method of drawing a selection window.

0 Draws the selection window using two points. Click the pointing device at one corner, and then click to select another corner. Draws the selection window using dragging. Click one corner and drag the pointing device; release the button at the other corner.

PICKFIRST
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command.
0 Turns off PICKFIRST; you select objects after you issue a command Turns on PICKFIRST; you select objects before you issue a command

PICKSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects in Groups

1442 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.
0 1 2 3 No group selection or associative hatch selection Group selection Associative hatch selection Group selection and associative hatch selection

PLATFORM
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates which platform is in use.

PLINECONVERTMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Splines

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0

PLATFORM | 1443

Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.

0 1 Polylines are created with linear segments Polylines are created with arc segments

PLINEGEN
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. Does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.
0 Generates polylines to start and end with a dash at each vertex Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the polyline

PLINETYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Polylines

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2

1444 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used. PLINETYPE controls both the creation of new polylines with the PLINE command and the conversion of existing polylines in drawings from previous releases.
0 Polylines in older drawings are not converted when opened; PLINE creates old-format polylines Polylines in older drawings are not converted when opened; PLINE creates optimized polylines Polylines in AutoCAD Release 14 or older drawings are converted when opened; PLINE creates optimized polylines

For more information on the two formats, see the CONVERT command. PLINETYPE also controls the polyline type created with the following commands: BOUNDARY (when object type is set to Polyline), DONUT, PEDIT (when selecting a line or arc), POLYGON, and SKETCH (when SKPOLY is set to 1).

PLINEWID
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Polylines

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the default polyline width.

PLINEWID | 1445

PLOTOFFSET
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust the Plot Offset of a Layout

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the plot offset is relative to the printable area or to the edge of the paper.
0 1 Sets the plot offset relative to the printable area. Sets the plot offset relative to the edge of the paper

PLOTROTMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Select a Printer or Plotter

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Controls the orientation of plots.
0 Rotates the effective plotting area so the corner with the Rotation icon aligns with the paper at the lower left for 0, top left for 90, top right for 180, and lower right for 270. X and Y origin offsets are calculated relative to the lowerleft corner. Aligns the lower-left corner of the effective plotting area with the lower-left corner of the paper.

1446 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

Works the same as 0 value except that the X and Y origin offsets are calculated relative to the rotated origin position.

PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Object Properties

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1 Controls whether object transparency is plotted.
0 1 Does not plot object transparency Uses the setting specified in the Page Setup or the Plot dialog boxes Plots object transparency

Setting the PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE system variable to 0 or 2 overrides the Print Transparency option in the Page Setup dialog box. WARNING Because this system variable can affect global plot performance, it is strongly advised that you leave the value set to 1 and manage plot transparency when plotting.

PLQUIET
Quick Reference
See also:

Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line

PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE | 1447

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the display of optional plot-related dialog boxes and nonfatal errors for scripts.
0 1 Displays plot dialog boxes and nonfatal errors Logs nonfatal errors and doesn't display plot-related dialog boxes

POLARADDANG
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: "" Stores additional angles for polar tracking and polar snap. You can add up to 10 angles. Each angle can be separated with semicolons (;). The AUNITS system variable sets the format for display of angles.Unlike POLARANG, POLARADDANG angles do not result in multiples of their values. The bit value for the POLARMODE system variable must have 4 turned on for POLARADDANG to have an effect. When using fractions of an angle, set the AUPREC system variable (angular precision) to a higher value. Otherwise, the POLARADDANG value will be rounded off.

1448 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

POLARANG
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap

Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 90 Sets the polar angle increment. Values are 90, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15,10, and 5.

POLARDIST
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap

Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the snap increment when the SNAPTYPE is set to 1 (PolarSnap).

POLARMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap Integer Registry

Type: Saved in:

POLARANG | 1449

Initial value: 0 Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: Polar angle measurements
0 1 Measure polar angles based on current UCS (absolute) Measure polar angles from selected objects (relative)

Object snap tracking

0 2 Track orthogonally only Use polar tracking settings in object snap tracking

Use additional polar tracking angles

0 4 No Yes

Acquire object snap tracking points

0 8 Acquire automatically Press SHIFT to acquire

NOTE In a 3D view, a tracking vector parallel to the Z axis of the UCS is also displayed, and the tooltip displays +Z and -Z for the angle depending on the direction along the Z axis.

POLYSIDES
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Rectangles and Polygons

1450 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 4 Sets the default number of sides for the POLYGON command. The range is 3 to 1024.

POPUPS
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Displays the status of the currently configured display driver.
0 1 Does not support dialog boxes and the menu bar Supports these features

PREVIEWEFFECT
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects.
0 Dashed lines (the default display for selected objects)

POPUPS | 1451

1 2

Thickened lines Dashed and thickened lines

PREVIEWFACEEFFECT
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of face subobjects.
0 1 No highlight effect for face Highlight face with texture fill

PREVIEWFILTER
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 7 Excludes specified object types from selection previewing. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 Excludes nothing

1452 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

1 2 4 8 16 32

Excludes objects on locked layers Excludes objects in xrefs Excludes tables Excludes multiline text objects Excludes hatch objects Excludes objects in groups

PRODUCT
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "AutoCAD" Returns the product name.

PROGRAM
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "acad"

PRODUCT | 1453

Returns the program name.

PROJMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Trim or Extend Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Sets the current Projection mode for trimming or extending.
0 1 2 True 3D mode (no projection) Project to the XY plane of the current UCS Project to the current view plane

PROXYGRAPHICS
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Custom and Proxy Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies whether images of proxy objects are saved in the drawing.
0 Does not save image with the drawing; a bounding box is displayed instead Saves image with the drawing

1454 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

PROXYNOTICE
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Custom and Proxy Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays a notice when a proxy is created. A proxy is created when you open a drawing containing custom objects created by an application that is not present. A proxy is also created when you issue a command that unloads a custom object's parent application.
0 1 No proxy warning is displayed Proxy warning is displayed

PROXYSHOW
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Custom and Proxy Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of proxy objects in a drawing.
0 1 Proxy objects are not displayed

Graphic images are displayed for all proxy objects

PROXYNOTICE | 1455

Only the bounding box is displayed for all proxy objects

PROXYWEBSEARCH
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Custom and Proxy Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Specifies how the program checks for object enablers. Object enablers allow you to display and use custom objects in drawings even when the ObjectARX application that created them is unavailable.
0 1 Prevents checking for object enablers Checks for object enablers only if a live Internet connection is present

PSLTSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Scale Linetypes in Layout Viewports

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1

1456 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

Controls the linetype scaling of objects displayed in paper space viewports.

0 No special linetype scaling. Linetype dash lengths are based on the drawing units of the space (model or paper) in which the objects were created. Scaled by the global LTSCALE factor. Viewport scaling governs linetype scaling. If TILEMODE is set to 0, dash lengths are based on paper space drawing units, even for objects in model space. In this mode, viewports can have varying magnifications, yet display linetypes identically. For a specific linetype, the dash lengths of a line in a viewport are the same as the dash lengths of a line in paper space. You can still control the dash lengths with LTSCALE

When you change PSLTSCALE or use a command such as ZOOM with PSLTSCALE set to 1, objects in viewports are not automatically regenerated with the new linetype scale. Use the REGEN or REGENALL command to update the linetype scales in each viewport.

PSOLHEIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Polysolid

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 4.0000 (imperial) or 80.0000 (metric) Controls the default height for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command. The value reflects the last entered height value when using the POLYSOLID on page 822 command. You cannot enter 0 as the value.

PSOLHEIGHT | 1457

PSOLWIDTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Create a Polysolid

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.2500 (imperial) or 5.0000 (metric) Controls the default width for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command. The value reflects the last entered height value when using the POLYSOLID on page 822 command. You cannot enter 0 as the value.

PSTYLEMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plot Styles

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the current drawing is in a Color-Dependent or Named Plot Style mode.
0 1 Uses named plot style tables in the current drawing Uses color-dependent plot style tables in the current drawing

1458 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

PSTYLEPOLICY
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Plot Styles

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the plot style mode, Color-Dependent or Named, that is used when opening a drawing that was created in a release prior to AutoCAD 2000 or when creating a new drawing from scratch without using a drawing template.
0 Drawing is set to use named plot styles. The plot style for new objects is set to the default defined in DEFPLSTYLE. The plot style for new layers is set to the default defined in DEFLPLSTYLE. Drawing is set to use color-dependent plot styles. The plot style for an object is based on the objects color.

PSVPSCALE
Quick Reference
See also:

Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the view scale factor for all newly created viewports. The view scale factor is defined by comparing the ratio of units in paper space to the units in newly created model space viewports. The view scale factor you set is used with the VPORTS command. A value of 0 means the scale factor is Scaled to Fit. A scale must be a positive real value.

PSTYLEPOLICY | 1459

PUCSBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the User Coordinate System (UCS) in 2D

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of orthographic UCS settings in paper space only.

1460 | Chapter 41 P System Variables

Q System Variables

QTEXTMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how text is displayed.
0 1 Turns off Quick Text mode; displays characters Turns on Quick Text mode; displays a box in place of text

1461

1462

R System Variables

RASTERDPI
Quick Reference
See also:

Plot Files to Other Formats

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 300 Controls paper size and plot scaling when changing from dimensional to dimensionless output devices, or vice versa. Converts millimeters or inches to pixels, or vice versa. Accepts an integer between 100 and 32,767 as a valid value.

RASTERPERCENT
Quick Reference
See also:

Plot Files to Other Formats Integer Registry

Type: Saved in:

1463

Initial value: 20 Sets the maximum percentage of available virtual memory that is allowed for plotting a raster image.

RASTERPREVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
0 1 No preview image is created Preview image created

RASTERTHRESHOLD
Quick Reference
See also:

Plot Files to Other Formats

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 20 Specifies a raster threshold in megabytes. If the plotted raster image exceeds this threshold, the availability of system memory is checked. The plot is aborted if the image is too big for the available memory.

1464 | Chapter 43 R System Variables

REBUILD2DCV
Quick Reference
See also:

CVREBUILD on page 234 Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 6 Sets the number of control vertices when rebuilding a spline. Valid values are from 2 to 32767.

REBUILD2DDEGREE
Quick Reference
See also:

CVREBUILD on page 234 Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the global degree when rebuilding a spline. Valid values are 1 to 11.

REBUILD2DCV | 1465

A curve with a degree of 1 is a straight line and a curve with a degree of 2 has one bend. A Bezier curve has a degree of 3. Higher degrees create more complex curves, but require computations.

REBUILD2DOPTION
Quick Reference
See also:

CVREBUILD on page 234 Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether to delete the original curve when rebuilding a spline.
0 1 Retains original curve Deletes original curve

1466 | Chapter 43 R System Variables

REBUILDDEGREEU
Quick Reference
See also:

CVREBUILD on page 234 Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the degree in the U direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Valid values are 2to 11.

REBUILDDEGREEV
Quick Reference
See also:

CVREBUILD on page 234 Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Sets the degree in the V direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Valid values are 2 to 11.

REBUILDDEGREEU | 1467

REBUILDOPTIONS
Quick Reference
See also:

CVREBUILD on page 234 Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls deletion and trimming options when rebuilding a NURBS surface.
Value 0 When you use CVREBUILD: The original surface is not deleted and trimmed areas are not applied to the rebuilt object. The original surface is deleted and trimmed areas are not applied to the rebuilt object. The original surface is not deleted and trimmed areas are applied to the rebuilt object. The original surface is deleted and trimmed areas are applied to the rebuilt object.

REBUILDU
Quick Reference
See also:

CVREBUILD on page 234 Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves Integer

Type:

1468 | Chapter 43 R System Variables

Saved in: Registry Initial value: 6 Sets the number of grid lines in the U direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Enter a value from 2 to 32767 to increase or decrease the number of U direction grid lines used to rebuild the ASM solid or surface.

REBUILDV
Quick Reference
See also:

CVREBUILD on page 234 Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 6 Sets the number of grid lines in the V direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Valid values are 2 to 32767 to increase or decrease the number of V direction grid lines used to rebuild the ASM solid or surface.

RECOVERAUTO
Quick Reference
See also:

Repair a Damaged Drawing File

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0

REBUILDV | 1469

Controls the display of recovery notifications before or after opening a damaged drawing file.
0 Displays a task dialog to recover damaged files while opening a drawing that needs recovery. The task dialog interrupts any running scripts. Automatically recovers the damaged files, opens the drawing, and displays a task dialog with the information of the recovered files. If a script is running, the task dialog is suppressed. Automatically recovers the damaged files and opens the drawing without displaying any task dialog. The information of the recovered files is displayed at the command prompt.

REGENMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls automatic regeneration of the drawing.
0 0 Turns off the REGENAUTO command Prevents automatic regeneration for commands such as DRAWORDER Turns on the REGENAUTO command Allows automatic regeneration for certain commands

1 1

1470 | Chapter 43 R System Variables

REMEMBERFOLDERS
Quick Reference
See also:

Open a Drawing

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the default path displayed in standard file selection dialog boxes.
0 Restores the behavior of AutoCAD 2000 and previous releases. When you start the program by double-clicking a shortcut icon, if a Start In path is specified in the icon properties, that path is used as the default for all standard file selection dialog boxes. The default path in each standard file selection dialog box is the last path used in that dialog box. The Start In folder specified for the AutoCAD shortcut icon is not used.

RENDERUSERLIGHTS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Render Settings Palette

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether to override the setting for viewport lighting during rendering.

REMEMBERFOLDERS | 1471

Provides a way of overriding the DEFAULTLIGHTING system variable for rendering while retaining the setting for working in a viewport.
0 The current lights in the viewport are used in the rendered scene, either default lights or user lights, as specified by the DEFAULTLIGHTING system variable. Overrides the setting for the DEFAULTLIGHTING system variable. Only user lights are rendered.

REPORTERROR
Quick Reference
See also:

Recover from a System Failure

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether an error report can be sent to Autodesk if the program closes unexpectedly. Error reports help Autodesk diagnose problems with the software.
0 The Error Report message is not displayed, and no report can be sent to Autodesk. The Error Report message is displayed, and an error report can be sent to Autodesk.

An error report can be sent through the operating system if REPORTERROR is set to 0 and the operating system supports error reporting.

1472 | Chapter 43 R System Variables

ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of File Organization

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the full path to the root folder where roamable customizable files were installed. If you are working on a network that supports roaming, when you customize files that are in your roaming profile they are available to you regardless of which machine you are currently using.

RTDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of raster images and OLE objects during Realtime ZOOM or PAN.
0 1 Displays raster image and OLE content Displays outline only

ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX | 1473

1474

S System Variables

SAVEFIDELITY
Quick Reference
See also:

Save a Drawing Save with Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the drawing is saved with visual fidelity. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 Saved without visual fidelity. Annotation objects assigned annotative scales are saved to separate layers for each scale used. Only affects drawings when saving to AutoCAD 2007 or earlier file formats.

1475

SAVEFILE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Stores the current automatic save file name.

SAVEFILEPATH
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session.

SAVENAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Obtain General Drawing Information

(Read-only) Type:

String

1476 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Displays the file name and directory path of the most recently saved drawing.

SAVETIME
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10 Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.
0 >0 Turns off automatic saving. Saves the drawing at intervals specified by the nonzero integer automatically

The value of SAVETIME is an integer between 0 and 600. The SAVETIME timer starts as soon as you make a change to a drawing. It is reset and restarted by a manual QSAVE, SAVE, or SAVEAS. The current drawing is saved to the path specified by the SAVEFILEPATH system variable. The file name is stored in the SAVEFILE system variable.

SCREENSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Switch Between Model and Named Layouts

(Read-only) Type:

2D-point

SAVETIME | 1477

Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Stores current viewport size in pixels (X and Y).

SELECTIONANNODISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Annotative Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected.
0 1 Off On

The dimming intensity is controlled by the XFADECTL system variable.

SELECTIONAREA
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of effects for selection areas.

1478 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

Selection areas are created by the Window, Crossing, WPolygon, and CPolygon options of SELECT on page 934.
0 1 Off On

SELECTIONAREAOPACITY
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 25 Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing selection. The valid range is 0 to 100. The lower the setting, the more transparent the area. A value of 100 makes the area opaque. The SELECTIONAREA on page 1478 system variable must be on.

SELECTIONCYCLING
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects Individually Use 3D Subobject Grips Modify 3D Subobjects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2

SELECTIONAREAOPACITY | 1479

Turns selection cycling on and off.

0 1 2 Off On (the list dialog does not display) On (the list dialog displays the selected objects that you can cycle through)

SELECTIONPREVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value: 3 Controls the display of selection previewing. Objects are highlighted when the pickbox cursor rolls over them. This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected if you clicked. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 2 Off On when no commands are active On when a command prompts for object selection

1480 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SELECTSIMILARMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Select Objects by Properties

Type: Bitcode Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 130 Controls which properties must match for an object of the same type to be selected with SELECTSIMILAR. The default value is 130. Objects of the same type are considered similar if they are on the same layer, and, for referenced objects, have the same name. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Object type Color Layer Linetype Linetype scale Lineweight Plot style Object style (such as text styles, dimension styles, and table styles) Name (for referenced objects, such as blocks, xrefs, and images)

128

SELECTSIMILARMODE | 1481

SHADEDGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Controls the shading of edges in rendering.
0 1 2 3 Faces shaded, edges not highlighted Faces shaded, edges drawn in background color Faces not filled, edges in object color Faces in object color, edges in background color

SHADEDIF
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 70 Sets the ratio of diffuse reflective light to ambient light. The ratio is a percentage of diffuse reflective light when SHADEDGE on page 1482 is set to 0 or 1.

1482 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SHADOWPLANELOCATION
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Backgrounds and Shadows

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Controls the location of an invisible ground plane used to display shadows. The value is a location on the current Z axis. The ground plane is invisible, but it casts and receives shadows. Objects that are located below the ground plane are shadowed by it. The ground plane is used when the VSSHADOWS on page 1582 system variable is set to display either full shadows or ground shadows.

SHORTCUTMENU
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Up the Drawing Area

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 11 Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are available in the drawing area. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 Disables all Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus, restoring AutoCAD Release 14 behavior. Disables all Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus.

SHADOWPLANELOCATION | 1483

1 2 4

Enables Default mode shortcut menus. Enables Edit mode shortcut menus. Enables Command mode shortcut menus whenever a command is active. Enables Command mode shortcut menus only when command options are currently available at the Command prompt. Enables display of a shortcut menu when the right button on the pointing device is held down longer

SHORTCUTMENUDURATION
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Drawing Area Interface

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 250 Specifies how long (in milliseconds) the right button on a pointing device needs to be held down before a shortcutmenu is displayed in the drawing area. Valid range is 100 to 10,000. The greater the value, the longer the right button on the pointing device must be held to display a shortcutmenu.

SHOWHIST
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Original Forms of Composite Solids

1484 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the Show History property for solids in a drawing.
0 Sets the Show History property to No (read-only) for all solids. Overrides the individual Show History property settings for solids. You cannot view the original objects that were used to create the solid. Does not override the individual Show History property settings for solids. Displays the history of all solids by overriding the individual Show History property settings for solids. You can view the original objects that were used to create the solid.

SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Page Setup to Specify Plot Settings

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Specifies if the Page Setup Manager is displayed when a new layout is created.
0 Do not display the Page Setup Manager when a new layout is created Display the Page setup Magare when a new layout is created

SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS | 1485

SHOWPALETTESTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Drawing Area Interface

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Indicates whether palettes were hidden by the HIDEPALETTES command or restored by the SHOWPALETTES command.
0 Indicates that there are palettes hidden by the HIDEPALETTES command Indicates that all palettes hidden by the HIDEPALETTES command were restored by the SHOWPALETTES command

SHPNAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Shape Descriptions

Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Sets a default shape name that must conform to symbol- naming conventions. If no default is set, it returns "". Enter a period (.) to set no default.

1486 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SKETCHINC
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Freehand Sketches

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.1000 (imperial) or 1.0000 (metric) Sets the record increment for the SKETCH command.

SKPOLY
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Freehand Sketches

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Determines whether the SKETCH command generates lines, polylines, or splines.
0 1 2 Generates lines Generates polylines Generates splines

SKETCHINC | 1487

SKTOLERANCE
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Freehand Sketches

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5 Determines how closely the spline fits to the freehand sketch. Valid values are between 0 and 1.

SKYSTATUS
Quick Reference
See also:

Sun and Sky Simulation

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Determines if the sky illumination is computed at render time. This has no impact on the viewport illumination or the background. It only makes the sky available as a gathered light source for rendering.
0 1 2 Sky off Sky background Sky background and illumination

1488 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SMOOTHMESHCONVERT
Quick Reference
See also:

Create 3D Solids from Objects

Type: Bitcode Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 0 Sets whether mesh objects that you convert to 3D solids or surfaces are smoothed or faceted, and whether their faces are merged.
0 1 Creates a smooth model. Coplanar faces are optimized, or merged. Creates a smooth model. Original mesh faces are retained in the converted object. Creates a model with flattened faces. Coplanar faces are optimized, or merged. Creates a model with flattened faces. Original mesh faces are retained in the converted object.

2 3

This system variable sets the default value for operations that use CONVTOSOLID and CONVTOSURFACE commands.

SMOOTHMESHGRID
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Mesh Smoothness Levels

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 3

SMOOTHMESHCONVERT | 1489

Sets the maximum level of smoothness at which the underlying mesh facet grid is displayed on 3D mesh objects.
0 1 2 3 Never displays the underlying mesh facet grid Displays the facet grid for smoothing levels 0 and 1 Displays the facet grid for smoothing levels 2 and lower Displays the facet grid for levels 3 and lower

Use this variable to help visualize smooth surfaces. By setting limits, you can simplify the display of the underlying facet grid when you work with extremely dense mesh objects. You can enter any number, depending on the number of smoothing levels you expect. This variable does not affect the smoothing level of the mesh. Its value cannot exceed the value of SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV. If the VSLIGHTINGQUALITY system variable is 0, this system variable is ignored and all smoothness levels are displayed as faceted.

SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Mesh Smoothness Levels

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 1000000 Sets the maximum number of faces permitted for mesh objects. The initial value of this system variable is adjusted for best performance based on your system configuration. Permissible values are from 1 to 16,000,000. Use this limit to prevent creating extremely dense meshes that might affect program performance.

1490 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Mesh Smoothness Levels

Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value: 4 Sets the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects. Permissible values are from 1 to 255. The recommended range is 1-5. Use this limit to prevent creating extremely dense meshes that might affect program performance.

SNAPANG
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. When SNAPANG is set to a value other than 0, the lined grid will not display.

SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV | 1491

SNAPBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000 Sets the snap and grid origin point for the current viewport relative to the current UCS.

SNAPISOPAIR
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Isometric Grid and Snap

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the isometric plane for the current viewport.
0 1 2 Left Top Right

1492 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SNAPMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Turns the Snap mode on and off.
0 1 Snap off Snap on for the current viewport

SNAPSTYL
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the snap style for the current viewport.
0 1 Standard (rectangular snap) Isometric snap

SNAPMODE | 1493

SNAPTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the type of snap for the current viewport.
0 1 Grid, or standard snap. PolarSnap. Snaps along polar angle increments. Use PolarSnap with polar and object snap tracking.

SNAPUNIT
Quick Reference
See also:

Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.5000,0.5000 (imperial) or 10.0000,10.0000 (metric) Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. If SNAPSTYL is set to 1, the X value of SNAPUNIT is adjusted automatically to accommodate the isometric snap. Changes to this system variable are not reflected in the grid until the display is refreshed.

1494 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SOLIDCHECK
Quick Reference
See also:

Clean and Check 3D Solids

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Turns 3D solid validation on and off for the current session.
0 1 Off On

SOLIDHIST
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Original Forms of Composite Solids

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the default history property setting for solid objects. When set to 1, composite solids retain a history of the original objects contained in the composite.
0 Sets the History property to None for all solids. No history is retained. Sets the History property to Record for all solids. All solids retain a history of their original objects.

SOLIDCHECK | 1495

SORTENTS
Quick Reference
See also:

Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 127 Controls object sorting in support of draw order for several operations. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Turns off all object sorting Sorts for object selection Sorts for object snaps Obsolete, has no effect Obsolete, has no effect Sorts for REGEN commands Sorts for plotting Obsolete, has no effect

SPACEPAN
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View Integer

Type:

1496 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether pressing and holding the Spacebar starts the PAN command transparently.
0 PAN command does not start transparently when the Spacebar is held. PAN command starts transparently after the Spacebar is held for the duration specified in the SPACEPANTIMEOUT system variable.

SPACEPANTIMEOUT
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 150 Sets the duration that the Spacebar must be held down before the PAN command is started transparently. Duration is measured in milliseconds. Valid range is 100 to 1000.

SPLDEGREE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Polylines

(Read-only) Type:

Integer

SPACEPANTIMEOUT | 1497

Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 3 Stores the last-used degree setting for splines and sets the default degree setting for the SPLINE command when specifying control vertices. Enter a value from 1 to 5. NOTE SPLDEGREE defaults to 3 when AutoCAD for Mac starts.

SPLFRAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Creating Meshes Create 3D Models

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the display of helixes and smoothed mesh objects.
0 Does not display the control polygon for helixes. Displays smoothed mesh objects if they have been smoothed. Does not display the invisible edges of 3D faces or polyface meshes.

Displays the control polygon for helixes. Displays unsmoothed mesh objects, even if they have been smoothed. Displays the edges of 3D faces and polyface meshes.

NOTE To control the display for splines, use the CVSHOW on page 239 and the CVHIDE on page 233 commands.

1498 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SPLINESEGS
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Polylines

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 8 Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. Enter a non-zero integer between -32768 to 32767. If you set SPLINESEGS to a negative value, segments are generated using the absolute value of the setting and then a fit-type curve is applied to those segments. Fit-type curves use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs yields a smoother generated curve when few segments are specified, but the curve can take longer to generate.

SPLINETYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Polylines

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Sets the type of curve generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
5 6 Quadratic B-spline Cubic B-spline

SPLINESEGS | 1499

SPLKNOTS
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Splines

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores the default knot option for the SPLINE command when specifying fit points.
0 1 2 Chord distance Square root of chord distance Uniform distance

NOTE SPLKNOTS always defaults to 0 when AutoCAD for Mac starts.

SPLMETHOD
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Splines

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores whether the default method used for the SPLINE command is fit points or control vertices.
0 1 Create splines using fit points Create splines using control vertices

1500 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

NOTE SPLMETHOD always defaults to 0 when AutoCAD for Mac starts.

SPLPERIODIC
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Splines

Controls whether splines and NURBS surfaces are generated with periodic properties when they are closed, or whether they exhibit legacy behavior.
0 1 Legacy behavior Closed splines and closed NURBS surfaces are periodic, maintaining the smoothest (C2) continuity at the location where they are closed.

STARTUP
Quick Reference
See also:

Start a Drawing from Scratch

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether the Create New Drawing dialog box is displayed when a new drawing is started with NEW or QNEW. Also controls whether the Startup dialog box is displayed when the application is started.

SPLPERIODIC | 1501

If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, file dialog boxes are not displayed.
0 Displays the Select Template dialog box, or uses a default drawing template file set in the Application Preferences dialog box, on the Application tab. Displays the Startup and the Create New Drawing dialog boxes

STATUSBAR
Quick Reference
See also:

The Status Bar

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of the status bar.
0 1 Hides the status bar Shows the status bar

SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects LEGACYCTRLPICK on page 1389 Integer Not-saved

Type: Saved in:

1502 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

Initial value: 0 Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. In busy 3D environments with many objects, it can be helpful to filter certain subobjects out of the selection highlighting.
0 When subobject filtering is off, press Ctrl+click to select a face, edge, vertex or a history subobject. (Shift-F1) Only vertices are available for selection (Shift-F2) Only edges are available for selection. (Shift-F3) Only faces are available for selection. (Shift-F4) Only history subobjects of compound objects are available for selection. (ShiftF5)

1 2 3 4

Turn off subobject filtering if you want to select the entire object. You can also press Ctrl-click to select faces, edges, and vertices.

When filtering is set for vertices, you cannot select faces, edges, or history subobjects.

SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE | 1503

When filtering is set for edges, you cannot select faces, vertices, or history subobjects.

When filtering is set for faces, you cannot select edges, vertices, or history subobjects.

1504 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

When filtering is set for history subobjects, you can only select the wireframe representations of portions of objects removed during a union, subtract, or intersect operation.

SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE | 1505

Subobject Selection Filter Cursors

When a subobject selection filter is set, the following images are displayed next to the cursor:
Vertex filtering is on

Edge filtering is on

Face filtering is on

History subobject filtering is on

Subobject not eligible for selection

SUNSTATUS
Quick Reference
See also:

Sun and Sky Simulation

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Turns on and off the lighting effects of the sun in the current viewport. Only the lights from sources other than the sun affect the view in the current viewport.
0 Off

1506 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Associative Surfaces

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. When associativity is on, surfaces automatically adjust to modifications made to other, related surfaces.
0 1 Surfaces are created with no associativity to other surfaces Surfaces are created with associativity to other surfaces

When set to 1, the DELOBJ on page 1228 system variable is ignored. Defining geometry are not deleted when an associative surface is created.

SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Associative Surfaces

Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces.

SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY | 1507

Controls the preview behavior of surfaces and any associated surfaces when a selected surface is dragged. Disabling the preview can increase performance.
0 Displays no preview. The display refreshes after dragging is complete. Previews only the movement of the first associated surface. All other associated surfaces do not move until after dragging is complete. Previews the movement of all associated surfaces.

SURFACEAUTOTRIM
Quick Reference
See also:

Trim and Untrim Surfaces

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether surfaces are automatically trimmed when you project geometry onto them.
0 Surfaces are not trimmed when you project geometry onto them. Surfaces are automatically trimmed to geometry that is projected using PROJECTGEOMETRY on page 828.

1508 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SURFACEMODELINGMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves Create Surfaces

Type: Switch Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces.
0 1 Creates a procedural surface when creating surfaces. Creates a NURBS surface when creating surfaces.

SURFTAB1
Quick Reference
See also:

Construct Meshes from Other Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Sets the number of tabulations to be generated for the RULESURF and TABSURF commands. Also sets the mesh density in the M direction for the REVSURF and EDGESURF commands.

SURFACEMODELINGMODE | 1509

SURFTAB2
Quick Reference
See also:

Construct Meshes from Other Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Sets the mesh density in the N direction for the REVSURF and EDGESURF commands.

SURFTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Polylines

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Controls the type of surface-fitting to be performed by the Smooth option of the PEDIT command.
5 6 8 Quadratic B-spline surface Cubic B-spline surface Bezier surface

1510 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

SURFU
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Polylines

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U isolines density on surface objects. Valid values are 0 through 200. Meshes are always created with a minimum surface density of 2.

SURFV
Quick Reference
See also:

Modify Polylines

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 6 Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the V isolines density on surface objects. Valid values are 0 through 200. Meshes are always created with a minimum surface density of 2.

SURFU | 1511

SYSCODEPAGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Text Fonts for International Work

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Indicates the system code page, which is determined by the operating system. To change the code page, see Help for your operating system.

1512 | Chapter 44 S System Variables

T System Variables

TABLEINDICATOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Create and Modify Tables

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the display of row numbers and column letters when the In-Place Text Editor is open for editing a table cell.
0 1 Off On

TARGET
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Parallel and Perspective Views

1513

(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the location (as a UCS coordinate) of the target point for the current viewport.

TBEXTENDAFTERSECONDS
Quick Reference
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Sets the time delay (in seconds) used for extended tooltips.

TBSHOWSHORTCUTS
Quick Reference
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Specifies if shortcut keys are displayed in tooltips.
0 1 Display shortcut keys Do not display shortcut keys

TDCREATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Identifying Information to Drawings

1514 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the local time and date the drawing was created.

TDINDWG
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Identifying Information to Drawings

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the total editing time, which is the total elapsed time between saves of the current drawing. The format is: <number of days>.<decimal fraction of a day> To compute the number of seconds, multiply the decimal fraction in TDINDWG by 86400 seconds.

TDUCREATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Identifying Information to Drawings

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the universal time and date that the drawing was created.

TDINDWG | 1515

TDUPDATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Identifying Information to Drawings

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the local time and date of the last update/save.

TDUSRTIMER
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Identifying Information to Drawings

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the user-elapsed timer.

TDUUPDATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Add Identifying Information to Drawings

(Read-only) Type:

Real

1516 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the universal time and date of the last update or save.

TEMPOVERRIDES
Quick Reference
See also:

Override Object Snap Settings

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Turns temporary override keys on and off. A temporary override key is a key that you can hold down to temporarily turn on or turn off one of the drawing aids that are set in the Drafting Settings dialog box; for example, Ortho mode, object snaps, or Polar mode.
0 1 Off On

TEMPPREFIX
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Search Paths and File Locations

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: Varies Contains the directory name (if any) configured for placement of temporary files, with a path separator appended.

TEMPOVERRIDES | 1517

You can modify the location from the Application Preferences dialog box, Application tab, Files section, under Temporary Drawing File Location.

TEXTED
Quick Reference
See also:

Change Single-Line Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2 Specifies the user interface displayed for editing single-line text.
0 Displays the In-Place Text Editor when creating or editing single-line text. Displays the Edit Text dialog box when editing single-line text. Displays the In-Place Text Editor when creating or editing single-line text. Repeats the command automatically.

TEXTEVAL
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Single-Line Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0

1518 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

Controls how text strings entered with TEXT (using AutoLISP) or with -TEXT are evaluated.
0 All responses to prompts for text strings and attribute values are taken literally. All text starting from an opening parenthesis [(] or an exclamation mark [!] is evaluated as an AutoLISP expression, as for nontextual input.

The TEXT command takes all input literally regardless of the setting of TEXTEVAL unless it is executed completely with a script or AutoLISP expression. The -TEXT command honors the setting of TEXTEVAL.

TEXTFILL
Quick Reference
See also:

Use TrueType Fonts

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while printing.
0 1 Displays text as outlines Displays text as filled images

TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT
Quick Reference
See also:

Share Drawing Files Internationally

TEXTFILL | 1519

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Provides Unicode options for log files.
0 1 2 3 ANSI format UTF-8 (Unicode) UTF-16LE (Unicode) UTF-16BE (Unicode)

TEXTQLTY
Quick Reference
See also:

Use TrueType Fonts

Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 50 Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines for TrueType fonts while plotting and rendering. 0 represents no effort to refine the smoothness of the text; 100 represents a maximum effort to smooth text characters. Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plotting speed. Sets the resolution of TrueType fonts while plotting. Use integer values from 0 to 100. Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plotting speed.

1520 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

TEXTSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Text Height

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.2000 (imperial) or 2.5000 (metric) Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. TEXTSIZE has no effect if the current text style has a fixed height.

TEXTSTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Text Styles

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Standard Sets the name of the current text style.

THICKNESS
Quick Reference
See also:

Add 3D Thickness to Objects Real Drawing

Type: Saved in:

TEXTSIZE | 1521

Initial value: 0.0000 Sets the current 3D thickness.

TILEMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Model Space Viewports

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current.
0 1 Makes the last active layout tab (paper space) active Makes the Model tab active

TIMEZONE
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of Geographic Location

Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -8000 Sets the time zone for the sun in the drawing. The values in the table are expressed as hours and minutes away from Greenwich Mean Time. The geographic location you set also sets the time zone. If the time zone is not accurate, you can correct it in the Geographic Location dialog box or set the TIMEZONE system variable.
-12000 International Date Line West

1522 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

-11000 -10000 -9000 -8000 -7000 -7000 -7000 -7001 -7002 -6000 -6001 -6002 -6003 -5000 -5001 -5002 -4000 -4001 -4002 -3300 -3000 -3001

Midway Island, Samoa Hawaii Alaska Pacific Time (US & Canada), Tijuana Arizona Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan Mountain Time (US & Canada) Arizona Mazatlan Central America Central Time (US & Canada) Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey Saskatchewan Eastern Time (US & Canada) Indiana (East) Bogota, Lima, Quito Atlantic Time (Canada) Caracas, La Paz Santiago Newfoundland Brasilia Buenos Aires, Georgetown

TIMEZONE | 1523

-3002 -2000 -1000 -1001 0 1 2 +1000 +1001 +1002 +1003 +1004 +2000 +2001 +2002 +2003 +2004 +2005 +3000 +3001 +3002 +3003

Greenland Mid-Atlantic Azores Cape Verde Is. Universal Coordinated Time Greenwich Mean Time Casablanca, Monrovia Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm Brussels, Madrid, Copenhagen, Paris Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb West Central Africa Athens, Beirut, Istanbul, Minsk Bucharest Cairo Harare, Pretoria Helsinki, Kyiv, Sofia, Talinn, Vilnius Jerusalem Moscow, St. Petersburg, Volograd Kuwait, Riyadh Baghdad Nairobi

1524 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

+3300 +4000 +4001 +4300 +5000 +5001 +5300 +5450 +6000 +6001 +6002 +6300 +7000 +7001 +8000 +8001 +8002 +8003 +8004 +9000 +9001 +9002

Tehran Abu Dhabi, Muscat Baku, Tbilisi, Yerevan Kabul Ekaterinburg Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi Kathmandu Almaty, Novosibirsk Astana, Dhaka Sri Jayawardenepura Rangoon Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta Krasnoyarsk Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi Kuala Lumpur, Singapore Taipei Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar Perth Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo Seoul Yakutsk

TIMEZONE | 1525

+9300 +9301 +10000 +10001 +10002 +10003 +10004 +11000 +12000 +12001 +13000

Adelaide Darwin Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney Guam, Port Moresby Brisbane Hobart Vladivostok Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia Auckland, Wellington Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is. Nukualofa

TOOLSETSSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

The Tool Sets Palette

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Indicates whether the Tool Sets palette is open or closed.
0 1 Closed Open

1526 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

TOOLTIPMERGE
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip.
0 1 Off On

TOOLTIPSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Other Tool Locations

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the display size for tooltips. Valid range is -3 to 6. The greater the value, the larger tooltips will appear.

TOOLTIPMERGE | 1527

TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY
Quick Reference
See also:

Other Tool Locations

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Sets the transparency for tooltips. Valid range is 0 to 100. When a value of 0 is used, the tooltip is fully opaque. The greater the value entered, the more transparent the tooltip will appear.

TRACEWID
Quick Reference
See also:

Draw Lines

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0500 (imperial) or 1.0000 (metric) Sets the default trace width.

TRACKPATH
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap Integer

Type:

1528 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the display of polar and object snap tracking alignment paths.
0 1 Displays full-screen polar and object snap tracking paths Displays full-screen polar tracking path; displays object snap tracking path only between the alignment point and the From point to the cursor location Displays full-screen object snap tracking path; does not display polar tracking path Does not display polar tracking path; displays object snap tracking path only between the alignment point and the From point to the cursor location

TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display Properties of Certain Objects

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the object transparency is displayed.
0 1 Object transparency is not displayed Object transparency is displayed

TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY | 1529

TREEDEPTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3020 Specifies the maximum depth, that is, the number of times the tree-structured spatial index can divide into branches.
0 Suppresses the spatial index entirely, eliminating the performance improvements it provides in working with large drawings. This setting assures that objects are always processed in database order. Turns on spatial indexing. An integer of up to five digits is valid. The first three digits refer to model space, and the remaining two digits refer to paper space. Treats model space objects as 2D (Z coordinates are ignored), as is always the case with paper space objects. Such a setting is appropriate for 2D drawings and makes more efficient use of memory without loss of performance

NOTE You cannot use TREEDEPTH transparently.

TREEMAX
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes Integer

Type:

1530 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

Saved in: Registry Initial value: 10000000 Limits memory consumption during drawing regeneration by limiting the number of nodes in the spatial index (oct-tree). By imposing a fixed limit with TREEMAX, you can load drawings created on systems with more memory than your system and with a larger TREEDEPTH than your system can handle. These drawings, if left unchecked, have an oct-tree large enough to eventually consume more memory than is available to your computer. TREEMAX also provides a safeguard against experimentation with inappropriately high TREEDEPTH values. The initial default for TREEMAX is 10000000 (10 million), a value high enough to effectively disable TREEMAX as a control for TREEDEPTH. The value to which you should set TREEMAX depends on your system's available RAM. You get about 15,000 oct-tree nodes per megabyte of RAM. If you want an oct-tree to use up to, but no more than, 2 megabytes of RAM, set TREEMAX to 30000 (2 x 15,000). If the program runs out of memory allocating oct-tree nodes, restart, set TREEMAX to a smaller number, and try loading the drawing again. The program might occasionally run into the limit you set with TREEMAX. Follow the resulting prompt instructions. Your ability to increase TREEMAX depends on your computer's available memory.

TRIMMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Chamfers

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed.
0 1 Leaves selected edges intact Trims selected edges to the endpoints of chamfer lines and fillet arcs

TRIMMODE | 1531

TSPACEFAC
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text

Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1.0000 Controls the multiline text line-spacing distance measured as a factor of text height. Valid values are 0.25 to 4.0.

TSPACETYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls the type of line spacing used in multiline text. At Least adjusts line spacing based on the tallest characters in a line. Exactly uses the specified line spacing, regardless of individual character sizes.
1 2 At Least Exactly

1532 | Chapter 45 T System Variables

TSTACKALIGN
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the vertical alignment of stacked text.
0 1 2 Bottom aligned Center aligned Top aligned

TSTACKSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 70 Controls the percentage of stacked text fraction height relative to selected text's current height. Valid values are from 25 to 125.

TSTACKALIGN | 1533

1534

U System Variables

UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING
Quick Reference
See also:

The UCS Icon Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays the UCS icon when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current.
0 1 Off On

UCS3DPARADISPLAYSETTING
Quick Reference
See also:

The UCS Icon

1535

Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays the UCS icon when perspective view is off and a 3D visual style is current.
0 1 Off On

UCS3DPERPDISPLAYSETTING
Quick Reference
See also:

The UCS Icon Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Displays the UCS icon when perspective view is on and a 3D visual style is current.
0 1 Off On

1536 | Chapter 46 U System Variables

UCSAXISANG
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 90 Stores the default angle when rotating the UCS around one of its axes using the X, Y, or Z option of the UCS command. Its value must be entered as an angle in degrees (valid values are: 5, 10, 15, 18, 22.5, 30, 45, 90, 180).

UCSBASE
Quick Reference
See also:

Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS)

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: "" Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of orthographic UCS settings. Valid values include any named UCS.

UCSAXISANG | 1537

UCSDETECT
Quick Reference
See also:

Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether dynamic UCS acquisition is active or not.
0 1 Not active Active

UCSFOLLOW
Quick Reference
See also:

Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS)

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another. The UCSFOLLOW setting is saved separately for each viewport. If UCSFOLLOW is on for a particular viewport, a plan view is generated in that viewport whenever you change coordinate systems. Once the new UCS has been established, you can use DVIEW, PLAN, VIEW, or VPOINT to change the view of the drawing. It will change to a plan view again the next time you change coordinate systems.
0 UCS does not affect the view

1538 | Chapter 46 U System Variables

Any UCS change causes a change to the plan view of the new UCS in the current viewport

The setting of UCSFOLLOW is maintained separately for paper space and model space and can be accessed in either, but the setting is ignored while in paper space (it is always treated as if set to 0). Although you can define a non-world UCS in paper space, the view remains in plan view to the world coordinate system.

UCSICON
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Displays the UCS icon for the current viewport or layout. This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 No icon is displayed On; the icon is displayed in the lower-left corner of the current viewport or layout Origin; if the icon is on, the icon is displayed at the UCS origin, if possible

The setting of this system variable is viewport and layout specific.

UCSICON | 1539

UCSNAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon

(Read-only) Type: String Saved in:Drawing Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. Returns a null string if the current UCS is unnamed.

UCSORG
Quick Reference
See also:

Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS) Assign User Coordinate System Orientations to Viewports

(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000 Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. This value is always stored as a world coordinate.

1540 | Chapter 46 U System Variables

UCSORTHO
Quick Reference
See also:

Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Determines whether the related orthographic UCS setting is restored automatically when an orthographic view is restored.
0 Specifies that the UCS setting remains unchanged when an orthographic view is restored Specifies that the related orthographic UCS setting is restored automatically when an orthographic view is restored

UCSVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Save and Restore Views

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Determines whether the current UCS is saved with a named view.
0 1 Does not save current UCS with a named view Saves current UCS whenever a named view is created

UCSORTHO | 1541

UCSVP
Quick Reference
See also:

Assign User Coordinate System Orientations to Viewports

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Determines whether the UCS in viewports remains fixed or changes to reflect the UCS of the current viewport. The setting of this system variable is viewport specific.
0 1 Unlocked; UCS reflects the UCS of the current viewport Locked; UCS stored in viewport, and is independent of the UCS of the current viewport

UCSXDIR
Quick Reference
See also:

Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS)

(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1.0000,0.0000,0.0000 Stores the X direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the current space. The setting of this system variable is viewport specific.

1542 | Chapter 46 U System Variables

UCSYDIR
Quick Reference
See also:

Understand the User Coordinate System (UCS)

(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000,1.0000,0.0000 Stores the Y direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the current space. The setting of this system variable is viewport specific.

UNDOCTL
Quick Reference
See also:

Correct Mistakes

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 53 Indicates the state of the Auto, Control, and Group options of the UNDO command. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 2 UNDO is turned off UNDO is turned on Only one command can be undone

UCSYDIR | 1543

4 8 16 32

Auto is turned on A group is currently active Zoom and pan operations are grouped as a single action Layer property operations are grouped as a single action

UNDOMARKS
Quick Reference
See also:

Correct Mistakes

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Stores the number of marks placed in the UNDO control stream by the Mark option. The Mark and Back options are not available if a group is currently active.

UNITMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Specify Units and Unit Formats

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the display format for units.

1544 | Chapter 46 U System Variables

By default, the format for displaying measured values differs slightly from the format used for entering them. (You cannot include spaces when entering measured values.)
0 Displays fractional, feet-and-inches, and surveyor's angles in report format using spaces as delimiters Displays fractional, feet-and-inches, and surveyor's angles in input format without including spaces and, in some cases, substituting dashes for spaces

UPDATETHUMBNAIL
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Interface Options

Type: Bitcode Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 15 Controls updating of the thumbnail previews for views and layouts. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 Does not update thumbnail previews for layout views, model space views, layouts, or Quick View images Updates model space view thumbnail previews Updates layout view thumbnail previews Updates layout thumbnail previews Updates thumbnail previews when layouts or views are created, modified, or restored Updates thumbnail previews when the drawing is saved

1 2 4 8

UPDATETHUMBNAIL | 1545

USERI1-5
Quick Reference
See also:

DIESEL Expressions in Macros

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Provides storage and retrieval of integer values. There are five system variables: USERI1, USERI2, USERI3, USERI4, and USERI5.

USERR1-5
Quick Reference
See also:

DIESEL Expressions in Macros

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Provides storage and retrieval of real numbers. There are five system variables: USERR1, USERR2, USERR3, USERR4, and USERR5.

USERS1-5
Quick Reference
See also:

DIESEL Expressions in Macros

1546 | Chapter 46 U System Variables

Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: "" Provides storage and retrieval of text string data. There are five system variables: USERS1, USERS2, USERS3, USERS4, and USERS5.

USERS1-5 | 1547

1548

V System Variables

VIEWCTR
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the center of view in the current viewport. Expressed as a UCS coordinate.

VIEWDIR
Quick Reference
See also:

Define a 3D View with a Camera

(Read-only) Type: Saved in:

3D-vector Drawing

1549

Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000,1.0000 Stores the viewing direction in the current viewport, expressed in UCS coordinates. This describes the camera point as a 3D offset from the target point.

VIEWMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Save and Restore Views

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Stores the View mode for the current viewport. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values:
0 1 2 4 8 16 Turned off. Perspective view active. Front clipping on Back clipping on. UCS Follow mode on. Front clip not at eye. If on, the front clip distance (FRONTZ) determines the front clipping plane. If off, FRONTZ is ignored, and the front clipping plane is set to pass through the camera point (vectors behind the camera are not displayed). This flag is ignored if the front-clipping bit (2) is off.

1550 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

VIEWSIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

Save and Restore Views

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the height of the view displayed in the current viewport, measured in drawing units.

VIEWTWIST
Quick Reference
See also:

Rotate Views in Layout Viewports

(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0.0000 Stores the view rotation angle for the current viewport measured relative to the WCS.

VISRETAIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Drawing References (Xrefs)

VIEWSIZE | 1551

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. Controls visibility, color, linetype, lineweight, and plot styles.
0 The layer table, as stored in the reference drawing (xref), takes precedence. Changes made to xref-dependent layers in the current drawing are valid in the current session only and are not saved with the drawing. When the current drawing is reopened, the layer table is reloaded from the reference drawing, and the current drawing reflects all of those layer property settings. Xref-dependent layer changes made in the current drawing take precedence. Layer settings are saved with the current drawing's layer table and persist from session to session.

VPCONTROL
Quick Reference
See also:

Parts of the User Interface

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 (or ON) Controls whether the Viewport label menus are displayed in all viewports.
0 (or OFF) 1 (or ON) Viewport label menus are not displayed. Viewport label menus are displayed.

1552 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

VPCOORDDISPLAY
Quick Reference
See also:

Parts of the User Interface

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the current coordinates value of the crosshair cursor are displayed in the lower-right corner of the active viewport.
0 1 Off On

VPLAYEROVERRIDES
Quick Reference
See also:

Override Layer Properties in Viewports

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Indicates if there are any layers with viewport (VP) property overrides for the current layout viewport.
0 Current viewport does not have any associated layer property overrides Current viewport has associated layer property overrides

VPCOORDDISPLAY | 1553

VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Override Layer Properties in Viewports

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether layer property overrides for layout viewports are displayed and plotted.
0 Layer property overrides are not displayed in layout viewports or plotted Layer property overrides are displayed in layout viewports and plotted

VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE
Quick Reference
See also:

Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Indicates whether the viewport is maximized or not. The maximized viewport state is canceled if you start the PLOT command.
0 1 Not maximized Maximized

1554 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

VPROTATEASSOC
Quick Reference
See also:

Rotate Views in Layout Viewports

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 1 Controls whether the view within a viewport is rotated with the viewport when the viewport is rotated.
0 1 When a viewport is rotated, the view inside is not rotated. When a viewport is rotated, the view inside is rotated to match the rotation of the viewport.

NOTE After rotating a viewport, VPROTATEASSOC is set to 0 for a new viewport created in the same layout.

VSACURVATUREHIGH
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Curvature Tab on page 67

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Sets the value at which a surface displays as green during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE on page 61). The default value for this system variable is 1.

VPROTATEASSOC | 1555

VSACURVATURELOW
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Curvature Tab on page 67

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -1 Sets the value at which a surface displays as blue during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE on page 61). The default value for this system variable is -1.

VSACURVATURETYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Curvature Tab on page 67

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls which type of curvature analysis is used with the (ANALYSISCURVATURE on page 61).
0 1 Gaussian curvature (evaluates areas of high and low curvature) Mean curvature (evaluates the mean curvature of the U and V surface curvature values) Maximum curvature (evaluates the maximum curvature of the U and V surface curvature values)

1556 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

Minimum curvature (evaluates the minimum curvature of the U and V surface curvature values)

VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Draft Analysis Tab on page 68

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 3 Sets the value at which a model displays as green during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT on page 63). Draft angle is the angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane. High value is set by this system variable.
-90 Surface is parallel to the UCS with surface normal facing the opposite direction as the construction plane Surface is perpendicular to the construction plane Surface is parallel to the construction plane with surface normal facing the same direction as the UCS

0 90

VSADRAFTANGLELOW
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Draft Analysis Tab on page 68

VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH | 1557

Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -3 Sets the value at which a model displays as blue during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT on page 63). Draft angle is the angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane. Low value set by this system variable.
-90 Surface is parallel to the UCS with surface normal facing the opposite direction as the construction plane. Surface is perpendicular to the construction plane. Surface is parallel to the construction plane with surface normal facing the same direction as the UCS.

0 90

VSAZEBRACOLOR1
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab on page 66

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: RGB: 255, 255, 255 Sets the first color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. Values for RGB True Color are represented as a comma-separated string of integers 000 to 255. The default value is RGB:255,255,255. NOTE When a color book is installed, any colors defined in the book can be used.

1558 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

VSAZEBRACOLOR2
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab on page 66

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: RGB: 0, 0, 0 Sets the second (contrasting) color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. Values for RGB True Color are represented as a comma-separated string of integers 000 to 255. The default value is RGB:0,0,0. NOTE When a color book is installed, any colors defined in the book can be used.

VSAZEBRADIRECTION
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab on page 66

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 90 Controls whether zebra stripes display horizontally, vertically, or at an angle during zebra analysis (ANALYSISBRA).
0 Horizontal

VSAZEBRACOLOR2 | 1559

Vertical

NOTE Enter a value between 0 and 90 degrees to set Zebra stripes at an angle.

VSAZEBRASIZE
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab on page 66

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 45 Controls the width of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Valid values are from 1 to 100.

VSAZEBRATYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

ANALYSISOPTIONS on page 64 ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab on page 66

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Sets the type of zebra display when using zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA).
0 Chrome Ball

1560 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

Cylinder

VSEDGECOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: BYENTITY Sets the color of edges in the visual style in the current viewport. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available. Valid values for True Colors are a string of integers each from 0 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB. The True Color setting is entered as follows: RGB:000,000,000 If you have a color book installed, you can specify any colors that are defined in the book. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSEDGEJITTER
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges Integer

Type:

VSEDGECOLOR | 1561

Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -2 Makes edges on 3D objects appear wavy, as though they were sketched with a pencil. The amount of jitter can be set to low, medium, or high. Negative numbers store the value but turn off the effect. Plot styles are not available for objects with the Jitter edge modifier applied.

1 2 3

Low Medium High

NOTE Plot styles are not available for objects with the Jitter edge modifier applied. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

1562 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

VSEDGELEX
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -6 Makes edges on 3D objects extend beyond their intersection for a hand-drawn effect. The range is 1 to 100 pixels. Turn off the line extensions effect by preceding the setting with a minus sign (-). NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSEDGEOVERHANG
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -6 Makes edges on 3D objects extend beyond their intersection for a hand-drawn effect. The amount of overhang can be set between 1 and 100 pixels. Negative numbers store the value but turn off the effect.

VSEDGELEX | 1563

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSEDGES
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls the types of edges that are displayed in the viewport.

1564 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

isolines displayed

facet edges displayed

0 1

No edges are displayed Isolines are displayed

VSEDGES | 1565

Facet edges are displayed

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSEDGESMOOTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies the angle at which crease edges are displayed. The range is 0 to 180. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSFACECOLORMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Shade and Color Faces

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0

1566 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

Controls how the color of faces is calculated.

0 1 Normal: Does not apply a face color modifier Monochrome: Displays all faces in the color that is specified in the VSMONOCOLOR system variable. Tint: Uses the color that is specified in the VSMONOCOLOR system variable to shade all faces by changing the hue and saturation values of the color. Desaturate: Softens the color by reducing its saturation component by 30 percent

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSFACEHIGHLIGHT
Quick Reference
See also:

Shade and Color Faces

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -30 Controls the display of specular highlights on faces without materials in the current viewport. The range is -100 to 100. The higher the number, the larger the highlight. Objects with materials attached ignore the setting of VSFACEHIGHLIGHT when VSMATERIALMODE on page 1574 is on. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSFACEHIGHLIGHT | 1567

VSFACEOPACITY
Quick Reference
See also:

Shade and Color Faces

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: -60 Turns on and off a preset level of transparency for 3D objects. The level of transparency for 3D solids and surfaces can be set between 100 percent opaque and 0 percent opaque. Negative numbers store the value but turn off the effect.

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

1568 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

VSFACESTYLE
Quick Reference
See also:

Shade and Color Faces

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls how faces are displayed in the current viewport.
0 1 No style applied Real: as close as possible to how the face would appear in the real world Gooch: uses cool and warm colors instead of dark and light to enhance the display of faces that might be shadowed and difficult to see in a realistic display

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSHALOGAP
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Sets the halo gap in the visual style applied to the current viewport. The range is 0 to 100.

VSFACESTYLE | 1569

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSHIDEPRECISION
Quick Reference
See also:

Shade and Color Faces

Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 0 Controls the accuracy of hides and shades in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
0 1 Single precision; uses less memory Double precision; uses more memory

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 7

1570 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

Specifies the color of intersection polylines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. The initial value is 7, which is a special value that inverts the color (black or white) based on the background color. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available. NOTE INTERSECTIONCOLOR controls the color of intersection polylines when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSINTERSECTIONEDGES
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the display of intersection edges in the visual style applied to the current viewport. NOTE INTERSECTIONDISPLAY controls the color of intersection polylines when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe.
0 1 Off On

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSINTERSECTIONEDGES | 1571

VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Sets the linetype for intersection lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. The range is 1 to 11.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Solid Dashed Dotted Short Dash Medium Dash Long Dash Double Short Dash Double Medium Dash Double Long Dash Medium Long Dash Sparse Dot

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

1572 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

VSISOONTOP
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Displays isolines on top of shaded objects in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
0 1 Off On

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSLIGHTINGQUALITY
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Sets the lighting quality in the current viewport.
0 Faceted. A single color is computed for each face of a surface or 3D solid.

VSISOONTOP | 1573

Smooth. The colors are computed as a gradient between the vertices of the faces. Smoothest. If the Per-Pixel Lighting setting is turned on in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box, then the colors are computed for individual pixels. If not, the Smooth setting is used instead.

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSMATERIALMODE
Quick Reference
See also:

Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls the display of materials in the current viewport. Turn off the display of materials and textures to maximize performance during unrelated operations. Turn off the display of textures to modify materials, or to increase performance during unrelated operations. After turning them off, you can restore the display of materials and textures.
0 1 2 No materials are displayed Materials are displayed, textures are not displayed Materials and textures are displayed

1574 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSMAX
Quick Reference
See also:

Save and Restore Model Layout Viewport Arrangements

(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the upper-right corner of the current viewport's virtual screen. Expressed as a UCS coordinate.

VSMIN
Quick Reference
See also:

Save and Restore Model Layout Viewport Arrangements

(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value: Varies Stores the lower-left corner of the current viewport's virtual screen. Expressed as a UCS coordinate.

VSMAX | 1575

VSMONOCOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Shade and Color Faces

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 255,255,255 Sets the color for monochrome and tint display of faces in the visual style applied to the current viewport. The initial value is white. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSOBSCUREDCOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: BYENTITY Specifies the color of obscured (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Valid values include ByLayer (256), ByBlock (0), ByEntity (257), and any AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color (an integer from 1 to 255). You can also specify a true color or a color book color. Valid values for true colors are a string of integers each from 1 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB. The True Color setting is entered as follows: RGB:000,000,000

1576 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSOBSCUREDEDGES
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether obscured (hidden) edges are displayed.
0 1 Off On

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSOBSCUREDLTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies the linetype of obscured (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport.

VSOBSCUREDEDGES | 1577

The range is 1 to 11.

1 Solid

Dashed

Dotted

Short Dash

Medium Dash

Long Dash

Double Short Dash

Double Medium Dash

Double Long Dash

Medium Long Dash

Sparse Dot

The initial value of VSOBSCUREDLTYPE varies on the current visual style. Visual Style (VSCURRENT)
2D Wireframe

Initial Value
1

1578 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

Visual Style (VSCURRENT)

Conceptual Hidden Shaded Shaded with Edges Shades of Gray Sketchy Wireframe X-ray Realistic

Initial Value
1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSOCCLUDEDCOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value: ByEntity Specifies the color of occluded (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Valid values include ByLayer (256), ByBlock (0), ByEntity (257), and any AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color (an integer from 1 to 255).

VSOCCLUDEDCOLOR | 1579

You can also specify a true color or a color book color. Valid values for true colors are a string of integers each from 1 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB. The True Color setting is entered as follows: RGB:000,000,000 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSOCCLUDEDEDGES
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Controls whether occluded (hidden) edges are displayed.
0 1 Off On

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

1580 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Specifies the linetype of occluded (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. The range is 1 to 11.
1 Solid

Dashed

Dotted

Short Dash

Medium Dash

Long Dash

Double Short Dash

Double Medium Dash

Double Long Dash

Medium Long Dash

Sparse Dot

VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE | 1581

The initial value of VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE varies on the current visual style. Visual Style (VSCURRENT)
2D Wireframe Conceptual Hidden Shaded Shaded with Edges Shades of Gray Sketchy Wireframe X-ray Realistic

Initial Value
1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSSHADOWS
Quick Reference
See also:

Display Backgrounds and Shadows

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0

1582 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

Controls whether a visual style displays shadows.

0 1 2 No shadows are displayed Ground shadows only are displayed Full shadows are displayed

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSSILHEDGES
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 0 Controls display of silhouette edges of solid objects in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
0 1 Off On

VSSILHEDGES | 1583

The initial value of VSSILHEDGES depends on the current visual style. Visual Style (VSCURRENT)
2D Wireframe Conceptual Hidden Shaded Shaded with Edges Shades of Gray Sketchy Wireframe X-ray Realistic

Initial Value
0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

1584 | Chapter 47 V System Variables

NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSSILHWIDTH
Quick Reference
See also:

Control the Display of Edges

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 5 Specifies the width in pixels of silhouette edges in the current viewport. The range is 1 to 25. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.

VSSILHWIDTH | 1585

1586

W System Variables

WINDOWAREACOLOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Customize Object Selection

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 150 Controls the color of the transparent selection area during window selection. The valid range is 1 to 255. SELECTIONAREA on page 1478 must be on.

WORLDUCS
Quick Reference
See also:

Use Coordinates and Coordinate Systems (UCS)

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1

1587

Indicates whether the UCS is the same as the WCS.

0 1 UCS differs from the WCS UCS matches the WCS

WORLDVIEW
Quick Reference
See also:

Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 1 Determines whether input to the DVIEW and VPOINT commands is relative to the WCS (default) or the current UCS.
0 1 UCS remains unchanged UCS changes to the WCS for the duration of the command; the command input is relative to the current UCS

WRITESTAT
Quick Reference
See also:

Overview of AutoLISP and Visual LISP

(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value: 1 Indicates whether a drawing file is read-only or can be revised.

1588 | Chapter 48 W System Variables

For developers who need to determine write status through AutoLISP.

0 1 Cannot write to the drawing Can write to the drawing

WRITESTAT | 1589

1590

X System Variables

XCLIPFRAME
Quick Reference
See also:

Update Referenced Drawing Attachments

Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value: 2 Determines whether xref clipping boundaries are visible or plotted in the current drawing. The FRAME system variable overrides the XCLIPFRAME setting.Use the XCLIPFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the clipped xref frame settings
0 The frame is not visible and it is not plotted. The frame temporarily reappears during selection preview or object selection. The clipped xref frame is displayed and plotted The clipped xref frame is displayed but not plotted

1 2

1591

XDWGFADECTL
Quick Reference
See also:

Attach Drawing References (Xrefs)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 70 Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects. The valid XDWGFADECTL system variable value is between -90 and 90. When XDWGFADECTL is set to a negative value, the Xref Fading feature is not turned on, but the setting is stored.
0 >0 DWG xref objects are not faded. When the value is positive, controls the percent of fading up to 90 percent. When the value is negative, xref objects are not faded, but the value is saved for switching to that value by changing the sign.

XLOADCTL
Quick Reference
See also:

Work with Demand Loading in Large Drawings

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 2

1592 | Chapter 49 X System Variables

Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy.
0 1 Turns off demand-loading; the entire drawing is loaded. Turns on demand-loading. Referenced drawings are kept open and locked. Turns on demand-loading. Copies of referenced drawings are opened and locked; referenced drawings are not locked

When XLOADCTL is set to 2, a copy of each referenced drawing file is stored in the folder specified by the XLOADPATH system variable or the temporary files folder (set in the Application Preferences dialog box). Additionally, xrefs load faster when you work across a network: the performance enhancement is most pronounced when you open drawings with many xrefs.

XLOADPATH
Quick Reference
See also:

Set Paths for Temporary Xref File Copies

Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value: Varies Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-loaded xref files. For more information, see XLOADCTL on page 1592.

XLOADPATH | 1593

XREFCTL
Quick Reference
See also:

Track External Reference Operations (Log File)

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls whether external reference log (XLG) files are created.
0 1 Does not write log files Writes log files

XREFTYPE
Quick Reference
See also:

Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 0 Controls the default reference type when attaching or overlaying an external reference.
0 1 Attachment is the default Overlay is the default

1594 | Chapter 49 X System Variables

Z System Variables

ZOOMFACTOR
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View

Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value: 60 Controls how much the magnification changes when the mouse wheel moves forward or backward. Accepts an integer between 3 and 100 as a valid value. The higher the number, the more the change.

ZOOMWHEEL
Quick Reference
See also:

Pan or Zoom a View Integer Registry

Type: Saved in:

1595

Initial value: 0 Toggles the direction of transparent zoom operations when you scroll the middle mouse wheel.
0 Moves wheel forward zooms in; moving wheel backwards zooms out. Move wheel forward zooms out; moving wheel backwards zooms in.

1596 | Chapter 50 Z System Variables

Glossary

Commands associated with definitions are shown in parentheses at the end of the definition. A CUIx file that is typically controlled by a CAD manager. It is often accessed by many users and is stored in a shared network location. The file is read-only to users to prevent the data in the file from being changed. A CAD manager creates an enterprise CUxI file by modifying a main CUIx file and then saving the file to the support location defined in the Options dialog box, Files tab. 3D mesh primitive Basic mesh forms such as boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, wedges, spheres, and tori. 3D view Any view where the UCS icon appears in rendered colored form; current visual style is not 2D Wireframe, and the model is being viewed from an isometric view. absolute coordinates Coordinate values measured from a coordinate system's origin point. See also origin, relative coordinates, user coordinate system (UCS), world coordinates, and world coordinate system (WCS). acquired point In the tracking or object snap tracking methods of locating a point, an intermediate location used as a reference. acquisition marker During tracking or object snap tracking, the temporary plus sign displayed at the location of an acquired point. Action bar Toolbar-like UI that displays the actions associated with a parameter object. activate Part of the Autodesk software registration process. It allows you to run a product in compliance with the product's end-user license agreement. adaptive degradation A method of controlling performance that turns off features in a certain order when performance falls below a specified level. adaptive sampling A method to accelerate the anti-aliasing process within the bounds of the sample matrix size. See also anti-aliasing.

1597

adjacent cell selection A selection of table cells that share at least one boundary with another cell in the same selection. alias A shortcut for a command. For example, CP is an alias for COPY, and Z is an alias for ZOOM. You define aliases in the acad.pgp file. aliasing The effect of discrete picture elements, or pixels, aligned as a straight or curved edge on a fixed grid appearing to be jagged or stepped. See also anti-aliasing. aligned dimension A dimension that measures the distance between two points at any angle. The dimension line is parallel to the line connecting the dimension's definition points. (DIMALIGNED) alpha channel Alpha is a type of data, found in 32-bit bitmap files, that assigns transparency to the pixels in the image. A 24-bit truecolor file contains three channels of color information: red, green, and blue, or RGB. Each channel of a truecolor bitmap file is defined by 8 bits, providing 256 levels of intensity. The intensity of each channel determines the color of the pixel in the image. Thus, an RGB file is 24-bit with 256 levels each of red, green, and blue. By adding a fourth, alpha channel, the file can specify the transparency, or opacity, of each of the pixels. An alpha value of 0 is transparent, an alpha value of 255 is opaque, and values in between are semi-transparent. An RGBA file (red, green, blue, alpha) is 32-bit, with the extra 8 bits of alpha providing 256 levels of transparency. To output a rendered image with alpha, save in an alpha-compatible format such as PNG, TIFF, or Targa. ambient color A color produced only by ambient light. Ambient color is the color of an object where it is in shadow. This color is what the object reflects when illuminated by ambient light rather than direct light. ambient light Light that illuminates all surfaces of a model with equal intensity. Ambient light has no single source or direction and does not diminish in intensity over distance. angular dimension A dimension that measures angles or arc segments and consists of text, extension lines, and leaders. (DIMANGULAR) angular unit The unit of measurement for an angle. Angular units can be measured in decimal degrees, degrees/minutes/seconds, grads, and radians. annotation scale A setting that is saved with model space, layout viewports, and model views. When you create annotative objects, they are scaled based on the current annotation scale setting and automatically displayed at the correct size. annotational constraint Dimensional constraint used to control the size of the geometry as well as annotate the drawing.

1598 | Chapter 51 Glossary

See also parameter constraint, and dynamic constraint annotations Text, dimensions, tolerances, symbols, notes, and other types of explanatory symbols or objects that are used to add information to your model. annotative A property that belongs to objects that are commonly used to annotate drawings. This property allows you to automate the process of scaling annotations. Annotative objects are defined at a paper height and display in layout viewports and model space at the size determined by the annotation scale set for those spaces. anonymous block An unnamed block created by a number of features, including associative and nonassociative dimensions. anti-aliasing A method that reduces aliasing by shading the pixels adjacent to the main pixels that define a line or boundary. See also aliasing. approximation points Point locations that a B-spline must pass near, within a fit tolerance. See also fit points and interpolation points. array 1. Multiple copies of selected objects in a rectangular or polar (radial) pattern. (ARRAY) 2. A collection of data items, each identified by a subscript or key, arranged so a computer can examine the collection and retrieve data with the key. arrowhead A terminator, such as an arrowhead, slash, or dot, at the end of a dimension line showing where a dimension begins and ends.

aspect ratio Ratio of display width to height. associative dimension A dimension that automatically adapts as the associated geometry is modified. Controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. See also nonassociative dimension and exploded dimension. associative hatch Hatching that conforms to its bounding objects such that modifying the bounding objects automatically adjusts the hatch. (BHATCH) associative surfaces Associative surfaces automatically adjust their location and shape when the geometric objects associated with them are modified. Controlled by the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY on page 1507 system variable.

| 1599

attenuation The diminishing of light intensity over distance. attribute definition An object that is included in a block definition to store alphanumeric data. Attribute values can be predefined or specified when the block is inserted. Attribute data can be extracted from a drawing and inserted into external files. (ATTDEF) attribute extraction file A text file to which extracted attribute data is written. The contents and format are determined by the attribute extraction template file. See also attribute extraction template file. attribute extraction template file A text file that determines which attributes are extracted and how they are formatted when written to an attribute extraction file. See also attribute extraction file. attribute prompt The text string displayed when you insert a block with an attribute whose value is undefined. See also attribute definition, attribute tag, and attribute value. attribute tag A text string associated with an attribute that identifies a particular attribute during extraction from the drawing database. See also attribute definition, attribute prompt, and attribute value. attribute value The alphanumeric information associated with an attribute tag. See also attribute definition, attribute prompt, and attribute tag. AutoCAD for Mac library search path axis tripod Icon with X, Y, and Z coordinates that is used to visualize the viewpoint (view direction) of a drawing without displaying the drawing. (VPOINT) B-spline curve A blended piecewise polynomial curve passing near a given set of control points. See also Bezier curve. (SPLINE) back face The opposite side of a front face. Back faces are not visible in a rendered image. See also front faces. base point 1. In the context of editing grips, the grip that changes to a solid color when selected to specify the focus of the subsequent editing operation. 2. A point for relative distance and angle when copying, moving, and rotating objects. 3. The insertion base point of the current drawing. (BASE) 4. The insertion base point for a block definition. (BLOCK) baseline An imaginary line on which text characters appear to rest. Individual characters can have descenders that drop below the baseline. See also baseline dimension. baseline dimension Multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline. Also called parallel dimensions. See also baseline. basic tooltip Displays a brief description for the tooltip.

1600 | Chapter 51 Glossary

Bezier curve A polynomial curve defined by a set of control points, representing an equation of an order one less than the number of points being considered. A Bezier curve is a special case of a B-spline curve. See also B-spline curve. bitmap The digital representation of an image having bits referenced to pixels. In color graphics, a different value represents each red, green, and blue component of a pixel. blips Temporary screen markers displayed in the drawing area when you specify a point or select objects. (BLIPMODE) block A generic term for one or more objects that are combined to create a single object. Commonly used for either block definition or block reference. See also block definition and block reference. (BLOCK) block definition The name, base point, and set of objects that are combined and stored in the symbol table of a drawing. See also block and block reference. block definition table The nongraphical data area of a drawing file that stores block definitions. See also named object. block instance See block reference. block reference A compound object that is inserted in a drawing and displays the data stored in a block definition. Also called instance. See also block and block definition. (INSERT) bounded area A closed area that consists of a single object (such as a circle) or of multiple, coplanar objects that overlap. You can insert hatch fills within bounded areas. Bounded areas are also used to create 3D objects through extrusion by using the PRESSPULL command. bump map A map in which brightness values are translated into apparent changes in the height of the surface of an object. BYBLOCK A special object property used to specify that the object inherits the color or linetype of any block containing it. See also BYLAYER. BYLAYER A special object property used to specify that the object inherits the color or linetype associated with its layer. See also BYBLOCK. callout block A block used as symbol to reference another sheet. Callout blocks have many industry-specific terms, such as reference tags, detail keys, detail markers, and so on. See also label block. camera Defines the current eye-level position in a 3D model. A camera has a location XYZ coordinate, a target XYZ coordinate, and a field of view or lens length, which determines the magnification or zoom factor.

| 1601

camera target Defines the point you are viewing by specifying the coordinate at the center of the view. candela The SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction) (Symbol: cd). Cd/Sr category See view category. cell The smallest available table selection. cell boundary The four gridlines surrounding a table cell. An adjacent cell selection can be surrounded with a cell boundary. cell style A style that contains specific formatting for table cells. circular external reference An externally referenced drawing (xref) that references itself directly or indirectly. The xref that creates the circular condition is ignored. clipping planes The boundaries that define or clip the field of view. CMYK For cyan, magenta, yellow, and key color. A system of defining colors by specifying the percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, and the key color, which is typically black. Color bleed scale Increases or decreases the saturation of the reflected color from the material. color map A table defining the intensity of red, green, and blue (RGB) for each displayed color. column A vertically adjacent table cell selection spanning the height of the table. A single column is one cell in width. command line A text area reserved for keyboard input, prompts, and messages. compass A visual aid that indicates the directions North, South, East, and West in the current model. composite solid A solid created from two or more individual solids. (UNION, SUBTRACT, INTERSECT) constraint bar Displays the geometric constraints associated with objects or with points on objects. constraint point Point on an object that can be geometrically and/or dimensionally constrained (for example, an endpoint or an insertion point). constraints Form of parametric design.

1602 | Chapter 51 Glossary

Rules that govern the position, slope, tangency, dimensions, and relationships among objects in a geometry. construction plane See workplane. continued dimension A type of linear dimension that uses the second extension line origin of a selected dimension as its first extension line origin, breaking one long dimension into shorter segments that add up to the total measurement. Also called chain dimension. (DIMCONTINUE) control frame A series of point locations used as a mechanism to control the shape of a B-spline. These points are connected by a series of line segments for visual clarity and to distinguish the control frame from fit points. The CVSHOW and CVHIDE commands must be turned on to display and hide control frames. control point See control frame. Coons patch In 3D surface meshes, the bicubic surface (one curved in the M direction and another in the N direction) interpolated between four edges. coordinate filters Functions that extract individual X, Y, and Z coordinate values from different points to create a new, composite point. Also called X,Y,Z point filters. crease A sharpened ridge that defines one or more edges of a mesh face subobject. (MESHCREASE) cross sections Generally, curves or lines that define the profile (shape) of a lofted solid or surface. Cross sections can be open or closed. A lofted solid or surface is drawn in the space between the cross sections. (LOFT) crosshairs A type of cursor consisting of two lines that intersect.

crossing selection A rectangular area drawn to select objects fully or partly within its borders. CTB file SA color-dependent plot style table. ctrl-cycle Method for cycling between different behaviors while editing geometry, either in a command or when grip-editing. Pressing and releasing the Ctrl key cycles the behavior. For constrained geometry, Ctrl-cycling switches between enforcing and relaxing constraints. current drawing A drawing file that is open in the program, and receives any command or action that you enter.

| 1603

cursor See pointer and crosshairs. cursor menu See shortcut menu. curve-fit A smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair of vertices. The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses any tangent direction you specify. custom grips In a dynamic block reference, used to manipulate the geometry and custom properties. custom object A type of object that is created by an ObjectARX application and that typically has more specialized capabilities than standard objects. Custom objects include parametric solids (AutoCAD Mechanical Desktop), intelligently interactive door symbols (AutoCAD Architecture), polygon objects (AutoCAD Map 3D), and associative dimension objects (AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT). See also proxy object and object enabler. customization (CUI) file An XML-based file that stores customization data for the user interface. You modify a customization file through the Customize dialog box. decimal degrees A notation for specifying latitude and longitude. For example, 35.1234, 100.5678. Latitude always precedes longitude default drawing See initial environment. default lighting The lighting in a shaded viewport when the sun and user lights are turned off. Faces are lighted by two distant light sources that follow the viewpoint as you move around the model. default value The value that is accepted when you press Enter at a sub-prompt. The default value is displayed in angle brackets <>. See also default. definition points Points for creating a dimension. The program refers to the points to modify the appearance and value of a nonassociative dimension when the dimensioned object is modified. Also called defpoints and stored on the special layer DEFPOINTS. definition table The nongraphical data area of a drawing file that stores block definitions. dependency highlighting In a dynamic block definition, how associated objects are displayed when you select a parameter, grip, or action. dependent named objects (in xrefs) Named objects brought into a drawing by an external reference. See also named object and symbol table. dependent symbols See dependent named objects (in xrefs). DIESEL For Direct Interpretively Evaluated String Expression Language.

1604 | Chapter 51 Glossary

diffuse color An object's predominant color. dimension line arc An arc (usually with arrows at each end) spanning the angle formed by the extension lines of an angle being measured. The dimension text near this arc sometimes divides it into two arcs. See also angular dimension. dimension style A named group of dimension settings that determines the appearance of the dimension and simplifies the setting of dimension system variables. (DIMSTYLE) dimension text The measurement value of dimensioned objects. dimension variables A set of numeric values, text strings, and settings that control dimensioning features. (DIMSTYLE) dimensional constraint Parametric dimensions that control the size, angle, or position of geometry relative to the drawing or other objects.When dimensions are changed, the object resizes. direct distance entry A method to specify a second point by first moving the cursor to indicate direction and then entering a distance. dithering Combining color dots to give the impression of displaying more colors than are actually available. drawing area The area in which your drawings are displayed and modified. The size of the drawing area varies, depending on the size of the AutoCAD for Mac window and on how many toolbars and other elements are displayed. See also AutoCAD for Mac window. drawing extents The smallest rectangle that contains all objects in a drawing, positioned on the screen to display the largest possible view of all objects. (ZOOM)

drawing limits See grid limits. drawing template A drawing file with preestablished settings for new drawings such as acad.dwtand acadiso.dwt however, any drawing can be used as a template. See also initial environment.

| 1605

driven constraint A non-parametric dimension enclosed in parentheses that shows the current value of geometry. The value is updated when the geometry changes size, but it does not control geometry. driving dimension A parametric dimension that determines the size of geometry and resizes the object when its value changes. driving property A lookup property is considered invertible when a manual change in the lookup value for a block reference causes other properties values change. DWG Standard file format for saving vector graphics. DXF For drawing interchange format. An ASCII or binary file format of a drawing file for exporting drawings to other applications or for importing drawings from other applications. dynamic constraint Dimensional constraint (Constraint Form property = "dynamic") that displays the constraints only when you select the constrained object. See also: parameter constraint See also: annotational constraint dynamic dimension Temporary dimensions that appear on objects, including dynamic block references, when they are grip edited. edge The boundary of a face. edge modifiers Effects such as overhang and jitter that control how edges are displayed in a shaded model. elevation The default Z value above or below the XY plane of the current user coordinate system, which is used for entering coordinates and digitizing locations. (ELEV)

empty selection set A selection set that contains no objects. environment map A bitmap that is used to simulate reflections in materials that have reflective properties. The map is wrapped around the scene and any reflective object will show the appropriate portion of the map in the reflective parts of its material. environment variable A setting stored in the operating system that controls the operation of a program.

1606 | Chapter 51 Glossary

explode To disassemble a complex object, such as a block, dimension, solid, or polyline, into simpler objects. In the case of a block, the block definition is unchanged. The block reference is replaced by the components of the block. See also block, block definition, and block reference. (EXPLODE) exploded dimension Independent objects that have the appearance of a dimension but are not associated with the dimensioned object or each other. Controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. See also associative dimension, nonassociative dimension, and explode. (EXPLODE) extents See drawing extents. external reference (xref) A drawing file referenced by another drawing. (XREF) extrusion A 3D solid created by sweeping an object that encloses an area along a linear path. face A triangular or quadrilateral portion of a surface object. face color mode A setting in the visual style that controls how color is displayed on a face. face style A setting in the visual style that defines the shading on a face. facet The underlying structure of the face of a 3D solid, surface, or mesh. Facets can be quadrilateral or triangular. Smoothing a mesh object increases the number of facets for each face. feature control frame The tolerance that applies to specific features or patterns of features. Feature control frames always contain at least a geometric characteristic symbol to indicate the type of control and a tolerance value to indicate the amount of acceptable variation. fence A multisegmented line specified to select objects it passes through. field A specialized text object set up to display data that may change during the life cycle of the drawing. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. (FIELD) fill A solid color covering an area bounded by lines or curves. (FILL) filters See coordinate filters. fit points Locations that a B-spline must pass through exactly or within a fit tolerance. See also interpolation points and approximation points. fit tolerance The setting for the maximum distance that a B-spline can pass for each of the fit points that define it. floating viewports See layout viewports.

| 1607

font A character set, made up of letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and symbols of a distinctive proportion and design. footcandle The American unit of illuminance (symbol: fc). Lm/ft^2. footcandle The American unit of illuminance (symbol: fc). Lm/ft^2 freeze A setting that suppresses the display of objects on selected layers. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, regenerated, or plotted. Freezing layers shortens regenerating time. See also thaw. (LAYER) front faces Faces with their normals pointed outward. general property Properties that are common between a selection of objects. These include Color, Layer, Linetype, Linetype scale, Plot style, Lineweight, Transparency, and Thickness. generic surface A 3D surface object with no control vertices, history, or analytic information. Generic surfaces cannot be associative and they are created when associative analytic surfaces are separated or by using the BREP on page 146 command. See also procedural surface and NURBS surface. geometric constraint Rules that define the geometric relationships of objects (or points of objects) elements and control how an object can change shape or size. Geometric constraints are coincident, collinear, concentric, equal, fix, horizontal, parallel, perpendicular, tangent, and vertical. geometry All graphical objects such as lines, circles, arcs, polylines, and dimensions. Nongraphical objects, such as linetypes, lineweights, text styles, and layers are not considered geometry. See also named object. gizmo A tool that permits you to manipulate a 3D object uniformly or along a specified axis or plane. Examples of gizmos include the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, and 3D Scale gizmos. They are displayed when you select a 3D object. global illumination An indirect illumination technique that allows for effects such as color bleeding. As light hits a colored object in the model, photons bounce to adjacent objects and tint them with the color of the original object. Gooch shading A type of shading that uses a transition from cool to warm colors rather than from dark to light. graphics area See drawing area. grid An area covered with regularly spaced dots or lines to aid drawing. The grid spacing is adjustable. The grid dots are never plotted. See also grid limits. (GRID)

1608 | Chapter 51 Glossary

grid limits The user-defined rectangular boundary of the drawing area covered by dots when the grid is turned on. Also called drawing limits. (LIMITS)

grip modes The editing capabilities activated when grips are displayed on an object: stretching, moving, rotating, scaling, and mirroring. grip tool An icon that you use in a 3D view to easily constrain the movement or rotation of a selection set of objects to an axis or a plane. (3DMOVE, 3DROTATE) grips Small squares and triangles that appear on objects you select. After selecting the grip, you edit the object by dragging it with the pointing device instead of entering commands. ground plane The XY plane of the user coordinate system when perspective projection is turned on. The ground plane displays with a color gradient between the ground horizon (nearest to the horizon) and the ground origin (opposite the horizon). See also sky and underground. guide curves Lines or curves that intersect each cross section of a lofted solid or surface and that define the form by adding additional wireframe information to the object. (LOFT) handle A unique alphanumeric tag for an object in the program's database. heads-up display (HUD) The process of transparently displaying user interface elements on top of or over the drawing area without obscuring the view of the objects drawn on the drawing area. helix An open 2D or 3D spiral. (HELIX) Help menu In the AutoCAD for Mac, you can find Help on the Mac IOS menu bar or by pressing Fn-F1. HLS For hue, lightness, and saturation. A system of defining color by specifying the amount of hue, lightness, and saturation. Home view A special view saved with the drawing that is controlled through the ViewCube tool. The Home view is similar in concept to the default, initial view presented when a drawing is first opened.

| 1609

horizontal landing An optional line segment connecting the tail of a leader line with the leader content. Illuminance In photometry, illuminance is the total luminous flux incident on a surface per unit area. indirect bump scale Scales the effect of the base materials bump mapping in areas lit by indirect light. indirect illumination Illumination techniques such as global illumination and final gathering, that enhance the realism of a scene by simulating radiosity, or the interreflection of light between objects in a scene. initial environment The variables and settings for new drawings as defined by the default drawing template, such as acad.dwt or acadiso.dwt. See also template drawing. interface element A user interface object that can be customized, such as a pull-down menu or tool set. interpolation points Defining points that a B-spline passes through. See also approximation points and fit points. island An enclosed area within another enclosed area. Islands may be detected as part of the process of creating hatches, polylines, and regions. (BHATCH, BOUNDARY) ISO For International Standards Organization. The organization that sets international standards in all fields except electrical and electronics. Headquarters are in Geneva, Switzerland. isometric snap style A drafting option that aligns the cursor with two of three isometric axes and displays grid, making 2D isometric drawings easier to create. landing The portion of a leader object that acts as a pointer to the object being called out. A landing can either be a straight line or a spline curve. landing gap An optional space between a leader tail and the leader content. layer A logical grouping of data that are like transparent acetate overlays on a drawing. You can view layers individually or in combination. (LAYER) layout The environment in which you create and design paper space layout viewports to be plotted. Multiple layouts can be created for each drawing. layout viewports Objects that are created in paper space that display views. See also paper space. (VPORTS) leader tail The portion of a leader line that is connected to the annotation.

1610 | Chapter 51 Glossary

lens length Defines the magnification properties of a camera's lens. The greater the lens length, the narrower the field of view. level of smoothness The property assigned to a mesh object to control how much the edges of the object are smoothed. Level 0 (zero) represents the least rounded shape for a specified mesh object. Higher levels result in increased smoothness. light glyph The graphic representation of a point light or a spotlight. limits See drawing limits. line font See linetype. linetype How a line or type of curve is displayed. For example, a continuous line has a different linetype than a dashed line. Also called line font. (LINETYPE) lineweight A width value that can be assigned to all graphical objects except TrueType fonts and raster images.

LL84 coordinate system Common latitude longitudinal-based coordinate system where latitude and longitude are both measured from -90 to 90 degrees. Longitude begins at 0 degrees at the Prime Meridian in Greenwich, England and is measured from -180 to 180. Latitude is 0 degrees at the equator and is measured from -90 to 90. lofted solid/surface A solid or surface that is drawn through a set of two or more cross-section curves. The cross sections define the profile (shape) of the resulting solid or surface. Cross sections (generally, curves or lines) can be open or closed. (LOFT) lumen The SI unit of luminous flux (Symbol: lm). Cd * Sr luminaire This refers to the aggregation of a lamp or lamps and its fixture. The fixture may be a simple can or a complex armature with constrained joints. luminance Luminance is the value of light reflected off a surface. It is a measure of how bright or dark we perceive the surface. luminous flux The perceived power in per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the perceived power emitted in all directions. lux The SI unit of illuminance (symbol: lx). Lm/m^2 main customization file A writable CUI file that defines most of the user interface elements (including the pull-down menus and tool sets). merge In tables, an adjacent cell selection that has been combined into a single cell.

| 1611

mesh A tessellated, or subdivided object type that is defined by faces, edges, and vertices. Mesh can be smoothed to achieve a more rounded appearance and creased to introduce ridges. Before , only the less modifiable polygon and polyface mesh was available. mirror To create a new version of an existing object by reflecting it symmetrically with respect to a prescribed line or plane. (MIRROR) mode A software setting or operating state. model A two- or three-dimensional representation of an object. model space One of the two primary spaces in which objects reside. Typically, a geometric model is placed in a three-dimensional coordinate space called model space. A final layout of specific views and annotations of this model is placed in paper space. See also paper space. (MSPACE) model viewports A type of display that splits the drawing area into one or more adjacent rectangular viewing areas. See also layout viewports, TILEMODE, and viewport. (VPORTS) multileader A leader object that creates annotations with multiple leader lines. named object Describes the various types of nongraphical information, such as styles and definitions, stored with a drawing. Named objects include linetypes, layers, dimension styles, text styles, block definitions, layouts, views, and viewport configurations. Named objects are stored in definition (symbol) tables. named objects, dependent See dependent named objects (in xrefs). named view A view saved for restoration later. (VIEW) node An object snap specification to locate points, dimension definition points, and dimension text origins. non-associative dimension A dimension that does not automatically change as the associated geometry is modified. Controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. See also associative dimension and exploded dimension. normal A normal is a vector that defines which way a face is pointing. The direction of the normal indicates the front, or outer surface of the face. noun-verb selection Selecting an object first and then performing an operation on it rather than entering a command first and then selecting the object. NURBS For nonuniform rational B-spline curve. A B-spline curve or surface defined by a series of weighted control points and one or more knot vectors. See also B-spline curve. NURBS surface Surfaces that are have control vertices in the U and V directions. NURBS surfaces cannot be associative. See also procedural surface and generic surface.

1612 | Chapter 51 Glossary

object One or more graphical elements, such as text, dimensions, lines, circles, or polylines, treated as a single element for creation, manipulation, and modification. Formerly called entity. Object Snap mode Methods for selecting commonly needed points on an object while you create or edit a drawing. See also running object snap and object snap override. object snap override Turning off or changing a running Object Snap mode for input of a single point. See also Object Snap mode and running object snap. ObjectARX (AutoCAD for Mac Runtime Extension) A compiled-language programming environment for developing AutoCAD for Mac applications. opacity map Projection of opaque and transparent areas onto objects, creating the effect of a solid surface with holes or gaps. origin The point where coordinate axes intersect. For example, the origin of a Cartesian coordinate system is where the X, Y, and Z axes meet at 0,0,0. Ortho mode A setting that limits pointing device input to horizontal or vertical (relative to the current snap angle and the user coordinate system). See also snap angle and user coordinate system (UCS). orthogonal Having perpendicular slopes or tangents at the point of intersection. page setup A collection of plot device and other settings that affect the appearance and format of the final output. These settings can be modified and applied to other layouts. palette A user interface element that can be either docked, anchored, or floating in the drawing area. Dockable windows include the command line, status bar, Properties Inspector, and so on. pan To shift the view of a drawing without changing magnification. See also zoom. (PAN) paper space One of two primary spaces in which objects reside. Paper space is used for creating a finished layout for printing or plotting, as opposed to doing drafting or design work. You design your model using the Model tab. See also model space and viewport. (PSPACE) parametric design Ability to establish relationships between objects, to drive the size and orientation of geometry with model and user-defined parameters. parametric drawing Feature in AutoCAD that assigns constraints to objects, establishing the distance, location, and orientation of objects with respect to other objects. path curve Defines the direction and length that a profile curve is lofted, swept, or extruded to create a solid or surface. (SWEEP, LOFT, EXTRUDE)

| 1613

PC3 file Partial plotter configuration file. PC3 files contain plot settings information such as the device driver and model, the output port to which the device is connected, and various device-specific settings, but do not include any custom plotter calibration or custom paper size information. See also PMP file, STB file, and CTB file. perspective view Objects in 3D seen by an observer positioned at the viewpoint looking at the view center. Objects appear smaller when the distance from the observer (at the view point) to the view center increases. Although a perspective view appears realistic, it does not preserve the shapes of objects. Parallel lines seemingly converge in the view. The program has perspective view settings for VPORTS table entries as well as viewport objects. photometric lights Photometric lights are physically-correct lights. Physically correct lights attenuate as the square of the distance. Photometry is the science of measurement of visible light in terms of its perceived brightness. photorealistic rendering Rendering that resembles a photograph. pick button The button on a pointing device that is used to select objects or specify points on the screen. For example, on a two-button mouse, it is the left button by default. pick points Clicking and acquiring a point on an object in the drawing. plan view A view orientation from a point on the positive Z axis toward the origin (0,0,0). (PLAN)

planar face A flat face that can be located anywhere in 3D space. planar projection Mapping of objects or images onto a plane. planar surface A flat surface that can be located anywhere in 3D space. (PLANESURF) pline See polyline. plot style An object property that specifies a set of overrides for color, dithering, gray scale, pen assignments, screening, linetype, lineweight, endstyles, joinstyles, and fill styles. Plot styles are applied at plot time.

1614 | Chapter 51 Glossary

plot style table A set of plot styles. Plot styles are defined in plot style tables and apply to objects only when the plot style table is attached to a layout or viewport. PMP file Plot Model Parameter. File containing custom plotter calibration and custom paper size information associated with plotter configuration file. point 1. A location in three-dimensional space specified by X, Y, and Z coordinate values. 2. An object consisting of a single coordinate location. (POINT) point filters See coordinate filters. pointer A cursor on a video display screen that can be moved around to place textual or graphical information. See also crosshairs. polar array Objects copied around a specified center point a specified number of times. (ARRAY) Polar Snap A precision drawing tool used to snap to incremental distances along the polar tracking alignment path. See also polar tracking on page 1615. polar tracking A precision drawing tool that displays temporary alignment paths defined by user-specified polar angles. See also Polar Snap. polyface and polygon mesh Legacy mesh types that were available before . Although you can continue to create polygonal and polyface mesh (for example, by setting MESHTYPE to 0), the newer, more modifiable mesh type is recommended. polygon window selection A multisided area specified to select objects in groups. See also crossing selection and window selection. polyline An object composed of one or more connected line segments or circular arcs treated as a single object. Also called pline. (PLINE, PEDIT) polysolid A swept solid that is drawn the same way you draw a polyline or that is based on an existing line. By default, a polysolid always has a rectangular profile. You can specify the height and width of the profile. (POLYSOLID) pre-selection set A selection set of objects that is defined prior to the execution of an action macro. primary table fragment The fragment of a broken table that contains the beginning set of rows up to the first table break. primitive Basic 3D forms such as boxes, cones, cylinders, pyramids, wedges, spheres, and tori. You can create primitive meshes and primitive 3D solid objects. procedural materials Materials that generate a 3D pattern in two or more colors, and apply it to an object. These include marble and wood. Also called template materials.

| 1615

procedural surface A 3D surface object that has history and analytic information, but no control vertices. Procedural surfaces are the only type of surface that can be associative. See also generic surface and NURBS surface. profile curve An object that is swept, extruded, or revolved and defines the shape of the resulting solid or surface. (SWEEP, EXTRUDE, REVOLVE) prompt A message on the command line or in a tooltip that asks for information or requests action such as specifying a point. proxy object A substitute for a custom object when the ObjectARX application that created the custom object is not available. See also custom object and object enabler. QuickView A tool to preview and switch between open drawings and layouts in a drawing. ray tracing The renderer can generate reflections and refractions. Ray tracing traces the path of rays sampled from the light source. Reflections and refractions generated this way are physically accurate. ray-traced shadows A way that the renderer can generate shadows. Ray tracing traces the path of rays sampled from the light source. Shadows appear where rays have been blocked by objects. Ray-traced shadows have sharp edges. rectangular break To break a table into multiple parts that are evenly spaced and set at a user-specified height using the table breaking grips. redraw To quickly refresh or clean up blip marks in the current viewport without updating the drawing's database. See also regenerate. (REDRAW) reference A definition, known as an external reference or block reference, that is used and stored in the drawing. See also block (BLOCK) and external reference (xref). (XREF) refine To quadruple the number of faces in a mesh object as you reset the baseline level of smoothness. (You cannot make a mesh courser than its baseline level.) You can also refine specified mesh faces without resetting the baseline level of smoothness for the object. (MESHREFINE) reflectance scale Increases or decreases the amount of energy the material reflects. reflection color The color of a highlight on shiny material. Also called specular color. reflection mapping Creates the effect of a scene reflected on the surface of a shiny object. refraction How light distorts through an object. regenerate To update a drawing's screen display by recomputing the screen coordinates from the database. See also redraw. (REGEN)

1616 | Chapter 51 Glossary

region Two-dimensional enclosed areas that have physical properties such as centroids or centers of mass. You can create regions from objects that form closed loops. They area commonly created in order to apply hatching and shading. (REGION) relative coordinates Coordinates specified in relation to previous coordinates. relax constraints Ability to temporarily ignore constraints while editing geometry. After the geometry is edited, the constraints are either removed or retained based on whether the constraint is still valid for the edited geometry. RGB For red, green, and blue. A system of defining colors by specifying percentages of red, green, and blue. roll arrows Curved arrows located above the ViewCube tool with which you can rotate the current view 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise. roughness Value to simulate how light hitting a face is reflected back to the user. A high roughness value simulates a non-shiny or rough object (sandpaper/carpet). A low roughness value simulates a very shiny object (metals, some plastics.) row A horizontally adjacent table cell selection spanning the width of the table. A single row is one cell in height. rubber-band line A line that stretches dynamically on the screen with the movement of the cursor. One endpoint of the line is attached to a point in your drawing, and the other is attached to the moving cursor. running object snap Setting an Object Snap mode so it continues for subsequent selections. See also Object Snap mode and object snap override. (OSNAP) sampling Sampling is an anti-aliasing technique. It provides a "best guess" color for each rendered pixel. The renderer first samples the scene color at locations within the pixel or along the pixel's edge, then uses a filter to combine the samples into a single pixel color. scale representation The display of an annotative object based on the annotation scales that the object supports. For example, if an annotative object supports two annotations scales, it has two scale representations script file A set of commands executed sequentially with a single SCRIPT command. Script files are created outside the program using a text editor, saved in text format, and stored in an external file with the file extension .scr. secondary table fragment Any fragment of a broken table that does not contain the beginning set of rows. selection set One or more selected objects that a command can act upon at the same time.

| 1617

shadow maps A shadow map is a bitmap that the renderer generates during a pre-rendering pass of the scene. Shadow maps don't show the color cast by transparent or translucent objects. On the other hand, shadow maps can have soft-edged shadows, which ray-traced shadows cannot. Shadow mapped shadows provide softer edges and can require less calculation time than ray-traced shadows, but are less accurate. On the Advanced Render Settings palette, shadow mapped shadows are active when Shadow Map is turned on. ShapeManager ShapeManager is the Autodesk technology that provides 3D solid modeling to AutoCAD and other products. shortcut keys Keys and key combinations that start commands; for example, Ccommand-S saves a file. The function keys (Fn-F1, Fn-F2, and so on) are also shortcut keys. Also known as accelerator keys. shortcut menu The menu displayed at your cursor location when you right-click your pointing device. The shortcut menu and the options it provides depend on the pointer location and other conditions, such as whether an object is selected or a command is in progress. sky The background color of the drawing area when perspective projection is turned on. The sky displays with a color gradient between the sky horizon (nearest to the horizon) and the sky zenith (opposite the horizon). See also ground plane. smooth shading Smoothing of the edges between polygon faces. smoothness A property of mesh objects that controls the roundness of the object. Objects with higher levels of smoothness have more faces, or tessellations. snap angle The angle that the snap grid is rotated. snap grid The invisible grid that locks the pointer into alignment with the grid points according to the spacing set by Snap. Snap grid does not necessarily correspond to the visible grid, which is controlled separately by GRID. (SNAP) Snap mode A mode for locking a pointing device into alignment with an invisible rectangular grid. When Snap mode is on, the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point on the grid. The snap resolution defines the spacing of this grid. See also Object Snap mode. (SNAP) snap resolution The spacing between points of the snap grid. solid history A property of a solid that allows you to see and modify the original forms of the solid. solid object An object that represents the entire volume of an object, for example a box.

1618 | Chapter 51 Glossary

solid primitive A basic solid form. Solid primitives include: box, wedge, cone, cylinder, sphere, torus, and pyramid. spatial index A list that organizes objects based on their location in space. A spatial index is used to locate what portion of the drawing is read when you partially open a drawing. Saving a spatial index with a drawing also enhances performance when working with external references. The INDEXCTL system variable controls whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with a drawing. specular reflection The light in a narrow cone where the angle of the incoming beam equals the angle of the reflected beam. spline-fit Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a curve approximating a B-spline. This curve, called a spline-fit polyline, passes through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was closed. split face A mesh face that has been subdivided along a specified vector. STB file For plot style table file. Contains plot styles and their characteristics. sub-prompt A command prompt that instructs for a form of input to complete a command or alter a property. subdivision A division, or tessellation in a mesh object. As a mesh object is smoothed, the number of subdivisions increases. subobject A part of a composite object. surface A surface is a 3D object that is a thin shell. Surfaces do not have mass or volume as 3D solids do. There are 3 types of surfaces: analytic, generic, and NURBS. surface associativity See associative surfaces surface normal Positive direction perpendicular to the surface of an object. swept solid/surface A solid or surface created in the shape of the specified profile (the swept object) swept along the specified path. (SWEEP) symbol A representation of an item commonly used in drawings. Symbols are inserted in drawings as blocks. symbol table See definition table and block definition table. system variable A name that is recognized as a mode, size, or limit. Read-only system variables, such as DWGNAME, cannot be modified directly by the user. table A rectangular array of cells that contain annotation, primarily text but also blocks. In the AEC industry, tables are often referred to as schedules and contain information about

| 1619

the materials needed for the construction of the building being designed. In the manufacturing industry, they are often referred to as BOM (bills of materials). (TABLE) table break The point at the bottom of a table row where the table will be split into a supplementary table fragment. table style A style that contains a specific table format and structure. A table style contains at least 3 cell styles. temporary files Data files created during an program session. The files are deleted by the time you end the session. If the session ends abnormally, such as during a power outage, temporary files might be left on the disk. tessellation lines Lines that help you visualize a curved surface.

In a 3D mesh object, tessellations indicate the boundaries of the mesh faces. text style A named, saved collection of settings that determines the appearance of text charactersfor example, stretched, compressed, oblique, mirrored, or set in a vertical column. texture map The projection of an image (such as a tile pattern) onto an object (such as a chair). thaw A setting that displays previously frozen layers. See also freeze. (LAYER) thickness The distance certain objects are extruded to give them a 3D appearance. (PROPERTIES, CHPROP, ELEV, THICKNESS) tiled viewports See model viewports. TILEMODE A system variable that controls whether viewports can be created as movable, resizable objects (layout viewports), or as nonoverlapping display elements that appear side-by-side (model viewports). See also viewport. tooltip A small box of text that identifies or explains an object or interface element when the cursor hovers near or over it. tracking A way to locate a point relative to other points on the drawing. translucency How light is scattered through an object.

1620 | Chapter 51 Glossary

transmittance scale Increases or decreases the amount of energy a transparent material transmits out to the scene. transparency A quantity defining how much light is let through an object. transparent command A command started while another is in progress. Precede transparent commands with an apostrophe. two sided material The positive and negative normal of the material will be considered during the rendering process. UCS See user coordinate system (UCS). UCS icon An icon that indicates the orientation of the UCS axes. (UCSICON)

underconstrained geometry Objects with unsolved degrees of freedom are underconstrained. underground The XY plane of the user coordinate system when perspective projection is turned on and when viewed from below ground. The underground plane displays with a color gradient between the earth horizon (nearest to the horizon) and the earth azimuth (opposite the horizon). See also ground plane and sky. up direction A vector defining what direction is Up. By default this is the positive Z axis (0,0,+1). The up direction and the north direction are always constrained such that they are perpendicular to each other. user coordinate system (UCS) A user-defined coordinate system that defines the orientation of the X, Y, and Z axes in 3D space. The UCS determines the default placement of geometry in a drawing. See also world coordinate system (WCS). user parameter Named user-defined variable (real number or an expression) that can be used in expressions for dimensional constraints or other user parameters. UVW The materials coordinate space. Used instead of XYZ because that is usually reserved for the world coordinate system (WCS). Most material maps are a 2D plane assigned to a 3D surface. The U, V, and W coordinates parallel the relative directions of X, Y, and Z coordinates. If you look at a 2D map image, U is the equivalent of X, and represents the horizontal direction of the map. V is the equivalent of Y, and represents the vertical direction of the map. W is the equivalent of Z and represents a direction perpendicular to the UV plane of the map.

| 1621

vector A mathematical object with precise direction and length but without specific location. vertex A location where edges or polyline segments meet. view A graphical representation of a model from a specific location (viewpoint) in space. See also viewpoint and viewport. (3DORBIT, VPOINT, DVIEW, VIEW) view category A named collection of views in a sheet set that is often organized by function. See also subset. ViewCube User interface element that displays the current orientation of a model, and allows you to interactively rotate the current view or restore a preset view. viewpoint The location in 3D model space from which you are viewing a model. See also view and viewport. (3DORBIT, DVIEW, VPOINT) viewport A bounded area that displays some portion of the model space of a drawing. The TILEMODE system variable determines the type of viewport created. 1. When TILEMODE is off (0), viewports are objects that can be moved and resized on a layout. (MVIEW) 2. When TILEMODE is on (1), the entire drawing area is divided into non-overlapping model viewports. See also TILEMODE, view, and viewpoint. (VPORTS) viewport configuration A named collection of model viewports that can be saved and restored. (VPORTS) virtual screen display The area in which the program can pan and zoom without regenerating the drawing. visual style A collection of settings that control the display of edges and shading in a viewport. volumetric shadows A photorealistically rendered volume of space cast by the shadow of an object. watertight A closed 3D solid or mesh that has no gaps. WCS See world coordinate system (WCS). window selection A rectangular area specified in the drawing area to select multiple objects at the same time. See also crossing selection, polygon window selection. wipeout object A polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current background color. This area is bounded by the wipeout frame, which you can turn on for editing and turn off for printing. wireframe model The representation of an object using lines and curves to represent its boundaries.

1622 | Chapter 51 Glossary

working drawing A drawing for manufacturing or building purposes. working set A group of objects selected for in-place reference editing. workplane Another name for the XY plane of the user coordinate system. See also elevation and user coordinate system (UCS). world coordinate system (WCS) A coordinate system used as the basis for defining all objects and other coordinate systems. See also user coordinate system (UCS). world coordinates Coordinates expressed in relation to the world coordinate system (WCS). X,Y,Z point filters See coordinate filters. xref See external reference (xref). zoom To reduce or increase the apparent magnification of the drawing area. (ZOOM)

| 1623

1624

Index
3D command 3 3D Edit Bar shortcut menu 27 3D Free Orbit curson icons 31 3D Move Gizmo shortcut menu 37 3D Object Snap tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 369 3D Rotate Gizmo shortcut menu 48 3D Scale Gizmo shortcut menu 51 3DALIGN command 15 3DARRAY command 17 3DDISTANCE command 22 3DEDITBAR command 22 3DFACE command 3DFORBIT command 30 3DMESH command 32 3DMOVE command 34 3DORBIT command 38 3DORBIT shortcut menu 39 3DORBITCTR command 42 3DOSMODE system variable 1174 3DOSNAP command 42 3DPAN command 44 3DPOLY command 45 3DPRINT command Create STL File dialog box 1003 3DROTATE command 47 3DSCALE command 49 3DSELECTIONMODE system variable 1174 3DSWIVEL command 52 3DZOOM command 53 Add Scales to Object dialog box 717 ADDSELECTED command 57 AFLAGS system variable 1177 ALIGN command 59 Alternate Font dialog box 742 Alternate Units tab (New Dimension Style dialog box) 333 AMECONVERT command 60 Analysis Options dialog box 65 ANALYSISCURVATURE command 62 ANALYSISDRAFT command 63 ANALYSISOPTIONS command 65 ANALYSISZEBRA command 69 ANGBASE system variable 1178 ANGDIR system variable 1178 ANNOALLVISIBLE system variable 1179 ANNOAUTOSCALE system variable 1180 ANNORESET command 70 Annotation tab (Leader Settings dialog box) 852 Annotative Object Scale dialog box 716 ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable 1180 ANNOUPDATE command 71 APBOX system variable 1181 APERTURE command 71 APERTURE system variable 1181 Application tab (Application Preferences dialog box) 737 APPLOAD command about 72 Load/Unload Applications dialog box 73 Startup Suite dialog box 76 ARC command 77 AREA command 81 AREA system variable 1182 ARRAY command 84 Array dialog box 85 ARX command 93 ATTACH command 94

A
ABOUT command 55 ACADLSPASDOC system variable 1175 ACADPREFIX system variable 1176 ACADVER system variable 1176 ACISIN command 56 ACISOUT command 56 ACISOUTVER system variable 1177

1625 | Index

Attach External Reference dialog box 1142 Attachment tab (Leader Settings dialog box) 855 ATTDEF command 95 ATTDIA system variable 1182 ATTDISP command 102 ATTEDIT command 103 ATTIPE system variable 1183 ATTIPEDIT command 110 ATTMODE system variable 1183 ATTMULTI system variable 1184 ATTREDEF command 110 ATTREQ system variable 1184 Attribute Definition dialog box 96 Attribute Order dialog box 123 Attribute tab (Attribute Editor dialog box) 119 Attribute tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) 390 ATTSYNC command 111 AUDIT command AUDITCTL system variable 1185 AUNITS system variable 1186 AUPREC system variable 1186 AutoCAD WS 1103 AutoCAD WS, view and edit 1106 AUTOCONSTRAIN command 113 Autoconstrain tab (Constraint Settings dialog box) 204 AUTOSNAP system variable 1187 AutoStack Properties dialog box 690

Block Editor 128 Edit Block Definition dialog box 126 BHATCH command 129 BINDTYPE system variable 1190 BLIPMODE command 130 BLIPMODE system variable 1190 Block Attribute Manager about 117 Block Authoring Palettes window 128 BLOCK command 131 Block Definition dialog box 132 Block Editor about 128 BLOCKEDITOR system variable 1191 BMP Image Options dialog box 879 BMPOUT command 137 BOUNDARY command 138 Boundary Creation dialog box 139 BOX command 141 BREAK command 144 BREP command 146 BROWSER command 147 BSAVE command 147 BSAVEAS command 148 BTMARKDISPLAY system variable 1191

C
CAL command 151 CAMERADISPLAY system variable 1194 CANNOSCALE system variable 1194 CANNOSCALEVALUE system variable 1194 CCONSTRAINTFORM system variable 1195 CDATE system variable 1195 CECOLOR system variable 1196 Cell Border Properties dialog box 834 CELTSCALE system variable 1197 CELTYPE system variable 1197 CELWEIGHT system variable 1198 CENTERMT system variable 1198 CETRANSPARENCY system variable 1199 CHAMFER command 173 CHAMFERA system variable 1199

B
Background Mask dialog box 685 BACKZ system variable 1189 BASE command 115 BATTMAN command about 116 Block Attribute Manager 117 Edit Attribute dialog box 119 BATTORDER command 123 BCLOSE command 125 BEDIT command about 125

1626 | Index

CHAMFERB system variable 1200 CHAMFERC system variable 1200 CHAMFERD system variable 1200 CHAMFEREDGE command 177 CHAMMODE system variable 1201 CHANGE command 178 Change to Layer dialog box 554 Check Spelling dialog box 982 CHPROP command 181 CIRCLE command 183 CIRCLERAD system variable 1201 CLASSICKEYS system variable 1202 CLAYER system variable 1202 CLEANSCREENOFF command 187 CLEANSCREENON command 186 CLEANSCREENSTATE system variable 1203 CLISTATE system variable 1203 CLOSE command 187 CLOSEALL command 188 CMATERIAL system variable 1204 CMDACTIVE system variable 1205 CMDDIA system variable 1205 CMDECHO system variable 1206 CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX system variable 1206 CMDNAMES system variable 1207 CMLEADERSTYLE system variable 1207 CMLJUST system variable 1208 CMLSCALE system variable 1208 CMLSTYLE system variable 1208 Color Books tab (Select Color dialog box) 194 COLOR command 188 COLORSCHEME system variable 1209 Column Label shortcut menu 542 Column Settings dialog box 684 Columns menu 683 COMMANDLINE command 196 COMMANDLINEHIDE command 197 Compare Dimension Styles dialog box 341 COMPASS system variable 1209 COMPILE command 197 CONE command 198 Constraint Settings dialog box 203

CONSTRAINTBAR command CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY system variable 1210 CONSTRAINTBARMODE system variable 1211 CONSTRAINTINFER system variable 1212 CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT system variable 1212 CONSTRAINTRELAX system variable 1213 CONSTRAINTSETTINGS command 202 CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE system variable 1213 CONTENT command 207 Content palette 207 Content tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 664 CONTENTCLOSE command 211 CONTENTSTATE system variable 1214 CONVERT command 211 CONVTOMESH command 212 CONVTONURBS command 213 CONVTOSOLID command 214 CONVTOSURFACE command 217 Coordinate Filters command modifier 1165 COPY command 220 COPYBASE command 221 COPYCLIP command 222 COPYHIST command 223 COPYMODE system variable 1214 CPLOTSTYLE system variable 1215 CPROFILE system variable 1215 Create New Dimension Style dialog box 310 Create New Multileader Style dialog box 667 Create STL File dialog box 1003 CROSSINGAREACOLOR system variable 1216 CSHADOW system variable 1216 CTAB system variable 1217 CTABLESTYLE system variable 1217 CUI command about 223

Index | 1627

CULLINGOBJ system variable 1218 CULLINGOBJSELECTION system variable 1218 Cursor & Selection tab (Application Preferences dialog box) 730 CURSORSIZE system variable 1219 Curvature tab (Analysis Options dialog box) 67 CUTCLIP command 232 CVADD command 232 CVHIDE command 234 CVPORT system variable 1219 CVREBUILD command about 234 Rebuild Curve dialog box 237 Rebuild Surface dialog box 235 CVREMOVE command 238 CVSHOW command 239 CYLINDER command 240

D
DATE system variable 1222 DBLCLKEDIT system variable 1222 DBLIST command 243 DBMOD system variable 1223 DCALIGNED command 244 DCANGULAR command 246 DCCONVERT command 248 DCDIAMETER command 248 DCDISPLAY command 249 DCFORM command 250 DCHORIZONTAL command 251 DCLINEAR command 252 DCRADIUS command 254 DCVERTICAL command 255 DDEDIT command about 256 DDPTYPE command 258 Default Scale List dialog box 743 DEFAULTGIZMO system variable 1224 DEFAULTLIGHTING system variable 1227 DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE system variable 1227 DEFLPLSTYLE system variable 1228

DEFPLSTYLE system variable 1228 DELAY command 260 DELCONSTRAINT command 261 DELOBJ system variable 1230 DEMANDLOAD system variable 1230 DIASTAT system variable 1231 DIM and DIM1 commands 261 DIMADEC system variable 1232 DIMALIGNED command 264 DIMALT system variable 1232 DIMALTD system variable 1233 DIMALTF system variable 1233 DIMALTRND system variable 1233 DIMALTTD system variable 1234 DIMALTTZ system variable 1235 DIMALTU system variable 1235 DIMALTZ system variable 1236 DIMANGULAR command 267 DIMANNO system variable 1237 DIMAPOST system variable 1237 DIMARC command 270 DIMARCSYM system variable 1238 DIMASSOC system variable 1239 DIMASZ system variable 1239 DIMATFIT system variable 1240 DIMAUNIT system variable 1240 DIMAZIN system variable 1241 DIMBASELINE command 272 DIMBLK system variable 1243 DIMBLK1 system variable 1243 DIMBLK2 system variable 1244 DIMBREAK command 274 DIMCEN system variable 1244 DIMCENTER command 275 DIMCLRD system variable 1245 DIMCLRE system variable 1245 DIMCLRT system variable 1246 DIMCONSTRAINT command 276 DIMCONSTRAINTICON system variable 1246 DIMCONTINUE command 278 DIMDEC system variable 1247 DIMDIAMETER command 280 DIMDISASSOCIATE command 281 DIMDLE system variable 1247 DIMDLI system variable 1248

1628 | Index

DIMDSEP system variable 1248 DIMEDIT command 282 Dimension Input Settings dialog box 378 Dimension Style Manager about 308 Dimensional tab (Constraint Settings dialog box) 204 DIMEXE system variable 1249 DIMEXO system variable 1249 DIMFRAC system variable 1250 DIMFXL system variable 1250 DIMFXLON system variable 1250 DIMGAP system variable 1251 DIMHORIZONTAL command 284 DIMINSPECT command 286 DIMJOGANG system variable 1252 DIMJOGGED command 290 DIMJOGLINE command 292 DIMJUST system variable 1252 DIMLDRBLK system variable 1253 DIMLFAC system variable 1253 DIMLIM system variable 1254 DIMLINEAR command 293 DIMLTEX1 system variable 1254 DIMLTEX2 system variable 1255 DIMLTYPE system variable 1255 DIMLUNIT system variable 1256 DIMLWD system variable 1256 DIMLWE system variable 1257 DIMORDINATE command 297 DIMOVERRIDE command 299 DIMPOST system variable 1257 DIMRADIUS command 300 DIMREASSOCIATE command 301 DIMREGEN command 303 DIMRND system variable 1258 DIMROTATED command 304 DIMSAH system variable 1258 DIMSCALE system variable 1259 DIMSD1 system variable 1260 DIMSD2 system variable 1260 DIMSE1 system variable 1261 DIMSE2 system variable 1261 DIMSOXD system variable 1262 DIMSPACE command 306

DIMSTYLE command about 307 Compare Dimension Styles dialog box 341 Create New Dimension Style dialog box 310 Dimension Style Manager 308 Modify Dimension Style dialog box 311 New Dimension Style dialog box 311 Override Dimension Style dialog box 311 DIMSTYLE system variable 1262 DIMTAD system variable 1263 DIMTDEC system variable 1263 DIMTEDIT command 345 DIMTFAC system variable 1264 DIMTFILL system variable 1264 DIMTFILLCLR system variable 1265 DIMTIH system variable 1265 DIMTIX system variable 1266 DIMTM system variable 1266 DIMTMOVE system variable 1267 DIMTOFL system variable 1267 DIMTOH system variable 1268 DIMTOL system variable 1268 DIMTOLJ system variable 1269 DIMTP system variable 1269 DIMTSZ system variable 1270 DIMTVP system variable 1270 DIMTXSTY system variable 1271 DIMTXT system variable 12711272 DIMTZIN system variable 1272 DIMUPT system variable 1273 DIMVERTICAL command 347 DIMZIN system variable 1274 Direct Distance Entry command modifier 1167 DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN2D system variable 1274 DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN3D system variable 1275 DISPSILH system variable 1275 DIST command 349 DISTANCE system variable 1276

Index | 1629

DISTANTLIGHT command 350 DIVIDE command 353 DIVMESHBOXHEIGHT system variable 1277 DIVMESHBOXLENGTH system variable 1277 DIVMESHBOXWIDTH system variable 1278 DIVMESHCONEAXIS system variable 1279 DIVMESHCONEBASE system variable 1280 DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT system variable 1281 DIVMESHCYLAXIS system variable 1282 DIVMESHCYLBASE system variable 1283 DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT system variable 1284 DIVMESHPYRBASE system variable 1285 DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT system variable 1286 DIVMESHPYRLENGTH system variable 1287 DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS system variable 1288 DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT system variable 1289 DIVMESHTORUSPATH system variable 1290 DIVMESHTORUSSECTION system variable 1290 DIVMESHWEDGEBASE system variable 1291 DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT system variable 1292 DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH system variable 1293 DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE system variable 1294 DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH system variable 1295 Document Settings tab (Application Preferences dialog box) 741 DONUT command 354 DONUTID system variable 1295 DONUTOD system variable 1296

Draft Analysis tab (Analysis Options dialog box) 68 Draft Angle Handle 582 Drafting Settings dialog box 358 DRAGMODE command 356 DRAGMODE system variable 1297 DRAGP1 system variable 1297 DRAGP2 system variable 1297 DRAGVS system variable 1298 drawing template options 910 Drawing Units dialog box 1097 DRAWORDER command 357 DRAWORDERCTL system variable 1299 DSETTINGS command about 358 Dimension Input Settings dialog box 378 Pointer Input Settings dialog box 377 Tooltip Appearance dialog box 379 DVIEW command 380 DWGCHECK system variable 1300 DWGCODEPAGE system variable 1301 DWGNAME system variable 1301 DWGPREFIX system variable 1302 DWGTITLED system variable 1302 DXBIN command 388 Dynamic Input tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 374 DYNCONSTRAINMODE system variable 1303 DYNDIGRIP system variable 1304 DYNDIVIS system variable 1304 DYNMODE system variable 1305 DYNPICOORDS system variable 1306 DYNPIFORMAT system variable 1306 DYNPIVIS system variable 1307 DYNPROMPT system variable 1307 DYNTOOLTIPS system variable 1308

E
EATTEDIT command 389 EDGE command 394 EDGEMODE system variable EDGESURF command 396

1310

1630 | Index

Edit Attribute dialog box 119 Edit Attributes dialog box 104 Edit Block Definition dialog box 126 Edit Scale List dialog box 915 ELEV command 398 ELEVATION system variable 1310 ELLIPSE command 399 Enhanced Attribute Editor 390 ERASE command 403 ERHIGHLIGHT system variable 1311 ERRNO system variable 1311 ERSTATE system variable 1312 EXPERT system variable 1313 EXPLMODE system variable 1313 EXPLODE command 404 EXPORT command 405 EXPORTTOAUTOCAD command 406 EXTEND command 408 EXTERNALREFERENCES command 412 EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE command 420 EXTMAX system variable 1314 EXTMIN system variable 1314 EXTNAMES system variable 1315 EXTRUDE command

F
FACETERDEVNORMAL system variable 1317 FACETERDEVSURFACE system variable 1318 FACETERGRIDRATIO system variable 1319 FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH system variable 1319 FACETERMAXGRID system variable 1320 FACETERMESHTYPE system variable 1321 FACETERMINUGRID system variable 1321 FACETERMINVGRID system variable 1322 FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE system variable 1322

FACETERSMOOTHLEV system variable 1323 FACETRATIO system variable 1324 FACETRES system variable 1325 FIELD command 425 Field dialog box 426 FIELDDISPLAY system variable 1325 FIELDEVAL system variable 1326 FILEDIA system variable 1327 FILL command 428 FILLET command 429 FILLETEDGE command 433 FILLETRAD system variable 1327 FILLETRAD3D system variable 1327 FILLMODE system variable 1328 Find and Replace dialog box (mtext) 686 Find and Replace dialog box (text) 435 FIND command 434 Fit tab (New Dimension Style dialog box) 325 FLATSHOT command 438 Flatshot dialog box 440 FONTALT system variable 1329 FONTMAP system variable 1329 FRAME system variable 1330 FREESPOT command 442 FREEWEB command 445 FRONTZ system variable 1331 FULLOPEN system variable 1331 FULLPLOTPATH system variable 1331

G
GCCOINCIDENT command 449 GCCOLLINEAR command 451 GCCONCENTRIC command 452 GCEQUAL command 453 GCFIX command 454 GCHORIZONTAL command 456 GCPARALLEL command 458 GCPERPENDICULAR command 458 GCSMOOTH command 459 GCSYMMETRIC command 461 GCTANGENT command 462 GCVERTICAL command 463

Index | 1631

General tab (Application Preferences dialog box) 728 Generate Section / Elevation dialog box 933 GEOMCONSTRAINT command 464 Geometric tab (Constraint Settings dialog box) 204 Geometric Tolerance dialog box 1055 GFANG system variable 1333 GFCLR1 system variable 1334 GFCLR2 system variable 1335 GFCLRLUM system variable 1335 GFCLRSTATE system variable 1336 GFNAME system variable 1336 GFSHIFT system variable 1337 GRADIENT command 466 Gradient tab (Hatch and Gradient dialog box) 480 GRID command 467 GRIDDISPLAY system variable 1338 GRIDMAJOR system variable 1338 GRIDMODE system variable 1339 GRIDSTYLE system variable 1339 GRIDUNIT system variable 1340 GRIPBLOCK system variable 1340 GRIPCOLOR system variable 1341 GRIPCONTOUR system variable 1341 GRIPHOT system variable 1341 GRIPHOVER system variable 1342 GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL system variable 1343 GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable 1343 GRIPS system variable 1343 GRIPSIZE system variable 1344 GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable 1345 GRIPTIPS system variable 1346 GTAUTO system variable 1346 GTDEFAULT system variable 1347 GTLOCATION system variable 1347

H
HALOGAP system variable HANDLES system variable 1349 1350

HATCH command about 472 Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box 485 Hatch Edit dialog box 494 Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box 485 Hatch tab (Hatch and Gradient dialog box) 477 HATCHEDIT command 493 HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY command 497 HATCHSETBOUNDARY command 497 HATCHSETORIGIN command 498 HATCHTOBACK command 499 HELIX command 500 HELP command 502 HELPPREFIX system variable 1350 HIDE command 502 HIDEOBJECTS command 504 HIDEPALETTES command 504 HIDEPRECISION system variable 1351 HIDETEXT system variable 1351 HIGHLIGHT system variable 1352 HPANG system variable 1352 HPANNOTATIVE system variable 1353 HPASSOC system variable 1353 HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR system variable 1354 HPBOUND system variable 1354 HPBOUNDRETAIN system variable 1355 HPCOLOR system variable 1356 HPDLGMODE system variable 1356 HPDOUBLE system variable 1357 HPDRAWORDER system variable 1358 HPGAPTOL system variable 1358 HPINHERIT system variable 1359 HPISLANDDETECTION system variable 1359 HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE system variable 1360 HPLAYER system variable 1360 HPMAXLINES system variable 1360 HPNAME system variable 1361 HPOBJWARNING system variable 1361 HPORIGIN system variable 1362 HPORIGINMODE system variable 1362

1632 | Index

HPQUICKPREVIEW system variable 1363 HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT system variable 1363 HPSCALE system variable 1364 HPSEPARATE system variable 1364 HPSPACE system variable 1365 HPTRANSPARENCY system variable 1365

I
ID command 505 IMAGE command 506 IMAGEATTACH command about 510 Attach Image dialog box 511 IMAGECLIP command 513 IMAGEFRAME system variable 1368 IMAGEHLT system variable 1368 IMAGEQUALITY command 514 IMPLIEDFACE system variable 1368 IMPORT command 515 Import Page Setups dialog box 756 IMPRINT command 516 In-Place Text Editor about 675 Index Color tab (Select Color dialog box) 190 INETLOCATION system variable 1369 INPUTHISTORYMODE system variable 1370 INSBASE system variable 1370 Insert a Block in a Table Cell dialog box 1053 INSERT command 517 Insert dialog box 518 INSNAME system variable 1371 Inspection Dimension dialog box 287 INSUNITS system variable 1372 INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system variable 1374 INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable 1375 INTELLIGENTUPDATE system variable 1376

INTERFERE command about 523 Interference Checking dialog box 527 Interference Settings dialog box 526 INTERFERECOLOR system variable 1376 Interference Checking dialog box 527 Interference Settings dialog box 526 INTERFEREOBJVS system variable 1377 INTERFEREVPVS system variable 1377 INTERSECT command 529 INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable 1378 INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable 1378 ISAVEBAK system variable 1379 ISAVEPERCENT system variable 1379 ISOLATEOBJECTS command 530 ISOLINES system variable 1380 ISOPLANE command 531

J
JOGSECTION command (SECTIONPLANEJOG) 923 JOIN command 535 JPEG Image Options dialog box 882 JPGOUT command 536

L
LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT system variable 1381 LASTANGLE system variable 1382 LASTPOINT system variable 1382 LASTPROMPT system variable 1383 LATITUDE system variable 1383 LAYER command about 537 Layers Palette 539 Select Linetype dialog box 544 LAYERCLOSE command 548 LAYEREVAL system variable 1384 LAYEREVALCTL system variable 1385 LAYERMANAGERSTATE system variable 1385

Index | 1633

LAYERNOTIFY system variable 1386 LAYERP command 549 LAYERPMODE command 549 Layers Palette about 539 LAYFRZ command 550 LAYISO command 551 LAYLCK command 553 LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable 1387 LAYMCUR command 555 LAYOFF command 555 LAYOUT command 557 LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT system variable 1388 LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable 1389 LAYULK command 558 LAYUNISO command 559 LEADER command 560 Leader Format tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 662 Leader Line & Arrow tab (Leader Settings dialog box) 854 Leader Settings dialog box 852 Leader Structure tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 663 LEGACYCTRLPICK system variable 1390 LENGTHEN command 563 LENSLENGTH system variable 1390 LIGHT command 565 LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY system variable 1391 Lighting Properties dialog box 836 LIGHTINGUNITS system variable 1391 LIGHTSINBLOCKS system variable 1392 LIMCHECK system variable 1392 LIMITS command 565 LIMMAX system variable 1393 LIMMIN system variable 1393 LINE command 567 LINEARBRIGHTNESS system variable 1394 LINEARCONTRAST system variable 1394 Lines and Arrows tab (New Dimension Style dialog box) 312, 316

LINETYPE command about 568 Linetype Manager 569 Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box 571 Linetype Manager about 569 Lineweight Settings dialog box 587 LIST command 574 LIVESECTION command 575 LOAD command 576 Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box 571 Load/Unload Applications dialog box 73 LOCALE system variable 1395 LOCALROOTPREFIX system variable 1395 LOFT command 577 Loft Handle 582 Loft Settings dialog box 581 LOFTANG1 system variable 1396 LOFTANG2 system variable 1396 LOFTMAG1 system variable 1397 LOFTMAG2 system variable 1397 LOFTNORMALS system variable 1398 LOFTPARAM system variable 1399 LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS system variable 1399 LOGEXPCONTRAST system variable 1400 LOGEXPDAYLIGHT system variable 1400 LOGEXPMIDTONES system variable 1401 LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE system variable 1401 LOGFILEMODE system variable 1402 LOGFILENAME system variable 1402 LOGFILEOFF command 584 LOGFILEON command 585 LOGFILEPATH system variable 1403 LOGINNAME system variable 1403 LONGITUDE system variable 1404 Look & Feel tab (Application Preferences dialog box) 735 LTSCALE command 585 LTSCALE system variable 1404

1634 | Index

LUNITS system variable 1405 LUPREC system variable 1405 LWDEFAULT system variable 1406 LWDISPLAY system variable 1406 LWEIGHT command 586 LWUNITS system variable 1406

M
Magnitude Handle 582 Manage Content Libraries dialog box 209 MASSPROP command 591 MATBROWSERCLOSE command 595 MATBROWSEROPEN command 596 MATBROWSERSTATE system variable 1407 MATCHCELL command 600 MATCHPROP command 601 Material Condition dialog box 1060 Materials Browser about 597 MATERIALS command about 605 MATERIALSCLOSE command 605 MAXACTVP system variable 1408 MAXSORT system variable 1408 MBUTTONPAN system variable 1409 MEASURE command 606 MEASUREGEOM command 608 MEASUREINIT system variable 1409 MEASUREMENT system variable 1410 MENUECHO system variable 1411 MENUNAME system variable 1411 MESH command 612 MESHCAP command 627 MESHCOLLAPSE command 629 MESHCREASE command 630 MESHEXTRUDE command 631 MESHMERGE command 634 MESHREFINE command 635 MESHSMOOTH command 636 MESHSMOOTHLESS command 637 MESHSMOOTHMORE command 638 MESHSPIN command 640 MESHSPLIT command 641

MESHTYPE system variable 1412 MESHUNCREASE command 642 MINSERT command 643 MIRRHATCH system variable 1412 MIRROR command 648 MIRROR3D command 649 MIRRTEXT system variable 1413 MLEADER command 652 MLEADERALIGN command 655 MLEADERCOLLECT command 656 MLEADEREDIT command 657 MLEADERSCALE system variable 1413 MLEADERSTYLE command about 659 Create New Multileader Style dialog box 667 Modify Multileader Style dialog box 661 Multileader Style Manager 659 MLINE command 667 MODEL command 670 Modify Dimension Style dialog box 311 Modify Multileader Style dialog box 661 More Options tab (Hatch and Gradient dialog box) 482 MOVE command 671 MREDO command 672 MSLTSCALE system variable 1414 MSPACE command 672 MTEDIT command 673 MTEXT command about 674 AutoStack Properties dialog box 690 Background Mask dialog box 685 Column Settings dialog box 684 Columns menu 683 Find and Replace dialog box 686 In-Place Text Editor 675 Paragraph dialog box 681 Stack Properties dialog box 688 Text Editor visor 679 MTEXT Text Editor visor 679 MTEXTCOLUMN system variable 1415 MTEXTFIXED system variable 1415 MTJIGSTRING system variable 1416 MTP command modifier 1167

Index | 1635

Multileader Style Manager 659 MULTIPLE command 698 MVIEW command 698 MVSETUP command 702 MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX system variable 1416

N
Named UCSs tab (UCS dialog box) 1083 Named Viewports tab (Viewports dialog box) 1120 NAVVCUBE command 709 NAVVCUBEDISPLAY system variable 1418 NAVVCUBELOCATION system variable 1418 NAVVCUBEOPACITY system variable 1419 NAVVCUBEORIENT system variable 1419 NAVVCUBESIZE system variable 1420 NEW command about 712 New Dimension Style dialog box 311 New Layer Name dialog box 930 New Page Setup dialog box 751 New Viewports tab (Viewports dialog box) NOMUTT system variable 1420 NORTHDIRECTION system variable 1421

OBSCUREDLTYPE system variable 1426 OFFSET command 720 OFFSETDIST system variable 1426 OFFSETGAPTYPE system variable 1427 OOPS command 722 OPEN command about 723 OPMSTATE system variable 1427 OPTIONS command about 727 Alternate Font dialog box 742 Default Scale List dialog box 743 ORTHO command 744 Orthographic UCS Depth dialog box 1088 Orthographic UCSs tab (UCS dialog box) 1085 ORTHOMODE system variable 1428 OSMODE system variable 1429 OSNAP command 745 OSNAPCOORD system variable 1430 OSNAPNODELEGACY system variable 1430 OSNAPZ system variable 1431 OSOPTIONS system variable 1431 Override Dimension Style dialog box 311

P
Page Setup - Advanced dialog box 758 Page Setup dialog box 752 Page Setup Manager about 748 Page Setup - Advanced dialog box 758 Page Setup dialog box 752 PAGESETUP command about 747 Import Page Setups dialog box 756 New Page Setup dialog box 751 Page Setup - Advanced dialog box 758 Page Setup dialog box 752 Page Setup Manager 748 PALETTEICONOFF command 763

O
Object Snap tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 365 Object Snaps command modifier 1168 OBJECTISOLATIONMODE system variable 1424 OBJECTSCALE command about 716 Add Scales to Object dialog box 717 Annotative Object Scale dialog box 716 OBSCUREDCOLOR system variable 1424

1636 | Index

PALETTEICONON command 763 PALETTEICONSTATE system variable 1434 PAN command 764 Pan shortcut menu 766 PAPERUPDATE system variable 1434 Paragraph dialog box 681 PARAMETERCOPYMODE system variable 1436 PASTECLIP command 767 PCX Image Options dialog box 879 PDMODE system variable 1436 PDSIZE system variable 1437 PEDIT command 768 PEDITACCEPT system variable 1437 PELLIPSE system variable 1438 PERIMETER system variable 1438 PERSPECTIVE system variable 1439 PERSPECTIVECLIP system variable 1439 PFACE command 782 PFACEVMAX system variable 1440 PICKADD system variable 1440 PICKAUTO system variable 1441 PICKBOX system variable 1441 PICKDRAG system variable 1442 PICKFIRST system variable 1442 PICKSTYLE system variable 1443 PLAN command 784 PLANESURF command 785 PLATFORM system variable 1443 PLINE command 787 PLINECONVERTMODE system variable 1444 PLINEGEN system variable 1444 PLINETYPE system variable 1445 PLINEWID system variable 1446 Plot and Publish Details dialog box 1109 PLOT command about 793 Plot dialog box 794 Plot dialog box 794 Plot Stamp dialog box 804 PLOTOFFSET system variable 1446 PLOTROTMODE system variable 1447 PLOTSTAMP command about 803

Plot Stamp dialog box 804 User Defined Fields dialog box 808 PLOTSTYLE command about 811 PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE system variable 1447 PLQUIET system variable 1448 PNG Image Options dialog box 882 PNGOUT command 812 POINT command 813 Point Style dialog box 260 Pointer Input Settings dialog box 377 POINTLIGHT command 815 Polar Tracking tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 362 POLARADDANG system variable 1449 POLARANG system variable 1449 POLARDIST system variable 1449 POLARMODE system variable 1450 POLYGON command 820 POLYSIDES system variable 1451 POLYSOLID command 822 POPUPS system variable 1451 PRESSPULL command 826 PREVIEW command 827 PREVIEWEFFECT system variable 1452 PREVIEWFACEEFFECT system variable 1452 PREVIEWFILTER system variable 1453 Primary Units tab (New Dimension Style dialog box) 329 PRODUCT system variable 1453 PROGRAM system variable 1454 PROJECTGEOMETRY command 828 PROJMODE system variable 1454 PROPERTIES command about 829 Cell Border Properties dialog box 834 Lighting Properties dialog box 836 Properties palette 831 Properties Inspector palette about 831 general properties 832 Properties palette general properties 832

Index | 1637

Properties tab (Attribute Editor dialog box) 122 Properties tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) 393 PROPERTIESCLOSE command 843 Property Settings dialog box 602 PROXYGRAPHICS system variable 1455 PROXYNOTICE system variable 1455 PROXYSHOW system variable 1456 PROXYWEBSEARCH system variable 1456 PSETUPIN command 843 PSLTSCALE system variable 1457 PSOLHEIGHTsystem variable 1458 PSOLWIDTH system variable 1458 PSPACE command 844 PSTYLEMODE system variable 1459 PSTYLEPOLICY system variable 1459 PSVPSCALE system variable 1460 PUCSBASE system variable 1460 PURGE command 845 PYRAMID command 846

Q
QDIM command 849 QLEADER command about 850 Leader Settings dialog box QNEW command 856 QSAVE command 857 QTEXT command 857 QTEXTMODE system variable QUIT command 858 QVIEW command 859 QVLAYOUT command 859

852

1461

R
RASTERDPI system variable 1463 RASTERPERCENT system variable 1464 RASTERPREVIEW system variable 1464 RASTERTHRESHOLD system variable 1465 RAY command 863 Rebuild Curve dialog box 237

Rebuild Surface dialog box 235 REBUILD2DCV system variable 1465 REBUILD2DDEGREE system variable 1466 REBUILD2DOPTION system variable 1467 REBUILDDEGREEU system variable 1467 REBUILDDEGREEV system variable 1468 REBUILDOPTIONS system variable 1468 REBUILDU system variable 1469 REBUILDV system variable 1469 RECOVER command 864 RECOVERAUTO system variable 1470 RECTANG command 865 REDEFINE command 867 REDO command 867 REDRAW command 868 REDRAWALL command 869 Reference Manager palette about 413 REGEN command 869 REGENALL command 870 REGENAUTO command 871 REGENMODE system variable 1471 REGION command 872 Reload Linetypes dialog box 571 REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable 1471 RENAME command 873 Rename dialog box 874 RENDER command about 875 BMP Image Options dialog box 879 JPEG Image Options dialog box 882 PCX Image Options dialog box 879 PNG Image Options dialog box 882 Render Output File dialog box 877 Render window 876 Targa Image Options dialog box 880 TIFF Image Options dialog box 881 Render Environment dialog box 887 Render Output File dialog box 877 Render window 876 RENDERENVIRONMENT command 886 RENDEROUTPUTSIZE command 888

1638 | Index

RENDERUSERLIGHTS system variable 1472 RENDERWIN command 890 REPORTERROR system variable 1473 RESETBLOCK command 891 RESETPALETTES command 891 RESUME command 892 REVCLOUD command 893 REVERSE command 894 REVOLVE command 895 REVSURF command 899 ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX system variable 1473 ROTATE command 901 ROTATE3D command 902 RSCRIPT command 905 RTDISPLAY system variable 1473 RULESURF command 906

S
Save Block As dialog box 149 SAVE command 909 SAVEAS command about 910 drawing template options 910 SAVEFIDELITY system variable 1476 SAVEFILE system variable 1476 SAVEFILEPATH system variable 1476 SAVEIMG command 912 SAVENAME system variable 1477 SAVETIME system variable 1477 SCALE command 912 SCALELISTEDIT command about 914 Edit Scale List dialog box 915 SCREENSIZE system variable 1478 SCRIPT command 917 SECTION command 917 Section Settings dialog box 926 SECTIONPLANE command 920 SECTIONPLANEJOG command 923 SECTIONPLANESETTINGS command about 924 New Layer Name dialog box 930 Section Settings dialog box 926

SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK command about 931 Generate Section / Elevation dialog box 933 Select Color dialog box about 188 Color Books tab 194 Index Color tab 190 True Color tab 191 SELECT command 935 Select Linetype dialog box 544 Select Similar Settings dialog box 939 Selection Modes command modifier 1169 SELECTIONANNODISPLAY system variable 1478 SELECTIONAREA system variable 1479 SELECTIONAREAOPACITY system variable 1479 SELECTIONCYCLING system variable 1480 SELECTIONPREVIEW system variable 1481 SELECTSIMILAR command 939 SELECTSIMILARMODE system variable 1482 Settings tab (UCS dialog box) 1086 SETVAR command 940 SHADEDGE system variable 1482 SHADEDIF system variable 1483 SHADEMODE command 941 SHADOWPLANELOCATION system variable 1483 SHAPE command 942 SHELL command 943 SHORTCUTMENU system variable 1484 SHORTCUTMENUDURATION system variable 1484 SHOWHIST system variable 1485 SHOWMOTIONPIN system variable 1486 SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS system variable 1486 SHOWPALETTES command 943 SHPNAME system variable 1487 SKETCH command 944

Index | 1639

SKETCHINC system variable 1487 SKPOLY system variable 1488 SKYSTATUS system variable 1489 SLICE command 945 SMOOTHMESHCONVERT system variable 1489 SMOOTHMESHGRID system variable 1490 SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE system variable 1491 SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV system variable 1491 Snap and Grid tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 359 SNAP command 952 SNAPANG system variable 1492 SNAPBASE system variable 1492 SNAPISOPAIR system variable 1493 SNAPMODE system variable 1493 SNAPSTYL system variable 1494 SNAPTYPE system variable 1494 SNAPUNIT system variable 1495 SOLDRAW command 954 SOLID command SOLIDCHECK system variable 1495 SOLIDEDIT command 956 SOLIDHIST system variable 1496 SOLPROF command 973 SOLVIEW command 975 SORTENTS system variable 1496 SPACEPAN system variable 1497 SPACEPANTIMEOUT system variable 1497 SPELL command about 981 Check Spelling dialog box 982 SPHERE command 985 SPLDEGREE system variable 1498 SPLFRAME system variable 1499 SPLINE command 986 SPLINEDIT command 991 SPLINESEGS system variable 1499 SPLINETYPE system variable 1500 SPLKNOTS system variable 1500 SPLMETHOD system variable 1501 SPLPERIODIC system variable 1501

SPOTLIGHT command 996 Stack Properties dialog box 688 Standard File Selection dialog boxes 724 Startup Suite dialog box 76 STARTUP system variable 1502 STATUS command 1000 STATUSBAR system variable 1502 STLOUT command 1002 STRETCH command 1004 STYLE command 1005 SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE system variable 1503 SUBTRACT command 1011 SUNSTATUS system variable 1507 SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY system variable 1507 SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG system variable 1508 SURFACEAUTOTRIM system variable 1509 SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable 1509 SURFBLEND command 1013 SURFFILLET command 1016 SURFNETWORK command 1017 SURFOFFSET command 1019 SURFPATCH command 1022 SURFSCULPT command 1023 SURFTAB1 system variable 1510 SURFTAB2 system variable 1510 SURFTRIM command 1025 SURFTYPE system variable 1511 SURFU system variable 1511 SURFUNTRIM command 1027 SURFV system variable 1512 SWEEP command 1028 Symbol dialog box 1058 SYSCODEPAGE system variable 1512

T
TABLE command about 1032 TABLEDIT command 1034 TABLEEXPORT command 1034 TABLEINDICATOR system variable 1513

1640 | Index

TABSURF command 1035 Targa Image Options dialog box 880 TARGET system variable 1514 TARGETPOINT command 1037 TBEXTENDAFTERSECONDS system variable 1514 TBSHOWSHORTCUTS system variable 1514 TDCREATE system variable 1515 TDINDWG system variable 1515 TDUCREATE system variable 1516 TDUPDATE system variable 1516 TDUSRTIMER system variable 1516 TDUUPDATE system variable 1517 TEMPOVERRIDES system variable 1517 TEMPPREFIX system variable 1518 TEXT command 1040 Text Options tab (Attribute Editor dialog box) 120 Text Options tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) 391 Text shortcut menu 1044 Text Style dialog box 1006 Text tab (New Dimension Style dialog box) 320 TEXTED system variable 1518 TEXTEDIT command 1047 TEXTEVAL system variable 1519 TEXTFILL system variable 1519 TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT system variable 1520 TEXTQLTY system variable 1521 TEXTSIZE system variable 1521 TEXTSTYLE system variable 1521 TEXTTOFRONT command 1048 THICKEN command 1049 THICKNESS system variable 1522 TIFF Image Options dialog box 881 TIFOUT command 1050 TILEMODE system variable 1522 TIME command TIMEZONE system variable 1526 TINSERT command 1052 TOLERANCE command about 1054

Geometric Tolerance dialog box 1055 Material Condition dialog box 1060 Symbol dialog box 1058 Tolerances tab (New Dimension Style dialog box) 336 TOOLSETS command 1061 TOOLSETSCLOSE command 1061 TOOLSETSSTATE system variable 1527 Tooltip Appearance dialog box 379 TOOLTIPMERGE system variable 1527 TOOLTIPSIZE system variable 1528 TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY system variable 1528 TORUS command 1061 TRACE command 1063 TRACEWID system variable 1528 Tracking command modifier 1168 TRACKPATH system variable 1529 TRANSPARENCY command 1064 TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY system variable 1530 TREEDEPTH system variable 1530 TREEMAX system variable 1531 TREESTAT command 1064 TRIM command 1066 TRIMMODE system variable 1532 True Color tab (Select Color dialog box) 191 TSPACEFAC system variable 1532 TSPACETYPE system variable 1533 TSTACKALIGN system variable 1533 TSTACKSIZE system variable 1533

U
U command 1071 UCS command 1072 UCS Details dialog box 1089 UCS dialog box 1083 UCS Icon dialog box 1081 UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING system variable 1535 UCS3DPARADISPLAYSETTING system variable 1536

Index | 1641

UCS3DPERPDISPLAYSETTING system variable 1537 UCSAXISANG system variable 1537 UCSBASE system variable 1538 UCSDETECT system variable 1538 UCSFOLLOW system variable 1539 UCSICON command 1079 UCSICON system variable 1540 UCSMAN command about 1083 Orthographic UCS Depth dialog box 1088 UCS Details dialog box 1089 UCS dialog box 1083 UCSNAME system variable 1540 UCSORG system variable 1541 UCSORTHO system variable 1541 UCSVIEW system variable 1542 UCSVP system variable 1542 UCSXDIR system variable 1543 UCSYDIR system variable 1543 UNDEFINE command 1090 UNDO command 1091 UNDOCTL system variable 1544 UNDOMARKS system variable 1544 UNION command 1094 UNISOLATEOBJECTS command 1095 UNITMODE system variable 1545 Units & Guides tab (Application Preferences dialog box) 733 UNITS command about 1096 Drawing Units dialog box 1097 UPDATEFIELD command 1101 UPDATETHUMBNAIL system variable 1546 UPDATETHUMBSNOW command 1102 Upload to AutoCAD WS dialog box 1103 UPLOADTOWS command 1103 User Defined Fields dialog box 808 USERI1-5 system variable 1546 USERR1-5 system variable 1546 USERS1-5 system variable 1547

V
VEDITFROMWS command 1106 VIEW command about 1106 VIEWCTR system variable 1549 ViewCube Settings dialog box 711 VIEWDIR system variable 1550 VIEWMODE system variable 1551 VIEWPLOTDETAILS command about 1108 Plot and Publish Details dialog box 1109 Viewports dialog box 1118 VIEWRES command 1110 VIEWSIZE system variable 1551 VIEWTWIST system variable 1551 VISRETAIN system variable 1552 VPCLIP command 1112 VPCONTROL system variable 1553 VPLAYER command 1113 VPLAYEROVERRIDES system variable 1554 VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE system variable 1554 VPMAX command 1115 VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE system variable 1555 VPMIN command 1116 VPOINT command 1116 VPORTS command 1118 VPROTATEASSOC system variable 1555 VSACURVATUREHIGH system variable 1556 VSACURVATURELOW system variable 1556 VSACURVATURETYPE system variable 1557 VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH system variable 1557 VSADRAFTANGLELOW system variable 1558 VSAZEBRACOLOR1 system variable 1559 VSAZEBRACOLOR2 system variable 1559

1642 | Index

VSAZEBRADIRECTION system variable 1560 VSAZEBRASIZE system variable 1560 VSAZEBRATYPE system variable 1561 VSCURRENT command 1126 VSEDGECOLOR system variable 1561 VSEDGEJITTER system variable 1563 VSEDGELEX system variable 1563 VSEDGEOVERHANG system variable 1564 VSEDGES system variable 1566 VSEDGESMOOTH system variable 1566 VSFACECOLORMODE system variable 1567 VSFACEHIGHLIGHT system variable 1568 VSFACEOPACITY system variable 1569 VSFACESTYLE system variable 1569 VSHALOGAP system variable 1570 VSHIDEPRECISION system variable 1570 VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable 1571 VSINTERSECTIONEDGES system variable 1572 VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE system variable 1573 VSISOONTOP system variable 1573 VSLIGHTINGQUALITY system variable 1574 VSMATERIALMODE system variable 1575 VSMAX system variable 1575 VSMIN system variable 1576 VSMONOCOLOR system variable 1576 VSOBSCUREDCOLOR system variable 1577 VSOBSCUREDEDGES system variable 1577 VSOBSCUREDLTYPE system variable 1579 VSOCCLUDEDCOLOR system variable 1580 VSOCCLUDEDEDGES system variable 1580 VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE system variable 1582

VSSAVE command 1127 VSSHADOWS system variable 1583 VSSILHEDGES system variable 1585 VSSILHWIDTH system variable 1585

W
WBLOCK command 1129 WEBLIGHT command 1134 WEDGE command 1137 WHOHAS command 1139 WINDOWAREACOLOR system variable 1587 WIPEOUT command 1140 WORLDUCS system variable 1588 WORLDVIEW system variable 1588 Write Block dialog box 1130 WRITESTAT system variable 1589

X
XATTACH command about 1141 Attach External Reference dialog box 1142 XBIND command 1145 Xbind dialog box 1146 XCLIP command 1148 XCLIPFRAME system variable 1592 XDWGFADECTL system variable 1592 XEDGES command 1150 XLINE command 1151 XLOADCTL system variable 1593 XLOADPATH system variable 1594 XOPEN command 1153 XPLODE command 1154 XREF command 1155 XREFCTL system variable 1594 XREFTYPE system variable 1594

Z
Zebra Analysis tab (Analysis Options dialog box) 66 ZOOM command 1159

Index | 1643

Zoom shortcut menu 1163 ZOOMFACTOR system variable

ZOOMWHEEL system variable 1595

1596

1644 | Index

Acad Acr
No ratings yet
Acad Acr
2,064 pages
Acdmaclt 2012 Command Reference Guide
No ratings yet
Acdmaclt 2012 Command Reference Guide
1,074 pages
AutoCAD MEP Tutorials
89% (18)
AutoCAD MEP Tutorials
226 pages
AutoCAD Command Reference
100% (1)
AutoCAD Command Reference
2,758 pages
autocadLT PDF Command-Ref Enu v2 PDF
No ratings yet
autocadLT PDF Command-Ref Enu v2 PDF
1,804 pages
AutoCAD LT 2013 Command Reference Guide
No ratings yet
AutoCAD LT 2013 Command Reference Guide
1,132 pages
S-Edit User Guide 1
No ratings yet
S-Edit User Guide 1
210 pages
AutoCAD For Mac Command Reference Guide
No ratings yet
AutoCAD For Mac Command Reference Guide
1,582 pages
Aca Ug
No ratings yet
Aca Ug
2,756 pages
Acdmac 2013 Command Reference Guide
No ratings yet
Acdmac 2013 Command Reference Guide
1,636 pages
Inside ARES
No ratings yet
Inside ARES
338 pages
Mechanical 4 Command Reference
100% (2)
Mechanical 4 Command Reference
431 pages
AutoCAD MEP Tutoriales v1
No ratings yet
AutoCAD MEP Tutoriales v1
221 pages
Acad Manual
No ratings yet
Acad Manual
268 pages
Reference Guide: Lighting Design Software
No ratings yet
Reference Guide: Lighting Design Software
370 pages
Autocad Command Reference Guide
No ratings yet
Autocad Command Reference Guide
1,322 pages
Gibbcam Common Reference
No ratings yet
Gibbcam Common Reference
128 pages
Basic Concepts R30
No ratings yet
Basic Concepts R30
39 pages
Autocad 2012 PDF Dxf-Reference Enu
No ratings yet
Autocad 2012 PDF Dxf-Reference Enu
270 pages
1701 Gibbs Cam-Level 0 Turning
No ratings yet
1701 Gibbs Cam-Level 0 Turning
183 pages
Acad Arch 2012
No ratings yet
Acad Arch 2012
44 pages
Autodesk Fusion
No ratings yet
Autodesk Fusion
251 pages
Help PDF
No ratings yet
Help PDF
276 pages
Autocad DXF Codes
No ratings yet
Autocad DXF Codes
270 pages
Getting Started
No ratings yet
Getting Started
251 pages
Autodesk Inventor Fusion Tutorial
No ratings yet
Autodesk Inventor Fusion Tutorial
251 pages
Wireedm Manual
No ratings yet
Wireedm Manual
110 pages
Acadlt08 Tipsntricks Final Es
No ratings yet
Acadlt08 Tipsntricks Final Es
20 pages
Mechanical Desktop6 IG
No ratings yet
Mechanical Desktop6 IG
88 pages